The Camera Admin tab, available from the Admin page of the Fleet Tracking Portal, offers a centralized location for performing basic administrative tasks associated with registered Driveri and Drive360/AIR II cameras.
Note: Your account must have active Driveri or Drive360/AIR II cameras, and users must have Camera Admin permissions.
Viewing Camera Devices
Camera devices are listed in a searchable, sortable table showing the vehicle label, the camera device equipped to it, and the device's serial number.
You can use the Search field to quickly locate a specific device.
You can use the Sort Ascending icon and Sort Descending icon available in each column to adjust the display of your camera devices.
Click the corresponding vehicle label under the Vehicle column.
The Camera details panel appears on the right-hand side of the page, offering the following information:
Vehicle label, device name, and device serial number
Overview:
Date/Time of last communication
Camera Settings
Media: All manually requested and auto-generated events associated with the vehicle
Note: Clips are available for 90 days. After 90 days, clips expire and are unavailable. We recommend downloading clips to local storage if you foresee a need for them after an extended period of time.
Click Edit to edit basic camera settings, if applicable.
Click View all media to view all media associated with the vehicle, if applicable.
Downloading a .CSV
You can download a .csv file containing the information available in the Camera Admin tab. The .csv file contains Vehicle, Device, and Serial number columns.
Managing Camera Settings
You can edit record settings (audio, road, driver), blur faces (none, driver, passenger, all) and enable or disable in-cab alerts from the Camera Admin tab.
Note: Any changes made to configurations are processed when the camera is on. If the camera is not on, the configuration change is held until the camera is on.
How to Edit Camera Settings
From the Camera Admin tab, click the Edit icon under the Actions column in the row of the applicable vehicle.
The Edit panel appears.
Under Record, click the checkboxes to adjust your recording settings.
Note: The camera must have a driver-facing camera to select the Driver option.
Use the toggle under In-cab alert to enable In-cab alerts (changes to blue) or disable In-cab alerts (changes to gray).
Click SaveChanges.
Camera Settings for AIR II with Fleet All-in-One Pro Plus
If you have the Fleet All-in-One (FAIO) Pro Plus plan, you can manage additional event settings beyond Record Type and In-Cab Alerts. For Road-Facing Camera Settings and Driver-Facing Camera Settings, you can either use the group toggle to turn recording on or off for all events under each camera type, or use the individual toggles to enable or disable recording for specific events. Please see the AIR II FAQ for event definitions and audio warnings.
Important! Setting changes are processed upon successful transmission to the device when it is in Wake mode. Therefore, if you make a change to settings, please allow for a couple of hours for the update to be enabled and reflected in your account.
Note: If you are interested in AI-based event recordings, please contact your Account Manager for additional information.
G-force Movement Events: All G-force-related events, such as acceleration, deceleration, or hard turns
Road Facing Camera Settings: - Forward Collision Warning (This feature is disabled by default; users with permissions can enable this from the Edit drawer of the Camera Admin tab.) - Close Following - Lane Departure (This feature is disabled by default; users with permissions can enable this from the Edit drawer of the Camera Admin tab.) - Stop Sign - Pedestrian Collision Warning (This feature is disabled by default; users with permissions can enable this from the Edit drawer of the Camera Admin tab.)
Driver Facing Camera Settings: - Drowsiness/Fatigue - Cell Phone Use - Distracted Driving - Seatbelt
Viewing Camera Media
You can view all camera media (manually requested and auto-generated) for a vehicle equipped with a camera.
How to View Camera Media for a Vehicle
From the Camera Admin tab, click the Overflow icon in the row of the applicable vehicle.
The View all media option appears.
Click View all media.
Note: You can also access View all media from the Camera Details panel.
A separate browser tab opens, navigating you to the Camera Media page. The vehicle is automatically selected, and the timeframe displayed defaults to Today. Available clips are shown under the Results list.
Use the Camera Media page filtering options to adjust as necessary.
(Skip this step if you have FAIO Pro Plus). Click Request clip to request a clip from the camera, or click the entry to view the clip if it was requested and transmitted from the camera previously.
Click the Play icon to view the playback.
[post_title] => About Camera Admin
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-camera-admin
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-04-02 08:32:09
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-04-02 15:32:09
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26617
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=31997
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26617
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-02-16 10:03:01
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-02-16 17:03:01
[post_content] => The Admin page is a centralized hub for administrative tasks and allows you to view and manage your account users, vehicle groups, drivers/driver groups, landmark groups, and cameras (if applicable) quickly and easily.
To view this page, you must have Full User Admin permissions.
From the Admin page, you can access the following tabs:
Admin: Users - The Users page allows you to add users, manage existing users, and shows a list of your account users.
Admin: Vehicle Groups - The Vehicle Groups tab allows you to add a new vehicle group, manage existing vehicle groups, and shows a list of existing vehicle groups
Admin: Drivers/Driver Groups - With the Drivers tab, view your existing drivers at a glance, add a new driver, manage existing drivers, and download a .csv list of drivers. With the Drivers Group tab, see your existing driver groups, add a new driver group, and manage existing driver groups.
Admin: DriverIDs - This tab is for customers with DriverID devices (e.g., keyfobs, RFID, etc.). With the DriverID tab, view assigned and unassigned DriverIDs with the ability to assign and unassign drivers.
Admin: Landmark - The Landmark tab gives you a centralized table view of all your landmarks, where you can search, sort, filter, create, edit, delete, and export landmarks.
Admin: Landmark Groups - The Landmark Groups tab allows you to add a landmark group, manage existing landmark groups, and shows a list of your account’s existing landmark groups.
Admin: Cameras - The Camera Admin tab, available from the Admin page of the Fleet Tracking Portal, offers a centralized location for performing basic administrative tasks associated with registered Driveri and Drive360[whitelabel tier="gpsi,full"]/AIR II [/whitelabel] cameras.
Advanced Administrative settings for Enterprise customers and customers with Advanced Administration cannot be accessed from the Admin tabs listed above. To access these settings, users can select the “Use Legacy Product” link available at the top of each Admin tab (excluding Camera Admin). This link redirects to the corresponding Admin page in Classic.
[post_title] => About the Admin Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-admin-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-09-08 10:22:49
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-09-08 17:22:49
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26617
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 30806
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-05-29 10:10:21
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-05-29 17:10:21
[post_content] => The Drivers page allows you to add a new driver, manage existing drivers, and download a .csv list of drivers.
Viewing the Driver List
A list of existing drivers is displayed on the Drivers page showing the following driver information:
Reference ID (if applicable)
First Name
Last Name
Time Zone
Phone (if applicable)
Email (if applicable)
Message Preference (view the selected message preference for the driver - if applicable)
Assign Ct. (number of times the driver has been assigned to a vehicle)
Vehicle (current assigned vehicle - if applicable).
From this list, you can use the Actions column to assign the driver to a vehicle, edit the driver's information, add the driver to a driver group, remove the driver from a driver group, or delete the driver.
To download a copy of the driver list, please click the Download list button located toward the top-left corner of the Admin: Drivers tab.
Adding a Driver
How to add a driver:
From the Admin: Drivers tab, click + New driver.
The Create driver pop-up appears on the right-hand side of the browser.
Complete all applicable fields:
First Name (Required)
Last Name (Required)
Reference ID (Required)
Email (Required)
Phone (Add if you would like to contact the driver by SMS)
Country
Time zone
Alert Preference (check the box next to the preferred alert notification method: Email or SMS)
Driver Groups (use the drop-down to select applicable driver groups
Driveri Group (use the drop-down to select driveri group (if applicable)
Set toggle for Access Driveri mobile app (use the toggle to enable access to the Driveri mobile app for the driver, if applicable)
The Driveri product is an available safety camera add-on. If you are interested in learning more, please contact your Account Manager.
Click Save.
A notification confirming that the driver has been successfully added appears at the top right-hand side of the browser window.
Managing a Driver
How to edit a driver:
From the Admin: Drivers tab, locate the driver you would like to edit from the driver list and click the Edit icon from the Actions column.
The Edit pop-up appears on the right-hand side of the browser.
Make your edits and click Save.
If you are editing a driver and required fields appear incomplete in the Edit pop-up, you must complete any and all required fields before you can successfully click Save.
A notification confirming that your edits to the driver have been successfully saved appears at the top right-hand side of the browser window.
How to delete a driver:
From the Admin: Drivers tab, locate the driver you would like to edit from the driver list and click the Overflow Menu icon from the Actions column.
A pop-up menu with additional action options appears.
Click Delete.
The Delete Driver confirmation appears asking you to verify that you would like to delete the selected driver.
Click Yes, Delete to delete the driver or No, Cancel to exit without deleting the driver.
If you clicked Yes, Delete, a notification confirming that your have successfully delete the driver appears at the top right-hand side of the browser window.
How to add/remove a driver to/from vehicle assignment:
From the Admin: Drivers tab, locate the driver for which you would like to adjust driver assignment and click the Vehicle Assignment icon from the Actions column.
If the driver is not currently assigned to a vehicle, the pop-up shows the option: Assign to a vehicle. If the driver is currently assigned to a vehicle, the pop-up shows the options: 1) Remove driver from vehicle, 2) Reassign to a new vehicle.
Click on the option that describes what you would like to do.
Based on your selection:
If you selected Remove driver from vehicle, a pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to remove the driver from the currently assigned vehicle. Click Yes, Remove Driver to unassign the driver from the vehicle or No, Cancel to exit without performing any action.
If you selected Reassign to a new vehicle, a pop-up appears defining the currently assigned vehicle. Use the drop-down to search/select the new vehicle to assign to the driver then click Reassign.
If you selected Assign to a vehicle, a pop-up appears with a drop-down to select the vehicle to which you would like to assign the driver, then click Assign.
From the Admin: Drivers tab, locate the driver for which you would like to adjust membership to a driver group and click the Overflow Menu icon from the Actions column.
A pop-up appears with additional options.
To add the driver to a driver group, click Add to a driver group.
The Driver Groups pop-up appears on the right-hand side of the browser window.
Use the Search field to locate the driver group or you may also use the list view, then click the checkbox next to the desired driver group(s).
Click Save.
A notification confirming that you successfully added the driver to a driver group appears at the top right-hand side of the browser window.
To remove the driver from a driver group, click Remove from a driver group.
The Driver Groups pop-up appears on the right-hand side of the browser window.
Use the Search field to locate the driver group or you may also use the list view, then click the checkbox next to the driver group(s) to uncheck the box(es).
Click Save.
A notification confirming that you successfully removed the driver from a driver group appears at the top right-hand side of the browser window.
[post_title] => Adding & Managing Drivers
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-managing-drivers
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-07-11 05:18:19
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-07-11 12:18:19
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26617
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=30806
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26610
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-02-16 09:54:34
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-02-16 16:54:34
[post_content] =>
Configurable devices use recommended (default) thresholds to alert drivers when certain driving behaviors are detected. These alerts are based on the selected Vehicle Class and include:
Rapid acceleration
Harsh braking
Hard right and left turns
Idling
Speeding
Vehicle Class Options
Note: Vehicle Class only applies to devices that track movement (e.g., XT-25, XT45, etc.). Any vehicles equipped with devices that do not track movement cannot have a Vehicle Class assigned (e.g., ST-600, solar/asset trackers, etc.).
Medium-Duty (10,000–26,000 lbs): Box trucks, school buses, tow trucks
Heavy-Duty (26,000+ lbs): Semi-trucks, garbage trucks, dump trucks, and heavy equipment
Default Vehicle Class Assignment
During the vehicle registration process (when you add a vehicle), vehicles are automatically assigned to the Light-Duty Vehicle Class unless you select a different option.
Each Vehicle Class includes its own set of default configuration settings, designed to align alert thresholds with the vehicle’s size and operating characteristics for optimized settings. Configuration settings also vary slightly between GPS tracking device manufacturers.
Device Manufacturer Configuration Settings
CalAmp
Class
Configuration
Light-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.43 Hard Braking (g): -0.61 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.47
Medium-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.36 Hard Braking (g): -0.54 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.4
Heavy-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.29 Hard Braking (g): -0.47 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.32
Xirgo
Class
Configuration
Light-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.43 Hard Braking (g): -0.61 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.47
Medium-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.36 Hard Braking (g): -0.54 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.4
Heavy-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.29 Hard Braking (g): -.0.47 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.32
Geotab
Class
Configuration
Light-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.43 Hard Braking (g): -0.61 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.47
Medium-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.36 Hard Braking (g): -0.54 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.4
Heavy-Duty
Rapid Acceleration (g): 0.29 Hard Braking (g): -.0.47 Hard Left/Right (g): 0.32
Waylens
Class
Configuration
Light-Duty
Harsh Accel Threshold: 275 Harsh Brake Threshold: -315 Harsh Turn Threshold: 340 Severe Accel Threshold: 305 Severe Brake Threshold: -345 Severe Turn Threshold: 375
Medium-Duty
Harsh Accel Threshold: 245 Harsh Brake Threshold: -290 Harsh Turn Threshold: 300 Severe Accel Threshold: 275 Severe Brake Threshold: -320 Severe Turn Threshold: 335
Heavy-Duty
Harsh Accel Threshold: 210 Harsh Brake Threshold: -260 Harsh Turn Threshold: 255 Severe Accel Threshold: 240 Severe Brake Threshold: -290 Severe Turn Threshold: 290
Netradyne
Class
Class Category
Light-Duty
Class 1 (see below)
Medium-Duty
Class 4 (see below)
Heavy-Duty
Class 7 (see below)
Adjusting Device Configuration Thresholds
You can adjust device configuration thresholds by selecting a different Vehicle Class when editing a vehicle.
Note: Because these are device-level hardware settings, changing device configuration requires the device to restart; therefore, adjust these settings infrequently and during off hours as much as possible.
Vehicles can be edited in either of the following locations:
Map Page: Select the Edit button from the vehicle’s card
Admin: Vehicles: Select the Edit button in the Actions column for the vehicle
Updating the Vehicle Class applies the corresponding default thresholds for that class.
Setting Custom Configuration
You may create a new configuration using the Custom Configuration option for CalAmp devices only. However, we recommend only customizing if you have unique device requirements. A custom configuration can be created from the Map Page or the Admin: Vehicle tab.
Note: Custom configurations cannot be created when adding a vehicle to your account.
Map Page Custom Configuration
Navigate to the Map Page by clicking the Map icon from the Navigation Bar.
Locate the applicable vehicle using the Search field, filtering, or by looking through the Vehicle List, then click on the vehicle.
The Vehicle Card appears, showing vehicle details.
Click Edit.
The Edit vehicle panel displays.
Scroll to the Vehicle Information section, then under Vehicle Class, use the drop-down and click Custom configuration.
Click Continue to custom configuration.
Click + Create new configuration to create a saved configuration that can be reused for other devices. Alternatively, select "Customize this device" in the Configuration section to apply a configuration specific to the selected vehicle’s device.
Note: Minimum violation type thresholds are as follows: Rapid Acceleration: .20g Hard Braking: .20g Hard Left/Right: .30g Idling: 30 seconds Speeding: 5mph
Create New Configuration: From the Add new configuration pop-up, enter a name for the Configuration, then adjust the values under the Threshold columns for applicable violation types. Click Add when finished.
Customize This Device: From the table in the Configure Device panel, adjust the values under the Threshold columns for applicable violation types, then click Select. The Edit Vehicle panel appears, then click Save changes to save the changes to the configuration settings.
A pop-up confirming the configuration was added/saved successfully appears in the top-right corner of the screen.
Admin: Vehicles Tab Custom Configuration
Note: A user must have Vehicle Admin permission enabled to access this tab.
Navigate to the Admin: Vehicles tab by hovering over the Admin icon from the Navigation Bar and clicking Vehicles from the expanded menu.
Locate the applicable vehicle using the Search bar, filtering options, or by looking through the table rows.
Click the Edit button in the Actions column of the applicable row corresponding to the vehicle.
Scroll down to the Vehicle Class section, and click Continue to custom configuration.
The Configure device panel displays.
Click + Create new configuration to create a saved configuration that can be reused for other devices. Alternatively, select "Customize this device" in the Configuration section to apply a configuration specific to the selected vehicle’s device.
Note: Minimum violation type thresholds are as follows: Rapid Acceleration: .20g Hard Braking: .20g Hard Left/Right: .30g Idling: 30 seconds Speeding: 5mph
Create New Configuration: From the Add new configuration pop-up, enter a name for the Configuration, then adjust the values under the Threshold columns for applicable violation types. Click Add when finished.
Customize This Device: From the table in the Configure Device panel, adjust the values under the Threshold columns for applicable violation types, then click Select.
The Edit Vehicle panel appears, then click Save changes to save the changes to the configuration settings.
A pop-up confirming the configuration was added/saved successfully appears in the top-right corner of the screen.
Accessing the Device Threshold Configuration Page
To set new default thresholds for your organization, users with Vehicle Admin permissions can use the Device Threshold Configuration page. This page is available only to Advanced Administration/Enterprise customers with configurable devices (CalAmp only) and can be found in Advanced Administration (Classic Portal).
Note: Because these are device-level hardware settings, changing device configuration requires the device to restart; therefore, adjust these settings infrequently and during off-hours as much as possible.
From the Device Threshold Configuration page, you can:
Edit or delete existing configuration thresholds
Apply preferred default thresholds to multiple applicable devices
Set custom configuration settings for individual devices
View, update, or manage device configurations for one or more vehicles
Create new configuration profiles for your account
To Access the Device Threshold Configuration Page
Click the Advanced Administration icon from the Navigation Bar.
The Advanced Administration portal displays.
Click Account, then click Manage Vehicles under Admin in the drop-down. Under Additional Options, click Configure device thresholds.
The Device Threshold Configuration page appears.
The Configurations on the right may not show what thresholds your devices were or are currently programmed with.
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Configurations
To create a new configuration:
From the Configurations area, click New+.
The Create a new PNP Configuration window appears.
Thresholds displayed in the window automatically are the minimum values that can be entered.
Enter a name for the new configuration and the preferred threshold values.
Idling values are limited to 30-second increments.
Click the Save button.
The new configuration is displayed in the Configurations area.
To Edit a Device Threshold Configuration:
From the Configurations area, use the drop-down window to select the device threshold you would like to edit.
Click the Edit button.
The selected configuration detail window appears.
Enter one or more new preferred thresholds.
Click the Save button.
The new threshold values are displayed in the Configurations area.
To Delete a Device Threshold Configuration:
From the Configurations area, use the drop-down window to select the device threshold you would like to delete.
Click the Delete button.
The Delete Configuration prompt appears.
Click the Delete Configuration button.
The configuration is removed from your list of device configurations.
Assigning, Changing, and Viewing Configurations on Vehicles
To Assign/Change a Configuration to a Vehicle:
Locate the vehicle in the Configurable Devices area in the list or using the Search bar.
Click the Assign a Configuration icon ().
The Assign Configuration window appears. You can select a preset configuration with the Select a Configuration button or create a one-time configuration to send to this device with the Custom Configuration button.
If selecting a configuration to assign, use the drop-down window to select the preferred configuration. If creating a one-time configuration to send, enter the preferred threshold values.
Click the Save button.
The device updates with the newly assigned configuration as of vehicle ignition on.
To Assign/Change a Configuration to Multiple Vehicles
From the Configurable Devices area, click the Configure Multiple Devices checkbox ().
Use the drop-down window to select a configuration to assign to multiple vehicles.
Check the boxes for individual vehicles or click the Check All button () to automatically check the box for all vehicles.
Click the Save Assignments button.
To View Configurations on a Device:
Click the Download Settings from Device icon ().
The download contains the current device threshold settings.
Click on the Device Configuration next to the vehicle's serial number.
The vehicle row expands displaying the assigned configuration threshold and the current device threshold settings downloaded from the device.
Buzzer Feature
The GPSI-5000s with vPOD for diagnostics device includes an optional buzzer feature.
The GPSI-5000 (with vPOD for diagnostics) buzzer feature is not built in; however, it can be included as an accessory. This feature must be requested during installation if desired.
The Driving Violations Summary provides an overview of in-cab alert notifications when a vehicle/vehicle group violates acceptable thresholds for the selected vehicle/vehicle group and the Driving Violations Detail contains the time the alert occurred, cause of the alert, and more.
To view these reports, please use the instructions here: Running Reports.
[post_title] => Configuring Device Thresholds
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => configuring-device-thresholds
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-07-13 08:19:54
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-07-13 15:19:54
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26610
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26522
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-02-07 10:15:20
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-02-07 17:15:20
[post_content] => [whitelabel tier="gpsi"]You can transfer or swap a device from the Vehicle Card Header on the Portal Map page. This is helpful in case you need to retire a vehicle and replace it with another one or no longer need the vehicle in the fleet.
You may transfer a device to a different vehicle. This may be helpful if you are retiring the vehicle from the fleet or if you are rotating vehicles based on seasonal/situational use.
Transferring a device to another vehicle requires you to register the device to another vehicle immediately after making the selection to transfer.
How to transfer a device:
From the Vehicle Card, click the ellipsis icon ().
The Vehicle Card Header menu appears.
Click Transfer Device.
The Transfer Device page appears.
As you are required to register the device, enter the following information:
Required: Vehicle Label
Required: VIN
Year
Make
Model
Color
Icon (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
Required: Country (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
License State (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
License Plate
Required: Odometer
Runtime
Fuel Type
Fuel Capacity
Engine Size (L)
Idle GPH
Click Transfer.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to transfer the device.
Click Yes, Transfer.
If successful, a pop-up appears confirming the device has been successfully transferred.
Swapping a Device
Swap allows users to quickly swap a new device serial number into an existing vehicle/asset registration. This feature is valuable for instances where devices are upgraded or replaced through RA.
By selecting Swap, the user will have the option to copy the full vehicle profile (vehicle info, associated groups and hierarchy, attributes, inputs, current driver assignment, and scheduled alerts and reports).
How to Swap a Device:
From the Vehicle Card, click the ellipsis icon ().
The Vehicle Card Header menu appears.
Click Swap Device.
The Swap Device page appears.
Select a device serial number using the drop-down or you can begin typing the serial number to locate the device serial number.
Check the box next to Copy Vehicle Profile if you would like to copy the full vehicle profile.
Click Swap.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to swap the device.
Click Yes, Swap.
If successful, a pop-up appears confirming the device has been successfully swapped.
Swapping a device requires action from the Support team. The Swap Form in the portal automatically notifies Support of the request. Support will notify you when your swap request is complete. Please note that devices remain on the account until the end of the month. Request by the 26th of each month to avoid an additional month of billing.
[/whitelabel]
[whitelabel tier="limited,full"]You can transfer or swap a device from the Vehicle Card Header on the Portal Map page. This is helpful in case you need to retire a vehicle and replace it with another one.
To perform a device transfer, swap, or deactivation, the user must have Vehicle Admin permission.
Transferring a Device
You may transfer a device to a different vehicle. This may be helpful if you are retiring the vehicle from the fleet or if you are rotating vehicles based on seasonal/situational use.
Transferring a device to another vehicle requires you to register the device to another vehicle immediately after making the selection to transfer.
How to transfer a device:
Not all features displayed in the gif above are available for all customers. If you have a question, please reach out to Support and/or your Account Manager.
From the Vehicle Card, click the ellipsis icon ().
The Vehicle Card Header menu appears.
Click Transfer Device.
The Transfer Device page appears.
As you are required to register the device, enter the following information:
Required: Vehicle Label
Required: VIN
Year
Make
Model
Color
Icon (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
Required: Country (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
License State (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
License Plate
Required: Odometer
Runtime
Fuel Type
Fuel Capacity
Engine Size (L)
Idle GPH
Click Transfer.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to transfer the device.
Click Yes, Transfer.
If successful, a pop-up appears confirming the device has been successfully transferred.
Swapping a Device
Swap allows users to quickly swap a new device serial number into an existing vehicle/asset registration. This feature is valuable for instances where devices are upgraded or replaced through RA.
By selecting Swap, the user will have the option to copy the full vehicle profile (vehicle info, associated groups and hierarchy, attributes, inputs, current driver assignment, and scheduled alerts and reports).
How to Swap a Device:
Not all features displayed in the gif above are available for all customers. If you have a question, please reach out to Support and/or your Account Manager.
From the Vehicle Card, click the ellipsis icon ().
The Vehicle Card Header menu appears.
Click Swap Device.
The Swap Device page appears.
Select a device serial number using the drop-down or you can begin typing the serial number to locate the device serial number.
Check the box next to Copy Vehicle Profile if you would like to copy the full vehicle profile.
Click Swap.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to swap the device.
Click Yes, Swap.
If successful, a pop-up appears confirming the device has been successfully swapped.
Swapping a device requires action from the Support team. The Swap Form in the portal automatically notifies Support of the request. Support will notify you when your swap request is complete. Please note that devices remain on the account until the end of the month. Request by the 26th of each month to avoid an additional month of billing.
The Public Map Links feature allows you to create a URL link to view vehicle locations on a map for a specific vehicle group. This enables external visibility of limited vehicle location data, allowing your customers to view real-time positions without requiring a login to the portal.
Additionally, you can include a Landmark Group to be shared along with the vehicle group's locations.
Customers can interact with the Public Map by viewing vehicle lists, centering on selected vehicles, adjusting map style and trail overlays, and using standard map controls such as zoom, pan, fullscreen, and Street View.
A Vehicle Status legend is available to provide at-a-glance insight into each vehicle's status on the map.
Note: These external maps are publicly facing. They do not require being an authenticated user to see vehicle locations. Customers should be aware that any vehicle locations shared with this tool will be visible to anyone, and we will not be held responsible for any issues that may arise from sharing potentially sensitive information.
Note: The following items are required to access and create Public Map Links: - At least one vehicle group configured - Admin permissions
Admin: Vehicle Groups Tab
From the Admin: Vehicle Groups tab, locate the row of the applicable vehicle group in the table. Note: You can use the ascending/descending arrows in the Group header to sort your vehicle groups by ascending or descending alphabetical order; however, you may need to tab through pages located at the bottom-right of the screen to locate a vehicle group.
Under the Shared Maps column, click the toggle corresponding to the vehicle group's row.
A pop-up message appears with the following privacy warning:
"You're about to enter or share personal information.
Please ensure that any data you provide — whether about yourself, an employee, or one of your customers — is shared in compliance with all applicable privacy laws and company policies.
Do not share sensitive personal data unless it is necessary and you have appropriate consent. By proceeding, you acknowledge that you understand and accept responsibility for the information you provide."
To continue, click I Understand & Proceed. To exit, click Cancel.
A pop-up appears confirming the link for the shared map has been created successfully, and the link has been copied to your clipboard. The toggle color changes from grey to blue when enabled.
If you would like to add a landmark group to the shared map, click the Edit icon after you have set the toggle to Shared. See steps under Managing a Public Map Link - Admin: Vehicle Groups tab.
Vehicle Group Card - Map Page
From the Map Page, locate and select the vehicle group by clicking on a vehicle group from the map, or use the Search field.
The Vehicle Group Card appears.
Click Share.
The Enable Sharing pop-up appears.
Under "Sharing," click the toggle to "ON."
A pop-up message appears with the following privacy warning:
"You're about to enter or share personal information.
Please ensure that any data you provide — whether about yourself, an employee, or one of your customers — is shared in compliance with all applicable privacy laws and company policies.
Do not share sensitive personal data unless it is necessary and you have appropriate consent. By proceeding, you acknowledge that you understand and accept responsibility for the information you provide."
To continue, click I Understand & Proceed. To exit, click Cancel.
If you have selected to continue, the Enable Sharing pop-up appears again—the "Sharing" toggle color changes from grey to blue.
Optional: Use the drop-down to add a landmark group for the shared map.
Click Enable Sharing.
A pop-up appears confirming the link for the shared map has been created successfully, and the link has been copied to your clipboard.
Managing a Public Map Link
You can copy, edit, or preview the link in a new browser tab after creating a shared link through the Admin: Vehicle Groups tab or by selecting the applicable vehicle group from the Map Page.
Admin: Vehicle Groups Tab
From the Admin: Vehicle Groups tab, locate the row of the applicable vehicle group in the table. Note: You can use the ascending/descending arrows in the Group header to sort your vehicle groups by ascending or descending alphabetical order; however, you may need to tab through pages located at the bottom-right of the screen to locate a vehicle group.
Under the Shared Maps column, corresponding to the vehicle group's row, click the Copy to Clipboard icon to copy the URL to your clipboard or click the Edit icon to edit the shared link (options: toggle on/off sharing or add/change/remove the landmark group for the shared link).
If you edited the shared link, click Save Changes to save your changes. A success message appears confirming your changes were saved successfully.
Vehicle Group Card - Map Page
From the Map Page, locate and select the vehicle group by clicking on a vehicle group from the map, or use the Search field.
The Vehicle Group Card appears.
Click Sharing.
A drop-down menu appears with the following options:
Copy shareable link: Copy the link to your clipboard.
Edit: Adjust the Sharing toggle to OFF or add/change/remove (select "(none)") a landmark group for the shared link.
Preview link in new window: View the public map available through the shared link in a separate browser tab.
Click one or more of the options above to manage your shared link.
Disabling a Public Map Link
You can disable a shared link at any time through the Admin: Vehicle Groups tab or by selecting the applicable vehicle group from the Map Page.
Admin: Vehicle Groups Tab
From the Admin: Vehicle Groups tab, locate the row of the applicable vehicle group in the table. Note: You can use the ascending/descending arrows in the Group header to sort your vehicle groups by ascending or descending alphabetical order; however, you may need to tab through pages located at the bottom-right of the screen to locate a vehicle group.
Under the Shared Maps column, corresponding to the vehicle group's row, click the toggle to off.
The toggle turns gray and slides to the left. A success message confirms the share link was successfully disabled.
Vehicle Group Card - Map Page
From the Map Page, locate and select the vehicle group by clicking on a vehicle group from the map, or use the Search field.
The Vehicle Group Card appears.
Click Sharing.
A drop-down menu appears.
Click Disable sharing.
A pop-up appears stating: "Disable sharing? This Vehicle Group will not longer be shared with the public. You can still make edits and share this Vehicle Group again."
Click Disable. Note: If you would like to exit the pop-up without disabling the shared link, click the X button at the top-right of the pop-up.
A success message appears confirming the shared link was successfully disabled.
Engaging with the Public Map
The following map interactions are available with Public Maps:
View a list of vehicles included in the vehicle group
Click on a vehicle from the list to center the map over that vehicle.
Hover over the vehicle icon to see high-level information: vehicle label, location, and vehicle status.
The DriverIDs tab in the Admin Page is available to customers with DriverID key fobs, iButton, Bluetooth fobs, and/or RFIDs and provides an overview of both assigned and unassigned DriverIDs. It displays associated drivers by reference numbers (RefID) and tracks how many times a DriverID has been used within the week to assign a driver to a vehicle. Additionally, this tab allows you to assign or unassign DriverIDs as needed.
Accessing the Admin: DriverID Tab
Click Admin from the left-hand navigation bar of the Fleet Tracking Portal.
Then click DriverIDs. The DriverIDs tab displays.
Viewing & Managing DriverIDs
Assigned Tab
The DriverIDs tab presents data for assigned drivers in a table format. This table includes the DriverID/Driver PIN, the driver reference number (RefID), and the number of times the DriverID was used throughout the week.
You can sort each column (except the Actions column) in ascending or descending order by clicking on the Ascending arrow or the Descending arrow , respectively. You may also search the data using the Search field .
From the Assigned tab, you can assign or unassign a DriverID.
Assigning a DriverID
https://vimeo.com/1078697010?share=copy
From the Assigned tab of Admin: DriverIDs, click + Assign DriverID (left side of the Search field).
The Assign DriverID pop-up appears.
Use the drop-down under Driver to select a driver. Note: If you cannot find a driver or the driver has not yet been created in the system, you can create a new driver by clicking + Create Driverand following the prompts.
Use the drop-down under DriverID to select an ID.
Click Assign.
The assigned DriverID appears in the table on the Assigned tab.
Unassigning a DriverID
https://vimeo.com/1078698568?share=copy
From the Assigned tab of Admin: DriverIDs, locate the DriverID you would like to unassign by scrolling through the table or using the Search field.
From the Actions column, click Unassign in the corresponding row of the DriverID you would like to unassign.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to unassign the driver named in the pop-up.
Click Yes to unassign or click No to exit without making any changes.
The unassigned DriverID is removed from the Assigned tab table and appears in the Unassigned tab table.
Unassigned Tab
You can view unassigned DriverID devices that are unassociated with a driver, but have been used to log in to one or more vehicles. This tab presents data in table format, providing the DriverID, vehicle, logins (number of times the ID device was used to log in to a vehicle while unassigned), last login, and the current driver (who is currently assigned to the vehicle that the unassigned fob was most recently used on).
The Current Driver column serves as a reference to help identify who is currently or was most recently assigned to a vehicle. This can be useful if a fob isn’t working, allowing the admin to reassign it to the correct driver or understand who last used it before it became unassigned.
You can sort each column (except the Actions column) in ascending or descending order by clicking on the Ascending arrow or the Descending arrow , respectively. You may also search the data using the Search field .
From the Unassigned Tab, you can assign a DriverID to a driver.
Assigning a DriverID
From the Unassigned Tab of Admin: DriverIDs, locate the DriverID you would like to unassign by scrolling through the table or using the Search field.
From the Actions column, click Assign DriverID. The Assign Driver to DriverID pop-up appears.
Use the drop-down under Driver to select the driver you would like to assign to the DriverID device.
Click Assign.
The DriverID is assigned to the selected driver.
[post_title] => Using the Admin: DriverIDs Tab
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-admin-driverid-tab
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-05-06 09:12:06
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-05-06 16:12:06
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26617
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=32318
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 32313
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2025-04-01 12:58:05
[post_date_gmt] => 2025-04-01 19:58:05
[post_content] => The Landmark Groups page allows you to add a landmark group, manage existing landmark groups, and shows a list of your account's existing landmark groups providing the following information in sortable (ascending/descending) columns:
Select Landmarks (Use the search field or locate the vehicle(s) in the list and check the corresponding checkbox).
Fields denoted with an asterisk (*) are required.
Click Save.
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming the landmark group has been created.
To edit a landmark group:
From the Landmark Groups page, under the "Actions" column, click on the Edit icon ().
The Landmark Group Card appears.
Make your edits to the Group Name and/or selected landmarks.
Click Save.
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming edits to the landmark group have been saved.
Deleting a Landmark Group
You can delete vehicle groups individually from the Landmark Groups page.
To delete a landmark group:
From the Vehicle Groups page, under the "Actions" column, click on the Delete icon ().
The Delete Landmark Group pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the selected landmark group.
Click Yes, Delete to delete the landmark group or No, Cancel to exit without making any changes.
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming the landmark group has been deleted.
The Landmark Admin tab gives you a centralized view of all your landmarks in one easy-to-use table. From here, you can search, sort, and filter your landmark list, select any landmark to view its details, and create or edit landmarks directly — including their name, address, area, color, and group. You can also export the table contents via a .csv file.
This article walks you through how to navigate the Landmark Admin tab and manage your landmarks with ease.
Viewing the Admin: Landmark Tab
Your landmarks are displayed in a configurable, sortable table format showing Landmark Name, Group, Color, Shape, and Address columns. You can configure your view by adding or removing table columns or adjusting the number of landmarks displayed per page.
The Landmark Name, Shape, and Address columns can be sorted (ascending or descending alphabetically).
Configuring the Table
You can edit the table to see the data most important to you using Edit Table Columns. Click the Overflow button to access the Edit Table Columns panel.
The following columns are available:
Landmark Name* (cannot be removed)
Group*
Color*
Shape*
Address*
Lat/Lon
*Shown by default
Check the box next to the columns you would like to view and click Save.
Adjusting the Number of Landmarks per Page
You can adjust how many landmarks are shown per page (25, 50, 100, 200) using the drop-down at the bottom right.
Searching the Table
You can easily search for a Landmark in the table using the Search field. Start typing in the field, and the system will automatically begin narrowing the table data to fit your entered search.
Filtering the Table
Filters can be used to display the Landmark data you need to see using the Filter drop-down. Available filters are limited to Group.
To apply a filter(s), simply click the down arrow to expand the filter drop-down and check the box next to the applicable filter(s). Checked filters will be automatically applied to the table.
To remove a filter(s), you can use the filter drop-down to uncheck the box next to the applicable filter(s), or click the X to the right of the filter drop-down to clear all applied filters.
Note:You can click the X next to an applied Group filter.
Downloading a .CSV
You can download a .csv file of the table’s current content/display by clicking the Download button.
Managing Landmarks
With a centralized view of your landmarks, you can easily manage your landmarks from the Admin: Landmark tab. Any changes made to landmarks from this tab are reflected on the Map page and in Advanced Administration.
From the Admin: Landmark tab, click + Create new landmark.
The Create landmark panel appears on the right-hand side of the screen.
You can use the Search field to find a location, which will auto-populate the fields (except for Landmark Name), enter Lat/Long coordinates, or complete the address fields (Street Address, City, State, County, Zip) manually.
Note: If you enter Lat/Long coordinates, you can click View suggested address to populate the address fields.
Enter the Landmark radius and select the measurement type (Feet, Meters) using the drop-down.
Note: Default radius is 750 feet.
The Area field will populate automatically after your entry if you select Circle as your landmark shape.
Select Polygon or Circle as your Shape.
Note: If you select Polygon, you start drawing by double-clicking on the map, then adjust the shape with the sizing handles. Polygon landmarks can have up to 256 vertices and are often used when you need more exact inclusion/exclusion boundaries, such as alerts for vehicles entering or exiting a location. There is no default radius. The Area field will populate automatically after you have createed your shape.
Use the drop-down for the Color field to select your landmark color. You can enter a hex code for a specific color if you don't see your preferred color in the available options.
(Optional) Click Additional details to display the Groups field and select applicable groups for the landmark.
Click + Create landmark.
If successful, a pop-up window appears at the top-right corner of the screen confirming the landmark has been created.
From the Admin: Landmark tab, locate the landmark you would like to edit using the Search field or manually locating it from the table.
Click the Edit icon under the Actions column, or you can click the Landmark Name, then click Edit.
The Edit landmark panel appears on the right-hand side of the screen.
Make your edits, then click Save changes.
If successful, a pop-up window appears at the top-right corner of the screen confirming the changes have been saved.
Deleting a Landmark
https://vimeo.com/1222757026
From the Admin: Landmark tab, locate the landmark you would like to delete using the Search field or manually locating it from the table.
Click the Delete icon under the Actions column, or you can click the Landmark Name, click the Overflow (three vertical dots) icon, then click Delete landmark from the menu.
The Delete Landmark pop-up appears.
Click Yes, Delete to delete the landmark or click No, Cancel to exit without deleting the landmark.
If successful, a pop-up window appears at the top-right corner of the screen confirming the landmark has been deleted.
Using the Landmark Details Panel
After clicking on a landmark name from the table, the Landmark Details panel appears on the right-hand side of the screen.
This panel offers the same actions on the Admin: Landmark tab as it does when accessed from the Map page. You can view details or select to
Edit: Opens the Edit landmark panel so you can make applicable edits.
Send a dispatch: Send a dispatch to the landmark to selected receipient(s). Option to add additional locations.
View history: Opens the History tab of the Map page and prompts you to select a time range for which you'd like to view asset/vehicle activity within the landmark for the selected time.
Copy address: Copies the address information to your clipboard. Only available if address information is attached to the landmark.
Copy lat/long: Copies the latitude/longitude information to your clipboard.
Open in Google Maps: Opens a separate browser tab with the landmark location open in Google Maps.
Delete the landmark: Prompts you to confirm you'd like to delete the landmark as described in the Deleting a Landmark section above.
[post_title] => Using the Admin: Landmark Tab
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-admin-landmark-tab
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-09-08 10:08:36
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-09-08 17:08:36
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=34482
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 32311
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2025-04-01 12:55:32
[post_date_gmt] => 2025-04-01 19:55:32
[post_content] => The Users page allows you to add users, manage existing users, and shows a list of your account users providing the following information in sortable (ascending/descending) columns:
Username
First name
Last name
Time zone
Email
Vehicle Groups
To sort the columns by ascending or descending order, click on the up (ascending) or down (descending) arrows in the column header.
Adding a New User
From the Users page, you can add a new user.
To add a new user:
From the Users page, click + New user.
The New User card appears.
Enter the following information:
Username*
Email*
First Name*
Last Name*
Phone
Address
City
State (Use the drop-down to select)
Zip
Country (Use the drop-down to select)
Timezone
Use the check boxes to select Users & Vehicles permissions (if applicable): Vehicle Admin (Edit vehicle properties and assign vehicle groups) or User (Full permission to edit all users on the account)
If you have the Driver Management Add-on enabled for your account, you can select Driver permissions for a user: None, View drivers, Assign and un-assign drivers to vehicles, Full driver admin permissions (View, assign, and un-assign drivers).
Vehicle Groups (Use the drop-down to select)
Fields denoted with an asterisk (*) are required.
Click Create.
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming the user has been created.
Adding a User to a Vehicle Group
For existing users, you can add the user to a vehicle group. Adding the user to a vehicle group allows the user to see the vehicle group on the Map page.
How to add a user to a vehicle group:
From the Users page, click the add icon (+) under the Actions column.
The "Add to a vehicle group" option appears.
Click Add to a vehicle group.
Select the vehicle group you would like to add to the user using the drop-down list or the search feature.
You can add more than one.
Click Save.
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming the vehicle group has been added to the user.
Editing a User
For existing users, you can edit the user.
How to edit a user:
From the Users page, click on the Edit icon () under the Actions column corresponding to the user you would like to edit.
The User Card appears.
Make your edits and then click Save.
You cannot edit Username. Additionally, if you have the Driver Management Add-on enabled for your account, you can adjust Driver permissions for a user: None, View drivers, Assign and un-assign drivers to vehicles, Full driver admin permissions (View, assign, and un-assign drivers).
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming the edits have been saved.
Deleting a User and Other Actions
For existing users, you can reset a user's password, resend a welcome email, and delete a user using the three dots icon () provided in the Actions column.
How to reset a user's password:
From the Users page, click on the Three Dot icon () under the Actions column.
Click Reset password.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to reset the user's password.
Click Yes, Send Reset Password Email to reset the user's password or No, Cancel to exit without resetting the password.
If you selected to reset the password, a pop-up will appear confirming the email to reset the password was sent successfully.
How to resend a welcome email:
From the Users page, click on the Three Dot icon () under the Actions column.
Click Send welcome email.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to send a welcome email to the user.
A temporary password will also be sent to the user.
Click Yes, Send Welcome Email to resend the welcome email or No, Cancel to exit without sending the email.
If you selected to resend the welcome email, a pop-up will appear confirming the email was sent successfully.
How to delete a user:
From the Users page, click on the Three Dot icon () under the Actions column.
Click Delete user.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the user.
Click Yes, Delete to delete the user or No, Cancel to exit without deleting the user.
If you selected to delete the user, a pop-up will appear confirming the user was deleted successfully.
[post_title] => Using the Admin: Users Tab
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-admin-users-tab
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-04-01 12:56:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-04-01 19:56:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26617
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=32311
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[10] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 32312
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2025-04-01 12:59:24
[post_date_gmt] => 2025-04-01 19:59:24
[post_content] => The Vehicle Groups page allows you to add a new vehicle group, manage existing vehicle groups, manage shared public map links, and shows a list of existing vehicle groups providing the following information in sortable (ascending/descending) columns:
Group
Number of Vehicles
The ALL VEHICLES vehicle group is listed by default in the existing vehicle groups. The ALL VEHICLES vehicle group cannot be edited or deleted.
Adding a New Vehicle Group
From this page, you can add a new vehicle group.
How to add a new vehicle group:
From the Vehicle Groups page, click + New group.
The New Vehicle Group card appears.
Enter the following information:
Group Name*
Select Vehicles (Use the search field or locate the vehicle(s) in the list and check the corresponding checkbox).
Fields denoted with an asterisk (*) are required.
Click Save.
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming the vehicle group has been created.
Editing a Vehicle Group
You can edit vehicle groups individually from the Vehicle Groups page.
The ALL VEHICLES vehicle group cannot be edited.
To edit a vehicle group:
From the Vehicle Groups page, under the "Actions" column, click on the Edit icon ().
The Vehicle Group Card appears.
Make your edits to the Group Name and/or selected vehicles.
Click Save.
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming edits to the vehicle group have been saved.
Deleting a Vehicle Group
You can delete vehicle groups individually from the Vehicle Groups page.
The ALL VEHICLES vehicle group cannot be deleted.
To delete a vehicle group:
From the Vehicle Groups page, under the "Actions" column, click on the Delete icon ().
The Delete Vehicle Group pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the selected vehicle group.
Click Yes, Delete to delete the vehicle group or No, Cancel to exit without making any changes.
If successful, a pop-up window appears confirming the vehicle group has been deleted.
[post_title] => Using the Admin: Vehicle Groups Tab
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-admin-vehicle-groups-tab
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-08-05 09:30:49
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-08-05 16:30:49
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26617
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=32312
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[11] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 33109
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2025-10-17 07:41:00
[post_date_gmt] => 2025-10-17 14:41:00
[post_content] =>
The Admin: Vehicles tab, available from the Admin page of the Fleet Tracking Portal, offers a centralized location to view, search, filter, and edit vehicles with greater speed and accuracy.
Note:A user must have Vehicle Admin permission enabled to access this tab.
In this guide, you’ll learn how to navigate the Vehicle Admin page, use its key tools and filters, and make updates to vehicle information with confidence. Whether you manage a small fleet or a large operation, these instructions will help ensure your fleet data stays organized, accurate, and up to date.
Note: You may use the Open in Advanced Admin button to navigate to the Vehicle Admin page in Classic Portal to manage items such as Attributes, Switch, Diagnostic Data, Driver History, Hierarchy, Vehicle Recall data, etc. This button is only available and accessible to Enterprise/Advanced Administration users.
Viewing the Table
Vehicle information is presented in a default table layout displaying Vehicle Name, VIN, Serial no. (device), Year, Make, Model, Driver Name, Odometer, Engine Hours, ADU: (Average Daily Use), and Last Reported Communication.
Using Table Filters
Filters can be used to display the vehicle data you need to know using the Filter drop-down.
To apply a filter(s), simply click the down arrow to expand the filter drop-down and check the box next to the applicable filter(s). Checked filters will be automatically applied to the table.
To remove a filter(s), you can use the filter drop-down to uncheck the box next to the applicable filter(s), click the X to the right of the filter drop-down to clear all applied filters.
Note:You can click the x next to an applied Device Status filter.
Using the Search field
You can easily search for a vehicle or asset in the table using the Search field. Start typing in the field, and the system will automatically begin narrowing the table data to fit your entered search.
Downloading a .CSV
You can download a .csv file of the table's current content/display by clicking the Download button.
The .csv file will honor any applied filters, searches, or table column adjustments.
Editing Table Columns
You can configure your Admin: Vehicles table by using the Edit Table Columns button.
To edit the table columns, click the Edit Table Columns button, then click the box to check or uncheck a column and click Save. Checked columns will appear on the table.
Note: Column availability is determined by your plan (including add-ons). Example: If you are on the Fleet Essentials plan, you would not be able to view/add the Vehicle Hierarchy column unless you have the Advanced Administration add-on.If you would like to learn more, please contact your Account Manager.
Note: Table column configurations are saved in your browser’s cookies and will stay the same each time you log in, as long as you use the same browser. If you switch to a different browser or computer, your table will reset to the default column configuration.
Managing Entities
You can add a new vehicle or asset, edit a vehicle/asset, and manage devices from the Admin: Vehicle tab.
Adding a New Vehicle or Asset
You can easily create a new vehicle or asset for your fleet from this tab.
How to Add a New Vehicle or Asset
From the Admin: Vehicle tab, click + Add new vehicleor asset.
The Create vehicle or asset drawer appears.
Click Vehicle or Asset.
If you've selected Vehicle, in the Details section, complete the following fields for a Vehicle: Note: Fields marked with a red * are required.
Vehicle Label: Enter a name for the vehicle
Device Serial Number: Use the drop-down to locate the device's serial number
VIN: Enter the vehicle's VIN
Year: Enter the vehicle's model year
Make: Enter the vehicle's model make
Model: Enter the vehicle's model
Vehicle Class: Use the drop-down to select light-duty, medium-duty, or heavy-duty Note: This will adjust the g-force sensitivity settings (configuration) of the device.
Color: Enter the color of the vehicle
Icon: Use the drop-down to select an icon to represent the vehicle on the Map page
Country: Use the drop-down to select the country the vehicle is registered in
License State: Enter the vehicle's license plate state
License Plate: Enter the vehicle's license plate's unique combination
In the Mileage, Engine Hours and Fuel section, complete the following fields for a Vehicle: Note: Fields marked with a red * are required.
Odometer: Enter the vehicle's current odometer value
Engine Hours: Enter the vehicle's current engine hours
Engine Size (Liters): Enter the vehicle's engine size (up to 50 liters)
Fuel Type: Use the drop-down to select the type of fuel used for the vehicle
Fuel Capacity (Gallons): Enter the amount of fuel the vehicle's tank can hold (must be a valid number with up to 2 decimal places)
Engine Size: Enter the total volume of all the engine's cylinders in liters
Idle GPH: Enter the gallons per hour used while the vehicle's engine is idling (up to 20 GPH)
In the Vehicle Groups Membership section, click in the "Select group(s)" field to expand the drop-down menu and select applicable membership(s).
In the Hierarchy Memberships section, click in the "Select hierarchies" field to expand the drop-down menu and select applicable membership(s).
In the Contact Info section, complete the following fields:
Phone: Enter the phone number associated with the vehicle's contact
Email: Enter the email associated with the vehicle's contact
Alert Preference: Check the box to select email and/or SMS as the preferred alert type
Click + Create vehicle.
If you've selected Asset, complete the following fields for an Asset: Note: Fields marked with a red * are required.
Asset label: Enter a name for the vehicle
VIN or Serial Number: Enter the asset's VIN or serial number
Year: Enter the asset's model year
Make: Enter the asset's model make
Model: Enter the asset's model
Color: Enter the asset's color
Icon: Use the drop-down to select an icon to represent the asset on the Map page
Country: Use the drop-down to select the country the vehicle is registered in
License State: Enter the vehicle's license plate state
License Plate: Enter the vehicle's license plate's unique combination
Device serial number: Use the drop-down to select the serial number of the device with which the asset is equipped
Odometer: Enter the asset's current odometer value
Engine Hours: Enter the asset's current engine hours
Fuel Type: Use the drop-down to select the type of fuel used for the asset
Fuel Capacity (Gallons): Enter the amount of fuel the asset's tank can hold (must be a valid number with up to 2 decimal places)
Engine Size: Enter the total volume of all the engine's cylinders in liters
Idle GPH: Enter the gallons per hour used while the asset's engine is idling (up to 20 GPH)
Phone: Enter the phone number associated with the vehicle's contact
Email: Enter the email associated with the vehicle's contact
Alert Preference: Check the box to select email and/or SMS as the preferred alert type
In the "Asset groups" section, click in the "Select group(s)" field to expand the drop-down menu and select applicable membership(s).
In the "Asset hierarchies" section, click in the "Select hierarchies" field to expand the drop-down menu and select applicable membership(s).
Click + Create and register asset.
Managing Vehicles & Devices
From the Actions column of the Admin: Vehicles tab, you can edit a vehicle and/or make changes to a vehicle's or asset's device.
Note: Not all accounts include the ability to deactivate, swap, or transfer devices. If you don’t see these options, it may be due to your contract terms. Please contact your Account Manager for details.
How to Edit a Vehicle
From the Admin: Vehicle tab, locate the row of the vehicle/asset you would like to edit in the table and click the Edit icon under the Actions column in that row.
The Edit vehicle/asset drawer appears.
Make your changes in the corresponding available fields. Note: You cannot edit the vehicle's device serial number. This field will be greyed out.
Click Save changes.
How to Configure a Device
From the Admin: Vehicle tab, locate the row of the vehicle you would like to edit in the table and click the Overflow icon under the Actions column in that row.
Click Configure Device from the options shown.
The Configure device drawer appears.
You can create a new device configuration, selecting from your current list, or customizing a configuration for the device as a "one-off."
Creating a New Configuration:
Click + Create new.
An Add new configuration pop-up appears.
Under Configuration name, enter a name for the new configuration. This field is required.
Enter thresholds for applicable Violation types using the up/down arrows or manual entry.
Click + Add.
You can then select the newly created configuration from the list (see the 'Selecting from List' steps below).
Selecting from List:
Ensure the "Select from list" option is selected under Configuration.
Use the drop-down menu to locate the configuration you would like to apply to the vehicle's device, and then click to select it.
Click Apply config.
Customizing the Configuration:
Click the button next to "Customize this device."
Enter thresholds for applicable Violation types using the up/down arrows or manual entry.
Click Apply config.
How to Deactivate a Device
From the Admin: Vehicle tab, locate the row of the vehicle you would like to edit in the table and click the Overflow icon under the Actions column in that row.
Click Deactivate Device from the options shown.
The Deactivate vehicle drawer appears, asking you to select an option from the drop-down list for your reason for deactivating.
Use the drop-down to select the reason.
Under Type, select whether the device is purchased or a rental using the button next to the applicable type.
Click Deactivate device.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you'd like to deactivate the vehicle.
Click Yes, Deactivate to deactivate the vehicle or No, Cancel to exit the pop-up.
If you clicked Yes, Deactivate, a pop-up appears confirming that the request has been submitted. An email is sent to you with additional directions.
How to Swap a Device
You can swap a device from the Admin: Vehicles tab. Swap allows users to quickly swap a new device serial number into an existing vehicle/asset registration. This feature is valuable for instances where devices are upgraded or replaced through Return Authorization.
From the Admin: Vehicle tab, locate the row of the vehicle you would like to edit in the table and click the Overflow icon under the Actions column in that row.
Click Swap Device from the options shown.
The Swap device drawer appears.
Use the drop-down to select a new device serial number.
Use the check box under Copy Vehicle Profile to copy any group/tree memberships, attributes, inputs, alerts, scheduled reports, and current driver assignments to the new device. Note: If this box is not checked, none of the above data is copied over to the new device, and if required, will need to be entered again.
Click Swap device.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to swap the device.
Click Yes, Swap. Note: Swapping a device requires action from the Support team. The Swap Form in the portal automatically notifies Support of the request. Support will notify you when your swap request is complete. Please note that devices remain on the account until the end of the month. Request by the 26th of each month to avoid an additional month of billing.
How to Transfer a Device
You may transfer a device to a different vehicle. This may be helpful if you are retiring the vehicle from the fleet or if you are rotating vehicles based on seasonal/situational use.
Note: Transferring a device to another vehicle requires you to register the device to another vehicle immediately after making the selection to transfer.
From the Admin: Vehicle tab, locate the row of the vehicle you would like to edit in the table and click the Overflow icon under the Actions column in that row.
Click Transfer Device from the options shown.
The Transfer device drawer appears.
As you are required to register the device, enter the following information: Note: Fields marked with a red * are required.
Vehicle Label
VIN
Year
Make
Model
Color
Icon (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
Country (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
License State (Use the drop-down to make a selection)
License Plate
Odometer
Engine Hours
Fuel Type
Fuel Capacity
Engine Size (L)
Idle GPH
Click Transfer.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to transfer the device.
Click Yes, Transfer.
If successful, a pop-up appears confirming the device has been successfully transferred.
[post_title] => Using the Admin: Vehicles Tab
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-admin-vehicles-tab
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-09-30 13:08:47
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-09-30 20:08:47
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26617
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=33109
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[12] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 30957
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-06-21 08:12:16
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-06-21 15:12:16
[post_content] => The Driver Groups page is available from the Admin page in the Fleet Tracking Portal. From the Driver Groups page, you can view, add, and manage your driver groups.
The Driver Groups page displays your driver groups in a table format offering at-a-glance high-level information such as driver group name and the number of drivers included in each driver group. The Group and No. Drivers columns are sortable by using the Ascending and Descending arrows. You can perform actions such as editing or deleting a driver group from the Actions column.
Adding a Driver Group
How to add a driver group:
From the Driver Groups page, click + New group (top-right corner of the page).
The New Driver Group panel appears on the left-hand side of the browser window.
Under Group Name, enter a name for the driver group.
Under Select Drivers, use the search field or the list to locate driver(s) and check the box next to the driver(s) you would like to include in the driver group.
Click Save.
A message appears in the top-right corner of the browser window to confirm if your driver group was successfully added.
Editing a Driver Group
How to edit a driver group:
You cannot edit the ALL DRIVERS group from your account.
From the Driver Groups page, click the Edit icon () from the Actions column.
The Driver Group panel appears on the left-hand side of the browser window.
Make your edits (add/remove drivers or edit Group Name).
Click Save.
A message appears in the top-right corner of the browser window to confirm if your driver group was updated successfully.
Deleting a Driver Group
How to delete a driver group:
You cannot delete the ALL DRIVERS group from your account.
From the Driver Groups page, click the Trash icon () from the Actions column.
The Delete Driver Group pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the applicable driver group.
Click Yes, Delete to delete the driver group or No, Cancel to exit the pop-up without deleting the driver group.
A message appears in the top-right corner of the browser window to confirm if your driver group was deleted successfully.
[post_title] => Using the Driver Groups Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-driver-groups-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-11-14 11:39:29
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-11-14 18:39:29
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26617
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=30957
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 13
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 31997
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2025-02-07 11:17:06
[post_date_gmt] => 2025-02-07 18:17:06
[post_content] =>
The Camera Admin tab, available from the Admin page of the Fleet Tracking Portal, offers a centralized location for performing basic administrative tasks associated with registered Driveri and Drive360/AIR II cameras.
Note: Your account must have active Driveri or Drive360/AIR II cameras, and users must have Camera Admin permissions.
Viewing Camera Devices
Camera devices are listed in a searchable, sortable table showing the vehicle label, the camera device equipped to it, and the device's serial number.
You can use the Search field to quickly locate a specific device.
You can use the Sort Ascending icon and Sort Descending icon available in each column to adjust the display of your camera devices.
Click the corresponding vehicle label under the Vehicle column.
The Camera details panel appears on the right-hand side of the page, offering the following information:
Vehicle label, device name, and device serial number
Overview:
Date/Time of last communication
Camera Settings
Media: All manually requested and auto-generated events associated with the vehicle
Note: Clips are available for 90 days. After 90 days, clips expire and are unavailable. We recommend downloading clips to local storage if you foresee a need for them after an extended period of time.
Click Edit to edit basic camera settings, if applicable.
Click View all media to view all media associated with the vehicle, if applicable.
Downloading a .CSV
You can download a .csv file containing the information available in the Camera Admin tab. The .csv file contains Vehicle, Device, and Serial number columns.
Managing Camera Settings
You can edit record settings (audio, road, driver), blur faces (none, driver, passenger, all) and enable or disable in-cab alerts from the Camera Admin tab.
Note: Any changes made to configurations are processed when the camera is on. If the camera is not on, the configuration change is held until the camera is on.
How to Edit Camera Settings
From the Camera Admin tab, click the Edit icon under the Actions column in the row of the applicable vehicle.
The Edit panel appears.
Under Record, click the checkboxes to adjust your recording settings.
Note: The camera must have a driver-facing camera to select the Driver option.
Use the toggle under In-cab alert to enable In-cab alerts (changes to blue) or disable In-cab alerts (changes to gray).
Click SaveChanges.
Camera Settings for AIR II with Fleet All-in-One Pro Plus
If you have the Fleet All-in-One (FAIO) Pro Plus plan, you can manage additional event settings beyond Record Type and In-Cab Alerts. For Road-Facing Camera Settings and Driver-Facing Camera Settings, you can either use the group toggle to turn recording on or off for all events under each camera type, or use the individual toggles to enable or disable recording for specific events. Please see the AIR II FAQ for event definitions and audio warnings.
Important! Setting changes are processed upon successful transmission to the device when it is in Wake mode. Therefore, if you make a change to settings, please allow for a couple of hours for the update to be enabled and reflected in your account.
Note: If you are interested in AI-based event recordings, please contact your Account Manager for additional information.
G-force Movement Events: All G-force-related events, such as acceleration, deceleration, or hard turns
Road Facing Camera Settings: - Forward Collision Warning (This feature is disabled by default; users with permissions can enable this from the Edit drawer of the Camera Admin tab.) - Close Following - Lane Departure (This feature is disabled by default; users with permissions can enable this from the Edit drawer of the Camera Admin tab.) - Stop Sign - Pedestrian Collision Warning (This feature is disabled by default; users with permissions can enable this from the Edit drawer of the Camera Admin tab.)
Driver Facing Camera Settings: - Drowsiness/Fatigue - Cell Phone Use - Distracted Driving - Seatbelt
Viewing Camera Media
You can view all camera media (manually requested and auto-generated) for a vehicle equipped with a camera.
How to View Camera Media for a Vehicle
From the Camera Admin tab, click the Overflow icon in the row of the applicable vehicle.
The View all media option appears.
Click View all media.
Note: You can also access View all media from the Camera Details panel.
A separate browser tab opens, navigating you to the Camera Media page. The vehicle is automatically selected, and the timeframe displayed defaults to Today. Available clips are shown under the Results list.
Use the Camera Media page filtering options to adjust as necessary.
(Skip this step if you have FAIO Pro Plus). Click Request clip to request a clip from the camera, or click the entry to view the clip if it was requested and transmitted from the camera previously.
If you are a Basic, Standard, Enterprise, or Advanced Administration user looking for information on using Alerts from the Legacy (Classic) Portal, please see Classic Portal – About Alerts.
Filtering the Alerts Page
You can filter the alerts page by Alert Type, Data Source (Assets, Vehicles, Vehicle Groups, Vehicle Hierarchies), and/or Alert Status (Active, Conditionally Active, Inactive). You may also use the Search field to search for a specific alert.
To clear filters, use the close button (x) next to the All Filters drop-down. You may also undo a filtering action by clicking the Undo button.
Alert Types
There are 25+ configurable alert types available. Please view the following list of alert types and corresponding descriptions and use cases in the table below.
Reports applicable only to Enterprise customers have been indicated below accordingly.
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"]
Alert Type,Description
"Accel (Enterprise only),Alert when a vehicle violates the specified accel threshold (in [glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just accelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching."
"Asset Inputs (Enterprise only),Alert when an asset's input changes status.~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its generators with lights. Alert the fleet manager\, whenever the asset's light is activated."
"Braking (Decel) (Enterprise only),Alert when a vehicle violates the specified decel threshold in ([glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just decelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching."
"Diagnostic,Alert when a specific threshold is passed (either greater or lower). Specify a Diagnostic Type: Temperature\, Coolant Temperature\, Engine Speed\, Low Internal Battery (TT-600s/BeMini - 20% default)\, Low Battery (All-in-One - 11.9V default)\, or Low Fuel Level (percentage). The system does not check for alert conditions when the ignition is turned off. Temperatures reported are those provided by the sensor at the time of the update.~~~~Example: Company XYZ transports cargo that must be stored in temperatures below 80 degrees. Alert the Fleet Manager and optionally the driver if the trailer temperature reaches a temperature above the threshold."
[whitelabel tier="gpsi"]Diagnostic - Low Battery (EVs only)[/whitelabel],[whitelabel tier="gpsi"]Alert when a specific threshold is passed (either greater or lower) for Low Battery. This alert is available for EV Fleet Plan customers with EVs equipped with GO9 devices.[/whitelabel]
"Driver Login (Enterprise only),Alert when a driver does not log in when starting a trip.~~~~Example: Truck 150 is on the move\, but the driver did not log in to the vehicle's Driver ID keyfob reader. Either the driver forgot or the vehicle could be subject to unauthorized use (possible theft). Alert the fleet manager after 2 minutes\, and optionally send the driver a login reminder message."
"Driver Assign (Enterprise only),Alert when a driver has successfully been assigned to a vehicle via Driver ID key fob or another method. (Buzzer or light in-cab notification of successful login requires additional equipment and installation.)~~~~Example: The driver of Truck 150 just logged into the vehicle using the keyfob reader. Using SMS\, a Buzzer\, or Light (if installed)\, alert the fleet manager and/or driver that his login was successful."
"DTC,Alert on Diagnostic Trouble Codes for supported devices*.~~~~Example: The axle for 54 MIKE is below normal operational range according to J1365005BA. Alert the fleet manager to schedule immediate maintenance\, and optionally notify the driver to go to the maintenance lot after his last delivery today."
"DVIR (Enterprise only),Alert when a Driver Vehicle Inspection Report is received with defects. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Bill just noted that his driver-side mirror was missing (high priority) on his DVIR and submitted the report. Alert Bill's immediate supervisor indicating that a DVIR was submitted by Bill\, the defects included\, and the time/date of the defect."
"DVIR Status (Enterprise only),Alert when a vehicle is moving without a DVIR completed or marked unsafe. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Steven has started driving the company vehicle without completing a DVIR. Alert Steven's immediate supervisor that a DVIR has not been submitted on a vehicle that is currently being operated and notify the driver that a DVIR must be submitted."
"Heartbeat,Alert when a heartbeat is received (usually once a day).~~~~Example: Company XYZ tracks its assets (yellow iron) but does not have motion-based reporting. The heartbeat for an excavator that had been sitting on a trailer just occurred outside of their yard (via landmark)\, which alerted the fleet manager that the equipment had been stolen."
"Hours of Service (Enterprise only),Alert before daily hours of service limit is reached. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: Joe Marks is within 30 minutes of reaching his daily hours of service limit. Alert the fleet manager and the driver to avoid a violation."
"HOS Driver Assign (Enterprise only),Alert when vehicle moves without HOS driver assigned. Device ID and Driver Reference ID must match exactly. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: A vehicle is moving without a driver signing into the tablet. Alert the vehicle’s fleet manager."
"Idle Time,Alert when a vehicle idles more than the specified limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for consecutive idle time is no more than 15 minutes. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to turn off the vehicle."
"Ignition,Alert when a vehicle turns on or off.~~~~Example: Company XYZ is following vehicle ABC's activity. Alert the fleet manager when vehicle ABC ignition status changes."
"Inputs,Alert when an input changes status. (Inputs are configured at the time of installation.)~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its vehicles with sirens/lights to be used in the event of an emergency. For oversight purposes\, alert the fleet manager\, whenever the siren/light is activated."
"Jamming,Note:GPS jamming detection has been discontinued for new accounts and existing accounts without active jamming alerts as of 08/2026.~~~~Alert when an active jamming (GPS or Radio) device is detected (Supported Calamp devices only: GPSI-5000\, PNP Series\, AT-3000).~~~~> GPS Jamming: GPS jamming events are reported when the device identifies a jammer blocking its communication with GPS satellites; these alerts will lack a corresponding location\, so it's recommended users refer to the Portal to verify where the device last reported~~~~> Radio Jamming: Radio jamming events are reported when the device identifies a jammer blocking its radio/cellular communications with the local network; these alerts will often be delayed\, where the device is only able to communicate the event AFTER reconnecting to the network~~~~~Example: Company XYZ's vehicle is driving through an area with a high crime rate. For fleet asset safety\, alert the fleet manager if GPS or radio jamming is detected to be on high alert in case of theft."
"Landmark,Alert when a vehicle\, vehicle group\, or asset enters or exits a landmark.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's fleet policy prohibits drivers from making stops to their personal home addresses (uploaded as landmarks) during their shifts. 52 JEFF just entered one of those landmarks during regular business hours. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to return to work."
"Location,Alert of vehicle's location (individual vehicles only\, no groups/hierarchies) at preset timed interval (every 2\, 4\, 8\, 12\, or 24 hours).~~~~Example: Provisions123 is sending a critical delivery/shipment from Montana to Maine in Vehicle1. The Operations Manager is looking for a daily report as to where the delivery/shipment is in its travels so that he can update the recipient and will set up a Locations Alert selecting to receive Vehicle1's location every 24 hours."
"Odd-Hours,Alert on movement within an odd-hours violation window.~~~~Example: Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use company vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. It's Saturday\, and 54 MIKE just reported movement outside the perimeters of the company parking lot. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally remind the driver to return the vehicle."
"Out-of-Range,Alert on vehicles that have not reported for a time.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has been running for 60 minutes without reporting data. 50 BRAD has been parked for 2 days without reporting data. The vehicles could have been subject to tampering or are in locations that are obstructing signal. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to check for physical obstructions within the cab itself."
"Posted Speed Alert,Alert on vehicles violating posted speed limits. Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. Posted speed violations are calculated using the [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The last speed value sampled during a device's report interval. For example\, if a device's report interval is 2 minutes\, the Instantaneous speed is the last data point obtained of the 480 data points collected during the update period (4 times per second x 2 minutes)." style="top" ]Inst speed[/tooltip] value.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speeding violation limit is 10 miles over posted speed. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold (89 MPH in a posted 75 MPH zone). Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down**."
"Service Reminders,Alert when a scheduled service is approaching or overdue. Users can target alerts to a specific service type instead of all services on a vehicle.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has a service schedule defined for oil changes every 3\,000 miles. The truck's odometer just reached a threshold of 500 miles before service is due. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to schedule maintenance."
"Speeding,Alert when a vehicle violates a specified speed limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speed is 75 MPH (regardless of zone). 54 MIKE just reported speed of 80 MPH. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down*."
"Stop/Idle,Alert on a stop or idle longer than a specific duration.~~~~Company XYZ's delivery stops are targeted to take between 15-20 minutes. 51 LINDA recently made a stop\, and the ignition has now been off for 60 minutes. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to get back on schedule."
"Switch,Alert on device switches. Available switch types include Battery Voltage\, External Power Lost\, Panic Switch\, Power Cycle\, and Temperature. Low Battery Voltage occurs when a vehicle's battery is below 11.9 volts for 30 minutes or more. External Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery\, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.~~~~Note: Temperature threshold must be programmed by Support (for supported devices only). Battery Voltage is available for supported devices and is available to Fleet Essentials and Pro customers (if you would like to learn more\, please contact your Account Manager).~~~~Example 1: Truck 150 just reported the panic switch has been turned on. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol (e.g.\, potential safety issue). Example 2: 52 JEFF just reported a loss of external power\, which indicates the device is now relying on battery power. Alert the fleet manager that a device has been disconnected\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol."
"Towing (Enterprise only),Alert when vehicle moves and ignition is off. This alert is currently supported on GPSI-5000\, ELD-2000D\, and AT-3000 devices (PNP support anticipated Q3 2020).~~~~Example: Company XYZ has several mowers in various locations throughout the city. The Fleet Manager wants to be notified when any of these assets are moving without ignition (i.e.\, towing stolen\, etc.)."[/et]
*Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature for vehicles equipped with PNP devices. Available diagnostic data varies by vehicle make/model. Data may include engine speed, fuel level, fuel level remaining, fuel rate, odometer, seatbelt, and more.
**If you plan to notify drivers when alerts are triggered (e.g., whenever a speeding violation occurs), consider asking drivers to assign messages from 477-477 (GPSGPS) to a unique ring/SMS tone. When drivers hear this tone, they can know immediately that they've triggered a violation without having to look at their mobile devices.
While Alerts are highly accurate, they are optimized for real-time situations as subscribed. Due to occasional cellular network or processing delays, very occasionally alerts will miss an event and should not be considered a reliable substitute for regularly scheduled reports on the same situation of interest. For this reason, we suggest customers also utilize scheduled reports whenever a potentially missed alert would cause difficulty for any reason.
[post_title] => About the Alerts Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-alerts-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-09-03 06:51:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-09-03 13:51:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21339
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21365
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-11-04 09:24:06
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-11-04 16:24:06
[post_content] => Alerts provide real-time notification of driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers. You can create an unlimited number of alerts for each alert type.
There may be references to Hierarchy, Driver, and Attribute features below. Please note, Hierarchy, Driver, and Attribute features are available to Enterprise customers only. If you would like additional information, please contact your Account Manager.
How to create a new alert:
From the Alerts page, click New Alert.
Use the scroll bar or the search field to find the alert you would like to create, then hover your mouse over the alert and click Select.
Enter your alert title.
A Best Practice is to have your title be specific and concise to the data you are looking to obtain so that you can easily identify and find your title later on. This title will also appear on notifications.
Click Select Data Source to select the vehicle, vehicle group, or hierarchy that you would like as your source of data.
The Hierarchy feature is available to Enterprise customers only. If you would like to learn more, please contact your Account Manager.
From the Data Source window, click on the type of data source (vehicle, vehicle group, or hierarchy), and your options for your data source will appear. When you have found your data source, click Select.
The vehicle name, vehicle group, or hierarchy will be visible in the alert notification after the alert title.
Click the checkbox next to your desired method of notification. If selecting Text or Email, enter email address(es) or SMS number(s) of recipients. Separate multiple addresses and numbers by commas.
If an option is greyed out and the box cannot be checked, then the method of notification is not available to you for the alert.
Click the Yes, No, or Apply Date button to activate or deactivate the alert.
If you click Apply Date, enter the applicable time window for the alert to be active using the calendar field.
Select your paramters from the following options:
Depending on the alert type you create, additional configurable parameters vary.
Input: The input type (e.g., door, PTO, etc.) as defined by your account at the time of device installation and the input state on which to alert (e.g., open/closed, on/off, etc.).
Input Status (Assets Input): The state on which to alert (Open or Closed).
Is Moving (Assets Input):Indicate whether alert should trigger only when asset is moving or not.
Idle Limit: Minutes a vehicle must idle before an alert is triggered.
Active Weekdays: Check the boxes next to the days the alert is in effect. Use the drop-downs below weekday selection to set begin and end hours. An option to set different start and end times for some days, such as weekends, is available. The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Landmark:The landmark in which (or outside of which) the alert is in effect. Options include Ignore (the alert will trigger whether inside or outside a landmark), Inside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist inside the selected landmark or landmark group), or Outside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist outside the selected landmark). If your account is configured for attributes, you can provide extra information whenever an applicable landmark alert is triggered–like a gate code or a note about a safety concern at the property (e.g., guard dog).
One Time: Alert one time then deactivate.
Running: Threshold in minutes since the last reported location.
Parked: Threshold in days since the last reported location.
Violation Limit (speed): Threshold in MPH over the posted limit (greater than or equal to). Posted speed violations are calculated using the [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] value.
Violation Limit (accel/decel): Threshold in Gs. The DOT defines harsh (not dangerous) braking as .45 g incidents (your average NYC cab driver). Harsh acceleration is typically set at a lower g-force threshold (.35 g incidents).
Violation Limit (HOS): Threshold in minutes until Hours of Service limit is reached.
Alert Threshold by Interval Type: Threshold in miles, hours, or days before service is overdue.
Speed Limit: Threshold in MPH in speed (not related to posted limit). Available options include [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] or Average.
Stop Time: Threshold in minutes since the vehicle has been stopped.
Stop Type: Type of stop for which the alert is in effect. Options include Any (idle and ignition off), Idle (only), or Ignition Off (only).
Switch Type: Type of power event. Available options include Battery Voltage, External Power Lost, Panic Switch, Power Cycle, and Temperature. Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.
Diagnostic Type: Type of diagnostic (Temperature Sensor, Coolant Temperature, Engine Speed).
Threshold (Diagnostic Type): Threshold for Diagnostic Type (see above).
Active: Indicate whether the alert is active. Options include Yes, No, or Apply Date.
Repeat Delay: The minimum number of minutes between notifications for this alert. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts—especially for alerts that apply to a large group of vehicles. For example, if the Repeat Delay is set to 5 minutes, you will receive notifications no more than every 5 minutes. Any alerts that have accumulated during that time will be sent to you at once.
Per Vehicle Delay:The minimum number of minutes between alerts for the same vehicle. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts per vehicle. For example, if you have one vehicle in a group that is constantly going in and out of a landmark, you may only want to receive a notification every 20 minutes whenever alert conditions are met for that vehicle instead of each time the vehicle triggers the alert.
Ignition Status:Indicate whether alert triggers only under certain ignition status. Available options include On (alert only triggers when ignition status is read as ON), Off (alert only triggers when ignition status is read as OFF), or Both (alert triggers regardless of ignition status).
Notification: Check the box if you would like to receive notification of the alert only once (if triggered) during off-hours time windows.
Time Limit: Threshold in minutes after the vehicle starts without driver logging in.
Lamp On (DTC): Use checkbox to indicate if the alert should only trigger if the Check Engine light is on.
HOS Account: Select your HOS account (if applicable) under which drivers are submitting DVIRs for this alert.
DVIR Status: Alert triggers only when DVIRs deem the vehicle Not Safe or are not completed.
Idle Limit: Threshold in minutes a vehicle must be idling before the alert is triggered.
True Idle: Check the box to exclude PTO time from idle time for the alert threshold.
Landmark/Group: Choose the landmark or landmark group that will trigger the alert.
Alert When (Landmark): Choose the alert to trigger when a vehicle enters, leaves, or either enters or leaves the selected landmark or landmark group.
Sustained Speeding Only (Posted Speed): Indicate if the alert should only trigger when the vehicle's speeding is sustained and choose the time the speed must be sustained over to trigger the alert.
Adjust additional alert settings as needed, and click Create Alert.
The new alert will be listed in the Manage Alerts grid, which includes the details of the alert.
The next time any vehicle(s) in the Delivery group trigger this alert according to the odd hours set (using the account's timezone), the specified recipient will receive the following notifications (email and SMS):
If a message was sent to the driver, the the time the alert violation occurred will be converted to the driver's timezone (if set in driver's profile).
Allow 'alerts@[provider].com' to ensure you receive email alerts. Reply 'STOP' to stop receiving future SMS messages.
[post_title] => Creating an Alert
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => creating-an-alert
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-09 14:27:43
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-09 21:27:43
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21339
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21365
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21369
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-11-04 10:14:00
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-11-04 17:14:00
[post_content] => You can edit alert details, inactivate alerts, or delete alerts. Adjusting alert configurations can help you if you are getting too many alerts, not receiving alerts, etc. In addition, you can filter your alerts to help you find an alert easier.
Filtering the Alert List
If your alert list is long, you can use filter options to isolate a subset of alerts.
How to filter the alert list:
From the Alerts page, click on the Filter button () in the right-hand corner.
Choose from the following filter options:
Alert Type: Show only alerts that are of a certain type.
Data Source: Show alerts that are monitoring a specific vehicle, vehicle group, or hierarchy.
Notification Recipient (SMS or Email): Show only alerts that are specific to the recipient.
Alert Status : Show only alerts that are active, inactive, or both.
Exit out of the pop-up window by clicking the Close button (X).
The alert list shows only the alerts that match your filter criteria.
Editing Alerts
After you edit an alert, the alert will trigger the next time the conditions are met.
How to edit an alert:
From the Alerts page, find the alert you would like to edit by using the Search field and entering the title of your alert or by tabbing through the pages of your created alerts after filtering the .
Hover your mouse over the alert, click the ellipses button then click Edit.
A pop-up window of the alert displays.
Make your edits in the alert window.
Click Save.
The alert is updated with your edits.
Inactivating Alerts
If an alert is not needed temporarily, you can inactivate it. Inactivating an alert keeps the settings and prevents you from having to recreate the alert if you ever have the need for it again.
How to inactivate an alert:
From the Alerts page, locate the alert you would like to put in inactive status and hover your mouse over the alert.
Click the ellipses button on the right ().
Click Edit.
Click the No button next to "Active:".
Click Save.
Delete an Alert
If an alert is no longer needed and will not be needed for the future, you can delete. Deleting an alert permanently removes the settings.
If there is a possibility that you may need an alert in the future, we recommend changing the status of the alert to Inactive (see Inactivating an Alert above).
How to delete an alert:
From the Alerts page, locate the alert you would like to put in inactive status and hover your mouse over the alert.
Hover over the alert you want to edit, and click the ellipses button on the right ().
Click Delete from the dropdown menu.
A pop-up window appears asking: "Are you sure you want to delete this alert?"
Click Delete.
[post_title] => Editing or Deleting an Alert
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-or-deleting-an-alert
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-03 09:32:09
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-03 16:32:09
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21339
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21369
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 3
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21339
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-11-03 14:48:32
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-11-03 21:48:32
[post_content] => You can create and manage alerts from the Alerts page of the Portal. In addition, you can view alert details (e.g., data source, selected options, active or inactive status, etc.) at a glance, filter displayed alerts, download a .csv file, and search for a previously created alert by title.
If you are a Basic, Standard, Enterprise, or Advanced Administration user looking for information on using Alerts from the Legacy (Classic) Portal, please see Classic Portal – About Alerts.
Filtering the Alerts Page
You can filter the alerts page by Alert Type, Data Source (Assets, Vehicles, Vehicle Groups, Vehicle Hierarchies), and/or Alert Status (Active, Conditionally Active, Inactive). You may also use the Search field to search for a specific alert.
To clear filters, use the close button (x) next to the All Filters drop-down. You may also undo a filtering action by clicking the Undo button.
Alert Types
There are 25+ configurable alert types available. Please view the following list of alert types and corresponding descriptions and use cases in the table below.
Reports applicable only to Enterprise customers have been indicated below accordingly.
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"]
Alert Type,Description
"Accel (Enterprise only),Alert when a vehicle violates the specified accel threshold (in [glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just accelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching."
"Asset Inputs (Enterprise only),Alert when an asset's input changes status.~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its generators with lights. Alert the fleet manager\, whenever the asset's light is activated."
"Braking (Decel) (Enterprise only),Alert when a vehicle violates the specified decel threshold in ([glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just decelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching."
"Diagnostic,Alert when a specific threshold is passed (either greater or lower). Specify a Diagnostic Type: Temperature\, Coolant Temperature\, Engine Speed\, Low Internal Battery (TT-600s/BeMini - 20% default)\, Low Battery (All-in-One - 11.9V default)\, or Low Fuel Level (percentage). The system does not check for alert conditions when the ignition is turned off. Temperatures reported are those provided by the sensor at the time of the update.~~~~Example: Company XYZ transports cargo that must be stored in temperatures below 80 degrees. Alert the Fleet Manager and optionally the driver if the trailer temperature reaches a temperature above the threshold."
[whitelabel tier="gpsi"]Diagnostic - Low Battery (EVs only)[/whitelabel],[whitelabel tier="gpsi"]Alert when a specific threshold is passed (either greater or lower) for Low Battery. This alert is available for EV Fleet Plan customers with EVs equipped with GO9 devices.[/whitelabel]
"Driver Login (Enterprise only),Alert when a driver does not log in when starting a trip.~~~~Example: Truck 150 is on the move\, but the driver did not log in to the vehicle's Driver ID keyfob reader. Either the driver forgot or the vehicle could be subject to unauthorized use (possible theft). Alert the fleet manager after 2 minutes\, and optionally send the driver a login reminder message."
"Driver Assign (Enterprise only),Alert when a driver has successfully been assigned to a vehicle via Driver ID key fob or another method. (Buzzer or light in-cab notification of successful login requires additional equipment and installation.)~~~~Example: The driver of Truck 150 just logged into the vehicle using the keyfob reader. Using SMS\, a Buzzer\, or Light (if installed)\, alert the fleet manager and/or driver that his login was successful."
"DTC,Alert on Diagnostic Trouble Codes for supported devices*.~~~~Example: The axle for 54 MIKE is below normal operational range according to J1365005BA. Alert the fleet manager to schedule immediate maintenance\, and optionally notify the driver to go to the maintenance lot after his last delivery today."
"DVIR (Enterprise only),Alert when a Driver Vehicle Inspection Report is received with defects. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Bill just noted that his driver-side mirror was missing (high priority) on his DVIR and submitted the report. Alert Bill's immediate supervisor indicating that a DVIR was submitted by Bill\, the defects included\, and the time/date of the defect."
"DVIR Status (Enterprise only),Alert when a vehicle is moving without a DVIR completed or marked unsafe. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Steven has started driving the company vehicle without completing a DVIR. Alert Steven's immediate supervisor that a DVIR has not been submitted on a vehicle that is currently being operated and notify the driver that a DVIR must be submitted."
"Heartbeat,Alert when a heartbeat is received (usually once a day).~~~~Example: Company XYZ tracks its assets (yellow iron) but does not have motion-based reporting. The heartbeat for an excavator that had been sitting on a trailer just occurred outside of their yard (via landmark)\, which alerted the fleet manager that the equipment had been stolen."
"Hours of Service (Enterprise only),Alert before daily hours of service limit is reached. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: Joe Marks is within 30 minutes of reaching his daily hours of service limit. Alert the fleet manager and the driver to avoid a violation."
"HOS Driver Assign (Enterprise only),Alert when vehicle moves without HOS driver assigned. Device ID and Driver Reference ID must match exactly. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: A vehicle is moving without a driver signing into the tablet. Alert the vehicle’s fleet manager."
"Idle Time,Alert when a vehicle idles more than the specified limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for consecutive idle time is no more than 15 minutes. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to turn off the vehicle."
"Ignition,Alert when a vehicle turns on or off.~~~~Example: Company XYZ is following vehicle ABC's activity. Alert the fleet manager when vehicle ABC ignition status changes."
"Inputs,Alert when an input changes status. (Inputs are configured at the time of installation.)~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its vehicles with sirens/lights to be used in the event of an emergency. For oversight purposes\, alert the fleet manager\, whenever the siren/light is activated."
"Jamming,Note:GPS jamming detection has been discontinued for new accounts and existing accounts without active jamming alerts as of 08/2026.~~~~Alert when an active jamming (GPS or Radio) device is detected (Supported Calamp devices only: GPSI-5000\, PNP Series\, AT-3000).~~~~> GPS Jamming: GPS jamming events are reported when the device identifies a jammer blocking its communication with GPS satellites; these alerts will lack a corresponding location\, so it's recommended users refer to the Portal to verify where the device last reported~~~~> Radio Jamming: Radio jamming events are reported when the device identifies a jammer blocking its radio/cellular communications with the local network; these alerts will often be delayed\, where the device is only able to communicate the event AFTER reconnecting to the network~~~~~Example: Company XYZ's vehicle is driving through an area with a high crime rate. For fleet asset safety\, alert the fleet manager if GPS or radio jamming is detected to be on high alert in case of theft."
"Landmark,Alert when a vehicle\, vehicle group\, or asset enters or exits a landmark.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's fleet policy prohibits drivers from making stops to their personal home addresses (uploaded as landmarks) during their shifts. 52 JEFF just entered one of those landmarks during regular business hours. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to return to work."
"Location,Alert of vehicle's location (individual vehicles only\, no groups/hierarchies) at preset timed interval (every 2\, 4\, 8\, 12\, or 24 hours).~~~~Example: Provisions123 is sending a critical delivery/shipment from Montana to Maine in Vehicle1. The Operations Manager is looking for a daily report as to where the delivery/shipment is in its travels so that he can update the recipient and will set up a Locations Alert selecting to receive Vehicle1's location every 24 hours."
"Odd-Hours,Alert on movement within an odd-hours violation window.~~~~Example: Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use company vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. It's Saturday\, and 54 MIKE just reported movement outside the perimeters of the company parking lot. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally remind the driver to return the vehicle."
"Out-of-Range,Alert on vehicles that have not reported for a time.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has been running for 60 minutes without reporting data. 50 BRAD has been parked for 2 days without reporting data. The vehicles could have been subject to tampering or are in locations that are obstructing signal. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to check for physical obstructions within the cab itself."
"Posted Speed Alert,Alert on vehicles violating posted speed limits. Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. Posted speed violations are calculated using the [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The last speed value sampled during a device's report interval. For example\, if a device's report interval is 2 minutes\, the Instantaneous speed is the last data point obtained of the 480 data points collected during the update period (4 times per second x 2 minutes)." style="top" ]Inst speed[/tooltip] value.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speeding violation limit is 10 miles over posted speed. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold (89 MPH in a posted 75 MPH zone). Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down**."
"Service Reminders,Alert when a scheduled service is approaching or overdue. Users can target alerts to a specific service type instead of all services on a vehicle.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has a service schedule defined for oil changes every 3\,000 miles. The truck's odometer just reached a threshold of 500 miles before service is due. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to schedule maintenance."
"Speeding,Alert when a vehicle violates a specified speed limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speed is 75 MPH (regardless of zone). 54 MIKE just reported speed of 80 MPH. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down*."
"Stop/Idle,Alert on a stop or idle longer than a specific duration.~~~~Company XYZ's delivery stops are targeted to take between 15-20 minutes. 51 LINDA recently made a stop\, and the ignition has now been off for 60 minutes. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to get back on schedule."
"Switch,Alert on device switches. Available switch types include Battery Voltage\, External Power Lost\, Panic Switch\, Power Cycle\, and Temperature. Low Battery Voltage occurs when a vehicle's battery is below 11.9 volts for 30 minutes or more. External Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery\, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.~~~~Note: Temperature threshold must be programmed by Support (for supported devices only). Battery Voltage is available for supported devices and is available to Fleet Essentials and Pro customers (if you would like to learn more\, please contact your Account Manager).~~~~Example 1: Truck 150 just reported the panic switch has been turned on. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol (e.g.\, potential safety issue). Example 2: 52 JEFF just reported a loss of external power\, which indicates the device is now relying on battery power. Alert the fleet manager that a device has been disconnected\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol."
"Towing (Enterprise only),Alert when vehicle moves and ignition is off. This alert is currently supported on GPSI-5000\, ELD-2000D\, and AT-3000 devices (PNP support anticipated Q3 2020).~~~~Example: Company XYZ has several mowers in various locations throughout the city. The Fleet Manager wants to be notified when any of these assets are moving without ignition (i.e.\, towing stolen\, etc.)."[/et]
*Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature for vehicles equipped with PNP devices. Available diagnostic data varies by vehicle make/model. Data may include engine speed, fuel level, fuel level remaining, fuel rate, odometer, seatbelt, and more.
**If you plan to notify drivers when alerts are triggered (e.g., whenever a speeding violation occurs), consider asking drivers to assign messages from 477-477 (GPSGPS) to a unique ring/SMS tone. When drivers hear this tone, they can know immediately that they've triggered a violation without having to look at their mobile devices.
While Alerts are highly accurate, they are optimized for real-time situations as subscribed. Due to occasional cellular network or processing delays, very occasionally alerts will miss an event and should not be considered a reliable substitute for regularly scheduled reports on the same situation of interest. For this reason, we suggest customers also utilize scheduled reports whenever a potentially missed alert would cause difficulty for any reason.
To configure or edit a dashboard, you must return to the Classic Portal by clicking on the Edit icon () at the top right-hand corner of the browser window.
Viewing a Dashboard
If you have access to or have created multiple dashboards, you can view each dashboard by using the drop-down selector. Otherwise, if you only have access to or have only created one dashboard in the Classic Portal, the Dashboard page displays your one available dashboard.
How to select a dashboard to view:
Click on the Drop-Down icon.
Use the scroll bar to scroll until you see the Dashboard you would like to view.
Click on the name of the Dashboard you would like to view.
The selected Dashboard loads on the screen.
Interacting with the Dashboard
You can interact with the dashlets on your dashboard from the New Portal just like you would from the Classic Portal.
Interacting with some dashlets may open a new browser tab opened to the applicable section of the Classic Portal so that you may drill down to the data you need.
The way you interact with a dashlet varies from dashlet to dashlet. We are providing you with an example of interacting with the Map dashlet below.
How to interact with the Map dashlet:
Just like in the Classic Portal, you can click on a vehicle on the map dashlet to view vehicle details, change the map to Satellite or Map (with or without Terrain), view traffic, use the peg-man to see street view, drop a pin, and more.
[post_title] => About the Dashboard Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-dashboard-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-06 11:32:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-06 18:32:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21345
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 1
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21345
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-11-03 14:58:21
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-11-03 21:58:21
[post_content] => With the Dashboard page, you can view and interact with your customized dashboard(s) created in the Classic Portal without leaving the New Portal.
To configure or edit a dashboard, you must return to the Classic Portal by clicking on the Edit icon () at the top right-hand corner of the browser window.
Viewing a Dashboard
If you have access to or have created multiple dashboards, you can view each dashboard by using the drop-down selector. Otherwise, if you only have access to or have only created one dashboard in the Classic Portal, the Dashboard page displays your one available dashboard.
How to select a dashboard to view:
Click on the Drop-Down icon.
Use the scroll bar to scroll until you see the Dashboard you would like to view.
Click on the name of the Dashboard you would like to view.
The selected Dashboard loads on the screen.
Interacting with the Dashboard
You can interact with the dashlets on your dashboard from the New Portal just like you would from the Classic Portal.
Interacting with some dashlets may open a new browser tab opened to the applicable section of the Classic Portal so that you may drill down to the data you need.
The way you interact with a dashlet varies from dashlet to dashlet. We are providing you with an example of interacting with the Map dashlet below.
How to interact with the Map dashlet:
Just like in the Classic Portal, you can click on a vehicle on the map dashlet to view vehicle details, change the map to Satellite or Map (with or without Terrain), view traffic, use the peg-man to see street view, drop a pin, and more.
The Camera Media page in the Fleet Tracking Portal is designed to provide a centralized and focused repository of camera video clips from Driveri, Drive360, and AIR II cameras. Camera event clips are plotted on the map and you can access metadata about the vehicle’s behavior reported during the media clip’s timeframe.
Note: You must have the Camera Media permission enabled to see the Camera Media Library page in the Portal.
Accessing the Camera Media Page
To access the Camera Media Page, click the camera icon from the left-hand navigation bar in the Fleet Tracking Portal.
Filtering Camera Event Clips
You can filter camera event clips by event type, fleet subset, and time frame. Any filtering selections made are applied automatically.
Event Types
To filter by event type, click the Event type button and check the boxes next to the applicable type(s).
Note: Available event types vary depending on the camera, Driveri vs. AIR II/Drive360. If you filter by an event that is unavailable for your camera, you will not see any clips listed in the Results List.
Dangerous driving Distracted Driver initiated Drowsiness Follow distance Good driving Hard acceleration
Hard brake Hard turn Manual request Potential incident Seatbelt Speeding Violation
Fleet Subset
By default, the fleet subset selected is "Group" > "All Vehicles." To filter by fleet subset, click the expand button in the drop-down and click the applicable subset.
Note: The Hierarchy feature is available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration add-on. If you are interested in this feature, please contact your Account Manager.
Vehicle Group Vehicle Hierarchy Vehicle Driver
Time Frame
By default, the time frame displayed is "Today." To select a different time frame, click the expand button in the drop-down and click the application option to make your selection.
Today Yesterday Last 7 days
Last 30 days This month Custom range
Viewing the Results List
The Results list of camera clips displays entries based on selected filtering options. Each clip included in the list displays the vehicle label, clip name (editable), time of the day for the clip, and the type of clip event.
Note: If the clip was requested manually, the entry in the Results list displays a designation of "Manual."
You can adjust the display appearance of the Results list by clicking on the Expanded List icon. If you'd like to return to the default display appearance, click the Collapsed List icon.
Please see Using the Camera Page for step-by-step instructions on how to use each feature available from the Camera Media Page.
[post_title] => About the Camera Media Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-camera-media-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-07 13:28:00
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-07 20:28:00
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=31953
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21265
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-11-03 09:25:25
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-11-03 16:25:25
[post_content] => The Portal interface is quick, simple, and highly configurable. With just a few clicks, you can run any report or view the map for a single vehicle, a group of vehicles, or your entire fleet. Schedule reports, set up alerts, or administer your vehicle, driver, and user groups easily from our efficient web-based interface.
Enterprise Driver and driver groups are only available with Enterprise. To learn more, contact your Account Manager.
You can also gain insight into your fleet via real-time maps, vehicle location lists, alerts, graphs, messages, landmark visits, and more.
Overview
The Portal welcomes you with the Explore Page upon sign-in. This page offers quick access to areas of interest such as reports, alerts, fleet administration, chat support, and more via clickable links. You can also access New Release information, tutorials, and quick links to other helpful resources.
Our original Portal, Advanced Admin (Classic), is still available and accessible from the Explore Page.
Navigation
From the Explore Page, use the Navigation Bar on the left-hand side of the screen to access other Portal pages, adjust your preferences, get help, or collapse/expand your Navigation Bar.
Available Portal pages include:
Advanced Admin - Available to Advanced Administration add-on and/or Enterprise customers. Navigate to the legacy Portal (Classic) to access advanced administrative functionalities such as hierarchies and account-level reporting.
Map - The Map transforms your workspace to an interactive map featuring two tabs, Current and History, with quick access to management of drivers, vehicles, assets, landmarks, dispatch, and POIs.
Media Library - Available for accounts with camera solutions, the Camera Media page is your central hub for managing camera clips. Here, you can filter, view, rename, download, and request additional clips. You can also see your clip quota and the date it resets.
Maintenance - View and manage scheduled and completed maintenance service tasks.
Dashboards - Available to Advanced Administration add-on and/or Enterprise customers.Navigate to the Dashboards section of the Advanced Admin Portal to view customizable dashlets that give you at-a-glance insight into the fleet information that matters most to you, with quick access to interact with vehicle data.
Alerts - Create and manage alerts for hierarchies, vehicles, and vehicle groups.
Reports - Run ad-hoc and/or schedule configurable reports with the data you need to see.
Admin - The Admin page is your central hub for managing account settings. From here, you can quickly view and manage users, vehicle groups, drivers and driver groups, landmark groups, and cameras (if applicable).
You may also use the Page tiles to access Dashboards, Map, Reports, and Alerts pages.
Setting User Preferences
Click Preferences from the Navigation Bar to set or adjust user preferences for the following:
Measurement Units - US (Standard) or Metric
Time Zone - US/Hawaii, US/Alaska, US/Pacific, US/Arizona, US/Mountain, US/Central, US/Eastern, Canada/Atlantic, America/Puerto Rico, UTC
Default Page (Page displayed upon user login) - Explore, Map, or Dashboard
Group/Hierarchy (Hierarchy available to Advanced Administration add-on and/or Enterprise customers) - Determines which dropdown list is shown in the field below for "Apply Default Group/Hierarchy."
Default Group/Hierarchy - Select the group or hierarchy (available to Advanced Administration add-on and/or Enterprise customers) to display by default, instead of the system default of "ALL VEHICLES."
Apply Default Group/Hierarchy to (Hierarchy available to Advanced Administration add-on and/or Enterprise customers) - Apply the selected default group/hierarchy to Map, Reports, and Alerts pages, to the Map page only, or to Reports and Alerts pages.
Side-bar Theme - Dark or Light
Need Help?
Click Help from the Navigation Bar to access links to our Help Center or chat/open a ticket with Support.
Help Center - Opens a new tab in your browser to our Help Center, a one-stop shop for Documentation, Troubleshooting, Installation Guides, and more.
Support - Opens a pop-up where you can chat with Support, view system status, check out our most recent blog post, and more.
[post_title] => About the Portal
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-new-portal
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-02-27 11:07:26
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-02-27 18:07:26
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21265
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26188
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-12-14 14:09:18
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-12-14 21:09:18
[post_content] => You can add a group (landmark and vehicle), landmark, asset, user, and vehicle directly from the Map page.
You can only add one group, landmark, asset, user, or vehicle at a time.
Adding a Group
How to add a group:
From the Map, click the + icon ().
A drop-down window appears.
Hover your mouse over or click Group, then click Landmark Group or Vehicle Group.
Depending on your selection, the New Landmark Group or New Vehicle Group card appears.
Enter a name for the new group under "Group Name."
Use the Search field to search for landmarks or vehicles to select or select landmarks or vehicles by scrolling through the list.
Click Save.
A pop-up message appears confirming that the new group was saved successfully.
Adding a Landmark
Note: You can also create and manage individual landmarks from the Admin: Landmark tab.
How to add a landmark:
Alerts are only generated for Landmarks with an area smaller than a 10,000-foot radius. Landmarks exceeding this size will be excluded from alert generation. Please review your Landmark sizes to ensure critical locations are within the alerting threshold.
From the Map, click the + icon ().
A drop-down window appears.
Click Landmark.
The Create Landmark card appears.
Select Circle or Polygon as the shape of your landmark.
Polygons allow you to define a more precise boundary by tracing an outline around a specific area (up to 256* vertices). Polygon landmarks are more often used when the exclusion or inclusion of specific perimeters is important, such as when sending alerts when a vehicle enters or exits a specific location.
In the Landmark Name text field, enter a name for the landmark.
Select a color for the landmark.
Optional: Click View suggested address to see the street address based upon the lat/lon coordinates of the landmark. You can choose to populate the address detail fields with the suggested address by clicking Confirm and fill. To exit out of viewing the suggested address, click Close.
Optional: Enter Address Details (Street, City, State, Country, Zip).
If you have selected Circle as your landmark shape, you will have the option to enter the radius of the circle in feet/meters (If lat/long coordinates are not entered then the default size is 750 feet or 228.5999926848002 meters).
Optional: Use the drop-down window to select a Landmark Group.
Click + Create landmark.
The Landmark is created and the corresponding Landmark Card appears.
Adding an Asset
To add an asset, the asset must be tracked with a GPS device. If you would like to equip your asset with a GPS device, please contact your Account Manager for assistance.
How to add an asset:
From the Map, click the + icon ().
A drop-down window appears.
Hover your mouse over or click Asset.
The Create New Asset pop-up appears.
Enter information for the asset in the available fields:
Asset Label (Required)
VIN or Serial Number (Required)
Year
Make
Model
Color
Icon (select option from drop-down)
Country (Required)
License State (select option from drop-down)
License Plate
Device: Device Serial Number (Required)
Mileage and Runtime: Odometer (Required) and Engine Hours
A pop-up message appears confirming that the new asset was saved successfully.
We recommending creating a Vehicle Group of your assets to simplify and organize any asset-specific reporting needs.
Adding a User
How to add a user:
From the Map, click the + icon ().
A drop-down window appears.
Click User.
The New User card appears.
In the Details section, complete the following fields:
Username
Email
First Name
Last Name
Phone (Optional)
Address (Optional)
State (Optional)
Zip (Optional)
Use the drop-down under Country to select a country.
Use the drop-down under Country to select a timezone.
In the Vehicle Groups section, use the drop-down to select a vehicle group.
Click Create.
The User is created and the corresponding User Card appears.
[whitelabel tier="limited,full"]
Adding a Vehicle
How to add a vehicle:
From the Map, click the + icon ().
A drop-down window appears.
Click Vehicle.
The New Vehicle card appears.
Under the Details section, complete the following fields:
Vehicle Label
Device Serial Number
Under the Vehicle Details section, complete the following fields:
VIN
The Portal uses decodethis.com as the VIN decoder.
Year (Optional)
Make (Optional)
Model (Optional)
Color (Optional)
Use the drop-down to select a country.
Use the drop-down to select a license state.
Enter in the vehicle's license plate.
Under the Mileage & Engine Hours section, enter in odometer (required) and runtime (optional).
Under Fuel Info section, use the drop-down to select fuel type and enter in fuel capacity, engine size (L).
The Idle GPH will populate automatically once the Fuel Capacity and Engine Size (L) fields are completed.
Under the Contact Info section, enter in phone, email and select an alert preference (Email or SMS).
Under the Vehicle Groups section, use the drop-down to select a vehicle group (if applicable).
Click Save.
[/whitelabel]
[whitelabel tier="gpsi"]
Adding a Vehicle
How to add a vehicle:
From the Map Page, click the + icon ().
The Create New drop-down window expands.
Click Vehicle.
The Create vehicle panel appears on the right-hand side of the screen.
Under the Required Details section, complete the following fields:
Vehicle Label
VIN
The Portal uses decodethis.com as the VIN decoder.
Device Serial Number
Under the Vehicle Information section, complete the following fields:
Year (Optional)
Make (Optional)
Model (Optional)
Vehicle Class: Light-Duty, Medium-Duty, Heavy Duty (Optional)
Vehicle class selection configures the device to more accurately reflect vehicle activity and behavior events. If not selected, Light-Duty is automatically applied as the vehicle class.
Color (Optional)
Under the Vehicle Registration Information section, complete the following fields:
Use the drop-down to select a country (Required).
Use the drop-down to select a license state.
Enter in the vehicle's license plate.
Under the Mileage, Engine Hours and Fuel Information section, complete the following fields:
Odometer (Required)
Engine Hours (Optional)
Engine Size (Optional)
Use the drop-down to select fuel type (Optional)
Fuel Capacity (Optional)
The Idle GPH will populate automatically once the Engine Size, Fuel Type, and Fuel Capacity fields are completed.
Under the Vehicle Groups Membership, select a group or groups (Optional).
Under the Hierarchy Memberships, select hierarchy trees and nodes for the vehicle (Optional).
Under the Contact Information section, enter in phone, email and select an alert preference (Email or SMS).
Click + Create vehicle.
OEM Selection
For customers with OEM-equipped vehicles, you can add your vehicles to the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal using the same process outlined above with a few differences.
The OEM integration is powered by CerebrumX.
Adding an OEM-Equipped Vehicle
Before adding a vehicle, you must be on the OEM Plan, or OEM EV Plan for electric vehicles. Plans are enabled through a contract and must be activated prior to being able to add vehicles in the Portal. Contact your Account Manager if you are interested in adding OEM-equipped vehicles to your account.
Sign the contract with your Account Manager for the number of OEM licenses you need.
For each OEM manufacturer you want to connect (for example, Ford, GM, etc.), we’ll initiate a consent request on your behalf through CerebrumX.
Once consent is initiated, we’ll add the corresponding OEM license slots (also called virtual devices) to your GPS Fleet Tracking account.
Follow the instructions outlined above to add the OEM-equipped vehicle; however, in Step #3, when using the drop-down to select the Device Serial Number, the available OEM devices have device serial numbers beginning with OEM and end with (OEM).
The following items are required to add OEM-equipped vehicles: Contract for the specific number of licenses required is signed, manufacturer consent is approved, and vehicle VIN is eligible for OEM data
Data should be available within 24 hours after manufacturer consent and eligibility is confirmed.
[/whitelabel]
[post_title] => Adding Groups, Landmark, Assets, Users, & Vehicles
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-groups-landmark-users-vehicles
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-09-08 10:29:01
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-09-08 17:29:01
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21265
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26188
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27223
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-05-10 11:58:38
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-05-10 18:58:38
[post_content] => Welcome to Fleet Tracking! An account has been created for you and it's time to log in to your Fleet Tracking Portal to check out your new software tool.
Welcome Email
After an account has been created for you, you will receive an email from Support with the subject line "Welcome! Let's get started." This email includes your username and temporary password, along with instructions on how to log in for the first time.
Logging in to the Portal
How to log in:
In a browser tab, navigate to [whitelabel_portal].
Bookmark this address, as this is where you'll sign in each time you use [whitelabel_name] Fleet Tracking.
The Login page appears.
Enter your username as listed in the Welcome Email and click Next.
Alternatively, you can click Send a Magic Link to get a magic link sent to your email that'll sign you in instantly (see instructions for Magic Link login below).
The password field appears.
Enter the temporary password supplied in the Welcome Email and click Login.
You are prompted to change your password.
Enter a new password in the New password field and confirm your new password by repeating it in the Repeat password field, then click Submit.
You are automatically redirected to the Portal and greeted with the Explore page. You are now logged in to the Portal.
Using Magic Link
On the Login page, you have the option to use Magic Link to sign in to the [whitelabel_name] Fleet Tracking Portal automatically after clicking a link sent to your email.
How to log in using Magic Link:
On the Login page, click Send a Magic Link.
The Passwordless login form appears.
In the Login ID text field, enter your username or email address to receive a login link via email.
Click Send.
An email with the subject line of "Log into [whitelabel_name] is sent to your email address containing your Magic Link.
This link will be valid for 5 minutes, and may only be used once.
Click Go To Portal link in the email.
A browser tab opens and a pop-up message asks if you'd like to stay signed in.
Click Yes to reduce the number of times you are asked to log in.
If the computer you are using is a shared device (e.g., a computer at a library), we recommend clicking No to keep your account as secure as possible.
You are automatically redirected to the Portal and greeted with the Explore page. You are now logged in to the Portal.
[post_title] => Logging In to the Portal
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => logging-in-to-the-portal
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-06-28 23:28:47
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-06-29 06:28:47
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27223
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26365
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-06 10:37:21
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-06 17:37:21
[post_content] => You can edit and/or delete a group (landmark and vehicle), landmark, user, asset (edit only) and vehicle (edit only) directly from the Map page.
You can only edit one group, landmark, user, asset or vehicle at a time.
Editing a Group, Landmark, User, Asset, or Vehicle
Note: For a centralized table view to edit or delete individual landmarks, see the Admin: Landmark tab.
How to edit:
To edit, simply locate the group, landmark, user, asset, or vehicle that you would like to edit using the Search bar at the top of the map or the Map List/Map List filter.
Alerts are only generated for Landmarks with an area smaller than a 10,000-foot radius. Landmarks exceeding this size will be excluded from alert generation. Please review your Landmark sizes to ensure critical locations are within the alerting threshold.
The corresponding Card (Landmark/Vehicle Group Card, Landmark, User, Asset or Vehicle) will display.
Click Edit.
Enter your edits and click Save.
Edits to the corresponding Card are saved.
Changing an Entity Type
You can change the entity type for a vehicle to an asset or vice-versa.
How to change an entity type:
To edit, simply locate the asset or vehicle that you would like to change using the Search bar at the top of the map or the Map List/Map List filter.
The corresponding Card (Asset or Vehicle) will display.
Click Edit.
Scroll to the Change entity type (optional) section, select the desired entity type (Asset or Vehicle).
Click Save.
The entity type is changed and the entity will display under the applicable Map List.
Deleting a Group or Landmark
Vehicles and assets cannot be deleted; however, users with Vehicle Admin permissions can submit a request to deactivate the device. Deactivations are processed at the end of the month, after which the device is removed from registered devices and is no longer visible on the Map page.
How to Delete:
To delete, simply locate the group or landmark that you would like to delete using the Search bar at the top of the map or the Map List/Map List filter.
The corresponding Card (Landmark/Vehicle Group Card or Landmark) will display.
Click Delete.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to make the deletion.
Click Yes, Delete to delete the entry or No, Cancel to exit without making a change.
The Camera Media page provides a centralized location for managing camera clips. From this page, you can filter, view, rename, download, and request additional media clips. You can also view your clip quota and see when it will reset.
Viewing Camera Event Clips
Camera media appears in a list on the left side of the Camera Media page. You can use filters to narrow the results and quickly locate the footage you need.
Varies by camera/plan, but may include: Distracted Driver Initiated Drowsiness Follow Distance Positive Driving Hard Acceleration Hard Brake Hard Turn Phone Usage Potential Incident Seatbelt Speeding Violation Camera Obstruction Stop Sign Violation
Timeframe
Today (default) Yesterday Last 7 days Last 30 days This month Custom Range
Note: The Hierarchy feature is available only to Enterprise or Advanced Administration add-oncustomers. If you’re interested in learning more, please contact your Account Manager.
To clear Event Type filters, simply click the X to clear all selected filters, or you may click the Event Type drop-down to uncheck the box for specific filters. Additionally, an Undo button is available to reverse the most recent selection of the Event Type filter.
You may use the drop-downs for Entity Type, entity, and timeframe to adjust your selections.
How to View Camera Clips
You can view camera clips from the Camera Media page.
From the Camera Media page, locate the clip you would like to view by using the filters and/or scrolling through the list of camera clips.
(Skip this step if you have FAIO Pro Plus) Click Request Clip next to the camera event you would like to request.
A request is sent to the camera to transmit the video. Once the video is available, the icon is updated to a Play icon.
Click the Play icon for the clip you would like to view.
A pop-up window opens, and the event playback automatically starts.
Click the Full Screen icon to view the video in Full View. The following actions are also available:
Unmute: Unmute the video (muted by default) to hear audio.
Playback Rate: Change the playback speed (1x, available).
Pause: Stop the video during playback.
Note: Within Full View mode (not Split View), you can click and drag in the video to see different angles.
Managing Camera Clips
You can rename and/or download clips from the Camera Media page. Additionally, you can request more media from a clip to initiate a Manual Clip Request.
From the Camera Media page, locate the camera clip you would like to manage by using the filters and/or scrolling through the list of camera clips.
From the Clip entry, click the Overflow button to access additional options:
Rename
Enter a new name for the clip and click Save.
Download
Click the Overflow button from the Fullscreen video playback, then click Download.
You can also Download the clip from the playback pop-up by clicking the Download icon.
Request More Media
Complete the available fields in the Request Media pop-up, then click Request Media.
Requesting Media Manually
You can request camera footage from a vehicle for a specific date/time that is not connected with an auto-generated camera event. This access is helpful if you are looking into customer complaints or need to check on activity before or after a camera event.
How to Request Media Manually:
From the Camera Media page, click Request media from the left-hand List panel.
The Request media pop-up appears. In the bottom-left corner, the pop-up displays your current clip quota, allowing you to quickly see your available clips.
Note: Requested manual clips count toward your account quota.
Use the drop-down under “Vehicle” to select the applicable vehicle.
(Optional) Enter a name for the clip under “Clip Name.”
Under “Start Date”, select a date using the calendar picker.
Under “Start Time”, use the time picker to select a time or click Now.
Use the Duration drop-down to select the clip duration (30 seconds or 1 minute).
Note: A 30-second clip counts as 1 clip toward your quota; whereas a 1-minute clip counts as 2 clips toward your quota.
Click Request Media.
A message is shown toward the top-right of the screen to confirm the clip was requested successfully.
After a clip request is submitted, it may take some time for the video to appear in the list of clips while the Portal updates and the camera responds. Manually requested media clips are delineated from auto-generated camera events in the Media Results list with a “Manual” designation.
Note: Requested clips remain available in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal for 90 days from the original requestdate. Media is stored based on available capacity, and older files may be overwritten when the SD card becomes full.
Viewing Event Clip Quotas
The Camera Media page offers an at-a-glance display of your event clip quotas. If you have a combination of Driveri and Drive360/AIR II, quotas between these two types are shown separately.
To see when your quota resets, hover your mouse over the quota. A pop-over will appear showing the number of days until the next reset.
The Camera Media page in the Fleet Tracking Portal is designed to provide a centralized and focused repository of camera video clips from Driveri, Drive360, and AIR II cameras. Camera event clips are plotted on the map and you can access metadata about the vehicle’s behavior reported during the media clip’s timeframe.
Note: You must have the Camera Media permission enabled to see the Camera Media Library page in the Portal.
Accessing the Camera Media Page
To access the Camera Media Page, click the camera icon from the left-hand navigation bar in the Fleet Tracking Portal.
Filtering Camera Event Clips
You can filter camera event clips by event type, fleet subset, and time frame. Any filtering selections made are applied automatically.
Event Types
To filter by event type, click the Event type button and check the boxes next to the applicable type(s).
Note: Available event types vary depending on the camera, Driveri vs. AIR II/Drive360. If you filter by an event that is unavailable for your camera, you will not see any clips listed in the Results List.
Dangerous driving Distracted Driver initiated Drowsiness Follow distance Good driving Hard acceleration
Hard brake Hard turn Manual request Potential incident Seatbelt Speeding Violation
Fleet Subset
By default, the fleet subset selected is "Group" > "All Vehicles." To filter by fleet subset, click the expand button in the drop-down and click the applicable subset.
Note: The Hierarchy feature is available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration add-on. If you are interested in this feature, please contact your Account Manager.
Vehicle Group Vehicle Hierarchy Vehicle Driver
Time Frame
By default, the time frame displayed is "Today." To select a different time frame, click the expand button in the drop-down and click the application option to make your selection.
Today Yesterday Last 7 days
Last 30 days This month Custom range
Viewing the Results List
The Results list of camera clips displays entries based on selected filtering options. Each clip included in the list displays the vehicle label, clip name (editable), time of the day for the clip, and the type of clip event.
Note: If the clip was requested manually, the entry in the Results list displays a designation of "Manual."
You can adjust the display appearance of the Results list by clicking on the Expanded List icon. If you'd like to return to the default display appearance, click the Collapsed List icon.
Please see Using the Camera Page for step-by-step instructions on how to use each feature available from the Camera Media Page.
You can view and manage service tasks from the Maintenance tab of the Vehicle/Asset Card in the GPS Insight Manager App.
Available actions include:
Creating a service
Option to upload attachments or enter notes
Completing a service
Option to upload attachments or enter notes
Option to add Costs (Parts, Labor, Other)
Viewing the next service due
Viewing a list of all services due
Viewing a list of service history
Viewing Service Tasks
You can view details on upcoming and completed service tasks from the Manager App.
Viewing Upcoming Services
A high-level view of the next upcoming service for the vehicle/asset is provided in the "Next service due" section of the Maintenance tab. The task shown in this section is determined by the next upcoming maintenance-due interval based on miles, engine hours, and calendar date.
A list of upcoming services associated with the vehicle/asset is available under the "All services due" section.
How to View an Upcoming Service
Using the Vehicle/Asset list, tapping on a vehicle displayed on the map, or using the Search field available in the Map List, select the vehicle/asset.
The Vehicle/Asset Card appears.
Tap Maintenance.
The Maintenance tab displays.
Tap the name of the service under "Next service due" or "All services due."
The Service Detail panel appears providing the following information:
Due at/on: Interval status, Due every (if applicable)
Details: Service type, Frequency, Odometer, Engine Hours
Attachments and Notes: uploaded videos/photos and/or notes entered on service creation
Note: You can complete the upcoming service from this view by tapping Complete service and following the directions listed under Completing a Service beginning at Step #4.
Viewing Service History
You can view a list of service logs and tap a log to view detailed information about the service from the Maintenance tab.
Note: You cannot edit Service Logs from the Manager App.If you need to edit a completed service, you can do so from the Maintenance page of the Fleet Tracking Portal.
How to View Service History
Using the Vehicle/Asset list, tapping on a vehicle displayed on the map, or using the Search field available in the Map List, select the vehicle/asset.
The Vehicle/Asset Card appears.
Tap Maintenance.
The Maintenance tab displays.
Scroll down until you see the Service History section, then tap View [XX] more.
The Service history section expands to display the list of service logs associated to the vehicle/asset. The list includes the name of the service and the date on which the service was completed.
Tap on the name of a service to view detailed information in the following sections:
Completed info: Service tape, Frequency, Date, Odometer, Engine Hours, Performed By
Costs: Total, Parts, Labor Other
Attachments and notes: Any photos/videos or notes entered at the time the service was marked completed.
Creating a New Service
You can create a new service for a vehicle/asset directly from the Manager App.
How to Create a New Service
Using the Vehicle/Asset list, tapping on a vehicle displayed on the map, or using the Search field available in the Map List, select the vehicle/asset.
The Vehicle/Asset Card appears.
Tap Maintenance.
The Maintenance tab displays.
Tap + Create new service.
The Create Service panel appears. The vehicle's label and current odometer displays at the top of this panel.
In the Details section, complete the following fields:
Service name
Service type
Note: You cannot change the vehicle/asset selected (this field is greyed out). If you would like to select a different vehicle/asset, please tap the < button to exit the Create Service panel and < to exit the selected Vehicle/Asset Card.
In the Schedule and frequency section, complete the following fields:
Repeats/One-time (toggle)
If you select "Repeats," use the applicable toggles, drop-downs, and/or entry fields to enter the service due interval.
Note: If you have enabled the Due every toggle above Month, you can tap Select next service due date (defaults to today's date). If you'd like to change the date from today's date, tap the date and select a different date using the calendar.
If you select "One-time," use the entry field and the drop-down to select Miles or Hours and/or tap Select next service due date (defaults to today's date). If you'd like to change the date from today's date, tap the date and select a different date using the calendar.
In the Attachments and notes section, tap + Upload attachment to upload a photo from your device and/or use the entry field to enter applicable notes.
Tap + Create new service.
You are navigated back to the Maintenance tab. The newly created service is added to the list under All services due.
Completing a Service
You can complete an upcoming service from the Maintenance tab. When completing an upcoming service, you have the option to upload attachments, enter notes, and/or include costs (Parts, Labor, Other). If you include costs for parts, labor, and/or other, a total of these costs will be automatically calculated and included in the completed service log.
Note: You cannot edit completed services from the Manager App. If you need to edit a completed service, you can do so from the Maintenance page of the Fleet Tracking Portal.
How to Complete a Service
Using the Vehicle/Asset list, tapping on a vehicle displayed on the map, or using the Search field available in the Map List, select the vehicle/asset.
The Vehicle/Asset Card appears.
Tap Maintenance.
The Maintenance tab displays.
If you are completing the service task listed under the "Next service due" section, click Complete service. If you are completing a different upcoming service, locate the task under the "All services due" section and tap the service to open the service panel.
Note: If you have several service tasks associated with the vehicle/asset, you may need to tap View [XX] more to view all upcoming service tasks.
From the service panel, scroll to the bottom and tap Complete service.
The Complete Service panel appears. The fields under Details are auto-populated (except the Performed by field) and the Date Completed field defaults to today's date. To adjust any of the fields, tap the field and enter the applicable information.
Under Costs, enter applicable costs for Parts, Labor, and Other.
Note: If you include costs for parts, labor, and/or other, a total of these costs will be automatically calculated and included in the completed service log.
Under Attachments and notes, tap + Upload attachment to upload a photo from your device and/or use the entry field to enter applicable notes.
Tap Complete service.
You are navigated back to the service task.
Tap < (top left-corner) to return to the Maintenance tab.
The service task you completed is listed under the "Service history" section.
You can view and manage service tasks from the Maintenance tab of the Vehicle/Asset Card in the GPS Insight Manager App.
Available actions include:
Creating a service
Option to upload attachments or enter notes
Completing a service
Option to upload attachments or enter notes
Option to add Costs (Parts, Labor, Other)
Viewing the next service due
Viewing a list of all services due
Viewing a list of service history
Viewing Service Tasks
You can view details on upcoming and completed service tasks from the Manager App.
Viewing Upcoming Services
A high-level view of the next upcoming service for the vehicle/asset is provided in the "Next service due" section of the Maintenance tab. The task shown in this section is determined by the next upcoming maintenance-due interval based on miles, engine hours, and calendar date.
A list of upcoming services associated with the vehicle/asset is available under the "All services due" section.
How to View an Upcoming Service
Using the Vehicle/Asset list, tapping on a vehicle displayed on the map, or using the Search field available in the Map List, select the vehicle/asset.
The Vehicle/Asset Card appears.
Tap Maintenance.
The Maintenance tab displays.
Tap the name of the service under "Next service due" or "All services due."
The Service Detail panel appears providing the following information:
Due at/on: Interval status, Due every (if applicable)
Details: Service type, Frequency, Odometer, Engine Hours
Attachments and Notes: uploaded videos/photos and/or notes entered on service creation
Note: You can complete the upcoming service from this view by tapping Complete service and following the directions listed under Completing a Service beginning at Step #4.
Viewing Service History
You can view a list of service logs and tap a log to view detailed information about the service from the Maintenance tab.
Note: You cannot edit Service Logs from the Manager App.If you need to edit a completed service, you can do so from the Maintenance page of the Fleet Tracking Portal.
How to View Service History
Using the Vehicle/Asset list, tapping on a vehicle displayed on the map, or using the Search field available in the Map List, select the vehicle/asset.
The Vehicle/Asset Card appears.
Tap Maintenance.
The Maintenance tab displays.
Scroll down until you see the Service History section, then tap View [XX] more.
The Service history section expands to display the list of service logs associated to the vehicle/asset. The list includes the name of the service and the date on which the service was completed.
Tap on the name of a service to view detailed information in the following sections:
Completed info: Service tape, Frequency, Date, Odometer, Engine Hours, Performed By
Costs: Total, Parts, Labor Other
Attachments and notes: Any photos/videos or notes entered at the time the service was marked completed.
Creating a New Service
You can create a new service for a vehicle/asset directly from the Manager App.
How to Create a New Service
Using the Vehicle/Asset list, tapping on a vehicle displayed on the map, or using the Search field available in the Map List, select the vehicle/asset.
The Vehicle/Asset Card appears.
Tap Maintenance.
The Maintenance tab displays.
Tap + Create new service.
The Create Service panel appears. The vehicle's label and current odometer displays at the top of this panel.
In the Details section, complete the following fields:
Service name
Service type
Note: You cannot change the vehicle/asset selected (this field is greyed out). If you would like to select a different vehicle/asset, please tap the < button to exit the Create Service panel and < to exit the selected Vehicle/Asset Card.
In the Schedule and frequency section, complete the following fields:
Repeats/One-time (toggle)
If you select "Repeats," use the applicable toggles, drop-downs, and/or entry fields to enter the service due interval.
Note: If you have enabled the Due every toggle above Month, you can tap Select next service due date (defaults to today's date). If you'd like to change the date from today's date, tap the date and select a different date using the calendar.
If you select "One-time," use the entry field and the drop-down to select Miles or Hours and/or tap Select next service due date (defaults to today's date). If you'd like to change the date from today's date, tap the date and select a different date using the calendar.
In the Attachments and notes section, tap + Upload attachment to upload a photo from your device and/or use the entry field to enter applicable notes.
Tap + Create new service.
You are navigated back to the Maintenance tab. The newly created service is added to the list under All services due.
Completing a Service
You can complete an upcoming service from the Maintenance tab. When completing an upcoming service, you have the option to upload attachments, enter notes, and/or include costs (Parts, Labor, Other). If you include costs for parts, labor, and/or other, a total of these costs will be automatically calculated and included in the completed service log.
Note: You cannot edit completed services from the Manager App. If you need to edit a completed service, you can do so from the Maintenance page of the Fleet Tracking Portal.
How to Complete a Service
Using the Vehicle/Asset list, tapping on a vehicle displayed on the map, or using the Search field available in the Map List, select the vehicle/asset.
The Vehicle/Asset Card appears.
Tap Maintenance.
The Maintenance tab displays.
If you are completing the service task listed under the "Next service due" section, click Complete service. If you are completing a different upcoming service, locate the task under the "All services due" section and tap the service to open the service panel.
Note: If you have several service tasks associated with the vehicle/asset, you may need to tap View [XX] more to view all upcoming service tasks.
From the service panel, scroll to the bottom and tap Complete service.
The Complete Service panel appears. The fields under Details are auto-populated (except the Performed by field) and the Date Completed field defaults to today's date. To adjust any of the fields, tap the field and enter the applicable information.
Under Costs, enter applicable costs for Parts, Labor, and Other.
Note: If you include costs for parts, labor, and/or other, a total of these costs will be automatically calculated and included in the completed service log.
Under Attachments and notes, tap + Upload attachment to upload a photo from your device and/or use the entry field to enter applicable notes.
Tap Complete service.
You are navigated back to the service task.
Tap < (top left-corner) to return to the Maintenance tab.
The service task you completed is listed under the "Service history" section.
The Camera Media page in the Fleet Tracking Portal is designed to provide a centralized and focused repository of camera video clips from Driveri, Drive360, and AIR II cameras. Camera event clips are plotted on the map and you can access metadata about the vehicle’s behavior reported during the media clip’s timeframe.
Note: You must have the Camera Media permission enabled to see the Camera Media Library page in the Portal.
Accessing the Camera Media Page
To access the Camera Media Page, click the camera icon from the left-hand navigation bar in the Fleet Tracking Portal.
Filtering Camera Event Clips
You can filter camera event clips by event type, fleet subset, and time frame. Any filtering selections made are applied automatically.
Event Types
To filter by event type, click the Event type button and check the boxes next to the applicable type(s).
Note: Available event types vary depending on the camera, Driveri vs. AIR II/Drive360. If you filter by an event that is unavailable for your camera, you will not see any clips listed in the Results List.
Dangerous driving Distracted Driver initiated Drowsiness Follow distance Good driving Hard acceleration
Hard brake Hard turn Manual request Potential incident Seatbelt Speeding Violation
Fleet Subset
By default, the fleet subset selected is "Group" > "All Vehicles." To filter by fleet subset, click the expand button in the drop-down and click the applicable subset.
Note: The Hierarchy feature is available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration add-on. If you are interested in this feature, please contact your Account Manager.
Vehicle Group Vehicle Hierarchy Vehicle Driver
Time Frame
By default, the time frame displayed is "Today." To select a different time frame, click the expand button in the drop-down and click the application option to make your selection.
Today Yesterday Last 7 days
Last 30 days This month Custom range
Viewing the Results List
The Results list of camera clips displays entries based on selected filtering options. Each clip included in the list displays the vehicle label, clip name (editable), time of the day for the clip, and the type of clip event.
Note: If the clip was requested manually, the entry in the Results list displays a designation of "Manual."
You can adjust the display appearance of the Results list by clicking on the Expanded List icon. If you'd like to return to the default display appearance, click the Collapsed List icon.
Please see Using the Camera Page for step-by-step instructions on how to use each feature available from the Camera Media Page.
[post_title] => About the Camera Media Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-camera-media-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-07 13:28:00
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-07 20:28:00
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=31953
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27097
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-05-05 09:32:16
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-05-05 16:32:16
[post_content] => The Fleetio integration pushes your DTC, odometer/runtime, secondary meter, and vehicle location data from [whitelabel_name] to Fleetio. This integration automatically captures telematics data, making it easier to keep up with preventive maintenance and respond quickly to vehicle issues from Fleetio.
Data sync occurs once a day in the following manner:
- Odometer & Engine Hours: Nightly
- Location: Every 6 hours
- DTCs: Near real-time
Integration Benefits
Manage preventive maintenance and diagnostics trouble codes within Fleetio from the [whitelabel_name] integration
Automatically view odometer readings and secondary meter runtime data for any vehicle with an additional meter within Fleetio
PTO data is not available.
View asset location, driving status, and more in the vehicle profile screen
Configuring the Integration
The below instructions are for Enterprise customers only. Standard customers must contact their Account Managers to configure this integration.
Use the below instructions to set up the Fleetio integration.
Before starting, ensure the vehicles' VINs in the GPS portal matches the VINs in the Fleetio system. Additionally, you must generate a new API token from the Fleetio system (from the Fleetio main menu > API Keys).
From the Classic Portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Webhooks, and click Open.
The Webhook Manager opens in a new browser tab.
Under Available Integrations, click the green plus sign () next to Fleetio.
The Fleetio integration window appears.
Enter the required properties for the integration:
Update Location: Select the box to integrate location updates (optional).
Update Odometer: Select the box to integrate odometer updates (optional).
Update Secondary Meter: Select the Runtime option to integrate secondary meter updates (optional).
Diagnostic Trouble Codes: Select the box to integrate DTCs (optional).
Click Add.
The third party integration(s) are assigned an ID and appears in the 3rd Party Integrations grid. There will be a separate ID for each integration type (e.g., Fleetio Odometer, Fleetio DTC, etc.). Additional information is provided for Status and Queue Depth. An option to delete the integration(s) is also available.
[post_title] => About the Fleetio Integration
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-fleetio-integration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-07-16 12:49:48
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-07-16 19:49:48
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27097
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24732
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-04-20 09:27:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-04-20 16:27:50
[post_content] =>
Customers with Epicor have an on-premises BisTrack server implementation. With our integration, their server's address is configured as a destination for location alerts from our Portal. This custom setup needs to be done once before they start pushing alerts to their BisTrack server.
How to Set Up EPICOR Integration
Send a request to your Epicor account representative asking for "Geo-Fence push notifications be enabled."
Epicor reaches out to our team directly with the details needed for the integration.
Our team completes the setup and confirms it directly with Epicor. This typically takes 1–2 business days from when Epicor makes the request.
Match your vehicles in BisTrack (see Matching Vehicles in BisTrack below).
Configure Landmark Alerts in the Portal. Enter the word PUSH in the Email Notification field (the addresses field in Classic) for each alert covering the vehicles and landmark groups you want reported to BisTrack.
The integration is complete. As alerts are generated in our Portal, the configured alerts will be sent directly to your Epicor BisTrack server.
Matching Vehicles in BisTrack
For BisTrack to update a Delivery from a GPS Fleet Tracking alert, it needs to find the matching vehicle. BisTrack looks up vehicles using the Registration field.
The Registration value on each BisTrack Vehicle must be an exact match to the VIN registered with us. Extra spaces, missing characters, or a license plate number in place of the VIN will prevent the match.
To confirm your vehicles are matched:
In BisTrack, open the Audit Log.
For each VIN listed, open or create the matching Vehicle in BisTrack and update the Registration field to the exact VIN.
Look for entries that read "No vehicle found in BisTrack with registration [VIN]."
📝 Note: If a listed vehicle is not used on BisTrack Deliveries, no action is needed.
The integration is complete. As alerts are generated in the Portal, the configured alerts are sent directly to your Epicor BisTrack server.
How Deliveries are Updated
Once a vehicle is matched and assigned to a Delivery in the correct status, BisTrack automatically updates that Delivery when a Landmark Alert is triggered.
Need help?
For BisTrack Vehicle setup or Delivery operations: Submit an EpicCare Case, and BisTrack Support will assist.
For Landmark Alerts or Portal questions: Contact GPS Fleet Tracking Support.
The Camera Media page provides a centralized location for managing camera clips. From this page, you can filter, view, rename, download, and request additional media clips. You can also view your clip quota and see when it will reset.
Viewing Camera Event Clips
Camera media appears in a list on the left side of the Camera Media page. You can use filters to narrow the results and quickly locate the footage you need.
Varies by camera/plan, but may include: Distracted Driver Initiated Drowsiness Follow Distance Positive Driving Hard Acceleration Hard Brake Hard Turn Phone Usage Potential Incident Seatbelt Speeding Violation Camera Obstruction Stop Sign Violation
Timeframe
Today (default) Yesterday Last 7 days Last 30 days This month Custom Range
Note: The Hierarchy feature is available only to Enterprise or Advanced Administration add-oncustomers. If you’re interested in learning more, please contact your Account Manager.
To clear Event Type filters, simply click the X to clear all selected filters, or you may click the Event Type drop-down to uncheck the box for specific filters. Additionally, an Undo button is available to reverse the most recent selection of the Event Type filter.
You may use the drop-downs for Entity Type, entity, and timeframe to adjust your selections.
How to View Camera Clips
You can view camera clips from the Camera Media page.
From the Camera Media page, locate the clip you would like to view by using the filters and/or scrolling through the list of camera clips.
(Skip this step if you have FAIO Pro Plus) Click Request Clip next to the camera event you would like to request.
A request is sent to the camera to transmit the video. Once the video is available, the icon is updated to a Play icon.
Click the Play icon for the clip you would like to view.
A pop-up window opens, and the event playback automatically starts.
Click the Full Screen icon to view the video in Full View. The following actions are also available:
Unmute: Unmute the video (muted by default) to hear audio.
Playback Rate: Change the playback speed (1x, available).
Pause: Stop the video during playback.
Note: Within Full View mode (not Split View), you can click and drag in the video to see different angles.
Managing Camera Clips
You can rename and/or download clips from the Camera Media page. Additionally, you can request more media from a clip to initiate a Manual Clip Request.
From the Camera Media page, locate the camera clip you would like to manage by using the filters and/or scrolling through the list of camera clips.
From the Clip entry, click the Overflow button to access additional options:
Rename
Enter a new name for the clip and click Save.
Download
Click the Overflow button from the Fullscreen video playback, then click Download.
You can also Download the clip from the playback pop-up by clicking the Download icon.
Request More Media
Complete the available fields in the Request Media pop-up, then click Request Media.
Requesting Media Manually
You can request camera footage from a vehicle for a specific date/time that is not connected with an auto-generated camera event. This access is helpful if you are looking into customer complaints or need to check on activity before or after a camera event.
How to Request Media Manually:
From the Camera Media page, click Request media from the left-hand List panel.
The Request media pop-up appears. In the bottom-left corner, the pop-up displays your current clip quota, allowing you to quickly see your available clips.
Note: Requested manual clips count toward your account quota.
Use the drop-down under “Vehicle” to select the applicable vehicle.
(Optional) Enter a name for the clip under “Clip Name.”
Under “Start Date”, select a date using the calendar picker.
Under “Start Time”, use the time picker to select a time or click Now.
Use the Duration drop-down to select the clip duration (30 seconds or 1 minute).
Note: A 30-second clip counts as 1 clip toward your quota; whereas a 1-minute clip counts as 2 clips toward your quota.
Click Request Media.
A message is shown toward the top-right of the screen to confirm the clip was requested successfully.
After a clip request is submitted, it may take some time for the video to appear in the list of clips while the Portal updates and the camera responds. Manually requested media clips are delineated from auto-generated camera events in the Media Results list with a “Manual” designation.
Note: Requested clips remain available in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal for 90 days from the original requestdate. Media is stored based on available capacity, and older files may be overwritten when the SD card becomes full.
Viewing Event Clip Quotas
The Camera Media page offers an at-a-glance display of your event clip quotas. If you have a combination of Driveri and Drive360/AIR II, quotas between these two types are shown separately.
To see when your quota resets, hover your mouse over the quota. A pop-over will appear showing the number of days until the next reset.
[post_title] => Using the Camera Media Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-camera-media-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-03-24 09:26:48
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-03-24 16:26:48
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 31953
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=31979
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 31696
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-11-22 11:21:35
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-11-22 18:21:35
[post_content] => [whitelabel_name] and Whip Around have partnered to simplify fleet management by enabling seamless integration between the two platforms. This integration allows Whip Around to pull critical fleet data from [whitelabel_name], including vehicle location, history, and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) data. To initiate the integration, you will need to generate an App Token from within the [whitelabel_name] Portal.
What is an App Token? An App Token is the most secure method for authenticating API access without exposing your login credentials. It acts as an alias for your credentials, enabling you to retrieve a session token securely. This authentication method is ideal for scenarios where you want to avoid passing sensitive login details through HTTP requests or sharing your portal credentials with third-party vendors. Additionally, access granted through the App Token can be revoked or modified any time.
Generating an App Token
Standard Tier Customers: Please contact your Account Manager or Support team to request the creation of an App Token for the Whip Around integration.
Pro/Enterprise Customers: Follow the steps below to generate your own App Token:
Log in to the [whitelabel_name] Portal.
From the Explore page, click Manage Users.
From the Manage Users and Groups page, click Third-Party Access to API V2 Functions.
In the API Apps List grid, click the API App button next to Create New.
In the New API App window, enter an App Name and Description, then click Save API App.
A new App Token will be generated.
Benefits of Using an App Token
The App Token authentication method offers several advantages:
It does not grant access to the [whitelabel_name] Portal
It can be easily changed or deactivated by an admin user
App usage can be monitored and tracked
Password changes will not affect the API flow, unlike regular login credentials
Limiting Vehicle Access for API Users - If you do not want the API to have access to all vehicles in your fleet, we recommend creating a dedicated Whip Around user with restricted vehicle access and permissions for API use only. For example, you can create a user named simplytransit.whiparound specifically for API access. This way, you can ensure that only specific vehicles and data are accessible to Whip Around.
Completing the Integration Setup
Once you have your App Token, along with the [whitelabel_name] username, copy, and paste it into the Whip Around integration setup page to complete the connection.
From the left column, click Integrations.
Under [whitelabel_name], select Activate.
Enter your [whitelabel_name] username and App Token.
Click Submit.
Vehicle Data Synchronization
For Whip Around to correctly match your [whitelabel_name] vehicle data with the Whip Around portal, ensure that vehicles in both systems have matching VINs assigned. This will allow the data to sync accurately between the two platforms.
[post_title] => Whip Around Integration
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => whip-around-integration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-11-22 13:11:31
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-11-22 20:11:31
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=31696
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 5
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 31953
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2025-02-07 08:28:16
[post_date_gmt] => 2025-02-07 15:28:16
[post_content] =>
The Camera Media page in the Fleet Tracking Portal is designed to provide a centralized and focused repository of camera video clips from Driveri, Drive360, and AIR II cameras. Camera event clips are plotted on the map and you can access metadata about the vehicle’s behavior reported during the media clip’s timeframe.
Note: You must have the Camera Media permission enabled to see the Camera Media Library page in the Portal.
Accessing the Camera Media Page
To access the Camera Media Page, click the camera icon from the left-hand navigation bar in the Fleet Tracking Portal.
Filtering Camera Event Clips
You can filter camera event clips by event type, fleet subset, and time frame. Any filtering selections made are applied automatically.
Event Types
To filter by event type, click the Event type button and check the boxes next to the applicable type(s).
Note: Available event types vary depending on the camera, Driveri vs. AIR II/Drive360. If you filter by an event that is unavailable for your camera, you will not see any clips listed in the Results List.
Dangerous driving Distracted Driver initiated Drowsiness Follow distance Good driving Hard acceleration
Hard brake Hard turn Manual request Potential incident Seatbelt Speeding Violation
Fleet Subset
By default, the fleet subset selected is "Group" > "All Vehicles." To filter by fleet subset, click the expand button in the drop-down and click the applicable subset.
Note: The Hierarchy feature is available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration add-on. If you are interested in this feature, please contact your Account Manager.
Vehicle Group Vehicle Hierarchy Vehicle Driver
Time Frame
By default, the time frame displayed is "Today." To select a different time frame, click the expand button in the drop-down and click the application option to make your selection.
Today Yesterday Last 7 days
Last 30 days This month Custom range
Viewing the Results List
The Results list of camera clips displays entries based on selected filtering options. Each clip included in the list displays the vehicle label, clip name (editable), time of the day for the clip, and the type of clip event.
Note: If the clip was requested manually, the entry in the Results list displays a designation of "Manual."
You can adjust the display appearance of the Results list by clicking on the Expanded List icon. If you'd like to return to the default display appearance, click the Collapsed List icon.
Please see Using the Camera Page for step-by-step instructions on how to use each feature available from the Camera Media Page.
You can log a Completed Service that is not connected to an upcoming service task.
A Service Log entered without a corresponding service task will not schedule or affect upcoming services. A history of service will not show for that log.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, click + Add service log.
The Add service log panel appears.
Under Details, complete the following fields:
Service name (Required)
Vehicle (Required)
Service type (Required)
Date completed (Required)
Odometer at service
Engine hours at service
Performed by
Under Costs, complete the following fields:
Total
Parts
Labor
Other
Under Attachments & Notes, upload applicable attachments using the Upload Attachment button or enter applicable notes in the Notes field (1,000 character max.)
Click + Add log.
A pop-up appears at the top right-hand corner of the screen confirming you have successfully created a completed service.
Editing a Completed Service
Make an edit to a completed service quickly from the Maintenance Page.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, locate the completed service you want to edit then click on the Edit button () under the Actions column in the corresponding row.
The Edit completed service panel appears.
Make your edits. All fields under the Completed info, Costs, and Attachments & Notes sections can be edited.
All fields under Schedule & frequency are not editable.
Click Save & return.
A pop-up appears at the top right-hand corner of the screen confirming you have successfully edited the completed service.
Viewing Completed Service Task Details
You can view detailed information about a completed service using the View Details button.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, locate the Service Task you want to view then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click on View Details.
The Completed service details panel appears showing the following:
Service type
Frequency
Service date
Odometer at service
Engine hours at service
Performed by
Attachments and notes
From this panel, you can also view service history and perform actions such as editing, applying the service to other vehicles, or deleting the service.
Applying Completed Service to Other Vehicles
You can apply a completed service to one or more vehicles from the Completed Services tab.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, locate the completed service you want to apply then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click Apply service to other vehicles.
The Create service template pop-up appears.
The Details and Schedule & frequency sections are pre-populated with information from the current service task; however, the fields can be edited.
Make edits to the Details and Schedule & frequency sections if applicable then click Save & Continue.
The Create multiple services page appears with the Add vehicles & assets panel open to the right-hand side of the page.
Select Groups or Hierarchies.
To select a vehicle or a group/hierarchy, use the drop-down, list search field, or list. You can also use the Add all button to apply the service task to all vehicles and assets in your fleet.
Selected vehicles, groups, or hierarchies appear under Vehicles added.
You can make edits to available fields under the Next service at/on column or use the Actions column to add the service task by clicking + next to selected vehicles one at a time, clicking + Create services to apply to all selected vehicles, or remove the selected vehicle by clicking on the X button.
Click on the Maintenance icon in the menu navigation bar to return to the Maintenance Page.
Viewing Vehicle Service Logs
You can use the View vehicle's service button to be directed to a vehicle's Vehicle Card displaying Service Logs.
From the Maintenance Page, locate the completed service you want to delete then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click View vehicle's service.
You are redirected to the Map page showing the selected vehicle's Maintenance tab on its Vehicle Card.
Deleting a Completed Service Task
Delete a completed service task quickly from the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, locate the completed service you want to delete then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click Delete.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the selected completed service.
Click Yes, delete to delete the completed service or Cancel to exit without deleting the completed service.
[post_title] => Managing Completed Services
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-completed-services
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-05-30 12:18:35
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-05-30 19:18:35
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 30899
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=31235
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 31203
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-08-29 07:07:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-08-29 14:07:09
[post_content] => You can create, edit, and manage Service Tasks for all assets in your fleet from the Services Due tab of the Maintenance Page.
Creating a New Service Tasks
Learn how to efficiently create a new service task from the Maintenance Page in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal by following the steps below to streamline your service task creation process. You can create a service task for one or more vehicles at a time.
The gif above shows the process for creating an individual service task.
From the Maintenance Page, click + Create service.
Click Service task to create an individual service task or click Multiple service tasks to create a service task to be applied to multiple vehicles.
The Create Service card form appears for an individual service task or if you selected to create multiple service tasks then the Create service template card appears.
In the Service name field, add a service name.
If creating an individual service task, select the applicable vehicle using the Vehicle drop-down.
After selecting a vehicle, the vehicle's odometer and engine hours (if available) are automatically populated.
Select a service type using the drop-down.
Select the Service Frequency: Repeats or One-time.
A message appears instructing you to select at least one of the Due options:
Due Every in Miles or Kilometers
Due Every in Days or Weeks.
You can select both Due options.
Click the checkbox next to your selected "Due at" option.
Enter the applicable distance or duration in the corresponding field. You can use the available drop-downs to change the distance or duration measurements (Miles/Kilometers or Days/Weeks).
If creating an individual service task, upload any applicable attachments using the Upload attachment button and/or enter applicable notes in the Notes field.
Click + Create for an individual service task or Save & Continue for multiple service task creation.
For an individual service task, the Service task created is added to the Services Due table. If you are creating multiple service tasks, the Create multiple services page appears.
From the Add vehicles & assets panel open on the right-hand side, use the Groups/Hierarchies toggle, drop-down, list, or Add all buttons to select applicable vehicles.
Click +Create services, then click Yes, create.
The service task is created for all of the selected vehicles and appears on the Services Due tab.
Viewing Service Task Details
You can view detailed information about a service Task using the View Details button.
From the Maintenance Page, locate the Service Task you want to view then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click on View Details.
The Service details panel appears showing the following:
Due in status
Odometer (due at)
Due date
Service type
Frequency
Current odometer
Current engine hrs
Attachments and notes
From this panel, you can also view service history and perform actions such as editing, marking the service as complete, applying the service to other vehicles, or deleting the service.
Editing an Upcoming Service Task
Make an edit to an upcoming Service Task quickly from the Maintenance Page.
From the Maintenance Page, locate the Service Task you want to edit then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click Edit.
The Edit service panel appears in editable form. All fields are editable, except for the Vehicle and Service type drop-downs and Service frequency toggle.
You can also access the Service Details panel by clicking on the Service name (in blue font) from the Service Task row under the Service Name column and clicking Edit.
Make your edits and click Save.
The updated Service Details panel is shown.
Applying Service to Other Vehicles
You can apply a service to one or more vehicles directly from the Maintenance Page.
From the Maintenance Page, locate the Service Task you want to apply then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click Apply service to other vehicles.
The Create service template pop-up appears.
The Details and Schedule & frequency sections are pre-populated with information from the current service task; however, the fields can be edited.
Make edits to the Details and Schedule & frequency sections if applicable then click Save & Continue.
The Create multiple services page appears with the Add vehicles & assets panel open to the right-hand side of the page.
Select Groups or Hierarchies.
To select a vehicle or a group/hierarchy, use the drop-down, list search field, or list. You can also use the Add all button to apply the service task to all vehicles and assets in your fleet.
Selected vehicles, groups, or hierarchies appear under Vehicles added.
You can make edits to available fields under the Next service at/on column or use the Actions column to add the service task by clicking + or remove the selected vehicle by clicking on the X button.
Click on the Maintenance icon in the menu navigation bar to return to the Maintenance Page.
Viewing Vehicle Service Logs
You can use the View vehicle's service button to be directed to a vehicle's Vehicle Card displaying Service Logs.
From the Maintenance Page, locate the Service Task you want to delete then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click View vehicle's service.
You are redirected to the Map page showing the selected vehicle's Maintenance tab on its Vehicle Card.
Deleting a Service Task
Delete an upcoming Service Task quickly from the Maintenance Page.
From the Maintenance Page, locate the Service Task you want to delete then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click Delete.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the selected Service Task.
Click Yes, delete to delete the Service Task or Cancel to exit without deleting the Service Task.
Completing a Service Task
You can close out a Service Task by marking it as Complete from the Maintenance Page.
From the Maintenance Page, locate the Service Task you want to close out then click Complete under the Actions column.
The Complete Service pop-up appears.
Enter the date the service was completed on by typing the date into the Date Completed field or using the calendar tool.
Optional: Enter the associated cost of the service in the Service cost field.
Optional: Enter the value of the odometer at the time of the service in the Odometer at service field.
Optional: Enter the engine hours at the time of the service in the Engine hrs at service field.
Optional: Add any applicable notes to the Notes field.
Click Complete.
The Service Task is marked as Complete and is removed from the Service Due table.
[post_title] => Managing Service Tasks
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-service-tasks
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-02-11 12:20:57
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-02-11 19:20:57
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 30899
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=31203
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 30899
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-06-06 13:23:52
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-06-06 20:23:52
[post_content] => All scheduled and completed maintenance service tasks are available in a single view from the Maintenance Page in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal. From this page, you can also:
Filter/search/sort table to view sub-sets of upcoming and completed service tasks
Categorize tasks into Service Type
Create and log new service tasks for one or more vehicles
Create and edit upcoming and completed service tasks
Add notes and/or attachments (e.g., documents, photos, etc,.) to tasks
Track costs
Complete scheduled service tasks
Viewing Maintenance Services
The Maintenance Page lists all Service Tasks and Service Logs in table format. Use the Services Due tab to engage with your Service Tasks and the Completed Services tab to engage with your Service Logs.
On each tab, you can sort table columns using the ascending and descending buttons next to the column headers.
Services Due Tab
The Services Due tab includes a table showing task information by service name, vehicle name, status, due in (miles, hours, or date), ADU (Average Daily Use - Miles/Hours driven by the vehicle each day on average), days (number of days until a Service item is due based upon the ADU), due on (miles, hours, or date), frequency, service type, current odometer, current engine hours, and the actions due.
For instructions on how to use the Services Due Tab, please visit Managing Service Tasks.
Completed Services Tab
The Services Due tab includes a table showing task information by service name, vehicle name, status, service type, serviced on, performed by, total costs, odometer at service, engine hour at service, and the actions completed.
For instructions on how to use the Services Due Tab, please visit Managing Completed Services.
Filtering Tasks and Logs
To filter your view of tasks and logs, you can use the filter type buttons available at the top of the table or you can use the All Filters drop-down.
Filter options are available for the following data:
Due: Not due, Due soon, Overdue
Metrics:Miles, Engine hours, Date
Frequency: Repeats, One Time
Service Type: Administrative, Brakes, Critical repair, General service, Oil change, Other, Preventative maintenance, Repair, Scheduled service, Tire rotation, Transmission
Groups & Hierarchies: Available options dependent upon groups and hierarchies created in the account.
The Hierarchy feature is available to Enterprise customers and customers using the Advanced Administration add-on. If you'd like to learn more, please contact your Account Manager.
Searching for a Service Task or Completed Service
You can also use the Search field to search Service Tasks and Service Logs by vehicle, service name, or type.
Downloading a .CSV
You can also download a .csv of Service Tasks and Service Logs from the tabs with a single click by using the Download button.
The .csv file includes:
Any notes entered in Service Tasks and Logs
Distance values, such as odometer readings and distance-based intervals, in your configured distance unit (Miles or Kilometers)
Distance units in your exports follow your Measurement Units setting in User Preferences: US (Standard): Distances export in Miles or Metric: Distances export in Kilometers. To change your distance unit, go to User Preferences and update Measurement Units.
Adjusting "Due Soon" Threshold
You can adjust the "Due Soon" threshold (days) for Service Tasks in bulk by using the Settings button on the Services Due tab.
Service Reminders & History Report
The Service Reminders & History report displays pending service reminders and past service history for a selected data source (Vehicle, Vehicle Groups, Vehicle Hierarchies, Assets). After you have run the report, there are two tabs available: Service Reminders and Service History.
All elements within the tabs of this report can be filtered, minimized/maximized, exported, and refreshed.
Service Reminders
In the Service Reminders tab, you can see the number of vehicles included in the report data, a visual representation of service immediacy for vehicles, and a sortable list of service reminders showing vehicle, VIN, Driver (if applicable), Service, Interval (if applicable), Interval Type, Next Service, Odometer, End of Day Landmark (if applicable), and Data Source.
The Service Reminders tab can be filtered by the following within the report:
Vehicle
Driver
Next Service Due
You can further adjust the report results with the following options:
Display Distance In (Miles or Kilometers)
Hide Drivers
Hide Location
Service History
In the Service History tab, you can see the number of vehicles included in the report, the total number of services for the timeframe selected, the total cost of services and a list of Service Logs by vehicle showing VIN, Total Service Cost, Service(s), date service was performed on, engine hours at time of service, odometer value at time of service, and service cost.
The Service History tab can be filtered by the following within the report:
Date Range
Vehicle
You can further adjust the report results with the following options:
Display Distance In (Miles or Kilometers)
Additional Resources
If you have questions about the Maintenance Page, please visit Maintenance Page FAQ.
If you'd like instructions on managing service tasks, please visit Managing Service Tasks.
If you'd like instructions on managing service logs, please visit Managing Completed Services.
[post_title] => Using the Maintenance Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-maintenance-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-10-01 08:13:05
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-10-01 15:13:05
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=30899
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25148
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-08-29 12:52:23
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-08-29 19:52:23
[post_content] => The Portal allows you to track vehicle maintenance through scheduled maintenance services. You can view, add, and manage vehicle maintenance for a vehicle using the Maintenance tab from the Vehicle Card on the Map.
A comprehensive list of services due and services completed for the fleet is available from the Maintenance Page.
In order to manage maintenance items, you must have the Maintenance permission enabled in the User Access List and the Service Reminder item enabled in the Menu Access List (Account Category).
Managing Service Tasks
You can create a new service entry, manage, and view services due and/or completed services for a vehicle from the Maintenance tab of the Vehicle Card.
Viewing Upcoming and Completed Services
You can view upcoming and completed services from the Maintenance tab by using the toggle, click Due to see a list of upcoming service tasks and click Completed to view a list of completed service tasks for the selected vehicle.
Viewing Completed Services
From the Vehicle Card, click the Maintenance tab.
A list of current services due are displayed by default.
Click the Completed toggle.
The Completed service list displays.
You can:
Use the Search field to search for a completed service
Filter the list by occurrence (one-time or repeat) using the Filter button
Sort the list in ascending/descending order by Name, Date, or Cost
View all completed service items using the pages at the bottom
Creating a Service Task
You can create a service task directly from the Maintenance tab of the Vehicle Card.
From the Map page, select a vehicle using the Vehicle List, clicking on the vehicle from the map, or the search field.
Once you have selected a vehicle, the Vehicle Card appears.
Click Maintenance.
The Due toggle is selected by default.
Click + Create.
Under the Details section, complete the following fields:
Service name
Service Type
Under the Schedule & Frequency section, complete the following fields:
Service frequency
Due at and/or Due on
Under Attachment & Notes, use the Upload Attachment button to upload any attachments and/or enter a note in the Notes field (1,000 character max.).
Click + Create service.
Managing Upcoming Service Tasks
You can view a summary of an upcoming service task and service history connected with the task. You can also edit the service task and mark the task as complete directly from the Vehicle Card.
From the Map page, select a vehicle using the Vehicle List, clicking on the vehicle from the map, or the search field.
Once you have selected a vehicle, the Vehicle Card appears.
Click Maintenance.
The Due toggle is selected by default.
Locate the service you would like to manage in the list of Services, then click the title of the service task.
Service details are shown. The Overview tab is displayed by default showing a summary of the details. From this view you can perform the following actions:
View Service History: Click Service History to view a list of logs connected to the service task.
Edit the Service Task: Click Edit to make edits to the service task, then click Save changes.
Mark the task as Complete: Click Complete. The Complete service pop-up appears, make applicable changes to the available fields (Date Completed field defaults to the current date), and then click Complete service.
Delete the Service Task: Click the overflow icon , then click Delete.
[post_title] => Vehicle Card - Vehicle Maintenance
[post_excerpt] => This article provides an overview of maintenance reminders and service logs from the Vehicle Card on the Map page.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => vehicle-card-vehicle-maintenance
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-03-13 13:01:46
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-03-13 20:01:46
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25148
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 4
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 31235
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-08-29 12:59:18
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-08-29 19:59:18
[post_content] => You can create, edit, and manage completed services for all assets in your fleet from the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page.
Creating a Completed Service Log
You can log a Completed Service that is not connected to an upcoming service task.
A Service Log entered without a corresponding service task will not schedule or affect upcoming services. A history of service will not show for that log.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, click + Add service log.
The Add service log panel appears.
Under Details, complete the following fields:
Service name (Required)
Vehicle (Required)
Service type (Required)
Date completed (Required)
Odometer at service
Engine hours at service
Performed by
Under Costs, complete the following fields:
Total
Parts
Labor
Other
Under Attachments & Notes, upload applicable attachments using the Upload Attachment button or enter applicable notes in the Notes field (1,000 character max.)
Click + Add log.
A pop-up appears at the top right-hand corner of the screen confirming you have successfully created a completed service.
Editing a Completed Service
Make an edit to a completed service quickly from the Maintenance Page.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, locate the completed service you want to edit then click on the Edit button () under the Actions column in the corresponding row.
The Edit completed service panel appears.
Make your edits. All fields under the Completed info, Costs, and Attachments & Notes sections can be edited.
All fields under Schedule & frequency are not editable.
Click Save & return.
A pop-up appears at the top right-hand corner of the screen confirming you have successfully edited the completed service.
Viewing Completed Service Task Details
You can view detailed information about a completed service using the View Details button.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, locate the Service Task you want to view then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click on View Details.
The Completed service details panel appears showing the following:
Service type
Frequency
Service date
Odometer at service
Engine hours at service
Performed by
Attachments and notes
From this panel, you can also view service history and perform actions such as editing, applying the service to other vehicles, or deleting the service.
Applying Completed Service to Other Vehicles
You can apply a completed service to one or more vehicles from the Completed Services tab.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, locate the completed service you want to apply then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click Apply service to other vehicles.
The Create service template pop-up appears.
The Details and Schedule & frequency sections are pre-populated with information from the current service task; however, the fields can be edited.
Make edits to the Details and Schedule & frequency sections if applicable then click Save & Continue.
The Create multiple services page appears with the Add vehicles & assets panel open to the right-hand side of the page.
Select Groups or Hierarchies.
To select a vehicle or a group/hierarchy, use the drop-down, list search field, or list. You can also use the Add all button to apply the service task to all vehicles and assets in your fleet.
Selected vehicles, groups, or hierarchies appear under Vehicles added.
You can make edits to available fields under the Next service at/on column or use the Actions column to add the service task by clicking + next to selected vehicles one at a time, clicking + Create services to apply to all selected vehicles, or remove the selected vehicle by clicking on the X button.
Click on the Maintenance icon in the menu navigation bar to return to the Maintenance Page.
Viewing Vehicle Service Logs
You can use the View vehicle's service button to be directed to a vehicle's Vehicle Card displaying Service Logs.
From the Maintenance Page, locate the completed service you want to delete then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click View vehicle's service.
You are redirected to the Map page showing the selected vehicle's Maintenance tab on its Vehicle Card.
Deleting a Completed Service Task
Delete a completed service task quickly from the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page.
From the Completed Services tab of the Maintenance Page, locate the completed service you want to delete then click on the Overflow button () under the Actions column.
Click Delete.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the selected completed service.
Click Yes, delete to delete the completed service or Cancel to exit without deleting the completed service.
The Map page offers a simplified, two-dimensional view of your workspace, making it easy to manage vehicles, drivers, and landmarks. It includes two map tabs: Current and History.
The Current tab—also known as the Live Map—provides real-time visibility into your fleet. Vehicle/Asset and Driver locations and statuses update instantly as changes occur, ensuring you always have the most up-to-date information at a glance.
The History tab lets you review your fleet’s past activity directly on the map. You can explore trip history, camera events (if applicable), and use location playback to view vehicle movement within specific timeframes or landmark boundaries, providing valuable insights into past operations.
The Driver feature is only available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration add-on. If you are interested in learning more, please contact your Account Manager.
Viewing the Map
You can view Map Cards by clicking on a vehicle, landmark, asset, or driver directly from the map or the list on the left-hand side.
For a quick glance, simply hover your mouse over map objects—such as vehicles, landmarks, or assets—to view a pop-over with key information, without opening the full Map Card.
The pop-over displays an address when one is associated with the pin point. If the pin point does not have an associated address (e.g., pin-point is moving along a road, etc.,), the pop-over displays latitude and longitude coordinates instead.
Depending on the object, the pop-over may also include action buttons, allowing you to perform certain tasks directly from the pop-over. Please refer to the table below for a list of available pop-overs and corresponding available actions.
Disabling Pop-Overs
To disable pop-overs on the Map, go to Map Preferences and uncheck the boxes for Vehicle and Asset Popovers, Landmark Popovers, and/or History Trail Popovers.
Current Tab Pop-Overs
A user must have the View/Edit Landmarks permission and enable the Map Preference “Show by default: Landmark labels” to edit and/or send a dispatch from the Landmark pop-over.
Pop-Over
Available Actions
Vehicle
Follow, Isolate, Edit
Asset
Dispatch, Edit
Landmark
Send Dispatch, Edit
History Tab Pop-Overs
To access pop-overs on the History tab, please click on the map object.
Map options give you control over how information is displayed and interacted with on the map. You can filter lists, switch to Full-Screen view, adjust the zoom level, toggle between Street Map and Satellite Imagery, display terrain, enable Street View, and more.
Refer to the table below for a complete list of available map options and their functions.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|25%|60%"]
Number, Option, Description
1,Lists,View drivers\, vehicles\, and landmarks in your fleet.
2,Filter,Filter the map by vehicle\, hierarchy\, group\, vehicle status\, landmarks\, and/or Drivers. You may also filter the map to hide unavailable/out-of-range vehicles.
3,Toggle Panel,Click this button to show or hide the lists panel.
4,Map Type,Switch between Current or History map.
5,Search,Use this field to search the map by vehicle\, driver\, landmark\, user\, or address..
6,Map Preferences,Click the preferences button to adjust cluster levels\, trail threshold\, vehicle labels\, map markers\, and weather opacity.
7,Map Refresh Timer,Allows you to see when your map is set to be updated with vehicle locations next.
8,Profile Button,Includes name of user\, username\, account name\, and tier. You may also log out of the Portal by clicking Logout.
9,Map Options,Click Map Options to show and select multiple map styles\, data source\, and map overlays.
10,Full Screen,Expand the map fullscreen. To exit fullscreen\, press the Escape (Esc) button on your keyboard.
11,Map Controls,Use the Map Controls to interact with the map the way you prefer.
12,Street View,Drag the yellow peg man to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper-right corner to exit.)
13,Zoom in/out,Click + to zoom toward the center of the map. Click – to zoom outward from the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
14,Legend,Use the Legend tool to view the meaning of color-coded icon shapes present on the map.
[/et]
[post_title] => About the Map Page
[post_excerpt] => The Map transforms your workspace to a single 2D map with quick access to management of vehicles, landmarks, dispatching, and more.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-map-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-08-04 09:22:17
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-08-04 16:22:17
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=13640
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21308
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-11-03 13:28:27
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-11-03 20:28:27
[post_content] => There are several cards available on the Map page to assist you in viewing details and performing tasks to manage your vehicles, drivers, and landmarks. All map cards display on the right side of the browser screen.
The Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers only. Please contact your Account Manager if you would like additional information.
Available Cards
Available Cards Include:
Vehicle Card: Shows details regarding the selected vehicle/driver, which includes Vehicle ID or name, the driver (if associated/assigned), address of last reported location, status, landmark,[whitelabel tier="gpsi"] EV details (if applicable),[/whitelabel] odometer, attributes (if applicable, engine hours, street view of last reported location, last report (ping) time, camera events (if applicable) and street view.
Driver Card: View driver details including first name, last name, assigned vehicle, reference ID, contact information (email address/phone number), and camera events (if applicable). You can also edit driver details from the card by clicking on the edit icon. Additionally, you may send a dispatch from the card.
Landmark Card: View or copy landmark coordinates, edit the landmark, view a landmark in Google Maps in a separate browser tab, see nearby assets or landmarks, view trip history within the landmark for a specified date/time window, and/or send a dispatch.
Dropped Pin: View or copy the dropped pin location address, view the dropped pin location in Google Maps in a separate browser tab, create a landmark, send a dispatch, view a list of nearby assets or landmarks, and view the Street View of the address location.
Address Card: Copy the address location and/or open the address location in Google Maps in a separate browser, create a landmark, send a dispatch, view nearby assets or landmarks, and view the Street View of the address location.
POI Card: Displays POI name and address, copy the location, view the dropped pin location in Google Maps in a separate browser tab, create a landmark, send a dispatch, view POI details (e.g., hours, website, phone number, etc.), view a list of nearby assets or landmarks, and view the Street View of the POI.
[post_title] => Available Map Cards
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => available-map-cards
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-12-12 10:13:25
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-12-12 17:13:25
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 13640
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21308
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24773
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-05-04 12:59:33
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-05-04 19:59:33
[post_content] => Use the location playback function to view all vehicles and assets that have entered a precise boundary on the map.
Viewing Location Playback
Location playback allows you to view your fleet's travel history within a specific area on the map.
To use location playback:
From the map, click the History tab.
Zoom into the location of interest.
Click the Location Playback icon () in the top right corner of the screen.
The Time Range window will appear.
Select the date and time range (you can view up to a 3 hour time range).
Click View History.
If you would like to change the playback speed, click the settings button () in the right corner of the playback bar.
You can adjust the speed at: .5x, Normal, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x and 32x.
Once selected, click the Play button () to view location playback.
The Driver feature is available with the Driver Management add-on. Please contact your Account Manager if you would like additional information.
You may also further filter returned results by:
For Vehicles: hierarchy, group, attribute, or status
For Landmarks: group or color
For Assets: hierarchy, group, attribute, status, or device
For Drivers: group or hierarchy
To do so, click on the Filter icon () and use the drop-down windows to select your filter for the applicable category and click View Results. To clear all selected filters, click Clear Filters or to clear individual filters, click the X for the corresponding filter.
Additionally, you may filter the map to hide unavailable vehicles and/or out-of-range vehicles.
You can collapse the Map List by clicking on the Collapse icon (). If you would like to expand the Map List, click on the icon again.
Using the Vehicle List
The Vehicle List displays all vehicles, or filtered vehicles if you've filtered the map by vehicle. Vehicles are displayed by Vehicle ID. The assigned driver (if applicable), current status, and time the vehicle has been in the status or speed (if moving) display under the Vehicle ID. A camera icon indicates that the vehicle is equipped with a safety camera.
Click on the Vehicle ID to see the selected vehicle's Vehicle Card.
Using the Landmark List
The Landmark List displays all landmarks, or filtered landmarks if you've filtered the map by landmark. You can click on a landmark to open the corresponding Landmark Card to edit/view landmark details and/or view Trip History within the landmark.
Using the Asset List
The Asset List displays all assets, or filtered assets if you've filtered the map by asset. Assets are displayed by Asset ID and shows at-a-glance information such as assigned driver (if applicable), current status, and the time the asset has been in the status or speed (if moving). A camera icon indicates that the vehicle is equipped with a safety camera.
Click on an asset to open the corresponding Asset Card to edit, dispatch, view detiails, and more.
Using the Driver List
The Driver List displays all drivers, or filtered drivers if you've filtered the map by driver. Select a driver name to display their Driver Card details, including name (first and last), assigned vehicle (if applicable), reference ID, contact information, and camera events (if applicable). You can also edit driver details from the Driver Card.
[post_title] => Using Map Lists
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-map-list
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-03-04 09:18:08
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-03-04 16:18:08
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 13640
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16673
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 23142
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-07-02 11:10:57
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-07-02 18:10:57
[post_content] => Use the Map Preferences, Options, and Controls to interact with and view the map the way you prefer.
Map Preferences
Click the Preferences button to adjust cluster levels, trail threshold, vehicle labels, map markers, weather opacity, and default labels/pop-overs.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%"]
Preference,Description
Cluster Level,Set cluster level from 1-15.~~~~
Represent more than one vehicle in a similar location with a clustered circle. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart\, clusters update accordingly. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included\, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles.
Trails Threshold,Set the maximum amount of time for vehicle trails from the following options: 15 min\, 30 min\, 1 hr\, 12 hrs\, 24 hrs)
Vehicle Labels,Set your preference for the vehicle display label from the following options: Vehicle ID\, Driver Name\, Vehicle ID and Driver Name\, Driver Name and Vehicle ID.
Map Markers,Check the box next to the map marker(s) you would like to display on the map. Options include Show Service Reminders\, Show Input Status\, and Show Vehicle Direction.
Weather Opacity,Set the opacity for weather to display on map in percentage (Default is 30%\, minimum is 10%\, maximum is 100%)
Show by Default,Use the checkboxes to view or hide default label/pop-over displays on the Map.
[/et]
The Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers and Driver Management add-on only. Please contact your Account Manager if you would like additional information.
Map Options
Click on the arrow to expand the drop-down menu to select your map options.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%"]
Option,Description
Map Style,Select your preferred/required style of map. Options include: Default\, Grayscale\, Satellite\, Terrain.
Overlays,Check the applicable box(es) to select your overlay display selection. Options include: Camera Events (must have Driveri or AIR II/Drive360 cameras)\, EV Charging: Level 1\, Level 2\, DC Fast (must have an electric vehicle registered in the account)\, POI (Points of Interest)\, Traffic\, Trails\, Vehicle Clusters (set cluster level from Map Preferences)\, Weather\, and Jobs (Requires ServiceBridge License).~~~~
For the Traffic Overlay: Identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways\, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The redder the road becomes\, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.
[/et]
Full Screen View
Click the Toggle Fullscreen View button to expand the map to full screen view. To exit full screen, press the Escape (Esc) button on your keyboard.
Map Controls
Use Map Controls to perform actions on the map. Choose from the actions listed below.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%"]
Control,Description
, Create Landmark: Create a landmark anywhere on the map.
,Drop Pin: Place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. The Dropped Pin Card appears (right-hand side of screen) and you can then quickly dispatch to/from this location\, find the closest vehicle\, obtain location address\, or create a landmark for repeated use.
,Focus All: Focus the map over all fleet assets as selected in the Vehicle List by an automatic zoom in/zoom out.
,Send Dispatch: Quickly send a dispatch to a landmark\, vehicle\, or address to selected recipient(s).
,Following a Vehicle: After you have clicked on a vehicle from the Map or a List\, the option to follow a vehicle appears in Map Controls. After this option is selected\, it will focus the map over the vehicle until it is unselected.~~~~
If you'd like to follow more than one vehicle at a time\, create a Vehicle Group for the applicable vehicles.
[/et]
[toggles]
[toggle title="Basic Tier - Following a Vehicle (Click here for instructions)"]The information in this article provides instructions on following a vehicle for Basic tier customers using the Advanced Administration (Classic) Map.
Following a vehicle automatically centers the map around the selected vehicle as its location updates.
If you'd like to follow more than one vehicle at a time, use a vehicle group.
To follow a vehicle:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want to follow.
Click Follow.
The map automatically centers around the selected vehicle if it is not already in view. The map continues to dynamically center as the vehicle updates its location.
Use the Following box in the upper, left of the map to optionally hide all other vehicles on the map as long as the Following feature is enabled.
When you're ready to stop following the vehicle, click the X in the upper, right corner of the Following box, or click Stop Following from the Vehicle Card.
To unfollow a vehicle:
[/toggle]
[/toggles]
[post_title] => Using Map Preferences and Controls
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-map-preferences-and-controls
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-10 09:03:07
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-10 16:03:07
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 13640
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=23142
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 18019
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-08-30 10:35:32
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-08-30 17:35:32
[post_content] => After you have entered an address into the Search Field, an Address Card is created. From the Address Card, you can copy the address location and/or open the address location in Google Maps in a separate browser, create a landmark, Send a dispatch, view the Street View of the address location, and see a list of nearby assets and landmarks to the entered address location.
Using the Card Header
From the Card Header, you can view the address, copy the location or open Google Maps in a separate browser tab to view the location.
Using the Ellipses button
Using the ellipses button from the Card Header, you can copy the address or open Google Maps in a separate browser tab to view the location.
How to copy the address location:
From the Address Card, click on the ellipses button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Copy Location.
The location is copied to your system's clipboard. Use may paste this location in within the Portal or externally (e.g., separate browser tab, etc.).
How to view the location in Google Maps:
From the Address Card, click on the ellipses button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Open in Google Maps.
A separate browser tab opens displaying the location in Google Maps.
Using the Create Landmark and Send Dispatch Features
Using the Create Landmark and Send Dispatch functionality, you can create a landmark centered over the address location or send a dispatch to selected vehicles/drivers to the entered address.
Creating a Landmark
How to create a landmark:
From the Address Card, click the Create Landmark icon ().
Select Circle or Polygon for the shape of your landmark.
In the Landmark Name text field, enter a name for the landmark.
Select a color for the landmark.
Optional: Enter Address Details (Street, City, State, Country, Zip).
If you have selected Circle as your landmark shape, you will have the option to enter the radius of the circle in feet/meters (If lat/long coordinates are not entered then the default size is 750 feet or 228.5999926848002 meters).
Optional: Use the drop-down window to select a Landmark Group.
Click Create.
The Landmark is created and the corresponding Landmark Card appears.
Sending a Dispatch
How to send a dispatch:
From the Address Card, click the Send Dispatch icon ().
The Send Dispatch window appears.
The selected recipient field is pre-populated with the address associated with the displayed address card.
In the search/text field, enter a landmark, driver, vehicle ID, or address to which you would like to dispatch the selected address.
Click Send.
The dispatch is sent.
Using Street View
You can use Street View to view the vehicle's location on the map for street-level imagery.
How to use the Street View:
From the Street View section of the Vehicle Card, click on the Expand button ().
The Street View section expands to show the street view of the vehicle's location.
If Street View is unavailable for the location, a message is displayed stating: "Currently unavailable for this location".
To interact with the Street View, click on the screen to move the view up/down the street. To move the view, click and drag on the Street View screen. To zoom in or out, use the trackpad or trackball on your mouse.
To expand the Street View to Full Screen, click the Toggle fullscreen view button (). To exit Full Screen view, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click the Exit full screen view ().
To collapse the view, click the Collapse button.
Viewing Nearby Assets and Landmarks
You can view a list of all nearby assets and landmarks to the address location in the Nearby section of the Address Card.
Nearby Assets
Nearby assets are listed by Vehicle label and associated driver (if assigned), current status, and distance from the Address Card.
You can enter the desired radius (in miles) from the address within which you would like to see nearby assets. The default radius is 25 miles.
Nearby Landmarks
Nearby landmarks are listed by selected landmark group, landmark name, and distance from the address (in miles).
You can enter the desired radius (in miles) from the address within which you would like to see nearby assets. The default radius is 25 miles.
How to view nearby landmarks:
From the Card, click Nearby, then click Landmark.
Select the desired landmark group using the drop-down window under Landmark Groups.
Enter the desired radius (in miles) from the address for your search parameters.
Nearby landmarks appear and are listed by landmark name and distance from the address (in miles). You may click on the name of a listed nearby landmark; however, the Landmark Card for the selected Landmark will appear and you will need to recreate the address to go back to the Address card.
[post_title] => Using the Address Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-address-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-05 12:58:28
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-05 19:58:28
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=18019
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26085
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-12-06 12:46:06
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-12-06 19:46:06
[post_content] =>
The Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers only. Contact your Account Manager for additional information.
When you click on a driver from the Driver List, the Driver card for the selected driver appears. With the Driver Card, you can view/edit the driver's details, view camera events (only applicable to customers with the Driveri add-on option), assign a vehicle to the driver, and send a dispatch to the driver.
Editing Driver Details
You can edit driver details from the Driver Card for the following items:
First Name
Last Name
Reference ID (Optional)
Country
Timezone
Email Address
Phone Number
Alert Preference
You may also add the driver to a driver group, view Hierarchy membership, and view/assign a vehicle using the Edit feature of the Driver Card.
How to edit driver details:
From the Driver Card, click the edit icon ().
The Edit Driver Details page appears (displayed from Classic Portal).
In the Edit Driver Details section, make your edits.
Click Submit Changes.
Driver details are updated.
Assigning a Vehicle
You can assign a driver to a vehicle, change an existing vehicle assignment, and remove a vehicle assignment directly from the Driver Card.
How to assign a driver to a vehicle:
From the Driver Card, under the Overview section, click Assign Vehicle.
The Assign Vehicle pop-up appears.
Use the Search for Vehicle field to locate and select the vehicle you would like to assign.
Click Assign.
The vehicle is assigned.
To change a vehicle assignment, click Change and follow the Steps #2-3 listed above. To remove the vehicle assignment, click X next to the existing vehicle assignment.
Sending a Dispatch
How to send a dispatch:
From the Driver Card, click the Send Dispatch icon (.)
The Dispatch pop-up appears.
In the To: field, enter the driver's name or assigned vehicle label.
In the search field, enter landmark name, vehicle, address, or POI.
Click Send.
The dispatch is sent to the driver via the preferred contact method.
[post_title] => Using the Driver Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-driver-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-03 10:41:55
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-03 17:41:55
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26085
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 16821
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-06-26 17:17:47
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-06-27 00:17:47
[post_content] => When you drop a pin on the Map, the Dropped Pin Card appears. With the Dropped Pin Card, you can view or copy the dropped pin location address, view the dropped pin location in Google Maps in a separate browser tab, create a landmark, send a dispatch, and view a list of nearby assets.
In addition, you can move the dropped pin with a click-and-drag movement on the Map. The Dropped Pin Card will refresh automatically if you move the dropped pin around.
Using the Card Header
From the Header, you can view the dropped pin location address, copy the location, or open Google Maps in a separate browser tab to view the location.
Using the Ellipses button
Using the ellipses button from the Asset Header, you can copy the dropped pin location or open Google Maps in a separate browser tab to view the location.
How to copy the dropped pin location:
From the Dropped Pin Card, click on the ellipses button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Copy Location.
The location is copied to your system's clipboard. Use may paste this location in within the Portal or externally (e.g., separate browser tab, etc.).
How to view the location in Google Maps:
From the Dropped Pin Card, click on the ellipses button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Open in Google Maps.
A separate browser tab opens displaying the location in Google Maps.
Using the Create Landmark and Send Dispatch Features
Using the Create Landmark and Send Dispatch buttons, you can create a landmark centered over the dropped pin location or send a dispatch to selected vehicles/drivers.
Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers only. If you would like additional information, please contact your Account Manager.
Creating a Landmark
How to create a landmark:
From the Dropped Pin Card, click the Create Landmark icon.
In the Landmark Name text field, enter a name for the landmark.
Select a color for the landmark.
Click Create.
Optional: Enter Address Details (Street, City, State, Country, Zip).
If you have selected Circle as your landmark shape, you will have the option to enter the radius of the circle in feet/meters (If lat/long coordinates are not entered then the default size is 750 feet or 228.5999926848002 meters).
Optional: Use the drop-down window to select a Landmark Group.
Click Create.
The Landmark is created and the corresponding Landmark Card appears.
Sending a Dispatch
How to send a dispatch:
From the Dropped Pin Card, click the Send Dispatch icon ()
The Send Dispatch pop-up appears.
In the "To:" field, search for the recipient(s) (driver and/or vehicle) to receive the dispatch.
The driver(s) and/or vehicle(s) must have associated contact information (e.g., phone number, email address, etc.) to be searchable/selectable.
The Location field is pre-populated with the Dropped Pin address. If you have a supported tablet, you may add another location for dispatch.
Click Send.
Viewing Nearby Assets and Landmarks
You can view a list of all nearby assets and landmarks to the dropped pin location in the Nearby section of the Dropped Pin Card.
Nearby Assets
Nearby assets are listed by Vehicle label and associated driver (if assigned), current status, and distance from the dropped pin coordinates.
You can enter the desired radius (in miles) from the dropped pin within which you would like to see nearby assets. The default radius is 25 miles.
This list can be especially useful if you are looking to dispatch one asset to another and would like to dispatch the closest appropriate asset possible. To do so, use the Send Dispatch function on the Dropped Pin Card and enter in the asset's Vehicle ID for "Location to Send" and the closest appropriate asset's Vehicle ID for "Send this location to the following recipient(s)" or vice versa, depending on your need. See the instructions under Sending a Dispatch for additional information.
Nearby Landmarks
Nearby landmarks are listed by selected landmark group, landmark name, and distance from the dropped pin (in miles).
You can enter the desired radius (in miles) from the dropped pin within which you would like to see nearby assets. The default radius is 25 miles.
How to view nearby landmarks:
From the Card, click Nearby, then click Landmark.
Select the desired landmark group using the drop-down window under Landmark Groups.
Enter the desired radius (in miles) from the Dropped Pin for your search parameters.
Nearby landmarks appear and are listed by landmark name and distance from the dropped pin (in miles). You may click on the name of a listed nearby landmark; however, the Landmark Card for the selected Landmark will appear and you will need to recreate the dropped pin to go back to the Dropped Pin card.
[post_title] => Using the Dropped Pin Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-dropped-pin-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-03 08:52:35
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-03 15:52:35
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16821
[menu_order] => 7
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[8] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 16761
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-06-26 17:19:04
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-06-27 00:19:04
[post_content] => When you click on a landmark from the Landmark list, the Landmark Card for the selected landmark appears. With the Landmark Card, you can view or copy landmark coordinates, view a landmark in Google Maps in a separate browser tab, edit a landmark, send a dispatch, view trip history within the landmark, view landmark overview details, view nearby assets, and look at street view.
Using the Card Header
From the Card Header, you can view the landmark coordinates, edit the landmark, send a dispatch, view history, copy the lat/lon coordinates(provided under the Landmark name), open Google Maps in a separate browser tab to view the location, or delete the landmark.
Using the Ellipsis button
Using the ellipsis button from the Card Header, you can edit the landmark, send a dispatch, view history, copy the lat/lon coordinates(provided under the Landmark name), open Google Maps in a separate browser tab to view the location, or delete the landmark.
How to edit a landmark:
Note: To manage multiple landmarks from a table view, see the Admin: Landmark tab.
After clicking the ellipsis button from the Card header, click Edit Landmark.
The Admin tab of the Card is shown.
Make your edit(s) to the landmark. Available edits include:
Shape (circle or polygon)
Name
Color
Address (Street, City, State, Country, Zip)
Radius (feet or meters)
Landmark Group Membership
Click Save.
The edits to the landmark are saved and reflected on the Landmark Card and on the Map.
How to send a dispatch:
After clicking the ellipsis button from the Card header, click Send Dispatch.
The dispatch pop-up appears.
Use the To: field to enter the driver and/or vehicle information in the Recipient(s) field.
The Landmark information is automatically populated with the selected landmark.
Click Send.
The driver/vehicle will receive a text and/or email notification with the dispatch location.
How to view trip history:
After clicking the ellipsis button from the Card header, click View History.
A Time Range pop-up window appears.
Select the date on the calendar you wish to view along with the time window by using the drop-down time selector accessed by clicking on the Start Time and End Time.
You may view up to a 3 hour time range.
Click View History.
The Trip History Page appears.
Click the Play icon to play a record of trip history collected in the time window selected.
If you would like to change the Playback speed setting, click the Setting icon then click the current Playback setting. The available playback speed options are displayed. Click on the desired playback speed.
How to copy the landmark address:
From the Card Header, click on the ellipsis button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Copy Lat/Lon.
The address is copied to your system's clipboard. You may paste this address within the Portal or externally (e.g., separate browser tab, etc.).
How to view the location in Google Maps:
From the Card Header, click on the ellipsis button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Open in Google Maps.
A separate browser tab opens displaying the location in Google Maps.
How to delete the landmark:
From the Card Header, click on the ellipsis button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Delete Landmark.
A pop-up appears to confirm you would like to delete the landmark.
Click Yes, Delete to delete the landmark or No, Cancel to exit.
If you clicked Yes, Delete, a pop-up window appears confirming the landmark was successfully deleted.
Using Landmark Card Task Bar
Using the Landmark Card Task Tabs, you can view landmark details in the Overview tab, see assets or landmarks that are near the landmark in the Nearby tab, or edit landmark details from the Admin tab.
[post_title] => Using the Landmark Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-landmark-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-09-08 10:34:55
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-09-08 17:34:55
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16761
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21661
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-12-11 12:59:55
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-12-11 19:59:55
[post_content] => If you have toggled on Points of Interest (POI) to display on your Map from the Using Map Preferences and Controls and click on a POI, the POI Card displays.
With the POI Card, you can:
view POI name and address,
copy the location,
view the dropped pin location in Google Maps in a separate browser tab,
create a landmark,
send a dispatch,
view POI details (e.g., hours, website, phone number, etc.),
view a list of nearby assets or landmarks,
and view the Street View of the POI.
Using the POI Card Header
From the POI Card Header, you can view the POI name/address, copy the location or open the location in Google Maps in a separate browser tab.
How to copy a location:
From the Address Card, click on the ellipses button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Copy Location.
The location is copied to your system's clipboard. Use may paste this location within the Portal or externally (e.g., separate browser tab, etc.).
How to view the location in Google Maps:
From the Card, click on the ellipses button ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Open in Google Maps.
A separate browser tab opens displaying the location in Google Maps.
Using the Create Landmark and Send Dispatch Features
Using the Create Landmark and Send Dispatch buttons, you can create a landmark centered over the dropped pin location or send a dispatch to selected vehicles/drivers.
Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers only. If you would like additional information, please contact your Account Manager.
Creating a Landmark
How to create a landmark:
From the Card, click Create Landmark ().
The Create Landmark window appears.
Select Circle or Polygon as the shape of your landmark.
Polygons allow you to define a more precise boundary by tracing an outline around a specific area (up to 256* vertices). Polygon landmarks are more often used when the exclusion or inclusion of specific perimeters is important, such as when sending alerts when a vehicle enters or exits a specific location.
In the Landmark Name text field, enter a name for the landmark.
Select a color for the landmark.
Optional: Enter Address Details (Street, City, State, Country, Zip).
If you have selected Circle as your landmark shape, you will have the option to enter the radius of the circle in feet/meters (If lat/long coordinates are not entered then the default size is 750 feet or 228.5999926848002 meters).
Optional: Use the drop-down window to select a Landmark Group.
Click Create.
The Landmark is created and the corresponding Landmark Card appears.
Sending a Dispatch
How to send a dispatch:
From the POI Card, click the Send Dispatch icon ().
The Send Dispatch window appears.
In the "To:" field, search for the recipient(s) (driver and/or vehicle) to receive the dispatch.
The driver(s) and/or vehicle(s) must have associated contact information (e.g., phone number, email address, etc.) to be searchable/selectable.
The Location field is pre-populated with the POI address. If you have a supported tablet, you may add another location for dispatch.
Click Send.
The Dispatch is sent to your selected recipient. Below is an example of what the dispatch looks like when sent via SMS.
Viewing POI Overview Details
The POI card provides general details related to the POI under the Overview Details section of the card. This information typically includes a phone number, website address, and hours.
If you would like to collapse this section of the card, click on the Collapse button (). Once collapsed, the Expand button appears and can be clicked on to expand the section.
Viewing Nearby Assets and Landmarks
You can view a list of all nearby assets and landmarks to the POI in the Nearby Assets section of the POI Card.
Nearby Assets
Assets are listed by distance from the POI with the entered radius (in miles) and display Vehicle label and associated driver (if assigned), and current status. You can adjust the radius (default is 25 miles).
From the Nearby Asset list, you can click on the vehicle label to open the associated vehicle card for the vehicle.
Using the Street View
You can use the Street View to view the street-level imagery of the POI.
How to use the Street View:
From the Street View section of the POI Card, click on the Expand button ().
The Street View section expands to show the street view of the POI.
If Street View is unavailable for the location, a message is displayed stating: "Currently unavailable for this location".
To interact with the Street View, click on the screen to move the view up/down the street. To move the view, click and drag on the Street View screen. To zoom in or out, use the trackpad or trackball on your mouse.
To expand the Street View to Full Screen, click the Toggle fullscreen view button (). To exit Full Screen view, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click the Exit full screen view ().
To collapse the view, click the Collapse button.
[post_title] => Using the Point of Interest (POI) Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-point-of-interest-poi-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2022-12-09 08:46:26
[post_modified_gmt] => 2022-12-09 15:46:26
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21661
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[10] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 16313
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-06-26 17:23:03
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-06-27 00:23:03
[post_content] => When you click on a vehicle/driver (if assigned) from the map or use the Search Field to locate a vehicle, the Vehicle Card for the selected vehicle/driver displays. With the Vehicle Card, you can see:
Vehicle ID or name
Driver (if associated/assigned)
Address of last reported location
Details (e.g., vehicle, status, driver, landmark,[whitelabel tier="gpsi"] EV data - if applicable,[/whitelabel] odometer, engine hours, voltage (if reported), and more)
Attributes (if applicable)
Camera events (if applicable)
Street view of last reported location
[whitelabel tier="gpsi"][/whitelabel][whitelabel tier="limited,full"][/whitelabel]
Using the Vehicle Card Header and Vehicle Card Status Bar, you can quickly manage and monitor individual vehicles in your fleet.
The Driver feature is available with the Driver Management add-on. If you would like to learn more, please contact your Account Manager.
Vehicle Card Header
Using the Vehicle Card Header of the Vehicle Card, you can edit, follow, and/or isolate a vehicle, create a landmark, send a message or dispatch, copy location data, and view trip history directly from the card.
See Vehicle Card Header for step-by-step instructions on using the features available from the header.
Vehicle Card Status Bar
From the Status Bar, you can view a general overview of details pertaining to the selected vehicle, maintenance/service information, and nearby assets and landmarks.
See Vehicle Card Status Bar for step-by-step instructions on using the features available from the status bar.
[post_title] => Using the Vehicle Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-vehicle-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-01-02 14:53:58
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-01-02 21:53:58
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16313
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[11] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24766
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-05-04 12:58:45
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-05-04 19:58:45
[post_content] =>
Not seeing this feature? It may not be included in your current plan. Contact your Account Manager or Support to learn more.
Use Trip History functions on the map to monitor your fleet’s vehicle and asset activity to help determine job verification, efficient routing, vehicle incidents, and more.
Viewing Trip History
Trip History allows you to view your fleet’s daily travel history on the map. You can view trip history for multiple vehicles and/or assets at the same time.
To view trip history:
From the map, click the History tab.
Click on the vehicle(s) and/or asset(s) you would like to view.
The playback bar will appear at the bottom of the map with the selected vehicle(s) and/or asset(s) daily trip history.
Click the calendar button () or date arrows to choose a specific date to view trip history.
If you would like to change the playback speed, click the Timeline Settings button () in the right corner of the playback bar then click Playback speed. You can adjust the speed at: .5x, Normal, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x and 32x.
You can also use the following toggle buttons available in Timeline settings to adjust the playback view: Keep selection in view, Show trips, and Snap to road.
Once selected, click the Play button () to playback the vehicle(s) and/or asset(s) trip history.
Viewing Violations
As part of trip history, you can also view driving violations related to specific trips.
Violations types include:
Distracted
Follow Distance
Hard Acceleration
Seatbelt
Speeding
Traffic Violations
Violation Icon Legend
Please refer to the legend below to better understand the violations that may appear in vehicle trip history.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%"]
Icon,Description
,Camera Event
,Hard Braking
,Speeding
,General Violation
,Rapid Acceleration
[/et]
Viewing Camera Events
If your organization includes cameras, you have access to camera events. Camera events give you insight into real-time triggered violation events.
To view camera events:
From the map, click the History tab.
Click on the vehicle(s) you would like to view.
The playback bar will appear at the bottom of the map with the selected vehicle(s) daily trip history.
Click the calendar button () or date arrows to choose a specific date to view trip history.
Once the selected trip history opens, enabled camera events will appear over the timeline.
From here, click on a camera event to view real-time video of when a violation occurred.
Basic Tier Instructions
If you are a customer on the Basic tier, please use the instructions provided below. Click on the title to expand the window to view.
[toggles]
[toggle title="Viewing Vehicle History - Basic Tier"]
Historical vehicle activity is viewable on the map and in reports. On the map, you can viewhistory detail for one vehicle (custom date range), or you can turn on trails to view a snapshot of recent vehicle history for multiple vehicles (one hour).
View History Detail on the Map (One Vehicle)
Vehicle history provides a visual representation of logged activity for a custom date range. By default, all historical activity on is dynamically [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="Vehicle locations are typically provided every two minutes. Although we do not know the exact route the vehicle took between the time gap, our system can generate an accurate representation of the actual path using highly sophisticated mathematical formulas. You can optionally turn off this feature, which will instead connect sequential locations with a straight line." style="top" ]snapped to roads.[/tooltip]
To view vehicle history:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click a vehicle.
Click History.
The historical activity appears for the current day (default).
Use the date picker to choose a custom date range.
Limit historical range to one week.
History Notation:
On the History tab, logged activity is indicated by movements and stops. Stops are numbered according to the order in which they occurred within the selected date range.
Stopped >= 60 min
Stopped < 60 min
Idling >= 3 min
Moving
Hover over a stop to view its location on the map.
Click a stop to view details about stop duration, time, and location.
On the map, stops are clustered for easier viewing. The number on a stop cluster indicates the number of stops in that cluster. The stop types in each cluster are indicated by color and sector size.
Hover over a stop cluster to view details about the stops it contains.
Click a stop cluster to zoom in on the stops it contains.
Stop Notes:
Stop notes allow drivers to add notes about various stops (e.g., "Customer was not home for delivery."). Drivers can send notes to 477-477 via SMS if their number is associated with the vehicle. You can view/edit/add individual stop notes within the History tab, and you can also see stop notes applicable reports (i.e., Stop Notes Report).
To view a stop note:
From the Vehicle Card, click History.
From the History tab, click one of the stops you want to view. (Stops are either blue, yellow, or red.)
Click Stop Notes.
If note(s) were added for that stop, they appear in the Stop Notes card and Stop Notes tab.
Click the stop note, and click Edit to edit the text in the stop note.
Click Add Stop Note to add a new stop note.
Notes that were added from SMS are indicated by a mobile phone icon, and they also appear in the Mobile Communications tab for that vehicle.
View History Trails on the Map (Multiple Vehicles)
Historical trails provide a snapshot of vehicle activity for the last hour. You can find the Trails button on the Map Toolbar.
Trails Enabled
Trails Disabled
If you have a large number of vehicles on the map, you may want to filter the map by a particular vehicle group before turning on history trails. If you do not see any history trails on the map, the selected vehicles have not updated their locations in the last hour. To view detailed history for multiple vehicles, upgrade to the Pro product.
Need to see a newly installed device on the map? Check out About Vehicles.
[/toggle]
[/toggles]
[post_title] => Using Trip History
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-trip-history
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-06-08 11:06:06
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-06-08 18:06:06
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 13640
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24766
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[12] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 19446
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-02-24 15:19:59
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-02-24 22:19:59
[post_content] => Use weather functions within the map to view the daily weather radar in your fleet's area.
Weather Overlay
The Weather Overlay is a new map layer that allows you to view the current weather radar in your fleet's area. Simply click the Weather button in the Map Options dropdown menu to activate the radar.
Daily weather is available 12 hours in advance.
Legend
Once the weather feature is turned on, a color legend will appear showing light to intense weather severity.
Weather Playback
You can adjust weather playback using the playback controls featured at the bottom of the Map page window. Weather playback can be adjusted via the 12-hour timeline or the controls (e.g., Play, Rewind, Forward, Start Over) to the bottom right of the screen.
Weather Opacity Preferences
You can manage your weather opacity preferences via Map Preferences. To do so, simply click the Preferences button on the right side of the screen, then adjust the opacity using the + and/or - buttons next to Weather Opacity.
This Weather Forecast feature is unavailable on Internet Explorer, but current weather is still viewable.
Users can choose either Diagnostic (supported devices only) or Calculated as the engine hours data source. This allows you to easily identify which data source is in use, control where your data is coming from, and ensure complete transparency and confidence in the information provided.
The system automatically prioritizes diagnostic engine hours but seamlessly falls back to calculated hours when diagnostic data is unavailable.
Supported Devices
The following devices support Diagnostic Engine Hours:
Users can choose Diagnostic or Calculated as the engine hours data source for individual vehicles within the Edit Vehicle drawer, accessible from a vehicle's Vehicle Card on the Map page. Each option displays the current engine hours reading, providing full visibility into the data before a selection is made.
Note: If a user changes the data source, that does not impact any historical data contained in applicable reports; however, a user repeatedly changing the data source within a short amount of time may lead to data inaccuracies in reports.
Understanding the Data Sources
Please review the table below for descriptions of the Diagnostic and Calculated engine hours data sources.
Source
Description
Waypoint Eligible
Diagnostic
Hours recorded directly by the engine’s control module (ECM/ECU), representing the engine’s true runtime.
❌
Calculated
Calculated hours based on total engine-on time since installation.
✅ A waypoint can be added to adjust the baseline, and the system will continue adding run time.
How to Select an Engine Hours Data Source
Note: You can also make a data source selection from the Edit drawer of a vehicle from the Admin: Vehicles tab (permissions required).
From the Map page, locate the vehicle you would like to manage using the Search field, Vehicles List, or by clicking on the vehicle directly on the Map.
The Vehicle Card opens on the right-hand side of the screen.
Click Edit from the Vehicle Card Header.
The Edit vehicle drawer opens.
Scroll down to the Mileage & Engine Hours section.
Under "Engine Hours Data Source", make your selection by clicking the button next to Diagnostic Engine Hours or Calculated Engine Hours.
Click Save changes.
A pop-up appears at the top right corner of the screen to confirm that your change was saved successfully.
Entering an Engine Hours Waypoint
If you have selected Calculated Engine Hours as the vehicle's engine hours data source, you can add a waypoint if you believe the engine hours reading is inaccurate. Adding a waypoint adjusts the baseline, and the system will continue to add run time afterward according to your selected data source.
How to Enter an Engine Hours Waypoint
Note: You can also enter an engine hours waypoint from the Edit drawer of a vehicle from the Admin: Vehicles tab (permissions required).
From the Map page, locate the vehicle you would like to manage using the Search field, Vehicles List, or by clicking on the vehicle directly on the Map.
The Vehicle Card opens on the right-hand side of the screen.
Click Edit from the Vehicle Card Header.
The Edit vehicle drawer opens.
Scroll down to the Mileage & Engine Hours section, then enter the waypoint under "Engine Hours."
Note: Calculated engine hours must be selected to enter a waypoint. Waypoints cannot be entered if your data source is Diagnostic Engine Hours; the Engine Hours field will appear greyed out.
Click Save changes.
A pop-up appears at the top right corner of the screen to confirm that your change was saved successfully.
The Universal Odometer Algorithm is a unified system that automatically selects the most reliable odometer data source—diagnostic, trip-based, or GPS-based—to ensure the most accurate and consistent mileage reporting possible.
The system will intelligently switch between three possible data sources:
Diagnostic Odometer (Preferred): Used when valid diagnostic data is available. This is considered the most accurate source and aligns closely with the vehicle’s dashboard.
Trip-Based Odometer (Fallback): Activated when diagnostic values stop reporting, become erratic, or contain errors. It continues to track mileage based on trip data until diagnostic input resumes.
GPS-Based Odometer (Last Resort): Used only if neither diagnostic nor trip-based data is available, ensuring mileage continues to update in all scenarios.
As soon as a valid diagnostic odometer value is received, the system automatically switches back to diagnostic inputs.
This new algorithm applies to all device types except Geotab, Numerex, Orbcomm, and GPSI Mobile. Those devices will continue to use their existing odometer handling. If you have any questions about your device type, please contact your Account Manager.
Accessing Odometer Information
Odometer data can be accessed in the Odometer section of a vehicle's Vehicle Card on the Map page or the Vehicle details drawer on the Admin: Vehicles tab (permissions required).
The Odometer section provides a transparent and trackable waypoint (odometer reading entry) management experience, featuring enhanced logging with user attribution, an at-a-glance history of odometer changes, and clear differentiation between system-generated and manual adjustments. Users can view detailed before-and-after values for each change[whitelabel tier="gpsi"], along with direct access to the comprehensive Odometer History Detail report[/whitelabel] within the vehicle details page.
How to Access Odometer Information
From the Map Page, click on a vehicle to open the Vehicle Card, then scroll down on the Overview tab to “Odometer” or from the Admin: Vehicles tab, click on the vehicle's name (under the Vehicle Name column) to open the Vehicle details drawer, then scroll down to "Odometer."
Hover your mouse over the info icon next to "More odometer details" to view the Odometer Information hoverbox.
The Odometer Information hoverbox appears, providing the following information:
Odometer Data Source: Diagnostic, Trip-Based, or GPS-Based
Last mileage adjustment type
Miles or kilometers before waypoint
Miles or kilometers at waypoint
User who made the last waypoint change
Date & time of the last waypoint change
[whitelabel tier="gpsi"]
Link to the selected vehicle’s Full Odometer History report (See full odometer history button)
[/whitelabel]
Entering a Waypoint
If you’d like to enter a waypoint for a vehicle’s odometer, you can do so from the Vehicle Card Status Bar.
Note: If you would like additional information regarding the Universal Odometer Algorithm, please visit Universal Odometer Algorithm.
Use the drop-down to select a driver or use the checkbox to remove the driver assignment.
The Driver feature is available to Enterprise accounts and accounts with the Driver Management add-on enabled.
Use the drop-down to select a country.
Use the drop-down to select a license state.
Enter in the vehicle's license plate.
If applicable, use the toggle to change the entity type from vehicle to asset.
Under the Mileage & Engine Hours section, enter in odometer and select an Engine Hours Data Source (Diagnostic or Calculated) using the buttons.
If using the Calculated data source, you may enter an engine hours waypoint, if applicable.
Under Fuel Info section, use the drop-down to select fuel type and enter in fuel capacity, engine size (L), and/or idle GPH.
Under the Contact Info section, enter in phone, email and select an alert preference (Email or SMS).
Under the Vehicle Groups section, use the drop-down to select a vehicle group (if applicable).
Click Save.
Sending a Dispatch
You can send directions to a landmark, address, Point of Interest, or even another vehicle using the Dispatch button.
SMS messages will be sent from 477-477 (GPSGPS). Emails will be sent from alerts@[provider].com. Drivers can open the dispatched route and invoke turn-by-turn directions using Google (web-based app), iPhone (native mapping app), or iOS-Google (Google Maps iOS app).
How to send a dispatch:
From the Vehicle Card, click Dispatch.
The Dispatch window appears.
In the recipient field, enter the name of the vehicle or driver to which you would like to dispatch.
In the search/text field, enter a landmark, driver, vehicle ID, or address to which you would like to dispatch the selected address.
Click Send.
The dispatch is sent.
Following a Vehicle
You can follow a vehicle on the map directly from the Vehicle Card. This feature allows you to keep the map focused on an individual vehicle providing you with a ‘real-time’ view of the vehicle as it moves along its route (like Uber or helicopter mode).
How to follow a vehicle:
From the Vehicle Card, click the overflow icon ().
Click the toggle next to Follow.
A box appears at the top of the map confirming that you are following the vehicle as the map focuses over the vehicle.
To stop following the vehicle, click the toggle next to Follow to toggle off the feature.
Isolating a Vehicle
The Isolate toggle hides all other vehicles on the map and focuses the map on the selected vehicle when toggled on.
How to isolate a vehicle:
From the Vehicle Card, click the overflow icon ().
Click the toggle next to Isolate.
To stop following the vehicle, click the toggle next to Isolate to toggle off the feature.
Creating a landmark
You can create a landmark directly from the Vehicle Card using the vehicle's location as the landmark center.
From the Vehicle Card, click the overflow icon ().
Click Create Landmark.
The New Landmark Card appears.
Select Circle or Polygon for the shape of your landmark.
In the Landmark Name text field, enter a name for the landmark.
Select a color for the landmark.
Optional: Enter Address Details (Street, City, State, Country, Zip).
If you have selected Circle as your landmark shape, you will have the option to enter the radius of the circle in feet/meters (If lat/long coordinates are not entered then the default size is 750 feet or 228.5999926848002 meters).
Optional: Use the drop-down window to select a Landmark Group.
Click Create.
The Landmark is created and the corresponding Landmark Card appears.
Sending a Message
How to send a message:
To send a message from the Vehicle Card, the applicable vehicle must have valid vehicle contact information associated with the vehicle. For instructions on entering/updating vehicle contact information, see Messaging from the Vehicle Card.
From the Vehicle Card, click the overflow icon ().
A menu appears.
Click Send Message.
The Messaging page appears. You can view all messages sent to/received from this vehicle contact from this page. All messages display time and date stamps.
Enter your message and click Send.
You can adjust the size of the text field by clicking on the bottom left-hand corner of the box and dragging down to expand.
Viewing History
How to view history:
From the Vehicle Card, click the overflow icon ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click View History.
The History tab appears. History is displayed for the current date. The playback bar will appear at the bottom of the map with the selected vehicle(s) daily trip history.
Click the Play button () to playback the vehicle(s) trip history for the current date.
If you would like to change the playback speed, click the settings button () in the right corner of the playback bar.
You can adjust the speed at: Normal, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x and 32x.
If you would like to change the date, click the calendar button () or date arrows to choose a specific date to view trip history.
Copying the Address
How to copy the address location:
From the Vehicle Card, click the overflow icon ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Copy Location.
The location is copied to your system's clipboard. Use may paste this location in within the Portal or externally (e.g., separate browser tab, etc.).
Copying the Lat/Lon Coordinates
How to copy lat/lon coordinates:
From the Vehicle Card, click the overflow icon ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Copy Lat/Lon.
The address is copied to your system's clipboard. You may paste this address within the Portal or externally (e.g., separate browser tab, etc.).
Opening the Location in Google Maps
How to view the location in Google Maps:
From the Address Card,click the overflow icon ().
A pop-up window appears.
Click Open in Google Maps.
A separate browser tab opens displaying the location in Google Maps.
Swapping and Transferring a Device
You can swap and/or deactivate a device from the Vehicle Card Header in case you need to retire a vehicle and replace it with another one or no longer need the vehicle in the fleet.
To perform a device transfer or swap, the user must have Vehicle Admin permission.
Please refer to Managing Devices: Transfer and Swap for step-by-step instructions.
[post_title] => Vehicle Card Header
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => vehicle-card-header
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-11-21 13:14:47
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-11-21 20:14:47
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 16313
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26287
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[16] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26359
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-09 12:40:32
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-09 19:40:32
[post_content] => From the Status Bar, you can view a general overview of details pertaining to the selected vehicle, maintenance/service log information, and nearby assets and landmarks.
This article may contain references to the Driver feature available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Driver Management Add-On. If you would like additional information, please contact your Account Manager.
Overview Tab
The Overview tab of the Vehicle Card Status Bar provides at-a-glance information about the selected vehicle including:
[row]
[column lg="6" md="6" sm="6" xs="6" ]
Vehicle
Vehicle Label
Landmark (if applicable)
Device Type
Device Serial Number
VIN
Odometer: Odometer Data Source, Last Mileage Adjustment, Prior to Waypoint, At Waypoint, Last Waypoint Change Made By, Waypoint Change Made On[whitelabel tier="gpsi"], and button to see the vehicle's full odometer history in the Odometer History Report[/whitelabel][whitelabel tier="gpsi"]
EV Data (if applicable):
Charge Level
Available Range (supported vehicles only)
Charging Status
Electricity Used (lifetime summary beginning at device installation)
For a vehicle to be assigned an "out-of-range" status, the vehicle must meet two technical requirements: 1) Last known ignition Event is ON, AND 2) Last device ping received 60 minutes ago or more.
Assigning, Changing, or Removing a Driver
You can assign, change, or remove an assigned driver to a vehicle from the Overview section of the Vehicle Card.
How to assign a driver:
From the Details section of the Vehicle Card, click Assign Driver.
The Assign Driver pop-up window appears.
Use the Searchable Select field by typing a driver's name in the field or use drop-down field to scroll down and click on a driver.
You cannot create a driver within this Searchable Select field. Drivers must be created prior to using the field to appear in the available list of drivers. See Adding a Driver for step-by-step instructions.
Click Assign.
The driver is assigned to the vehicle.
How to change a driver:
From the Overview section of the Vehicle Card, click Reassign next to the current assigned driver's name.
The Reassign Vehicle to New Driver pop-up window appears.
Use the New driver field by typing a driver's name in the field or use drop-down field to scroll down and click on a driver.
You cannot create a driver within this Searchable Select field. Drivers must be created prior to using the field to appear in the available list of drivers. See Adding a Driver for step-by-step instructions.
Click Reassign.
If the selected driver is already assigned to a vehicle, a pop-up appears asks you to confirm the driver's reassignment.
Click Yes, Assign to proceed with the assignment change.
You may cancel the assignment change by clicking No, Cancel.
The driver assigned to the vehicle is changed.
How to remove an assigned driver:
From the Overview section of the Vehicle Card, click the Delete/Remove button (X) next to the current assigned driver's name.
The assigned driver is removed from the vehicle.
Entering a Waypoint
How to enter a waypoint
From the "Odometer" section of the Overview tab, click Add waypoint to adjust mileage.
The Add an Odometer Waypoint pop-up appears.
Under Waypoint Details, enter the new mileage value.
To enter a custom date and time for the waypoint entry, check the box next to "Select custom date and time."
If the checkbox is not selected, the system automatically records the current date/time.
Click + Create waypoint.
A success message appears toward the top-right of the screen to confirm the waypoint was added successfully.
[whitelabel tier="gpsi"]
Understanding EV Data
EV data (if applicable) is displayed on the Vehicle Card for customers with electric vehicles equipped with GO9 devices.
[embed]https://vimeo.com/879518219/e997fc8816[/embed]
EV data is available for customers on the EV Fleet plan, please contact your Account Manager for information.
Available EV Data includes the following:
Charge Level: Shown in percentage. A color-coded dot (green, yellow, orange, red) also appears in this section offering charge level status at a glance.
Green: 31%-100%
Yellow: 21%-30%
Orange: 11%-20%
Red: 0%-10%
Available Range: Shown in miles.
Available Range data is available for Supported Vehicles only.
Charging Status: Status is shown as Charging (AC or DC) or Not Charging.
Charging status indicates whether charging is AC (Alternating Current - Slow Charging) or DC (Direct Current - Fast Charging).
Electricity Used: Shows, in kWh, a lifetime summary of the vehicle's total energy consumption from the time of installing the tracking device.
[/whitelabel]
Using the Street View
You can use Street View to view the vehicle's location on the map for street-level imagery.
How to use the Street View:
From the Street View section of the Vehicle Card, click on the Expand button ().
The Street View section expands to show the street view of the vehicle's location.
If Street View is unavailable for the location, a message is displayed stating: "Currently unavailable for this location".
To interact with the Street View, click on the screen to move the view up/down the street. To move the view, click and drag on the Street View screen. To zoom in or out, use the trackpad or trackball on your mouse.
To expand the Street View to Full Screen, click the Toggle fullscreen view button (). To exit Full Screen view, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click the Exit full screen view ().
To collapse the view, click the Collapse button.
Maintenance Tab
The Maintenance tab allows you to track vehicle services through services due and services completed logs. You can monitor and create vehicle services using the Maintenance Page directly from this tab.
To manage services due and completed services, please see Vehicle Card – Vehicle Maintenance.
Nearby Tab
Nearby lists offer sorted lists of nearby assets and landmarks closest to the selected vehicle displaying by closest to farthest in miles. You may click on any of the listed assets/landmarks to view the corresponding Vehicle/Landmark Card.
This list can be especially useful if you are looking to dispatch one asset to another and would like to dispatch the closest appropriate asset possible. To do so, use the Send Dispatch function on the Vehicle Card and enter in the asset's Vehicle ID for "Location to Send" and the closest appropriate asset's Vehicle ID for "Send this location to the following recipient(s)" or vice versa, depending on your need. See the instructions under Sending a Dispatch for additional information.
The Map page offers a simplified, two-dimensional view of your workspace, making it easy to manage vehicles, drivers, and landmarks. It includes two map tabs: Current and History.
The Current tab—also known as the Live Map—provides real-time visibility into your fleet. Vehicle/Asset and Driver locations and statuses update instantly as changes occur, ensuring you always have the most up-to-date information at a glance.
The History tab lets you review your fleet’s past activity directly on the map. You can explore trip history, camera events (if applicable), and use location playback to view vehicle movement within specific timeframes or landmark boundaries, providing valuable insights into past operations.
The Driver feature is only available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration add-on. If you are interested in learning more, please contact your Account Manager.
Viewing the Map
You can view Map Cards by clicking on a vehicle, landmark, asset, or driver directly from the map or the list on the left-hand side.
For a quick glance, simply hover your mouse over map objects—such as vehicles, landmarks, or assets—to view a pop-over with key information, without opening the full Map Card.
The pop-over displays an address when one is associated with the pin point. If the pin point does not have an associated address (e.g., pin-point is moving along a road, etc.,), the pop-over displays latitude and longitude coordinates instead.
Depending on the object, the pop-over may also include action buttons, allowing you to perform certain tasks directly from the pop-over. Please refer to the table below for a list of available pop-overs and corresponding available actions.
Disabling Pop-Overs
To disable pop-overs on the Map, go to Map Preferences and uncheck the boxes for Vehicle and Asset Popovers, Landmark Popovers, and/or History Trail Popovers.
Current Tab Pop-Overs
A user must have the View/Edit Landmarks permission and enable the Map Preference “Show by default: Landmark labels” to edit and/or send a dispatch from the Landmark pop-over.
Pop-Over
Available Actions
Vehicle
Follow, Isolate, Edit
Asset
Dispatch, Edit
Landmark
Send Dispatch, Edit
History Tab Pop-Overs
To access pop-overs on the History tab, please click on the map object.
Map options give you control over how information is displayed and interacted with on the map. You can filter lists, switch to Full-Screen view, adjust the zoom level, toggle between Street Map and Satellite Imagery, display terrain, enable Street View, and more.
Refer to the table below for a complete list of available map options and their functions.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|25%|60%"]
Number, Option, Description
1,Lists,View drivers\, vehicles\, and landmarks in your fleet.
2,Filter,Filter the map by vehicle\, hierarchy\, group\, vehicle status\, landmarks\, and/or Drivers. You may also filter the map to hide unavailable/out-of-range vehicles.
3,Toggle Panel,Click this button to show or hide the lists panel.
4,Map Type,Switch between Current or History map.
5,Search,Use this field to search the map by vehicle\, driver\, landmark\, user\, or address..
6,Map Preferences,Click the preferences button to adjust cluster levels\, trail threshold\, vehicle labels\, map markers\, and weather opacity.
7,Map Refresh Timer,Allows you to see when your map is set to be updated with vehicle locations next.
8,Profile Button,Includes name of user\, username\, account name\, and tier. You may also log out of the Portal by clicking Logout.
9,Map Options,Click Map Options to show and select multiple map styles\, data source\, and map overlays.
10,Full Screen,Expand the map fullscreen. To exit fullscreen\, press the Escape (Esc) button on your keyboard.
11,Map Controls,Use the Map Controls to interact with the map the way you prefer.
12,Street View,Drag the yellow peg man to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper-right corner to exit.)
13,Zoom in/out,Click + to zoom toward the center of the map. Click – to zoom outward from the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
14,Legend,Use the Legend tool to view the meaning of color-coded icon shapes present on the map.
[/et]
[post_title] => About the Map Page
[post_excerpt] => The Map transforms your workspace to a single 2D map with quick access to management of vehicles, landmarks, dispatching, and more.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-map-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-08-04 09:22:17
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-08-04 16:22:17
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=13640
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 17
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => a8096c6ed0ef05baf2ab2e62953c44a5
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:0447b47708679c94c4561c14037645f6
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 26
[name] => Map Features
[slug] => maps
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 26
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Mapping tools allow you to see your entire fleet with configurable, color-coded icon shapes that relate to your vehicle grouping preferences.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 35
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 6
[cat_ID] => 26
[category_count] => 35
[category_description] => Mapping tools allow you to see your entire fleet with configurable, color-coded icon shapes that relate to your vehicle grouping preferences.
[cat_name] => Map Features
[category_nicename] => maps
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 17
)
[47] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 47
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 585
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 47
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 585
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 47
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 47
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 585
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 47
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 585
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (47)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (585)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25428
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-04 10:19:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-04 17:19:09
[post_content] => Messaging allows you to send SMS messages from within the portal to your fleet vehicles. You can send messages to vehicles directly from the Vehicle Card in the Portal. Messages can be sent to any vehicle with a valid phone/SMS number. You can also review received messages from the Vehicle Card.
To send a message from the Vehicle Card, the applicable vehicle must have valid vehicle contact information associated with the vehicle.
How to send a message:
From the Vehicle Card, click the ellipsis icon ().
A menu appears.
Click Send Message.
The Messaging page appears. You can view all messages sent to/received from this vehicle contact from this page. All messages display time and date stamps.
Enter your message and click Send.
You can adjust the size of the text field by clicking on the bottom left-hand corner of the box and dragging down to expand.
Adding or Editing Vehicle Contact Information
Vehicle contact information can be added and/or edited directly from the Vehicle Card in two ways: using the Messaging feature or from the Admin tab.
Add/Edit Via Messaging Feature
Add/Edit Contact Info - Messaging Feature:
From the Vehicle Card, click the ellipsis icon ().
A menu appears.
Click Send Message.
The Messaging page appears.
Click Edit Vehicle Contact Info.
Scroll down to the Contact Info section.
Enter or edit Phone and/or Email information and use the checkboxes to select an Alert Preference (Email or SMS).
Click Save.
A success message appears stating "The vehicle "XX" has been updated."
Add/Edit Via Admin Tab
To view/edit the Admin tab, you must have the Vehicle Admin permission enabled in the User Access List and Manage Vehicles permission enabled in the Menu Access List.
Add/Edit Contact Info - Admin Tab:
From the Vehicle Card, click the Admin tab.
Click Edit.
Scroll down to the Contact Info section.
Enter or edit Phone and/or Email information and use the checkboxes to select an Alert Preference (Email or SMS).
Click Save.
A success message appears stating "The vehicle "XX" has been updated."
Basic Tier Instructions
If you are a customer on the Basic tier, please use the instructions provided below. Click on the title to expand the window to view.
[toggles]
[toggle title="Messaging a Vehicle or Driver - Basic Tier"]
The portal allows you to send and receive messages to / from a vehicle / driver via SMS. Messages sent via email from the portal are handled by your mail client. Default vehicle contact info can be set by editing vehicle information.
Send an SMS Message
SMS messages sent from the portal are delivered to a driver's mobile device via 477-477 (GPSGPS). Any messages sent from a driver are displayed in message history on the vehicle's Mobile Communications tab.
To send an SMS message to a vehicle/driver:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want message.
Click Message.
Click Send Message.
Choose a phone number to use for the message.
If no number is shown, click to add/edit vehicle contact info. You may need to refresh the browser window to see updated contact info from the Send Message tab.
Enter a message in the Message box (e.g., Can you stop by Yard B on your way back to the Warehouse?).
When finished with the message, click Send Message.
The message will be delivered to the driver's mobile device from the number 477-477 (GPSGPS). If the driver replies to a message, an automated message will be sent to the driver to indicate that the reply was sent. You can view all driver-initiated communication from the Mobile Communications tab.
Send an Email Message
Email messages sent from the portal are handled by your mail client. Any email messages sent from a driver are not viewable on the vehicle's Mobile Communications tab.
To send an email to a vehicle/driver:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want message.
Click Message.
Click Send Message.
Choose an email address to use for the message.
If no email address is shown, click to add/edit vehicle contact info. You may need to refresh the browser window to see updated contact info from the Send Message tab.
Enter a message in the Message box (e.g., Can you stop by Yard B on your way back to the Warehouse?).
When finished with the message, click Send Message.
Your default mail client opens with a draft of the message. From this point on, this communication thread will be handled by your and the driver's mail client. Messages sent via email are not viewable from within message history of the portal.
[/toggle]
[/toggles]
[post_title] => Messaging from the Vehicle Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => messaging-from-the-vehicle-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-06-02 13:05:30
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-06-02 20:05:30
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25428
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 1
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25428
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-04 10:19:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-04 17:19:09
[post_content] => Messaging allows you to send SMS messages from within the portal to your fleet vehicles. You can send messages to vehicles directly from the Vehicle Card in the Portal. Messages can be sent to any vehicle with a valid phone/SMS number. You can also review received messages from the Vehicle Card.
To send a message from the Vehicle Card, the applicable vehicle must have valid vehicle contact information associated with the vehicle.
How to send a message:
From the Vehicle Card, click the ellipsis icon ().
A menu appears.
Click Send Message.
The Messaging page appears. You can view all messages sent to/received from this vehicle contact from this page. All messages display time and date stamps.
Enter your message and click Send.
You can adjust the size of the text field by clicking on the bottom left-hand corner of the box and dragging down to expand.
Adding or Editing Vehicle Contact Information
Vehicle contact information can be added and/or edited directly from the Vehicle Card in two ways: using the Messaging feature or from the Admin tab.
Add/Edit Via Messaging Feature
Add/Edit Contact Info - Messaging Feature:
From the Vehicle Card, click the ellipsis icon ().
A menu appears.
Click Send Message.
The Messaging page appears.
Click Edit Vehicle Contact Info.
Scroll down to the Contact Info section.
Enter or edit Phone and/or Email information and use the checkboxes to select an Alert Preference (Email or SMS).
Click Save.
A success message appears stating "The vehicle "XX" has been updated."
Add/Edit Via Admin Tab
To view/edit the Admin tab, you must have the Vehicle Admin permission enabled in the User Access List and Manage Vehicles permission enabled in the Menu Access List.
Add/Edit Contact Info - Admin Tab:
From the Vehicle Card, click the Admin tab.
Click Edit.
Scroll down to the Contact Info section.
Enter or edit Phone and/or Email information and use the checkboxes to select an Alert Preference (Email or SMS).
Click Save.
A success message appears stating "The vehicle "XX" has been updated."
Basic Tier Instructions
If you are a customer on the Basic tier, please use the instructions provided below. Click on the title to expand the window to view.
[toggles]
[toggle title="Messaging a Vehicle or Driver - Basic Tier"]
The portal allows you to send and receive messages to / from a vehicle / driver via SMS. Messages sent via email from the portal are handled by your mail client. Default vehicle contact info can be set by editing vehicle information.
Send an SMS Message
SMS messages sent from the portal are delivered to a driver's mobile device via 477-477 (GPSGPS). Any messages sent from a driver are displayed in message history on the vehicle's Mobile Communications tab.
To send an SMS message to a vehicle/driver:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want message.
Click Message.
Click Send Message.
Choose a phone number to use for the message.
If no number is shown, click to add/edit vehicle contact info. You may need to refresh the browser window to see updated contact info from the Send Message tab.
Enter a message in the Message box (e.g., Can you stop by Yard B on your way back to the Warehouse?).
When finished with the message, click Send Message.
The message will be delivered to the driver's mobile device from the number 477-477 (GPSGPS). If the driver replies to a message, an automated message will be sent to the driver to indicate that the reply was sent. You can view all driver-initiated communication from the Mobile Communications tab.
Send an Email Message
Email messages sent from the portal are handled by your mail client. Any email messages sent from a driver are not viewable on the vehicle's Mobile Communications tab.
To send an email to a vehicle/driver:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want message.
Click Message.
Click Send Message.
Choose an email address to use for the message.
If no email address is shown, click to add/edit vehicle contact info. You may need to refresh the browser window to see updated contact info from the Send Message tab.
Enter a message in the Message box (e.g., Can you stop by Yard B on your way back to the Warehouse?).
When finished with the message, click Send Message.
Your default mail client opens with a draft of the message. From this point on, this communication thread will be handled by your and the driver's mail client. Messages sent via email are not viewable from within message history of the portal.
If you are interested in using VersaPay, please follow the instructions within this article to create an account.
GPS Insight now offers VersaPay for our customers. VersaPay is an online portal that will allow you to access your account invoices, enter payment information directly without requiring interaction, and pay invoices directly from a link embedded in invoices.
An auto-fill entry will appear — click GPS Insight.
Click Continue.
Enter the email you'll use to view invoices, then click Continue.
Add a password in the Password field, then re-enter it in the Repeat Password field. Note: Make sure your password meets the requirements shown on the screen (at least 8 characters, one lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and one number).
Select two security questions from the drop-down menus and enter your answers, then click Complete Sign Up. A confirmation page will appear, letting you know to check your email for a confirmation message. Note: Please add no-reply@versapay.com to your contact list to make sure you receive emails from Versapay.
Open the confirmation email and click Verify this email address.
A new browser tab will open automatically, confirming your account is active. You're all set to sign in and start using Versapay!
Use the instructions provided in this article to update your payment method with VersaPay.
Due to PCI compliance, VersaPay requires you to add new card/bank account information when updating your payment method. You can use the instructions below to add a new card or bank account.
Note: Credit Card types accepted will vary based on the supplier to whom you are making a card payment. The card types accepted are indicated in the card entry field.
Adding Payment Method
How to add a new payment method
Click ‘Payment Methods’ in the menu under your username.
You can add bank account or credit card information:
Adding a Bank Account:
When adding a USD bank account, you will be required to provide content for the following fields:
Routing Number
Account Number
Bank Account Type
Check Type
Account Holder Name
When adding a CAD bank account, you will be required to provide the following fields:
Select your bank (if your bank is not included on the provided list, click Don’t see your bank? and add your three-digit institution number)
Transit Number
Account Number
Account Holder Name
Adding a Credit Card:
When adding your credit card in the Customer Portal, you will be required to provide the following fields:
Card Number
CCV
Expiry Date
Name on Card
Zip/Postal Code
Note: The Name on Card and Zip/Postal Code must match the billing information for the card number entered. If this information does not match, the card may be declined upon entry. If this occurs, please review the billing name and zip/postal details and re-enter.
Signing Up for AutoPay
When adding a funding source in Versapay, you always have the option to opt in for AutoPay. Selecting to opt in will automate your invoice payment process. Invoices will be automatically paid from the funding source based on the timing assigned when activating your AutoPay agreement.
Note: Once AutoPay is activated, it will pay all invoices that meet the criteria, including historic overdue invoices.
If you are interested in using VersaPay, please follow the instructions within this article to create an account.
GPS Insight now offers VersaPay for our customers. VersaPay is an online portal that will allow you to access your account invoices, enter payment information directly without requiring interaction, and pay invoices directly from a link embedded in invoices.
An auto-fill entry will appear — click GPS Insight.
Click Continue.
Enter the email you'll use to view invoices, then click Continue.
Add a password in the Password field, then re-enter it in the Repeat Password field. Note: Make sure your password meets the requirements shown on the screen (at least 8 characters, one lowercase letter, one uppercase letter, and one number).
Select two security questions from the drop-down menus and enter your answers, then click Complete Sign Up. A confirmation page will appear, letting you know to check your email for a confirmation message. Note: Please add no-reply@versapay.com to your contact list to make sure you receive emails from Versapay.
Open the confirmation email and click Verify this email address.
A new browser tab will open automatically, confirming your account is active. You're all set to sign in and start using Versapay!
The Reports page puts your fleet data front and center — create, schedule, and manage all of your reports from one central location. There are two tabs to work with: Create Report and My Scheduled Reports.
Use the Create Report tab to run reports on demand and zero in on the data that matters most to your operation. The insights you'll find here are designed to help you make smarter, more informed decisions for your fleet.
When you're ready to review your reporting history, the My Scheduled Reports tab gives you a detailed look at what's been run, when it last ran, and when it's due to run next — along with the current status of each report.
New vs Legacy
Reports marked as New bring upgraded reporting capabilities to the table, delivering enhanced analytics and improved data handling across the board. These reports are tagged with a green "New" label.
Reports marked as Legacy use our original reporting format and data handling capabilities. Keep in mind that Legacy reports in End of Life status can no longer be scheduled.
End of Life reports have been moved out of the main Create Reports tab and into a dedicated End of Life Reports section, where they're tagged with an orange "Legacy" label for easy identification. You'll also notice deprecation warnings appearing on mouse hover across the report tile, Run Report panel, Scheduled Reports table, and Scheduled Reports dropdown — each warning includes a countdown to the deprecation date and a direct link to the replacement report, so you'll always know where to go next.
The following reports are currently designated as End of Life:
Activity Detail
Performance
Begin/End of Day
Fleet Utilization
Diagnostic
Driving Violations Detail
Driving Violation Summary
Report Types
With 40+ reports available, there's no shortage of ways to dig into your data. Reports are organized by category and type, making it easy to find exactly what you're looking for. Check out the table below for a full breakdown of available report types and what each one covers.
Note: Some reports are available exclusively to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration plan add-on — these have been indicated in the table below.
Activity Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Activity Detail (also known as ADR)
Shows all reported vehicle locations.
Begin/End of Day
View first start and last stop for any or all vehicles.
Note: Days Utilized - Counts any day a vehicle had driving activity — including ignition on, even with zero distance traveled. Days with no activity (parked) are not counted. This measures how often a vehicle was actually used, not how far it traveled.
Idle Time Detail
Report on individual idle stops.
Idle Time Summary
View idle information for multiple vehicles in your fleet.
Odd Hours
View driving-time violations.
Diagnostic Reports
Note: Driver and Hierarchy features are exclusive to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration plan add-on. Reach out to your Account Manager if you'd like to learn more about upgrading or adding these features to your plan.
Note: Diagnostic data availability varies by vehicle. The Reports Page displays a range of metrics — such as true odometer readings and fuel usage — however, not all vehicles are capable of transmitting every data point. When true diagnostic data is unavailable for a given vehicle, the system will automatically substitute GPS-based estimated values to maintain reporting continuity.
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Diagnostic
A full set of diagnostic values (not DTC) reported by your vehicles.
Driving Violations
View graphical roll up and details of driving violations by time, vehicles, drivers, groups and hierarchy.
Driving Violations Detail
View driving violation time and type for vehicles, vehicle groups, and drivers.
Driving Violations Summary
View graphical roll-up of driving violations and break down of violations by vehicle.
DTC Alerts
Alerts reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Fuel Usage Detail
Gallons consumed, MPG and GPH.
Fuel Usage Summary
Gallons consumed by month.
Odometer History
Offers two views: a detail view with visual analytics and a comprehensive table of mileage adjustments, and a summary view presenting a streamlined table of mileage adjustment events with key details.
Performance
View overall performance of your vehicles.
Run time
View odometer and run time totals with optional reminders.
View the history of seat belt usage for vehicles, drivers, and groups.
Service History
A history of logged service for your fleet.
Service Reminders
Pending service reminders for your fleet.
Switch Alerts
Report on switch-based alerts.
VIN Reported as Diagnostic
Visually confirm the VIN associated with your vehicle during registration matches the VIN reported by the vehicle.
Driver Reports
Note: Driver and Hierarchy features are exclusive to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration plan add-on. Reach out to your Account Manager if you'd like to learn more about upgrading or adding these features to your plan.
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Driver Rest Break
✅
List of rest breaks drivers have taken.
Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR)
✅
Shows driver-vehicle inspection details.
Time to Complete DVIR
✅
Shows driver vehicle inspection durations.
Landmark Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Landmark Begin/End of Day (Enterprise only)
✅
Printable report with landmark begin/end of day. Start/End Landmarks are required.
Landmark Group
Report on stop/idle time spent in a landmark group.
Landmark History
Report on time in Landmarks.
Landmark Log
✅
Report on landmark visits in order.
Late Start
Report on vehicles that have not left, or returned to, a landmark by a certain time.
Unmarked Stops
Stops outside of known landmarks
Speeding Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Acceleration Detail
✅
Fast acceleration and harsh-braking. Supported devices only.
Acceleration Summary
✅
Compare vehicles' acceleration and deceleration rates over time. Supported devices only.
Posted Speed Violations
Violations of local posted speed.
Speed Summary
Compare vehicles' speeding trends over time. Based on posted speed limits.
Speeding in Landmarks
View speeding violations within landmark boundaries.
Speeding Violation
View speeding violations of preset thresholds.
Stop Detail Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Route Efficiency Detail
✅
Visually show where drivers are wasting time and/or driving too far.
Route Efficiency Summary
✅
Summarize and rank drivers' efficiency
State Mileage
View vehicle mileage by state.
Stop Detail (with notes)
✅
Printable report on stop details with SMS driver notes.
Stop Detail and Idle Time
Report detailing stop and idle events.
Trip Detail
Printable report showing trips, stops, and idles
Custom Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Alert History
History of all alerts.
Fuel Card Transactions
✅
Fuel card transaction details.
Fuel Card Usage
✅
Summary of fuel card usage.
Truck Activity
✅
Printable Truck Activity Log for Drivers.
Vehicle Recall
List of recall data for vehicles in your fleet.
[/whitelabel] [whitelabel tier="limited,full"]You can create, schedule, and manage reports from the reports page. You can also view report details on the My Scheduled Reports page to see what reports were run, their last and next run date, and if they are currently active.
Report Types
There are 40+ available reports that are separated by category and type. Please view the following list of report types and corresponding descriptions in the table below.
Reports applicable only to Enterprise customers have been indicated below accordingly.
Activity Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Activity Detail (also known as ADR),Shows all reported vehicle locations. Begin/End of Day, View first start and last stop for any or all vehicles. Drive Time Summary,View your entire fleet's driving statistics. First Movement Detail (GO9 device only),Individual violations of first movement. First Movement Summary (GO9 device only),Summary violations of first movement. Fleet Hierarchy Rollup (Enterprise only),Report with utilization details by hierarchy. Fleet Utilization (Enterprise only),Report with fleet utilization details. Idle Time Detail,Report on individual idle stops. Idle Time Summary,View idle information for multiple vehicles in your fleet. Odd Hours,View driving-time violations. [/et]
Diagnostic Reports
Driver and Hierarchy features are available to Enterprise customers only. Please contact your Account Manager if you would like additional information.
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Diagnostic,A full set of diagnostic values (not DTC) reported by your vehicles. Driving Violations,View graphical roll up and details of driving violations by time\, vehicles\, drivers\, groups and hierarchy. Driving Violations Detail,View driving violation time and type for vehicles\, vehicle groups\, and drivers. Driving Violations Summary,View graphical roll-up of driving violations and break down of violations by vehicle. DTC Alerts,Alerts reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Fuel Usage Detail,Gallons consumed\, MPG and GPH. Fuel Usage Summary,Gallons consumed by month. Performance,View overall performance of your vehicles. Run time,View odometer and run time totals with optional reminders. Seat Belt Usage Summary (GO9 devices only),View the history of seat belt usage for vehicles\, drivers\, and groups. Service History,A history of logged service for your fleet. Service Reminders,Pending service reminders for your fleet. Switch Alerts,Report on switch-based alerts. [/et]
Driver Reports
Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers only. Please contact your Account Manager if you would like additional information.
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Driver Rest Break (Enterprise only),List of rest breaks drivers have taken. Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR) (Enterprise only),Shows driver-vehicle inspection details. Time to Complete DVIR (Enterprise only),Shows driver vehicle inspection durations. [/et]
Landmark Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Landmark Begin/End of Day (Enterprise only),Printable report with landmark begin/end of day. Start/End Landmarks are required. Landmark Group,Report on stop/idle time spent in a landmark group. Landmark History,Report on time in Landmarks. Landmark Log (Enterprise only),Report on landmark visits in order. Late Start,Report on vehicles that have not left\, or returned to\, a landmark by a certain time. Unmarked Stops,Stops outside of known landmarks [/et]
Speeding Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Acceleration Detail (Enterprise only),Fast acceleration and harsh-braking. Supported devices only. Acceleration Summary (Enterprise only),Compare vehicles' acceleration and deceleration rates over time. Supported devices only. Posted Speed Violations,Violations of local posted speed. Speed Summary, Compare vehicles' speeding trends over time. Based on posted speed limits. Speeding in Landmarks, View speeding violations within landmark boundaries. Speeding Violation,View speeding violations of preset thresholds. [/et]
Stop Detail Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Route Efficiency Detail (Enterprise only),Visually show where drivers are wasting time and/or driving too far. Route Efficiency Summary (Enterprise only),Summarize and rank drivers' efficiency State Mileage,View vehicle mileage by state. Stop Detail (with notes) (Enterprise only),Printable report on stop details with SMS driver notes. Stop Detail and Idle Time,Report detailing stop and idle events. Trip Detail,Printable report showing trips\, stops\, and idles [/et]
Custom Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Alert History,History of all alerts. Fuel Card Transactions (Enterprise only),Fuel card transaction details. Fuel Card Usage (Enterprise only),Summary of fuel card usage. Truck Activity (Enterprise only),Printable Truck Activity Log for Drivers. Vehicle Recall,List of recall data for vehicles in your fleet. [/et][/whitelabel]
Reports give you a powerful way to manage and monitor daily fleet activity. Whether you're tracking vehicle performance or driver behavior, you can run reports tailored to either — and customize them to fit your specific needs.
The Create Report tab is where it all comes together — run reports that surface the data most relevant to you and your organization.
Browse reports by selecting a Report Type from the available categories, or use the Search field to jump straight to the report you need.
Note: Driver and Hierarchy features are exclusive to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration plan add-on. Reach out to your Account Manager if you’d like to learn more about upgrading or adding these features to your plan.
End of Life Reports
End-of-Life reports are housed in their own dedicated End of Life Reports section of the Create Reports tab. Each one is tagged with an orange "Legacy" label so they're easy to spot. Deprecation warnings are displayed throughout the experience — on the report tile, in the Create Report panel, in the Scheduled Reports table, and in the Scheduled Reports dropdown. Each warning gives you a countdown to the deprecation date and a link to the recommended replacement report, keeping your transition on track.
From the Create Report page, click the report you would like to run.
The Create Report panel appears.
Click the Email Report checkbox.
The Email Report options will appear.
In the Report Format field, click in the Search field to view the format options, then click the format option(s) you would like the emailed report sent in.
Update the Email Subject field (optional).
Enter one or multiple email addresses in the Addresses field.
Adjust the report settings as needed.
Click Email Report.
To Schedule a Report
You can schedule a report from the Create Report tab or the My Scheduled Reports tab of the Reports page.
For this article, we are providing instructions on how to schedule a report from the Create Report tab.
From the Create Report page, click the report you would like to run.
The Create Report panel appears.
Click the Schedule Report toggle, and the scheduling options will expand.
Under Schedule, select your scheduled report cadence from the following options:
Daily (Weekdays)
Daily (Weekends)
Monthly
Quarterly
Weekly (Weekdays)
Weekly (Weekends)
In the Report Format field, click in the Search field to view the format options, then click the format option(s) you would like the emailed report sent in.
Update the Email Subject field (optional).
Enter one or multiple email addresses in the Addresses field.
Adjust the report settings as needed.
Once complete, click Schedule Report.
[/whitelabel]
[whitelabel tier="limited,full"]Reports help manage and oversee daily activity. You can run reports specific to vehicle and driver activity and even customize reports.
Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers only. Please contact your Account Manager for additional information.
To run a report:
From the Reports page, click the report you want to run.
The Report card will appear.
Adjust the report settings as needed, and click Run Report.
To email a report:
[row]
[column lg="6" md="6" sm="6" xs="6" ]
From the Reports page, click the report you want to run.
The Report card will appear.
Click the Email Report checkbox.
The Email Report options will appear.
Update the Email Subject field (optional).
Enter one or multiple email addresses in the Addresses field.
Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Driver Management add-on. Please contact your Account Manager to learn more.
You may filter your selected report parameters after running the report directly from the report itself in the Portal. This includes selecting the date range, driver, and setting daily drive time in minutes (min and max), daily distance in miles or KM (min and max), and distance display (miles or KM). Furthermore, each section of the report offers additional filters.
Summary Totals
This section of the report provides violation event summary totals for the selected data source (driver and/or driver group) during the time frame specified for the following areas:
If you have the Advanced Safety package for your account, the Seat Belt Unbuckled and First Movement Reverse Events is included in your scorecard report. If you do not have this package, the values will read as 0 and will not impact driver scores. If you would like to learn more about the Advanced Safety package, please contact your Account Manager.
All summary totals offer maximize element, download (CSV, Excel, or PDF), refresh data and copy to clipboard options.
Interactive Graphs
There are two interactive graphs offered in the report. Both graphs offer sort, maximize element, download (CSV, Excel, PNG, or PDF), and refresh options directly from each graph. The Drivers by Grade graph offers a filter option as well.
Driver Score Weighting
You can adjust the percentage weight for safety violation events to return results that encapsulate the driving behaviors you deem as risky.
The percentage weights must equal a total of 100.
If you do not adjust the weight on the report, the following default weights are applied to each event category.
Driver Score Default Weighting
Master Admin users can configure default weightings for the entire account when generating a Driver Scorecard report.Otherwise, system default weights (see table below) are used.
Weightings configured by Master Admin users can still be adjusted by non-Master Admin users within the report after it has been generated.
Default Event Weight
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Event,Default Score Weightings (%)
Idling,10%
Hard Turns,10%
Rapid Acceleration,10%
Hard Braking,20%
Speeding,40%
Unbuckled Seat Belt,10%
First Reverse,0%
[/et]
Driver Score Behavior Event Types
The default thresholds for violation events and descriptions are as follows:
The default weight for many of the violation events (unless specified below) are defined from your set device threshold configurations. To learn more about setting threshold configurations for your device, please refer to Configuring Device Thresholds.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Behavior Event, Default Threshold & Description
Idling (Idle Time in hr),Based on the Idling Configuration that is set for the device threshold. If no configuration is set\, the default configuration is 300 seconds.
Hard Turns,This is based on the G-Force configuration for the device threshold for Hard Left/Right. If no configuration is set on the GPS device\ the default configuration is 0.35g.
Rapid Acceleration,Based on the G-force configuration for the device threshold for Rapid Acceleration. If no configuration is set on the GPS device\, the default configuration is 0.35g.
Fast Stops (Hard Braking),This is based on the G-force configuration for the device threshold for Hard Braking. If no configuration is set on the GPS device\, the default configuration is 0.36g.
Posted Speeding Violations,Based on the “Over Posted Speed” threshold selected within filters. Default Over Posted Speed Threshold is 10 MPH.~~~~Optional: Configure a sustained speeding filter that triggers a speeding event only when a driver exceeds the speed threshold* for a specified duration (default is 30 seconds).
Unbuckled Seat Belt,Amount of time (hours) the driver is unbuckled while the vehicle is moving or a count of trips taken with an unbuckled seat belt.
First Reverse (First Movement Reverse Events),A First Movement Reverse event is triggered if the first identified transmission gear change on the trip is reverse.
[/et]
The default threshold for the Sustained Speeding option is 30 seconds; however, 1-minute, 2-minute, 3-minute, 4-minute, 5-minute, 6-minute, and 7-minute threshold options are available.
Report Details
The report details provides line items for Leaderboard and Violation Details by Month of the total number of violations for each driver and corresponding scores included in the report. Both sections offer filter, sort, maximize element, export (CSV, Excel, PNG, or PDF), and refresh options directly from each graph.
Leaderboard Section
The Leaderboard section shows your driver(s) as selected with the Data Source Selector by performance offering their corresponding grade, score, rank, drive time (hours), idle time (hours), seat belt unbuckled (hours), hard breaking events, rapid acceleration events, speeding events, hard turn events, and first movement reverse events. All columns can be sorted in ascending, descending, or custom order, and offer column details to view high-level data contained in the column. Additionally, a Leaderboard filter is available to filter by Top N (number), Bottom N (number), Top Percentile and Bottom Percentile.
Violation Details by Month Section
The Violation Details by Month section shows your driver(s) as selected with the Data Source Selector by violation details offering the month, grade, score, total distance, drive time (hours), idle time (hours), seat belt unbuckled (hours), hard breaking events, rapid acceleration events, speeding events, hard turn events, first movement reverse events, total violations, first date, last date, and days driven. Additionally, driver and grade filters are available.
Exporting the Report
This report can be downloaded as a PDF (Portrait or Landscape) in its entirety; however, please note that some of the available columns under the Vehicle Summary and Vehicle Events Report Details sections may be cut off due to the size of the columns.
This report also offers the ability to export sections of the report individually. Each section can be exported in CSV, Excel, PDF or PNG formats.
[post_title] => Using the Driver Scorecard Report
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-driver-scorecard-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-06-28 22:54:10
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-06-29 05:54:10
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=28016
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 3
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 22242
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-03-26 07:23:24
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-03-26 14:23:24
[post_content] =>
[whitelabel tier="gpsi"]
The Reports page puts your fleet data front and center — create, schedule, and manage all of your reports from one central location. There are two tabs to work with: Create Report and My Scheduled Reports.
Use the Create Report tab to run reports on demand and zero in on the data that matters most to your operation. The insights you'll find here are designed to help you make smarter, more informed decisions for your fleet.
When you're ready to review your reporting history, the My Scheduled Reports tab gives you a detailed look at what's been run, when it last ran, and when it's due to run next — along with the current status of each report.
New vs Legacy
Reports marked as New bring upgraded reporting capabilities to the table, delivering enhanced analytics and improved data handling across the board. These reports are tagged with a green "New" label.
Reports marked as Legacy use our original reporting format and data handling capabilities. Keep in mind that Legacy reports in End of Life status can no longer be scheduled.
End of Life reports have been moved out of the main Create Reports tab and into a dedicated End of Life Reports section, where they're tagged with an orange "Legacy" label for easy identification. You'll also notice deprecation warnings appearing on mouse hover across the report tile, Run Report panel, Scheduled Reports table, and Scheduled Reports dropdown — each warning includes a countdown to the deprecation date and a direct link to the replacement report, so you'll always know where to go next.
The following reports are currently designated as End of Life:
Activity Detail
Performance
Begin/End of Day
Fleet Utilization
Diagnostic
Driving Violations Detail
Driving Violation Summary
Report Types
With 40+ reports available, there's no shortage of ways to dig into your data. Reports are organized by category and type, making it easy to find exactly what you're looking for. Check out the table below for a full breakdown of available report types and what each one covers.
Note: Some reports are available exclusively to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration plan add-on — these have been indicated in the table below.
Activity Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Activity Detail (also known as ADR)
Shows all reported vehicle locations.
Begin/End of Day
View first start and last stop for any or all vehicles.
Note: Days Utilized - Counts any day a vehicle had driving activity — including ignition on, even with zero distance traveled. Days with no activity (parked) are not counted. This measures how often a vehicle was actually used, not how far it traveled.
Idle Time Detail
Report on individual idle stops.
Idle Time Summary
View idle information for multiple vehicles in your fleet.
Odd Hours
View driving-time violations.
Diagnostic Reports
Note: Driver and Hierarchy features are exclusive to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration plan add-on. Reach out to your Account Manager if you'd like to learn more about upgrading or adding these features to your plan.
Note: Diagnostic data availability varies by vehicle. The Reports Page displays a range of metrics — such as true odometer readings and fuel usage — however, not all vehicles are capable of transmitting every data point. When true diagnostic data is unavailable for a given vehicle, the system will automatically substitute GPS-based estimated values to maintain reporting continuity.
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Diagnostic
A full set of diagnostic values (not DTC) reported by your vehicles.
Driving Violations
View graphical roll up and details of driving violations by time, vehicles, drivers, groups and hierarchy.
Driving Violations Detail
View driving violation time and type for vehicles, vehicle groups, and drivers.
Driving Violations Summary
View graphical roll-up of driving violations and break down of violations by vehicle.
DTC Alerts
Alerts reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Fuel Usage Detail
Gallons consumed, MPG and GPH.
Fuel Usage Summary
Gallons consumed by month.
Odometer History
Offers two views: a detail view with visual analytics and a comprehensive table of mileage adjustments, and a summary view presenting a streamlined table of mileage adjustment events with key details.
Performance
View overall performance of your vehicles.
Run time
View odometer and run time totals with optional reminders.
View the history of seat belt usage for vehicles, drivers, and groups.
Service History
A history of logged service for your fleet.
Service Reminders
Pending service reminders for your fleet.
Switch Alerts
Report on switch-based alerts.
VIN Reported as Diagnostic
Visually confirm the VIN associated with your vehicle during registration matches the VIN reported by the vehicle.
Driver Reports
Note: Driver and Hierarchy features are exclusive to Enterprise customers and customers with the Advanced Administration plan add-on. Reach out to your Account Manager if you'd like to learn more about upgrading or adding these features to your plan.
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Driver Rest Break
✅
List of rest breaks drivers have taken.
Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR)
✅
Shows driver-vehicle inspection details.
Time to Complete DVIR
✅
Shows driver vehicle inspection durations.
Landmark Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Landmark Begin/End of Day (Enterprise only)
✅
Printable report with landmark begin/end of day. Start/End Landmarks are required.
Landmark Group
Report on stop/idle time spent in a landmark group.
Landmark History
Report on time in Landmarks.
Landmark Log
✅
Report on landmark visits in order.
Late Start
Report on vehicles that have not left, or returned to, a landmark by a certain time.
Unmarked Stops
Stops outside of known landmarks
Speeding Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Acceleration Detail
✅
Fast acceleration and harsh-braking. Supported devices only.
Acceleration Summary
✅
Compare vehicles' acceleration and deceleration rates over time. Supported devices only.
Posted Speed Violations
Violations of local posted speed.
Speed Summary
Compare vehicles' speeding trends over time. Based on posted speed limits.
Speeding in Landmarks
View speeding violations within landmark boundaries.
Speeding Violation
View speeding violations of preset thresholds.
Stop Detail Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Route Efficiency Detail
✅
Visually show where drivers are wasting time and/or driving too far.
Route Efficiency Summary
✅
Summarize and rank drivers' efficiency
State Mileage
View vehicle mileage by state.
Stop Detail (with notes)
✅
Printable report on stop details with SMS driver notes.
Stop Detail and Idle Time
Report detailing stop and idle events.
Trip Detail
Printable report showing trips, stops, and idles
Custom Reports
Report Type
Enterprise/Advanced Admin Only
Description
Alert History
History of all alerts.
Fuel Card Transactions
✅
Fuel card transaction details.
Fuel Card Usage
✅
Summary of fuel card usage.
Truck Activity
✅
Printable Truck Activity Log for Drivers.
Vehicle Recall
List of recall data for vehicles in your fleet.
[/whitelabel] [whitelabel tier="limited,full"]You can create, schedule, and manage reports from the reports page. You can also view report details on the My Scheduled Reports page to see what reports were run, their last and next run date, and if they are currently active.
Report Types
There are 40+ available reports that are separated by category and type. Please view the following list of report types and corresponding descriptions in the table below.
Reports applicable only to Enterprise customers have been indicated below accordingly.
Activity Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Activity Detail (also known as ADR),Shows all reported vehicle locations. Begin/End of Day, View first start and last stop for any or all vehicles. Drive Time Summary,View your entire fleet's driving statistics. First Movement Detail (GO9 device only),Individual violations of first movement. First Movement Summary (GO9 device only),Summary violations of first movement. Fleet Hierarchy Rollup (Enterprise only),Report with utilization details by hierarchy. Fleet Utilization (Enterprise only),Report with fleet utilization details. Idle Time Detail,Report on individual idle stops. Idle Time Summary,View idle information for multiple vehicles in your fleet. Odd Hours,View driving-time violations. [/et]
Diagnostic Reports
Driver and Hierarchy features are available to Enterprise customers only. Please contact your Account Manager if you would like additional information.
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Diagnostic,A full set of diagnostic values (not DTC) reported by your vehicles. Driving Violations,View graphical roll up and details of driving violations by time\, vehicles\, drivers\, groups and hierarchy. Driving Violations Detail,View driving violation time and type for vehicles\, vehicle groups\, and drivers. Driving Violations Summary,View graphical roll-up of driving violations and break down of violations by vehicle. DTC Alerts,Alerts reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Fuel Usage Detail,Gallons consumed\, MPG and GPH. Fuel Usage Summary,Gallons consumed by month. Performance,View overall performance of your vehicles. Run time,View odometer and run time totals with optional reminders. Seat Belt Usage Summary (GO9 devices only),View the history of seat belt usage for vehicles\, drivers\, and groups. Service History,A history of logged service for your fleet. Service Reminders,Pending service reminders for your fleet. Switch Alerts,Report on switch-based alerts. [/et]
Driver Reports
Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers only. Please contact your Account Manager if you would like additional information.
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Driver Rest Break (Enterprise only),List of rest breaks drivers have taken. Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR) (Enterprise only),Shows driver-vehicle inspection details. Time to Complete DVIR (Enterprise only),Shows driver vehicle inspection durations. [/et]
Landmark Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Landmark Begin/End of Day (Enterprise only),Printable report with landmark begin/end of day. Start/End Landmarks are required. Landmark Group,Report on stop/idle time spent in a landmark group. Landmark History,Report on time in Landmarks. Landmark Log (Enterprise only),Report on landmark visits in order. Late Start,Report on vehicles that have not left\, or returned to\, a landmark by a certain time. Unmarked Stops,Stops outside of known landmarks [/et]
Speeding Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Acceleration Detail (Enterprise only),Fast acceleration and harsh-braking. Supported devices only. Acceleration Summary (Enterprise only),Compare vehicles' acceleration and deceleration rates over time. Supported devices only. Posted Speed Violations,Violations of local posted speed. Speed Summary, Compare vehicles' speeding trends over time. Based on posted speed limits. Speeding in Landmarks, View speeding violations within landmark boundaries. Speeding Violation,View speeding violations of preset thresholds. [/et]
Stop Detail Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Route Efficiency Detail (Enterprise only),Visually show where drivers are wasting time and/or driving too far. Route Efficiency Summary (Enterprise only),Summarize and rank drivers' efficiency State Mileage,View vehicle mileage by state. Stop Detail (with notes) (Enterprise only),Printable report on stop details with SMS driver notes. Stop Detail and Idle Time,Report detailing stop and idle events. Trip Detail,Printable report showing trips\, stops\, and idles [/et]
Custom Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"] Report Type,Description Alert History,History of all alerts. Fuel Card Transactions (Enterprise only),Fuel card transaction details. Fuel Card Usage (Enterprise only),Summary of fuel card usage. Truck Activity (Enterprise only),Printable Truck Activity Log for Drivers. Vehicle Recall,List of recall data for vehicles in your fleet. [/et][/whitelabel]
[post_title] => About the Reports Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-reports-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-14 11:15:38
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-14 18:15:38
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22242
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 3
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => ebe442e58194d3ba186015611ab27519
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:84f2a6fdd27244b8b358b7031e1a8f4e
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 15
[name] => Reports
[slug] => reports
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 15
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Reports allow you to view and interact with quantifiable vehicle data, such as daily activity, idling, stop times, speeding, landmark visits, and other aspects of driving efficiency. You can run reports to view the data immediately, or you can schedule reports to be automatically delivered via email on a regular schedule.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 46
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 10
[cat_ID] => 15
[category_count] => 46
[category_description] => Reports allow you to view and interact with quantifiable vehicle data, such as daily activity, idling, stop times, speeding, landmark visits, and other aspects of driving efficiency. You can run reports to view the data immediately, or you can schedule reports to be automatically delivered via email on a regular schedule.
[cat_name] => Reports
[category_nicename] => reports
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 5
)
[592] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 592
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 585
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 592
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 585
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 592
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 592
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 585
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 592
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 585
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (592)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (585)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27569
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-07-11 07:31:23
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-07-11 14:31:23
[post_content] => Depending on the year/make/model or aftermarket up-fitting of the vehicle, some vehicles may not support Starter Disable due to the complexities of the installation. There are several aftermarket options (listed below) that may lead to issues during and after installation, if workmanship is not properly performed.
Breaking any of these wires mentioned below may introduce unexpected consequences, such as interrupting proper functionality of the brake lights or cruise control, or in some instances triggering the MIL to become illuminated, among other things. Due to all of these variables it is highly recommended that the Starter Disable is performed by OEM or Aftermarket installer who is very familiar with installing Starter Disable equipment.
Push-to-Start Vehicles
Many new vehicles with push-to-start ignitions often present a challenge as multiple start wires may be present and could be controlled through the ECU.
Limp Mode/Vehicle Interlocks
Some vehicles may be equipped with a limp mode or interlock interface, which limit the vehicles' functionality or completely impair drivability until disabled.
Start-Stop Functionality
For vehicles equipped with start-stop functionality, start-stop causes the engine to shut down when the vehicle comes to a stop. Installers must be sure to install the starter disable in such a way in which the starter functionality is truly disabled only when the vehicle is stopped in a constant state and not while in traffic or at a temporary stop (stoplight / stop sign).
[post_title] => Starter Disable Installation Considerations
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => starter-disable-installation-considerations
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-07-11 07:31:23
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-07-11 14:31:23
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24899
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27569
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 1
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27569
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-07-11 07:31:23
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-07-11 14:31:23
[post_content] => Depending on the year/make/model or aftermarket up-fitting of the vehicle, some vehicles may not support Starter Disable due to the complexities of the installation. There are several aftermarket options (listed below) that may lead to issues during and after installation, if workmanship is not properly performed.
Breaking any of these wires mentioned below may introduce unexpected consequences, such as interrupting proper functionality of the brake lights or cruise control, or in some instances triggering the MIL to become illuminated, among other things. Due to all of these variables it is highly recommended that the Starter Disable is performed by OEM or Aftermarket installer who is very familiar with installing Starter Disable equipment.
Push-to-Start Vehicles
Many new vehicles with push-to-start ignitions often present a challenge as multiple start wires may be present and could be controlled through the ECU.
Limp Mode/Vehicle Interlocks
Some vehicles may be equipped with a limp mode or interlock interface, which limit the vehicles' functionality or completely impair drivability until disabled.
Click on the Legend button to view the definition of the colors and shapes on the map.
Color Coding
Vehicles are color-coded according to their current status (i.e., moving, idling, stopped).
For a vehicle to be assigned an "out-of-range" status, the vehicle must meet two technical requirements: 1) Last known ignition Event is ON, AND 2) Last device ping received 60 minutes ago or more.
Shape Coding
You can also identify your vehicles on the map easily by assigning shapes to your vehicles. Shapes are customizable. Instead of using a default marker (), you can assign different icon shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type, category, etc.
Vehicle List
In the Vehicle List and drop-downs, vehicles are listed alphabetically (by vehicle label) or chronologically (if vehicle label is numeric).
When you click on a vehicle from a list or from a map, the Vehicle Card appears, which shows you the duration of vehicle status, last reported time of ignition status, address and geocode of last reported location, and more.
[post_title] => About Vehicles on the Map
[post_excerpt] => Use this article to learn about how vehicles display on the Map.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-vehicles-on-the-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-06-14 11:59:58
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-06-14 18:59:58
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25076
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 34117
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2026-05-21 07:44:39
[post_date_gmt] => 2026-05-21 14:44:39
[post_content] =>
We partner with CerebrumX to bring OEM data directly to the Fleet Tracking Portal. At this time, we can collect data from GM, Ford, Stellantis, Toyota, Hino, Tesla, and Volvo. The table below provides information on the specific models and years.
🗒️ Note: This list is not exhaustive and may not include all eligible brands, makes, models, or years. If your vehicle is not listed, please contact support.
❗ Important: Request a VIN check before enrolling a vehicle in the OEM Plan or OEM EV Plan. Vehicles not on this list are still eligible for the Fleet Essentials or Fleet Pro Plus Plans that use aftermarket tracking devices (XT-25 & Go9).
Ford
Model
Year
F150
2019+
F-250
2019+
F-350
2019+
MACH-E
2021+
Expedition MAX
2020+
Expedition
2020+
Transit
2020+
Edge
2020+
Bronco Sport
2020+
Explorer
2020+
Escape
2020+
Mustang
2020+
Ranger
2020+
Bronco
2020+
All Other Vehicles
2020+
GM
Model
Year
Malibu Hybrid
2015+
Colorado Extended Cab
2015+
Spark
2015+
Equinox AWD
2015+
Trailblazer AWD
2019+
Silverado HD Regular Cab
2015+
Silverado HD Crew Cab
2015+
Silverado Double Cab
2015+
Bolt EV
2017+
Silverado Crew Cab
2015+
Silverado Regular Cab
2015+
Malibu
2015+
Hino
Model
Year
M4
2021+
M5
2021+
M5H
2021+
L6
2021+
L7
2021+
M5e
2024+
L6e
2024+
XL7
2021+
XL8
2021+
Stellantis
Model
Year
300
2018+
Pacifica
2020+
Charger (LD/LF)
2018+
Durango (WD)
2019+
Challenger (LC/LA/LB)
2018+
Gladiator
2020+
Grand Cherokee (WK)
2018+
Grand Cherokee (WL)
2021+
Wagoneer
2021+
Cherokee (KL)
2019+
Wrangler (JK/JL)
2020+
Jeep Renegade (BU/BV)
2018+
Jeep Compass NA (MP)
2019+
RAM Promaster
2022+
RAM 1500
2022+
RAM 2500
2022+
RAM 3500
2022+
RAM 4500
2022+
RAM 5500
2022+
Alfa Romeo Giulia (GA)
2020+
Alfa Romeo Stelvio (GU)
2020+
Tesla
Model
Year
Model S
2018+
Model 3
2018+
Model X
2018+
Model Y
2020+
Roadster
2024+
Toyota
Model
Year
Avalon
2019+
Camry
2019+
Corolla
2020+
Corolla Hatchback
2019+
CH-R
2020+
Highlander
2020+
Mirai
2018+
Prius
2020+
Prius Prime
2020+
RAV4
2019+
RAV4 Prime
2021+
Sequoia
2020+
Sienna
2019+
Tacoma
2020+
Tundra
2020+
Venza
2021+
4Runner
2020+
Volvo
Model
Year
Volvo VNL
2016+
Volvo VHD
2016+
Volvo VAH
2016+
Volvo VNX
2016+
Volvo VNR
2016+
Mack MD Series
2016+
Mack LR
2016+
Mack Granite
2016+
Mack Pinnacle
2016+
Mack Anthem
2016+
Don't see your vehicle? This list may not reflect all eligible makes, models, or years. Please contact Support for assistance.
Did you know your GO9+ device can double as a Wi-Fi hotspot? If your fleet is equipped with GO9+ GPS devices, you have the ability to create a local Wi-Fi connection directly from the device — no separate hotspot hardware needed. Here's everything you need to know to get it set up and start using it.
What You'll Need Before You Start
Before the hotspot can be activated, you'll need to reach out to the Support team to have it enabled on your device. This is a one-time setup step, and the team will take care of the configuration on the back end.
When you contact Support, have the following information ready for each device you'd like to enable:
Vehicle Name — the name as it appears in your GPS Insight account
Device Serial Number — found on the device itself or within your account
SSID — this is the network name that will show up when someone searches for available Wi-Fi networks on their phone or tablet. Choose something recognizable, like the vehicle name or a company identifier.
Password — the password users will enter to connect to the hotspot
Duration Wi-Fi Stays Active After Ignition Off — by default, the hotspot shuts off immediately when the vehicle is turned off to protect the vehicle's battery. If you'd prefer it to stay on for a period after the engine is off, you can choose from the following options:
Immediately after ignition off (default)
10 minutes after ignition off
1 hour after ignition off
4 hours after ignition off
12 hours after ignition off
🗒️ Note: Using this feature to keep the Wi-Fi hotspot active will drain the vehicle battery.
Once the Support team receives your request, they'll queue the updates to your devices and confirm when everything is set.
Connecting to the Hotspot
Once your hotspot has been enabled, connecting is just like joining any other Wi-Fi network:
Make sure the vehicle is on (or within the post-ignition window you selected).
On your mobile device, open your Wi-Fi settings and look for the network name (SSID) you chose during setup.
Enter your password and connect.
That's it — you're online.
A Note on Data Usage
Each GO9+ device includes a monthly data allowance of 2GB. If a device reaches that limit before the month resets, the hotspot will remain available but will be automatically throttled to a slower speed for the rest of the billing period. You'll still have connectivity — it just won't be as fast until the next cycle begins.
With that in mind, it's a good idea to keep data-heavy tasks (like large file downloads or video streaming) in mind when managing usage across your fleet.
Need Help?
If you run into any issues or have questions about the setup process, the Support team is happy to help. Reach out with your device details, and they'll get you sorted.
[post_title] => Using the Wi-Fi Hotspot on Your GO9+™
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-wi-fi-hotspot-on-your-go9
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-06-09 08:56:31
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-06-09 15:56:31
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=34095
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25282
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-08-29 12:47:24
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-08-29 19:47:24
[post_content] => You can view vehicle activity using the Activity Feed feature for a specific date directly from the Vehicle Card of the Portal Map page. You can interact with the Activity Feed by changing to History at top of Map and clicking on an activity point to see the vehicle’s location on the map. The vehicle card will open and you can view data points for movement activity to see the directional heading, speed (including max speed), and location.
Interact with the Activity Feed by clicking on an activity point to see the vehicle's location on the map at that specific activity point.
How to view vehicle activity:
From the Vehicle Card, click the Ellipsis button ().
A drop-down menu appears.
Click View History.
The History map page appears.
From the Timeline section, select a date and time (start/end time) using the Date Picker (calendar icon) and click View History.
Click the "Activity" tab in the Vehicle Card.
The Activity Feed for the selected date and vehicle is shown. You may need to scroll down to view all activity.
Click Show Data Points from a movement point to view individual data points (vehicle heading, speed, max speed, and location).
Optional: If you would like to see overview details for an activity item, click the activity item then click the Overview tab to see vehicle, reported on date/time stamp, direction, speed, driver (if assigned), odometer, ignition status, and device serial number.
Click on an activity point to see the vehicle's location on the History map corresponding to the selected activity point.
You can use the Trip History feature to view animated vehicle activity. Please see Using Trip History for additional information.
[post_title] => Viewing Vehicle Activity
[post_excerpt] => This article provides instructions on how to use the Activity Feed feature.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => viewing-vehicle-activity
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-03 09:09:22
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-03 16:09:22
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 25076
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25282
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 4
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25076
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-06-20 13:46:30
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-06-20 20:46:30
[post_content] => All of your registered vehicles and/or assets are visible on the map by color code and shape (if assigned).
Map Legend
Click on the Legend button to view the definition of the colors and shapes on the map.
Color Coding
Vehicles are color-coded according to their current status (i.e., moving, idling, stopped).
For a vehicle to be assigned an "out-of-range" status, the vehicle must meet two technical requirements: 1) Last known ignition Event is ON, AND 2) Last device ping received 60 minutes ago or more.
Shape Coding
You can also identify your vehicles on the map easily by assigning shapes to your vehicles. Shapes are customizable. Instead of using a default marker (), you can assign different icon shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type, category, etc.
Vehicle List
In the Vehicle List and drop-downs, vehicles are listed alphabetically (by vehicle label) or chronologically (if vehicle label is numeric).
When you click on a vehicle from a list or from a map, the Vehicle Card appears, which shows you the duration of vehicle status, last reported time of ignition status, address and geocode of last reported location, and more.
[post_title] => About Vehicles on the Map
[post_excerpt] => Use this article to learn about how vehicles display on the Map.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-vehicles-on-the-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-06-14 11:59:58
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-06-14 18:59:58
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25076
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 4
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => caaced8e698c4c0123de271386528925
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:4261381caa1b44de696718f8d18fa8ff
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 17
[name] => Vehicles
[slug] => vehicles
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 17
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Vehicle features allow you to manage all vehicle activity. You can register new vehicles in your account, edit vehicle information, view vehicle locations on the map, view current status, view historical activity, find the closest vehicles, get directions, center the map around a vehicle, follow a vehicle on the map, send an SMS message, create a landmark from a vehicle's location, and more. You can also create and share vehicle groups and manage access permissions.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 43
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 8
[cat_ID] => 17
[category_count] => 43
[category_description] => Vehicle features allow you to manage all vehicle activity. You can register new vehicles in your account, edit vehicle information, view vehicle locations on the map, view current status, view historical activity, find the closest vehicles, get directions, center the map around a vehicle, follow a vehicle on the map, send an SMS message, create a landmark from a vehicle's location, and more. You can also create and share vehicle groups and manage access permissions.
[cat_name] => Vehicles
[category_nicename] => vehicles
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 5
)
)
)
[Advanced Admin] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
[14] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 14
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 14
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 14
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 14
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 14
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (14)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 943
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:57:34
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:57:34
[post_content] => [solution term="basic,standard"]Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up an alert to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers. You can create an unlimited number of alerts for each alert type.
To add an alert:
From the menu, click Alerts, and then click the alert type you want to configure. (Or try searching for the alert using the Search bar.)
Choose from the following options:
The following properties are available for all alerts:
Vehicle: The vehicle[/solution][solution term="standard"]/group[/solution][solution term="basic,standard"] that applies to the alert. The vehicle name [/solution][solution term="standard"]and/or vehicle group (if applicable)[solution term="basic,standard"] will be visible in the email and/or SMS message after the Alert Subject.
Alert Subject: The subject as it will appear in the email and/or SMS message.
Addresses: The email address(es) and/or SMS number(s) where this alert will be sent. Separate multiple addresses and numbers by commas. The time stamp for when an alert notification occurs is formatted according to the user's timezone (who set up the alert).
Notify Driver: Select this box to optionally send a custom message to the vehicle's driver. (You can assign contact information for the vehicle by choosing Edit from the vehicle card.)
Depending on the alert type you create, additional properties vary:
In-Cab Notify: The in-cab notification method that should activate when the alert is triggered. (Must be installed in vehicle.)
Input: The input type (e.g., door, PTO, etc.) as defined by your account at the time of device installation and the input state on which to alert (e.g., open/closed, on/off, etc.).
Idle Limit: Minutes a vehicle must idle before an alert is triggered.
Weekdays: The days the alert is in effect. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Weekends: The days the alert is in effect on weekends. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Landmark: The landmark in which (or outside of which) the alert is in effect. Options include Inside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist inside the selected landmark or landmark group), Outside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist outside the selected landmark), or N/A (the alert will trigger regardless of vehicle location).
Running: Threshold in minutes since the last reported location.
Parked: Threshold in days since the last reported location.
Violation Limit: Threshold in MPH over the posted limit (greater than or equal to). Posted speed violations are calculated using the [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] value.
Alert Threshold: Threshold in miles, hours, or days before service is overdue.
Speed Limit: Threshold in MPH in speed (not related to posted limit). By default, conditions are based on [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] sample. This is valuable when you need to deduce that a violation occurred at a fixed time and location (e.g., speeding inside the boundaries of a relatively small landmark).
Stop Time: Threshold in minutes since the vehicle has been stopped.
Stop Type: Type of stop for which the alert is in effect. Options include Any (idle and ignition off), Idle (only), or Stop (ignition off only).
Switch Type: Type of power loss event (Power Lost or Power Cycle). Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.
The following properties are available for all alerts:
Re-Notification Delay: The minimum number of minutes between notifications for this alert. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts—especially for alerts that apply to a large group of vehicles. For example, if the Re-Notification Delay is set to 5 minutes, you will receive notifications no more than every 5 minutes. Any alerts that have accumulated during that time will be sent to you at once.
Per-Vehicle Delay: The minimum number of minutes between alerts for the same vehicle. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts per vehicle. For example, if you have one vehicle in a group that is constantly going in and out of a landmark, you may only want to receive a notification every 20 minutes whenever alert conditions are met for that vehicle instead of each time the vehicle triggers the alert.
Active: Temporarily turn on/off the alert.
Adjust additional alert settings as needed, and click Create Alert.
The new alert will be listed under the My Alerts tab. The Alert Card indicates the details of the alert, including the number of times the alert has been triggered. When the alert is triggered, the vehicle or vehicle group is included, along with the details of the alert (e.g., date, [glossary slug="timezone"]timezone[/glossary], location, etc.).
Allow 'alerts@[provider].com' to ensure you receive email alerts. Reply 'STOP' to stop receiving future SMS messages.
[/solution][solution term="pro"]Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers. You can create an unlimited number of alerts for each alert type.
Example
Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use delivery vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. XYZ's owner (Bob) wants to his Delivery Manager (Tom Jones) to be notified immediately via email and SMS whenever a violation occurs. XYZ's owner also wants to notify the driver.
To create a new alert:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Alerts, and click Open.
The Alerts Manager page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Alerts List grid, click New Alert (green plus sign) next to the alert type you want to create. In the Company XYZ example, we choose the Odd-Hours alert.
Choose from the following options:
The following properties are available for all alerts:
Vehicle: The vehicle/group that applies to the alert. The vehicle name and/or vehicle group (if applicable) will be visible in the email and/or SMS message after the Alert Subject. (In the Company XYZ example, we chose the Delivery group.)
Alert Subject: The subject as it will appear in the email and/or SMS message.
Addresses: The email address(es) and/or SMS number(s) where this alert will be sent. Separate multiple addresses and numbers by commas. The time stamp for when an alert notification occurs is formatted according to the user's timezone (who set up the alert).
Notify Driver: Select this box to optionally send a custom message to the vehicle's driver. You can assign contact information for the driver or the vehicle. If a driver is assigned, the system uses the driver's contact info, alert preferences (Email and/or SMS), and timezone (format of the driver's alert time stamp only; driver's timezone is not considered in the alert thresholds). If no driver is assigned or no contact information is available for the assigned driver, the system uses the vehicle's contact info and alert preferences. If you want to notify both the driver and vehicle contact (if different), you must choose to notify the driver and then enter the vehicle contact number separately in the Address box.
(In the Company XYZ example, we added, "Why are you driving?")
Repeat Delay: The minimum number of minutes between notifications for this alert. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts—especially for alerts that apply to a large group of vehicles. For example, if the Repeat Delay is set to 5 minutes, you will receive notifications no more than every 5 minutes. Any alerts that have accumulated during that time will be sent to you at once.
Per-Vehicle Delay: The minimum number of minutes between alerts for the same vehicle. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts per vehicle. For example, if you have one vehicle in a group that is constantly going in and out of a landmark, you may only want to receive a notification every 20 minutes whenever alert conditions are met for that vehicle instead of each time the vehicle triggers the alert.
Active: Temporarily turn on/off the alert.
Depending on the alert type you create, additional properties vary:
In-Cab Notify: The in-cab notification method that should activate when the alert is triggered. (Must be installed in vehicle.)
Input: The input type (e.g., door, PTO, etc.) as defined by your account at the time of device installation and the input state on which to alert (e.g., open/closed, on/off, etc.).
Idle Limit: Minutes a vehicle must idle before an alert is triggered.
Push to Manager App: Send push notification to the Manager App.Only available for Ignition Alert.
Weekdays: The days the alert is in effect. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied. (In the Company XYZ example, we set the After option to 21:00 (i.e., 9:00 PM) and the Before option to 4:00.)
Weekends: The days the alert is in effect on weekends. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Landmark: The landmark in which (or outside of which) the alert is in effect. Options include Inside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist inside the selected landmark or landmark group), Outside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist outside the selected landmark), or N/A (the alert will trigger regardless of vehicle location). if your account is configured for attributes, you can provide extra information whenever an applicable landmark alert is triggered–like a gate code or a note about a safety concern at the property (e.g., guard dog).
One Time: Alert one time then deactivate.
Running: Threshold in minutes since the last reported location.
Parked: Threshold in days since the last reported location.
Violation Limit (speed): Threshold in MPH over the posted limit (greater than or equal to). Posted speed violations are calculated using the [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] value.
Violation Limit (accel/decel): Threshold in Gs. The DOT defines harsh (not dangerous) braking as .45 g incidents (your average NYC cab driver). Harsh acceleration is typically set at a lower g-force threshold (.35 g incidents).
Alert Threshold: Threshold in miles, hours, or days before service is overdue.
Speed Limit: Threshold in MPH in speed (not related to posted limit). By default, conditions are based on [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] sample. This is valuable when you need to deduce that a violation occurred at a fixed time and location (e.g., speeding inside the boundaries of a relatively small landmark).
Stop Time: Threshold in minutes since the vehicle has been stopped.
Stop Type: Type of stop for which the alert is in effect. Options include Any (idle and ignition off), Idle (only), or Stop (ignition off only).
Switch Type: Type of power loss event (Power Lost or Power Cycle). Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.
Diagnostic Type: Type of diagnostic (Temperature Sensor, Coolant Temperature, Engine Speed).
Threshold: Threshold for Diagnostic Type (see above).
Adjust additional alert settings as needed, and click Create Alert.
The new alert will be listed in the Active Alerts grid, which includes the details of the alert and the number of times the alert has been triggered.
The next time any vehicle(s) in the Delivery group trigger this alert according to the odd hours Bob set (using Bob's timezone), Tom Jones will receive the following notifications (email and SMS):
If a message was sent to the driver, the the time the alert violation occurred (according to Bob's timezone) will be converted to the driver's timezone (if set in driver's profile).
Allow 'alerts@[provider].com' to ensure you receive email alerts. Reply 'STOP' to stop receiving future SMS messages.
[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers. You can create an unlimited number of alerts for each alert type.
Example
Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use delivery vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. XYZ's owner (Bob) wants to his Delivery Manager (Tom Jones) to be notified immediately via email and SMS whenever a violation occurs. XYZ's owner also wants to notify the driver.
To create a new alert:
From the Homepage, click the Alerts card or the Manage Alerts tab.
The Manage Alerts page opens.
Click New Alert in the top right-hand corner, and select the Alert you want to create. In the Company XYZ example, we choose the Odd-Hours alert.
Choose from the following options:
The following properties are available for all alerts:
Vehicle: The vehicle/group that applies to the alert. The vehicle name and/or vehicle group (if applicable) will be visible in the email and/or SMS message after the Alert Subject. (In the Company XYZ example, we chose the Delivery group.)
Alert Subject: The subject as it will appear in the email and/or SMS message.
Addresses: The email address(es) and/or SMS number(s) where this alert will be sent. Separate multiple addresses and numbers by commas. The time stamp for when an alert notification occurs is formatted according to the user's timezone (who set up the alert). If you select a hierarchy node in the Vehicle option, the Addresses defaults to use an address attribute hierarchy (if available). You can override the hierarchy list from the drop-down.
Notify Driver: Select this box to optionally send a custom message to the vehicle's driver. You can assign contact information for the driver or the vehicle. If a driver is assigned, the system uses the driver's contact info, alert preferences (Email and/or SMS), and timezone (format of the driver's alert time stamp only; driver's timezone is not considered in the alert thresholds). If no driver is assigned or no contact information is available for the assigned driver, the system uses the vehicle's contact info and alert preferences. If you want to notify both the driver and vehicle contact (if different), you must choose to notify the driver and then enter the vehicle contact number separately in the Address box.
(In the Company XYZ example, we added, "Why are you driving?")
Repeat Delay: The minimum number of minutes between notifications for this alert. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts—especially for alerts that apply to a large group of vehicles. For example, if the Repeat Delay is set to 5 minutes, you will receive notifications no more than every 5 minutes. Any alerts that have accumulated during that time will be sent to you at once.
Per-Vehicle Delay: The minimum number of minutes between alerts for the same vehicle. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts per vehicle. For example, if you have one vehicle in a group that is constantly going in and out of a landmark, you may only want to receive a notification every 20 minutes whenever alert conditions are met for that vehicle instead of each time the vehicle triggers the alert.
Active: Temporarily turn on/off the alert.
Depending on the alert type you create, additional properties vary:
In-Cab Notify: The in-cab notification method that should activate when the alert is triggered. (Must be installed in vehicle.)
Input: The input type (e.g., door, PTO, etc.) as defined by your account at the time of device installation and the input state on which to alert (e.g., open/closed, on/off, etc.).
Idle Limit: Minutes a vehicle must idle before an alert is triggered.
Push to Manager App: Send push notification to the Manager App.Only available for Ignition Alert.
Weekdays: The days the alert is in effect. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied. (In the Company XYZ example, we set the After option to 21:00 (i.e., 9:00 PM) and the Before option to 4:00.)
Weekends: The days the alert is in effect on weekends. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Landmark: The landmark in which (or outside of which) the alert is in effect. Options include Inside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist inside the selected landmark or landmark group), Outside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist outside the selected landmark), or N/A (the alert will trigger regardless of vehicle location). if your account is configured for attributes, you can provide extra information whenever an applicable landmark alert is triggered–like a gate code or a note about a safety concern at the property (e.g., guard dog).
One Time: Alert one time then deactivate.
Running: Threshold in minutes since the last reported location.
Parked: Threshold in days since the last reported location.
Violation Limit (speed): Threshold in MPH over the posted limit (greater than or equal to). Posted speed violations are calculated using the [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] value.
Violation Limit (accel/decel): Threshold in Gs. The DOT defines harsh (not dangerous) braking as .45 g incidents (your average NYC cab driver). Harsh acceleration is typically set at a lower g-force threshold (.35 g incidents).
Alert Threshold: Threshold in miles, hours, or days before service is overdue.
Speed Limit: Threshold in MPH in speed (not related to posted limit). By default, conditions are based on [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] sample. This is valuable when you need to deduce that a violation occurred at a fixed time and location (e.g., speeding inside the boundaries of a relatively small landmark).
Stop Time: Threshold in minutes since the vehicle has been stopped.
Stop Type: Type of stop for which the alert is in effect. Options include Any (idle and ignition off), Idle (only), or Stop (ignition off only).
Switch Type: Type of power loss event (Power Lost or Power Cycle). Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.
Diagnostic Type: Type of diagnostic (Temperature Sensor, Coolant Temperature, Engine Speed).
Threshold: Threshold for Diagnostic Type (see above).
Adjust additional alert settings as needed, and click Create Alert.
The new alert will be listed in the Manage Alerts grid, which includes the details of the alert.
The next time any vehicle(s) in the Delivery group trigger this alert according to the odd hours Bob set (using Bob's timezone), Tom Jones will receive the following notifications (email and SMS):
If a message was sent to the driver, the the time the alert violation occurred (according to Bob's timezone) will be converted to the driver's timezone (if set in driver's profile).
Allow 'alerts@[provider].com' to ensure you receive email alerts. Reply 'STOP' to stop receiving future SMS messages.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Adding an Alert
[post_excerpt] => Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-an-alert
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-10-15 13:44:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-10-15 20:44:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 942
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=943
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 942
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:56:57
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:56:57
[post_content] => Check the table below to learn about different alert types. If you're not getting alerts, or you're getting too many alerts, check out Editing an Alert.
[solution term="basic"]Click the Alerts menu item to open the Alerts tab. All alert types that are available are listed on this tab. If you want to see alerts that you've already configured, click the My Alerts tab.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Alert Type Alert,Description
Accel Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates the specified accel threshold (in [glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just accelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching.
Decel Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates the specified decel threshold in ([glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just decelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching.
Heartbeat Alert,Alert when a heartbeat is received (usually once a day).~~~~Example: Company XYZ tracks its assets (yellow iron) but does not have motion-based reporting. The heartbeat for an excavator that had been sitting on a trailer just occurred outside of their yard (via landmark)\, which alerted the fleet manager that the equipment had been stolen.
Idle Time Alert,Alert when a vehicle idles more than the specified limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for consecutive idle time is no more than 15 minutes. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to turn off the vehicle.
Ignition Alert,Alert when a vehicle turns on or off.~~~~Example: Company XYZ is following vehicle ABC's activity. Alert the fleet manager when vehicle ABC ignition status changes.
Landmark Alert,Alert when a vehicle enters or exits a landmark.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's fleet policy prohibits drivers from making stops to their personal home addresses (uploaded as landmarks) during their shifts. 52 JEFF just entered one of those landmarks during regular business hours. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to return to work.~~~~
Alerts are only generated for Landmarks with an area smaller than 10\,000 square feet. Landmarks exceeding this size will be excluded from alert generation. Please review your Landmark sizes to ensure critical locations are within the alerting threshold.
Odd-Hours Alert,Alert on movement within an odd-hours violation window.~~~~Example: Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use company vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. It's Saturday\, and 54 MIKE just reported movement outside the perimeters of the company parking lot. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally remind the driver to return the vehicle.
Out-of-Range Alert,Alert on vehicles that have not reported for a time.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has been running for 60 minutes without reporting data. 50 BRAD has been parked for 2 days without reporting data. The vehicles could have been subject to tampering or are in locations that are obstructing signal. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to check for physical obstructions within the cab itself.
Posted Speed Alert,Alert on vehicles violating posted speed limits. Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. Posted speed violations are calculated using the [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The last speed value sampled during a device's report interval. For example\, if a device's report interval is 2 minutes\, the Instantaneous speed is the last data point obtained of the 480 data points collected during the update period (4 times per second x 2 minutes)." style="top" ]Inst speed[/tooltip] value.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speeding violation limit is 10 miles over posted speed. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold (89 MPH in a posted 75 MPH zone). Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down**.
Service Reminders Alert,Alert when scheduled service is close or overdue.~~Example: 53 STACY has a service schedule defined for oil changes every 3\,000 miles. The truck's odometer just reached a threshold of 500 miles before service is due. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to schedule maintenance.
Speeding Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates a specified speed limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speed is 75 MPH (regardless of zone). 54 MIKE just reported a speed of 80 MPH. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down*.
Stop/Idle Alert,Alert on a stop or idle longer than a specific duration.~~~~Company XYZ's delivery stops are targeted to take between 15-20 minutes. 51 LINDA recently made a stop\, and the ignition has now been off for 60 minutes. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to get back on schedule.
Towing Alert,Alert when vehicle moves and ignition is off. This alert is currently supported on GPSI-5000\, ELD-2000D\, and AT-3000 devices (PNP support anticipated Q3 2020).~~~~Example: Company XYZ has several mowers in various locations throughout the city. The Fleet Manager wants to be notified when any of these assets are moving without ignition (i.e.\, towing stolen\, etc.).
[/et]
**If you plan to notify drivers when alerts are triggered (e.g., whenever a speeding violation occurs), consider asking drivers to assign messages from 477-477 (GPSGPS) to a unique ring/SMS tone. When drivers hear this tone, they can know immediately that they've triggered a violation without having to look at their mobile devices.
While Alerts are highly accurate, they are optimized for real-time situations as subscribed. Due to occasional cellular network or processing delays, very occasionally alerts will miss an event and should not be considered a reliable substitute for regularly scheduled reports on the same situation of interest. For this reason, we suggest customers also utilize scheduled reports whenever a potentially missed alert would cause difficulty for any reason.
Idle Time and Service Reminder alerts require GPS Insight Hardware.
[/solution][solution term="standard"][solution term="standard"]Click the Alerts menu item to open the Alerts tab. All alert types that are available are listed on this tab. If you want to see alerts that you've already configured, click the My Alerts tab.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Alert Type,Description
Accel Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates the specified accel threshold (in [glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just accelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching.
Asset Inputs Alert,Alert when an asset's input changes status.~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its generators with lights. Alert the fleet manager\, whenever the asset's light is activated.
Decel Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates the specified decel threshold in ([glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just decelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching.
Diagnostic Alert,Alert when a specific threshold is passed (either greater or lower). Specify a Diagnostic Type: Temperature\, Coolant Temperature\, Engine Speed or Battery Voltage. The system does not check for alert conditions when the ignition is turned off. Temperatures reported are those provided by the sensor at the time of the update.~~~~Example: Company XYZ transports cargo that must be stored in temperatures below 80 degrees. Alert the Fleet Manager and optionally the driver if the trailer temperature reaches a temperature above the threshold.~~~~
Battery Voltage is available for supported devices and is available to Fleet Essentials and Pro customers (if you would like to learn more\, please contact your Account Manager).
DTC Alert,Alert on Diagnostic Trouble Codes for supported devices*.~~~~Example: The axle for 54 MIKE is below normal operational range according to J1365005BA. Alert the fleet manager to schedule immediate maintenance\, and optionally notify the driver to go to the maintenance lot after his last delivery today.
DVIR Alert,Alert when a Driver Vehicle Inspection Report is received with defects. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Bill just noted that his driver-side mirror was missing (high priority) on his DVIR and submitted the report. Alert Bill's immediate supervisor indicating that a DVIR was submitted by Bill\, the defects included\, and the time/date of the defect.
DVIR Status Alert,Alert when a vehicle is moving without a DVIR completed or marked unsafe. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Steven has started driving the company vehicle without completing a DVIR. Alert Steven's immediate supervisor that a DVIR has not been submitted on a vehicle that is currently being operated and notify the driver that a DVIR must be submitted.
Heartbeat Alert,Alert when a heartbeat is received (usually once a day).~~~~Example: Company XYZ tracks its assets (yellow iron) but does not have motion-based reporting. The heartbeat for an excavator that had been sitting on a trailer just occurred outside of their yard (via landmark)\, which alerted the fleet manager that the equipment had been stolen.
Hours of Service Alert,Alert before daily hours of service limit is reached. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: Joe Marks is within 30 minutes of reaching his daily hours of service limit. Alert the fleet manager and the driver to avoid a violation.
HOS Driver Assign Alert,Alert when vehicle moves without HOS driver assigned. Device ID and Driver Reference ID must match exactly. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~<~~em>Example: A vehicle is moving without a driver signing into the tablet. Alert the vehicle’s fleet manager.
Idle Time Alert,Alert when a vehicle idles more than the specified limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for consecutive idle time is no more than 15 minutes. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to turn off the vehicle.
Ignition Alert,Alert when a vehicle turns on or off.~~~~Example: Company XYZ is following vehicle ABC's activity. Alert the fleet manager when vehicle ABC ignition status changes.
Inputs Alert,Alert when an input changes status. (Inputs are configured at the time of installation.)~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its vehicles with sirens/lights to be used in the event of an emergency. For oversight purposes\, alert the fleet manager\, whenever the siren/light is activated.
Landmark Alert,Alert when a vehicle enters or exits a landmark.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's fleet policy prohibits drivers from making stops to their personal home addresses (uploaded as landmarks) during their shifts. 52 JEFF just entered one of those landmarks during regular business hours. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to return to work.~~~~
Alerts are only generated for Landmarks with an area smaller than 10\,000 square feet. Landmarks exceeding this size will be excluded from alert generation. Please review your Landmark sizes to ensure critical locations are within the alerting threshold.
Odd-Hours Alert,Alert on movement within an odd-hours violation window.~~~~Example: Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use company vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. It's Saturday\, and 54 MIKE just reported movement outside the perimeters of the company parking lot. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally remind the driver to return the vehicle.
Out-of-Range Alert,Alert on vehicles that have not reported for a time.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has been running for 60 minutes without reporting data. 50 BRAD has been parked for 2 days without reporting data. The vehicles could have been subject to tampering or are in locations that are obstructing signal. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to check for physical obstructions within the cab itself.
Posted Speed Alert,Alert on vehicles violating posted speed limits. Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. Posted speed violations are calculated using the [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The last speed value sampled during a device's report interval. For example\, if a device's report interval is 2 minutes\, the Instantaneous speed is the last data point obtained of the 480 data points collected during the update period (4 times per second x 2 minutes)." style="top" ]Inst speed[/tooltip] value.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speeding violation limit is 10 miles over posted speed. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold (89 MPH in a posted 75 MPH zone). Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down**.
Service Reminders Alert,Alert when scheduled service is close or overdue.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has a service schedule defined for oil changes every 3\,000 miles. The truck's odometer just reached a threshold of 500 miles before service is due. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to schedule maintenance.
Speeding Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates a specified speed limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speed is 75 MPH (regardless of zone). 54 MIKE just reported a speed of 80 MPH. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down*.
Stop/Idle Alert,Alert on a stop or idle longer than a specific duration.~~~~Company XYZ's delivery stops are targeted to take between 15-20 minutes. 51 LINDA recently made a stop\, and the ignition has now been off for 60 minutes. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to get back on schedule.
Tampering Alert,Alert on a power loss event (Power Lost or Power Cycle). Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery\, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.~~~~Example: 52 JEFF just reported a loss of external power\, which indicates the device is now relying on battery power. Alert the fleet manager that a device has been disconnected\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol.
Towing Alert,Alert when vehicle moves and ignition is off. This alert is currently supported on GPSI-5000\, ELD-2000D\, and AT-3000 devices (PNP support anticipated Q3 2020).~~~~Example: Company XYZ has several mowers in various locations throughout the city. The Fleet Manager wants to be notified when any of these assets are moving without ignition (i.e.\, towing stolen\, etc.).[/et]
*Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature for vehicles equipped with supported devices. Available diagnostic data varies by vehicle make/model. Data may include engine speed, fuel level, fuel level remaining, fuel rate, odometer, seatbelt, and more.
**If you plan to notify drivers when alerts are triggered (e.g., whenever a speeding violation occurs), consider asking drivers to assign messages from 477-477 (GPSGPS) to a unique ring/SMS tone. When drivers hear this tone, they can know immediately that they've triggered a violation without having to look at their mobile devices.
While Alerts are highly accurate, they are optimized for real-time situations as subscribed. Due to occasional cellular network or processing delays, very occasionally alerts will miss an event and should not be considered a reliable substitute for regularly scheduled reports on the same situation of interest. For this reason, we suggest customers also utilize scheduled reports whenever a potentially missed alert would cause difficulty for any reason.
[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers, and you can optionally notify the driver with a custom message each time an alert is triggered.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Alert Type,Description
Accel Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates the specified accel threshold (in [glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just accelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching.
Asset Inputs Alert,Alert when an asset's input changes status.~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its generators with lights. Alert the fleet manager\, whenever the asset's light is activated.
Braking (Decel) Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates the specified decel threshold in ([glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just decelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching.
Diagnostic Alert,Alert when a specific threshold is passed (either greater or lower). Specify a Diagnostic Type: Temperature\, Coolant Temperature\, Engine Speed or Battery Voltage. The system does not check for alert conditions when the ignition is turned off. Temperatures reported are those provided by the sensor at the time of the update.~~~~Example: Company XYZ transports cargo that must be stored in temperatures below 80 degrees. Alert the Fleet Manager and optionally the driver if the trailer temperature reaches a temperature above the threshold.~~~~
Battery Voltage options are device-specific. These options will only show if you have the following devices: ST-1100 and TT-2200
Driver Assign Alert,Alert when a driver has successfully been assigned to a vehicle via Driver ID key fob or other method. (Buzzer or light in-cab notification of successful login requires additional equipment and installation.)~~~~Example: The driver of Truck 150 just logged into the vehicle using the keyfob reader. Using SMS\, a Buzzer\, or Light (if installed)\, alert the fleet manager and/or driver that his login was successful.
Driver Login Alert,Alert when a driver does not log in when starting a trip. (Requires Driver ID.)~~~~Example: Truck 150 is on the move\, but the driver did not log in to the vehicle's keyfob reader. Either the driver forgot or the vehicle could be subject to unauthorized use (possible theft). Alert the fleet manager after 2 minutes\, and optionally send the driver a login reminder message.
DTC Alert,Alert on Diagnostic Trouble Codes for supported devices*.~~~~Example: The axle for 54 MIKE is below normal operational range according to J1365005BA. Alert the fleet manager to schedule immediate maintenance\, and optionally notify the driver to go to the maintenance lot after his last delivery today.
DVIR Alert,Alert when a Driver Vehicle Inspection Report is received with defects. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Bill just noted that his driver-side mirror was missing (high priority) on his DVIR and submitted the report. Alert Bill's immediate supervisor indicating that a DVIR was submitted by Bill\, the defects included\, and the time/date of the defect.
DVIR Status Alert,Alert when a vehicle is moving without a DVIR completed or marked unsafe. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Steven has started driving the company vehicle without completing a DVIR. Alert Steven's immediate supervisor that a DVIR has not been submitted on a vehicle that is currently being operated and notify the driver that a DVIR must be submitted.
Heartbeat Alert,Alert when a heartbeat is received (usually once a day).~~~~Example: Company XYZ tracks its assets (yellow iron) but does not have motion-based reporting. The heartbeat for an excavator that had been sitting on a trailer just occurred outside of their yard (via landmark)\, which alerted the fleet manager that the equipment had been stolen.
Hours of Service Alert,Alert before daily hours of service limit is reached. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: Joe Marks is within 30 minutes of reaching his daily hours of service limit. Alert the fleet manager and the driver to avoid a violation.
HOS Driver Assign Alert,Alert when vehicle moves without HOS driver assigned. Device ID and Driver Reference ID must match exactly. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: A vehicle is moving without a driver signing into the tablet. Alert the vehicle’s fleet manager.
Idle Time Alert,Alert when a vehicle idles more than the specified limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for consecutive idle time is no more than 15 minutes. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to turn off the vehicle.
Ignition Alert,Alert when a vehicle turns on or off.~~~~Example: Company XYZ is following vehicle ABC's activity. Alert the fleet manager when vehicle ABC ignition status changes.
Inputs Alert,Alert when an input changes status. (Inputs are configured at the time of installation.)~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its vehicles with sirens/lights to be used in the event of an emergency. For oversight purposes\, alert the fleet manager\, whenever the siren/light is activated.
Landmark Alert,Alert when a vehicle enters or exits a landmark.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's fleet policy prohibits drivers from making stops to their personal home addresses (uploaded as landmarks) during their shifts. 52 JEFF just entered one of those landmarks during regular business hours. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to return to work.~~~~
Alerts are only generated for Landmarks with an area smaller than 10\,000 square feet. Landmarks exceeding this size will be excluded from alert generation. Please review your Landmark sizes to ensure critical locations are within the alerting threshold.
Odd-Hours Alert,Alert on movement within an odd-hours violation window.~~~~Example: Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use company vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. It's Saturday\, and 54 MIKE just reported movement outside the perimeters of the company parking lot. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally remind the driver to return the vehicle.
Out-of-Range Alert,Alert on vehicles that have not reported for a time.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has been running for 60 minutes without reporting data. 50 BRAD has been parked for 2 days without reporting data. The vehicles could have been subject to tampering or are in locations that are obstructing signal. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to check for physical obstructions within the cab itself.
Posted Speed Alert,Alert on vehicles violating posted speed limits. Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. Posted speed violations are calculated using the [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The last speed value sampled during a device's report interval. For example\, if a device's report interval is 2 minutes\, the Instantaneous speed is the last data point obtained of the 480 data points collected during the update period (4 times per second x 2 minutes)." style="top" ]Inst speed[/tooltip] value.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speeding violation limit is 10 miles over posted speed. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold (89 MPH in a posted 75 MPH zone). Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down**.
Service Reminders Alert,Alert when scheduled service is close or overdue.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has a service schedule defined for oil changes every 3\,000 miles. The truck's odometer just reached a threshold of 500 miles before service is due. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to schedule maintenance.
Speeding Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates a specified speed limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speed is 75 MPH (regardless of zone). 54 MIKE just reported a speed of 80 MPH. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down*.
Stop/Idle Alert,Alert on a stop or idle longer than a specific duration.~~~~Company XYZ's delivery stops are targeted to take between 15-20 minutes. 51 LINDA recently made a stop\, and the ignition has now been off for 60 minutes. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to get back on schedule.
Switch Alert,Alert on device switches. Available switch types include: Battery Voltage\, External Power Lost\, Panic Switch\, Power Cycle\, and Temperature. Low Battery Voltage occurs when a vehicle's battery is below 11.9 volts for 30 minutes or more. External Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery\, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power. Temperature threshold must be programmed by Support (for supported devices only).~~~~Example 1: Truck 150 just reported the panic switch has been turned on. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol (e.g.\, potential safety issue). Example 2: 52 JEFF just reported a loss of external power\, which indicates the device is now relying on battery power. Alert the fleet manager that a device has been disconnected\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol.
Towing Alert,Alert when vehicle moves and ignition is off. This alert is currently supported on GPSI-5000\, ELD-2000D\, and AT-3000 devices (PNP support anticipated Q3 2020).~~~~Example: Company XYZ has several mowers in various locations throughout the city. The Fleet Manager wants to be notified when any of these assets are moving without ignition (i.e.\, towing stolen\, etc.).[/et]
*Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature for vehicles equipped with PNP devices. Available diagnostic data varies by vehicle make/model. Data may include engine speed, fuel level, fuel level remaining, fuel rate, odometer, seatbelt, and more.
**If you plan to notify drivers when alerts are triggered (e.g., whenever a speeding violation occurs), consider asking drivers to assign messages from 477-477 (GPSGPS) to a unique ring/SMS tone. When drivers hear this tone, they can know immediately that they've triggered a violation without having to look at their mobile devices.
While Alerts are highly accurate, they are optimized for real-time situations as subscribed. Due to occasional cellular network or processing delays, very occasionally alerts will miss an event and should not be considered a reliable substitute for regularly scheduled reports on the same situation of interest. For this reason, we suggest customers also utilize scheduled reports whenever a potentially missed alert would cause difficulty for any reason.
[/solution][solution term="pro"]Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers, and you can optionally notify the driver with a custom message each time an alert is triggered.
Alert Types
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Alert Type,Description
Accel Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates the specified accel threshold (in [glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just accelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching.
Asset Inputs Alert,Alert when an asset's input changes status.~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its generators with lights. Alert the fleet manager\, whenever the asset's light is activated.
Decel Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates the specified decel threshold in ([glossary slug="g-force"]g-force[/glossary] or Gs). The default threshold is set at .50 Gs. This alert requires device to be installed with bracket/frame hardware and high-bond tape to avoid inaccurate readings (due to whip effect).~~~~Example: Truck 150 just decelerated at .70 gs\, which could indicate aggressive driving. Alert the fleet manager to schedule driver coaching.
Diagnostic Alert,Alert when a specific threshold is passed (either greater or lower). Specify a Diagnostic Type: Temperature\, Coolant Temperature\, Engine Speed or Battery Voltage. The system does not check for alert conditions when the ignition is turned off. Temperatures reported are those provided by the sensor at the time of the update.~~~~Example: Company XYZ transports cargo that must be stored in temperatures below 80 degrees. Alert the Fleet Manager and optionally the driver if the trailer temperature reaches a temperature above the threshold.~~~~
Battery Voltage options are device-specific. These options will only show if you have the following devices: ST-1100 and TT-2200
Driver Assign Alert,Alert when a driver has successfully been assigned to a vehicle via Driver ID key fob or other method. (Buzzer or light in-cab notification of successful login requires additional equipment and installation.)~~~~Example: The driver of Truck 150 just logged into the vehicle using the keyfob reader. Using SMS\, a Buzzer\, or Light (if installed)\, alert the fleet manager and/or driver that his login was successful.
Driver Login Alert,Alert when a driver does not log in when starting a trip. (Requires Driver ID.)~~~~Example: Truck 150 is on the move\, but the driver did not log in to the vehicle's keyfob reader. Either the driver forgot or the vehicle could be subject to unauthorized use (possible theft). Alert the fleet manager after 2 minutes\, and optionally send the driver a login reminder message.
DTC Alert,Alert on Diagnostic Trouble Codes for supported devices*.~~~~Example: The axle for 54 MIKE is below normal operational range according to J1365005BA. Alert the fleet manager to schedule immediate maintenance\, and optionally notify the driver to go to the maintenance lot after his last delivery today.
DVIR Alert,Alert when a Driver Vehicle Inspection Report is received with defects. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Bill just noted that his driver-side mirror was missing (high priority) on his DVIR and submitted the report. Alert Bill's immediate supervisor indicating that a DVIR was submitted by Bill\, the defects included\, and the time/date of the defect.
DVIR Status Alert,Alert when a vehicle is moving without a DVIR completed or marked unsafe. (Requires HOS enabled on your account.)~~~~Example: Steven has started driving the company vehicle without completing a DVIR. Alert Steven's immediate supervisor that a DVIR has not been submitted on a vehicle that is currently being operated and notify the driver that a DVIR must be submitted.
Heartbeat Alert,Alert when a heartbeat is received (usually once a day).~~~~Example: Company XYZ tracks its assets (yellow iron) but does not have motion-based reporting. The heartbeat for an excavator that had been sitting on a trailer just occurred outside of their yard (via landmark)\, which alerted the fleet manager that the equipment had been stolen.
Hours of Service Alert,Alert before daily hours of service limit is reached. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: Joe Marks is within 30 minutes of reaching his daily hours of service limit. Alert the fleet manager and the driver to avoid a violation.
HOS Driver Assign Alert,Alert when vehicle moves without HOS driver assigned. Device ID and Driver Reference ID must match exactly. (Only available to accounts with Hours of Service.)~~~~Example: A vehicle is moving without a driver signing into the tablet. Alert the vehicle’s fleet manager.
Idle Time Alert,Alert when a vehicle idles more than the specified limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for consecutive idle time is no more than 15 minutes. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to turn off the vehicle.
Ignition Alert,Alert when a vehicle turns on or off.~~~~Example: Company XYZ is following vehicle ABC's activity. Alert the fleet manager when vehicle ABC ignition status changes.
Inputs Alert,Alert when an input changes status. (Inputs are configured at the time of installation.)~~~~Example: Company XYZ equips its vehicles with sirens/lights to be used in the event of an emergency. For oversight purposes\, alert the fleet manager\, whenever the siren/light is activated.
Landmark Alert,Alert when a vehicle enters or exits a landmark.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's fleet policy prohibits drivers from making stops to their personal home addresses (uploaded as landmarks) during their shifts. 52 JEFF just entered one of those landmarks during regular business hours. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally send the driver a reminder to return to work.~~~~
Alerts are only generated for Landmarks with an area smaller than 10\,000 square feet. Landmarks exceeding this size will be excluded from alert generation. Please review your Landmark sizes to ensure critical locations are within the alerting threshold.
Odd-Hours Alert,Alert on movement within an odd-hours violation window.~~~~Example: Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use company vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. It's Saturday\, and 54 MIKE just reported movement outside the perimeters of the company parking lot. Alert the fleet manager that the vehicle may be subject to unauthorized use\, and optionally remind the driver to return the vehicle.
Out-of-Range Alert,Alert on vehicles that have not reported for a time.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has been running for 60 minutes without reporting data. 50 BRAD has been parked for 2 days without reporting data. The vehicles could have been subject to tampering or are in locations that are obstructing signal. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to check for physical obstructions within the cab itself.
Posted Speed Alert,Alert on vehicles violating posted speed limits. Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. Posted speed violations are calculated using the [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The last speed value sampled during a device's report interval. For example\, if a device's report interval is 2 minutes\, the Instantaneous speed is the last data point obtained of the 480 data points collected during the update period (4 times per second x 2 minutes)." style="top" ]Inst speed[/tooltip] value.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speeding violation limit is 10 miles over posted speed. 51 LINDA has just exceeded the threshold (89 MPH in a posted 75 MPH zone). Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down**.
Service Reminders Alert,Alert when scheduled service is close or overdue.~~~~Example: 53 STACY has a service schedule defined for oil changes every 3\,000 miles. The truck's odometer just reached a threshold of 500 miles before service is due. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to schedule maintenance.
Speeding Alert,Alert when a vehicle violates a specified speed limit.~~~~Example: Company XYZ's policy for speed is 75 MPH (regardless of zone). 54 MIKE just reported a speed of 80 MPH. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to slow down*.
Stop/Idle Alert,Alert on a stop or idle longer than a specific duration.~~~~Company XYZ's delivery stops are targeted to take between 15-20 minutes. 51 LINDA recently made a stop\, and the ignition has now been off for 60 minutes. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally remind the driver to get back on schedule.
Switch Alert,Alert on device switches. Available switch types include: Battery Voltage\, External Power Lost\, Panic Switch\, Power Cycle\, and Temperature. Low Battery Voltage occurs when a vehicle's battery is below 11.9 volts for 30 minutes or more. External Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery\, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power. Temperature threshold must be programmed by Support (for supported devices only).~~~~Example 1: Truck 150 just reported the panic switch has been turned on. Alert the fleet manager\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol (e.g.\, potential safety issue). Example 2: 52 JEFF just reported a loss of external power\, which indicates the device is now relying on battery power. Alert the fleet manager that a device has been disconnected\, and optionally send the driver a message to indicate that the alert has been received or will be acted upon according to company protocol.
Towing Alert,Alert when vehicle moves and ignition is off. This alert is currently supported on GPSI-5000\, ELD-2000D\, and AT-3000 devices (PNP support anticipated Q3 2020).~~~~Example: Company XYZ has several mowers in various locations throughout the city. The Fleet Manager wants to be notified when any of these assets are moving without ignition (i.e.\, towing stolen\, etc.).[/et]
*Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature for vehicles equipped with PNP devices. Available diagnostic data varies by vehicle make/model. Data may include engine speed, fuel level, fuel level remaining, fuel rate, odometer, seatbelt, and more.
**If you plan to notify drivers when alerts are triggered (e.g., whenever a speeding violation occurs), consider asking drivers to assign messages from 477-477 (GPSGPS) to a unique ring/SMS tone. When drivers hear this tone, they can know immediately that they've triggered a violation without having to look at their mobile devices.
While Alerts are highly accurate, they are optimized for real-time situations as subscribed. Due to occasional cellular network or processing delays, very occasionally alerts will miss an event and should not be considered a reliable substitute for regularly scheduled reports on the same situation of interest. For this reason, we suggest customers also utilize scheduled reports whenever a potentially missed alert would cause difficulty for any reason.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Classic Portal - About Alerts
[post_excerpt] => Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers, and you can optionally notify the driver with a custom message each time an alert is triggered.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-alerts
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-12-08 11:34:08
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-12-08 18:34:08
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=942
[menu_order] => 7
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 944
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:57:56
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:57:56
[post_content] => [solution term="basic,standard,pro"]You can edit alert details, inactivate alerts, or delete alerts. Adjusting alert configurations can help you if you are getting too many alerts, not receiving alerts, etc.
Edit Alert Details
After you edit an alert, the alert will trigger the next time the conditions are met.
If an alert is no longer needed, you can delete it or inactivate it. Inactivating an alert keeps the settings and prevents you from having to recreate the alert if you ever have the need for it again.
To inactivate an alert:
From the menu, click Alerts.
Click the My Alerts tab.
Click the alert you want to inactivate, and click Edit.
Set the Active option to no.
Click Update Alert.
Delete an Alert
If an alert is no longer needed, you can delete it or inactivate it. Deleting an alert permanently removes the settings.
To delete an alert:
From the menu, click Alerts.
Click the My Alerts tab.
Click the alert you want to delete, and click Delete.
In the Delete Alert pop-up window, click OK.
[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]
Filter the Alert List
If your alert list is long, you can use filter options to isolate a subset of alerts.
To filter the alert list:
From the Homepage, click the Alerts card or the Manage Alerts tab.
The Manage Alerts page opens.
Click on the Filter button () in the right-hand corner.
Choose from the following filter options:
Alert Type: Show only alerts that are of a certain type.
Data Source: Show alerts that are monitoring a specific vehicle or a particular vehicle group.
Notification Recipient (SMS or Email): Show only alerts that are specific to the recipient.
Alert Status : Show only alerts that are active, inactive, or both.
Click Filter.
The alert list shows only the drivers that match your filter criteria.
Edit Alert Details
After you edit an alert, the alert will trigger the next time the conditions are met.
To edit an alert:
From the Homepage, click the Alerts card or the Manage Alerts tab.
The Manage Alerts page opens, showing all active alerts.
Hover over the alert you want to edit, and click the Preferences button on the right ().
If an alert is no longer needed, you can delete it or inactivate it. Inactivating an alert keeps the settings and prevents you from having to recreate the alert if you ever have the need for it again.
To inactivate an alert:
From the Homepage, click the Alerts card or the Manage Alerts tab.
The Manage Alerts page opens, showing all active alerts.
Hover over the alert you want to edit, and click the Preferences button on the right ().
Click Edit from the dropdown menu.
You can also inactivate an alert by clicking the Delete option.
Set the Active option to No.
Click Edit Alert.
Delete an Alert
If an alert is no longer needed, you can delete it or inactivate it. Deleting an alert permanently removes the settings.
To delete an alert:
From the Homepage, click the Alerts card or the Manage Alerts tab.
The Manage Alerts page opens, showing all active alerts.
Hover over the alert you want to edit, and click the Preferences button on the right ().
Click Delete from the dropdown menu.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Editing an Alert
[post_excerpt] => You can edit alert details, inactivate alerts, or delete alerts.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-an-alert
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-12-17 16:02:56
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-12-17 23:02:56
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 942
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=944
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21620
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-12-07 11:35:42
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-12-07 18:35:42
[post_content] => The following information is in regard to alerts specific to ST-1100/ST-1200 and TT-2200 devices.
Navigating to ST-1100/ST-1200 and TT-2200 Alerts
From Classic Portal, hover your mouse over Account to expand the drop-down menu and click on Manage Alerts then Open.
Click on the + next to Diagnostic Alert.
The New Diagnostic Alert window appears.
Click on the drop-down menu next to "Diagnostic Type:".
Options available for the TT-2200 and ST-1100/ST-1200 include the following:
Internal Battery Percentage (TT-2200)
Low Internal Battery (ST-1100/ST-1200)
Internal Battery Critical Alert (ST-1100/ST-1200)
TT-2200 Alert Details
Diagnostic Alert: Internal Battery Percentage
The Internal Battery Percentage alert triggers when the internal battery monitoring of the device detects the presence of Low Battery data. When this alert is sent to selected recipients (via SMS or email), the device will have enough battery life to send approximately 50-100 update events before the battery fully drains requiring a battery replacement.
ST-1100/ST-1220 Alert Details
Diagnostic Alert: Low Internal Battery
The Low Internal Battery alert triggers when the battery registers 6.9V or lower. This alert should be treated as a preliminary warning to attend to the device and ensure it’s in direct view of the sun for recharging.
Diagnostic Alert: Internal Battery Critical
The Internal Battery Critical alert triggers when the battery registers 6.5V or lower. The alert notifies when the device battery status is considered "critical" and needs attention ASAP. If the battery is not attended to then the device battery could die, in which case a battery reset and charge would need to take place.
[post_title] => ST-1100/ST-1200 and TT-2200 Diagnostic Alerts
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => st-1100-st-1200-and-tt-2200-diagnostic-alerts
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-12-07 11:36:36
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-12-07 18:36:36
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 942
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21620
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 4
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 943
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:57:34
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:57:34
[post_content] => [solution term="basic,standard"]Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up an alert to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers. You can create an unlimited number of alerts for each alert type.
To add an alert:
From the menu, click Alerts, and then click the alert type you want to configure. (Or try searching for the alert using the Search bar.)
Choose from the following options:
The following properties are available for all alerts:
Vehicle: The vehicle[/solution][solution term="standard"]/group[/solution][solution term="basic,standard"] that applies to the alert. The vehicle name [/solution][solution term="standard"]and/or vehicle group (if applicable)[solution term="basic,standard"] will be visible in the email and/or SMS message after the Alert Subject.
Alert Subject: The subject as it will appear in the email and/or SMS message.
Addresses: The email address(es) and/or SMS number(s) where this alert will be sent. Separate multiple addresses and numbers by commas. The time stamp for when an alert notification occurs is formatted according to the user's timezone (who set up the alert).
Notify Driver: Select this box to optionally send a custom message to the vehicle's driver. (You can assign contact information for the vehicle by choosing Edit from the vehicle card.)
Depending on the alert type you create, additional properties vary:
In-Cab Notify: The in-cab notification method that should activate when the alert is triggered. (Must be installed in vehicle.)
Input: The input type (e.g., door, PTO, etc.) as defined by your account at the time of device installation and the input state on which to alert (e.g., open/closed, on/off, etc.).
Idle Limit: Minutes a vehicle must idle before an alert is triggered.
Weekdays: The days the alert is in effect. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Weekends: The days the alert is in effect on weekends. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Landmark: The landmark in which (or outside of which) the alert is in effect. Options include Inside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist inside the selected landmark or landmark group), Outside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist outside the selected landmark), or N/A (the alert will trigger regardless of vehicle location).
Running: Threshold in minutes since the last reported location.
Parked: Threshold in days since the last reported location.
Violation Limit: Threshold in MPH over the posted limit (greater than or equal to). Posted speed violations are calculated using the [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] value.
Alert Threshold: Threshold in miles, hours, or days before service is overdue.
Speed Limit: Threshold in MPH in speed (not related to posted limit). By default, conditions are based on [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] sample. This is valuable when you need to deduce that a violation occurred at a fixed time and location (e.g., speeding inside the boundaries of a relatively small landmark).
Stop Time: Threshold in minutes since the vehicle has been stopped.
Stop Type: Type of stop for which the alert is in effect. Options include Any (idle and ignition off), Idle (only), or Stop (ignition off only).
Switch Type: Type of power loss event (Power Lost or Power Cycle). Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.
The following properties are available for all alerts:
Re-Notification Delay: The minimum number of minutes between notifications for this alert. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts—especially for alerts that apply to a large group of vehicles. For example, if the Re-Notification Delay is set to 5 minutes, you will receive notifications no more than every 5 minutes. Any alerts that have accumulated during that time will be sent to you at once.
Per-Vehicle Delay: The minimum number of minutes between alerts for the same vehicle. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts per vehicle. For example, if you have one vehicle in a group that is constantly going in and out of a landmark, you may only want to receive a notification every 20 minutes whenever alert conditions are met for that vehicle instead of each time the vehicle triggers the alert.
Active: Temporarily turn on/off the alert.
Adjust additional alert settings as needed, and click Create Alert.
The new alert will be listed under the My Alerts tab. The Alert Card indicates the details of the alert, including the number of times the alert has been triggered. When the alert is triggered, the vehicle or vehicle group is included, along with the details of the alert (e.g., date, [glossary slug="timezone"]timezone[/glossary], location, etc.).
Allow 'alerts@[provider].com' to ensure you receive email alerts. Reply 'STOP' to stop receiving future SMS messages.
[/solution][solution term="pro"]Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers. You can create an unlimited number of alerts for each alert type.
Example
Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use delivery vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. XYZ's owner (Bob) wants to his Delivery Manager (Tom Jones) to be notified immediately via email and SMS whenever a violation occurs. XYZ's owner also wants to notify the driver.
To create a new alert:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Alerts, and click Open.
The Alerts Manager page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Alerts List grid, click New Alert (green plus sign) next to the alert type you want to create. In the Company XYZ example, we choose the Odd-Hours alert.
Choose from the following options:
The following properties are available for all alerts:
Vehicle: The vehicle/group that applies to the alert. The vehicle name and/or vehicle group (if applicable) will be visible in the email and/or SMS message after the Alert Subject. (In the Company XYZ example, we chose the Delivery group.)
Alert Subject: The subject as it will appear in the email and/or SMS message.
Addresses: The email address(es) and/or SMS number(s) where this alert will be sent. Separate multiple addresses and numbers by commas. The time stamp for when an alert notification occurs is formatted according to the user's timezone (who set up the alert).
Notify Driver: Select this box to optionally send a custom message to the vehicle's driver. You can assign contact information for the driver or the vehicle. If a driver is assigned, the system uses the driver's contact info, alert preferences (Email and/or SMS), and timezone (format of the driver's alert time stamp only; driver's timezone is not considered in the alert thresholds). If no driver is assigned or no contact information is available for the assigned driver, the system uses the vehicle's contact info and alert preferences. If you want to notify both the driver and vehicle contact (if different), you must choose to notify the driver and then enter the vehicle contact number separately in the Address box.
(In the Company XYZ example, we added, "Why are you driving?")
Repeat Delay: The minimum number of minutes between notifications for this alert. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts—especially for alerts that apply to a large group of vehicles. For example, if the Repeat Delay is set to 5 minutes, you will receive notifications no more than every 5 minutes. Any alerts that have accumulated during that time will be sent to you at once.
Per-Vehicle Delay: The minimum number of minutes between alerts for the same vehicle. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts per vehicle. For example, if you have one vehicle in a group that is constantly going in and out of a landmark, you may only want to receive a notification every 20 minutes whenever alert conditions are met for that vehicle instead of each time the vehicle triggers the alert.
Active: Temporarily turn on/off the alert.
Depending on the alert type you create, additional properties vary:
In-Cab Notify: The in-cab notification method that should activate when the alert is triggered. (Must be installed in vehicle.)
Input: The input type (e.g., door, PTO, etc.) as defined by your account at the time of device installation and the input state on which to alert (e.g., open/closed, on/off, etc.).
Idle Limit: Minutes a vehicle must idle before an alert is triggered.
Push to Manager App: Send push notification to the Manager App.Only available for Ignition Alert.
Weekdays: The days the alert is in effect. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied. (In the Company XYZ example, we set the After option to 21:00 (i.e., 9:00 PM) and the Before option to 4:00.)
Weekends: The days the alert is in effect on weekends. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Landmark: The landmark in which (or outside of which) the alert is in effect. Options include Inside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist inside the selected landmark or landmark group), Outside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist outside the selected landmark), or N/A (the alert will trigger regardless of vehicle location). if your account is configured for attributes, you can provide extra information whenever an applicable landmark alert is triggered–like a gate code or a note about a safety concern at the property (e.g., guard dog).
One Time: Alert one time then deactivate.
Running: Threshold in minutes since the last reported location.
Parked: Threshold in days since the last reported location.
Violation Limit (speed): Threshold in MPH over the posted limit (greater than or equal to). Posted speed violations are calculated using the [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] value.
Violation Limit (accel/decel): Threshold in Gs. The DOT defines harsh (not dangerous) braking as .45 g incidents (your average NYC cab driver). Harsh acceleration is typically set at a lower g-force threshold (.35 g incidents).
Alert Threshold: Threshold in miles, hours, or days before service is overdue.
Speed Limit: Threshold in MPH in speed (not related to posted limit). By default, conditions are based on [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] sample. This is valuable when you need to deduce that a violation occurred at a fixed time and location (e.g., speeding inside the boundaries of a relatively small landmark).
Stop Time: Threshold in minutes since the vehicle has been stopped.
Stop Type: Type of stop for which the alert is in effect. Options include Any (idle and ignition off), Idle (only), or Stop (ignition off only).
Switch Type: Type of power loss event (Power Lost or Power Cycle). Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.
Diagnostic Type: Type of diagnostic (Temperature Sensor, Coolant Temperature, Engine Speed).
Threshold: Threshold for Diagnostic Type (see above).
Adjust additional alert settings as needed, and click Create Alert.
The new alert will be listed in the Active Alerts grid, which includes the details of the alert and the number of times the alert has been triggered.
The next time any vehicle(s) in the Delivery group trigger this alert according to the odd hours Bob set (using Bob's timezone), Tom Jones will receive the following notifications (email and SMS):
If a message was sent to the driver, the the time the alert violation occurred (according to Bob's timezone) will be converted to the driver's timezone (if set in driver's profile).
Allow 'alerts@[provider].com' to ensure you receive email alerts. Reply 'STOP' to stop receiving future SMS messages.
[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers. You can create an unlimited number of alerts for each alert type.
Example
Drivers at Company XYZ are not allowed to use delivery vehicles on weekends or between the hours of 9:00 PM and 4:00 AM. XYZ's owner (Bob) wants to his Delivery Manager (Tom Jones) to be notified immediately via email and SMS whenever a violation occurs. XYZ's owner also wants to notify the driver.
To create a new alert:
From the Homepage, click the Alerts card or the Manage Alerts tab.
The Manage Alerts page opens.
Click New Alert in the top right-hand corner, and select the Alert you want to create. In the Company XYZ example, we choose the Odd-Hours alert.
Choose from the following options:
The following properties are available for all alerts:
Vehicle: The vehicle/group that applies to the alert. The vehicle name and/or vehicle group (if applicable) will be visible in the email and/or SMS message after the Alert Subject. (In the Company XYZ example, we chose the Delivery group.)
Alert Subject: The subject as it will appear in the email and/or SMS message.
Addresses: The email address(es) and/or SMS number(s) where this alert will be sent. Separate multiple addresses and numbers by commas. The time stamp for when an alert notification occurs is formatted according to the user's timezone (who set up the alert). If you select a hierarchy node in the Vehicle option, the Addresses defaults to use an address attribute hierarchy (if available). You can override the hierarchy list from the drop-down.
Notify Driver: Select this box to optionally send a custom message to the vehicle's driver. You can assign contact information for the driver or the vehicle. If a driver is assigned, the system uses the driver's contact info, alert preferences (Email and/or SMS), and timezone (format of the driver's alert time stamp only; driver's timezone is not considered in the alert thresholds). If no driver is assigned or no contact information is available for the assigned driver, the system uses the vehicle's contact info and alert preferences. If you want to notify both the driver and vehicle contact (if different), you must choose to notify the driver and then enter the vehicle contact number separately in the Address box.
(In the Company XYZ example, we added, "Why are you driving?")
Repeat Delay: The minimum number of minutes between notifications for this alert. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts—especially for alerts that apply to a large group of vehicles. For example, if the Repeat Delay is set to 5 minutes, you will receive notifications no more than every 5 minutes. Any alerts that have accumulated during that time will be sent to you at once.
Per-Vehicle Delay: The minimum number of minutes between alerts for the same vehicle. This option allows you to limit the frequency with which you receive alerts per vehicle. For example, if you have one vehicle in a group that is constantly going in and out of a landmark, you may only want to receive a notification every 20 minutes whenever alert conditions are met for that vehicle instead of each time the vehicle triggers the alert.
Active: Temporarily turn on/off the alert.
Depending on the alert type you create, additional properties vary:
In-Cab Notify: The in-cab notification method that should activate when the alert is triggered. (Must be installed in vehicle.)
Input: The input type (e.g., door, PTO, etc.) as defined by your account at the time of device installation and the input state on which to alert (e.g., open/closed, on/off, etc.).
Idle Limit: Minutes a vehicle must idle before an alert is triggered.
Push to Manager App: Send push notification to the Manager App.Only available for Ignition Alert.
Weekdays: The days the alert is in effect. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied. (In the Company XYZ example, we set the After option to 21:00 (i.e., 9:00 PM) and the Before option to 4:00.)
Weekends: The days the alert is in effect on weekends. Time options include All Day (24 hours), Off (reverts the selected days to indicate when the alert is NOT in effect), or Odd Hours (set time threshold for start and end). The times applied to the alert conditions uses the timezone on the account profile. If you are setting up an alert for vehicles that generally reside in a different timezone than you, consider adjusting the start and end time values according to the vehicles against which this alert is applied.
Landmark: The landmark in which (or outside of which) the alert is in effect. Options include Inside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist inside the selected landmark or landmark group), Outside (the alert will only trigger if conditions exist outside the selected landmark), or N/A (the alert will trigger regardless of vehicle location). if your account is configured for attributes, you can provide extra information whenever an applicable landmark alert is triggered–like a gate code or a note about a safety concern at the property (e.g., guard dog).
One Time: Alert one time then deactivate.
Running: Threshold in minutes since the last reported location.
Parked: Threshold in days since the last reported location.
Violation Limit (speed): Threshold in MPH over the posted limit (greater than or equal to). Posted speed violations are calculated using the [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] value.
Violation Limit (accel/decel): Threshold in Gs. The DOT defines harsh (not dangerous) braking as .45 g incidents (your average NYC cab driver). Harsh acceleration is typically set at a lower g-force threshold (.35 g incidents).
Alert Threshold: Threshold in miles, hours, or days before service is overdue.
Speed Limit: Threshold in MPH in speed (not related to posted limit). By default, conditions are based on [glossary slug="inst-speed"]Inst speed[/glossary] sample. This is valuable when you need to deduce that a violation occurred at a fixed time and location (e.g., speeding inside the boundaries of a relatively small landmark).
Stop Time: Threshold in minutes since the vehicle has been stopped.
Stop Type: Type of stop for which the alert is in effect. Options include Any (idle and ignition off), Idle (only), or Stop (ignition off only).
Switch Type: Type of power loss event (Power Lost or Power Cycle). Power Lost indicates when a device may have been unplugged/unwired (relies on backup battery). Power Cycle indicates when all power is lost and regained. If the device has a backup battery, the alert will trigger only if all power (including backup battery) had been lost prior to regaining power.
Diagnostic Type: Type of diagnostic (Temperature Sensor, Coolant Temperature, Engine Speed).
Threshold: Threshold for Diagnostic Type (see above).
Adjust additional alert settings as needed, and click Create Alert.
The new alert will be listed in the Manage Alerts grid, which includes the details of the alert.
The next time any vehicle(s) in the Delivery group trigger this alert according to the odd hours Bob set (using Bob's timezone), Tom Jones will receive the following notifications (email and SMS):
If a message was sent to the driver, the the time the alert violation occurred (according to Bob's timezone) will be converted to the driver's timezone (if set in driver's profile).
Allow 'alerts@[provider].com' to ensure you receive email alerts. Reply 'STOP' to stop receiving future SMS messages.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Adding an Alert
[post_excerpt] => Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-an-alert
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-10-15 13:44:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-10-15 20:44:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 942
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=943
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 4
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 38978c07f2dbd59db3d2877df2a2a4d8
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:b43e1f64bce49c72b127273d3784df7d
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 14
[name] => Alerts
[slug] => alerts
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 14
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up notification to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers each time an alert is triggered.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 17
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 11
[cat_ID] => 14
[category_count] => 17
[category_description] => Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up notification to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers each time an alert is triggered.
[cat_name] => Alerts
[category_nicename] => alerts
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 4
)
[52] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 52
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 52
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 52
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 52
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 52
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.*
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (52)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 399
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-16 22:20:03
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-17 05:20:03
[post_content] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles, drivers, and landmarks beyond the basic information. For example, you could assign categories such as “Equipment Type” to vehicles and then assign pre-defined values such as “winch,” “generator,” and “compressor.” Or, you could create an attribute such as “Towing Bed” with free-form values for a range. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets, such as only vehicles with a tow bed 25-30 ft, or only drivers who speak Spanish.
Attributes can also apply to hierarchies in order to manage distribution of information across all of the divisions, branches, and separate business units operating under an umbrella. Hierarchies allow you to easily schedule reports/alerts to automatically run for the appropriate vehicles and be delivered to the appropriate individuals, including automatic escalation of violation alerts.
[post_title] => About Attributes
[post_excerpt] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles, drivers, and landmarks beyond the basic information. For example, you could assign categories such as “Equipment Type” to vehicles and then assign pre-defined values such as “winch,” “generator,” and “compressor.” Or, you could create an attribute such as “Towing Bed” with free-form values for a range. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets, such as only vehicles with a tow bed 25-30 ft, or only drivers who speak Spanish.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-attributes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:07:15
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:07:15
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=399
[menu_order] => 16
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 941
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:55:58
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 23:55:58
[post_content] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your drivers. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets.
Example
Company XYZ keeps a record of its drivers' Commercial Driver's Licenses (CDL) endorsements. Each driver is assigned a "CDL Endorsement" attribute with values for "A, F, H, N, P, S, T, V, X." The owner uses this information when exporting driver information.
To create and assign driver attributes:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Describe with attributes.
The Manage Attributes page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Attribute Definitions grid, click Attribute next to Create New.
The Add New Attribute screen window appears.
Set the different properties for the attribute:
Attribute Name: Enter the user-friendly identifier for the attribute (e.g., CDL Endorsements).
Attribute Type: Select the check box(es) for each type this attribute supports (e.g., Users, Vehicles, Drivers, Landmarks, Hierarchy). For example, an ice cream company may add a "Flavor" attribute that applies to 1) the vehicles that transport certain flavors and 2) the ice cream factories (landmarks) that produce certain flavors.
Value Type: Choose the data type that is allowed for this attribute. In the Company XYZ example, we chose Alphanumeric so that we can use free-form text to describe the available values (A, F, H, N, P, S, T, V, X).
The Alerts, Emails, and Timezone value types are typically used with the Hierarchy attribute type.
Treat as Category: Select this box if you want to create a list of values from which to choose when applying this attribute to drivers. In the Company XYZ example, there are a limited number of CDL endorsements, so we set this up as a category.
The following figures show the result of setting up an attribute compared with an attribute treated as a category (a pre-defined list of values) when assigning it to a vehicle:
VS
Using a pre-defined list makes it less likely for typos or other errors when adding an attribute to a query.
Account Visibility: Select the check box(es) if you want other portal users on your account to see and use this attribute and/or edit this attribute.
Click Save Attribute.
From the Attribute Definitions grid, click the green check mark icon(s) (e.g., Driver) to assign values.
From the Assign Driver Attributes grid, set the attribute value for each driver that you want to assign. Values are automatically saved when you either make a selection (for pre-defined lists) or click/tab outside of the field (for text entry).
The attribute is now available to use on applicable reports and dashlets:
[post_title] => Using Driver Attributes
[post_excerpt] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your drivers. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-driver-attributes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:07:53
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:07:53
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 399
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=941
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1372
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-02-10 20:00:33
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-02-11 03:00:33
[post_content] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to individual hierarchy levels (nodes)--such as alert addresses, email lists, and timezones. When you apply an attribute to a hierarchy level, all members of that level (vehicles, drivers, landmarks and/or users) are automatically assigned to that attribute.
Example
Company XYZ has several dispatch facilities in Arizona and Minnesota. XYZ's owner wants to specify an email list and a timezone for both facilities so that he can schedule reports that are formatted according to the proper timezone and are automatically sent to the email distribution list per facility.
To create and assign a timezone hierarchy attribute:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Hierarchy, and click Describe with attributes.
The Manage Attributes page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Attribute Definitions grid, click Attribute next to Create New.
The Add New Attribute screen window appears.
Set the different properties for the attribute:
Attribute Name: Enter the user-friendly identifier for the attribute (e.g., Timezone).
Attribute Type: Select the check box(es) for each type this attribute supports. In the Company XYZ example, we're using this attribute for hierarchy only.
Value Type: Choose the data type that is allowed for this attribute. In the Company XYZ example, we chose Timezone.
Treat as Category: The timezone type automatically is treated as a category that is conveniently formatted for you.
Account Visibility: Select the check box(es) if you want other portal users on your account to see and use this attribute and/or edit this attribute.
Click Save Attribute.
From the Attribute Definitions grid, click the green check mark icon(s) (e.g., Hierarchy) to assign values.
From the Assign Hierarchy Node Attributes grid, choose the Hierarchy Tree to which this attribute applies. In the Company XYZ example, we chose the "Company XYZ" hierarchy, which has levels for Arizona and Minnesota.
Click Go.
For each node in the selected hierarchy, choose the attribute value (e.g., Timezone) that you want to apply. Values are automatically saved when you either make a selection (for pre-defined lists) or click/tab outside of the field (for text entry).
In the Company XYZ example, we also need to set up an Email attribute so that we can designate the email addresses per hierarchy node for where we want to send scheduled reports. Let's create another one in the next set of steps.
To create and assign an email hierarchy attribute:
From the the Manage Attributes page at the bottom of the Attribute Definitions grid, click Attribute next to Create New.
The Add New Attribute screen window appears.
Set the different properties for the attribute:
Attribute Name: Enter the user-friendly identifier for the attribute (e.g., Email Distribution).
Attribute Type: Select the check box(es) for each type this attribute supports. In the Company XYZ example, we're setting up this attribute for hierarchy, but it might also apply to users.
Value Type: Choose the data type that is allowed for this attribute. In the Company XYZ example, we chose Emails.
Treat as Category: Although you can set up the email value type as a category if you had a few distribution lists from which to choose, it's most often used as free-form.
Account Visibility: Select the check box(es) if you want other portal users on your account to see and use this attribute and/or edit this attribute.
Click Save Attribute.
From the Attribute Definitions grid, click the green check mark icon(s) (e.g., Hierarchy) to assign values.
From the Assign Hierarchy Node Attributes grid, choose the Hierarchy Tree you want to use. In the Company XYZ example, we chose the "Company XYZ" hierarchy, which has levels for Arizona and Minnesota.
Click Go.
For each node in the selected hierarchy, choose the attribute value (e.g., email address) that you want to apply. You can specify one or more email addresses per entry (separated by commas). Values are automatically saved when you either make a selection (for pre-defined lists) or click/tab outside of the field (for text entry).
Now you can use this attribute on a scheduled report or alert whenever you filter the vehicle list using one of the nodes in your hierarchy. In the following example, when scheduling a fleet utilization report based on Company XYZ vehicles, the timezones in the report will be formatted according to what was specified when applying the attribute, and the report will be sent to the email addresses set up in the hierarchy.
Email hierarchy attributes can also be used when setting up alerts for automatic escalation:
[post_title] => Using Hierarchy Attributes
[post_excerpt] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to individual hierarchy levels (nodes)--such as alert addresses, email lists, and timezones.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-hierarchy-attributes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:07:31
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:07:31
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 399
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1372
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 965
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:13:32
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-27 00:13:32
[post_content] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your landmarks, which allows you to provide extra information to a recipient whenever an applicable landmark alert is triggered--like a gate code or a note about a safety concern at the property (e.g., guard dog).
Example
Company XYZ has several dispatch centers in Arizona that require access codes for driver entry. These access codes change frequently, so management would like to notify drivers of the code(s) using an alert whenever they enter the landmark.
To create and assign landmark attributes:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Describe with attributes.
The Manage Attributes page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Attribute Definitions grid, click Attribute next to Create New.
The Add New Attribute screen window appears.
Set the different properties for the attribute:
Attribute Name: Enter the user-friendly identifier for the attribute (e.g., Access Codes).
Attribute Type: Select the check box(es) for each type this attribute supports (e.g., Landmark).
Value Type: Choose the data type that is allowed for this attribute. In the Company XYZ example, we chose Alphanumeric so that we can use free-form text to describe the available values.
The Alerts, Emails, and Timezone types are typically used with Hierarchy attributes.
Treat as Category: Select this box to create a list of values from which to choose when applying this attribute to landmarks. In the Company XYZ example, these codes change frequently, so we set up this attribute without a category.
Account Visibility: Select the check box(es) if you want other portal users on your account to see and use this attribute and/or edit this attribute.
Click Save Attribute.
From the Attribute Definitions grid, click the green check mark icon(s) (e.g., Landmark) to assign values.
From the Assign Landmark Attributes grid, set the attribute value for each landmark that you want to assign. Values are automatically saved when you either make a selection (for pre-defined lists) or click/tab outside of the field (for text entry).
The attribute is now available to use on applicable alerts:
[post_title] => Using Landmark Attributes
[post_excerpt] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your landmarks, which allows you to provide extra information to a recipient whenever an applicable landmark alert is triggered.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-landmark-attributes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:07:46
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:07:46
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 399
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=965
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 964
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:13:11
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-27 00:13:11
[post_content] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles beyond the basic vehicle information. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets.
Example
Company XYZ has a fleet of trucks used for transporting large heating/cooling equipment. Because certain truck models in the fleet have larger load capacities than others, vehicle assignment for delivery jobs depend on the weight of the shipment. By creating a "Load Capacity" attribute for his trucks, XYZ's owner can filter maps to show only trucks that have a given load capacity--perhaps to see which one is available for an urgent delivery. Additionally, he can add the "Load Capacity" attribute to any report--perhaps to compare the number of trips between low and high load capacity trucks for a given time period.
To create and assign vehicle attributes:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Describe with attributes.
The Manage Attributes page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Attribute Definitions grid, click Attribute next to Create New.
The Add New Attribute screen window appears.
Set the different properties for the attribute:
Attribute Name: Enter the user-friendly identifier for the attribute (e.g., Load Capacity).
Attribute Type: Select the check box(es) for each type this attribute supports (e.g., Users, Vehicles, Drivers, Landmarks, Hierarchy). For example, an ice cream company may add a "Flavor" attribute that applies to 1) the vehicles that transport certain flavors and 2) the ice cream factories (landmarks) that produce certain flavors.
Value Type: Choose the data type that is allowed for this attribute. In the Company XYZ example, we chose Alphanumeric so that we can use free-form text to describe the available values (1000 lb, 2000 lb, 3000 lb).
The Alerts, Emails, and Timezone types are typically used with Hierarchy attributes.
Treat as Category: Select this box to create a list of values from which to choose when applying this attribute to vehicles and using it as a filter on maps. In the Company XYZ example, the trucks have only three options for load capacity, so we set up this attribute as a category.
The following figures show the result of setting up an attribute compared with an attribute treated as a category (a pre-defined list of values) when assigning it to a vehicle:
VS
Using a pre-defined list makes it less likely for typos or other errors when adding an attribute to a query.
Account Visibility: Select the check box(es) if you want other portal users on your account to see and use this attribute and/or edit this attribute.
Click Save Attribute.
From the Attribute Definitions grid, click the green check mark icon (e.g., Vehicle) to assign values.
From the Assign Vehicle Attributes grid, set the attribute value for each vehicle that you want to assign. Values are automatically saved when you either make a selection (for pre-defined lists) or click/tab outside of the field (for text entry).
The attribute is now available to use on applicable reports, maps, and dashlets:
[post_title] => Using Vehicle Attributes
[post_excerpt] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles beyond the basic vehicle information.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-vehicle-attributes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:07:37
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:07:37
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 399
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=964
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 5
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 399
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-16 22:20:03
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-17 05:20:03
[post_content] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles, drivers, and landmarks beyond the basic information. For example, you could assign categories such as “Equipment Type” to vehicles and then assign pre-defined values such as “winch,” “generator,” and “compressor.” Or, you could create an attribute such as “Towing Bed” with free-form values for a range. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets, such as only vehicles with a tow bed 25-30 ft, or only drivers who speak Spanish.
Attributes can also apply to hierarchies in order to manage distribution of information across all of the divisions, branches, and separate business units operating under an umbrella. Hierarchies allow you to easily schedule reports/alerts to automatically run for the appropriate vehicles and be delivered to the appropriate individuals, including automatic escalation of violation alerts.
[post_title] => About Attributes
[post_excerpt] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles, drivers, and landmarks beyond the basic information. For example, you could assign categories such as “Equipment Type” to vehicles and then assign pre-defined values such as “winch,” “generator,” and “compressor.” Or, you could create an attribute such as “Towing Bed” with free-form values for a range. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets, such as only vehicles with a tow bed 25-30 ft, or only drivers who speak Spanish.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-attributes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:07:15
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:07:15
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=399
[menu_order] => 16
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 5
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 9f6dc1bd5c8e7293f90359336bf6d76d
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:30611785b43e356731e0d257640d8523
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 52
[name] => Attributes
[slug] => attributes
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 52
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles, drivers, landmarks, users, and hierarchy nodes (if available). You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets (e.g., show only vehicles with a tow capacity of 2000+lbs or only drivers with a CDL certification).
[parent] => 0
[count] => 10
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 23
[cat_ID] => 52
[category_count] => 10
[category_description] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles, drivers, landmarks, users, and hierarchy nodes (if available). You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets (e.g., show only vehicles with a tow capacity of 2000+lbs or only drivers with a CDL certification).
[cat_name] => Attributes
[category_nicename] => attributes
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 5
)
[37] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 37
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 37
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 37
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 37
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 37
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.*
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (37)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 202
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-01 18:04:20
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-01 18:04:20
[post_content] => The dashboard interface allows you to arrange, customize, and share several configurations of workspaces. Moveable windows called dashlets provide at-a-glance insight into the fleet management areas that interest you most and allow you to interact with vehicle data.
Not all dashlets may be available to your account.
Review these four areas of the dashboard interface for key terminology:
[et th="0" colwidth="25%|" class="table-condensed"]
"1 - Menu Bar","Access maps, reports, other account features, menu options, user preferences, tab settings, and Help."
"2 - Dashboard Control","Modify and save dashboard layouts."
"3 - Dashlets Control","Drag-and-drop dashlets onto the dashboard layout."
"4 - Dashboard","View and interact with individual dashlets."
[/et]
When you first log into the portal, the default dashboard appears ([System] 2 wide L). You can toggle to different dashboards using the Dashboard Control (circled below). For example, the dashboard in the following figure uses a three column layout (equal widths) and six dashlets: Alerts, Vehicle Selector, Map, Quick Links, and Closest. (See Dashlets for more examples.)
Want more room on the dashboard? Minimize the control panels by clicking the arrow icon ().
The [System] Map Dashboard is a special type of dashboard that does not allow you to configure the layout.
You can rearrange individual dashlets by simply dragging-and-dropping them on the screen.
You can also minimize, configure, add, or remove dashlets using the Move , Show/Hide , Edit , Add , Copy or Close icons.
Drag a vehicle from a dashlet onto an area of the dashboard to automatically add a map dashlet that follows the selected vehicle.
Result:
Any changes you make to a dashboard will be lost the next time you refresh the screen or log in unless you save as a custom dashboard. (See Dashboard Customization.)
[post_title] => About Dashboards
[post_excerpt] => The dashboard interface allows you to arrange, customize, and share several configurations of workspaces. Moveable windows called dashlets provide at-a-glance insight into the fleet management areas that interest you most and allow you to interact with vehicle data.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => dashboards
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-24 00:52:38
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-24 07:52:38
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=202
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 215
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-01 20:54:56
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-01 20:54:56
[post_content] => Set a default dashboard and create custom dashboards to personalize your workspace.
Setting a Default Dashboard
The default dashboard refers to the dashboard that appears whenever you log into the portal. Typically you'll want your default dashboard to be the one you use most often. The available dashboards to set as your default can be system dashboards (denoted by "[System]") or custom dashboards.
Example
Tom prefers to see a two-column dashboard layout over a three-column layout on the dashboard.
To set a default dashboard
From the Dashboard Control, click the drop-down arrow, and choose the dashboard you want to view. In Tom's example, we chose "[System] 2 wide."
The selected dashboard appears.
From the Dashboard Control, click Set as default.
A message appears to indicate that the selected layout is now your default dashboard. In Tom's example, the next time he logs into the portal, he will automatically see this two-column layout.
You can modify system dashboards, but changes are lost the next time you refresh the screen or log in unless you save them as a custom dashboard.
Saving a Custom Dashboard
Custom dashboards allow you to arrange different combinations of dashlets and save the layout for quick access. You can create as many custom dashboards as needed.
Example
Tom added several graph dashlets to his default dashboard and wants to save the layout for future use.
To save a custom dashboard
From the dashboard layout, add and rearrange dashlets on the dashboard as needed.
You can rearrange dashlets, close dashlets, or add more dashlets to a dashboard by simply dragging-and-dropping them on the screen or clicking the Add () or Close () icons.
From the Dashboard Control, click Save As.
In the Save Dashboard As window, enter a Dashboard Name. (Leave the option selected to use the dashboard immediately. Optionally set this new dashboard to be your default.)
Click Save.
Because we left the "Use newly created dashboard" check box selected, the new dashboard is automatically chosen as the current layout.
Click "Manage Dashboards" to delete or change the name of a custom dashboard.
Adding a Custom Tab
Custom tabs appear as new items on the Menu Bar. Custom tabs allow you to quickly jump to your most-used dashboards without having to choose them from the drop-down in the Dashboard Control.
Example
Tom created several custom dashboards. He uses his "Dispatching" dashboard frequently and wants a quicker way to access it.
To add a custom tab
From the right side of the Menu Bar, click Change Tab Settings (pencil icon ).
In the Tab Settings window, from the Custom Tab Settings area, click +Add Tab.
Enter a new tab name, and then choose the dashboard you want to link to the tab. You can optionally click the "Custom" gears icon () to choose a different icon for the tab. In Tom's example, we chose "D" for Dispatch.
Click Apply.
The new tab appears in the Menu Bar (click to view associated dashboard).
Click Close to close the Tab Settings window.
Adjusting Tab Settings
Expand the Tab Settings icon on the Dashboard to adjust static and custom tab settings.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
"Setting","Description"
"Mapping,"Specify the dashboard to display when clicking the button above the Mapping menu (if available)."
"Reports","Specify the dashboard to display when clicking the button above the Reports menu (if available)."
"Custom","Specify the dashboard to display when clicking the button above the Custom menu (if available)."
"Account","Specify the dashboard to display when clicking the button above the Account menu (if available)."
"Hover mouse over menu bars to open","Specify to hover to expand a menu. If not selected, a mouse click is required."
"Show drivers on vehicle menus","Specify to show drivers next to individual vehicle names in menus, such as reports. If not selected, driver names will not be shown in the drop-down."
"Fixed menu when scrolling","Specify the units to display for distances and speeds. Available options are US Standard and Metric."
"Enable scroll wheel map zoom","Specify to allow mouse scroll wheel to control the zoom when mouse focus is on a map. If not selected, scroll wheel focus will remain with the page."
"Filter menu vehicles","Specify a filter group to use in menus, such as reports. The list of individual vehicles in the drop-down will filter by this group."
[/et]
[post_title] => Customizing the Dashboard
[post_excerpt] => Set a default dashboard and create custom dashboards to personalize your workspace.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => customizing-the-dashboard
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-24 00:55:07
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-24 07:55:07
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 202
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=215
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 225
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-02 20:14:19
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-02 20:14:19
[post_content] => Dashlets are available variety of purposes, and almost all dashlets are configurable.
Click Edit () to view configuration preferences specific to each dashlet, such as changing the dashlet title and various thresholds. You must save the dashboard to keep dashlet preferences. Not all dashlets may be available to your account.
Alert Dashlets
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="6%|13%|40%|41%"]
Icon,Dashlet,Description,Example
,Alerts,Shows Speeding\, Out of Range\, and/or Idle alerts for a selected vehicle group. Shows alerts that are actively triggered (no time range).,,Diagnostic Alerts,Shows diagnostic alerts and DTCs for a selected vehicle group. Click on one of the codes to run the related report to get the DTC description. Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature and varies by vehicle make/model.,,Recent Alerts,Shows alerts (up to 100) for a selected vehicle group. Filter by active alerts. Time span choices range from 10 minutes to 5 days.,,Service Reminders,Shows service reminders (up to 200) for a selected vehicle group.,
[/et]
Dispatch Dashlets
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="6%|13%|40%|41%"]
Icon,Dashlet,Description,Example
,Closest To,Shows vehicles that are closest to a vehicle\, landmark\, address\, or lat/lon. Proximity choices range from 500 feet to 500 miles. Filter by vehicle group or attribute (multiple). Includes Garmin dispatch option. The Drop Pin feature () is most often used with this dashlet. Dropping a pin allows you to place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. You can then quickly dispatch to/from this location\ obtain lat/lon coordinates and physical address\, or create a landmark for repeated use.,,Closest To Vehicle,Shows vehicles that are closest to a set vehicle. Filter by vehicle group.,,Directions,Shows driving directions from a vehicle\, landmark\, address\, or lat/lon to another vehicle\, landmark\, address\, or lat/lon. Turn-by-turn directions open within Google Maps.,,DVIR,Shows recent Driver Vehicle Inspection Reports that have been completed for Hours of Service functionality.,,Landmark Stops,Shows vehicle visits (up to 500) to a landmark. Filter by vehicle and/or landmark group. History choices range from 1 to 3 days. Click the landmark name to view related report. Visits are only counted for landmarks that existed at the time of the visit. Old visits to newly created landmarks will not show retroactively.,,HOS Availability,Shows all vehicles and drivers (if assigned) that are configured for Hours of Service. The Reference ID of the driver's profile must match the driver’s HOS ID. Timezone is used to accurately timestamp alerts received by the driver. The dashlet shows current duty status and driving time left. Sort by Now\, Day\, or Week. Clicking the location brings up the location on a related map dashlet (if available). Columns are sortable. Warning times are highlighted in yellow. Critical times are highlighted in red.,,In-Cab Notifications,Shows vehicles that are configured for in-cab notification. You can manually trigger an in-cab notification from this dashlet to invoke the notification inside a particular vehicle (typically done for testing purposes).,,Landmarks,Shows vehicles (10 to all) that are currently in a landmark. Filter by vehicle and/or landmark group. Optionally\, include attribute column. Click a landmark name to see it on a related map dashlet.,,Last Stops,Show the last stops (up to 25) for a selected vehicle. (Click a vehicle from the Vehicle Selector dashlet.),,Map,Shows a 2D map with current locations of a selected vehicle group. Edit options allow you to filter by vehicle status (running\, stopped\, stopped for a set time period). You can also adjust or hide vehicle/driver labels\, add landmarks to the map (up to 500 by default)\, adjust map height and zoom options\, and more. On the map control\, toggle between Clusters\, Traffic\ Service Reminders\, Points of Interest\, Map View\, Satellite View\, or Street View. Click and drag a vehicle icon to an open space on the dashboard to follow a vehicle.,Learn more about the Map dashlet.
,Route,Shows estimated driving distance\, time\, and directions for a selected route OR for a list of ad hoc addresses\, landmarks\, or points. Includes a dispatch option for Garmin or driver email address\, which allow drivers to leverage audible turn-by-turn directions (via Garmin device or via mapping apps within a smart device such as iPhone or Android). If no email address is listed for a driver\, type an address from the dashlet. Includes options to optimize (re-order according to the most efficient path). Includes a map option via Google Maps.,Learn more about the Route dashlet.
,Stop Location,Shows locations of stopped vehicles (up to 10 hours). Filter by vehicle group.,,Vehicle Selector,Shows status and location for vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle group\, vehicle status (running\, stopped\, stopped for a set time period)\, attribute\, speed\, device\, label\, location\, color\, or update interval. Add columns for Device Type\, Year/Make/Model\, Run Time\, Location\, and Attributes. Use the check boxes to temporarily hide certain vehicles from appearing on related dashlets/graphs\, or use the Filter box to temporarily hide all vehicles that match the closest string (wildcard * allowed). Click and drag a vehicle icon to an open space on the dashboard to follow a vehicle.,
[/et]
Graph Dashlets
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="6%|13%|40%|41%"]
Icon,Dashlet,Description,Example
,Comparison Graphs,Shows comparisons (horizontal bar chart) against two vehicle groups for Idle Hours\, Miles Driven\, Speeding\, and/or MPG (avg). History choices range from Yesterday to the last 30 days. Show totals or averages per vehicle.,,Group Graphs,Shows comparisons (horizontal bar chart) against vehicles in a selected vehicle group (up to 500) for Miles Driven\, Idle Hours\, Hours of Operation\, and/or Speed Violations. History choices range from Yesterday to the last 30 days to a specific date range (entered as YYYYMMDD). Click an item in the graph to launch a related report. For Miles Driven and Speed Violations graphs\, you can also click the legend items to launch a related report for the selected range of vehicles.,,Utilization Rollup,Available with hierarchy feature (Enterprise accounts). Provides summary information (totals) for nodes in a selected hierarchy. Includes totals for number of vehicles and [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary]\, metrics\, or attributes. Access the Color Editor through this dashlet\, which allows you to create and save custom color scales that you can apply to the data.,,Vehicle Graphs,Shows graphed data (bar chart) for a selected vehicle for MPG\, Miles Driven\, and/or Idle Time. Frequency choices range from Daily to Monthly. History choices range from the last 3 to 7 days.,
[/et]
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="6%|13%|40%|41%"]
Icon,Dashlet,Description,Example
,Clock,Shows the current date and time for the selected timezone. Includes options for daylight savings and 12-hour format.,,News,Shows the latest product updates.,,Legend,Shows the values assigned to legend colors and shapes as they appear on reports\, maps\, and dashlets. Threshold values are configurable in User Preferences. Click Edit Icon Shapes to open the Manage Vehicle Icons tab to adjust icon shapes.,,Quick Links,Shows quick links to common functions in the portal.,,Scheduled Reports,Shows scheduled reports for your account (for the users you can access). Click on a saved/scheduled report and run it in the browser with a selected date.,,Suggestion Box,Allows you to submit a suggestion/comment about the product.,,Whiteboard,When you add a whiteboard dashlet to the dashboard\, the whiteboard loaded first is called "default whiteboard." You can create or load other whiteboards from the drop-down on the dashlet(s). Public whiteboards can be loaded by any user in the same account. You can also load private whiteboards created by other users in the same account if you specify the name of the board within the prompt. Authorship colors are shown by default.,
[/et]
More reference materials:
What does it mean if the icons on the top of the tablet are orange or gray? See ELD Driver Reference for more.
[post_title] => Dashlet Types
[post_excerpt] => Dashlets are available variety of purposes, and almost all dashlets are configurable.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => dashlet-types
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:48:29
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:48:29
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 202
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=225
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 3331
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-08-09 20:39:05
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-08-09 20:39:05
[post_content] => The Manage Colors page allows you to create and save custom color scales that you can apply to metrics, attributes, or [glossary slug="trip-summary-identifiers"]trip summary identifiers[/glossary] within areas of the portal (e.g., the Utilization Rollup dashlet).
The Manage Colors page appears. The Color Editor loads the last item that was added to the dashlet (attribute, metric, or trip summary identifier). If you want to define a color scale for a different item, choose from the Type drop-down and then the Id drop-down. Or, choose Edit from the Color List, which displays attributes, metrics, or trip summary identifiers that currently have a color scale defined.
Add a Name for the color scale.
Adjust the minimum and maximum range values. If you want to add another point in the range, click the scale.
If you're editing a color scale that is already associated with a scorecard metric, you cannot modify events or points. In that case, you can modify only the color(s) on the existing point(s) and color names.
Click the color boxes to open a color picker and choose a new one as needed.
If you make a mistake and want to revert back to what the scale was (name) prior to the last save, click Reset. Changes to colors and points are not currently reset.
When finished, click Update.
[post_title] => Managing Colors
[post_excerpt] => The Manage Colors page allows you to create and save custom color scales that you can apply to metrics, attributes, or trip summary identifiers within areas of the portal (e.g., the Utilization Rollup dashlet).
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-colors
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:49:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:49:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 202
[guid] => http://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=3331
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 357
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 20:17:28
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 20:17:28
[post_content] => From the Map Dashboard, click the Landmarks menu item to open the Landmarks tab. All of your landmarks are listed on this tab.
When you click on a landmark from the list or when you click on a landmark from the map, the Landmark Card appears, which shows you the radius and latitude / longitude.
"Help! Why can't I see my landmarks on the map?" Ensure the Landmarks toggle is turned on from the Map Toolbar: or from the Landmark Card: .
The boundary that you set up for a landmark can exist as a circle or a polygon.
Circle - The default shape for a landmark boundary is a circle. The default radius is determined by your current zoom level. Circle landmarks are typically sufficient for most tasks (i.e., report labels, map filters, turn-by-turn directions, and so on).
Polygon - Polygons allow you to define a more precise boundary by tracing an outline around a specific area (up to 256 vertices). Polygon landmarks are more often used when the exclusion or inclusion of specific perimeters is important, such as when sending alerts when a vehicle enters or exits a specific location.
Adding a Landmark
You can add a landmark by drawing a new one from the Landmarks tab or from a dropped pin on the map.
Draw a New Landmark
Drawing a landmark allows you to visually specify the borders on the map surface.
To draw a new landmark:
From the menu, click Landmarks.
Click Add Landmark.
A default circle appears on the center of the map. The circle has four sizing handles on the perimeter and one moving handle in the center.
Enter a label for the landmark.
Choose the shape of the landmark (Circle or Polygon):
Circle - Re-size the radius by dragging-and-dropping one of the four sizing handles on the perimeter. (Alternatively, you can enter a custom radius in feet, miles, meters, or kilometers.) Move the circle by dragging-and-dropping the moving node. (Alternatively, you can enter a custom Lat/Lng.)
Polygon - Click on the map to start drawing a polygon shape. Drag and drop the sizing handles as needed.
Colors can help you categorize or group landmarks (e.g., set all customer sites to light orange).
Click Save.
Create a Landmark from a Pin
A dropped pin marks a temporary location based on a visual reference or an address/lat/lon. Creating a landmark from a dropped pin allows you to reuse that location again.
To create a landmark from a pin:
From the Map Toolbar, click Drop a Pin ().
Drag-and-drop the pin to the location from which you want to create a landmark.
Click Landmark.
A default circle appears on the center of the map. The circle has four sizing handles on the perimeter and one moving handle in the center.
Enter a label for the landmark.
Choose the shape of the landmark (Circle or Polygon):
Circle - Re-size the radius by dragging-and-dropping one of the four sizing handles on the perimeter. (Alternatively, you can enter a custom radius in feet, miles, meters, or kilometers.) Move the circle by dragging-and-dropping the moving node. (Alternatively, you can enter a custom Lat/Lng.)
Polygon - Click on the map to start drawing a polygon shape. Drag and drop the sizing handles as needed.
Choose a Color.
Colors can help you categorize or group landmarks (e.g., set all customer sites to light orange).
Click Save.
Editing a Landmark
You can edit landmark details or delete landmarks.
Edit Landmark Details
Any properties that you edit on the landmark will be reflected the next time you run a report or alert that uses that landmark.
To edit a landmark:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Landmarks tab, click the landmark that you want to edit.
From the Landmark Card, click Edit.
The following fields are available to modify:
[et colwidth="20%|80%" class="table-zebra"]
Field Name,Description
Label,"The name of the landmark."
Circle / Polygon,"The shape of the landmark."
Color,"The color used on the map to denote the landmark."
Lat/Lng,"The latitude and longitude coordinates."
Radius,"The distance from the center to the perimeter of the landmark."
Attribute, "The descriptive property associated with the landmark."
[/et]
Click Save.
Delete a Landmark
When you delete a landmark, any alerts that use the landmark will be updated to instead use all landmarks.
To delete a landmark:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Landmarks tab, click the landmark that you want to delete.
From the Landmark Card, click Delete.
In the Delete Landmark pop-up window, click OK.
Using Landmark Groups
Landmark groups are used to organize your landmarks based on logical or geographical separations that make sense to your business. In the context of the Map Dashboard, landmark groups allow you to temporarily hide () or center () the map around a subset of landmarks.
Create a Landmark Group
Creating a landmark group from the Map Dashboard allows you to choose the name of the group and the landmarks that belong in the group. For more landmark management options, visit the Landmark Groups or Mass Update administration pages.
To add a new landmark group:
From the menu, click Landmarks.
Click Create Group.
Enter a name for the landmark group, and then select the check box next to each landmark you want to include in the group.
Click Save.
Add a Landmark to an Existing Group
If you want additional administration options for editing landmarks, visit the Landmark Groups administration page.
To add a landmark to group:
From the menu, click Landmarks.
Click the target landmark group, and then click Edit.
Select the check box next to the landmark(s) you want to include in the group, and click Save.
[post_title] => Map Dashboard: Landmarks
[post_excerpt] => From the Map Dashboard, click the Landmarks menu item to open the Landmarks tab. All of your landmarks are listed on this tab.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => map-dashboard-landmarks
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:49:22
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:49:22
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 299
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=357
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 3549
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-09-06 23:43:58
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-09-06 23:43:58
[post_content] => The Map Dashboard allows you to send and receive messages to/from a vehicle/driver via SMS or email. The driver or vehicle must have an SMS number set under the driver's or vehicle's profile.
If no driver is assigned to a vehicle, the contact information assigned to the vehicle is used. If contact information is entered for a driver AND a vehicle, the assigned driver contact info overrides vehicle contact info.
SMS messages sent from the Map Dashboard are delivered to a driver's mobile device via 477-477 (GPSGPS). Any messages replied from a driver are displayed in message history on the Conversations tab and from the driver Message history, which you can access from the vehicle card.
To send an SMS message to a vehicle/driver:
From the menu, click Messaging.
Click New message.
On the New Message tab, use the drop-down to locate the driver or vehicle that you want to contact. (You can pick more than one.)
The driver or vehicle name and number appears in the Recipients box.
Enter the message, and click Send Message.
The message will be delivered to the driver's mobile device from the number 477-477 (GPSGPS). If the driver replies to a message, an automated message will be sent to the driver to indicate that the reply was sent. You can view all SMS communication for all drivers/vehicles from the Conversations tab. You can view SMS history for a specific driver under the Messages tab of each vehicle/driver.
Click a conversation thread to view all replies:
The message will be delivered to the driver's mobile device from the number 477-477 (GPSGPS). If the driver replies to a message, an automated message will be sent to the driver to indicate that the reply was sent. You can view all driver-initiated communication from the Mobile Communications tab.
[post_title] => Map Dashboard: Messaging
[post_excerpt] => The Map Dashboard allows you to send and receive messages to/from a vehicle/driver via SMS or email.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => map-dashboard-messaging
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:49:28
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:49:28
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 299
[guid] => http://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=3549
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 353
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 20:23:22
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 20:23:22
[post_content] => From the Map Dashboard, click the Vehicles menu item to open the Vehicles tab. All of your vehicles and their color-coded statuses are listed on this tab.
If your vehicle(s) are equipped to monitor PTO, vehicles will be represented with a star icon (), and trails will be thicker when PTO is engaged. You can find out more about the Map Legend, including Icon Shapes, from the User Preferences menu.
When you click on a vehicle from the list or when you click on a vehicle from the map, the Vehicle Card appears, which shows you the duration of vehicle status, last reported time of ignition status, address and geocode of last reported location, and current odometer reading. Additional menu items are also available for the selected vehicle.
"Help! Why can't I see my vehicles on the map?" Ensure the map filters are turned off (i.e., only starred vehicles).
Starring Vehicles
Starring vehicles or groups/hierarchy nodes puts them in a temporary starred "group," which allows you to apply quick filter and follow actions.
Filter the Map to Show One or More Vehicles
Filtering by vehicle or vehicle group/hierarchy node allows you to temporarily hide all other vehicles.
To filter by vehicle(s):
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the empty star next to the vehicle (or vehicle group) that you want to follow.
The star becomes solid.
Clicking a Vehicle Group or Hierarchy Group provides additional options to Center, Filter, or Follow. Clicking Filter from the Vehicle Group or Hierarchy Group card automatically stars all vehicles in that group or hierarchy node and selects the Filter check box from the Star tab.
Click the Star tab.
Select the Filter check box.
The map automatically hides all other vehicles. To turn off filtering, click Clear Active Filters from from the Star tab.
Follow One or More Vehicles
Following a vehicle continuously centers the map around the selected vehicle (or vehicle group) as its location(s) update(s).
To follow one or more vehicles:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the empty star next to the vehicle (or vehicle group) that you want to follow.
The star becomes solid.
Clicking a Vehicle Group or Hierarchy Group provides additional options to Center, Filter, or Follow. Clicking Follow from the Vehicle Group or Hierarchy Group card automatically stars all vehicles in that group or hierarchy node and selects the Follow check box from the Star tab.
Click the Star tab.
Select the Follow check box.
The map automatically centers around the starred vehicle(s) if it is not already in view. The map continues to dynamically center as the starred vehicle(s) update their location. To turn off following, click Clear Active Filters from from the Star tab.
Filter by Movement or Status
In addition to filtering selected vehicles by starring, you can also temporarily isolate vehicles based on their movement or status:
PTO On
Moving
Stopped
Stopped over 60 min
Stopped under 60 min
Idling
Not Moving
Moving faster than 67 mph
To filter by movement status:
From the Star tab in the Vehicle list, click Active Filters.
From the Add vehicles by drop-down, choose the status you want to apply.
The filter appears in the selection box, and any vehicles that match the criteria automatically appear in the list as starred.
You can more than one filter to narrow the results. If you add more than one filter, only vehicles that match ALL criteria (AND operator) will appear.
Getting Directions
You can get directions based on a closest vehicle (determined by radius); based on an address that you enter; or based on another vehicle's location (determined ad hoc), a landmark, or a dropped pin.
Directions can be dispatched to a vehicle / driver via SMS or email. SMS messages will be sent from 477-477 (GPSGPS). Emails will be sent from alerts@[provider].com. Drivers can open the dispatched route and invoke turn-by-turn directions using Google (web-based app), iPhone (native mapping app), or iOS-Google (Google Maps iOS app).
Find the Closest Vehicle
The Closest To feature allows you to view all vehicles that match your search criteria (i.e., vehicle group and radius). You can sort the results by estimated drive time or drive distance.
To find the closest vehicle:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want use as the reference point.
You can also use an address (search bar), landmark, or dropped pin as a reference point.
Click Closest To.
The Closest To tab shows results for all vehicles within 5 miles. To modify the search, choose a specific vehicle group or a different radius value.
From the results, click the vehicle that you want to dispatch, and then click Directions.
Click the address, landmark, vehicle, or dropped pin that you used as a reference point.
Directions will appear FROM the selected vehicle TO the reference vehicle.
For more options based on travel modes and departure times, click to open the directions in Google Maps.
For best results, format addresses according to Google's address entry guidelines (e.g., 1234 Main Street, City, State Zip). Places (i.e., restaurant names, places of business) are not typically recognized in the address search.
To find a vehicle by address:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want use as the reference point.
You can also use an address (search bar), landmark, or dropped pin as a reference point.
Click Directions.
Click Enter an Address.
In the To box, enter a street address or geocoded value (latitude/longitude).
Click OK.
Directions will appear FROM the reference vehicle TO the destination.
For more options based on travel modes and departure times, click to open the directions in Google Maps.
Historical vehicle activity is viewable on the map and in reports. On the map, you can view history detail for one vehicle (custom date range), or you can turn on trails to view a snapshot of recent vehicle history for multiple vehicles (one hour).
View History Detail on the Map (One Vehicle)
Vehicle history provides a visual representation of logged activity for a custom date range. By default, all historical activity on is dynamically [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="Vehicle locations are typically provided every two minutes. Although we do not know the exact route the vehicle took between the time gap, our system can generate an accurate representation of the actual path using highly sophisticated mathematical formulas. You can optionally turn off this feature, which will instead connect sequential locations with a straight line." style="top" ]snapped to roads.[/tooltip]
To view vehicle history:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click a vehicle.
Click History.
The most recent historical activity appears in chronological order. You can either view historical vehicle activity by [glossary slug="trip"]trips[/glossary], or you can view raw activity not organized by trip.
Use the date picker to choose a custom date range. The following examples shows history organized by trip:
Trip History Notation:
On the History tab, logged trip activity is indicated by movements and stops. Stops are numbered according to the order in which they occurred within the selected date range.
Stopped >= 60 min
Stopped < 60 min
Idling >= 3 min
Hover over a stop to view its location on the map.
Click a stop to view details about stop duration, time, and location.
Click the play button () to view an automated animation of the historical playback, or advance or replay one stop at a time.
On the map, stops are clustered for easier viewing. The number on a stop cluster indicates the number of stops in that cluster. The stop types in each cluster are indicated by color and sector size.
Hover over a stop cluster to view details about the stops it contains.
Click a stop cluster to zoom in on the stops it contains.
Stop Notes:
Stop notes allow drivers to add notes about various stops (e.g., "Customer was not home for delivery."). Drivers can send notes to 477-477 via SMS if their number is associated with the vehicle. You can view/edit/add individual stop notes within the History tab, and you can also see stop notes applicable reports (i.e., Stop Notes Report).
To view a stop note:
From the Vehicle Card, click History.
From the History tab, click one of the stops you want to view. (Stops are either blue, yellow, or red.)
Click Stop Notes.
If note(s) were added for that stop, they appear in the Stop Notes card and Stop Notes tab.
Click the stop note, and click Edit to edit the text in the stop note.
Click Add Stop Note to add a new stop note.
Notes that were added from SMS are indicated by a mobile phone icon, and they also appear in the message history for that vehicle.
Activity History Notation:
On the History tab, when viewing raw activity data, history events are listed chronologically per update. Click a history event or zoom into the map to view the history trail with directional indicators.
View History Trails on the Map (Multiple Vehicles)
Historical trails provide a snapshot of vehicle activity for the last hour. You can find the Trails button on the Map toolbar.
Trails Enabled
Trails Disabled
If you have a large number of vehicles on the map, you may want to filter the map by a particular vehicle group before turning on history trails. If you do not see any history trails on the map, the selected vehicles have not updated their locations in the last hour. To view detailed history for multiple vehicles, use the 3D History map.
View Input Sensor "On" Status in History-Activity Trails
Star icons indicate the "On" status for input sensor(s) on the History-Activity Trail, for vehicles with inputs.
If the vehicle has more than one input sensor enabled, the star icon will not indicate which input sensor is on.
Click on the vehicle with input sensor(s) in the vehicle list.
The Vehicle Card appears.
Click on History.
History for the selected vehicle is displayed.
Click on Activity.
Zoom in on the Activity trail displayed on the Map.
If the input sensor is on, the Activity trail displays star icons on the directional arrows ().
Basic Tier Instructions
If you are a customer on the Basic tier, please use the instructions provided below. Click on the title to expand the window to view.
[toggles]
[toggle title="Getting Directions - Basic Tier"]You can get directions based on a closest vehicle (determined by radius); based on an address that you enter; or based on another vehicle's location (determined ad hoc), a landmark, or a dropped pin.
Directions can be dispatched to a vehicle / driver via SMS or email. SMS messages will be sent from 477-477 (GPSGPS). Emails will be sent from alerts@[provider].com. Drivers can open the dispatched route and invoke turn-by-turn directions using Google (web-based app), iPhone (native mapping app), or iOS-Google (Google Maps iOS app).
Find / Dispatch the Closest Vehicle
The Closest To feature allows you to view all vehicles that match your search criteria (i.e., vehicle group and radius). You can sort the results by estimated drive time or drive distance.
To find the closest vehicle:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want use as the reference point.
You can also use an address (search bar), landmark, or dropped pin as a reference point.
Click Closest To.
By default, the Closest To tab shows results for all vehicles within 5 miles. To modify the search, choose a specific vehicle group or a different radius value.
Hover over the results to see the recommended paths on the map (shown in blue).
From the results, click the vehicle that you want to dispatch.
Directions will appear FROM the selected vehicle TO the reference vehicle.
To switch the TO and FROM locations, click Swap (). For more options based on travel modes and departure times, click to open the directions in Google Maps.
On the Directions tab, choose a phone number / email address (if listed), or enter a new phone number or email address.
Enter an Address
For best results, format addresses according to Google's address entry guidelines (e.g., 1234 Main Street, City, State Zip). Places (i.e., restaurant names, places of business) are not typically recognized in the address search.
To find a vehicle by address:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want use as the reference point.
You can also use an address (search bar), landmark, or dropped pin as a reference point.
Click Directions.
Click Enter an Address.
In the To box, enter a street address or geocoded value (latitude/longitude).
Click OK.
Directions will appear FROM the reference vehicle TO the destination.
To switch the TO and FROM locations, click Swap (). For more options based on travel modes and departure times, click to open the directions in Google Maps.
On the Directions tab, choose a phone number / email address (if listed), or enter a new phone number or email address.
Clicking from a Dropped Pin, Another Vehicle, or a Landmark
In addition to finding the closest vehicle or entering a physical address, you can get directions to/from the following items on the map:
Dropped Pin: Use the Map toolbar to drop a pin and drag it anywhere on the map.
Use the following steps for any of the above destinations:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle you want use as the reference point.
You can also use an address (search bar), landmark, or dropped pin as a reference point.
Click Directions.
Using the map, click on a dropped pin, another vehicle, or a landmark.
Directions will appear FROM the reference vehicle TO the destination.
To switch the TO and FROM locations, click Swap (). For more options based on travel modes and departure times, click to open the directions in Google Maps.
On the Directions tab, choose a phone number / email address (if listed), or enter a new phone number or email address.
[/toggle]
[/toggles]
[post_title] => Map Dashboard: Vehicles
[post_excerpt] => From the Map Dashboard, click the Vehicles menu item to open the Vehicles tab.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => map-dashboard-vehicles
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-06-02 10:53:15
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-06-02 17:53:15
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 299
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=353
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 226
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-01 22:20:20
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-01 22:20:20
[post_content] => Dashlet groups allow you to link two or more dashlets (where applicable). When linked, clicking on a vehicle from one dashlet updates the data in another dashlet. In the following example, clicking a vehicle from the Vehicle Selector zooms in on the vehicle's location in the Map because both dashlets use Group A.
Configure Multiple Dashlet Groups
You can configure other dashlet groups (B-H). Different dashlet groups are most often used on dashboards that have copies of the same dashlet. Up to four copies of a dashlet may be used on one dashboard.
Example
Company XYZ uses trucks to transport large heating/cooling equipment and uses vans for conducting on-site repairs. The trucks are assigned to a "Delivery" group and the vans to a "Service" group. XYZ's owner wants a side-by-side dashboard to show vehicle status and location for both groups at the same time. (Learn more about creating vehicle groups.)
To use dashboard groups
Create a new custom dashboard with two columns (see Dashboard Customization). In the Company XYZ example, we started with the "[System] 2 wide" layout and named our dashboard "XYZ Maps."
On the custom dashboard, remove the default dashlets.
From the Dashlet Control, set the New Dashlet Groups drop-down to B. Then choose the vehicle group to use. In the Company XYZ example, we chose "Delivery."
Add the following dashlets to Column 1 on the dashboard layout: Vehicle Selector and Map.
The selected dashlets automatically appear on the layout, and both are assigned to Vehicle Group B.
From the Dashlet Control, set the New Dashlet Groups drop-down to C. Then choose another vehicle group to use. In the Company XYZ example, we chose "Service."
Add the following dashlets to Column 2 on the dashboard layout: Vehicle Selector and Map.
The selected dashlets automatically appear on the layout, and both are assigned to Vehicle Group C.
Save the dashboard.
XYZ's owner can now pick a vehicle from each group and see the maps update accordingly:
[post_title] => Using Dashlet Groups
[post_excerpt] => Dashlet groups allow you to link two or more dashlets (where applicable).
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-dashlet-groups
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:49:35
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:49:35
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 202
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=226
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[8] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 299
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-02 21:27:42
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-02 21:27:42
[post_content] => The Map Dashboard is a special type of dashboard that transforms your workspace to a single 2D map with quick access to management of vehicles (2), landmarks (3), and messaging (4).
The Map (1) provides the following options. Click to turn on / turn off these features:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|85%"]
Feature, Description
Search~~,(Located above the Map Toolbar.) Enter a search term for a vehicle\, alert\, report\, landmark\, [glossary slug="Google Places"]place[/glossary]\, address\, or latitude and/or longitude coordinate (separated by a comma).
Drop Pin~~,Place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. You can then quickly dispatch to/from this location\, find the closest vehicle\, obtain lat/lon coordinates and physical address\, or create a landmark for repeated use.
Trails~~,Display one hour history trails on the map for all selected vehicles.~~~~
Landmarks~~,Display landmarks on the map.~~~~
Clusters~~,Represent more than one vehicle in a similar location with a clustered circle. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart\, clusters update accordingly. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included\, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. Colors correspond to the map legend.~~~~~~~~
Use the Plus / Minus options to adjust the aggressiveness (sizing of the clusters).~~~~
Traffic~~,Identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways\, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes\, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.~~~~
Center~~,Automatically re-size and re-adjust the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles in the view.
Points of Interest~~,Shows restaurants\, businesses\, parks\, parking\, and other points of interest.
Full Screen~~,Expand the map full screen.
Map View,Show the street map overlay (default).~~~~
Satellite View,Show the satellite image overlay.~~~~
[/et]
Use your mouse to drag-and-drop the map to move it around. Refer to the following additional options for interacting with the map:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|85%"]
Feature,Description
Zoom In~~,Click to zoom toward the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
Zoom Out~~,Click to zoom outward from the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
Street View~~,Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper-right corner to exit.) You can also invoke Street View from the Vehicle Card.~~~~
[/et]
[post_title] => Using the Map Dashboard
[post_excerpt] => The Map Dashboard is a special type of dashboard that transforms your workspace to a single 2D map with quick access to management of vehicles, landmarks, and messaging.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-map-dashboard
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:48:42
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:48:42
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 202
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=299
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 9
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 202
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-01 18:04:20
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-01 18:04:20
[post_content] => The dashboard interface allows you to arrange, customize, and share several configurations of workspaces. Moveable windows called dashlets provide at-a-glance insight into the fleet management areas that interest you most and allow you to interact with vehicle data.
Not all dashlets may be available to your account.
Review these four areas of the dashboard interface for key terminology:
[et th="0" colwidth="25%|" class="table-condensed"]
"1 - Menu Bar","Access maps, reports, other account features, menu options, user preferences, tab settings, and Help."
"2 - Dashboard Control","Modify and save dashboard layouts."
"3 - Dashlets Control","Drag-and-drop dashlets onto the dashboard layout."
"4 - Dashboard","View and interact with individual dashlets."
[/et]
When you first log into the portal, the default dashboard appears ([System] 2 wide L). You can toggle to different dashboards using the Dashboard Control (circled below). For example, the dashboard in the following figure uses a three column layout (equal widths) and six dashlets: Alerts, Vehicle Selector, Map, Quick Links, and Closest. (See Dashlets for more examples.)
Want more room on the dashboard? Minimize the control panels by clicking the arrow icon ().
The [System] Map Dashboard is a special type of dashboard that does not allow you to configure the layout.
You can rearrange individual dashlets by simply dragging-and-dropping them on the screen.
You can also minimize, configure, add, or remove dashlets using the Move , Show/Hide , Edit , Add , Copy or Close icons.
Drag a vehicle from a dashlet onto an area of the dashboard to automatically add a map dashlet that follows the selected vehicle.
Result:
Any changes you make to a dashboard will be lost the next time you refresh the screen or log in unless you save as a custom dashboard. (See Dashboard Customization.)
[post_title] => About Dashboards
[post_excerpt] => The dashboard interface allows you to arrange, customize, and share several configurations of workspaces. Moveable windows called dashlets provide at-a-glance insight into the fleet management areas that interest you most and allow you to interact with vehicle data.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => dashboards
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-24 00:52:38
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-24 07:52:38
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=202
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 9
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 0680a3515914082fc7babe7d3c15d79b
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:6f81d062a43336bd7733ea2f84c63b97
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 37
[name] => Dashboards
[slug] => dashboards
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 37
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => The dashboard interface allows you to arrange, customize, and share several configurations of workspaces. Moveable windows called dashlets provide at-a-glance insight into the fleet management areas that interest you most and allow you to interact with vehicle data.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 15
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 12
[cat_ID] => 37
[category_count] => 15
[category_description] => The dashboard interface allows you to arrange, customize, and share several configurations of workspaces. Moveable windows called dashlets provide at-a-glance insight into the fleet management areas that interest you most and allow you to interact with vehicle data.
[cat_name] => Dashboards
[category_nicename] => dashboards
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 9
)
[45] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 45
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 45
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 45
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 45
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 45
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (45)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 937
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:54:25
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:54:25
[post_content] => After you've registered vehicles within the [whitelabel_name] portal, you can optionally set up drivers and link them to certain vehicles within your fleet to enhance your reporting and messaging options. It's also a good practice to create driver groups if you plan to limit which users can see data for certain drivers.
You must have the Driver Admin permission enabled in the User Access List in order to manage users.
[post_title] => About Drivers
[post_excerpt] => After you've registered vehicles within the portal, you can you can optionally set up drivers and link them to certain vehicles within your fleet to enhance your reporting and messaging options. It's also a good practice to create driver groups if you plan to limit which users can see data for certain drivers.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-drivers
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:48:19
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:48:19
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=937
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 938
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:54:52
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:54:52
[post_content] => You can create or update drivers by entering information into the web portal one at a time, or you can manage drivers in a batch process by importing data from a spreadsheet.
Enter Driver Information
Entering drivers information manually is often used when you have a small number of drivers (1-5) to register at a time.
To enter information for a new driver:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Open.
The Manage Drivers and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Driver List grid, click Driver next to Create New.
In the Add New Driver window, enter the driver details: First Name, Last Name, Reference ID, Timezone, Country, Email Address, Phone Number, and Alert Preference.
Reference ID allows you to optionally identify drivers by an ID that's understood at your company (e.g., employee ID). If you use Hours of Service, the Reference ID must match the driver's HOS ID. Timezone is used to accurately timestamp alerts received by the driver.
Click Create Driver.
A message appears to indicate the driver was successfully saved. A new driver group, "Drivers for [your username]," was also automatically created. (Click the group name from the Driver Group List grid if you want to rename it.)
Filter the Driver List grid using the new driver group to see the new driver.
If you already have data in the portal, it's a good practice to first export the data for safe-keeping so that you can restore if you later make a mistake in your import.
The maximum number of rows spreadsheet upload accepts is 1,500. If your spreadsheet has more than this number it is recommended to break it up and perform multiple uploads for each group of 1,500 until it is complete.
To add new drivers by importing from a spreadsheet:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Update/Export items using a spreadsheet.
Download one of the CSV Example templates (1, 2, or 3) next to the Create New users spreadsheet action.
Within the spreadsheet, column names appear in Row 1 and an example record appears in Row 2. Replace Row 2+ with your own data.
Fields in the Reference column on the Update/Export page are required. If your spreadsheet has duplicate data rows for a reference column, such as two rows with the same driver ID, the spreadsheet upload will only import one record using the last row of data.
Available columns for driver import include: Driver Full Name OR Last Name OR Reference ID, Reference ID Update, First Name, Timezone, Email Address, Phone Number, Alert Preferences, Driver ID, Driver Group.
Driver ID refers to the identifier on a DriverID keyfob (if used). Driver Group refers to the driver group(s) to which the driver belongs. If you have multiple items within a cell, use the following delineator(s):
~ - full path for hierarchy (e.g., Company Name~East~Northeast)
: - multiple assignments (e.g., Vehicles:Drivers)
; - multiple items (e.g., red;gray)
Click File > Save.
From the portal in the Spreadsheet Actions grid, click the Create Drivers option.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names will be applied to the appropriate fields in the portal. Set any fields marked "IGNORE" to the appropriate column name.
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Valid values for reference fields will be marked with a green check box.
Click Proceed with Import.
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
From the menu at the top of the page, click Drivers to view the new drivers that were imported.
Certain Spreadsheet Upload Actions can update only one column at a time. For example, the Attribute Update process would need to be performed twice to update the Car Color then the Car Type attribute. You would choose "–Ignore--" for one of the attributes during each upload so only one was chosen. (That the column header on that particular spreadsheet is the actual Attribute Name as entered in the system. This name must be listed in the first row to designate the Attribute Name for Attribute update.) The Hierarchy Update the spreadsheet process is similar in that you would perform it twice to assign a vehicle to two different Hierarchy Trees.
[post_title] => Adding a Driver
[post_excerpt] => You can create or update drivers by entering information into the web portal one at a time, or you can manage drivers in a batch process by importing data from a spreadsheet.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-driver
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:48:24
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:48:24
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 937
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=938
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 940
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:55:41
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:55:41
[post_content] => After you create a new driver within the portal, you may want to assign that driver to a specific vehicle. Driver assignment allows you to view driver history.
You can also view driver information on reports and maps, as well as send messages using alerts, or SMS Messaging.
Assign Drivers to Vehicles
There are several ways to assign a driver to a vehicle:
Manual assignment using the portal interface
Batch assignment using the portal interface upload
Sending an SMS text message with assignment request (requires authentication)
Touching a driver keyfob to a reader in the vehicle (requires installation)
A driver may be assigned to one vehicle at a time. A new assignment to a vehicle cancels the previous assignment.
Manual Driver Assignment
Assigning drivers to vehicles manually is often used when you have a small number of assignments (1-5) at a time.
To assign a driver to a vehicle using the portal interface:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Open.
The Manage Drivers and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Driver List grid, locate the driver want to assign, and click Change Vehicle Assignment (display label shown as "not set").
You may need to filter the Driver List by Driver Group if you don't see the driver you want to modify.
The window refreshes with a list of all vehicles (Step 1).
Choose the vehicle from the drop-down, and click Assign Vehicle.
The window refreshes with a list of start date options (Step 2).
Choose the start date option that best applies, and click Select Start. Options include: Current, By Date (last 90 days), or Permanent.
Assigning this permanent driver to another vehicle will remove this driver assignment from driver history.
The window refreshes with a list of end date options (Step 3).
Choose the end date option that best applies, and click Finish Assignment. Options include: Default and By Date (last 90 days).
A message appears to indicate the assignment was successful. You can now see driver history from the Edit Vehicle Details page for the selected vehicle. Most recent history is shown first. You can also see driver labels for any associated reports and mapping details.
Batch Assignment via Spreadsheet Upload
The portal provides several options for importing and exporting data to and from a spreadsheet. You can use the import option for assigning a large batch of drivers.
To upload driver-to-vehicle mappings using the portal interface:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and then click Update/Export items using a spreadsheet.
Download one of the CSV Example templates (1, 2, or 3) next to the Assign Drivers spreadsheet action.
Within the spreadsheet, populate the remaining rows with your own data. Available columns include: VIN, Driver Full Name (or driver reference id or driver last name).
Save the spreadsheet with your changes.
From the portal in the Spreadsheet Actions grid, click the Assign Drivers option.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names (shown in the drop-downs) will be applied to the appropriate fields in the portal (shown in bold). Set any fields marked "IGNORE" to the appropriate column name.
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Valid values for reference fields will be marked with a green check box.
Click Proceed with Import.
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
Assignment via SMS
Assignment via SMS allows you to create assignments from your phone (does not require the portal interface). Before using query services, you must authorize your SMS-enabled device with your account.
To assign a driver to a vehicle using SMS:
Compose a new text message using the following syntax:
gps [vehicle label] assign [first last, or last, or RefId]
Example: gps TR-150 assign Jesse Lisson
gps - keyword that must exist in the message
[vehicle label] - substitute with the vehicle label that identifies the vehicle in the portal.
assign - keyword that must exist in the message
[first last] OR [last] OR [RefId] - substitute with the first and last name, last name only, or reference ID of the driver you want to assign.
Send the message to 477-477 (GPSGPS).
Driver Assignment via Keyfob
After Driver ID readers have been installed in your vehicles, use the following steps to assign a driver to a particular Driver ID keyfob. Each driver is assigned only one keyfob but can swipe in to many vehicles that have a Driver ID reader installed. After a driver has been assigned to a keyfob, he or she can assign themselves to a vehicle by swiping the fob onto the reader.
We offer two keyfob Driver ID solutions:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Assign DriverID keyfobs and activity.
The Manage Drivers Buttons page opens in a new browser tab.
From the DriverID List grid, click DriverID next to Register New.
In the Assign Driver Button window, choose the driver to associate with a DriverID.
The DriverIDs are available on your account after the DriverID readers have been installed. If an existing driver or DriverID is not listed, you must delete any existing assignments for that driver or DriverID.
Click Assign DriverID.
A message appears to indicate the assignment was successful.
The next time Jesse scans his keyfob into a vehicle's Driver ID reader, he will automatically be assigned to that vehicle, and all of his history will be logged to that vehicle until he scans his keyfob into a different vehicle. If Jesse had already been manually assigned to a different vehicle in the portal interface, his keyfob scan overrides the existing assignment.
Assignment via GPS Insight Manager App (iOS | Android)
The GPS Insight Manager app allows you to assign or re-assign a driver to a vehicle from the Vehicle Card on the Map. If a driver is assigned to a vehicle, you can then search for the driver in the app. You may also change a driver assigned to a vehicle. Drivers must be previously added to the Portal to appear in the list of available drivers on the app.
If you are using the QR code: The first time you tap on the QR code icon, a prompt appears stating: "'Driver Would Like to Access the Camera." Tap OK to use the QR code to assign a vehicle. If you select Don't Allow, you will not be able to scan the QR code and you are returned to the Vehicle Assignment screen. If you would like to enable camera access to the Driver App at a later time, you can make this change in your phone settings.
*If you would like your drivers to use the QR code scan method, you must have QR stickers created that are unique to each vehicle (associated with VIN or Vehicle ID) and affixed to the vehicle.
If you have entered a vehicle ID in the text field (Option 1), tap Assign.
Assignment Push via Driveri Visual Login System (VLS)
For driver assignment via Driveri Visual Login System (VLS), assignments are pushed from the Driveri platform to the Fleet Tracking platform.
To enable Driveri Visual Login, the customer account must have the Driveri add-on product and Admin users with Driveri permissions will follow the instructions provided in the Driveri Visual Login System article and enable the feature from the Driveri Integration page in the Fleet Tracking Portal with the directions below.
How to enable the Driveri VLS Driver Assingment Integration:
After logging in to the Fleet Tracking Portal with valid credentials, navigate to the Classic Portal.
The Classic Portal displays.
Hover your mouse over or click More.
From the drop-down menu, click Driveri Cameras then click Vehicle and Driver Integration.
The Driveri Integration page appears.
In the Configuration Options section, check the checkbox next to "Sync Driver Assignments".
The VLS Integration is enabled.
Driveri Visual Login System (VLS) Notes
VLS today is ~80% accurate to start, but will continue to become more accurate as time goes on with Artificial Intelligence (AI)
To utilize VLS, drivers will need to record at minimum 40 hours of active and assigned drive time
Drive time can be assigned manually, through the Driveri app, or using fobs to accomplish this system “training”
In order to train the system, two or more drivers must be trained in tandem. The system will fail to train on a single driver as it will not have other facial features available for comparison.
Once the system is trained on the driver, a recommended best practice is for fleet managers to review unassigned drive time on a weekly or monthly basis to ensure drive time and data are assigned correctly and advance AI learning of the system so that future assignments are captured automatically
If users have both ELD and Driveri, then ELD driver assignments will always be reflected in the system.
[post_title] => Assigning a Driver to a Vehicle
[post_excerpt] => After you create a new driver within the portal, you may want to assign that driver to a specific vehicle.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => assigning-a-driver-to-a-vehicle
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-02-05 10:44:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-02-05 17:44:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 937
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=940
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1039
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-28 17:17:38
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-28 17:17:38
[post_content] => The Manage Drivers and Groups page provides a comprehensive view of the information for drivers and allows you to edit details. You can also update driver settings by way of spreadsheet import.
Filter the Driver List
If your user list is long, you can use filter options to isolate a subset of drivers.
To filter the driver list:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Open.
The Manage Drivers and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
Choose from the following filter options:
Show Deleted: Show only drivers whose records have been deleted from the account.
Blocked Phone Numbers: Show only drivers who have replied "STOP" to any incoming 477-477 message. (In order to remove a stop request, contact Support.)
Driver Group: Show only drivers who belong to a selected group.
Search: Vehicles that match a description. Use * as a wild card before or after a string of characters.
Show All Select the check box to show all records on a single page (may take more time to load).
Click Filter.
The driver list shows only the drivers that match your filter criteria.
Edit Driver Details
Editing driver details allows you to modify details about the drivers's profile, such as timezone or email address. The Manage Drivers and Groups page also allows you to manage driver group membership and driver assignment.
To edit driver details:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Open.
The Manage Drivers and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
You can also export driver information from the bottom of this page or update user details in a batch process using spreadsheet import.
Locate the driver you want to modify, and click Edit ()
When finished modifying Drivers details, click Save Changes.
[post_title] => Editing a Driver
[post_excerpt] => The Manage Drivers and Groups page provides a comprehensive view of the information for drivers and allows you to edit details. You can also update driver settings by way of spreadsheet import.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-a-driver
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:48:31
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:48:31
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 937
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1039
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 22713
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-05-12 13:13:52
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-05-12 20:13:52
[post_content] => Drivers remain assigned to vehicles until they manually log out, are manually unassigned, or are reassigned to another vehicle. If you prefer to have drivers automatically logged out nightly, you can do so by selecting the following in the classic Portal:
Unassign Drivers Nightly – At the end of every workday, the driver will be unassigned from their vehicle.
To enable the Unassign Drivers Nightly feature:
Navigate to the Legacy Dashboard
Click the wrench icon () in the top-right for Dashboard Options
Check the box labeled Unassign Drivers Nightly
Confirm the driver unassignment warning pop-up.
Click Apply at the bottom of the window (The portal will refresh).
On the main dashboard menu:
Navigate to Account -> Manage Drivers
Under Additional Options, click Exempt Drivers from Nightly Unassignment
On the Manage Nightly Exemptions page
Selected drivers will not be logged out at the end of each day.
Select individual drivers from the table with the checkbox on the right side.
Filter by driver group, Clear All, Exempt All usability features available.
[post_title] => Nightly Driver Unassignment
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => nightly-driver-unassignment
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2021-05-13 09:48:54
[post_modified_gmt] => 2021-05-13 16:48:54
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 937
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22713
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 939
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:55:17
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:55:17
[post_content] => Driver groups are used to organize the drivers based on logical separations that make sense to your business. Groups allow you to easily filter reports, maps, and dashlets. Groups also as determine which users of your account can view information for certain drivers.
Add Driver Groups
You can create any number of driver groups. For each group you create, you can assign drivers and users to that group. Drivers and users can belong to more than one driver group.
Example
Company XYZ uses trucks to transport large heating/cooling equipment and uses vans for conducting on-site repairs. Drivers that are qualified to operate the trucks are assigned to a "Delivery" group. Drivers that specialize in service are assigned to a "Service" group. Some drivers are qualified to conduct deliveries and make on-site repairs, so they are assigned to both groups. XYZ's owner wants his Service Manager, Tom Jones, to only see drivers that belong to the "Service" group when Tom accesses the portal.
To create a new driver group:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Open.
The Manage Drivers and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Driver Group List grid, click Driver Group next to Create New.
In the Create New Driver Group window, enter a name for the group.
Click Create Group.
The window refreshes with a list of all drivers. By default none of your drivers are included in the new group.
From the right pane (Drivers NOT in the group), click to select the driver(s) to add to the new group. (CTRL+click or SHIFT+click to select more than one driver at a time.)
Click Add.
Click Save Changes.
The window refreshes with a list of all users. By default your username is included in the group.
From the right pane (Users with NO ACCESS to the group), click to select the users to add to the new group. (CTRL+click or SHIFT+click to select more than one user at a time.)
Click Add.
Click Save Changes and then Close to return to the Manage Drivers and Groups page.
If you skipped a user by mistake, or if you would like to manage user access after the initial setup, you can do so from the Users administration page.
Set Driver Group Membership
Each time you create a new group, you can assign driver(s) and user(s) to that group. If you skipped a driver by mistake during that process, or if you want to quickly update group membership for a specific driver after initial group creation, you can use this process.
To assign or remove a driver to/from one or more groups:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Drivers, and click Open.
The Manage Drivers and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Drivers List grid, locate the driver you want to assign to one or more driver group, and click Assign to Driver Groups (group icon ).
The window refreshes with a list of all driver groups including those groups that are already assigned to the current driver.
From the right pane (Groups driver is NOT in), CTRL+click to select the driver groups you want to assign to the current driver.
Click Add. (Or select groups from the left pane and click Remove to un-assign the current driver from groups.)
Click Save Changes to return to the Manage Drivers and Groups page.
[post_title] => Using Driver Groups
[post_excerpt] => Driver groups are used to organize the drivers based on logical separations that make sense to your business. Groups allow you to easily filter reports, maps, and dashlets. Groups also as determine which users of your account can view information for certain drivers.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-driver-groups
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:48:38
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:48:38
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 937
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=939
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 6
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 937
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:54:25
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:54:25
[post_content] => After you've registered vehicles within the [whitelabel_name] portal, you can optionally set up drivers and link them to certain vehicles within your fleet to enhance your reporting and messaging options. It's also a good practice to create driver groups if you plan to limit which users can see data for certain drivers.
You must have the Driver Admin permission enabled in the User Access List in order to manage users.
[post_title] => About Drivers
[post_excerpt] => After you've registered vehicles within the portal, you can you can optionally set up drivers and link them to certain vehicles within your fleet to enhance your reporting and messaging options. It's also a good practice to create driver groups if you plan to limit which users can see data for certain drivers.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-drivers
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:48:19
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:48:19
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=937
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 6
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 3cb9fba42b91f0ea56af72ca42f71533
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:1daa79d87083b06e71dd9d55f8646618
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 45
[name] => Drivers
[slug] => driver
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 45
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Drivers allow you to enhance your reporting and mapping options with driver-centric information. You can assign drivers to vehicles, create driver groups, and create driver attributes.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 8
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 9
[cat_ID] => 45
[category_count] => 8
[category_description] => Drivers allow you to enhance your reporting and mapping options with driver-centric information. You can assign drivers to vehicles, create driver groups, and create driver attributes.
[cat_name] => Drivers
[category_nicename] => driver
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 6
)
[387] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 387
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 387
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 387
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 387
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 387
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (387)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 16356
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-06-27 09:11:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-06-27 16:11:07
[post_content] => Welcome home! The Homepage is the first page you’ll see when you log into the Portal. This page will deliver critical information, including product updates and quick links to product features, and tutorials!
Features
What's New?
The What's New? section of the homepage is your direct connection to recent updates to the product! This section links to Release Notes providing new features and updates within the Portal. Click on the link to view Release Notes on the Help Center.
Task Bar
The task bar of the homepage is your direct connection to our updated Portal! This section provides links and descriptions of new features and options within the new Portal. Click on each Feature Tile to navigate directly to that section of the new Portal.
Administration
The Administration section of the homepage provides links to management features and options within the classic Portal. Until the new portal is fully integrated, you will have access to the classic portal to handle all of your fleet needs! Click on each Feature Tile to navigate directly to that section of the Classic Portal.
Popular Links
The Popular Links section provides links to different product resources you can access at any time.
Tutorials
The Tutorials section provides links to product training videos, courses, and tutorials.
Installing your GPS device is as easy as plugging in. The PNP-2000 is a non-diagnostic tracking device intended for light-duty vehicles ('95 or newer) with an OBD-II port.
Use the following link to learn how to install your device:
Navigate to the Portal and log in with your provided credentials. After you have successfully logged in, what you see is your default screen. This is the Map, it allows you to see the location of each of your vehicles on the left side of the screen and your controls are positioned on the right side of the screen.
Use the following link to learn how to use the Map:
[notification type="alert-warning" close="false" ]Mastering the Map[/notification]
Exploring Map Features
Next, you will want to explore scheduling reports, configuring alerts, and managing vehicles.
Use the following links to learn how to master the Map with helpful resources:
[notification type="alert-warning" close="false" ]Using Your Resources[/notification]
Continuing Your Education
Many self-service resources are also available on the GPS Insight Help Center such as product documentation, online help, video tutorials, product updates, Best Practices, Deep Dives, knowledgebase articles, and more.
We recommend you check out the following links to increase your knowledge:
Head over to the Portal to login with your credentials. The Portal requires Internet connection (DSL, broadband, or network connection recommended).
Meeting the Portal
Once you have logged in with your credentials, the Homepage from the new Portal is displayed by default.
Use the following link to learn how to use the Homepage and Map in the new Portal:
[notification type="alert-warning" close="false" ]Mastering the Portal[/notification]
Exploring Portal Features
Next, you will want to explore creating landmarks (also known as geofences), adding attributes, scheduling reports, configuring alerts, and using integrations from the Portal.
Use the following links to learn how to master the Portal with helpful articles, videos, and courses:
[notification type="alert-warning" close="false" ]Using Your Resources[/notification]
Continuing Your Education
Many self-service resources are also available on the GPS Insight Help Center such as product documentation, online help, video tutorials, sample reports, blog updates, frequently asked questions, quarterly webinars on new features, installation guides, knowledgebase articles, newsletters, and more.
We recommend you check out the following links to increase your knowledge:
* You will be required to log in with valid credentials to view these articles.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Getting Started
[post_excerpt] => If you need help getting started with the solution, please use this article as a starting point.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => getting-started
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-09 12:20:20
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-09 19:20:20
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14571
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 16691
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-06-26 17:33:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-06-27 00:33:50
[post_content] =>
[notification type="alert-warning" close="false" ]Meeting the Portal - New & Classic[/notification]
Once you have logged in with your credentials, the new Portal is displayed by default.
New Portal
We have a fresh, new Portal Homepage and Map for you with a new UI aimed to improve your fleet tracking experience.
Using the Portal Navigation
Use the Navigation menu on the left-hand side of the screen to navigate to the following areas in the portal: Homepage, the Map, User Preferences page or to the Help Center.
[row]
[column lg="5" md="5" sm="5" xs="5" ]
[/column]
[column lg="4" md="4" sm="4" xs="4" ]
Classic (Portal)
Home (Homepage)
Map
Dashboards
Alerts
Reports
Preferences
Help (Help Center)
[/column]
[/row]
How to navigate:
Click Home to display the Homepage, click Map to display the Map, or click User Preferences to display the User Preferences page.
How to expand or collapse the Navigation menu:
You may also expand or collapse the Navigation menu by clicking the Expand or Collapse button respectively.
How to navigate the Map:
Map Features
The Map has the following features:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|25%|60%"]
Number, Feature, Description
1,Map,Click on a vehicle or landmark on the Map to open the associated information card (appears on the right-hand side of the screen).~~~~
If any vehicles are unavailable due to unreliable data\, an Unavailable button is displayed on the Map (to the left of the Map Panel). See Unavailable List below for additional information.
1a,Map Panel,Use the Expand/Collapse button (on the right side of the Search Field) to expand or collapse the Map Controls Panel. The Map Control Panel includes the Search Field\, Map Controls/View\, and Vehicle/Landmarks List.
2,Search Field,Type a search term in the box (vehicle ID\, driver name\, landmark\, address/Point of Interest) to center the map over your query.
3,Map Controls/View,Perform basic map tasks such as dropping a pin\, sending a dispatch\, and more and set your map view preferences (e.g.\, show/hide Points of Interest\, landmarks\, traffic\, etc.).
4,Vehicles/Landmarks List,View your vehicles\, hierarchies\, vehicles groups (as selected in the Data Source Selector)\, or Landmarks.
[/et]
How to use the User Preferences page:
The link to open the User Preferences page and the User Preferences page itself are only available to users with User Admin permission.
The User Preferences page allows you to set your Dashboard preferences for measurement unit (US (Standard) or Metric), time zone, default account landing page (Homepage, Map (New!), Map (Classic) or Classic Dashboard), and side-bar theme (dark or light). Additionally, you can logout from this page.
Any preferences set in the User Preferences page will override preferences set in the Classic User Preferences tab.
How to get to the Help Center:
Click Help Center to open a new browser tab displaying the Help Center.
We are also providing access to our Classic Portal. Please see "Classic Portal" for more information.
[notification type="alert-warning" close="false" ]Using Your Resources[/notification]
Use the following links to learn how to use the new Homepage and Map with helpful articles and videos:
[notification type="alert-warning" close="false" ]Returning to Classic[/notification]
Classic Portal
If you would prefer to use the Classic Portal, you still can!
How to get back to Classic:
Simply click Back to Classic from the Navigation on the left-hand side of the screen to display the Classic Portal.
See Getting Started for tips for beginners using the Classic Portal.
[post_title] => New Homepage and Map
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => new-homepage-and-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-10-21 13:05:45
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-10-21 20:05:45
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14571
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16691
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 3
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 16356
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-06-27 09:11:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-06-27 16:11:07
[post_content] => Welcome home! The Homepage is the first page you’ll see when you log into the Portal. This page will deliver critical information, including product updates and quick links to product features, and tutorials!
Features
What's New?
The What's New? section of the homepage is your direct connection to recent updates to the product! This section links to Release Notes providing new features and updates within the Portal. Click on the link to view Release Notes on the Help Center.
Task Bar
The task bar of the homepage is your direct connection to our updated Portal! This section provides links and descriptions of new features and options within the new Portal. Click on each Feature Tile to navigate directly to that section of the new Portal.
Administration
The Administration section of the homepage provides links to management features and options within the classic Portal. Until the new portal is fully integrated, you will have access to the classic portal to handle all of your fleet needs! Click on each Feature Tile to navigate directly to that section of the Classic Portal.
Popular Links
The Popular Links section provides links to different product resources you can access at any time.
Tutorials
The Tutorials section provides links to product training videos, courses, and tutorials.
Scalable Administration – Segment your account by different divisions within the organization.
Permission-Based User Access – Allow division managers to administer their own vehicles, users, and drivers for certain nodes/branches and even manage the lower levels of the hierarchy structure itself.
Custom Reports – Design reports that include/exclude/intersect multiple trees without having to manually create groups for every combination of interest.
Quick Queries – More intuitively filter data on reports, maps, and dashlets by node/branch. (See below.)
In order to use Hierarchy, your account must have the Manage Hierarchy item enabled in the Menu Access List (Account category). Additionally, different members in your organization can have different permissions to view and/or edit different branches within hierarchies. See Hierarchy Access to learn more.
Once one or more hierarchy trees are in place, users with permissions to see the branches can use them on reports, alerts, and more:
[post_title] => About Hierarchies
[post_excerpt] => Hierarchies are designed for organizations with 100+ vehicles (Enterprise feature). Hierarchies allow you to organize your fleet using multiple branches based on function, organizational structure, geographic region, or other customer-defined methodology.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-hierarchies
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:06:32
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:06:32
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=466
[menu_order] => 15
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 969
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:24:20
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-27 00:24:20
[post_content] => You can create any number of new hierarchy trees with as many branches (or nodes) as needed. Within each hierarchy, you can add members (vehicles, drivers, landmarks, users) to the branches.
In order to create a new hierarchy tree, you must have the Hierarchy Admin permission enabled in the User Access List. To see all hierarchy trees for your account (including hierarchy trees that other users have created), you must have the All Hierarchies permission enabled. See Giving Hierarchy Admin Access to Users to learn more.
Add a New Hierarchy Tree
A hierarchy tree can be based of any logical purpose that makes sense to your company. Most companies create hierarchies based on geographical location, but other purposes might be to reflect an org chart with branches for the various departments, or to group vehicles based on type of fuel: Green (CNG, Electric, Hybrid) or Legacy (Gas, Diesel).
You can add a hierarchy manually, or you can import a hierarchy tree structure. The following steps are for adding a hierarchy manually.
Example
Company XYZ has several dispatch facilities in Arizona and Minnesota. XYZ's owner wants to easily view maps for any of the facilities--such as all Arizona vehicles or only Phoenix vehicles. He also wants an easy way to run reports so that he include/exclude metro and rural locations as needed.
To add a new hierarchy tree:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Hierarchy, and click Open.
The Manage Hierarchies page opens in a new browser tab.
Click + Create a New Hierarchy Tree.
In the New Hierarchy box, enter a hierarchy name, and click Save.
Hierarchy name is limited to 30 characters.
A message appears to indicate the hierarchy tree was successfully added.
If it's not already selected, choose the new hierarchy from the drop-down list, and click Show.
The Branches pane shows the hierarchy tree.
Right-click the tree, and click New Branch. Enter a name for the branch. In our example, we use "Arizona."
Right-click the top-level tree again (Company XYZ), and click New Branch. Enter a name for the branch. In our example, we use "Minnesota."
Now let's add multiple child branches at one time. In the Company XYZ example, we'll add all of the locations for Arizona facilities.
Right-click the appropriate sub-branch (Arizona), and click Create Multiple Branches.
In the Create Multiple Branches window, enter a list of branch names separated by a comma and/or a line break.
You can add multi-level branches at the same time using the instructions shown with Advanced input mode. The maximum number of parent nodes per branch is 62.
Click Preview.
A preview pane shows how the nodes will appear.
If you're satisfied with the preview, click Add Branches.
Continue adding child branches until your hierarchy tree is complete.
To add members to a hierarchy branch:
Click a branch in the hierarchy tree to which you want to add members. In the Company XYZ example, we'll add vehicles to our Phoenix branch.
The branch name appears in the Assigned Items pane.
From the Unassigned Items pane, locate the items you want to add to the branch.
You can filter by Vehicle Group, Landmark Group, or Driver Group. You can also use searches to narrow the selection. For example, to search for all items that have TR in their names, type "TR" in the Search box. Results filter as you type.
CTRL + click or SHIFT + click to select the items you want to add, and click Assign. Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop the items to/from the Assigned Items pane. Also, you can select items from more than one types at a time. For example, you can CTRL+click to select drivers AND vehicles to/from the Unassigned Items pane.
The selected items appear under the appropriate branch(es) in the Assigned Items pane. They are no longer available from the Unassigned Items pane because you can only assign an item to one branch per hierarchy.
Continue adding members to the appropriate branches in the hierarchy tree (e.g., users and drivers).
You can also modify hierarchy membership using the Hierarchy List grid on the Manage Vehicles and Groups page or the Manage Drivers and Groups page.
When finished creating a hierarchy, users with access to the hierarchy can immediately apply it to an available report, map, or dashlet.
Hierarchy Maintenance
If a branch within a hierarchy is deleted, any assigned items will become unassigned. Periodically it is recommended that you check the unassigned items area and assign them to a hierarchy branch to ensure the hierarchy is up to date. See above steps for adding members to a branch.
[post_title] => Adding a New Hierarchy
[post_excerpt] => You can create any number of new hierarchy trees with as many branches (or nodes) as needed. Within each hierarchy, you can add members (vehicles, drivers, landmarks, users) to the branches.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-new-hierarchy
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2021-01-25 15:06:58
[post_modified_gmt] => 2021-01-25 22:06:58
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 466
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=969
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 971
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:26:30
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-27 00:26:30
[post_content] => The administrator can give admin access to other users on the account. Specific to hierarchies, the Hierarchy Admin permission enables other users to create new hierarchies or edit individual hierarchies to which they've been given access via User Admin (see detailed steps below). Implementing a hierarchy structure with multiple department managers responsible for managing their own nodes of the hierarchy can make organizational administration and maintenance much easier.
Hierarchy Admin
To give a user admin access to manage hierarchies:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Access permissions for individual users.
The Manage User Permissions page opens in a new browser tab.
From the User Access List grid, locate the user you want to modify.
Select the check box for Hierarchy Admin.
The All Hierarchies permission allows the administrator to see all hierarchy trees for your account. This permission isn't typically given to other users because it allows them to edit the structure of the hierarchy itself, which may affect any reporting rollups at a higher level.
A manager can be given more than one hierarchy node to view.
If a user that a manager oversees has been given access to other hierarchy nodes that the manager has not been given, the manager cannot also see those vehicles.
For example, imagine there are three users that Bryan is managing. They all have access to different vehicle groups with some overlap. In this case below, Bryan could manage all of these user profiles, but he only sees Scottsdale vehicles that he's assigned. In other words, even though Bryan manages Jake's user profile, and Jake can see Mesa vehicles, Bryan does not have access to that data unless it is specifically assigned to him.
Here's what Bryan can see:
You can add data to hierarchy nodes using the Hierarchy Management page, Manage Vehicles page, Manage Drivers page, or spreadsheet upload. Drivers, Vehicles, and Users can only be assigned to one hierarchy node within each tree. They can be assigned to multiple hierarchy trees. A manager does not need to be assigned to the same hierarchy nodes that their users are assigned to.
If you ever decide to give a user the All Hierarchies permission (typically reserved for the administrator only) and then later take it away, any individual hierarchy assignments that you previously applied to that user will be removed.
After Hierarchy admin access is granted, you can also give a user access to administer Driver Admin, Vehicle Admin, and User Admin.
Keep in mind, even if a user has access to these admin features, the data the user can see within these interfaces is limited the hierarchy nodes the user has been assigned. You may have already done that all at once (above steps), or you may decide to manage that access for each feature as you get to it (see below).
You can add vehicle data to hierarchy nodes using the Hierarchy Management page, Manage Vehicles page, or spreadsheet upload. Vehicles can only be assigned to one hierarchy node within each tree. They can be assigned to multiple hierarchy trees. A manager does not need to be assigned to the same hierarchy nodes that their users are assigned to.
You can add driver data to hierarchy nodes using the Manage Drivers page or spreadsheet upload. Drivers can only be assigned to one hierarchy node within each tree. They can be assigned to multiple hierarchy trees. A manager does not need to be assigned to the same hierarchy nodes that their users are assigned to.
You can add user data to hierarchy nodes using the Manage Users page or spreadsheet upload. Users can only be assigned to one hierarchy node within each tree. They can be assigned to multiple hierarchy trees. A manager does not need to be assigned to the same hierarchy nodes that their users are assigned to.
Summary
Gives access to the data within a hierarchy:
Gives access to the interfaces within the portal that allow a user to add/edit/remove those vehicles, drivers, and users:
Gives access to administer the structure of the hierarchy itself. In other words, if an admin user adds a new employee to his team, he has the ability to assign the new user to a hierarchy node within his branch:
Notes:
If a user admin (manager) now uses the User Admin interface to create a new user, he must immediately assign that user to a hierarchy node that he has access to, or else the user admin will not be able to see that user and would have to ask the primary Admin to add this user back to the appropriate hierarchy node.
If a user admin (manager) deletes a user, driver, or vehicle, it will be deleted permanently across the application including for all users and Account Admin.
If a user admin (manager) unassigns a user, driver, or vehicle, that item temporarily goes into the unassigned area. If the user isn't assigned during the current session, the user admin will lose access to it after logout.
If a user admin (manager) deletes a branch within a hierarchy (if he has Hierarchy Admin rights), any assigned items will become unassigned. This might be one reason you should use caution when giving Hierarchy Admin permissions to managers because they can add, edit, and delete the nodes they have access to, which affects the hierarchy tree system-wide.
[post_title] => Giving Hierarchy Admin Access to Users
[post_excerpt] => The administrator can give admin access to other users on the account.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => giving-hierarchy-admin-access-to-users
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:06:03
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:06:03
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 466
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=971
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 2432
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-06-05 00:15:13
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-06-05 07:15:13
[post_content] => If you have a large organization, you may find it tedious to manually set up the hierarchy tree within the portal interface. Although there is no direct "import" button for the hierarchy tree setup (different from importing users or vehicles into the nodes), the following process helps you achieve the same result.
In order to create a new hierarchy tree, you must have the Hierarchy Admin permission enabled in the User Access List. To see all hierarchy trees for your account (including hierarchy trees that other users have created), you must have the All Hierarchies permission enabled. See Giving Hierarchy Admin Access to Users to learn more.
Example
Company XYZ has several layers in its organizational structure. The fleet manager wants to import this tree structure to streamline vehicle and user assignment.
To import a new hierarchy tree:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Hierarchy, and click Open.
The Manage Hierarchies page opens in a new browser tab.
Click + Create a New Hierarchy Tree.
In the New Hierarchy box, enter a hierarchy name, and click Save.
Hierarchy name is limited to 30 characters.
A message appears to indicate the hierarchy tree was successfully added.
If it's not already selected, choose the new hierarchy from the drop-down list, and click Show.
The Branches pane shows the hierarchy tree. There should not be any child nodes.
In Excel, create a new spreadsheet that reflects your tree structure:
Column A is actually level 1 depth, or the first child.
Columns B and C in this example (Level 1 and Level 2) are redundant and not required to have both, but we included it to show an example of a hierarchy that might be several layers deep.
Do not include apostrophes in the node names. Example, change DIRECTOR'S to DIRECTORS.
The maximum number of parent nodes per branch is 62.
Select all rows, and insert a pivot table (Insert > Pivot Table). Include all Row Labels.
From the pivot table, copy the data between the Row Labels and Grand Total (CTRL + C) to your clipboard. In Column B, right-click and choose the Past Special option to paste Values only.
In column C, denote the levels in the hierarchy using asterisks. Insert one asterisk for the first child, two for the second, three for the third, and so on.
When finished, use the CONCATENATE formula to combine the node depth with the node name (=CONCATENATE (C4,B4). Copy that formula and paste it down through the rest of Column C.
Copy (CTRL + C) the concatenated contents of Column D.
Back in the portal, right-click the top-level tree again (Company XYZ), and click Create Multiple Branches.
In the Create Multiple Branches window, change the Input Mode to Advanced.
In the New Branches box, paste the contents of your clipboard (Column D from the spreadsheet).
Click Preview to ensure the tree structure is represented accurately.
If you're satisfied with the preview, click Add Branches.
A brief pop-up window appears to indicate the number of branches added. Make note of that number and compare it with the number of rows copied from your spreadsheet to make sure they match. If you feel like you goofed somewhere, just delete the whole hierarchy, make adjustments to your spreadsheet, and create it again.
[post_title] => Importing a Hierarchy Tree Structure
[post_excerpt] => If you have a large organization, you may find it tedious to manually set up the hierarchy tree within the portal interface.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => importing-a-hierarchy-tree-structure
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2021-01-25 15:05:18
[post_modified_gmt] => 2021-01-25 22:05:18
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 466
[guid] => http://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=2432
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 972
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:26:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-27 00:26:50
[post_content] => In addition to managing user access and vehicle groupings, hierarchies also help manage distribution of information across all of the divisions, branches, and separate business units operating under an organizational umbrella. Hierarchies allow you to easily schedule reports/alerts to automatically run for the appropriate vehicles and be delivered to the appropriate individuals, including automatic escalation of violation alerts.
In order to use hierarchies for report distribution and alert escalation, you must set up the appropriate hierarchy-based attributes.
[post_title] => Report Distribution and Alert Escalation
[post_excerpt] => In addition to managing user access and vehicle groupings, hierarchies also help manage distribution of information across all of the divisions, branches, and separate business units operating under an organizational umbrella.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-hierarchies-with-alerts
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:06:18
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:06:18
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 466
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=972
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 970
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:24:56
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-27 00:24:56
[post_content] => Hierarchy report groups allow you to include, exclude, and intersect different branches from one or more hierarchies, which you can use to filter maps and report--for example, "All Public Works vehicles excluding Solid Waste, including Maintenance, and ONLY Ford models."
You can create hierarchy report groups on-the-fly when running maps and reports ("CREATE NEW CUSTOM SELECTION"), or you can save a few groups in advance so that they are ready for use at a later time.
Example
Company XYZ has several dispatch facilities in Arizona and Minnesota. XYZ's owner wants to run a report to view fleet usage for all Arizona vehicles (excluding rural locations) for Delivery vehicles only (not Service). This example requires two hierarchy trees--one created for geography (Arizona, Minnesota), and one created for function (Delivery, Service).
To create a hierarchy report group
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Hierarchy, and click Configure custom hierarchy report groups.
The Hierarchy Report Group page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Hierarchy Trees pane, if the hierarchy you want is not already shown, click the drop-down to select the hierarchy tree you want to modify, and click Show.
Expand the hierarchy tree to expose the branches you want to target for this report group.
Drag the appropriate branches into the Include in Report box, and drop them when green check mark appears. In the Company XYZ example, we included the entire "Arizona" node.
Drag the appropriate branches into the Exclude from Report box, and drop them when the green check mark appears. In the Company XYZ example, we want to exclude rural locations in Arizona such as "Globe" and "Williamson."
From the hierarchy drop-down list, choose a different hierarchy tree (e.g., Function), and click Show.
Expand the hierarchy tree to expose the branches you want to intersect.
Drag the appropriate branches into the Intersection in Report box, and drop them when the green check mark appears. In the Company XYZ example, we want to include only "Delivery" vehicles from the total selection.
When finished modifying the details of the report group, enter a Group Name, and click Save.
The next time you view a map or run a report, this hierarchy group will be available to choose. In the Company XYZ example, the owner ran a fleet utilization report to show data for his Delivery vehicles in metro Arizona locations:
[post_title] => Using Custom Report Groups
[post_excerpt] => Hierarchy report groups allow you to include, exclude, and intersect different branches from one or more hierarchies, which you can use to filter maps and report.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-a-hierarchy-in-a-map-or-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:06:12
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:06:12
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 466
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=970
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 6
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 466
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-22 22:29:03
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-23 05:29:03
[post_content] => Hierarchies are designed for organizations with 100+ vehicles (Enterprise feature). Hierarchies allow you to organize your fleet using multiple branches based on function, organizational structure, geographic region, or other customer-defined methodology. This level of organization through hierarchies provides the following benefits:
Scalable Administration – Segment your account by different divisions within the organization.
Permission-Based User Access – Allow division managers to administer their own vehicles, users, and drivers for certain nodes/branches and even manage the lower levels of the hierarchy structure itself.
Custom Reports – Design reports that include/exclude/intersect multiple trees without having to manually create groups for every combination of interest.
Quick Queries – More intuitively filter data on reports, maps, and dashlets by node/branch. (See below.)
In order to use Hierarchy, your account must have the Manage Hierarchy item enabled in the Menu Access List (Account category). Additionally, different members in your organization can have different permissions to view and/or edit different branches within hierarchies. See Hierarchy Access to learn more.
The GPS portal is capable of sending and receiving integration data using a variety of secure methods, such as Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) and webhooks (event-based push). This data exchange saves considerable time by automating time-consuming, manual tasks. Examples include:
Preventative Maintenance – Odometer and DTC data sent to an asset management system.
Programmatic Registration – On-boarded or removed vehicle data sent to the GPS portal.
Driver Assignment – Driver assignment or user data from SAP or an asset management system to the GPS portal.
Landmark Creation – Job data from SAP to the GPS portal.
Payroll Validation – Hours vehicles spend on jobsites sent to SAP.
Fuel Spend Aggregation – Fuel card data sent to SAP or an asset management system.
An application programming interface (API) specifies how software components interact with each other. The portal's API communicates via XML or JSON to push your fleet's data (e.g., odometer reading, location, engine hours) from our system to your back-end systems (e.g., ERP, Dispatch, CRM).
Webhooks are part of our API and offer a simple way to get events in our system—such as a vehicle's location or a vehicle entering a landmark—pushed to your system as they occur. We push data by making an HTTP POST to a URL you've configured with us for an event.
In addition to APIs and webhooks for custom integration projects, you can leverage integrations already set up for specific purposes, such as fuel card integration, Multispeak, and third-party providers like ServiceTitan and Fleetio.
More details about our API v2, including step-by-step instructions and example requests/responses, are available at gpsinsight.com/apidocs. Customers can also contribute to our API documentation via GitHub.
How to Add an Integration
The following section provides information on how to add an integration to the GPS Fleet Tracking software system from the Advanced Administration (Classic) Portal.
Please ask your account manager if you're looking for a specific integration not listed below. Some providers require a signed release form for permission to transfer location data.
To configure ServiceTitan integration:
You must complete a ServiceTitan API Authorization Form and send it to your ServiceTitan representative, who will then provide the required API key.
Click the user profile in the top right, then click Settings.
From the list of Integrations, click Gps.
Click Add Provider.
In the Account Details tab (Edit Gps Provider form), choose the provider name (GPS Insight), enter the AccountId of your GPS account, and click Save.
Click the Devices tab, add your vehicles using their VIN, and click Save. Ensure the vehicle VIN in the GPS portal matches the VIN entered here.
From the portal, click the More menu, then click Integrations.
Click Add Integration.
From the list of Available Integrations, click Service Titan.
Enter the API Key provided by ServiceTitan.
Click Save.
When you click the integration, additional information is provided for Status and Total Messages, along with an option to delete the integration. Integration should go live within a few minutes — check the Dispatch menu in ServiceTitan to see updated vehicle locations as they report.
To configure Fleetio integration:
Before starting, ensure the vehicles' VINs in the GPS portal match the VINs in the Fleetio system. You'll also need to generate a new API token from Fleetio (main menu > API Keys).
From the portal, click the More menu, click Integrations, and click Add Integration.
Under Available Integrations, click the Fleetio button.
Enter the required properties in the Edit Integration window:
API Key – Enter the API key provided by Fleetio.
Account Id – Enter the Account ID provided by Fleetio.
Update Odometer – Select to integrate odometer updates (optional).
Diagnostic Trouble Codes – Select to integrate DTCs (optional).
Click Save.
The Fleetio integration displays in the list of current integrations for your account.
Generate reports on all fuel card transactions to calculate MPG data, flag activity where a vehicle wasn't present for an associated purchase, and identify non-fuel purchases.
Requires an API Key and Account ID. Optionally select Update Odometer and/or Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Terminal
Insurance Telematics Data Partner
Requires customer opt-in and a secure, account-scoped API token. Access is read-only and can be revoked at any time. Connecting does not guarantee carrier approval or insurance discounts.
TruckerCloud
Insurance Telematics Data Partner
Requires customer opt-in and a secure, account-scoped API token. Access is read-only and can be revoked at any time. Connecting does not guarantee carrier approval or insurance discounts.
[/whitelabel]
[post_title] => About Integrations
[post_excerpt] => The GPS portal is capable of sending and receiving integration data using a variety of secure methods, such as Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) and webhooks (event-based push). This data exchange saves considerable time by automating time-consuming, manual tasks.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-integrations
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-24 18:44:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-25 01:44:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=545
[menu_order] => 14
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 871
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-11 15:47:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-11 15:47:40
[post_content] => An application programming interface (API) specifies how some software components should interact with each other. The portal's API provides a form of communication via XML or JSON coding language to push your fleet’s data (e.g., odometer reading, location, engine hours, etc.) from our system to your back-end systems (e.g., ERP, Dispatch, CRM). By using our API you can effortlessly integrate your fleet’s data into your back-end systems to provide transparency into payroll, fuel card transactions, additional documentation, asset management, and more.
Please create an API user with the appropriate vehicle access and permissions to use for APIs only. Password changes break the API data from flowing. For tokens, using an API App offers the following benefits: It does not allow access to the Portal site, it can be changed or deactivated by admin users, and app usage can be better tracked.
[well]
Think of our API as a pantry full of ingredients. All you have to do is create the recipes! [/well]
More details about our API v2, including step-by-step instructions and example requests/responses, are available here: https://apidocs.gpsinsight.com/#/.
Did you know that our customers can contribute to our API documentation? If they have examples of interesting implementations, they can submit them via GitHub.
Specific Integrations
Some API integrations have already been defined. To extend the kitchen analogy, the recipe for these types of integrations has not only been created, but the dish is served up and fully baked for you.
Dossier DCloud
GPS Insight integration with Dossier provides Odometer and Engine Hours (automatic updating of meter data) and Diagnostic Trouble Codes (automatic import and processing of vehicle DTCs to create a work request).
To set up units and schedule them for data transmission:
Configure each on-board unit that will receive GPS data by selecting the desired services on the Dossier On-Board tab of the Unit Control Form.
After a unit is configured to receive GPS data, click the Unit Info tab, and then click External Identifiers.
In the External Identifier window, identify the external identifier to use (e.g., Meter Readings or DTCs), and then add the Serial Number from the GPS device. You can create an external identifier entry for each type; both use the same Serial Number for the unit.
Under the Configuration menu, open the Scheduler.
Under the Schedule Configuration tab, select the [Provider] Enabled check box.
Populate the User Name and App Token fields from the GPS portal.
To obtain an App Token, log into the GPS portal. From the Menu Bar, hover over the Account menu, point to Manage Users, and click Third-party access to api V2 functions. In the API Apps List grid, click API App next to Create New. In the New API App window, enter an App Name and Description, and click Save API App. A new App Token is generated. For more information about app tokens, refer to the API documentation.
The content and instructions included in this article pertain to the Classic Portal.
Customer sites provides an API functionality that allows you to embed the HTML for a map with specific vehicle groups and/or landmarks on your own web server for visibility outside of the portal. Additionally, a KML flat file is provided via link for external integrations (e.g., ArcGIS). This feature allows your customers to view limited information about your vehicle locations without requiring the viewers to log in.
In order to use Customer Sites, you must have the Customer Sites item enabled in the Menu Access List (Custom category).
Example
Company XYZ wants to post vehicle locations for their delivery vehicles on their public website so their customers can see when a delivery truck is in their zone.
To create and share a customer site:
From the portal, click the More menu, click Customer Sites, and click Open.
The Manager Customer Sites page opens in a new browser tab.
In the Customer Site List grid, click Customer Site next to Create New.
In the New Customer Site window, enter the name of the site, and click Create Site.
The list of vehicles that belong to this customer site appears (no vehicles have yet been added).
From the right pane, CTRL + click to select the vehicle group(s) you want to add, and click Add.
Click Save Changes.
In the Customer Site List grid, click the Share icon next to the site.
In the Shared Link / HTML grid, copy the shared link OR copy and paste the HTML code in the box to your server to embed the map into your website.
To create and share a customer site for external integrations:
Follow steps #1-6 provided under To create and share a customer site.
Click on the link in the box next to KML:.
A flat file containing the KML downloads for you to use in an external integration.
[post_title] => Customer Sites
[post_excerpt] => Customer sites provides an API functionality that allows you to embed the HTML for a map with specific vehicle groups and/or landmarks on your own web server for visibility outside of the portal.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-customer-sites
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-07-30 09:27:00
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-07-30 16:27:00
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 545
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1338
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24732
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-04-20 09:27:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-04-20 16:27:50
[post_content] =>
Customers with Epicor have an on-premises BisTrack server implementation. With our integration, their server's address is configured as a destination for location alerts from our Portal. This custom setup needs to be done once before they start pushing alerts to their BisTrack server.
How to Set Up EPICOR Integration
Send a request to your Epicor account representative asking for "Geo-Fence push notifications be enabled."
Epicor reaches out to our team directly with the details needed for the integration.
Our team completes the setup and confirms it directly with Epicor. This typically takes 1–2 business days from when Epicor makes the request.
Match your vehicles in BisTrack (see Matching Vehicles in BisTrack below).
Configure Landmark Alerts in the Portal. Enter the word PUSH in the Email Notification field (the addresses field in Classic) for each alert covering the vehicles and landmark groups you want reported to BisTrack.
The integration is complete. As alerts are generated in our Portal, the configured alerts will be sent directly to your Epicor BisTrack server.
Matching Vehicles in BisTrack
For BisTrack to update a Delivery from a GPS Fleet Tracking alert, it needs to find the matching vehicle. BisTrack looks up vehicles using the Registration field.
The Registration value on each BisTrack Vehicle must be an exact match to the VIN registered with us. Extra spaces, missing characters, or a license plate number in place of the VIN will prevent the match.
To confirm your vehicles are matched:
In BisTrack, open the Audit Log.
For each VIN listed, open or create the matching Vehicle in BisTrack and update the Registration field to the exact VIN.
Look for entries that read "No vehicle found in BisTrack with registration [VIN]."
📝 Note: If a listed vehicle is not used on BisTrack Deliveries, no action is needed.
The integration is complete. As alerts are generated in the Portal, the configured alerts are sent directly to your Epicor BisTrack server.
How Deliveries are Updated
Once a vehicle is matched and assigned to a Delivery in the correct status, BisTrack automatically updates that Delivery when a Landmark Alert is triggered.
Need help?
For BisTrack Vehicle setup or Delivery operations: Submit an EpicCare Case, and BisTrack Support will assist.
For Landmark Alerts or Portal questions: Contact GPS Fleet Tracking Support.
[post_title] => EPICOR/BisTrack Integration
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => epicor-bistrack-integration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-10-05 06:32:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-10-05 13:32:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24732
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 872
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-11 15:49:15
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-11 15:49:15
[post_content] => [whitelabel key="gpsi,smartfleet,monarch,liveviewgps,responsible,cmd"]Fuel Card Integration is available with many popular fuel card vendors. Integrating fuel card data directly into the portal gives you more control over your fuel spending and analysis. [/whitelabel]Fuel card customers can generate reports on all fuel card transactions, which allows you to calculate MPG data, see flagged activity where a specified vehicle was not present for the associated purchase transaction, and identify non-fuel purchases. The following fuel card reports are available:
Fuel Transactions – Detailed fuel card purchases to help identify fuel card fraud
Fuel Usage – Summarized fuel card usage and MPG
Mileage - Vehicle mileage and fuel transactions organized by state
Voyage Fuel Card Integration requires prior approval from executive management
Fuel Card Partner Companies
FleetCor, Voyager, and WEX have many brands of fuel cards, refer to the tabs below to see supported brands.
[tabs class="yourcustomclass"]
[tab title="FleetCor Fuel Cards" active="active"]
Universal Premium MasterCard, Fuelman Advantage Platinum MasterCard, Universal Advantage Voyager, Fuelman Advantage Local Diesel, Fuelman Commercial Advantage, Fuelman Discount Advantage, Fuelman Diesel Advantage, BP Business Solutions MasterCard, BP Business Solutions, BP Business Solutions Plus, Chevron & Texaco Universal Business MasterCard, Chevron & Texaco Business Card, Chevron & Texaco Diesel Advantage, ARCO Business Solutions, Comdata MasterCard, Comdata Proprietary, Kwik Trip Business Plus MasterCard, Kwik Trip Extended Fleet, Universal Platinum Candada MasterCard, HuskyPro MasterCard, Ultramar MasterCard, Chevron Business Card Canada
Integration is NOT available on the following cards: Pacific Pride-branded cards, Shell Fleet Navigator, CFN-branded cards, FDR.
[/tab]
[tab title="Voyager Fuel Cards"]
Beck Oil, Inc., Cenex, Christensen, Inc., Colonial Industries, Inc., Cosby Fuels, CountryMark, Cruise Americard, CSI global fleet, Davison Fuels & Oil, LLC, Downs Energy, Ed Staub & Sons Petroleum, Inc., Eugene Truck Haven (Truck N Travel), Fleet Fuels, Fuel Express, Gate Petroleum, Global Fleet, Impac Fleet, Jubitz Corporation, Lard Oil, LeasePlan USA, Mansfield Energy, Multi Service Fuel Card, P-Fleet, Pinnacle Petroleum, Parkland, Quality Oil Company, Quarles Petroleum, Reeder Distributors, Inc., Van Manen Petroleum Group, Rhoads Energy, River City Petroleum, SC Fuels, Senergy Petroleum, Sprague Energy, Stuck Enterprises, World Kinect Energy Services, Woodford Oil Company
[/tab]
[tab title="WEX Fuel Cards"]
Small & Large Business Fleet: WEX Fleet Card, WEX FlexCard, WEX Fleet Cross Roads Card, 7-Eleven Speedway Business Fleet Card, 7-Eleven Speedway Business Universal Card, Chevron and Texaco Business Access (Flex) Card, Chevron and Texaco Business Access Card, Chevron and Texaco Business Card, Circle K Fleet Card, Circle K Universal Card, CITGO Fleet Card, CITGO Fleet Select Card, CITGO Fleet Universal Card, DK Fleet Card, DK Universal Fleet Card, Exxon Mobil BusinessPro™ Card Private Label, Exxon Mobil BusinessPro™ Card Universal, GetGo® Fleet Regional Card, GetGo® Fleet Universal Card, Gulf Business Fuel Card, Gulf Commercial Fleet Services Card, Gulf Universal Fleet Card, Irving Commercial Card, Kum & Go Fleet Card, MAPCO Fleet Advantage Universal Card, Marathon Fleet Card, Marathon Universal Card, Maverik Fleet Card, Meijer Universal Fleet Card, Murphy USA Universal Card, Phillips 66® Conoco® 76® Business Fleet Card, Phillips 66® Conoco® 76® Business Universal Card, QuickChek Universal Fleet, QuikTrip Fleetmaster Card, QuikTrip Fleetmaster Plus Card, RaceTrac Elite Card, RaceTrac Universal Card, Royal Farms Fleet Card, Royal Farms Universal Card, Sheetz Business Edge Loyalty (Flex), Sheetz Business Edge Loyalty Card, Sheetz Business Edge Nationwide (Flex), Sheetz Business Edge Nationwide Card, Shell Card Business, Shell Card Business Flex™, Sinclair Fleet Track Card, Sunoco Business Fleet Card, Sunoco Fleet Universal Card, Tesoro Universal Fleet Card, Thorntons FleetWorks Card, Thorntons FleetWorks Nationwide Card, Valero Fleet Card, Valero Fleet Plus Card, Wawa Fleet Card, Wawa Flex Fleet Card, Wawa Flex Universal Card, Wawa Universal Card
Government Fleet: State of Alabama Fleet Card (AL), Sourcewell Fleet Card (Formerly NJPA Fleet Card) (AK, DE, HI, MD, MS, ND, OH, OK, SC, SD, TX, UT, VA, WV), State of Arizona Fuel Card (AZ), Arkansas Fleet Card (AR), WEX Fleet (CA, CO, CT, GA, KS, LA, ME, NE, NJ, NV, NH, NY, NC, OR, RI, TN, VT, WA, WI), State of Florida Fleet Card (FL), State of Idaho Fleet Card (ID), State of Illinois Fleet Card (IL), The State of Indiana (IN), Iowa Depoartment of Transportation Fleet Card (IA), Kentucky (KY), The Commonwealth of Massachusetts (MA), State of Michigan MiDEAL (MI), Minnesota (MN), State of Missouri (MO), State of Montana (MT), The State of New Mexico (NM), Pennsylvania (PA), Wyoming (WY)
[/tab]
[/tabs]
If you're interested in using fuel card integration, contact your Account Manager or Support. The setup process varies by fuel card provider.
WEX - Customers of WEX fuel cards only need to forward us the following information:
[well]
COMPANY
Contact name
Contact email
WEX Account Number: XXXX-XX-XXXXXX-X
[/well]
All other fuel providers require that you complete a data release form and submit it back to them:
[/well]
[post_title] => Fuel Card Integration
[post_excerpt] => Fuel Card Integration is available with many popular fuel card vendors.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => fuel-card-integration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-02-12 08:30:00
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-02-12 15:30:00
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 545
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=872
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 870
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-11 15:44:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-11 15:44:09
[post_content] => This document outlines the necessary steps to complete a successful integration of [whitelabel_name] AVL data with your Multispeak 4.0 compatible Milsoft DisSPatch OMS product and NISC with Multispeak 4.1 using AVLChangedNotification. There are a few things you need to do as a customer in the beginning, and on an ongoing basis, to ensure a successful integration. Please review the Multispeak Version 4.0 Interoperability Assertion document for more information on the pre-requisites and steps necessary to set up your integration with [whitelabel_name].
Please inform NISC that currently GPS Insight only supports the AVLChangedNotification method.
To set up the integration
In the portal, create multiple vehicle groups and evenly distribute the vehicles that will be included in the integration among those groups.
For example, if your fleet has 60 vehicles that will be part of the integration, create three vehicle groups (each containing 20 vehicles). If possible, try to evenly balance each group with comparable vehicle activity.
Do not delete these vehicle groups. Vehicles should not exist in more than one (1) of these Multispeak groups. New vehicles must be added or they will not be seen in the integration. We recommend using a Vehicle Group naming convention like the following: [Fleet Name] Vehicles Feed [Group #]. [Fleet Name] should be replaced with the name of your fleet (e.g., ABCTrucking) and [Group #] should be replaced with applicable group number (e.g., 0, 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Next, add the vehicle names and vehicle ids to your Milsoft or NISC software. (Due to limitations in the Multispeak protocol, we are unable to do this automatically.) The unique vehicle id for each vehicle will be the last eight digits of the vehicle VIN. The full vehicle VIN must exist in the portal, and the vehicle must be in your chosen vehicle group. For instance, if the vehicle is described as Repair Trucks #4 and the VIN is 1FTMF1EM2DKE45854, enter Repair Truck #4 and DKE45854 into the Milsoft or NISC system.
Please note that, on an ongoing basis, as you add new vehicles to your account in the portal, you must repeat this process to add the vehicles to your Milsoft or NISC software.
Provide a customer, Milsoft or NISC contact email address to receive alerts in case of data disruption.
The SOAP API Endpoint information and credentials for your Milsoft or NISC software.
Domain or IP:
Port:
Path [default is /soap/GV_Server]:
Username:
Password:
Please contact Milsoft or NISC if you need assistance obtaining this information.
If you are blocking traffic with a firewall, please allow traffic from these IPs: 3.208.119.71 and 52.2.166.220.
Once the integration is complete, our system sends vehicle location updates once per minute, from the date and time of successful completion going forward.
[post_title] => Multispeak Version 4.0 Integration
[post_excerpt] => There are a few things you need to do as a customer in the beginning, and on an ongoing basis, to ensure a successful integration.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => multispeak-version-4-0-integration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-01-28 12:02:24
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-01-28 19:02:24
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 545
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=870
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1259
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-02-04 15:53:42
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-02-04 15:53:42
[post_content] => The following process is designed for Navistar dealers.
If you do not have a dealer account, you must enroll. When your account is created, your information appears under Telematic Account Information:
After logging into the OnCommandCenter, click the Vehicles menu.
Vehicles start appearing within 48 hours after the account has been set up and verified. Column names include: VIN, Chassis, UnitNo, FirstScan, LastScan, Latest Scanner, Year, Model,and Make.
Contact us when this process is complete, and we can enable the data flow on the GPS side.
[post_title] => Navistar TSP
[post_excerpt] => The following process is designed for Navistar dealers.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => navistar-tsp
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:05:04
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:05:04
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 545
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1259
[menu_order] => 9
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 5926
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2017-02-22 17:56:12
[post_date_gmt] => 2017-02-22 17:56:12
[post_content] => National Information Solutions Cooperative provides Outage Management Software. To integrate NISC with your GPS data, complete the following steps:
Create a new [whitelabel_name] portal user for NISC. Be sure to allow the NISC user to view all applicable vehicle groups, but remove all other privileges from the user, such as reports, mapping, etc. When finished, provide NISC with [whitelabel_name] user credentials.
Inform NISC that [whitelabel_name] is Multispeak compatible and can be integrated with Multispeak 4.1 using AVLChangedNotification.
Integrated location data is available not only in NISC's billing software (CCB), but is also available in their mapping (MapWis), Outage (OMS), and mobile (AppSuite) applications.
[post_title] => NISC Integration
[post_excerpt] => National Information Solutions Cooperative provides Outage Management Software.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => nisc-integration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:04:55
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:04:55
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 545
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=5926
[menu_order] => 8
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[8] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25201
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-07-13 13:58:53
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-07-13 20:58:53
[post_content] =>
Use the instructions provided below to update your ServiceTitan integration (if applicable) as Service Titan is shutting down its v1 API.
This update must be completed by the end of July 2022.
The update to this integration is done in two parts:
Setting up the GPS Provider
Enabling the API Access
If you are an existing ServiceTitan user, please provide your GPS Fleet Tracking representative with your Tenant ID.
1. Setting up the GPS Provider
Log into your ServiceTitan account and navigate to Settings by clicking the gear in the top-right corner of the page.
From the menu on the left, click Integrations, then GPS.
On the GPS Providers screen, a line entry for GPS Insight should exist, click Edit under "Actions". If not, click Add and select "GPS Insight" from the list on the first line.
The Edit GPS Provider - GPS Insight page appears. You do not need to enter your account_id, or username and password.
Click the Devices tab and match your VINs (first column) and technician name (second column) from vehicles tracked by GPS Insight with technicians defined in ServiceTitan. Entering Memos (third column) is optional.
In the GPS Insight Portal, you can use the Manage Vehicles page to get the VINs you need to align each vehicle with their technician in ServiceTitan.
If you need to add a device, click Add Device, enter VIN (first column) and select technician name (second column) from the drop-down.
Click Save if any changes or additions were made.
2. Enabling the API Access
From your ServiceTitan account and navigate to Settings by clicking the gear in the top-right corner of the page.
From the menu on the left, click Integrations, then API Application Access.
The Manage API Application Access page appears.
Click Connect New App.
From the list, click GPS Insight Location Updates, then click Connect.
The Connect New App pop-up appears.
Use the drop-down under "Restriction by "gps_provider" for GPS Pings," select "GPS Insight (gps_provider = GPS Insight)."
The "GPS Insight (gps_provider = GPS Insight)" option is available when successfully set up during Part 1. Setting up the GPS Provider.
Click Allow Access.
An "App Connected!" message appears in a green box if successful.
Under "Application Details," click Generate next to "Client Secret".
A pop-up appears for Generate Client Secret, click Yes, Continue.
The Client Secret pop-up appears.
Click Copy next to Client Secret and leave this browser tab open.
Open a different tab in your browser and sign in to the tracking Classic Portal.
Under "Account," go to Manage Webhooks and click Open.
The Webhook Manager page appears.
In the "Available Integrations" section, click the + icon next to ServiceTitan.
In the "3rd Party Integrations" section, you'll see your existing ServiceTitan integration, now labeled "old".
A pop-up window labeled "ServiceTitan" appears. The modal that pops up asks you for the three values that we saw on the API Access page on the ServiceTitan site. You'll go back and forth between tabs to copy each one to set up the integration.
Paste the Client Secret in the "Client Secret" field that you copied from the ServiceTitan site.
Return to the ServiceTitan site and click Close from the Client Secret pop-up.
Copy the Tenant ID from the ServiceTitan site, and toggle back to the Classic Portal browser tab to paste the tenant ID into the "Tenant ID" field.
Toggle to the ServiceTitan site, copy the Client ID and toggle back to the Classic Portal browser tab to paste the client ID into the "Client ID" field.
Click Add.
The updated integration is now listed in the 3rd Party Integrations section of the Manage Webhooks page.
Verifying Functionality
You can verify the API is functioning by checking the following items: Recent Pings and Dispatch Map.
How to verify functionality via recent pings:
Returning to the ServiceTitan tab, click GPS under Integrations in the left-hand menu.
Click Edit from the "GPS Insight" line entry.
Click Pings.
You should see the dates for your technicians listed under "Recent Ping History."
How to verify functionality via dispatch map:
Returning to the ServiceTitan tab, click "Dispatch" from the top navigation.
Scroll down until you see the map.
You should see your technicians' locations on the map.
[post_title] => ServiceTitan Integration Update
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => servicetitan-integration-update
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-05-08 11:57:15
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-05-08 18:57:15
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25201
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 873
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-11 15:48:36
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-11 15:48:36
[post_content] => Webhooks are part of our API and are a simple way to get events in our system—such as a vehicle’s location or a vehicle entering a landmark—pushed to your system as they occur. We push data by making an HTTP POST to a URL that you have configured with us for an event.
Manage Webhooks
The available webhooks are listed in the Webhook Manager within the portal (Account menu > Manage Webhooks).
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Webhook,Description
Location,When a vehicle reports its location
Speed,When a vehicle reports speed >= X mph
Posted Speed,When a vehilce reports inst speed >= X mph above speed limit
Heartbeat,When a vehicle reports a heartbeat (usually once a day)
Trip Complete,When a movement trip completes
Ignition On,When a vehicle's ignition turns on
Ignition Off,When a vehicle's ignition turns off
Landmark Enter,When a vehicle enters a landmark
Landmark Leave,When a vehicle leaves a landmark
Lanmdark Change, When a vehicle enters or leaves a landmark
Idle,When a vehicle idles
Temperature, When temperature is reported
DVIR, When a DVIR event is received
Driver Assignment, When a driver is assigned to a vehicle
[/et]
You can configure a new webhook through the portal interface or through an API call.
To configure a webhook through the portal:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Webhooks, and click Open.
The Webhook Manager opens in a new browser tab.
Click the green plus sign () next to the webhook you want to create.
The Create Webhook window opens.
Enter the following properties:
URL: Enter the URL that you want to consume the feed.
Name: Enter a name used to refer to the webhook.
Content Type: Choose from json (application/json) or form (application/x-www-form-urlencoded).
Example HTTP Headers: Based on the selected content type, an example HTTP Header is provided for you.
Example POST body: Based on the selected content type, an example POST Body is provided for you.
Click Add Webhook.
The webhook is assigned an ID and appears in the Webhooks grid. Additional information is provided for Status, Queue Depth, Total Messages, and Demo. Demo allows you to trigger a test event to view a live feed of webhook messages.
Manage Third Party Integrations
In addition to webhooks, the portal can also support third-party integrations with several providers. Some providers require a signed release form for permission to transfer location data.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="18%|27%|55%"]
Provider,Software Type,Requirements
ServiceMax,Field Service Management ,Requires a Salesforce login for authorization.
Service Titan,Business Management ,Requires an API Key.
Fleetio,Fleet Management,Requires an API Key and Account Id. Choose whether or not to Update Odometer and/or Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Asana,Task Management,Requires an API Key and Vehicle Attribute.
Agile Fleet,Fuel Management,Requires an API Key and Vehicle Attribute
[/et]
Configuring ServiceTitan integration:
You must complete a ServiceTitan API Authorization Form and send to your ServiceTitan representative, who will then provide the required API key.
Before starting, ensure the vehicles' VINs in the GPS portal matches the VINs in the Asana system.
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Webhooks, and click Open.
The Webhook Manager opens in a new browser tab.
Under Available Integrations, click the green plus sign () next to Asana.
The Asana integration window appears.
Enter the required properties for the integration:
API Key: Enter API key provided by Asana.
Vehicle Attribute: Choose the attribute to integrate.
Click Add.
The third party integration(s) are assigned an ID and appears in the 3rd Party Integrations grid. There will be a separate ID for each integration type (e.g., multiple attributes). Additional information is provided for Status, Queue Depth, and Total Messages. An option to delete the integration(s) is also available.
[post_title] => Webhooks
[post_excerpt] => Webhooks are part of our API and are a simple way to get events in our system—such as a vehicle’s location or a vehicle entering a landmark—pushed to your system as they occur.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-webhooks
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-05-05 09:39:28
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-05-05 16:39:28
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 545
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=873
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 10
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 545
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-29 20:46:19
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-29 20:46:19
[post_content] =>
Overview
The GPS portal is capable of sending and receiving integration data using a variety of secure methods, such as Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) and webhooks (event-based push). This data exchange saves considerable time by automating time-consuming, manual tasks. Examples include:
Preventative Maintenance – Odometer and DTC data sent to an asset management system.
Programmatic Registration – On-boarded or removed vehicle data sent to the GPS portal.
Driver Assignment – Driver assignment or user data from SAP or an asset management system to the GPS portal.
Landmark Creation – Job data from SAP to the GPS portal.
Payroll Validation – Hours vehicles spend on jobsites sent to SAP.
Fuel Spend Aggregation – Fuel card data sent to SAP or an asset management system.
An application programming interface (API) specifies how software components interact with each other. The portal's API communicates via XML or JSON to push your fleet's data (e.g., odometer reading, location, engine hours) from our system to your back-end systems (e.g., ERP, Dispatch, CRM).
Webhooks are part of our API and offer a simple way to get events in our system—such as a vehicle's location or a vehicle entering a landmark—pushed to your system as they occur. We push data by making an HTTP POST to a URL you've configured with us for an event.
In addition to APIs and webhooks for custom integration projects, you can leverage integrations already set up for specific purposes, such as fuel card integration, Multispeak, and third-party providers like ServiceTitan and Fleetio.
More details about our API v2, including step-by-step instructions and example requests/responses, are available at gpsinsight.com/apidocs. Customers can also contribute to our API documentation via GitHub.
How to Add an Integration
The following section provides information on how to add an integration to the GPS Fleet Tracking software system from the Advanced Administration (Classic) Portal.
Please ask your account manager if you're looking for a specific integration not listed below. Some providers require a signed release form for permission to transfer location data.
To configure ServiceTitan integration:
You must complete a ServiceTitan API Authorization Form and send it to your ServiceTitan representative, who will then provide the required API key.
Click the user profile in the top right, then click Settings.
From the list of Integrations, click Gps.
Click Add Provider.
In the Account Details tab (Edit Gps Provider form), choose the provider name (GPS Insight), enter the AccountId of your GPS account, and click Save.
Click the Devices tab, add your vehicles using their VIN, and click Save. Ensure the vehicle VIN in the GPS portal matches the VIN entered here.
From the portal, click the More menu, then click Integrations.
Click Add Integration.
From the list of Available Integrations, click Service Titan.
Enter the API Key provided by ServiceTitan.
Click Save.
When you click the integration, additional information is provided for Status and Total Messages, along with an option to delete the integration. Integration should go live within a few minutes — check the Dispatch menu in ServiceTitan to see updated vehicle locations as they report.
To configure Fleetio integration:
Before starting, ensure the vehicles' VINs in the GPS portal match the VINs in the Fleetio system. You'll also need to generate a new API token from Fleetio (main menu > API Keys).
From the portal, click the More menu, click Integrations, and click Add Integration.
Under Available Integrations, click the Fleetio button.
Enter the required properties in the Edit Integration window:
API Key – Enter the API key provided by Fleetio.
Account Id – Enter the Account ID provided by Fleetio.
Update Odometer – Select to integrate odometer updates (optional).
Diagnostic Trouble Codes – Select to integrate DTCs (optional).
Click Save.
The Fleetio integration displays in the list of current integrations for your account.
Generate reports on all fuel card transactions to calculate MPG data, flag activity where a vehicle wasn't present for an associated purchase, and identify non-fuel purchases.
Requires an API Key and Account ID. Optionally select Update Odometer and/or Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Terminal
Insurance Telematics Data Partner
Requires customer opt-in and a secure, account-scoped API token. Access is read-only and can be revoked at any time. Connecting does not guarantee carrier approval or insurance discounts.
TruckerCloud
Insurance Telematics Data Partner
Requires customer opt-in and a secure, account-scoped API token. Access is read-only and can be revoked at any time. Connecting does not guarantee carrier approval or insurance discounts.
[/whitelabel]
[post_title] => About Integrations
[post_excerpt] => The GPS portal is capable of sending and receiving integration data using a variety of secure methods, such as Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) and webhooks (event-based push). This data exchange saves considerable time by automating time-consuming, manual tasks.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-integrations
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-24 18:44:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-25 01:44:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=545
[menu_order] => 14
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 10
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 29819a74df8d389d881509aee26a3b65
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:6ff9d980cb451e3340ee6d61ca306c5d
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 50
[name] => Integration
[slug] => integration
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 50
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => The portal is capable of sending and receiving integration data using a variety of secure methods, such as Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), webhooks (event-based push), and more.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 25
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 21
[cat_ID] => 50
[category_count] => 25
[category_description] => The portal is capable of sending and receiving integration data using a variety of secure methods, such as Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), webhooks (event-based push), and more.
[cat_name] => Integration
[category_nicename] => integration
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 11
)
[13] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 13
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 13
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 13
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 13
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 13
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (13)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 398
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-16 22:15:10
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-16 22:15:10
[post_content] => Landmarks (also known as geofences) determine virtual boundaries. Within the portal, you can use landmarks to trigger alerts, refine reports, filter maps, and more. They also make location labels more intuitive on maps and reports. For example, rather than seeing a long, physical address each time a vehicle returns to your company parking lot, you might instead label that landmark as "Headquarters."
The boundary that you set up for a landmark can exist as a circle or a polygon.
Circle – The default shape for a landmark boundary is a circle. The default radius is determined by your current zoom level. Circle landmarks are typically sufficient for most tasks (i.e., report labels, map filters, turn-by-turn directions, and so on).
Polygon – Polygons allow you to define a more precise boundary by tracing an outline around a specific area (up to 256* vertices). Polygon landmarks are more often used when the exclusion or inclusion of specific perimeters is important, such as when sending alerts when a vehicle enters or exits a specific location.
*Although there is no limit to the number of vertices on a polygon, there is a limit to the amount of space we have in the database to store them. (The smaller, the better.) If a polygon is uploaded with a polygon-string longer than we can store in the database, the system simplifies the points and compress it down to fit. For example, if the lat-long is specified to 11-12 points of precision, the system shortens that down to 7 points or 5 points of precision, so the total polygon-string is shorter. Also, longer polygon strings mean more operations in the code to check polygon boundaries. It is always advisable for polygons be simple with long straight lines wherever possible. With most vehicles tracking between 30-seconds to 2-minutes, there is almost never a reason to have very detailed polygons.
[solution term="basic"]Click the Landmarks menu item to open the Landmarks tab. All of your landmarks are listed on this tab.
When you click on a landmark from the list or when you click on a landmark from the map, the Landmark Card appears, which shows you the radius and latitude / longitude.
"Help! Why can't I see my landmarks on the map?" Ensure the Landmarks toggle is turned on.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
Refer to Maps to learn more about using landmarks on maps.
Refer to Reports to learn more about using landmarks in reports.
Refer to Alerts to learn more about using landmark-based alerts.[/solution]
[post_title] => About Landmarks
[post_excerpt] => Landmarks (also known as geofences) determine virtual boundaries. Within the portal, you can use landmarks to trigger alerts, refine reports, filter maps, and more.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-landmarks
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 11:16:03
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 18:16:03
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=398
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1557
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-02-24 20:05:33
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-02-24 20:05:33
[post_content] => Geographic Information System (GIS) mapping data, such as ESRI overlays, require assistance from the portal provider's IT Staff. Please contact your account manager or Customer Support for more information.
It is important to note that these are static overlays for visual reference only. If you need reportable overlay information, you would have to import KMZ/KML files via Google Earth or ESRI shape files via Google Earth Pro. Points will be converted to radius landmarks, and bounded areas will come in as landmarks with the same shape. Line data cannot be converted to landmarks.
[post_title] => Adding a GIS Overlay
[post_excerpt] => Geographic Information System (GIS) mapping data, such as ESRI overlays, require assistance from the portal provider's IT Staff.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-gis-overlay
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:51:24
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:51:24
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 398
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1557
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 144
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-11-20 18:00:19
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-11-20 18:00:19
[post_content] => [solution term="basic,standard"]You can add a landmark by drawing a new one from the Landmarks tab or from a dropped pin on the map.
Draw a New Landmark
Drawing a landmark allows you to visually specify the borders on the map surface.
To draw a new landmark:
From the menu, click Landmarks.
Click Add Landmark.
A default circle appears on the center of the map. The circle has four sizing handles on the perimeter and one moving handle in the center.
Enter a label for the landmark.
Choose the shape of the landmark (Circle or Polygon):
Circle - Re-size the radius by dragging-and-dropping one of the four sizing handles on the perimeter. (Alternatively, you can enter a custom radius in feet, miles, meters, or kilometers.) Move the circle by dragging-and-dropping the moving node. (Alternatively, you can enter a custom Lat/Lng.)
Polygon - Click on the map to start drawing a polygon shape. Drag and drop the sizing handles as needed.
Choose a Color.
Colors can help you categorize or group landmarks (e.g., set all customer sites to light orange).
Click Save.
Create a Landmark from a Pin
A dropped pin marks a temporary location based on a visual reference or an address/lat/lon. Creating a landmark from a dropped pin allows you to reuse that location again.
To create a landmark from a pin:
From the Map Toolbar, click Drop a Pin ().
Drag-and-drop the pin to the location from which you want to create a landmark.
Click Landmark.
A default circle appears on the center of the map. The circle has four sizing handles on the perimeter and one moving handle in the center.
Enter a label for the landmark.
Choose the shape of the landmark (Circle or Polygon):
Circle - Re-size the radius by dragging-and-dropping one of the four sizing handles on the perimeter. (Alternatively, you can enter a custom radius in feet, miles, meters, or kilometers.) Move the circle by dragging-and-dropping the moving node. (Alternatively, you can enter a custom Lat/Lng.)
Polygon - Click on the map to start drawing a polygon shape. Drag and drop the sizing handles as needed.
Choose a Color.
Colors can help you categorize or group landmarks (e.g., set all customer sites to light orange).
Click Save.
Create a Landmark from a Report
Any report that shows a location includes the ability to view an interactive map from the location and/or to add a landmark from the location.
To create a landmark from a report:
Next to a Location line item on a report, click the plus icon ().
The Landmark Editor opens in a new browser tab. The location selected from the report is shown on the map based on the Latitude and Longitude coordinates. The default landmark shape is a circle.
Add a Label for the landmark, and click Save.
The landmark is now available to use in relevant areas of the portal.
Return to the report, and Refresh the browser tab (F5).
The name of the landmark replaces the physical address on any relevant location line items.
[/solution][solution term="pro"]You can create landmarks by manually entering addresses into the web portal one at a time, clicking on points from web maps or reports, importing addresses from a spreadsheet, importing the KML coordinates from Google Earth, sending an SMS message via Query Services, or clicking on a point from a map in the mobile app.
Enter Landmark Locations
Entering landmark information manually is often used when you have a small number of landmarks (1-5) to add at a time.
Example
The owner at Company XYZ wants an easy way to identify the headquarters building whenever its address appears on reports. For dispatching purposes, he also wants to easily find out which of his vehicles is closest to headquarters at any given time.
To enter a new landmark location:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Edit Landmarks, and click Open.
The Edit Landmarks page opens in a new browser tab.
In the Go To Address box, enter a physical address or latitude/longitude coordinates, and click Go To Address. Alternatively, you can zoom in on the map and move map pointer () to the location you want to isolate.
The address and latitude/longitude coordinates are updated in the landmark details. The location also appears on the map with a default landmark boundary (circle).
To manually create your own landmark boundaries for the location, choose from the circle or polygon shape icons on the map. Satellite view or Street view () can also help you define more precise boundaries.
Set the different properties for the landmark:
Label: Enter the user-friendly identifier for the landmark (e.g., Headquarters). If the landmark shape is a polygon, the label will be denoted with an asterisk (*).
Address: Enter the physical address of the location you want to target. If you chose to "Go To Address," it should automatically be populated.
Reverse-Geocode: When selected, the address will automatically adjust if you choose to drag the map pointer to a different location. You may want to clear this check box if the address is correct, but you want to move the map pointer slightly.
Lat/Long: Displays the latitude and longitude coordinates for the selected location.
Radius: By default, the landmark boundary for a circle is 750 feet. To narrow or expand the boundary border, adjust the radius value. In the Company XYZ example, we changed the radius to 450 feet to make the area smaller.
Alerts are only generated for Landmarks with an area smaller than a 10,000-foot radius. Landmarks exceeding this size will be excluded from alert generation. Please review your Landmark sizes to ensure critical locations are within the alerting threshold.
Area: Displays the square miles for the selected landmark area.
Altitude: Click the drop-down to choose an altitude value (Unspecified, Low, Medium, High). This value determines how tall the landmark appears in 3D maps.
Color: Click the drop-down to choose a different color for the selected landmark area.
Attributes: Choose the attributes to apply to this landmark. (Available for Enterprise.)
Owner: If available, choose which portal user owns this landmark. Each portal user who creates landmarks has a system group called, "Landmarks by [username]."
Edit Lock: Select the box to prevent other portal users from editing the landmark properties.
Groups: In addition to the system group called "Landmarks by [username]," choose the landmark groups in which to include this landmark.
Click Save Landmark.
Any relevant system groups (i.e., "Landmarks by [username]") are populated in the Groups box. The landmark is now available to use on maps, reports, and dashlets.
Create a Landmark from a Map
Rather than start with a known address, you can create landmarks directly from vehicle locations on current and history maps.
ExampleThe owner at Company XYZ is viewing a map for the current location of his Service vehicles, and he noticed that one of his vehicles is at a new customer address that hasn't yet been added as a landmark.
To create a landmark from a map:
From a map dashlet or window, click the point at which you want to create a landmark.
From the pop-up window, click Create from point (landmark).
The Edit Landmarks page opens in a new browser tab.
Add a label for the landmark (e.g., Customer ABC), modify other properties as needed (see above), and click Save Landmark.
Rather than start with a known address, you can create landmarks directly from vehicle locations on reports.
ExampleThe owner at Company XYZ notices a non-business location that appears frequently on his reports. After reviewing the interactive map for the address, he realizes that it's the home address of one of his drivers. He wants to run a history report to find out how many times any of his fleet vehicles has visited that landmark in the last 30 days.
To create a landmark from a report:
From a report window, locate the address you want to create as a landmark.
Click Create landmark from this point (plus icon ).
The Edit Landmarks page opens in a new browser tab.
Add a label for the landmark (e.g., Sally's House), modify other properties as needed (see above), and click Save Landmark.
The landmark is now available to use on maps, reports, and dashlets. In the Company XYZ example, the owner can run the Landmark History Report using the landmark:
Import Landmarks from a Spreadsheet
The portal provides several options for importing and exporting data to and from a spreadsheet. You can use the import option for adding a large batch of landmarks. The maximum number of rows spreadsheet upload accepts is 1,500. If your spreadsheet has more than this number it is recommended to break it up and perform multiple uploads for each group of 1,500 until it is complete.
If you already have data in the portal, it's a good practice to first export the data for safe-keeping so that you can restore if you later make a mistake in your import.
To add new landmarks by importing from a spreadsheet:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Spreadsheet Import/Export, and click Open.
Within the spreadsheet, column names appear in Row 1 and an example record appears in Row 2. Replace Row 2+ with your own data.
Fields in the Reference column on the Update/Export page are required. If your spreadsheet has duplicate data rows for a reference column, such as two rows with the same landmark name, the spreadsheet upload will only import one record using the last row of data.
Available columns for landmark import include: Longitude, Latitude, Landmark Name, Address, City, State, and Zip. You must include data for the following cells: Name (reference column) and Address (required unless you input Latitude and Longitude).
Address values should include house number, street, city, state, zip code, and country. In lieu of a single "Address" column, you can optionally add separate columns for each piece of the address. Radius values can be in feet, miles, or meters. (You'll specify during the import.) If you have multiple items within a cell, use the following delineator(s):
: - multiple assignments (e.g., Vehicles:Drivers)
; - multiple items (e.g., red;gray)
Click File > Save.
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Spreadsheet Import/Export, and click Open.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names will be applied to the appropriate fields in the GPS Insight portal. Set any fields marked "IGNORE" to the appropriate column name.
If a landmark name from your spreadsheet matches the name of an existing landmark in your account, you have three options: Skip (do not import the duplicate), Alter (automatically add an ordered numeral to the duplicate), or Update (overwrite the existing landmark properties with the duplicate). The default is "Alter."
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Latitude and longitude values are automatically added for addresses. Some addresses may not be found if you used only latitude and longitude values in the spreadsheet.
Choose the group options for the import, and click Proceed with Import.
The landmarks will automatically be included in the system group, "Landmarks by [username]."
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
From the top of the screen, click Mass Update to view the new landmarks that were imported. (Filter by group.)
If you are importing a large group of landmarks, the process may take some time before the auto sync mechanism runs. If your import is time-sensitive, contact Support to request a manual sync to expedite this process.
Importing Landmarks from Google Earth
Google Earth uses Keyhole Markup Language (KML) to express geographic visualizations. GPS Insight supports import of KML (in XML notation) into the portal by way of copy and paste. See more use cases for this feature on our Executive Blog.
Example
Company XYZ uses Google Earth to identify all of its dispatch facilities. XYZ's owner wants to import all landmarks from Google Earth into the portal.
To create and import landmarks from Google Earth:
Within Google Earth, locate the area that you want to import into the portal.
Click the Polygon tool.
The Google Earth - New Polygon screen appears. (Leave this dialog open.)
On the map, click the points around the area you want to mark.
From the Google Earth - New Polygon screen, enter a name for the landmark, and click OK.
You can continue to create landmarks in Google Earth as needed. When you are ready to import the landmark(s) into the portal, proceed with the steps below.
From the Places pane in Google Earth, right-click the landmark (if individual) or the folder of landmarks (if multiple) that you want to import, and click Copy. The XML for the selected area is copied to your clipboard.
You can also right-click the selected area on the map (white space) to copy the XML of an individual landmark.
Toggle to the portal. Hover over the Mapping menu, and click KML Import.
In the Quick KML Uploader box, paste the contents of your clipboard (CTRL + V).
Click Import Now.
The Import KML Polygons page appears.
From the Step 1: Import KML grid, specify your preference for handling duplicate landmark names.
If a landmark name from the XML matches the name of an existing landmark in your account, you have two options: Skip (do not import the duplicate) or Alter (automatically add an ordered numeral to the duplicate). The default is "Alter."
From the Step 2: Define Landmarks grid, set your preferences for the following:
Existing Group: Add the imported landmarks to an existing group (select check box).
New Group: Add the imported landmarks to a new group (specify name and select check box).
Landmark: Select the check box(es) of the landmark(s) that you want to import.
Click Import checked items.
A success message indicates what landmarks were created and what landmark groups (if any).
[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]You can create landmarks by manually entering addresses into the web portal one at a time, clicking on points from web maps or reports, importing addresses from a spreadsheet, importing the KML coordinates from Google Earth, sending an SMS message via Query Services, or clicking on a point from a map in the mobile app.
Enter Landmark Locations
Entering landmark information manually is often used when you have a small number of landmarks (1-5) to add at a time.
Example
The owner at Company XYZ wants an easy way to identify the headquarters building whenever its address appears on reports. For dispatching purposes, he also wants to easily find out which of his vehicles is closest to headquarters at any given time.
To enter a new landmark location:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Edit Landmarks, and click Open.
The Edit Landmarks page opens in a new browser tab.
In the Go To Address box, enter a physical address or latitude/longitude coordinates, and click Go To Address. Alternatively, you can zoom in on the map and move map pointer () to the location you want to isolate.
The address and latitude/longitude coordinates are updated in the landmark details. The location also appears on the map with a default landmark boundary (circle).
To manually create your own landmark boundaries for the location, choose from the circle or polygon shape icons on the map. Satellite view or Street view () can also help you define more precise boundaries.
Set the different properties for the landmark:
Label: Enter the user-friendly identifier for the landmark (e.g., Headquarters). If the landmark shape is a polygon, the label will be denoted with an asterisk (*).
Address: Enter the physical address of the location you want to target. If you chose to "Go To Address," it should automatically be populated.
Reverse-Geocode: When selected, the address will automatically adjust if you choose to drag the map pointer to a different location. You may want to clear this check box if the address is correct, but you want to move the map pointer slightly.
Lat/Long: Displays the latitude and longitude coordinates for the selected location.
Radius: By default, the landmark boundary for a circle is 750 feet. To narrow or expand the boundary border, adjust the radius value. In the Company XYZ example, we changed the radius to 450 feet to make the area smaller.
Alerts are only generated for Landmarks with an area smaller than a 10,000-foot radius. Landmarks exceeding this size will be excluded from alert generation. Please review your Landmark sizes to ensure critical locations are within the alerting threshold.
Area: Displays the square miles for the selected landmark area.
Altitude: Click the drop-down to choose an altitude value (Unspecified, Low, Medium, High). This value determines how tall the landmark appears in 3D maps.
Color: Click the drop-down to choose a different color for the selected landmark area.
Attributes: Choose the attributes to apply to this landmark. (Available for Enterprise.)
Owner: If available, choose which portal user owns this landmark. Each portal user who creates landmarks has a system group called, "Landmarks by [username]."
Edit Lock: Select the box to prevent other portal users from editing the landmark properties.
Groups: In addition to the system group called "Landmarks by [username]," choose the landmark groups in which to include this landmark.
Click Save Landmark.
Any relevant system groups (i.e., "Landmarks by [username]") are populated in the Groups box. The landmark is now available to use on maps, reports, and dashlets.
Create a Landmark from a Map
Rather than start with a known address, you can create landmarks directly from vehicle locations on current and history maps.
ExampleThe owner at Company XYZ is viewing a map for the current location of his Service vehicles, and he noticed that one of his vehicles is at a new customer address that hasn't yet been added as a landmark.
To create a landmark from a map:
From a map dashlet or window, click the point at which you want to create a landmark.
From the pop-up window, click Create from point (landmark).
The Edit Landmarks page opens in a new browser tab.
Add a label for the landmark (e.g., Customer ABC), modify other properties as needed (see above), and click Save Landmark.
Rather than start with a known address, you can create landmarks directly from vehicle locations on reports.
ExampleThe owner at Company XYZ notices a non-business location that appears frequently on his reports. After reviewing the interactive map for the address, he realizes that it's the home address of one of his drivers. He wants to run a history report to find out how many times any of his fleet vehicles have visited that landmark in the last 30 days.
To create a landmark from a report:
From a report window, locate the address you want to create as a landmark.
Click Create landmark from this point (plus icon ).
The Edit Landmarks page opens in a new browser tab.
Add a label for the landmark (e.g., Sally's House), modify other properties as needed (see above), and click Save Landmark.
The landmark is now available to use on maps, reports, and dashlets. In the Company XYZ example, the owner can run the Landmark History Report using the landmark:
Import Landmarks from a Spreadsheet
The portal provides several options for importing and exporting data to and from a spreadsheet. You can use the import option for adding a large batch of landmarks. The maximum number of rows spreadsheet upload accepts is 1,500. If your spreadsheet has more than this number it is recommended to break it up and perform multiple uploads for each group of 1,500 until it is complete.
If you already have data in the portal, it's a good practice to first export the data for safe-keeping so that you can restore if you later make a mistake in your import.
To add new landmarks by importing from a spreadsheet:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Spreadsheet Import/Export, and click Open.
Within the spreadsheet, column names appear in Row 1 and an example record appears in Row 2. Replace Row 2+ with your own data.
Fields in the Reference column on the Update/Export page are required. If your spreadsheet has duplicate data rows for a reference column, such as two rows with the same landmark name, the spreadsheet upload will only import one record using the last row of data.
Available columns for landmark import include: Longitude, Latitude, Landmark Name, Address, City, State, and Zip. You must include data for the following cells: Name (reference column) and Address (required unless you input Latitude and Longitude).
Address values should include house number, street, city, state, zip code, and country. In lieu of a single "Address" column, you can optionally add separate columns for each piece of the address. Radius values can be in feet, miles, or meters. (You'll specify during the import.) If you have multiple items within a cell, use the following delineator(s):
~ - full path for hierarchy (e.g., Company Name~East~Northeast)
: - multiple assignments (e.g., Vehicles:Drivers)
; - multiple items (e.g., red;gray)
Click File > Save.
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Spreadsheet Import/Export, and click Open.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names will be applied to the appropriate fields in the GPS Insight portal. Set any fields marked "IGNORE" to the appropriate column name.
If a landmark name from your spreadsheet matches the name of an existing landmark in your account, you have three options: Skip (do not import the duplicate), Alter (automatically add an ordered numeral to the duplicate), or Update (overwrite the existing landmark properties with the duplicate). The default is "Alter."
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Latitude and longitude values are automatically added for addresses. Some addresses may not be found if you used only latitude and longitude values in the spreadsheet.
Choose the group options for the import, and click Proceed with Import.
The landmarks will automatically be included in the system group, "Landmarks by [username]."
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
From the top of the screen, click Mass Update to view the new landmarks that were imported. (Filter by group.)
If you are importing a large group of landmarks, the process may take some time before the auto sync mechanism runs. If your import is time-sensitive, contact Support to request a manual sync to expedite this process.
Importing Landmarks from Google Earth
Google Earth uses Keyhole Markup Language (KML) to express geographic visualizations. GPS Insight supports import of KML (in XML notation) into the portal by way of copy and paste. See more use cases for this feature on our Executive Blog.
Example
Company XYZ uses Google Earth to identify all of its dispatch facilities. XYZ's owner wants to import all landmarks from Google Earth into the portal.
To create and import landmarks from Google Earth:
Within Google Earth, locate the area that you want to import into the portal.
Click the Polygon tool.
The Google Earth - New Polygon screen appears. (Leave this dialog open.)
On the map, click the points around the area you want to mark.
From the Google Earth - New Polygon screen, enter a name for the landmark, and click OK.
You can continue to create landmarks in Google Earth as needed. When you are ready to import the landmark(s) into the portal, proceed with the steps below.
From the Places pane in Google Earth, right-click the landmark (if individual) or the folder of landmarks (if multiple) that you want to import, and click Copy. The XML for the selected area is copied to your clipboard.
You can also right-click the selected area on the map (white space) to copy the XML of an individual landmark.
Toggle to the portal. Hover over the Mapping menu, and click KML Import.
In the Quick KML Uploader box, paste the contents of your clipboard (CTRL + V).
Click Import Now.
The Import KML Polygons page appears.
From the Step 1: Import KML grid, specify your preference for handling duplicate landmark names.
If a landmark name from the XML matches the name of an existing landmark in your account, you have two options: Skip (do not import the duplicate) or Alter (automatically add an ordered numeral to the duplicate). The default is "Alter."
From the Step 2: Define Landmarks grid, set your preferences for the following:
Existing Group: Add the imported landmarks to an existing group (select check box).
New Group: Add the imported landmarks to a new group (specify name and select check box).
Landmark: Select the check box(es) of the landmark(s) that you want to import.
Click Import checked items.
A success message indicates what landmarks were created and what landmark groups (if any).
[/solution]
[post_title] => Adding a Landmark
[post_excerpt] => You can add a landmark by drawing a new one from the Landmarks tab or from a dropped pin on the map.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-landmark
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-04-11 07:47:27
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-04-11 14:47:27
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 398
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=144
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 146
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-11-20 18:14:34
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-11-20 18:14:34
[post_content] => [solution term="basic,standard"]You can edit landmark details or delete landmarks.
Edit Landmark Details
Any properties that you edit on the landmark will be reflected the next time you run a report or alert that uses that landmark.
To edit a landmark:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Landmarks tab, click the landmark that you want to edit.
From the Landmark Card, click Edit.
The following fields are available to modify:
[et colwidth="20%|80%" class="table-zebra"]
"Field Name","Description"
"Label","The name of the landmark."
"Circle / Polygon","The shape of the landmark."
"Color","The color used on the map to denote the landmark."
"Lat/Lng","The latitude and longitude coordinates."
"Radius","The distance from the center to the perimeter of the landmark."
[/et]
Click Save.
Delete a Landmark
When you delete a landmark, any alerts that use the landmark will be updated to instead use all landmarks.
To delete a landmark:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Landmarks tab, click the landmark that you want to delete.
From the Landmark Card, click Delete.
In the Delete Landmark pop-up window, click OK.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]The portal provides two areas for you to edit or delete a landmark: Edit Landmark page (one at a time) or the Mass Update page (multiple).
Edit a Landmark (One at a Time)
The Edit Landmark page allows you to view and edit the properties of a single landmark. If you want to resize the radius (circle landmarks), edit the lock, change the owner, edit the altitude, or edit the color of more than one landmark at a time, use the Mass Update Landmarks page.
To edit a landmark:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Edit Landmarks, and click Open.
The Edit Landmarks page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Select Landmark box, click the Landmark drop-down.
All landmarks within the selected group load within the list. To narrow the list, use the Landmark Group drop-down to filter landmarks by a particular landmark group.
From the list, click the landmark you want to edit. You may type the first letter of the landmark name to jump within the list.
Click Load Selected.
The properties for the selected landmark load, and the landmark location is visible on the map.
To view other landmarks on the map within the same landmark group, select the Show Group check box.
Modify the landmark properties as needed. You can change the landmark shape by using the tools in the map area.
Click Submit Changes.
Edit a Landmark (Mass Update)
The Mass Update page allows you to view and edit the properties of a multiple landmarks at the same time. The Mass Update page also allows you to merge landmarks. Merging landmarks allows you to resolve possible duplicates. Duplicates may occur if you or another portal user mistakenly created more than one landmark for the same location (latitude/longitude).
To edit multiple landmarks:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Edit Landmarks, and click Open.
From the menu bar on the top of the Edit Landmarks page, click Mass Update.
The Mass Update page opens in the same browser tab.
Choose from the following filter options:
Landmark Type: Landmark shape (circle or polygon).
Search: Search by landmark name. Use * as a wild card before or after a string of characters.
Min/Max Radius (ft): Enter a range in feet for the landmark radius (circle landmarks only).
Filter by Polygon: Paste the KML from Google Earth to isolate landmarks inside of a particular geographic region.
Duplicates: Show only landmarks with duplicate locations.
All: Show all landmarks.
Filter by Group: Show landmarks that belong to a particular landmark group.
Click Filter.
The vehicle list shows only the vehicles that match your filter criteria.
Choose a mass update action. The following options are available:
Merge: Merge checked landmarks (in the same duplicate-set) into the selected (radio button) landmark. For each duplicate set, the checked landmark(s) without the radio button selected will be deleted. If a deleted landmark was included in any landmark groups, the kept landmark will be added to those group(s) automatically. In the following example, DispatchCenter E (no space) will be deleted; Dispatch Center E (space) will be kept and will assume any groups to which DispatchCenter E (no space) belonged.
Resize: Set, increase, or decrease the radius of checked. Circle landmarks only. Examples: 700, -5%, +20ft, 1.25km
Lock: Lock this landmark from editing by other users.
Owner: Change the owner of a landmark
Altitude: Set the altitude value (Unspecified, Low, Medium, High). This value determines how tall the landmark appears in 3D mapping.
Color: Set the color for the selected landmark area.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Editing a Landmark
[post_excerpt] => You can edit landmark details or delete landmarks.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-a-landmark
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-24 00:47:27
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-24 07:47:27
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 398
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=146
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1084
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-02-01 18:08:17
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-02-01 18:08:17
[post_content] => Landmarks created in the portal can be exported into a KMZ file for display within 3D Google Earth. Keyhole Markup Language (KML) is an XML notation for expressing geographic annotation and visualization from Google Earth. When you run a 3D map from the portal, a new .kml file is downloaded to your computer and automatically loaded within Google Earth (represented by its own node in your "Temporary Places"). This node structure allows you to toggle on/off different places (.kml files), layered within the same Google Earth window. Google Earth saves places as KMZ files, which are zipped KML files with a .kmz extension.
Export a Landmark
You can export an individual landmark or all landmarks.
To export a landmark:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Edit Landmarks, and click Open.
The Edit Landmarks page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Select Landmark box, click the Landmark drop-down.
All landmarks within the selected group load within the list. To narrow the list, use the Landmark Group drop-down to filter landmarks by a particular landmark group.
From the list, click the landmark you want to edit. You may type the first letter of the landmark name to jump within the list.
Click Load Selected.
The properties for the selected landmark load, and the landmark location is visible on the map.
From the map, click the Export Landmark button ().
A link to the exported .kmz file appears in your browser's download bar. You can also launch it from your computer's Downloads folder.
Double-click to open the file in Google Earth.
To export all landmarks:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click 3D Download, and click Landmark Map.
A link to the exported .kmz file appears in your browser's download bar. You can also launch it from your computer's Downloads folder.
Double-click to open the file in Google Earth.
[post_title] => Exporting a Landmark
[post_excerpt] => Landmarks created in the portal can be exported into a KMZ file for display within 3D Google Earth.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => exporting-a-landmark
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:51:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:51:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 398
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1084
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1799
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-03-24 19:58:13
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-03-24 19:58:13
[post_content] => Landmark groups are used to organize your landmarks based on logical or geographical separations that make sense to your business.
[solution term="standard"]You can apply landmark groups to relevant reports and alerts (e.g., idling within certain Dispatch Centers, etc.).
System landmarks are those that are automatically created and cannot be deleted. Each time a portal user creates a landmark, it automatically gets added to a system group called, "Landmarks by [username]."
Example
Company XYZ wants to encourage drivers to turn off their engines while inside dispatch centers. The owner created landmarks for each dispatch center and now wants to set up an alert whenever vehicles are inside one of those locations.
Add a Landmark Group
You can create any number of landmark groups. For each group you create, you can assign landmarks and users to that group. Landmarks and users can belong to more than one landmark group.
To create a new landmark group and set landmark membership:
From the menu, click Landmarks.
Click the Groups tab.
Click Create Group.
Enter a group name, and click OK.
In the Group Editor, select the landmark(s) that you want to add to the group, and click Save.
The landmark group appears in the Landmark drop-down when configuring relevant reports and/or alerts.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]Groups allow you to easily filter reports, maps, and dashlets. Groups also determine which users of your portal account can view certain landmarks.
System landmarks are those that are automatically created and cannot be deleted. Each time a portal user creates a landmark, it automatically gets added to a system group called, "Landmarks by [username]."
Example
Company XYZ has several dispatch centers in Arizona and Minnesota. The owner created landmarks for each dispatch center and now wants to report on stop/idle times of vehicles, separated by Arizona and Minnesota dispatch centers. He also wants to toggle on/off landmarks when viewing maps.
Add a Landmark Group
You can create any number of landmark groups. For each group you create, you can assign landmarks and users to that group, which determines which users can see the landmarks in that group. Landmarks and users can belong to more than one landmark group.
You can also create landmark groups from the Map Dashboard.
To create a new landmark group and set landmark membership:
Hover over the Mapping menu, click Landmark Groups, and click Open.
The Landmark Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Landmark Groups grid, click Landmark Group next to Create New.
In the New Landmark Group window, enter a name for the group.
Click Create Landmark Group.
A new landmark group is added to the Landmark Groups grid.
From the User List grid, decide which users should have access to this group of landmarks. For each user, set preferences for their ability to Rename, Add/Remove, or Re-Share, and then drag-and-drop a user to the new landmark group. In the Company XYZ example, the owner wants to give his Arizona service manager (Brendan) access to the Arizona landmarks. Brendan can add or remove landmarks to/from the group, but he cannot rename or share the landmark group.
You can also click Edit (pencil icon) next to a user's name to add/remove the user to/from multiple landmark groups at once.
From the Landmark List grid, drag-and-drop one ore more landmarks to the new landmark group to include it in the group.
You can also click Edit (pencil icon) next to a landmark name to add/remove the it to/from multiple landmark groups at once. You can also add existing landmarks to this new group by editing landmarks using the mass updater. The new landmark group is also available whenever you add a new landmark.
In the Company XYZ example, the owner can now run the Landmark Group report to view idle and stop details per vehicle separated by Arizona and Minnesota landmarks.
Additionally, he can toggle on/off landmarks by group whenever viewing 2D or 3D maps:
To download landmark groups to Google Earth, hover over the Mapping menu, and click 3D Download.
Map settings vary by map. Use the Edit icon on the Map dashlet to set a landmark group. The following example shows all snow vehicles and snow zones:
[post_title] => Using Landmark Groups
[post_excerpt] => Landmark groups are used to organize your landmarks based on logical or geographical separations that make sense to your business.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-landmark-groups
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-01 07:53:13
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-01 14:53:13
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 398
[guid] => http://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1799
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 6
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 398
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-16 22:15:10
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-16 22:15:10
[post_content] => Landmarks (also known as geofences) determine virtual boundaries. Within the portal, you can use landmarks to trigger alerts, refine reports, filter maps, and more. They also make location labels more intuitive on maps and reports. For example, rather than seeing a long, physical address each time a vehicle returns to your company parking lot, you might instead label that landmark as "Headquarters."
The boundary that you set up for a landmark can exist as a circle or a polygon.
Circle – The default shape for a landmark boundary is a circle. The default radius is determined by your current zoom level. Circle landmarks are typically sufficient for most tasks (i.e., report labels, map filters, turn-by-turn directions, and so on).
Polygon – Polygons allow you to define a more precise boundary by tracing an outline around a specific area (up to 256* vertices). Polygon landmarks are more often used when the exclusion or inclusion of specific perimeters is important, such as when sending alerts when a vehicle enters or exits a specific location.
*Although there is no limit to the number of vertices on a polygon, there is a limit to the amount of space we have in the database to store them. (The smaller, the better.) If a polygon is uploaded with a polygon-string longer than we can store in the database, the system simplifies the points and compress it down to fit. For example, if the lat-long is specified to 11-12 points of precision, the system shortens that down to 7 points or 5 points of precision, so the total polygon-string is shorter. Also, longer polygon strings mean more operations in the code to check polygon boundaries. It is always advisable for polygons be simple with long straight lines wherever possible. With most vehicles tracking between 30-seconds to 2-minutes, there is almost never a reason to have very detailed polygons.
[solution term="basic"]Click the Landmarks menu item to open the Landmarks tab. All of your landmarks are listed on this tab.
When you click on a landmark from the list or when you click on a landmark from the map, the Landmark Card appears, which shows you the radius and latitude / longitude.
"Help! Why can't I see my landmarks on the map?" Ensure the Landmarks toggle is turned on.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
Refer to Maps to learn more about using landmarks on maps.
Refer to Reports to learn more about using landmarks in reports.
Refer to Alerts to learn more about using landmark-based alerts.[/solution]
[post_title] => About Landmarks
[post_excerpt] => Landmarks (also known as geofences) determine virtual boundaries. Within the portal, you can use landmarks to trigger alerts, refine reports, filter maps, and more.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-landmarks
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 11:16:03
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 18:16:03
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=398
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 6
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 744e57ba5d4802a6b5dcb43f0af050a4
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:4259282be0772fcc87c67f4f198b7927
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 13
[name] => Landmarks
[slug] => landmarks
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 13
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Landmarks are used to determine virtual boundaries on a map using either circles or polygon shapes. Landmarks allow you to quickly identify locations (as opposed to entering a long address), trigger alerts (i.e., whenever a vehicle enters or exits a landmarks), refine reports, and more. Also known as geofences.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 13
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 7
[cat_ID] => 13
[category_count] => 13
[category_description] => Landmarks are used to determine virtual boundaries on a map using either circles or polygon shapes. Landmarks allow you to quickly identify locations (as opposed to entering a long address), trigger alerts (i.e., whenever a vehicle enters or exits a landmarks), refine reports, and more. Also known as geofences.
[cat_name] => Landmarks
[category_nicename] => landmarks
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 6
)
[27] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 27
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 27
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 27
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 27
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 27
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (27)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 135
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-11-20 17:48:49
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-11-20 17:48:49
[post_content] => The Portal allows you to track vehicle maintenance through scheduled service reminders.
[solution term="basic,standard"]Click the Maintenance menu item to open the Maintenance tab. All of your maintenance reminders and their color-coded statuses are listed on this tab.
Service Legend
[et]
"Description","Color"
"More than 20% of service interval remaining",
"Less than 20% of service interval remaining",
"Less than 10% of service interval remaining",
"At recommended service",
"Overdue more than 10% of service interval",
[/et]
Maintenance Card
When you click on a maintenance reminder from the list, the Maintenance Card appears, which shows you the vehicle, current odometer, current run time, service interval, and next scheduled service (miles, hours, or date). Additional menu items are also available for the reminder.
Maintenance Logs
When selecting a maintenance reminder an option exists to Add Logs. Each time a vehicle receives service, add a log entry to record the event. After logging individual service records for each vehicle you can view aggregate fleet maintenance data using the Service History report.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]In addition to service reminders, you may also track service history.
In order to manage maintenance items, you must have the Maintenance permission enabled in the User Access List and the Service Reminder item enabled in the Menu Access List (Account Category).
Service Legend
[et]
"Description","Color"
"More than 20% of service interval remaining",
"Less than 20% of service interval remaining",
"Less than 10% of service interval remaining",
"At recommended service",
"Overdue more than 10% of service interval",
[/et][/solution]
[post_title] => About Maintenance
[post_excerpt] => The portal allows you to track vehicle maintenance.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-maintenance
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-01-27 10:37:11
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-01-27 17:37:11
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=135
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 950
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:04:23
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:04:23
[post_content] => Create new service reminders by entering them into the web portal or importing a spreadsheet for batch entries. After creating a reminder, you can receive notification whenever scheduled service is approaching or is past due.
Create a Service Reminder
You can create an unlimited number of service reminders for each vehicle in your fleet, and you can define custom service intervals in miles, hours, and/or dates (days).
Example
Company XYZ wants to require all Delivery vehicles to have an oil change every 3,000 miles and a vehicle inspection every 100 engine hours.
To create a service reminder:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Service Reminders, and click Open.
The Vehicle Maintenance Schedule page opens in a new browser tab. The list of vehicles in your fleet are shown in the Vehicle Maintenance Schedule grid.
Click Add (plus icon) next to the vehicle for which you want to schedule service.
In the Add Maintenance Alert window, enter a custom label to identify the service. In the Company XYZ example, the first service reminder we need to create is an Oil Change.
Using miles, hours, and/or a date, enter the appropriate value(s) for the next service. In the Company XYZ example, Truck 150's odometer is currently at 95,508 miles. Assuming it has just been serviced, the next service should take place in another 3,000 miles, which is 98,508.
Although you can enter values for miles, hours, and date, most services are sufficiently defined by one value. For example, a date might be most appropriate for a vehicle registration renewal because that type of maintenance is not measured in miles or hours. If you do enter more than one value, the order of precedence for how the reminder settings are configured relies on whatever value triggers first.
Using miles and/or hours, enter the appropriate value(s) for the interval between each future service. In the Company XYZ example, oil changes for JESSE should take place every 3,000 miles.
Click Schedule Now.
Depending on the values you entered, a message may appear to prompt you to create a service log. In the Company XYZ example, we assume JESSE has just been serviced. Although it would be reasonable to add the first service entry now, we'll wait to do this until later.
Click Cancel.
Close the Add Maintenance Alert window.
The details of the new service reminder appear in the Vehicle Maintenance Schedule grid.
In the Company XYZ example, we should repeat the steps to create a new service reminder for a vehicle inspection every 100 engine hours. If a vehicle has multiple service reminders, they are added as new line items under the vehicle name.
For each service reminder, when the odometer value, run time, or date (if applicable) reaches less than 20% of the service interval remaining, a warning indicator appears. Warnings start in yellow, and they intensify to orange and red hues as the service gets closer or past due.
Determining the Value of the Date vs. Odometer
The “closer” of the schedules is calculated by figuring the remaining hours/miles/days against the interval and showing the one that has the closer percentage remaining. In this example, see the vehicle “SG23441.”
The current odometer is 33,900 mi, with a target for the next service at 36,888 mi. With an interval of 3000 miles and a difference between the current mileage of exactly 2998 miles, the remaining is 99.6%. The current date is 11/8/2019 with a target date of 5/7/2020.
The dates are similar, but with an interval of 182 days and a difference of 181 days, the remaining is 99.4%. Because the days are closer (by a hair, 99.4% vs 99.6%), the dates are being shown.
Import Service Reminder Spreadsheet
A spreadsheet import is helpful for performing batch functions.
To import the Create Service Reminders spreadsheet:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and then click Update/Export items using a spreadsheet.
From the Export Details to Spreadsheet area, choose to export Vehicle Labels/Details to CSV (Comma Separated Values) format, and click Save to File. (We will return to this file later.)
Download a CSV Example template (#1) next to the Create Service Reminders spreadsheet action.
Within the spreadsheet, column names appear in Row 1 and an example record appears in Row 2.
Within the spreadsheet, column names appear in Row 1 and an example record appears in Row 2. Using the file you just exported, replace Row 2+ with your own data. You may want to copy/paste one column at a time into the Example spreadsheet since the columns will be different than the column's from the file you're copying.
Field(s) in the Reference column on the Update/Export page are required.
Save the spreadsheet with your changes.
From the portal in the Spreadsheet Actions grid, click the Create Service Reminders option.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the example file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names (shown in the drop-downs) will be applied to the appropriate fields in the portal (shown in bold). Select the Reference item and match it to the Reference column in your spreadsheet. No changes will be made to the data listed in the Reference column; this will only be used as the identifier to update auxiliary information. Set any fields marked “IGNORE” to the appropriate column name if they will be updated. If you don’t want to add/update those columns, leave them set to “IGNORE.” Some spreadsheets don’t have columns named specifically for “Update” purposes. In those cases, search for the Update section within the drop-down window of the field you want to update.
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Valid values for reference fields will be marked with a green check box. The next action will overwrite/add data in the portal, so it's very important to verify that columns are being mapped to the correct areas within the portal. If you haven't already exported your current data as a backup, do so now!
Click Proceed with Import.
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
Manage Service Reminder Notifications
After you create a service reminder for a vehicle, you can monitor upcoming and overdue maintenance using the following:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="35%|65%"]
Tool,Example
Service Reminder Alert,Service Reminders Report (ad hoc),Service Reminders Report (scheduled),Service Reminders Dashlet,
[/et]
[post_title] => Adding a Service Reminder
[post_excerpt] => Create new service reminders by entering them into the web portal (no import option available). After creating a reminder, you can receive notification whenever scheduled service is approaching or is past due.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-service-reminder
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-11-13 14:04:23
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-11-13 21:04:23
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 135
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=950
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 951
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:04:47
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:04:47
[post_content] => Each time a vehicle receives service, create a new log entry to record the event. After logging individual service records for each vehicle, you can view aggregate fleet maintenance data using the Service History report.
[solution term="standard"]
Create Service Logs
For each log, enter the mileage and/or engine hours at the point of service, cost, date, and related notes.
ExampleTruck 150 at Company XYZ was just serviced for an oil change.
To create a service log entry:
From the portal click Maintenance.
The Maintenance window opens in the list below. Vehicles with active service schedules will be listed in the window.
Locate the service reminder for which you want to create a log entry, and click it.
A new window will appear just to the left of the Reminder with an option to Add Log.
In the Service Log Editor window, enter the details of the service:
Performed at (miles and/or hours) – Do not include commas
Service Cost
Service Date
Service Notes
Click Save.
The history day for this service entry is now included in the Service History of the vehicle and in relevant Service History Reports:
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
Create Service Logs
For each log, enter the mileage and/or engine hours at the point of service, cost, date, and related notes.
Example
Truck 150 at Company XYZ was just serviced for an oil change.
To create a service log entry:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Service Reminders, and click Open.
The Vehicle Maintenance Schedule page opens in a new browser tab. Vehicles with active service schedules have an Edit button (pencil icon) in the Vehicle Maintenance Schedule grid.
Locate the service reminder for which you want to create a log entry, and click Edit.
In the Edit Maintenance Alert window, click New Service Log.
In the Service Log window, enter the details of the service:
Performed at (miles and/or hours) - Do not include commas
Service Cost
Service Date
Service Notes
Select the Update Next Service check box if you want to update the next service marker according to the actual mileage at the time of service instead of estimated mileage. This option is especially useful if you perform service a little before the scheduled service estimate, so the next service marker will automatically adjust starting at the actual mileage at the time of service.
Click Save Changes.
Close the Edit Maintenance Schedule window.
The history day for this service entry is now included in relevant Service History Reports:
Export Service Logs
Service logs are available for export/import from the Edit Maintenance Alert window.
Example
Truck 150 has several service logs associated with it. The fleet manager recently moved the tracking device to another vehicle and installed a new device in Truck 150. He wants to export the service records from Truck 150 and import them into the new vehicle record.
To export service logs:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Service Reminders, and click Open.
The Vehicle Maintenance Schedule page opens in a new browser tab. Vehicles with active service schedules have an Edit button (pencil icon) in the Vehicle Maintenance Schedule grid.
Locate the vehicle for which you want to export service history, and click Edit.
In the Edit Maintenance Alert window, click Excel or CSV.
Close the Edit Maintenance Schedule window.
Now the fleet manager would change the vehicle label in the spreadsheet and upload it on the Spreadsheet Update/Export page.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Tracking Service History
[post_excerpt] => Each time a vehicle receives service, create a new log entry to record the event.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => tracking-service-history
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2021-06-29 17:22:47
[post_modified_gmt] => 2021-06-30 00:22:47
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 135
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=951
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 3
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 135
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-11-20 17:48:49
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-11-20 17:48:49
[post_content] => The Portal allows you to track vehicle maintenance through scheduled service reminders.
[solution term="basic,standard"]Click the Maintenance menu item to open the Maintenance tab. All of your maintenance reminders and their color-coded statuses are listed on this tab.
Service Legend
[et]
"Description","Color"
"More than 20% of service interval remaining",
"Less than 20% of service interval remaining",
"Less than 10% of service interval remaining",
"At recommended service",
"Overdue more than 10% of service interval",
[/et]
Maintenance Card
When you click on a maintenance reminder from the list, the Maintenance Card appears, which shows you the vehicle, current odometer, current run time, service interval, and next scheduled service (miles, hours, or date). Additional menu items are also available for the reminder.
Maintenance Logs
When selecting a maintenance reminder an option exists to Add Logs. Each time a vehicle receives service, add a log entry to record the event. After logging individual service records for each vehicle you can view aggregate fleet maintenance data using the Service History report.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]In addition to service reminders, you may also track service history.
In order to manage maintenance items, you must have the Maintenance permission enabled in the User Access List and the Service Reminder item enabled in the Menu Access List (Account Category).
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|85%"]
Feature, Description
Search~~,(Located above the Map Toolbar.) Enter a search term for a vehicle\, alert\, report\, landmark\, [glossary slug="Google Places"]place[/glossary]\, address\, or latitude and/or longitude coordinate (separated by a comma).
Drop Pin~~,Place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. You can then quickly dispatch to/from this location\, find the closest vehicle\, obtain lat/lon coordinates and physical address\, or create a landmark for repeated use.
Trails~~,Display one hour history trails on the map for all selected vehicles.~~~~
Landmarks~~,Display landmarks on the map.~~~~
Clusters~~,Represent more than one vehicle in a similar location with a clustered circle. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart\, clusters update accordingly. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included\, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. Colors correspond to the map legend (To view in the Portal, click More > Map Legend or see About Vehicles).~~~~~~~~
Use the Plus / Minus options to adjust the aggressiveness (sizing of the clusters).~~~~
Traffic~~,Identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways\, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes\, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.~~~~
Center~~,Automatically re-size and re-adjust the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles in the view.
Points of Interest~~,Shows restaurants\, businesses\, parks\, parking\, and other points of interest.
Full Screen~~,Expand the map full screen.
Map View,Show the street map overlay (default).~~~~
Satellite View,Show the satellite image overlay.~~~~
[/et]
Interacting with the Map
Use your mouse to drag-and-drop the map to move it around. Refer to the following additional options for interacting with the map:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|85%"]
Feature,Description
Zoom In~~,Click to zoom toward the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
Zoom Out~~,Click to zoom outward from the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
Street View~~,Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper-right corner to exit.) You can also invoke Street View from the Vehicle Card.~~~~
[/et]
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]Mapping tools allow you to see your entire fleet with configurable, color-coded icon shapes that relate to your vehicle grouping preferences.
Expand the User Preferences icon on the Dashboard to set mapping threshold options for Speed, Idle Time, Stop Time, and Out of Range.
Click each map type in the description to learn more.
2D Maps
Map TypeDescription
Map Dashlet
The Map Dashlet shows a 2D map with current locations of a selected vehicle group. Edit options allow you to filter by vehicle status (running, stopped, stopped for a set time period). You can also adjust vehicle/driver labels, add landmarks to the map, adjust map height and zoom options, and more. On the map control, toggle between Clusters, Traffic, Service Reminders, Points of Interest, Map View, Satellite View, or Street View.
Map Dashboard
The [System] Map Dashboard a special type of dashboard that transforms your workspace to a single 2D map with quick access to vehicle and landmark management. The Map Toolbar provides options for Drop Pin, Trails, Landmarks, Clusters, Traffic, Center, Map View, Satellite View, Zoom, and Street View. Edit vehicle details, view history, find closest to, get directions, follow a vehicle, use vehicle groups, message a vehicle, or update a vehicle's location. You can also add and edit landmarks.
2D Live Map
The 2D Live map shows live updates of all vehicles. Live updating means that individual vehicle locations/statuses refresh as they occur. Other 2D map options show collective updates when the entire map refreshes.Filter by vehicle group, movement, label match, starred vehicles, color, recent, and icon. Options include trailes (None, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour, All Day), starred vehicles toggle, drop a pin, landmarks toggle, cluster toggle, traffic toggle, center, points of interest toggle, map view, and satellite view. Includes ability to get directions, send SMS, send email, and dispatch via Garmin (if enabled).
2D Current Map
The 2D Current map shows current status of all vehicles or a selected vehicle group (current point only, 5 minute trail, 15 minute trail, 30 minute trail, full-day trail, or full-day trail with stops). Options include cluster toggle, traffic toggle, center, map view, and satellite view. View landmarks on the map and/or create new ones. Filter vehicles by attribute(s).Includes ability to get directions, send SMS, send email, and dispatch via Garmin (if enabled).
2D History Map
The 2D History map shows history for a single vehicle (includes animation). Date choices include today, yesterday, week to-date, the past 7 days, month to-date, the past 30 days, or a custom range (no more than 31 days at a time). Click Play to automatically advance the animation according to the speed selected, or click Step Forward to manually advance the animation one point at a time.
3D Maps
3D Maps allow you to interact with your fleet's status and location data on a three-dimensional mapping plane. 3D Maps require Google Earth, which is a free software download provided by Google. The installation is optional and complies with the terms of service for Google Maps/Earth. Once installed, Google Earth automatically launches whenever you invoke a 3D mapping option from within the portal.
The portal saves a KML file to your computer's default download location each time you request a 3D map. The KMZ and KML file extensions should be associated with the Google Earth application automatically after installation of Google Earth. If Google Earth does not open automatically after you request a 3D map from the portal, locate and right-click the downloaded KML file, click "Open With," and choose Google Earth from the list of programs. Ensure the "Always use the selected program to open this kind of file" check box is selected.
Map TypeDescription
3D Current Map
The 3D Current Map shows current status of all vehicles or a selected vehicle group (current point only, 5 minute trail, 15 minute trail, 30 minute trail, full-day trail, or 30-Day trail with stops).
3D History Map
The 3D History map shows history for one or more vehicles (includes animation). Date choices include today, yesterday, week to-date, the past 7 days, month to-date, the past 30 days, or a custom range (no more than 31 days at a time). Display choices include all points, all inputs, all stops, stops more than 5 min, stops more than 30 min, or stops more than 1 hour. Label choices include Time, Vehicle, Both, RefId, or None. You can also turn on/off minimap, show updated labels, organize points into folders by trip, and [glossary slug="Snap to roads"]snap to roads[/glossary].
[/solution]
[post_title] => About Maps
[post_excerpt] => Mapping tools allow you to see your entire fleet with configurable, color-coded icon shapes that relate to your vehicle grouping preferences.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-maps
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 11:05:44
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 18:05:44
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=293
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 963
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:11:32
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:11:32
[post_content] => Google Earth overlays allow you to add your own images on top of the regular, 3D maps.
Example
XYZ Company delivers heating/cooling equipment to residential destinations. Local delivery rates are calculated by predefined zones. The owner wants to interact with his truck’s GPS data in relation to their zoning map.
Locate the region on the map that roughly corresponds to the custom overaly image.
Click Add > Image Overlay.
From the Google Earth - New Image Overlay window, enter a Name for the overlay.
Click Browse. Locate the location where your overlay image is saved, and double-click it.
The image is added on top of the map. (You may need to move the Google Earth - New Image Overlay window to see the map. Keep the Google Earth - New Image Overlay window open.)
From the map, resize the image as needed to more precisely correspond with the region on the map.
Move the overlay by dragging the cross-hairs (center of the image). Resize the overlay by dragging the corners. Drag the Transparency slider in the New Image Overlay window to adjust how the overlay appears on the map.
When satisfied with the overlaydimensions and coordinates, click OK.
From the Places pane, right-click the new overlay name, and click Save Place As.
In the Save File window, browse to the directory where you want to save the KMZ file, and click Save.
To import a Google Earth overlay into the portal:
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, click Manage Overlays, and click Edit Overlays.
The Google Earth Overlays page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Manage KML Overlays grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved your KMZ file. Select the file, and click Open.
Click Update Now.
A success message appears to indicate the save was successful. Now other portal users on your account can download and use the overlay within Google Earth:
If you have a need to view multiple and/or toggle ESRI overlays (e.g., routes or manholes) within 2D maps in the portal, contact your Account Manager.
[post_title] => Adding a Google Earth Overlay
[post_excerpt] => Google Earth overlays allow you to add your own images on top of the regular, 3D maps.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-google-earth-overlay
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:47:29
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:47:29
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 406
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=963
[menu_order] => 9
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 406
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-17 19:05:01
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-17 19:05:01
[post_content] => The portal's 3D mapping capabilities require Google Earth, which is is a free download provided by Google; however, the installation is optional and complies with the terms of service for Google Maps/Earth.
Read the terms of service, and click Agree and Download.
The download begins automatically for the Google Earth setup file.
Locate the GoogleEarthSetup.exe file, and double-click it to start installation. (The download location may vary depending on the browser you are using. Typically it is saved in C:\Users\yourname\Downloads.)
If a security warning window appears, click Run.
If a User Account Control window appears, click Yes.
The Google Earth installation begins. When complete, the Google Earth application launches automatically.
You do not need to keep Google Earth running; it will automatically launch whenever you invoke a 3D mapping option from within the portal.
The portal saves a KML file to your computer's default download location each time you request a 3D map. The KMZ and KML file extensions should be associated with the Google Earth application by default. If Google Earth does not open automatically after you request a 3D map from the portal, locate and right-click the downloaded KML file, click "Open With," and choose Google Earth from the list of programs. Ensure the "Always use the selected program to open this kind of file" check box is selected. See About Maps for more information on using Google Earth with 3D mapping features.
Close Google Earth.
Request a 3D Map from the Portal
From the portal, hover over the Mapping menu, and click the 3D Mapping option you want (Current or History).
Choose the vehicle or vehicle group and the date(s) that you want to include in the report.
Click a selected day (one at a time) to clear it from the selection. To quickly clear a large selection of days, click the "T" option to select today's date, and then click the highlighted date to de-select it. Start your custom selection again.
Click the black button (e.g., Current Map, History Map).
The download of the KMZ file begins automatically. Within your browser window, you may see the file in the bottom left corner (Chrome), upper right corner (Firefox), or bottom middle (Internet Explorer). If you do not see the file in your browser window, you can find the download typically saved in your Downloads folder (C:\Users\yourname\Downloads).
Open or double-click the KMZ file.
Google Earth launches and displays the data points in a 3D mapping plane. The points remain in Google Earth's Temporary Places as long as the application is opened. If you run another 3D map from the portal, it opens as another data set in the Temporary Places.
See the 3D Current or 3D History pages for more information on how to manipulate the data within Google Earth.
[post_title] => Using 3D Maps
[post_excerpt] => The portal's 3D mapping capabilities require Google Earth, which is is a free download provided by Google; however, the installation is optional and complies with the terms of service for Google Maps/Earth.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-3d-maps
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:47:12
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:47:12
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 293
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=406
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 20716
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-08-14 09:56:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-08-14 16:56:09
[post_content] => Use The Landmark History function in the map to monitor your fleet's landmark activity throughout each workday.
To use Landmark History:
From the map, click the History tab in the data source selector.
Click the Landmarks tab below the History tab.
Search and select the landmark you would like to view.
Select a date and time frame from the Time Range window, then click View History.
If you would like to change the playback speed, click the settings button () in the right corner of the playback bar.
You can adjust the speed at: Normal, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x and 32x.
Once selected, click the Play button () to playback the vehicle(s) landmark history.
[post_title] => Using Landmark History
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-landmark-history
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-08-14 09:56:35
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-08-14 16:56:35
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 20203
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=20716
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 396
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-16 22:33:35
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-16 22:33:35
[post_content] => The 2D Current map shows current status of all vehicles or a selected vehicle group (current point only, 5 minute trail, 15 minute trail, 30 minute trail, full-day trail, or full-day trail with stops). Options include cluster toggle, traffic toggle, center, map view, and satellite view. View landmarks on the map and/or create new ones. Filter vehicles by attribute(s). The 2D Current map has the following features:
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters represent more than one vehicle in a similar location. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. (Colors correspond to the map legend.) As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart, clusters update accordingly.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Traffic[/row_column]
[row_column]The Traffic toggle helps you identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]3[/row_column]
[row_column]Center[/row_column]
[row_column]The Center button automatically re-sizes and re-adjusts the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]4[/row_column]
[row_column]Map View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the street map overlay (below left). Includes an option to add terrain (below right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]5[/row_column]
[row_column]Satellite View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the satellite image overaly (left). Includes an option to turn off labels (right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]6[/row_column]
[row_column]Landmark Options[/row_column]
[row_column]Click the Landmarks button to toggle landmarks on/off. Use the drop-down to filter the landmarks that appear on the map by group.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]7[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Options[/row_column]
[row_column]Modify or turn on/off vehicle labels (default primary is Vehicle, default alternate is Driver). Alternate vehicle labels appear in parentheses if both the primary and alternate label are available. Use the filter box to filter the vehicles on the map by vehicle name using keyword strings. Results filter as you type. Use a wildcard * to search for closest string matches.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]8[/row_column]
[row_column]Attribute Options[/row_column]
[row_column](This option is not available to every account.) Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles beyond the basic vehicle information. You can then use attributes to filter the map (e.g., show only vehicles with a boom height less than 20 ft and a lift capacity between 00-1000lbs).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]9[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle List[/row_column]
[row_column]View the list of vehicles currently on the map (alphabetical order). Clear the check box next to a vehicle to remove it from the map. Click a vehicle from the list or from the map to load the vehicle information box (see 10).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]10[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Information Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Also known as the Vehicle Card. Shows the selected vehicle's information, including vehicle label, movement status, ignition status, odometer, lat/lon, runtime, temperature (if available), stop time, current capture date, messaging options (SMS, Email, and Garmin if available), landmark options, and directions options. Select a vehicle from the Vehicles List Control or by clicking an icon on the map. Advance to tabs within the information box by using the links or by consecutive clicks on the vehicle name/icon.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]11[/row_column]
[row_column]Legend[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows colors that represent vehicle status and shapes. You can customize the threshold values from the dashboard (User Preferences icon).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]12[/row_column]
[row_column]Navigation Controls[/row_column]
[row_column]A) Directional Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons to move the view north, south, east, or west.
B) Street View: Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper, right corner to exit.)
C) Zoom / Slider: Click + or - to zoom in or zoom out, or drag the zoom slider.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]11[/row_column]
[row_column]Address Search Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Enter an address or landmark name to jump to a specific location on the map. If you close this control, you must re-run the map to see it again.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[/table_body]
[/table]
[post_title] => Using the 2D Current Map
[post_excerpt] => The 2D Current map shows current status of all vehicles or a selected vehicle group (current point only, 5 minute trail, 15 minute trail, 30 minute trail, full-day trail, or full-day trail with stops).
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-2d-current-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:46:26
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:46:26
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 293
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=396
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 403
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-17 18:49:33
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-17 18:49:33
[post_content] => The 2D History map shows single-vehicle history with animation. Date choices include today, yesterday, week to-date, the past 7 days, month to-date, the past 30 days, or a custom range (up to 31 days at a time).
Choose between T (today), Y (yesterday), >W (week-to-date), 7d (last 7 days), >M (month-to-date), 30 (last 30 days), a custom date selection on the calendar, or click the name of a month. To clear a selection, click the same date selection again, or click the a selected day (one at a time) to clear it from the selection. To quickly clear a large selection of days, click the "T" option to select today's date, and then click the "T" (or highlighted date) again to de-select it. Once no dates are highlighted, select the beginning and end date of the desired time period to highlight the dates selected and everything in-between.
The 2D History map has the following features:
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Center[/row_column]
[row_column]Centers the map around the points in the currently loaded animation.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Map View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the street map overlay (below left). Includes an option to add terrain (below right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]3[/row_column]
[row_column]Satellite View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the satellite image overaly (left). Includes an option to turn off labels (right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]4[/row_column]
[row_column]Time[/row_column]
[row_column]Displays the time at which the last point in the trail (currently loaded) was recorded.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]5[/row_column]
[row_column]Speed[/row_column]
[row_column]Adjust the speed at which to display the animation. Choices include: 1 (slowest), 2 (slower), 3 (normal), 4 (faster), or 5 (fastest).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]6[/row_column]
[row_column]Points[/row_column]
[row_column]Adjust the total number of points to show in the animation at one time.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]7[/row_column]
[row_column]Lines[/row_column]
[row_column]Display a line for all points in the currently loaded animation or for all points in the entire trail (including points not shown).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]8[/row_column]
[row_column]Bounds[/row_column]
[row_column]Centers the map around the points in the currently loaded animation.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]9[/row_column]
[row_column]Animation Navigation[/row_column]
[row_column]Options include: Back, Play, Forward, Step Back, Step Forward. Click Play to automatically advance the animation according to the speed selected, or click Step Forward to manually advance the animation one point at a time.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]10[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Information Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Also known as the "Vehicle Card." Shows current vehicle information for a selected point in the trail. Optionally create a new landmark from a point or open in Google Maps from this point.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]11[/row_column]
[row_column]Navigation Controls[/row_column]
[row_column]A) Directional Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons to move the view north, south, east, or west.
B) Street View: Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper, right corner to exit.)
C) Zoom / Slider: Click + or - to zoom in or zoom out, or drag the zoom slider.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[/table_body]
[/table]
[post_title] => Using the 2D History Map
[post_excerpt] => The 2D History map shows single-vehicle history with animation.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-2d-history-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:46:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:46:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 293
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=403
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 295
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-02 21:37:16
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-02 21:37:16
[post_content] => The 2D Live map shows live updates of all vehicles. Live updating means that individual vehicle locations/statuses refresh as they occur. Other 2D map options show collective updates when the entire map refreshes (usually every 10-15 seconds). The 2D Live map has the following features:
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Map Options[/row_column]
[row_column]Map options allow you to toggle labels on markers, adjust zoom level, label size, icon labels, vehicle sorting, show speed on map, and more. You can also clear/save the settings as your account's default live map options (requires refresh).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Trails[/row_column]
[row_column]Display trails on the map. Options are available for the following intervals: None, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour, All Day, and [glossary slug="Snap to roads"]Snap to Roads[/glossary].[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]3[/row_column]
[row_column]Star[/row_column]
[row_column]Adds the "Starred" filter to the current filters. Star an individual vehicle using the "Star" tab on the Vehicle Card or by hovering over a vehicle name in the Vehicles/Landmarks List.
Star all vehicles in a particular group or groups using the "star" icon in the title bar of the Vehicles/Landmarks List control.
Star only vehicles that are visible in the current map view by typing "isolate" in the Search and Filter box.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]4[/row_column]
[row_column]Drop Pin[/row_column]
[row_column]Dropping a pin allows you to place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. You can then quickly dispatch to/from this location, route a Garmin to/from this location, obtain lat/lon coordinates and physical address, or create a landmark for repeated use.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]5[/row_column]
[row_column]Landmarks [/row_column]
[row_column]Adds landmarks to the map. Filter by Landmark Group and click to add it to the map (single landmarks are gold; landmark groups are orange).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]6[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters represent more than one vehicle in a similar location. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. (Colors correspond to the map legend.) As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart, clusters update accordingly.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]7[/row_column]
[row_column]Traffic[/row_column]
[row_column]The Traffic toggle helps you identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]8[/row_column]
[row_column]Center[/row_column]
[row_column]The Center button automatically re-sizes and re-adjusts the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]9[/row_column]
[row_column]Points of Interest[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows restaurants, businesses, parks, parking, and other points of interest.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]10[/row_column]
[row_column]Map View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the street map overlay (below left). Includes an option to add terrain (below right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]11[/row_column]
[row_column]Satellite View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the satellite image overaly (left). Includes an option to turn off labels (right).
[/row_column]
[table_row]
[row_column]12[/row_column]
[row_column]Search and Filter[/row_column]
[row_column]Type a search term in the box for to filter a landmark group, landmark name, hierarchy node, vehicle group, icon label (shape), vehicle name, vehicle status, or unmarked location. Filters are also available to choose from in the Vehicle List Control (drop-down):
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]13[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Information Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Also known as the "Vehicle Card." View information about the currently selected vehicle. Advance to tabs within the information box by using the links (Vehicle, Location, Street, Custom, Close, Center, Star) or by consecutive clicks on the vehicle name/icon.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]14[/row_column]
[row_column]List Control[/row_column]
[row_column]View the list of vehicles and/or landmarks currently on the map (alphabetical order). Use the Search and Filter box or click the Filter icon to choose filters from a drop-down list. You can combine multiple filters such as vehicle name, group, movement, and other keywords. You must have a group chosen in order to see results (e.g., All Vehicles or All Landmarks). Click a vehicle from the list or from the map to load the Vehicle Card (also known as the vehicle information box).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]15[/row_column]
[row_column]Navigation Controls[/row_column]
[row_column]A) Directional Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons to move the view north, south, east, or west.
B) Street View: Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper, right corner to exit.)
C) Zoom / Slider: Click + or - to zoom in or zoom out, or drag the zoom slider.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[/table_body]
[/table]
[post_title] => Using the 2D Live Map
[post_excerpt] => The 2D Live map shows live updates of all vehicles. Live updating means that individual vehicle locations/statuses refresh as they occur.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-2d-live-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:46:17
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:46:17
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 293
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=295
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 408
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-17 19:57:46
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-17 19:57:46
[post_content] => The 3D Current map shows current status of all vehicles or a selected vehicle group (current point only, 5 minute trail, 15 minute trail, 30 minute trail, full-day trail, or full-day trail with stops).
See Using 3D Maps to learn how to launch a 3D map from the portal.
The 3D Current map has the following features:
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Toolbar Buttons[/row_column]
[row_column]Refer to the Google Earth Help for using toolbar buttons.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Places Panel[/row_column]
[row_column]Locate, save, organize, and revisit places. When you run a 3D map from the portal, a new .kml file is downloaded to your computer and automatically loaded within Google Earth (represented by its own node in your "Temporary Places"). This node structure allows you to toggle on/off different places (.kml or .kmz files), layered within the same Google Earth window. The following example shows two separate places (3D mapping kml exports) for current "Phoenix" and "Mesa" vehicle groups:
Vehicles under each node are listed in alphabetical order. Colors and shapes represent vehicle status and icons set in the portal. Clear/select check boxes to turn off/on individual vehicles. Click a vehicle from the list or from the map to load the vehicle information box. Double-click a vehicle from the list or map to zoom in and view the location at eye-level.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]3[/row_column]
[row_column]Layers Panel[/row_column]
[row_column]Display points of interest and additional layers from the Google Earth Gallery: Borders and Labels, Places, Photos, Roads, 3D Buildings, Ocean, Weather, Gallery, Global Awareness, or More. (The most typical layers to turn on are Roads, Borders and Labels, and Places. Turning on too many layers at once can make the map overwhelming.) Refer to Overlays to learn more about importing landmarks and/or overlays from Google Earth into the portal.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]4[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Information Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Also known as the Vehicle Card. Shows the selected vehicle’s information, including vehicle label, driver (if available), movement status, ignition status, odometer, lat/lon, temperature (if available), recorded date, current date (updates automatically with the live mapping option). Select a vehicle from the Places Panel or by clicking an icon on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]5[/row_column]
[row_column]Navigation Controls[/row_column]
[row_column]A) Tilt/Rotate Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons or drag-and-drop your mouse around the outer ring to adjust the tilt or rotation of the view. Alternatively, hold the CTRL key down with the mouse wheel to rotate the map.
B) Directional Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons to move the view north, south, east, or west.
C) Street View/Ground View: Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level or ground-level imagery.
>D) Zoom / Slider: Click + or - to zoom in or zoom out, drag the zoom slider, or use the mouse scroll wheel. Zoom in and out with much better accuracy and control by holding the right mouse button down and dragging up and down. Additionally, double-clicking the right mouse button zooms you out a convenient amount, just like left double-clicking zooms you down a convenient amount. Click Tools > Options > Navigation to adjust the default fly-to and mouse wheel speeds.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[/table_body]
[/table]
[post_title] => Using the 3D Current Map
[post_excerpt] => The 3D Current map shows current status of all vehicles or a selected vehicle group (current point only, 5 minute trail, 15 minute trail, 30 minute trail, full-day trail, or full-day trail with stops).
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-3d-current-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:47:18
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:47:18
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 406
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=408
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[8] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 356
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 20:07:36
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 20:07:36
[post_content] => The 3D History map shows multiple-vehicle history with animation. Display choices include all points, all inputs, all stops, stops more than 5 min, stops more than 30 min, or stops more than 1 hour. Label choices include Time, Vehicle, Both, RefId, or None. You can also turn on/off minimap, show updated labels, organize points into folders by trip, and [glossary slug="Snap to roads"]snap to roads[/glossary].
See Using 3D Maps to learn how to launch a 3D map from the portal.
Choose between T (today), Y (yesterday), >W (week-to-date), 7d (last 7 days), >M (month-to-date), 30 (last 30 days), a custom date selection on the calendar, or click the name of a month. To clear a selection, click the same date selection again, or click the a selected day (one at a time) to clear it from the selection. To quickly clear a large selection of days, click the "T" option to select today's date, and then click the "T" (or highlighted date) again to de-select it. Once no dates are highlighted, select the beginning and end date of the desired time period to highlight the dates selected and everything in-between.
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Time Slider[/row_column]
[row_column]The time slider allows you to view an entire set of vehicle history at once (like a movie), or you can view data during a small time window. Click Play () to toggle time slider animation, manually drag the sliders, or click Step Forward () to advance the animation one point at a time. Adjust the number of points shown in the view by moving the begin/end markers. Click Options () to adjust auto animation speed and time zone. The figure above shows the path for a selected trip. Within the selected time period, several data points are shown--one of them is movement at 11:14 AM. Refer to the Google Earth Help for using other toolbar buttons.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Places Panel[/row_column]
[row_column]Locate, save, organize, and revisit places. When you run a 3D map from the portal, a new .kml file is downloaded to your computer and automatically loaded within Google Earth (represented by its own node in your "Temporary Places"). This node structure allows you to toggle on/off different places (.kml or .kmz files), layered within the same Google Earth window. The following example shows two separate places (3D mapping kml exports) for current "Phoenix" and "Mesa" vehicle groups:
Vehicles under each node are listed in alphabetical order. Colors and shapes represent vehicle status and icons set in the portal. Clear/select check boxes to turn off/on individual vehicles. Click a vehicle from the list or from the map to load the vehicle information box. Double-click a vehicle from the list or map to zoom in and view the location at eye-level. Right-click a vehicle from the map and click Properties to view all parent folders and the current point. (This is useful if you want to click on a series of nearby locations, such as checking light green "speeding pins" or stops.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]3[/row_column]
[row_column]Layers Panel[/row_column]
[row_column]Display points of interest and additional layers from the Google Earth Gallery: Borders and Labels, Places, Photos, Roads, 3D Buildings, Ocean, Weather, Gallery, Global Awareness, or More. (The most typical layers to turn on are Roads, Borders and Labels, and Places. Turning on too many layers at once can make the map overwhelming.) Refer to Overlays to learn more about importing landmarks and/or overlays from Google Earth into the portal.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]4[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Information Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Also known as the Vehicle Card. Shows the selected vehicle’s information, including vehicle label, driver (if available), movement status, ignition status, odometer, lat/lon, temperature (if available), recorded date, current date (updates automatically with the live mapping option). Select a vehicle from the Places Panel or by clicking an icon on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]5[/row_column]
[row_column]Navigation Controls[/row_column]
[row_column]A) Tilt/Rotate Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons or drag-and-drop your mouse around the outer ring to adjust the tilt or rotation of the view. Alternatively, hold the CTRL key down with the mouse wheel to rotate the map.
B) Directional Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons to move the view north, south, east, or west.
C) Street View/Ground View: Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level or ground-level imagery.
D) Zoom / Slider: Click + or - to zoom in or zoom out, drag the zoom slider, or use the mouse scroll wheel. Zoom in and out with much better accuracy and control by holding the right mouse button down and dragging up and down. Additionally, double-clicking the right mouse button zooms you out a convenient amount, just like left double-clicking zooms you down a convenient amount. Click Tools > Options > Navigation to adjust the default fly-to and mouse wheel speeds.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[/table_body]
[/table]
[post_title] => Using the 3D History Map
[post_excerpt] => The 3D History map shows multiple-vehicle history with animation.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-3d-history-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:47:24
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:47:24
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 406
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=356
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 303
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-02 21:39:57
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-02 21:39:57
[post_content] => The Map Dashlet shows a 2D map with current locations of a selected vehicle group.
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Drop Pin[/row_column]
[row_column]Dropping a pin allows you to place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. You can then quickly dispatch to/from this location, route a Garmin to/from this location, obtain lat/lon coordinates and physical address, create a landmark for repeated use, or add the location to a route in the Route dashlet.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters represent more than one vehicle in a similar location. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. (Colors correspond to the map legend.) As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart, clusters update accordingly.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]3[/row_column]
[row_column]Traffic[/row_column]
[row_column]The Traffic toggle helps you identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]4[/row_column]
[row_column]Center[/row_column]
[row_column]The Center button automatically re-sizes and re-adjusts the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]5[/row_column]
[row_column]Service Reminders[/row_column]
[row_column]Toggle the service reminder indicator on or off. When on, a wrench icon appears over the vehicle's icon to indicate when a scheduled service is past due. Click on the vehicle to view the service reminder information in the Vehicle Card.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]6[/row_column]
[row_column]Points of Interest[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows restaurants, businesses, parks, parking, and other points of interest.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]7[/row_column]
[row_column]Map View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the street map overlay (below left). Includes an option to add terrain (below right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]8[/row_column]
[row_column]Satellite View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the satellite image overaly (left). Includes an option to turn off labels (right).
[/row_column]
[table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]9[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Information Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Also known as the Vehicle Card. Shows the selected vehicle's information, including vehicle label, movement status, ignition status, odometer, lat/lon, runtime, temperature (if available), stop time, current capture date, and messaging options (SMS, Email, and Garmin if available). Click-and-drag a vehicle to an open space on the dashboard to follow a vehicle.
[/row_column]
[table_row]
[row_column]10[/row_column]
[row_column]Navigation Controls[/row_column]
[row_column]A) Directional Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons to move the view north, south, east, or west.
B) Street View: Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper, right corner to exit.)
C) Zoom / Slider: Click + or - to zoom in or zoom out, or drag the zoom slider.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[/table_body]
[/table]
The following Map Dashlet options are availalbe ():
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]Custom Title[/row_column]
[row_column]Enter a custom title to appear in the title bar of the dashlet.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Vehicle Group[/row_column]
[row_column]Filter the map to show only vehicles that belong to a certain group or hierarchy tree (if available).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Show Vehicles[/row_column]
[row_column]Filter the map to show only vehicles that are running, are stopped, or have been stopped for a particular time.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Vehicle Label[/row_column]
[row_column]Set the primary vehicle label (default is Vehicle).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Alternate Label[/row_column]
[row_column]Set the secondary vehicle label (default is Driver).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Landmark Group[/row_column]
[row_column]Show landmarks on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Map Options[/row_column]
[row_column]Add/remove the zoom controller, the map type controller, and/or the auto center & zoom controller. Adjust the default zoom target and zoom level when the zoom control is invoked. Adjust the vehicle icon size (1 is largest) and landmark label size (1 is largest).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Dashlet Height[/row_column]
[row_column]Adjust the dashlet height as it appears on the dashboard (Half, Normal, Twice, 3x).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Dashlet Group[/row_column]
[row_column]Dashlet groups allow you to link two or more dashlets (where applicable). When linked, clicking on a vehicle from one dashlet updates the data in another dashlet. See more examples.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Update Interval[/row_column]
[row_column] Choose how frequently the entire map should refresh (not dependent upon individual vehicle update rate).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[/table_body]
[/table]
[post_title] => Using the Map Dashlet
[post_excerpt] => The Map Dashlet shows a 2D map with current locations of a selected vehicle group.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-map-dashlet
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:46:11
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:46:11
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 293
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=303
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 10
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 293
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-10 16:02:00
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-10 16:02:00
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]Map options are provided at the top-right corner of the map. Click the applicable button to turn map options on or off.
Using Map Options
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|85%"]
Feature, Description
Search~~,(Located above the Map Toolbar.) Enter a search term for a vehicle\, alert\, report\, landmark\, [glossary slug="Google Places"]place[/glossary]\, address\, or latitude and/or longitude coordinate (separated by a comma).
Drop Pin~~,Place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. You can then quickly dispatch to/from this location\, find the closest vehicle\, obtain lat/lon coordinates and physical address\, or create a landmark for repeated use.
Trails~~,Display one hour history trails on the map for all selected vehicles.~~~~
Landmarks~~,Display landmarks on the map.~~~~
Clusters~~,Represent more than one vehicle in a similar location with a clustered circle. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart\, clusters update accordingly. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included\, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. Colors correspond to the map legend (To view in the Portal, click More > Map Legend or see About Vehicles).~~~~~~~~
Use the Plus / Minus options to adjust the aggressiveness (sizing of the clusters).~~~~
Traffic~~,Identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways\, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes\, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.~~~~
Center~~,Automatically re-size and re-adjust the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles in the view.
Points of Interest~~,Shows restaurants\, businesses\, parks\, parking\, and other points of interest.
Full Screen~~,Expand the map full screen.
Map View,Show the street map overlay (default).~~~~
Satellite View,Show the satellite image overlay.~~~~
[/et]
Interacting with the Map
Use your mouse to drag-and-drop the map to move it around. Refer to the following additional options for interacting with the map:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|85%"]
Feature,Description
Zoom In~~,Click to zoom toward the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
Zoom Out~~,Click to zoom outward from the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
Street View~~,Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper-right corner to exit.) You can also invoke Street View from the Vehicle Card.~~~~
[/et]
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]Mapping tools allow you to see your entire fleet with configurable, color-coded icon shapes that relate to your vehicle grouping preferences.
Expand the User Preferences icon on the Dashboard to set mapping threshold options for Speed, Idle Time, Stop Time, and Out of Range.
Click each map type in the description to learn more.
2D Maps
Map TypeDescription
Map Dashlet
The Map Dashlet shows a 2D map with current locations of a selected vehicle group. Edit options allow you to filter by vehicle status (running, stopped, stopped for a set time period). You can also adjust vehicle/driver labels, add landmarks to the map, adjust map height and zoom options, and more. On the map control, toggle between Clusters, Traffic, Service Reminders, Points of Interest, Map View, Satellite View, or Street View.
Map Dashboard
The [System] Map Dashboard a special type of dashboard that transforms your workspace to a single 2D map with quick access to vehicle and landmark management. The Map Toolbar provides options for Drop Pin, Trails, Landmarks, Clusters, Traffic, Center, Map View, Satellite View, Zoom, and Street View. Edit vehicle details, view history, find closest to, get directions, follow a vehicle, use vehicle groups, message a vehicle, or update a vehicle's location. You can also add and edit landmarks.
2D Live Map
The 2D Live map shows live updates of all vehicles. Live updating means that individual vehicle locations/statuses refresh as they occur. Other 2D map options show collective updates when the entire map refreshes.Filter by vehicle group, movement, label match, starred vehicles, color, recent, and icon. Options include trailes (None, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour, All Day), starred vehicles toggle, drop a pin, landmarks toggle, cluster toggle, traffic toggle, center, points of interest toggle, map view, and satellite view. Includes ability to get directions, send SMS, send email, and dispatch via Garmin (if enabled).
2D Current Map
The 2D Current map shows current status of all vehicles or a selected vehicle group (current point only, 5 minute trail, 15 minute trail, 30 minute trail, full-day trail, or full-day trail with stops). Options include cluster toggle, traffic toggle, center, map view, and satellite view. View landmarks on the map and/or create new ones. Filter vehicles by attribute(s).Includes ability to get directions, send SMS, send email, and dispatch via Garmin (if enabled).
2D History Map
The 2D History map shows history for a single vehicle (includes animation). Date choices include today, yesterday, week to-date, the past 7 days, month to-date, the past 30 days, or a custom range (no more than 31 days at a time). Click Play to automatically advance the animation according to the speed selected, or click Step Forward to manually advance the animation one point at a time.
3D Maps
3D Maps allow you to interact with your fleet's status and location data on a three-dimensional mapping plane. 3D Maps require Google Earth, which is a free software download provided by Google. The installation is optional and complies with the terms of service for Google Maps/Earth. Once installed, Google Earth automatically launches whenever you invoke a 3D mapping option from within the portal.
The portal saves a KML file to your computer's default download location each time you request a 3D map. The KMZ and KML file extensions should be associated with the Google Earth application automatically after installation of Google Earth. If Google Earth does not open automatically after you request a 3D map from the portal, locate and right-click the downloaded KML file, click "Open With," and choose Google Earth from the list of programs. Ensure the "Always use the selected program to open this kind of file" check box is selected.
Map TypeDescription
3D Current Map
The 3D Current Map shows current status of all vehicles or a selected vehicle group (current point only, 5 minute trail, 15 minute trail, 30 minute trail, full-day trail, or 30-Day trail with stops).
3D History Map
The 3D History map shows history for one or more vehicles (includes animation). Date choices include today, yesterday, week to-date, the past 7 days, month to-date, the past 30 days, or a custom range (no more than 31 days at a time). Display choices include all points, all inputs, all stops, stops more than 5 min, stops more than 30 min, or stops more than 1 hour. Label choices include Time, Vehicle, Both, RefId, or None. You can also turn on/off minimap, show updated labels, organize points into folders by trip, and [glossary slug="Snap to roads"]snap to roads[/glossary].
In order to use Messaging, you must have the Messaging permission enabled in the User Access List, the SMS Messaging and SMS/Email items enabled in the Menu Access List (Custom and Dashlet categories). You will only see messages associated with vehicles and/or drivers that are available to you.
Your message cannot exceed 160 characters. If your message exceeds 160 characters, the message is broken down into multiple messages consisting of 153 characters. The total maximum character limit is 918 characters.
[post_title] => About Messaging
[post_excerpt] => SMS Messaging allows you to send SMS messages from within the portal and/or from your mobile device.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-messaging
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:59:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:59:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=525
[menu_order] => 11
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 947
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:02:25
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:02:25
[post_content] => Using the portal, you can send an SMS message from several areas of the portal: The dashboard, the SMS Messaging interface, or from 2D and 3D maps. The compose options vary for each area. Messages can be sent to any vehicle or group of vehicles with valid phone/SMS number. If your account assigns drivers to vehicles, you can instead choose from individual drivers or a group of drivers.
Messages will be sent from the 477-477 (GPSGPS) number. Messages cannot exceed 160 characters.
If your message exceeds 160 characters, the message is broken down into multiple messages consisting of 153 characters. The total maximum character limit is 918 characters.
Once you send a message to a mobile user from the portal, the phone number will automatically be associated with your account and authorized for query services.
Send SMS Messages from the Dashboard
In order to use the SMS/Email Messaging dashlet, you must have the Messaging permission enabled in the User Access List, the SMS Messaging and SMS/Email items enabled in the Menu Access List (Custom and Dashlet categories).
Example
Company XYZ has several warehouses used by its Delivery drivers. Warehouse A just went dark due to a critical power outage in the area, and the fleet manager wants to notify drivers of the issue.
To send a message from the dashboard
From the dashboard, locate the Messaging dashlets. Double-click or drag-and-drop the SMS/Email Messaging dashlet onto the dashboard.
The dashlet appears on the selected dashboard.
You can display multiple SMS/Email Messaging dashlets on the dashboard.
Click Send SMS Message to display message options in the dashlet.
The SMS/Email Messaging dashlet includes an option to alternatively send an email. Choose "Send Email" if you prefer to send the message via email. Selected vehicles or drivers must have an email address added to their contact information.
Click the drop-down to select the vehicle or driver group that you want to receive the message. (Use the "show drivers" and "show vehicles" link to toggle between the types.)
All vehicles with valid SMS phone numbers in the selected group are selected by default.
Clear individual check boxes as needed to isolate a subset of vehicle(s) or driver(s) in the current group.
Type your message (cannot exceed 160 characters).
Click Send Message.
The selected number(s) should receive the message within 5-30 seconds.
Send a Message from the SMS Messaging Interface
In order to use the SMS Messaging interface, you must have the Messaging permission enabled in the User Access List and the SMS Messaging items enabled in the Menu Access List (Custom category).
Example
Company XYZ has several warehouses used by its Delivery drivers. Warehouse A just went dark due to a critical power outage in the area, and the fleet manager wants to notify drivers of the issue.
To send a message from the SMS Messaging interface:
From the portal, hover over the More menu, click SMS Messaging, and click Open.
The SMS Messaging page opens in a new browser tab.
In the Compose grid, click the drop-down to select the vehicle or driver group that you want to receive the message. (Use the "show drivers" and "show vehicles" link to toggle between the types.)
All vehicles with valid SMS phone numbers in the selected group are selected by default.
Clear individual check boxes as needed to isolate a subset of vehicle(s) or driver(s) in the current group.
Type your message (cannot exceed 160 characters).
Click Send Message.
The selected numbers should receive the message within 5-30 seconds. An onscreen message appears to indicate how many messages were sent successfully and how many failed (if any).
Send a Message from a Map
In order to send a message from a map, you must have the Messaging permission enabled in the User Access List.
Example
Company XYZ has several warehouses used by its Delivery drivers. Warehouse A just went dark due to a critical power outage in the area, and the fleet manager wants to notify drivers of the issue.
To send a message from a 2D or 3D map:
From the mapping interface, click the vehicle you want to message.
If SMS Messaging features are enabled for your account, the pop-up contains a Mobile line item for all vehicles, regardless of whether or not a phone number is assigned.
Click Send SMS to [vehicle name].
The SMS Messaging interface opens in a new browser tab. In the Compose grid, ensure the selected vehicle has a phone number assigned.
If a number is not assigned, the message will fail. Click to "Vehicle Contact Info" or "Driver contact info" to assign a number:
In the Compose grid, type your message (cannot exceed 160 characters).
Click Send Message.
The selected number should receive the message within 5-30 seconds. An onscreen message appears to indicate how many messages were sent successfully and how many failed (if any).
[post_title] => Sending SMS Messages from the Portal
[post_excerpt] => Using the portal, you can send an SMS message from several areas of the portal: The dashboard, the SMS Messaging interface, or from 2D and 3D maps.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => sending-sms-messages-from-the-portal
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:59:22
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:59:22
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 525
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=947
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 526
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-28 21:23:16
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-28 21:23:16
[post_content] => Queries allow you to issue various requests from any standard cell phone with SMS service, from an attached Garmin device, or from an authorized email address. Once your phone or email address is authorized, the portal offers several query-based services for your account: Admin Functions, Driver Functions, Alert Monitor Functions, and Garmin Functions. Queries must be formatted according to a specific syntax in order to receive a valid response.
Authorize Your SMS-Enabled Device
Before using query services on your phone, you must authorize your device using your portal credentials for your account. Authorization is a one-time setup process.
Authorization of an SMS number happens automatically if the number was included in an SMS message sent from the portal. You can view authorized numbers for your account by opening the portal and going to Account > Manage Users > Authentication for email and SMS queries.
To authorize your SMS-enabled device
Compose a new text message using the following syntax (substitute your username and password for the placeholders shown with brackets):
gps login [username] [password]
Send the message to 477-477 (GPSGPS).
If your credentials were sent successfully, you'll receive a confirmation message: "Login succeeded. Proceed with any GPS command"
Authorize Your Email Address
Before using query services in an email, you must authorize your email address in your account and then create token(s) for each vehicle group that you want to isolate. Authorization is a one-time setup process.
To authorize your email address:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Authentication for email and SMS queries.
The Authenticate Phones for SMS Query page opens in a new browser tab.
In the Email List grid, click Email next to Register New.
In the Add New Email window, enter your email address, and associate it to a user account.
Click Add Email.
A success message indicates that the address was saved.
From the bottom of the Group Token List grid, click Group Token next to Register New.
In the Add New Group Token window, choose the username for which you want to associate groups, and then choose a vehicle access group.
Click Add Group Token.
A new token (XXXX) is created for the selected vehicle group. You'll use this token in the "To" address when you send query-based emails.
You can send individual messages to a particular vehicle within the group token when you specify the vehicle in the query. The token just ensures that you have access to the vehicles within the group.
From the Query Wizard, click Email.
When the Query Wizard expands, choose an email address from the list of authorized users.
Choose a Vehicle Group (group token).
The Query Wizard refreshes to show the 'To' Address that you must use whenever sending query-based emails to the selected vehicle group:
Send Messages using Query Functions
The following queries are available to use with SMS messaging, email messaging, or Garmin messaging (only where indicated). For phone-based queries, send messages to 477-477 (GPSGPS). For email-based queries, send messages to the customized address(es) for your username. Responses are typically received 5-30 seconds after the query has been sent. Input is not case-sensitive.
Admin Functions
Admin functions require authorization.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|25%|25%|35%"]
Query,Syntax,Response Example(s),Notes
Current Location,gps [vehicle name]~~~~Example: gps TR-150,TR-150: Idle stop for 4 min at Headquarters~~OR~~TR-150: 65 mph WNW (75 max) at 19001 N. Scottsdale Road\, Scottsdale\, AZ (33.6594398 -111.9247721),[Vehicle name] can be full or partial. All matching vehicles are returned in the response. Append the keyword address to return an address instead of a landmark name (if applicable).~~Append the keyword/value cc [recipient number] to send the response to another recipient.
Group Location,gps [group name] group~~~~Example: gps Delivery group,TR-150: Stopped 8 hrs\, 5 min at 19001 N. Scottsdale Road\, Scottsdale\, AZ (33.6594398 -111.9247721)~~TR-151...[repeat for each vehicle in the group],[Group name] cannot be partial.
Set Landmark,gps [vehicle name] landmark [new landmark name]~~~~Example: gps TR-150 landmark Checkpoint D38,LANDMARK: checkpoint d38 created at lat/lon: 33.6594398 -111.9247721,[Vehicle name] must be full name (no partials).
Driving Distance,gps [vehicle name] distance [entity]~~~~Example: gps TR-150 distance headquarters,TR-150 (42 mph ENE (max)) is 21.2 mi. drive from Headquarters (about 33 min),The keyword distance can be shortened to dist. [Entity] can be a vehicle name (full or partial)\, a landmark\, or a street address. Use commas between address parts.
Close Vehicles,gps [vehicle name] close~~~~Example: gps TR-150 close,VN-173 35 yards E stopped~~VN-174 409 yards N 34 mph W -41 sec~~VN-175...[repeat for each vehicle within range],[Vehicle name] can be full or partial. All matching vehicles are returned in the response.~~Moving vehicles report the number of seconds between when the two vehicles according to the last time they reported. Positive = queried vehicle reported first; negative = response vehicle reported first. In the example\, VN-174 reported 41 seconds ago\, which means the distance (409 yards) may have changed since it was originally estimated (assuming the vehicle continued moving W at 34 mph).
Register Vehicle Phone Number,gps [vehicle name] driver [phone number]~~~~Example: gps TR-150 driver 5553859399,5553859399 was assigned to 'TR-150',[Phone number] is necessary only if sending the query from a different phone number.
[/et]
Driver Functions
Driver functions do not require authorization, but a driver's phone number must be associated with a vehicle before issuing any of these queries.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|25%|25%|35%"]
Query,Syntax,Response Example(s),Notes
Driver Lookup by ID,gps id [driver id] or gps [driver id] id~~~~Example: gps id 09283,Driver 'Sally Jones (09283)' is assigned to vehicle (TR-150),This query is commonly used when auto driver assignment is not installed; it provides a sanity check to see which driver is currently logged into a vehicle.
Driver Assignment,gps [vehicle name] driver [first last\, or last\, or reference ID]~~Example: gps TR-150 driver Sally Jones,Driver 'Sally Gypsy' logged into 'TR-150',[Vehicle name] is optional if the driver's SMS number is already assigned to the vehicle.
Fuel Purchase,gps [vehicle name] fuel $[cost] [gallons] gallons [odometer] odo~~~~Example: gps fuel 12.697 gallons $45.19,Fuel Purchase Recorded,[Vehicle name] is optional if the driver's SMS number is already assigned to the vehicle. [Cost] must follow the keyword $. [Gallons] must precede the keyword gal or gallons. [Odometer] is optional. Must precede the keyword odo.
Odometer Update,gps [vehicle name] odo [odometer value]~~~~Example: gps odo 31773,Odometer for 'TR-150' was updated to 31773,[Vehicle name] is optional if the driver's SMS number is already assigned to the vehicle. [Odometer value] must not use punctuation.
Runtime Update,gps [vehicle name] runtime [runtime value]~~~~Example: gps runtime 1301,TR-150 was updated to 1301,[Vehicle name] is optional if the driver's SMS number is already assigned to the vehicle. [Runtime value] must not use punctuation.
Stop Notes,gps [vehicle name] note [note text]~~~~Example: gps note customer was not home for delivery,Your note was received,Stop notes are viewable on 3D History maps and the Stop Notes report. [Vehicle name] is optional if the driver's SMS number is already assigned. [Note text] can include images when using email (not SMS) to record notes.
Stop,stop,Number blocked. We will no longer send messages to [phone number].,Blocked phone numbers are visible on the Manage Vehicles Contact Info page. In order to remove a stop request\, contact Support.
[/et]
Alert Monitor Functions
Alert monitor functions require authorization. A monitor tells the system to look for alert conditions. Alert monitors differ from other queries in that you should receive two responses: 1) Confirmation that the monitor is set, 2) Confirmation that alert conditions have been met (may not happen immediately).
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|25%|25%|35%"]
Query,Syntax,Response Example(s),Notes
Parking Monitor,gps [vehicle name] parked~~~~Example: gps TR-150 parked,First Response: 'TR-150' is being monitored. You will be notified as soon as we see it is running.~~Second Response (occurs when the vehicle's ignition changes from off to on): TR‑150 is running as of 2:51:00 PM (0 MPH).,[Vehicle name] must be full (no partials). Monitor expires the first time the alert conditions are met. No additional alerts will occur unless you set another monitor.
Meeting Monitor,gps [vehicle 1 name] meet [vehicle 2 name] [miles]~~~~Example: gps TR-150 meet TR-151 3,First Response: TR-150 and TR-151 are being monitored. You will be notified as soon as we see them within 3 miles of each other.~~Second Response (occurs when the vehicles are within X miles of each other): TR-151 (parked) is 0.03 miles SE from TR-150 (parked).,[Vehicle name] must be full (no partials). [Miles] is optional. If not specified\, the default is 1 mile. Monitor expires the first time the alert conditions are met. No additional alerts will occur unless you set another monitor.
[/et]
Garmin Functions
Garmin functions require authorization. You must also be using Garmin services and have Garmin devices attached to your devices.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|25%|25%|35%"]
Query,Syntax,Response Example(s),Notes
Garmin Dispatch,gps [vehicle name] dispatch [location]~~~~Example: gps TR-150 dispatch Headquarters,The Garmin device in the vehicle receives a dispatch notice.,[Vehicle name] must be full (no partials). The keyword dispatch can be shortened to dis. [Location] can be a landmark name or street address. (Use commas between address parts.)
Garmin Message,gps [vehicle name] garmin [message]~~~~Example: gps TR-150 garmin Happy Flag Day!,The Garmin device in the vehicle receives a message.,[Vehicle name] must be full (no partials). The keyword garmin can be shortened to gm.
Stop Notes,gps [vehicle name] note [note text]~~~~Example: gps note customer was not home for delivery,Your note was received,Stop notes are viewable on the Garmin or SMS Messaging Dashlet(s)\, the SMS Messaging or Garmin Integration Pages\, and the Stop Notes report. [Vehicle name] is optional if the driver's SMS number is already assigned.
Stop,stop,Number blocked. We will no longer send messages to [phone number].,Blocked phone numbers are visible on the Manage Vehicles Contact Info page. In order to remove a stop request\, contact Support.
[/et]
USPS Routing Features
These functions relate to USPS integration. You must be using USPS web services and have a valid CRID to utilize this function.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|25%|25%|35%"]
Query,Syntax,Response Example(s),Notes
USPS Contracts,gps usps contracts~~~~Example: gps usps contracts,ConID: 123XYZ (trip ID: 101\,102),The response will have two parts: The Contract ID from USPS (ConID) and the trips available for assignment within this Contract ID (required for assignment).
USPS Assign,gps [vehicle name] usps [ConID] [action] [trip ID] [date or NASS]~~~~Example: gps Truck5 usps 4562 de 4~~~~Example: gps Truck5 usps 4562 de 4 11/11/2011~~~~Example:gps Truck5 usps 4562 de 4 7031,'Truck5' has been assigned to contract '4562 de 4' and data is being sent to USPS,Assigning a vehicle with a 'DE' or 'ER' action will initiate a data feed about this vehicle to the USPS. Assigning a vehicle with a 'AR' action will terminate the data feed after sending a final 'Arrival' notification. USPS contracts should be set up ahead of time by Support. Use 'usps contracts' query to test for available contracts. Messages sent from Garmin can be reviewed in the Garmin page (Custom > Garmin > Open)
[/et]
[post_title] => Using Query Services
[post_excerpt] => Queries allow you to issue various requests from any standard cell phone with SMS service, from an attached Garmin device, or from an authorized email address.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-query-services
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:59:31
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:59:31
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 525
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=526
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 948
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:03:11
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:03:11
[post_content] => Message History allows you to see all messages and SMS queries that were sent or received from your GPS account. You can view SMS message from several areas of the portal: The dashboard or the SMS Messaging interface. The filter and alert options vary for each area.
Example
Company XYZ's owner wants to see all alert monitors that have been applied to fleet vehicles within the last week.
To view message history from the dashboard:
From the dashboard, locate the Messaging dashlets. Double-click or drag-and-drop the SMS/Email Messaging dashlet onto the dashboard.
The dashlet appears on the selected dashboard.
You can display multiple SMS/Email Messaging dashlets on the dashboard.
Click SMS Message Inbox to display message history in the dashlet.
SMS queries are indicated by this icon: . Messages sent from the portal are indicated by this icon: .
Click Edit (pencil icon) in the dashboard to change filter and alert options. When finished, click Apply. In the Company XYZ example, we changed the "Display History" option to 7 days. The dashlet does not offer a search option to filter by keyword "monitor," so we could visually scan for any messages with this keyword or use CTRL + F.
Note the "Display new message alert option." This option is only available when viewing message history from the dashboard. If selected, incoming messages will appear highlighted in red within the dashlet as they are received.
The list of messages refreshes to display items that match the search criteria.
When you click a message, other messages may become if they have the same to/from numbers.
To view message history from the SMS Messaging interface:
From the portal, hover over the More menu, click SMS Messaging, and click Open.
The SMS Messaging page opens in a new browser tab.
SMS queries are indicated by this icon: .
Messages sent from the portal are indicated by this icon: .
To view messages in a list as opposed to a conversation thread, choose List.
In the Message History grid, choose the filter option(s) you want, and click Apply. In the Company XYZ example, we chose "7d" from the Date Range and entered "monitor" in the Search String.
The list of messages refreshes to display items that match the search criteria.
[post_title] => Viewing Message History
[post_excerpt] => Message History allows you to see all messages and SMS queries that were sent or received from your GPS account.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => viewing-message-history
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:59:27
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:59:27
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 525
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=948
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 4
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 525
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-28 21:20:59
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-28 21:20:59
[post_content] => SMS Messaging allows you to send SMS messages from within the portal and/or from your mobile device. You (and your drivers) can explore additional query services for more advanced functions performed from an SMS-enabled device--such as getting a vehicle's current location, setting landmarks, adding stop notes, and more.
In order to use Messaging, you must have the Messaging permission enabled in the User Access List, the SMS Messaging and SMS/Email items enabled in the Menu Access List (Custom and Dashlet categories). You will only see messages associated with vehicles and/or drivers that are available to you.
Your message cannot exceed 160 characters. If your message exceeds 160 characters, the message is broken down into multiple messages consisting of 153 characters. The total maximum character limit is 918 characters.
[post_title] => About Messaging
[post_excerpt] => SMS Messaging allows you to send SMS messages from within the portal and/or from your mobile device.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-messaging
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:59:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:59:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=525
[menu_order] => 11
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 4
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => b0af64c4845dbb33fd6f07d8f9e4d072
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:02c133648a0c9bf0dff1c3bba233394f
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 47
[name] => Messaging
[slug] => messaging
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 47
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Messaging allows you to send SMS messages from within the portal and/or from your mobile device. You (and your drivers) can explore additional query services for more advanced functions performed from an SMS-enabled device--such as getting a vehicle's current location, setting landmarks, adding stop notes, and more.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 8
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 14
[cat_ID] => 47
[category_count] => 8
[category_description] => Messaging allows you to send SMS messages from within the portal and/or from your mobile device. You (and your drivers) can explore additional query services for more advanced functions performed from an SMS-enabled device--such as getting a vehicle's current location, setting landmarks, adding stop notes, and more.
[cat_name] => Messaging
[category_nicename] => messaging
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 4
)
[69] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 69
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 69
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 69
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 69
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 69
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (69)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 973
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:34:38
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:34:38
[post_content] => Metrics refers to individual Custom Metrics, Metric Scorecards, and Metrics Reports.
Use Metrics to gain a deeper understanding of your key performance indicators and to help improve fleet utilization. This information is relevant to reducing costs that impact the bottom line.
Custom vehicle metrics allow you to determine what key performance indicators to count, measure, score, compare, and calculate. In other words, it's a powerful a tool set that is driven entirely by the items you care about most in your fleet--such as the total number of speeding events, the average speed of speed violations, the total hours idled, the total distance traveled, etc.
There are three varying permissions that you can give a user (or combination of) related to metrics. 1) In order to create/edit custom metrics and use scorecard configuration tools, a user must have the Custom Metrics item enabled in the User Permission List. 2) In order to run metrics reports (not create metrics), a user must have the Manage Metrics item enabled in the Menu Access List (Custom category). 3) In order to run a traditional metric report, a user must have the Metrics Scorecard item enabled in the Menu Access List (Report category).
System Metrics
The summarization data for some device-based events are automatically available to you as a system metric. System metrics are not customizable, but you can report on them using Metrics Reports and dashlets:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|40%|30%"]
Device Type,Description,Metric(s)
Custom Device Inputs,Devices that have been configured to use custom inputs (e.g.\, snow plow up/down\, seatbelt on/off\, etc.),Two metrics per input:~~•Count of event~~•On duration of event
PNP-3000,Devices that have the optional buzzer feature for in-cab alerts.,•Hard Braking Count~~•Hard Left Count~~•Hard Right Count~~•Idling Count~~•Rapid Acceleration Count~~•Speeding Count [/et]
The PNP-3000 device has been discontinued as of January 2026.
Metrics Reporting
Use the Metrics Reports tool to view summary, detail, and trend data about an existing metric or scorecard (collection of metric scores) using various charts and tables.
You can also view individual metrics from several places on the dashboard and the traditional reporting interface, such as the Vehicle Selector dashlet, Utilization Rollup dashlet, and the Fleet Hierarchy Rollup report.
The Metrics feature is currently available for US customers only.
[post_title] => About Metrics
[post_excerpt] => Use Metrics to gain a deeper understanding of your key performance indicators and to help improve fleet utilization.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-metrics
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-01-14 12:30:21
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-01-14 19:30:21
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=973
[menu_order] => 9
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1644
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-03-09 16:09:45
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-03-09 16:09:45
[post_content] => The Manage Custom Metrics page allows you to add custom metrics and active scoring tools, backfill metric data, and make metrics available for reports and dashlets. Keep in mind, metrics are based on DAILY summarization data for each vehicle.
You can only see vehicle data for the groups/hierarchies that you are allowed to see; however, you can see all metrics that other users have created.
Add a Metric and Scoring Tool (optional)
A metric provides a raw value for a defined measurement. A scoring tool allows you to produce a score based on that value.
Metric Types
You can create a vehicle custom metric for any of the following items:
[row]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
*Vehicle Scorecard is a special type of metric (a metric made up of other metrics). It's best to use the Metrics Scorecard Configuration to experiment with weights and scores and generate the metric from there as opposed to this page. One reason you might use this Manage Custom Metrics tool to create a vehicle scorecard metric is if you wanted to add something other than Idling, Speeding, Acceleration, or Deceleration to the scorecard.
**A special type of metric (a metric made of other "Count" metrics). It is intended as an alternative scorecard for weighted averages. It applies only to the following metric types: Count Vehicle Stops, Count Vehicle Idle Stops, Count Vehicle Landmark Visits, Count Driver Assignments, Count Speeding Events, Count Alerts Triggered, Count Acceleration Events, Count Deceleration Events, and Count Drivers.
Scoring Tool Options
A scoring tool allows you to produce a score based on a metric. In other words, it translates a raw metric value into a score. You are not required to choose a scoring tool for a metric if you don’t intend to use it for scoring purposes. You can create a scoring tool based on any of the following options:
Calculation - Apply a ratio or calculation to the metric (e.g., speeding events per 100 miles or per run time hours).
Bucket - Apply a bucket system to the metric. For example, if you're creating a metric for the number of stops in a day, you might create three groups (buckets) based on stop counts (over/under) that are assigned point values (e.g., ≥10 stops = 3 points, 5-9 stops = 2 points, 0-4 stops = 1 point). A bucket system is the least granular type of scoring tool because it doesn't automatically calculate values in between buckets; it simply lumps a group of values together and assigns them a single point value.
Custom Scale - Apply points for a 0-100 scale. For example, if the metric is based on the number of speeding events, you might assign a point value of 100 to 0 speeding events and 60 points to 4 speeding events (failure threshold). When the metric runs, the scoring tool automatically calculates how many points each event is worth to obtain a score.
Scoring Tool Types
The scoring tools that you can apply to a metric will be one of four types:
Time
Distance
Event
Speed
Example
The corporate fleet manager at Company XYZ wants to keep tabs on the average number of idle time each region accumulates weekly (excluding when PTO was engaged). Additionally, he wants each of his regional managers to see total idle time per vehicle daily.
To add a metric:
From the portal, hover over the More menu, click Manage Metrics, and click Manage Metrics.
The Manage Custom Metrics page opens in a new browser tab.
Click the plus () next to the metric you want to create. In the Company XYZ example, we chose Hours Vehicle Idled.
A new grid to the right appears, which allows you to set the thresholds specific to the metric you chose.
Set the metric properties. (See below.)
The following properties are available for all metrics:
Label: The custom name of the metric. Be as specific as possible so that you can tell your metrics apart from each other.
Depending on the metric you create, additional properties vary:
Landmark: The landmark in which (or outside of which) the metric applies. Options include Inside (metric will only count instances inside the selected landmark or landmark group), Outside (metric will only count instances outside the selected landmark), or N/A (the metric will count all instances regardless of vehicle location).
Hours: Choose a time range according to your time zone (user preferences) for which the metric applies.
Conditions: Choose an input condition that applies to the metric (e.g., Door open/closed, PTO on/off, Power internal/external, etc.).
Stop Threshold: Apply a threshold in minutes for a vehicle to be stopped.
Idle Threshold: Apply a threshold in minutes for a vehicle to be idle.
Speed Threshold: Threshold in MPH (not related to posted limit). Based on [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The average speed during a device's report interval." style="top" ]Avg speed[/tooltip].
Over Posted Limit: Threshold in MPH over the posted limit. Posted speed violations are calculated using the [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The last speed value sampled during a device's report interval. For example, if a device's report interval is 2 minutes, the Instantaneous speed is the last data point obtained of the 480 data points collected during the update period (4 times per second x 2 minues)." style="top" ]Inst speed[/tooltip] value.
Alerts: The alert(s) that apply to this metric.
Violation (speed events): Threshold in MPH over the posted limit. Posted speed violations are calculated using the [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="The last speed value sampled during a device's report interval. For example, if a device's report interval is 2 minutes, the Instantaneous speed is the last data point obtained of the 480 data points collected during the update period (4 times per second x 2 minues)." style="top" ]Inst speed[/tooltip] value.
Violation (accel/decel events): Threshold in Gs. DOT defines harsh (not dangerous) braking as .45 g incidents (your average NYC cab driver).
The following properties are available for all metrics:
Tools: See above for examples of each scoring tool type (Calculation, Bucket, Custom Scale). In the Company XYZ example, we don't need to use a score, but it might be useful to have one if we want to extend our scenario. Let's imagine we now have a daily goal of less than 2 idle minutes per vehicle. The higher the score, the further the deviation from the goal. We created six groups (buckets) based on number of minutes (over/under) that are assigned point values (e.g., ≥30 min = 4 points, 21-29 min = 3 points, 11-20 min = 2 points, 5-10 min = 1 point, <5 min = 0 points).
Click Save.
The new metric for the hours (or count, average, or speed depending on the metric) will be listed in the Active Custom Metrics grid. Additionally, if you added a scoring tool to the metric, a second metric for the score will be available, and the scoring tool will be listed in the Active Scoring Tools grid.
Except for renaming a metric (click the metric name from the grid), you cannot edit metric details after the metric has been created. You can either add a scoring tool to an existing metric, or you can create a new metric from scratch. Preventing you from editing the metric details helps preserve historical data consistency (i.e., avoids comparing different data sets that measure different things).
Click the i icon in the Active Custom Metrics or Active Scoring Tools grids to see which metrics rely on the selected metric or the selected scoring tool (if any). This information is helpful if you want to clean up your list of unused metrics and/or scoring tools.
Backfill Metric Data
Metrics rely on daily summarization data. When you create a new metric, data will automatically populate for every day going forward. You don't need to manually backfill. However, if you want to populate historical data for a metric, you can optionally backfill data to a particular day.
.
Backfilling data might apply if you want to use the metric on a report for a particular date range. If you apply a metric to a report, you may receive a notification to backfill the metric if you select a date range that extends prior to the metric's creation or earliest backfill.
Add Metrics to Reports and Dashlets
By default metrics (other than Scorecard metrics) are not available to use on reports and dashlets. Once you make a metric available to reports and dashlets, you may be able to apply additional configuration, such as whether the report and/or dashlet should provide a Sum, Avg, Min, or Max value. The Utilization Rollup dashlet also allows you to show summarization data and gradient colors (optional) for a Daily, Weekly, or Monthly options.
To add a metric to a report and dashlet:
Locate the metric from the Active Custom Metrics grid, and click the Make Available to Dashlets and Reports icon.
Return to the dashboard, and refresh the window (F5).
Adjust the dashlet or report settings. (Let's look at the dashlets and reports that the fleet manager in Company XYZ's scenario might be interested in.)
Utilization Rollup Dashlet
Click the Edit icon (), and add the new metric as a column on the dashlet. Specify whether to display the metric using Sum, Average, Minimum, or Maximum. (We chose Average and set the Display to Weekly.)
The Display option in this dashlet's setting does not apply to Custom Metrics. (This dashlet also supports Trip Summary, Vehicle Attributes, and Landmark Attributes, which do support the Display options.) In this case, if we chose "Weekly" for our metric column, data will include up to seven days of data (if available) for the calculation we chose (i.e., Sum, Average, Minimum, or Maximum).
Utilization Rollup Dashlet | Safety Scorecard
A Safety Scorecard provides a numeric scoring (1 - 100 scale) in relation to chosen metrics. This Utilization Rollup Dashlet example includes the score for the Safety Scorecard in the last column.
Vehicle Selector Dashlet
Click the Edit icon (), and add the new metric as an attribute on the dashlet. (In the Company XYZ example, Regional Managers can use this to keep tabs on their vehicles' daily idle hours.)
This dashlet shows daily values only (for the previous day).
Fleet Hierarchy Rollup
Add the new metric(s) as an attribute on the report. Specify whether to display the metric using Sum, Average, Minimum, or Maximum. (In the Company XYZ example, we chose Average for the Hours and Sum for the Score. The fleet manager might use this monthly score to isolate regions who need more coaching i.e., 4s or 5s.)
If you plan to use this data to compare trends over time, export the report to Excel. The next time you run the report for another date range, you can export the data again and compare it to the first export.
[post_title] => Adding a Custom Metric
[post_excerpt] => The Manage Custom Metrics page allows you to add custom metrics and active scoring tools, backfill metric data, and make metrics available for reports and dashlets.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-custom-metric
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:56:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:56:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 973
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1644
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1646
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-03-09 16:09:20
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-03-09 16:09:20
[post_content] => A metrics scorecard is a special type of metric in that it typically contains a collection of other metrics/scores. The configuration tool allows you to experiment with weights and thresholds for each metric that will contribute to the total score, allowing you to visualize how your point system affects your actual fleet data.
Not sure what to measure? Consider planning your scorecard goals before getting your feet wet.
You can only see vehicle data for the groups/hierarchies that you are allowed to see; however, you can see all scorecards that other users have created. Use caution when editing the properties of another user's scorecard without their knowledge.
Example
The corporate fleet manager at Company XYZ wants to implement a scoring system for aggressive driving, which includes posted speed events (11MPH over), acceleration events (.45g), and deceleration events (.45g). He wants to score his fleet on a monthly basis to isolate regions who need the most coaching.
Add a Metrics Scorecard
A metrics scorecard is not required in order to create a Vehicle Scorecard metric. It's a visualization tool that allows you to experiment how different weights and thresholds apply to actual data in your fleet so that you can set realistic baselines.
To add a metrics scorecard:
From the portal, hover over the More menu, click Manage Metrics, and click Scorecard Configuration Tool.
The Scorecard Configuration Tool page opens in a new browser tab.
From the New Scorecard window, enter a Name for the Scorecard. (We used "Aggressive Driving.")
Add the metrics you want to include in the scorecard (i.e., Count Speeding Events, Count Acceleration Events, and Count Deceleration Events).
The available metrics to use here may not reflect all of the available metrics to use. If a metric is not listed, you'll need to manually create the Scorecard metric using the Metrics Manager.
For each metric, click Edit to modify the properties. The first thing you should do is edit the name to be meaningful. Other edits you can make include clicking on the scale to add another range value. Click a color to modify the color ranges to suit your preferences. In this example, a high score is desirable (i.e., fewer speeding events above 11MPH posted).
The number of events you use for your thresholds apply to ONE vehicle per DAY. In this example, we're saying that one vehicle triggering 6+ speeding events per day is still worthy of 34 points. If it's easier to define thresholds for a longer time period, you can adjust the date range above the scorecard. If you do, you are still setting thresholds that apply to ONE vehicle, but it can be for one WEEK or one MONTH (or whatever range you choose). If you do change the date range, be sure to click reset score under each metric to auto-calculate a range based on current worst/best. Keep in mind, however, that you should base your lowest score on YOUR preferences for acceptability rather than what your worst driver happens to define.
Click Done when finished modifying the preferences for each metric.
Click the weight for each metric to adjust the percentage toward the total score. For example, you might want speeding to impact the score more heavily that accel/decel events.
All percentages in the scorecard should total 100%.
Click Save Edits. (Do NOT click Save Scorecard yet.)
The data in the report updates based on the settings in the scorecard. To modify the data used in the report, adjust the vehicle Group, Date Range, Average/Sum option, and Show Unutilized Vehicles option.
Data must process for each day for each vehicle included in the date range each time you change settings in your scorecard. It's often best to experiment with weights and thresholds on a subset of vehicle (e.g., one hierarchy branch or group) rather than the entire fleet. If you change the date range, you should reset the thresholds (or manually adjust) that you applied in step 4 to reflect the days in the range.
In the Company XYZ example, the points assigned to the various thresholds in each metric provide an overall fleet score of 74 (sorted by lowest Final Score). From here, you can decide if you want to adjust thresholds or if you're satisfied with this baseline.
Additionally, you can use the Quick Overview at the top of the page to view the scorecard using various chart types: Overall Combined, Line, Stacked, Overall, and Count (for each event on scorecard).
Save Metric Score
When you're satisfied with the scorecard you created, you can save the metric scores that make up the scorecard. Once you click Save Scorecard, you can edit the weights on the scorecard after clicking Save Edits without affecting the metric score or creating any new custom metrics; however, if you modify the weights or any of the settings within each metric after clicking Save Scorecard, a new metric score will be created each time.
You can only see vehicle data for the groups/hierarchies that you are allowed to see; however, when you save a scorecard, the portal generates metrics for all vehicles in the account (even if you can't see that data) for the date(s) specified. In other words, if the saving process is taking longer than you'd expect, keep in mind that the process may be running against a much larger data set than you can view. Similarly, if other users create scorecards, metrics for your vehicles will also automatically be back-filled for the date specified at the time of the save.
To save metric scores:
From the Scorecard Configuration Tool, use the Scorecard drop-down to open the scorecard you finished editing.
Click Save Scorecard.
The new metric score will be listed in the Active Custom Metrics grid on the Manage Custom Metrics page. By default, Vehicle Scorecard metrics are automatically available for reporting.
View the Scorecard in Reports
After you create a scorecard, you can view it in report format in two places: The Metrics Reports (dynamic report) or the Metrics Scorecard Report (traditional report). It's highly encouraged to use Metrics Reports to view scorecard data so that you can better visualize trends and drill deeper into the data. It's considered an Executive Dashboard.
Metrics Scorecard Report (traditional)
The Metrics Scorecard report shows scores based on summarization data from the previous day. Metrics are calculated overnight for the day prior (12:00 AM - 11:59 PM).
To run a Metrics Scorecard report:
From the dashboard, click the Reports menu, and click Metrics Scorecard.
Choose the Group of vehicles to include in the report.
Choose the Scorecard metric to apply to the report. (We chose "Vehicle Scorecard Aggressive Driving.")
Click Run Report.
The report opens in a new browser tab.
If you plan to use this data to compare trends over time, export the report to Excel. The next time you run the report for another date range, you can export the data again and compare it to the first export.
driver scorecard
[post_title] => Configuring a Metrics Scorecard
[post_excerpt] => A metrics scorecard is a special type of metric in that it typically contains a collection of other metrics/scores.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => configuring-a-metrics-scorecard
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-01-31 15:44:56
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-01-31 22:44:56
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 973
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1646
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 7645
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2017-07-20 16:09:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2017-07-20 16:09:09
[post_content] => In order to view, create or edit Custom Metrics and Scorecard Reports, a user must have the following access privileges:
User Permissions for Metrics enabled in Menu-Access for individual users.
User Permission List | Custom Metrics
From the portal main menu, click Account and then click Manage Users.
In the Additional Options menu, select Permissions for individual users (opens in a new browser Tab).
Click the checkbox to enable Custom Metrics for a user.
To view the Utilization Rollup, a user must also have Hierarchy Admin enabled in the User Permissions List.
Manage Users | Menu-Access for individual users
In the portal, click Account, then click Manage Users.
In Additional Options menu, select Menu-Access for individual users (opens in a new browser Tab).
Menu-Access List | User Permissions | Category: Custom
In the top menu bar, select Category: Custom and click the filter button.
Scorecards involve up to 3 of the available User Permissions for Metrics:
Manage Metrics = the user can create, edit and delete custom metrics.
Scorecard Configuration = the user can configure scorecards.
Metrics Report = the user can view and run custom metrics reports. End users need this checkbox enabled if they will be viewing reports ONLY.
Menu-Access List | User Permissions | Category: Dashlets
In the top menu bar, select Category: Dashlets and click the filter button.
Click the checkbox to enable Utilization Rollup for a user.
Metrics are shared by all users who have access to them. Please consider that users can edit/delete/view each other's metrics and any changes are global. In order to run a traditional Metric Report, a user must have the Metrics Scorecard option enabled in the Menu Access List , Category: Report.
[post_title] => User Permissions for Scorecards
[post_excerpt] => In order to view, create or edit Custom Metrics and Scorecard Reports, a user must have the following access privileges.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => user-permissions-for-scorecards
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:56:31
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:56:31
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 973
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=7645
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 2088
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-05-09 05:20:24
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-05-09 05:20:24
[post_content] => Metrics Reports is a special dashboard that is specific to custom metrics. It allows you to view summary, detail, and trend data about an existing custom metric using various charts and tables.
Access a Metrics Report
The default metrics report view allows you to view the following report items: Summary, Guages, Top Performers, Bottom Performers, Score Trend Chart, and Rank Detail.
To access a Metrics Report:
From the portal, hover over the More menu, click Manage Metrics, and click Metrics Reports.
The Metrics Report page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Report Options area, choose a vehicle Group, the Metric you want to run, and the Date(s) to include in the report.
Click Run Report.
The report loads the following report items:
Summary
Displays the metric selected, the vehicle group selected, the number of vehicles included in the report, the report time period, and the group total. The group total reflects either the Average or Summary based on your selection in Report Options ().
Gauges
Displays guages for Max, Min, Median, and Average. Also includes a standard deviation chart for Normalized data and a bar chart for Scores.
Top Performers
Displays the top 5 (default) performers. Click the Settings icon to change to the top 10, 15, 20
Bottom Performers
Displays the bottom 5 (default) performers. Click the Settings icon to change to the top 10, 15, 20
Score Trend Chart
Displays a bar chart showing scores for each vehicle in the selection. Average and Median lines overlay the chart for quick analysis of vehicles that fall above or below those thresholds. Click the Options icon to view print/export options for the chart. Clicking the red arrow in the chart below (Rank Detail) affects the sort order of this chart. You can also change default sort order using the Edit Settings (gear) icon from the Report Options area.
Rank Detail
Displays rank detail for reach vehicle in the selection. Click the Filter icon to limit the data set based on Vehicle, Date, Distance, Runtime or Score. Use the Hide/Show () icon to hide individual columns. Click the Export icon to export data to a CSV file (Hide/show selections apply to exported reports). Click the red arrow to sort in ascending/descending order.
Show Scorecard Components
Scorecard components allow you to view the metrics report from the perspective of a scorecard (if available). Instead of the Rank Detail, the scorecard is shown with columns for each metric that makes up the scorecard. You can drill into a specific metric from the scorecard to dynamically update the Gauges and Trend Chart.
To show scorecard components:
From the Report Options, click the Edit Settings (gear) icon.
Select the Show Scorecard Components check box, and click Run Report.
The Score Trend Chart and Rank Detail are replaced with Scorecard values.
Click a metric from the scorecard to drill into details for that particular measurement.
Schedule a Metrics Report
Scheduling the metrics reports allows you to save your report settings for regular, automated delivery to one or more recipients via email. You can schedule the report from the Scheduled Reports page or from the Metrics Reports page.
To schedule a Metrics Report:
From the portal, hover over the More menu, click Manage Metrics, and click Metrics Reports.
The Metrics Report page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Report Options area, choose a vehicle Group, the Metric you want to run, and the Date(s) to include in the report.
Click Schedule.
The report loads the following metric report-specific items:
Refer to Scheduling a Report for description of the other available properties that apply to all scheduled reports.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%]
Option,Description
Components,View the metrics report from the perspective of a scorecard (if available). Instead of the Rank Detail with a single score\, the scorecard is shown with columns for each metric that makes up the scorecard.
Rank,Rank the data in ascending order of score.
Date,Group the data by Day\, Week\, or Month.
Aggregate,Group data based on average or sum.
Attribute,Include existing vehicle attributes to include on the spreadsheet export.
[/et]
[post_title] => Using Metrics Reports
[post_excerpt] => Metrics Reports is a special dashboard that is specific to custom metrics.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-metrics-reports
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:57:06
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:57:06
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 973
[guid] => http://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=2088
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 5
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 973
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:34:38
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:34:38
[post_content] => Metrics refers to individual Custom Metrics, Metric Scorecards, and Metrics Reports.
Use Metrics to gain a deeper understanding of your key performance indicators and to help improve fleet utilization. This information is relevant to reducing costs that impact the bottom line.
Custom vehicle metrics allow you to determine what key performance indicators to count, measure, score, compare, and calculate. In other words, it's a powerful a tool set that is driven entirely by the items you care about most in your fleet--such as the total number of speeding events, the average speed of speed violations, the total hours idled, the total distance traveled, etc.
There are three varying permissions that you can give a user (or combination of) related to metrics. 1) In order to create/edit custom metrics and use scorecard configuration tools, a user must have the Custom Metrics item enabled in the User Permission List. 2) In order to run metrics reports (not create metrics), a user must have the Manage Metrics item enabled in the Menu Access List (Custom category). 3) In order to run a traditional metric report, a user must have the Metrics Scorecard item enabled in the Menu Access List (Report category).
System Metrics
The summarization data for some device-based events are automatically available to you as a system metric. System metrics are not customizable, but you can report on them using Metrics Reports and dashlets:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|40%|30%"]
Device Type,Description,Metric(s)
Custom Device Inputs,Devices that have been configured to use custom inputs (e.g.\, snow plow up/down\, seatbelt on/off\, etc.),Two metrics per input:~~•Count of event~~•On duration of event
PNP-3000,Devices that have the optional buzzer feature for in-cab alerts.,•Hard Braking Count~~•Hard Left Count~~•Hard Right Count~~•Idling Count~~•Rapid Acceleration Count~~•Speeding Count [/et]
The PNP-3000 device has been discontinued as of January 2026.
Metrics Reporting
Use the Metrics Reports tool to view summary, detail, and trend data about an existing metric or scorecard (collection of metric scores) using various charts and tables.
You can also view individual metrics from several places on the dashboard and the traditional reporting interface, such as the Vehicle Selector dashlet, Utilization Rollup dashlet, and the Fleet Hierarchy Rollup report.
The Metrics feature is currently available for US customers only.
Alert Disclaimers - Please allow 'alerts@[provider].com' on your email filter to ensure you receive alerts. Reply 'STOP' to any SMS message to stop receiving any future SMS messages. While Alerts are highly accurate, they are optimized for real-time situations as subscribed. Due to occasional cellular network or processing delays, very occasionally alerts will miss an event and should not be considered a reliable substitute for regularly scheduled reports on the same situation of interest. For this reason, we suggest customers also utilize scheduled reports whenever a potentially missed alert would cause difficulty for any reason.
User Profile - Click to reset your password or edit your first name, last name, email address, phone number, address, city, state/zip, country, and timezone. (The timezone applied to a report is the timezone preference set in your user profile).
Map Legend - Click to view definitions for icon colors and icon shapes.
Transfer Device - Click to transfer a device to a new vehicle. See Editing Vehicle Info.
Request Deactivation - Click to request deactivation for one or more devices. See Editing Vehicle Info.
Integrations - Click to access the integrations available to you.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]The portal is highly configurable to make it work for your preferences. Many of these settings--such as units of measurement, time format, speed thresholds, and default group--apply to other areas of the portal. Adjust these settings once, and they are saved for you each time you log into your account.
[/solution]
[post_title] => More Options
[post_excerpt] => Click the More menu item to open the More tab.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => more-options
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:36:20
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:36:20
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=355
[menu_order] => 17
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 354
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 20:02:29
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 20:02:29
[post_content] => Expand the User Preferences icon on the Dashboard to set default options for Locale, Vehicles, Maps, and Reports.
Locale
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Setting,Description
Measurement Units,"Specify the units to display for distances and speeds. Available options are US Standard and Metric."
Time Format,"Specify the format for displaying time. Available options are 12-hour and 24-hour."
Duration Format,"Specify units and decimal precision of duration values (i.e., Stop Time, Idle Time, etc.) in spreadsheet exports. All exports use the same format."
[/et]
Vehicles
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Setting,Description
Label,Override the standard vehicle name with an attribute value. This change affects how the vehicle label appears in dashlets\, reports\, maps\, and all other areas of the portal. The setting is specific to the user logged in.
Auto-Unassign Drivers,Automatically remove a driver assignment from a vehicle as soon as the vehicle ignition turns off. Selecting this check box applies to all driver assignments for the account and overrides any manual assignment preferences that might have been previously set. This option is highly encouraged ONLY for accounts that use keyfobs for driver assignment.
[/et]
Maps
Specify the thresholds for maps. The legend uses the values specified here.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Setting,Description
Speed Threshold,"Speeding vehicles are displayed on maps with a brighter green icon."
Idle Time Threshold,"Idling vehicles are displayed blue after this threshold, green before."
Stop Time Threshold,"Stopped vehicles are displayed yellow until this threshold, then red."
Out of Range Threshold,"Out of range vehicles are displayed orange after this threshold, blue before."
[/et]
[post_title] => Setting User Preferences
[post_excerpt] => Expand the User Preferences icon on the Dashboard to set default options for Locale, Vehicles, Maps, and Reports.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => user-preferences
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-02-10 10:53:15
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-02-10 17:53:15
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 355
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=354
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 2
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 355
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 20:00:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 20:00:40
[post_content] => [solution term="standard"]Click the More menu item to open the More tab. The following options are available:
Alert Disclaimers - Please allow 'alerts@[provider].com' on your email filter to ensure you receive alerts. Reply 'STOP' to any SMS message to stop receiving any future SMS messages. While Alerts are highly accurate, they are optimized for real-time situations as subscribed. Due to occasional cellular network or processing delays, very occasionally alerts will miss an event and should not be considered a reliable substitute for regularly scheduled reports on the same situation of interest. For this reason, we suggest customers also utilize scheduled reports whenever a potentially missed alert would cause difficulty for any reason.
User Profile - Click to reset your password or edit your first name, last name, email address, phone number, address, city, state/zip, country, and timezone. (The timezone applied to a report is the timezone preference set in your user profile).
Map Legend - Click to view definitions for icon colors and icon shapes.
Transfer Device - Click to transfer a device to a new vehicle. See Editing Vehicle Info.
Request Deactivation - Click to request deactivation for one or more devices. See Editing Vehicle Info.
Integrations - Click to access the integrations available to you.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]The portal is highly configurable to make it work for your preferences. Many of these settings--such as units of measurement, time format, speed thresholds, and default group--apply to other areas of the portal. Adjust these settings once, and they are saved for you each time you log into your account.
[/solution]
[post_title] => More Options
[post_excerpt] => Click the More menu item to open the More tab.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => more-options
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:36:20
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:36:20
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=355
[menu_order] => 17
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 2
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 19af2c610558fe9ba6544f3c51b6a67e
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:c40f577d701c743fa5edd78c1b6e7def
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 33
[name] => More
[slug] => more
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 33
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Allows you to manage additional settings related to your account.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 7
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 31
[cat_ID] => 33
[category_count] => 7
[category_description] => Allows you to manage additional settings related to your account.
[cat_name] => More
[category_nicename] => more
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 2
)
[15] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 15
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 15
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 15
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 15
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 15
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (15)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 446
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-22 18:18:28
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-22 18:18:28
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]Reports allow you to quantify activity, idling, stop times, speeding, and other aspects of fleet efficiency.
Click the Reports menu item to open the Reports tab. All report types that are available to run or schedule are listed on this tab. (If you want to see reports that you've scheduled, click the My Reports tab.)
Please see Available Reports for a list of available reports and corresponding descriptions of each report.
All line items in a single report show a consistent time zone (i.e., does not vary by the vehicle's location). Set the timezone in your user profile.
[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]All reports include links to export data for further manipulation and sorting. You can run reports on the fly, or you can schedule a report for automatic delivery.
Please see Available Reports for a list of available reports and corresponding descriptions of each report.
[row]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[servicebox icon="glyphicon-list-alt" icontype="glyphicon" icon_size="40" iconbg_size="100" iconbg_radius="50" margin_bottom="30" margin_top="30" iconbgcolor="#e5e5e5" iconcolor="#777777" heading="Reports (Ad Hoc)" readmore="true" readmore_link="https://help.gpsinsight.com/docs/about-reports/running-a-report/" readmore_text="Learn More..." readmore_type="btn-lg" readmorestyle="default"]Customize your report settings on-demand, and view the results within your current browser session.[/servicebox]
[/column]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[servicebox icon="glyphicon-time" icontype="glyphicon" icon_size="40" iconbg_size="100" iconbg_radius="50" margin_bottom="30" margin_top="30" iconbgcolor="#e5e5e5" iconcolor="#777777" heading="Scheduled Reports" readmore="true" readmore_link="https://help.gpsinsight.com/docs/about-reports/scheduling-a-report-pro/" readmore_text="Learn More..." readmore_type="btn-lg" readmorestyle="default"]Save your report settings for regular, automated delivery to one or more recipients via email.[/servicebox]
[/column]
[/row][/solution][solution term="pro"]
Reports allow you to quantify activity, idling, stop times, speeding, landmark visits, and other aspects of fleet efficiency. All reports include links to export data for further manipulation and sorting. You can run reports on the fly, or you can schedule a report for automatic delivery.
[row]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[servicebox icon="glyphicon-list-alt" icontype="glyphicon" icon_size="40" iconbg_size="100" iconbg_radius="50" margin_bottom="30" margin_top="30" iconbgcolor="#e5e5e5" iconcolor="#777777" heading="Reports (Ad Hoc)" readmore="true" readmore_link="https://help.gpsinsight.com/docs/about-reports/running-a-report/" readmore_text="Learn More..." readmore_type="btn-lg" readmorestyle="default"]Customize your report settings on-demand, and view the results within your current browser session.[/servicebox]
[/column]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[servicebox icon="glyphicon-time" icontype="glyphicon" icon_size="40" iconbg_size="100" iconbg_radius="50" margin_bottom="30" margin_top="30" iconbgcolor="#e5e5e5" iconcolor="#777777" heading="Scheduled Reports" readmore="true" readmore_link="https://help.gpsinsight.com/docs/about-reports/scheduling-a-report-pro/" readmore_text="Learn More..." readmore_type="btn-lg" readmorestyle="default"]Save your report settings for regular, automated delivery to one or more recipients via email.[/servicebox]
[/column]
[/row]
Report Types
The following reports may be available for you to run on-demand.
Not all reports are available for your account. Some reports that are custom to an account are not listed. All reports based on Summary data can be run for vehicle/group (driver-aware) or driver/group (driver-centric).
Activity Reports
Report Name
Description
Activity Detail
Show reported locations and other details for each vehicle. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle, date, and time. Optionally include columns for closest landmark, all points (individual idle and non-ignition points), attribute(s), and diagnostics (if applicable).
Begin/End of Day
Show first start and last stop for any or all vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date and minimum stop duration. Optionally include all activities, exclude first/last stops (e.g., eliminate the driver's commute to/from work), exclude home landmark (e.g., eliminate visits within a landmark such as a service center or yard that you can specify when the option is chosen), or show % drive time.
Drive Time Summary
Show fleet driving statistics. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/group, date, start time, and end time. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], apply to each day, PTO data, and columns for attribute(s).
Driver History
Show vehicle driver assignments. Filter by vehicle/group, and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Fleet Utilization
Show utilization details on all fleet vehicles. Filter by vehicle/group, date, miles daily, and miles total. Optionally include unutilized vehicles, daily utilization, miles and trips, drivers, miles daily (custom threshold), miles total (custom threshold), current location, custom metrics, and columns for attribute(s).
Idle Time Summary
Show idle durations for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time. Optionally include vehicles with no activity, current location, and columns for attribute(s) and/or custom metrics. Optionally hide driver information.
Idle Time Detail
Show individual idle stops for vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Odd-Hours
Show driving-time violations. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, start time, end time, landmark/group, and violation type (in landmark, out of landmark). Optionally treat date selection as a weekend (time restrictions apply to first day and last day). Within the report, click the Drive Time value to open the related Activity Detail report.
Diagnostic Reports
Report Name
Description
Fuel Usage Detail
Show gallons used and miles per gallon reported by the vehicle (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include a gas price/gallon (automatically calculate fuel cost for each line item), show MPG (miles per gallon), show GPH (gallons per hour), show estimated fuel usage, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Fuel Usage Summary
Show gallons consumed by month (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group/driver and date period. Optionally include miles, split data weekly, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Performance
Show most recently reported data from each vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group. Choose to add Stop Duration, Non-Reporting, or Voltage Below parameters. If you choose one of these items, only the vehicles that match the criteria will be included in the report. If you choose MORE than one of these options, the system treats them as "AND" operators. For example, if you chose two options (i.e., stopped for five days AND non-reporting for two days), both of those requirements must be true in order for a vehicle to be included in the report. Optionally include columns for attribute(s). Helps to detect device reporting issues.
Show odometer and run time totals. Filter by vehicle/group, and date. Optionally include service reminders and columns for attribute(s). Selecting the Basic Report option removes all columns except Vehicle, Driver, Days, Last Reported, Run Time, and Run Time (lifetime). If you've added an adjustment baseline, the total run time value will be called “Total Engine Hours” instead of “Total GPS Device Hours.”
Diagnostic
Show diagnostic data collected for supported devices. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
DTC Alerts
Show alert data reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Service History
Show history of logged service for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Choose the Show All option to disregard date selection and show all past service history records for the selected vehicle(s).
Service Reminders
Show pending and overdue service reminders. Filter by group.
Switch Alerts
Show switch-based alerts (e.g., Battery Voltage, External Power Lost, Panic Switch, Power Cycle, or Temperature). Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Driving Violations Detail
Show details on Violations reported by supported diagnostic devices (PNP-3000 buzzer-enabled + others). Filter by vehicle/group. Sort columns in the report by Vehicle, VIN, Driver (if assigned), Violation Time, and Violation Type: Acceleration, Deceleration, Cornering, Idling, and Speeding.
The violation thresholds for these categories are set on a device level at the time of shipment/installation. To set new defaults for your vehicles, use the PNP Threshold Configuration manager.
Show a summary of Violations reported by supported diagnostic devices (PNP-3000 buzzer-enabled only). Filter by vehicle/group. The report shows a series of graphs for Violations by Type, Vehicles with Most Violations, Total Violations, and Violations per 100 miles. Sort columns by Vehicle, Driver (if assigned), Distance, Violations per 100 miles, Hard Braking, Hard Left, Hard Right, Idling, Rapid Acceleration, Speeding, and Total.
The violation thresholds for these categories are set on a device level at the time of shipment/installation. To set new violation thresholds for your vehicles, use the PNP Threshold Configuration manager
Landmark Reports
Report Name
Description
Landmark History
Show visits to known landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark, and duration. Optionally include vehicles that passed through a landmark without stopping and columns for attribute(s). If Duration filter is used, the Passing Through filter is overridden. A lookback period of seven days is applied when selecting landmark visits that are within the Report Time Period (RTP), but began prior to the first day of the RTP. If the beginning of a landmark visit is eight days or greater prior to the RTP, it will not be included in the report. "First in" represents the first reported point inside the landmark. "Last in" represents the last reported point inside the landmark.
The device must ping (report) while within the landmark to be recognized as within the landmark.
Landmark Log
Show first and last points recorded in landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and duration (in hours). Optionally include columns for attribute(s), show visits from vehicles passing through (selected by default), and/or limit the stop duration to the selected report timeframe.
Landmark Group
Show stop/idle time spent in a landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and landmark (multiple). Exclude or include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary].
Landmark Begin/End of Day
Show printable landmark report with Begin and End of Day. Start/End landmarks are required.
Unmarked Stops
Show stops at unmarked locations. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and minimum stop. ptionally include columns for attribute(s).
Late Start
Show late starts or early returns at a certain landmark. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, depart time, and return time.
Speeding Reports
Report Name
Description
Speed Violations
Show speeding instances with location data for each violation. Filter by vehicle/group/driver, date, speed threshold (max or average). Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speed"]sustained speeds [/glossary] (custom threshold values range between 2-7 minutes) and columns for attribute(s).
Show speeding trends over time. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Speeding in Landmark
Show speeding within a landmark or landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and speed threshold (instantaneous or average).
Posted Speed Violations
Show speeding violations of local posted speed. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/group, date, and speed threshold. Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speed"]sustained speeding [/glossary] and columns for attribute(s). Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as [glossary slug="speed-limit-disclaimer"]construction or school zones.[/glossary] If you see a Posted Limit value in the report that you believe to be inaccurate, you can correct a posted speed limit. This report is limited to 3,000 rows.
Show stop detail and idle time. Filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], efficiency, and columns for attribute(s). Click the Browser Map button on this report to visualize your fleet’s stops and idle times by displaying color specific circles on a map (red for stopped, purple for idle).
Stop Notes
Show stop details with driver-authored notes. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include stops with notes only, [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], and attributes.
Stop/Idle Graph
Show graphed vehicle movement and stop times. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time.
State Mileage
Show mileage by state and vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Odometer data by vehicle is now limited to cumulative totals for that vehicle if the vehicle has traveled in more than one state for the range of time specified for the report. If the vehicle has remained within one state, the Start/End Odometer data will be available.
Dwell Time
Show the duration that assets have remained at a specified business location. This report is similar to a Performance Report with a threshold for days, and it helps determine which assets are billable at a customer landmark. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Choose landmark groups for Garage and Customer with a minimum dwell threshold and timezone preference. Optionally add attributes.
Custom Reports
Report Name
Description
Idle Research
Show graphed idle time trends over time. Filter by vehicle/group and date range. Optionally include weekly output and idle totals or average.
Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud. (Fuel card customers only.) Displays all fuel card transactions in the order they occurred with no grouping of Filter by vehicle/group, date, and attribute (multiple). Optionally include exceptions and nearby vehicles.
Fuel Card Usage
Show fuel card usage and MPG (using last-fuel date). (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Show vehicle rankings on speeding, braking, and idling. Filter by vehicle group, date, minimum idle time, and score tolerance percentage. Scores correspond to incremental rankings from 1 (worst) to near 0 (best). Score tolerance determines the percent of report lines to be separated by dotted lines near the top and bottom of the Total Score column. This shows the designated percent of vehicles, half high and half low, with the highest and lowest overall scores in the vehicle group. The vehicle at the top of the report has the highest combined score, which typically indicates bad activity reported, so this vehicle needs the most overall improvement. The vehicle at the bottom of the list has the lowest overall score, so it is considered to have the best overall driving activity for that time period. If the Scorecard is utilized, we recommend that it be used as a tool to improve driver behavior and not as a disciplinary tool.
Garmin Custom Forms
Show Garmin Custom Forms that have been sent by compatible devices and received by the system.
Admin Reports
Report Name
Description
Alert History
Show history of all triggered alerts that have been sent from your account. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, and alert.
Drivers List
Show a list of all drivers in the fleet and their vehicle assignment.
User Activity
Show a summary of user activity (login, reporting, account alerts).
Vehicles List
List all registered vehicles in a specific group.
Vehicle Registrations
List all vehicle registrations for a specific time period.
Hours of Service Reports
Report Name
Description
HOS Driving Availability
Show hours of service driving availability per driver, as pulled from your Hours of Service solution via eFleetSuite.
Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR)
Show DVIRs that have been submitted by driver, including the DVIR ID, Vehicle/Asset, Safety Status, Report Notes, Date Created, Repair Certified, Approved, Defects, and Priority, as pulled from your Hours of Service solution via eFleetSuite and/or via the GPS Insight Driver App (iOS and Android).
HOS Hours and Miles
Show hours and miles for each HOS driver and pulls data directly from your Hours of Service solution via the eFleetSuite portal.
Time to Complete DVIR
Show start time, finish time (inspection complete), total inspection time, notes, and average inspection time per driver. The data for this report is pulled directly from your Hours of Service solution via the eFleetSuite portal and/or via the GPS Insight Driver App (iOS and Android).
*Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature. Diagnostic data varies by vehicle make/model. Data may include engine speed, fuel level, fuel level remaining, fuel rate, odometer, seat belt, and more.
Scheduled Report Types
The following reports are available for you to schedule.
Not all reports are available for your account. Some reports that are custom to an account are not listed.
Report Name
Description
Accel/Decel Detail
Fast acceleration and harsh-braking. (Supported devices only.) Filter by vehicle/vehicle group and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Accel/Decel Summary
Compare acceleration/braking over time. (Supported devices only.) Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Activity Detail
Show reported locations for each vehicle. Filter by vehicle, date, and time. Optionally include columns for closest landmark, all points (individual idle and non-ignition points), attribute(s), and diagnostics (if applicable).
Alert History
Show history of all triggered alerts that have been sent from your account. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, and alert.
Begin/End of Day
Show first start and last stop for any or all vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date and minimum stop duration. Optionally include all activities, exclude first/last stops (e.g., eliminate the driver's commute to/from work), exclude base landmark (e.g., eliminate visits within a landmark such as a service center or yard), or show % drive time.
DTC Alerts
Show alert data reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Diagnostic
Show diagnostic data collected for supported devices*. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Drive Time Summary
Show fleet driving statistics. Filter by vehicle/group, date, start time, and end time. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], apply to each day, PTO data.
Driver History
Show vehicle driver assignments. Filter by vehicle/group, and date.
Driving Violations Detail
Detail of the driving violations.
Driving Violations Summary
Report to Driving Violations Summary.
Dwell Time
Show how many days assets have been at your garage locations or billable landmarks.
Fleet Hierarchy Rollup
Utilization details on hierarchy nodes. Filter by group and date. Optionally include a column for unutilized vehicles, Trip Data (sum, average, min., max.), Custom Vehicle Metrics (sum, average, min., max.), Vehicle Attributes (sum, average, min., max.), and Landmark Attributes (sum, average, min., max.).
Fleet Utilization
Show utilization details on all fleet vehicles. Filter by vehicle/group, date, miles daily, and miles total. Optionally include unutilized vehicles, idle time, daily utilization, miles daily (custom threshold), miles total (custom threshold), current location, and columns for attribute(s).
Fuel Card Transactions
Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud. (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group, date, and attribute (multiple). Optionally include exceptions and nearby vehicles.
Fuel Card Usage
Show fuel card usage and MPG. (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Fuel Usage Detail
Show gallons used and miles per gallon reported by the vehicle (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally show MPG (miles per gallon), show GPH (gallons per hour), show estimated fuel usage, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Fuel Usage Summary
Show gallons consumed by month (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group/driver and date period. Optionally include miles, split data weekly, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Garmin Custom Forms
Show Garmin Custom Forms that have been sent by compatible devices and received by the system.
HOS Driving Availability
Report of available driving time by registered HOS driver.
Hours and Miles
HOS Hours and Miles Report.
Idle Detail
Report on individual idle stops for vehicles in your fleet.
Idle Research
Show graphed idle time trends over time. Filter by vehicle/group and date range. Optionally include weekly output and idle totals or average.
Idle Time
Show idle durations for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time. Optionally include vehicles with no activity, current location, and columns for attribute(s) and/or custom metrics. Optionally hide driver information.
Landmark Group Stop
Show stop/idle time spent in a landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and landmark (multiple).
Landmark History
Show visits to known landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark, and duration. Optionally include vehicles that passed through a landmark without stopping and columns for attribute(s). If Duration filter is used, the Passing Through filter is overridden. A lookback period of seven days is applied when selecting landmark visits that are within the Report Time Period (RTP), but began prior to the first day of the RTP. If the beginning of a landmark visit is eight days or greater prior to the RTP, it will not be included in the report. 'First in' represents the first reported point inside the landmark. 'Last in' represents the last reported point inside the landmark.
The device must ping (report) while within the landmark to be recognized as within the landmark.
Landmark Log
Show first and last points recorded in landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and duration. Optionally include columns for attribute(s), show visits from vehicles passing through (selected by default), and/or limit the stop duration to the selected report timeframe.
Late Start
Show late starts or early returns at a certain landmark. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, depart time, and return time.
Show driving-time violations. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, start time, end time, landmark/group, and violation type (in landmark, out of landmark). Optionally treat date selection as a weekend (time restrictions apply to first day and last day).
Performance
Show most recently reported data from each vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Posted Speed
Show speeding violations of local posted speed. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/group, date, and speed threshold. Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speeding"]sustained speeding [/glossary] and columns for attribute(s). Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. If you see a Posted Limit value in the report that you believe to be inaccurate, you can correct a posted speed limit by clicking the speed value from the report. Then in the Speed History dialog, click Report Bad Speed.
Pre/Post Inspection
Report for Inspection times.
Run Time
Show odometer and run time totals. Filter by vehicle/group, and date. Optionally include service reminders and columns for attribute(s). Selecting the Basic Report option removes all columns except Vehicle, Driver, Days, Last Reported, Run Time, and Run Time (lifetime).
Scorecard
Show vehicle rankings on speeding, braking, and idling. Filter by vehicle group, date, minimum idle time, and score tolerance percentage. Scores correspond to incremental rankings from 1 (worst) to near 0 (best). Score tolerance determines the percent of report lines to be separated by dotted lines near the top and bottom of the Total Score column. This shows the designated percent of vehicles, half high and half low, with the highest and lowest overall scores in the vehicle group. The vehicle at the top of the report has the highest combined score, which typically indicates bad activity reported, so this vehicle needs the most overall improvement. The vehicle at the bottom of the list has the lowest overall score, so it is considered to have the best overall driving activity for that time period. If the Scorecard is utilized, we recommend that it be used as a tool to improve driver behavior and not as a disciplinary tool."
Service Reminders,"Show pending and overdue service reminders. Filter by group.
Service Reminders
Pending service reminders for your fleet.
Speed Summary
Show speeding trends over time. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date.
Speed Violations
Show speeding instances with location data for each violation. Filter by vehicle/group/driver, date, speed threshold (max or average). Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speeding"]sustained speeds [/glossary] (custom threshold values range between 2-7 minutes) and columns for attribute(s).
Speeding in Landmark
Show speeding within a landmark or landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and speed threshold (instantaneous or average).
State Mileage Report
Show mileage by state and vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Odometer data by vehicle is now limited to cumulative totals for that vehicle if the vehicle has traveled in more than one state for the range of time specified for the report. If the vehicle has remained within one state, the Start/End Odometer data will be available.
Stop/Idle Graph
Show graphed vehicle movement and stop times. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time.
Stop Detail and Idle Time
Show stop detail and idle time. Filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], efficiency, and columns for attribute(s).
Stop Notes
Show stop details with driver-authored note. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include stops with notes only, [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], and attributes.
Switch Alerts
Show switch-based alerts (e.g., Battery Voltage, External Power Lost, Panic Switch, Power Cycle, or Temperature). Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Trip Detail
Printable report with trip details.
Unmarked Landmarks
Show stops at unmarked locations. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and minimum stop. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
User Activity
Show a summary of user activity (login, reporting, account alerts).
Vehicle List
List all registered vehicles in a specific group.
Vehicle Registrations
List all vehicle registrations for a specific time period.
[/solution]
More reference materials:
Having trouble with reports not returning relevant data? Check out Reviewing Reports.
[post_title] => About Reports
[post_excerpt] => Reports allow you to quantify activity, idling, stop times, speeding, and other aspects of fleet efficiency. All reports include links to export data for further manipulation and sorting.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-reports
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 13:27:21
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 20:27:21
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=446
[menu_order] => 8
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 16086
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-06-01 08:05:30
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-06-01 15:05:30
[post_content] => For users on the Basic plan, click the Reports menu item to open the Reports tab. Available reports for the Basic Plan are as follows:
Basic Report Types
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"]
Report Type,Description
Activity Detail,"Show all reported locations for each vehicle. Filter by vehicle, date, and time. Optionally show landmark name instead of physical address when at a known location, show all points (individual idle and non-ignition points)."
Alert History,"Show history of all triggered alerts. Filter by vehicle, date, and alert."
Begin/End of Day,"Show first start and last stop for any or all vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle, date and minimum stop duration. Optionally exclude base landmark (e.g., eliminate visits within a landmark such as a service center or yard), exclude first/last stops (e.g., eliminate the driver's commute to/from work), and show % drive time."
Drive Time Summary,"Show a summary of fleet driving statistics. Filter by vehicle, date, start time, and end time."
Idling Detail,"Show individual idle stops for vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle, date, and minimum idle time. Optionally include vehicles that have no activity, hide details, and add current location."
Fuel Usage Detail,"Show gallons used and miles per gallon reported by the vehicle (supported devices*). Filter by vehicle and date. Optionally include a gas price/gallon (automatically calculate fuel cost for each line item)\, show MPG (miles per gallon)\, show GPH (gallons per hour)\, and show estimated fuel usage. Estimated fuel usage is based on run time\, speed\, idle time\, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle\, they should not be considered 100% reliable."
Landmark History,"Show visits to known landmarks. Filter by vehicle, date, landmark, and duration. Optionally include vehicles that passed through a landmark without stopping. A lookback period of seven days is applied when selecting landmark visits that are within the Report Time Period (RTP), but began prior to the first day of the RTP. If the beginning of a landmark visit is eight days or greater prior to the RTP, it will not be included in the report. 'First in' represents the first reported point inside the landmark. 'Last in' represents the last reported point inside the landmark.~~~~
The device must ping (report) while within the landmark to be recognized as being within the landmark.
Odd-Hours,"Show driving-time violations. Filter by vehicle, date, start time, end time, landmark, and violation type (only in landmark, only out of landmark). Optionally treat date selection as a weekend (time restrictions apply to first day and last day)."
Performance,"Show most recently reported data from each vehicle. Filter by vehicle."
Service Reminders,"Show pending and overdue service reminders. Filter by vehicle."
Speeding Detail,"Show speeding events for vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle, date, and posted limit (threshold in mph over) or speed threshold (max or average). Optionally include sustained speeds (custom threshold values range between 2-7 minutes)."
Stop Detail and Idle Time,"View stop detail and idle time. Filter by vehicle, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally exclude [glossary slug='overlapping-trip']overlapping trips[/glossary]."
[/et]
For users on the Enterprise plan or who have the Advanced Administration Add-on and are looking for Legacy reports, click the Reports menu item to open the Reports tab. Available Enterprise/Legacy/Classic reports are as follows:
Not all reports are available for your account. Some reports that are custom to an account are not listed. All reports based on Summary data can be run for vehicle/group (driver-aware) or driver/group (driver-centric).
Activity Reports
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"]
Report Type,Description
Activity Detail,Show reported locations and other details for each vehicle. Filter by driver/driver group\, vehicle\, date\, and time. Optionally apply parameters to each day selected\, include columns for closest landmark\, all points (individual idle and non-ignition points)\, attribute(s)\, and diagnostics (if applicable).
Begin/End of Day,Show first start and last stop for any or all vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group\, driver/group\, date and minimum stop duration. Optionally include all activities\, exclude first/last stops (e.g.\, eliminate the driver's commute to/from work)\, exclude home landmark (e.g.\, eliminate visits within a landmark such as a service center or yard that you can specify when the option is chosen)\, or show % drive time.
Drive Time Summary,Show fleet driving statistics. Filter by driver/driver group\, vehicle/group\, date\, start time\, and end time. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary]\, apply to each day\, PTO data\, and columns for attribute(s).
Driver History,Show vehicle driver assignments. Filter by vehicle/group\, and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Fleet Utilization,Show utilization details on all fleet vehicles. Filter by vehicle/group\, date\, miles daily\, and miles total. Optionally include unutilized vehicles\, daily utilization\, miles and trips\, drivers\, miles daily (custom threshold)\, miles total (custom threshold)\, current location\, custom metrics\, and columns for attribute(s).
Idle Time Summary,Show idle durations for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group\, date\, and minimum idle time. Optionally include vehicles with no activity\, current location\, and columns for attribute(s) and/or custom metrics. Optionally hide driver information.
Idle Time Detail,Show individual idle stops for vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group\, date\, and minimum idle time. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Odd-Hours,Show driving-time violations. Filter by vehicle/group\, driver/group\, date\, start time\, end time\, landmark/group\, and violation type (in landmark\, out of landmark). Optionally treat date selection as a weekend (time restrictions apply to first day and last day). Within the report\, click the Drive Time value to open the related Activity Detail report.
[/et]
Diagnostic Reports
The PNP-3000 device has been discontinued as of January 2026.
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"]
Report Type,Description
Fuel Usage Detail,Show gallons used and miles per gallon reported by the vehicle (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include a gas price/gallon (automatically calculate fuel cost for each line item)\, show MPG (miles per gallon)\, show GPH (gallons per hour)\, show estimated fuel usage\, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data\, in which case usage is based on run time\, speed\, idle time\, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle\, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Fuel Usage Summary,Show gallons consumed by month (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group/driver and date period. Optionally include miles and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data\, in which case usage is based on run time\, speed\, idle time\, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle\, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Performance,Show most recently reported data from each vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group. Choose to add Stop Duration\, Non-Reporting\, or Voltage Below parameters. If you choose one of these items\, only the vehicles that match the criteria will be included in the report. If you choose MORE than one of these options\, the system treats them as "AND" operators. For example\, if you chose two options (i.e.\, stopped for five days AND non-reporting for two days)\, both of those requirements must be true in order for a vehicle to be included in the report. Optionally include columns for attribute(s). Helps to detect device reporting issues.Run Time,Show odometer and run time totals. Filter by vehicle/group\, and date. Optionally include service reminders and columns for attribute(s). Selecting the Basic Report option removes all columns except Vehicle\, Driver\, Days\, Last Reported\, Run Time\, and Run Time (lifetime). If you've added an adjustment baseline\, the total run time value will be called “Total Engine Hours” instead of “Total GPS Device Hours.”
Diagnostic,Show diagnostic data collected for supported devices. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
DTC Alerts,Show alert data reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Service History,Show history of logged service for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Choose the Show All option to disregard date selection and show all past service history records for the selected vehicle(s).
Service Reminders,Show pending and overdue service reminders. Filter by group.
Switch Alerts,Show switch-based alerts (e.g.\, Battery Voltage\, External Power Lost\, Panic Switch\, Power Cycle\, or Temperature). Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Driving Violations Detail,Show details on Violations reported by supported diagnostic devices (PNP-3000 buzzer-enabled + others). Filter by vehicle/group. Sort columns in the report by Vehicle\, VIN\, Driver (if assigned)\, Violation Time\, and Violation Type: Acceleration\, Deceleration\, Cornering\, Idling\, and Speeding.The violation thresholds for these categories are set on a device level at the time of shipment/installation. To set new defaults for your vehicles\, use the PNP Threshold Configuration manager.
Driving Violations Summary,Show a summary of Violations reported by supported diagnostic devices (PNP-3000 buzzer-enabled only). Filter by vehicle/group. The report shows a series of graphs for Violations by Type\, Vehicles with Most Violations\, Total Violations\, and Violations per 100 miles. Sort columns by Vehicle\, Driver (if assigned)\, Distance\, Violations per 100 miles\, Hard Braking\, Hard Left\, Hard Right\, Idling\, Rapid Acceleration\, Speeding\, and Total.The violation thresholds for these categories are set on a device level at the time of shipment/installation. To set new violation thresholds for your vehicles\, use the PNP Threshold Configuration manager
[/et]
Landmark Reports
Report Name
Description
Landmark History
Show visits to known landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark, and duration. Optionally include vehicles that passed through a landmark without stopping and columns for attribute(s). If Duration filter is used, the Passing Through filter is overridden. A lookback period of seven days is applied when selecting landmark visits that are within the Report Time Period (RTP), but began prior to the first day of the RTP. If the beginning of a landmark visit is eight days or greater prior to the RTP, it will not be included in the report. "First in" represents the first reported point inside the landmark. "Last in" represents the last reported point inside the landmark.
The device must ping (report) while within the landmark to be recognized as being within the landmark.
Landmark Log
Show first and last points recorded in landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and duration (in hours). Optionally include columns for attribute(s), show visits from vehicles passing through (selected by default), and/or limit the stop duration to the selected report timeframe.
Landmark Group
Show stop/idle time spent in a landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and landmark (multiple). Exclude or include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary].
Landmark Begin/End of Day
Show printable landmark report with Begin and End of Day. Start/End landmarks are required.
Unmarked Stops
Show stops at unmarked locations. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and minimum stop. ptionally include columns for attribute(s).
Late Start
Show late starts or early returns at a certain landmark. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, depart time, and return time.
Speeding Reports
Report Name
Description
Speed Violations
Show speeding instances with location data for each violation. Filter by vehicle/group/driver, date, speed threshold (max or average). Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speed"]sustained speeds [/glossary] (custom threshold values range between 2-7 minutes) and columns for attribute(s).
Show speeding trends over time. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Speeding in Landmark
Show speeding within a landmark or landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and speed threshold (instantaneous or average).
Posted Speed Violations
Show speeding violations of local posted speed. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/group, date, and speed threshold. Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speed"]sustained speeding [/glossary] and columns for attribute(s). Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as [glossary slug="speed-limit-disclaimer"]construction or school zones.[/glossary] If you see a Posted Limit value in the report that you believe to be inaccurate, you can correct a posted speed limit. This report is limited to 3,000 rows.
Show stop detail and idle time. Filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], efficiency, and columns for attribute(s). Click the Browser Map button on this report to visualize your fleet’s stops and idle times by displaying color specific circles on a map (red for stopped, purple for idle).
Stop Notes
Show stop details with driver-authored notes. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include stops with notes only, [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], and attributes.
This report is available upon request.
State Mileage
Show mileage by state and vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Odometer data by vehicle is now limited to cumulative totals for that vehicle if the vehicle has traveled in more than one state for the range of time specified for the report. If the vehicle has remained within one state, the Start/End Odometer data will be available.
New State Mileage
Show vehicle mileage by state and vehicle. Filter by group/vehicle and date. Optionally enter gas price per gallon (in dollars).
This version of the State Mileage report offers data by country (if your fleet has active vehicles in more than one country), and tool tips to show the source of data shown.
Dwell Time
Show the duration that assets have remained at a specified business location. This report is similar to a Performance Report with a threshold for days, and it helps determine which assets are billable at a customer landmark. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Choose landmark groups for Garage and Customer with a minimum dwell threshold and timezone preference. Optionally add attributes.
This report is available upon request. To request this report, please contact your Account Manager.
Custom Reports
Report Name
Description
Idle Research
Show graphed idle time trends over time. Filter by vehicle/group and date range. Optionally include weekly output and idle totals or average.
Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud. (Fuel card customers only.) Displays all fuel card transactions in the order they occurred with no grouping of Filter by vehicle/group, date, and attribute (multiple). Optionally include exceptions and nearby vehicles.
Fuel Card Usage
Show fuel card usage and MPG (using last-fuel date). (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Show vehicle rankings on speeding, braking, and idling. Filter by vehicle group, date, minimum idle time, and score tolerance percentage. Scores correspond to incremental rankings from 1 (worst) to near 0 (best). Score tolerance determines the percent of report lines to be separated by dotted lines near the top and bottom of the Total Score column. This shows the designated percent of vehicles, half high and half low, with the highest and lowest overall scores in the vehicle group. The vehicle at the top of the report has the highest combined score, which typically indicates bad activity reported, so this vehicle needs the most overall improvement. The vehicle at the bottom of the list has the lowest overall score, so it is considered to have the best overall driving activity for that time period. If the Scorecard is utilized, we recommend that it be used as a tool to improve driver behavior and not as a disciplinary tool.
Admin Reports
Admin Reports are located under Reports under the Account menu.
Report Name
Description
Alert History
Show history of all triggered alerts that have been sent from your account. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, and alert.
Drivers List
Show a list of all drivers in the fleet and their vehicle assignment.
User Activity
Show a summary of user activity (login, reporting, account alerts).
Vehicle Recall
List of recall data for vehicles in your fleet as reported by the NHSTA. Filter by group/vehicle. Optionally show current driver and/or have landmarks override addresses (if applicable).
Vehicles List
List all registered vehicles in a specific group.
Vehicle Registrations
List all vehicle registrations for a specific time period.
Hours of Service Reports
The following reports are available for customers with the HOS Accessory. To request this accessory, please contact your Account Manager.
Report Name
Description
HOS Driving Availability
Show hours of service driving availability per driver, as pulled from your Hours of Service solution via eFleetSuite.
Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR)
Show DVIRs that have been submitted by driver, including the DVIR ID, Vehicle/Asset, Safety Status, Report Notes, Date Created, Repair Certified, Approved, Defects, and Priority, as pulled from your Hours of Service solution via eFleetSuite and/or via the GPS Insight Driver App (iOS and Android).
HOS Hours and Miles
Show hours and miles for each HOS driver and pulls data directly from your Hours of Service solution via the eFleetSuite portal.
Time to Complete DVIR
Show start time, finish time (inspection complete), total inspection time, notes, and average inspection time per driver. The data for this report is pulled directly from your Hours of Service solution via the eFleetSuite portal and/or via the GPS Insight Driver App (iOS and Android).
*Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature. Diagnostic data varies by vehicle make/model. Data may include engine speed, fuel level, fuel level remaining, fuel rate, odometer, seat belt, and more.
Legacy (Classic) Scheduled Report Types
The following reports are available for you to schedule.
Not all reports are available for your account. Some reports that are custom to an account are not listed.
Report Name
Description
Accel/Decel Detail
Fast acceleration and harsh-braking. (Supported devices only.) Filter by vehicle/vehicle group and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Accel/Decel Summary
Compare acceleration/braking over time. (Supported devices only.) Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Activity Detail
Show reported locations for each vehicle. Filter by vehicle, date, and time. Optionally include columns for closest landmark, all points (individual idle and non-ignition points), attribute(s), and diagnostics (if applicable).
Alert History
Show history of all triggered alerts that have been sent from your account. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, and alert.
Begin/End of Day
Show first start and last stop for any or all vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date and minimum stop duration. Optionally include all activities, exclude first/last stops (e.g., eliminate the driver's commute to/from work), exclude base landmark (e.g., eliminate visits within a landmark such as a service center or yard), or show % drive time.
DTC Alerts
Show alert data reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Diagnostic
Show diagnostic data collected for supported devices*. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Drive Time Summary
Show fleet driving statistics. Filter by vehicle/group, date, start time, and end time. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], apply to each day, PTO data.
Driver History
Show vehicle driver assignments. Filter by vehicle/group, and date.
Driving Violations Detail
Detail of the driving violations.
Driving Violations Summary
Report to Driving Violations Summary.
Dwell Time
Show how many days assets have been at your garage locations or billable landmarks.
Fleet Hierarchy Rollup
Utilization details on hierarchy nodes. Filter by group and date. Optionally include a column for unutilized vehicles, Trip Data (sum, average, min., max.), Custom Vehicle Metrics (sum, average, min., max.), Vehicle Attributes (sum, average, min., max.), and Landmark Attributes (sum, average, min., max.).
Fleet Utilization
Show utilization details on all fleet vehicles. Filter by vehicle/group, date, miles daily, and miles total. Optionally include unutilized vehicles, idle time, daily utilization, miles daily (custom threshold), miles total (custom threshold), current location, and columns for attribute(s).
Fuel Card Transactions
Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud. (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group, date, and attribute (multiple). Optionally include exceptions and nearby vehicles.
Fuel Card Usage
Show fuel card usage and MPG. (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Fuel Usage Detail
Show gallons used and miles per gallon reported by the vehicle (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally show MPG (miles per gallon), show GPH (gallons per hour), show estimated fuel usage, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Fuel Usage Summary
Show gallons consumed by month (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group/driver and date period. Optionally include miles and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Garmin Custom Forms
Show Garmin Custom Forms that have been sent by compatible devices and received by the system.
HOS Driving Availability
Report of available driving time by registered HOS driver.
Hours and Miles
HOS Hours and Miles Report.
Idle Detail
Report on individual idle stops for vehicles in your fleet.
Idle Research
Show graphed idle time trends over time. Filter by vehicle/group and date range. Optionally include weekly output and idle totals or average.
Idle Time
Show idle durations for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time. Optionally include vehicles with no activity, current location, and columns for attribute(s) and/or custom metrics. Optionally hide driver information.
Landmark Group Stop
Show stop/idle time spent in a landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and landmark (multiple).
Landmark History
Show visits to known landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark, and duration. Optionally include vehicles that passed through a landmark without stopping and columns for attribute(s). If Duration filter is used, the Passing Through filter is overridden. A lookback period of seven days is applied when selecting landmark visits that are within the Report Time Period (RTP), but began prior to the first day of the RTP. If the beginning of a landmark visit is eight days or greater prior to the RTP, it will not be included in the report. 'First in' represents the first reported point inside the landmark. 'Last in' represents the last reported point inside the landmark.
The device must ping (report) while within the landmark to be recognized as being within the landmark.
Landmark Log
Show first and last points recorded in landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and duration. Optionally include columns for attribute(s), show visits from vehicles passing through (selected by default), and/or limit the stop duration to the selected report timeframe.
Late Start
Show late starts or early returns at a certain landmark. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, depart time, and return time.
Show driving-time violations. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, start time, end time, landmark/group, and violation type (in landmark, out of landmark). Optionally treat date selection as a weekend (time restrictions apply to first day and last day).
Performance
Show most recently reported data from each vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Posted Speed
Show speeding violations of local posted speed. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/group, date, and speed threshold. Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speeding"]sustained speeding [/glossary] and columns for attribute(s). Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. If you see a Posted Limit value in the report that you believe to be inaccurate, you can correct a posted speed limit by clicking the speed value from the report. Then in the Speed History dialog, click Report Bad Speed.
Pre/Post Inspection
Report for Inspection times.
Run Time
Show odometer and run time totals. Filter by vehicle/group, and date. Optionally include service reminders and columns for attribute(s). Selecting the Basic Report option removes all columns except Vehicle, Driver, Days, Last Reported, Run Time, and Run Time (lifetime).
Scorecard
Show vehicle rankings on speeding, braking, and idling. Filter by vehicle group, date, minimum idle time, and score tolerance percentage. Scores correspond to incremental rankings from 1 (worst) to near 0 (best). Score tolerance determines the percent of report lines to be separated by dotted lines near the top and bottom of the Total Score column. This shows the designated percent of vehicles, half high and half low, with the highest and lowest overall scores in the vehicle group. The vehicle at the top of the report has the highest combined score, which typically indicates bad activity reported, so this vehicle needs the most overall improvement. The vehicle at the bottom of the list has the lowest overall score, so it is considered to have the best overall driving activity for that time period. If the Scorecard is utilized, we recommend that it be used as a tool to improve driver behavior and not as a disciplinary tool."
Service Reminders,"Show pending and overdue service reminders. Filter by group.
Service Reminders
Pending service reminders for your fleet.
Speed Summary
Show speeding trends over time. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date.
Speed Violations
Show speeding instances with location data for each violation. Filter by vehicle/group/driver, date, speed threshold (max or average). Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speeding"]sustained speeds [/glossary] (custom threshold values range between 2-7 minutes) and columns for attribute(s).
Speeding in Landmark
Show speeding within a landmark or landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and speed threshold (instantaneous or average).
State Mileage Report
Show mileage by state and vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Odometer data by vehicle is now limited to cumulative totals for that vehicle if the vehicle has traveled in more than one state for the range of time specified for the report. If the vehicle has remained within one state, the Start/End Odometer data will be available.
Stop/Idle Graph
Show graphed vehicle movement and stop times. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time.
Stop Detail and Idle Time
Show stop detail and idle time. Filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], efficiency, and columns for attribute(s).
Stop Notes
Show stop details with driver-authored note. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include stops with notes only, [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], and attributes.
Switch Alerts
Show switch-based alerts (e.g., Battery Voltage, External Power Lost, Panic Switch, Power Cycle, or Temperature). Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Trip Detail
Printable report with trip details.
Unmarked Landmarks
Show stops at unmarked locations. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and minimum stop. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
User Activity
Show a summary of user activity (login, reporting, account alerts).
Vehicle List
List all registered vehicles in a specific group.
Vehicle Registrations
List all vehicle registrations for a specific time period.
[post_title] => Available Reports
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => available-reports
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-07-28 09:23:27
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-07-28 16:23:27
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16086
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 447
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-22 20:48:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-22 20:48:07
[post_content] => [solution term="basic,standard"]
Please use the following instructions to run a report. Running a report allows you to immediately view the report in a new browser tab.
To run a report:
From the menu, click Reports.
Click the report type you want to run.
On the Report Card, click Run.
Adjust the report settings as needed, and click Run Report.
The selected report opens in a new browser tab. Review the sample Activity Detail report interface for key terminology. Export, email, and sort options vary depending on the report you run.
1 - Overview Area:The report overview shows the number of records included in the report and any other parameters used in the search. If you choose to email this report, it will be delivered in the following formats: .CSV and .HTM. Emailed reports come from the address report@[provider].com.
Graph Area: If applicable, data is represented in graphical format for aggregate analysis. Not all reports include a graph area.
3 - Detail Area: Shows individual line items (records) for the given parameters. Columns shown in blue are sortable. Hover your mouse over an address or landmark to view a snapshot of the location, or click to view the location on a larger map with options for Traffic, Satellite View, and Street View. You can also create a new landmark from one of the line items.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
Please use the following instructions to run a report. Running a report allows you to immediately view the report in a new browser tab.
To run a report:
From the menu, click Reports.
Click the report type you want to run.
Adjust the report settings as needed, and click Run Report.
Choose between T (today), Y (yesterday), >W (week-to-date), 7d (last 7 days), >M (month-to-date), 30 (last 30 days), a custom date selection on the calendar, or click the name of a month. To clear a selection, click the same date selection again, or click the a selected day (one at a time) to clear it from the selection. To quickly clear a large selection of days, click the "T" option to select today's date, and then click the "T" (or highlighted date) again to de-select it. Once no dates are highlighted, select the beginning and end date of the desired time period to highlight the dates selected and everything in-between.
The selected report opens in a new browser tab. Review the sample Activity Detail report interface for key terminology. Export, email, and sort options vary depending on the [/solution][solution term="pro"]report type.[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]report type.[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
1 - Overview Area:The report overview shows the number of records included in the report and any other parameters used in the search. Additional buttons include (may vary with the report):
A) Export Data - Click to download a local copy of the report data in .csv format.
B)Google Earth - Click to export data points to .kml for viewing within Google Earth (3D mapping).
C) Browser Map - Click to view data points within Google Maps (2D mapping).
D) Schedule This - Click to schedule this report for automatic delivery via email. You can choose the recipients, vehicles, and delivery frequency (daily, weekly, monthly, custom) for each scheduled report.
E) Email Report - Click to email the report to one or more recipients. Emailed reports are delivered in the following formats: .csv, .htm, and .kmz (if applicable). Emailed reports come from the address report@[whitelabel_name].com.
Graph Area: If applicable, data is represented in graphical format for aggregate analysis. Not all reports include a graph area.
3 - Detail Area: Shows individual line items (records) for the given parameters. Columns shown in blue are sortable. Hover your mouse over an address or landmark to view a snapshot of the location, or click to view the location on a larger map with options for Traffic, Satellite View, and Street View. You can also create a landmark from a line item or report a bad speed.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Running a Report
[post_excerpt] => Please use the following instructions to run a report. Running a report allows you to immediately view the report in a new browser tab.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-a-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-26 14:43:57
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-26 21:43:57
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=447
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 15140
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-02-25 14:28:27
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-02-25 21:28:27
[post_content] =>
Not all New reports are available in Classic/Advanced Administration. Some can only be scheduled through the new Portal. These new reports bring upgraded reporting capabilities, delivering enhanced analytics and improved data handling across the board. Please see Scheduling Reports for additional information on new, upgraded report scheduling availability.
The following properties are available for all reports scheduled from the Advanced Administration (Classic Portal) environment. Depending on the scheduled report type you create, additional properties vary.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%]
Option,Description
Vehicle,The vehicles that apply to the report. Available choices include: All Vehicles\, individual vehicles\, vehicle groups\, and/or vehicle hierarchies. The vehicle name and/or vehicle group (if applicable) will be visible in the report.
Schedule,The frequency of the scheduled report. Available choices include system and custom schedules. (See below.)
Email Subject,The subject as it will appear in the email message. The subject line is always followed by the vehicle name\, group\, or hierarchy and the date in parentheses.
Addresses*,The email address(es) where the report will be sent. Separate values by commas. If you select a hierarchy node in the Vehicle option\, the Addresses defaults to use an address attribute hierarchy (if available). You can override the hierarchy list from the drop-down.
Custom Parameters,Scheduled report types vary. Refer to the report description for details.
Email Body,Choose which format(s) you want to allow. Choosing both options allows the recipient's mail client to decide how to display the message. (Plain text does not use colors\, graphics\, or hyperlink display names.)
Attachments,Two copies of the report (HTML and CSV formats) are sent with the email body.
Delivery,Select the Don't send empty reports check box if you want to receive reports only when there is data in them. On the other hand\, some people like to see positive confirmation that no one was speeding\, idling\, etc. during a day\, in which case they prefer a blank report.
Active,Temporarily turn on/off the scheduled report. To specify a date range for activation\, modify the report's schedule.
[/et]
*Contact Support if you need to configure delivery of scheduled reports to your FTP server. Include the portal usernames of the users whose reports should be sent to the server, the FTP server name, the FTP username, and the FTP password. When set up is confirmed, enter "ftp" as a recipient in the Addresses field of any scheduled report.
Set Scheduled Report Settings
Prior to scheduling a report, set your Scheduled Report settings from the Advanced Administration (Classic Portal) home page. These settings apply to all scheduled reports regardless of selected report type.
To set Scheduled Report settings:
From the Portal home page, click on the change user preferences button.
The User Preferences menu appears. Scheduled Report settings are displayed at the bottom of the menu.
You may need to scroll down to see the Scheduled Report settings section.
Set your setting preferences for Email Body, Attachments, and Skip Empty Reports.
Click Apply.
Your settings are saved and the User Preferences menu automatically closes.
Schedule a Report
You can create an unlimited number of Advanced Administration (Classic Portal) scheduled report configurations for each report type, and you can customize the schedule (frequency) for each one.
In order to manage scheduled reports, you must have the Manage Reports menu item enabled in the Menu Access List. Some reports (like Metrics) are also schedulable from the related administrative page.
Example
Company XYZ's owner wants each fleet manager to receive daily drive time summary reports for their fleets (one for Delivery vehicles and one for Service vehicles).
To create a new Drive Time Summary scheduled report
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Scheduled Reports, and click Open.
The Scheduled Reports page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Report List grid, click New Scheduled Report (green plus sign) next to the report you want to create. In the Company XYZ example, we choose the "Drive Time Summary" report.
You can also invoke a new scheduled report from within an existing report window ("Schedule This" button).
In the Setup Scheduled Report window, choose the vehicle, group, or hierarchy you want to include in the report. In the Company XYZ example, we chose the "Service" group.
You may be able to select Driver, depending on the report type selected.
Modify the Schedule (frequency) as needed. In the Company XYZ example, we chose "Daily."
Modify the Email Subject as needed.
Enter the email address(es) of the person(s) who should receive the report.
If your account includes hierarchy, you can create and assign email hierarchy attributes.
Choose your preference for including PTO (Power Take-Off) data in the report.
Choose your preference for including Unutilized Vehicles data in the report.
Choose your sort preference for how you want data to be grouped in the report. We chose "Vehicle."
Leave the defaults selected for the Active setting.
Click Schedule Report.
The report appears in the Scheduled Reports grid. The status is temporarily set to pending. (The next scheduled date populates when you refresh the screen.)
In the Company XYZ example, the owner should repeat the steps to create a second Drive Time Summary scheduled report, this time choosing the "Delivery" group and specifying the Delivery Manager's email address.
If you have advanced reporting distribution needs and don't want to manage multiple scheduled reports per group, consider using hierarchies (if available to your account).
When the report is delivered, the data appears within the email body. Attachments are available in HTML and CSV formats. (Some reports also include a KML file for plotting points in Google Earth.) Most reports also have the option to re-run the report, which runs it live within the system in case you want to interact with the report data (e.g., create a landmark or re-sort).
Scheduled reports come from the address report@[provider].com. Ensure messages sent from this address are not caught in your email filter.
Create a Custom Schedule
For each report you want to schedule, you must specify the schedule (frequency). The Advanced Administration (Classic Portal) provides the following system schedules:
[row]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/column]
[/row]
If one of the system schedules doesn't meet your needs, you can create a custom schedule.
Example Scenario
Company XYZ provides a monthly bonus to the driver with the lowest idle time. Rather than use the system monthly schedule, which reports on the 1st of each month, this report schedule must be generated by the 25th of each month in order to coincide with payroll's process for bonus payouts.
To create a custom schedule
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Reports, and click Open.
The Scheduled Reports page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Schedule List grid, click Schedule next to Create New.
The Define New Recurrence Pattern window appears.
Click the tab that best matches your recurrence pattern. In the Company XYZ example, we chose "Monthday."
In the Day(s) box, enter the day of the month to send the report, and tab out of the field. In the Company XYZ example, we chose "25."
The calendar shows an updated preview of the new schedule. The reports will be run on dates shown in bold and delivered on dates highlighted in red. Notice in the following example, we are only reporting on one day (the 24th).
Set the Span option to report on month(s) instead of day(s) so that the calendar shows all days.
Modify the report time as needed. The default is set to 3:00 AM.
Enter a name for the schedule (e.g., Monthly - bonus), and click Save As.
The new schedule appears in the Schedule List grid. You can now use it on a scheduled report.
Delete or Inactivate a Scheduled Report
If a scheduled report is no longer needed, you can delete it or inactivate it. Deleting a scheduled report permanently removes the settings. Inactivating a scheduled report keeps the settings and prevents you from having to recreate them if you ever have the need for them again. You can manually inactivate a scheduled report, or you can tell the system to automatically inactivate a scheduled report after a specified date (defined by the associated schedule).
Example Scenario
Company XYZ is reorganizing its fleet. During the transition period, XYZ's owner wants to temporarily inactivate the daily drive time summary reports for their fleet managers.
To inactivate a scheduled report:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Reports, and click Open.
The Scheduled Reports page opens in a new browser tab. The Scheduled Reports grid shows all the scheduled reports that you have created. By default, only active scheduled reports appear in the grid.
Portal administrators can see all scheduled reports by all account users.
From the Scheduled Report grid, locate the scheduled report you want to modify, and click Edit (pencil icon).
Alternatively, you can click Delete, which also gives you the option for inactivating the scheduled report.
In the Setup Scheduled Report window, set the Active option to No.
To specify a date range for automatic activation, modify the report's schedule.
[post_title] => Scheduling a Report
[post_excerpt] => The following properties are available for all scheduled reports. Depending on the scheduled report type you create, additional properties vary.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => scheduling-a-report-pro
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-07-22 08:36:49
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-07-22 15:36:49
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=15140
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 457
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-22 21:24:29
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-22 21:24:29
[post_content] => Expand the User Preferences icon on the Dashboard to set default options for reports.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Setting,Description
Show Timezone Option,"All line items in a single report show a consistent time zone (i.e., does not vary by the vehicle's location). By default, the timezone applied to a report is the timezone preference set in the user's profile. If you want to run a report to see values represented in a different timezone, select the Show Timezone Options in the User Preferences, and then change the Timezone drop-down preference when running the report. The list of Timezone options varies by country. The timezone for which the report ran is indicated in the Report Header."
Suppress Max Speed,Hide the [glossary slug="max-speed"]Max Speed[/glossary] column on any applicable reports.
Available Speeds List,"Enter speed limit options (in mph) from which you can choose when running the report. Separate values by commas."
Default Speed Selection,"Set the speed that is automatically pre-selected in report options."
Default Vehicle Group,"Set the default vehicle group that is automatically pre-selected in report options. Choose to always use the default group or remember the last used vehicle group when running consecutive reports during your session."
Full Hierarchy Path,"For any reports that show Hierarchy Node column, indicate whether or not to show the full hierarchy path in the web version of the report (Web) and/or the CSV export (Exports). Full hierarchy paths are represented by Tree Name->Node1->Node2, etc."
[/et]
[post_title] => Setting Report Defaults
[post_excerpt] => Expand the User Preferences icon on the Dashboard to set default options for reports.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => setting-report-defaults
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:52:52
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:52:52
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=457
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 5649
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2017-02-15 17:31:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2017-02-15 17:31:07
[post_content] => The Driving Violations Summary Report provides four interactive graphs, a violation count breakdown, and violation totals for each vehicle selected in the report parameters. Violation types include:
The violation thresholds for these categories are set on a device level at the time of shipment/installation. To set new defaults for your vehicles, use the PNP Threshold Configuration manager.
If you have never implemented a safety program before and aren't sure what to do with this data now that you have it, refer to the following article for recommendations: How to Maintain a Fleet Safety Program.
Violations by Type
This pie chart shows the total number of violations broken down by type. Hover over a violation type to see percentages.
To toggle a violation type on/off from the chart, click the label in the legend:
Vehicle with Most Violations
This bar chart shows the vehicles with the most total violation counts in the report time frame (not normalized for mileage). Hover over a vehicle to see total number of violations and a count breakdown for each category:
Total Violations
This line graph provides an overview of the total number of violations for the selected vehicles, plotted in order from the most (far-left) to the least (far-right). Hover over any of the vehicle dots to see the total number of violations reported for that vehicle:
Violations per 100 miles
This line graph provides a normalized overview of the total number of violations for the selected vehicles, normalized per 100 miles and plotted in order from the most (far-left) to the least (far-right). The normalized chart allows you to more accurately compare driving behavior among vehicles and look for trends. Hover over any of the vehicle dots to see the total number of violations per 100 miles reported for that vehicle:
Report Details
The report details provides line items for the total number of violations for each vehicle included in the report. Sort columns by Vehicle, Driver (if assigned), Distance, Violations per 100 miles, Hard Braking, Hard Left, Hard Right, Idling, Rapid Acceleration, Speeding, and Total.
[post_title] => Using the Driving Violations Summary Report
[post_excerpt] => The Driving Violations Summary Report provides four interactive graphs, a violation count breakdown, and violation totals for each vehicle selected in the report parameters.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-driving-violations-summary-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2022-12-08 07:35:42
[post_modified_gmt] => 2022-12-08 14:35:42
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=5649
[menu_order] => 8
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1592
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-03-01 19:55:41
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-03-01 19:55:41
[post_content] => Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud. (Fuel card customers only.) Displays all fuel card transactions in the order they occurred with no grouping of Filter by vehicle/group, date, and attribute (multiple). Optionally include exceptions and nearby vehicles.
Report Details
A transaction is deemed as Verified if there was a GPS location data point that was within .5 miles of the gas station displayed in the report on the same day of the transaction. The gallons will also indicate how much fuel was pumped or if the transaction was used for something other than fuel (denoted as "Other"). Any capacity value of more than 100% may also indicate fuel slippage if the driver pumped more than the vehicle's registered fuel capacity. Finally, the time value may also indicate a warning icon if the time of the pump reports something different than the fuel card reported.
Report Nuances
The following nuances might occur with this report and the steps to resolve them:
Transactions consistently not verified for a fuel pump location.
Pump versus transaction time are consistently different from one another.
Multiple fuel cards reporting under one vehicle.
Location Not Verified
The Location column on the report indicates the vehicle's closest location point to the Fuel Site the day of the transaction. A location with .5 miles is considered within the acceptable range (indicated as "Verified). If a vehicle's location falls outside of the acceptable range, its status will indicate the distance it was away from the Fuel Site. This notation may indicate fraud; however, it might also indicate that the Fuel Site's address is slightly off.
To correct a Fuel Site address:
Within the report, identify the fuel pump location that does not verify with a consistent "miles away" distance.
Click the site name to open the Edit Fuel Card Sites page.
Click the Satellite button on the map.
Find the correct location of the site, and move the pin to that location on the map.
Click Save.
Re-run the report using the same parameters, and verify that the location in question now shows as "Verified."
Pump Transaction Time
If there is consistently a two hour discrepancy warning for a given fuel pump location but the location is consistently verified, it could be an indication that that the information extracted from the pump is incorrect. Fuel times can also be mis-matched due to time zone changes or the time zone preference for a customer.
Multiple Transaction Cards Reporting to One Vehicle
If your account reports two fuel cards under one vehicle, it may be caused if the fuel card is updated with a new card number. (Please note that this situation is rare; we match fuel cards with the registered vehicles at the time of setup.)
To re-assign a fuel card:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Update fuel card vehicles and sites.
The Manage Fuel Card Sites page opens in a new browser tab.
In the Fuel Card Vehicles grid, select the Show Matched check box, and click Filter to help locate the fuel card vehicle in question (or search by vehicle name).
Next to the fuel card vehicle, click Match to vehicle in your fleet (fuel card icon ).
In the Match Fuel Card window, click the Vehicle drop-down, and choose the correct vehicle that corresponds to the selected Fuel Card Vehicle data.
The vehicle you choose MUST have a VIN that matches the VIN shown in the Fuel Card Vehicle data. If you are unsure which vehicle to choose based on the vehicle name, open the Manage Vehicles and Groups page (Account > Manage Vehicles > Open), and view all vehicles (including VIN).
Click Match.
[post_title] => Using the Fuel Card Transactions Report
[post_excerpt] => Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-fuel-card-transactions-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-01 08:39:14
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-01 15:39:14
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1592
[menu_order] => 7
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 450
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-22 20:45:42
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-22 20:45:42
[post_content] => The Scorecard Report (not to be confused with the Metrics Scorecard) ranks vehicles within a particular vehicle group in four different categories and assigns them corresponding incremental scores from 1 (worst) to near 0 (best). If the Scorecard is used, we recommend that it be used as a tool to improve driver behavior and not as a disciplinary tool.
In the Graph Area of the report, the vehicle on the left has the highest combined score, which typically indicates bad activity reported (requires most overall improvement). The vehicle on the right has the lowest overall score, so it is considered to have the best overall driving activity for that time period, compared to that group of vehicles. In the Detail Area of the report, each category column has highlighted numbers based on the score tolerance set and total number of vehicle in the group. This number represents the highest score, or worst activity reported, for that particular category.
Categories
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%" ]
Category,Definition
Speeder,"Score based on ranks of a weighted score found in the Speed Summary report. The Speed Summary weighted speeder scores are calculated based on speeds above the speed limit, where both greater frequency of occurrences and events of greater magnitude produce higher scores and ranks. These are based on instantaneous speed, as compared to the posted speed limit. Bear in mind that scores reflect speeding activity in comparison to overall vehicle activity. For example, a vehicle that drives only ten miles but with eight of those miles at speeds greater than the speed limit will likely have a higher score and rise to the top of the category due to most of their driving consisting of speeding."
Idle Time,"Score based on the number of idle minutes reported for the vehicle. The vehicle that idled the most minutes will have the highest score in the report."
Braker,"Hard braking score based on ranks of a weighted score found in the Acceleration Summary report. Similar to the Speeder scores, the higher the score the more concentrated and severe hard braking events the vehicle reported."
Gunner,"Hard acceleration score based on ranks of a weighted score found in the Acceleration Summary report. Similar to the Speeder scores, the higher the score the more concentrated and severe hard acceleration events the vehicle reported."
[/et]
Options
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%" ]
Option,Definition
Minimum Idle,"Threshold for idle activity to be included in the report. Shorter idle events are ignored, as far as the report is concerned."
Idle Time,"Score based on the number of idle minutes reported for the vehicle. The vehicle that idled the most minutes will have the highest score in the report."
Score Tolerance,"Percent of report lines to be separated by dotted lines near the top and bottom of the Total Score column. This shows the designated percent of vehicles, half high and half low, with the highest and lowest overall scores in the vehicle group. For example; if a threshold of 20% was selected, the top line would be below the top 10% of vehicles and the lower line would be above the bottom 10% of vehicles."
[/et]
driver scorecard
[post_title] => Using the Scorecard Report
[post_excerpt] => The Scorecard Report (not to be confused with the Metrics Scorecard) ranks vehicles within a particular vehicle group in four different categories and assigns them corresponding incremental scores from 1 (worst) to near 0 (best).
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-scorecard-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-01-31 15:46:04
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-01-31 22:46:04
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=450
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[8] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 510
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-28 17:20:24
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-28 17:20:24
[post_content] => The Speed Summary Report shows speeding trends over time. The Report includes two Speed Summary Graphs for total trends as well as individual Speed Summary graphs per vehicle.
Average Speed Over Posted Limit
This graph shows the number of instances of speeding over the posted limit and graphs this amount in relation to the total MPH under or over the speed limit. This graph represents an average for all vehicles listed in the report.
The closer the spike is to the middle (posted speed limit), the closer all of the vehicles in the report adhere to the posted speed limit. As the line moves farther from the middle, instances of traveling over or under the speed limit typically decrease. Use this graph to see the average number of speeding violations the group commits during the report period. When comparing specific vehicles speeding habits, you can compare the amount of instances recorded for that vehicle to the average of the vehicles listed in the report.
Individual Speeding Events Compared to Average
To compare average vehicle trends to the averages of the group, click the link on the far right of the vehicle's record in the report to expand a larger graph.
By comparing the vehicle's instances of speeding (the yellow line) to the group's instances of speeding (the red line), the vehicle in the above example has more instances of speeding over the posted limit than the rest of the report group. This is represented by the height of the yellow line outside of the red line (A). Another comparison to make is that this vehicle has fewer extreme instances of speeding than the rest of the group. This is represented by how the red line goes farther to the right of the yellow line, all the way out to 30 MPH over the posted speed limit (B).
Speeds under 15 MPH or where speed limit is not found are excluded.
Laggard/Speeding Rank Comparison
This graph shows the number of vehicles in the report and their ranking in regard to traveling under the posted limit (laggard) or over the posted limit (speeder).
In this graph above, Vehicle #12 is ranked 6th for speeding and 9th for lagging in the report details.
This ranking means that this vehicle had the highest average MPH under the posted limit in 24 instances (51% of the top laggard) and the lowest average MPH over the posted limit in 54 instances (65% of the top speeder). An ideal speeder line should stay parallel to the bottom of the graph below a target threshold, such as 20%, as indicated by the red line (not part of the graph). Use this graph to measure improvement in this area over time.
[post_title] => Using the Speed Summary Report
[post_excerpt] => The Speed Summary Report shows speeding trends over time.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-speed-summary-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:52:57
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:52:57
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=510
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1468
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-02-12 22:20:27
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-02-12 22:20:27
[post_content] => This report shows stop detail and idle time. You can filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally include overlapping trips, efficiency, and columns for attribute(s).
Report Details
The legend on the report color-codes the stops according to stop duration (0-15 min = green, 15-30 min = yellow, 30 min-8 hrs = red, >8hrs = white). Hover over values in the Trip Duration or Trip Distance columns to see the system's fastest and shortest estimated times or mileage for that proposed route; click the tool tip to run the Route Efficiency Detail report for that trip, which allows you to compares the vehicle's actual trip with alternative proposed routes (fastest and shortest).
Click the Export icon next to a line item to download the vehicle's history in 3D Google maps for a visual comparison. The shortest proposed route appears in red, the fastest proposed route appears in green, and the vehicle's actual route appears in orange. In this example, the vehicle's actual route most closely matched the system's calculated fastest route.
Browser Map
Click the Browser Map button on this report to visualize your fleet’s stops and idle times by displaying color specific circles on a map (red for stopped, blue for idle).
Click on a vehicle to limit the map view to only stops/idles for that vehicle. The rows on the right for that vehicle will highlight in yellow.
See all stops/idles on the map again by clicking “display all”.
Double-click the rows on the right and the map will zoom to that stop and pop up more info. (Clicking on the circles also pops up the same info.)
Use the “Time Range” slider to filter out short or long stops.
Use the “Scale” slider to adjust the size of the circles on the map. This is helpful if you filter out longer stops and want the circles to be bigger.
Sort by stop duration or by vehicle.
[post_title] => Using the Stop Detail and Idle Time Report
[post_excerpt] => This report shows stop detail and idle time. You can filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-stop-detail-and-idle-time-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:53:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:53:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1468
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 10
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 446
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-22 18:18:28
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-22 18:18:28
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]Reports allow you to quantify activity, idling, stop times, speeding, and other aspects of fleet efficiency.
Click the Reports menu item to open the Reports tab. All report types that are available to run or schedule are listed on this tab. (If you want to see reports that you've scheduled, click the My Reports tab.)
Please see Available Reports for a list of available reports and corresponding descriptions of each report.
All line items in a single report show a consistent time zone (i.e., does not vary by the vehicle's location). Set the timezone in your user profile.
[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]All reports include links to export data for further manipulation and sorting. You can run reports on the fly, or you can schedule a report for automatic delivery.
Please see Available Reports for a list of available reports and corresponding descriptions of each report.
[row]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[servicebox icon="glyphicon-list-alt" icontype="glyphicon" icon_size="40" iconbg_size="100" iconbg_radius="50" margin_bottom="30" margin_top="30" iconbgcolor="#e5e5e5" iconcolor="#777777" heading="Reports (Ad Hoc)" readmore="true" readmore_link="https://help.gpsinsight.com/docs/about-reports/running-a-report/" readmore_text="Learn More..." readmore_type="btn-lg" readmorestyle="default"]Customize your report settings on-demand, and view the results within your current browser session.[/servicebox]
[/column]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[servicebox icon="glyphicon-time" icontype="glyphicon" icon_size="40" iconbg_size="100" iconbg_radius="50" margin_bottom="30" margin_top="30" iconbgcolor="#e5e5e5" iconcolor="#777777" heading="Scheduled Reports" readmore="true" readmore_link="https://help.gpsinsight.com/docs/about-reports/scheduling-a-report-pro/" readmore_text="Learn More..." readmore_type="btn-lg" readmorestyle="default"]Save your report settings for regular, automated delivery to one or more recipients via email.[/servicebox]
[/column]
[/row][/solution][solution term="pro"]
Reports allow you to quantify activity, idling, stop times, speeding, landmark visits, and other aspects of fleet efficiency. All reports include links to export data for further manipulation and sorting. You can run reports on the fly, or you can schedule a report for automatic delivery.
[row]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[servicebox icon="glyphicon-list-alt" icontype="glyphicon" icon_size="40" iconbg_size="100" iconbg_radius="50" margin_bottom="30" margin_top="30" iconbgcolor="#e5e5e5" iconcolor="#777777" heading="Reports (Ad Hoc)" readmore="true" readmore_link="https://help.gpsinsight.com/docs/about-reports/running-a-report/" readmore_text="Learn More..." readmore_type="btn-lg" readmorestyle="default"]Customize your report settings on-demand, and view the results within your current browser session.[/servicebox]
[/column]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[servicebox icon="glyphicon-time" icontype="glyphicon" icon_size="40" iconbg_size="100" iconbg_radius="50" margin_bottom="30" margin_top="30" iconbgcolor="#e5e5e5" iconcolor="#777777" heading="Scheduled Reports" readmore="true" readmore_link="https://help.gpsinsight.com/docs/about-reports/scheduling-a-report-pro/" readmore_text="Learn More..." readmore_type="btn-lg" readmorestyle="default"]Save your report settings for regular, automated delivery to one or more recipients via email.[/servicebox]
[/column]
[/row]
Report Types
The following reports may be available for you to run on-demand.
Not all reports are available for your account. Some reports that are custom to an account are not listed. All reports based on Summary data can be run for vehicle/group (driver-aware) or driver/group (driver-centric).
Activity Reports
Report Name
Description
Activity Detail
Show reported locations and other details for each vehicle. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle, date, and time. Optionally include columns for closest landmark, all points (individual idle and non-ignition points), attribute(s), and diagnostics (if applicable).
Begin/End of Day
Show first start and last stop for any or all vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date and minimum stop duration. Optionally include all activities, exclude first/last stops (e.g., eliminate the driver's commute to/from work), exclude home landmark (e.g., eliminate visits within a landmark such as a service center or yard that you can specify when the option is chosen), or show % drive time.
Drive Time Summary
Show fleet driving statistics. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/group, date, start time, and end time. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], apply to each day, PTO data, and columns for attribute(s).
Driver History
Show vehicle driver assignments. Filter by vehicle/group, and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Fleet Utilization
Show utilization details on all fleet vehicles. Filter by vehicle/group, date, miles daily, and miles total. Optionally include unutilized vehicles, daily utilization, miles and trips, drivers, miles daily (custom threshold), miles total (custom threshold), current location, custom metrics, and columns for attribute(s).
Idle Time Summary
Show idle durations for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time. Optionally include vehicles with no activity, current location, and columns for attribute(s) and/or custom metrics. Optionally hide driver information.
Idle Time Detail
Show individual idle stops for vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Odd-Hours
Show driving-time violations. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, start time, end time, landmark/group, and violation type (in landmark, out of landmark). Optionally treat date selection as a weekend (time restrictions apply to first day and last day). Within the report, click the Drive Time value to open the related Activity Detail report.
Diagnostic Reports
Report Name
Description
Fuel Usage Detail
Show gallons used and miles per gallon reported by the vehicle (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include a gas price/gallon (automatically calculate fuel cost for each line item), show MPG (miles per gallon), show GPH (gallons per hour), show estimated fuel usage, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Fuel Usage Summary
Show gallons consumed by month (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group/driver and date period. Optionally include miles, split data weekly, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Performance
Show most recently reported data from each vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group. Choose to add Stop Duration, Non-Reporting, or Voltage Below parameters. If you choose one of these items, only the vehicles that match the criteria will be included in the report. If you choose MORE than one of these options, the system treats them as "AND" operators. For example, if you chose two options (i.e., stopped for five days AND non-reporting for two days), both of those requirements must be true in order for a vehicle to be included in the report. Optionally include columns for attribute(s). Helps to detect device reporting issues.
Show odometer and run time totals. Filter by vehicle/group, and date. Optionally include service reminders and columns for attribute(s). Selecting the Basic Report option removes all columns except Vehicle, Driver, Days, Last Reported, Run Time, and Run Time (lifetime). If you've added an adjustment baseline, the total run time value will be called “Total Engine Hours” instead of “Total GPS Device Hours.”
Diagnostic
Show diagnostic data collected for supported devices. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
DTC Alerts
Show alert data reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Service History
Show history of logged service for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Choose the Show All option to disregard date selection and show all past service history records for the selected vehicle(s).
Service Reminders
Show pending and overdue service reminders. Filter by group.
Switch Alerts
Show switch-based alerts (e.g., Battery Voltage, External Power Lost, Panic Switch, Power Cycle, or Temperature). Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Driving Violations Detail
Show details on Violations reported by supported diagnostic devices (PNP-3000 buzzer-enabled + others). Filter by vehicle/group. Sort columns in the report by Vehicle, VIN, Driver (if assigned), Violation Time, and Violation Type: Acceleration, Deceleration, Cornering, Idling, and Speeding.
The violation thresholds for these categories are set on a device level at the time of shipment/installation. To set new defaults for your vehicles, use the PNP Threshold Configuration manager.
Show a summary of Violations reported by supported diagnostic devices (PNP-3000 buzzer-enabled only). Filter by vehicle/group. The report shows a series of graphs for Violations by Type, Vehicles with Most Violations, Total Violations, and Violations per 100 miles. Sort columns by Vehicle, Driver (if assigned), Distance, Violations per 100 miles, Hard Braking, Hard Left, Hard Right, Idling, Rapid Acceleration, Speeding, and Total.
The violation thresholds for these categories are set on a device level at the time of shipment/installation. To set new violation thresholds for your vehicles, use the PNP Threshold Configuration manager
Landmark Reports
Report Name
Description
Landmark History
Show visits to known landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark, and duration. Optionally include vehicles that passed through a landmark without stopping and columns for attribute(s). If Duration filter is used, the Passing Through filter is overridden. A lookback period of seven days is applied when selecting landmark visits that are within the Report Time Period (RTP), but began prior to the first day of the RTP. If the beginning of a landmark visit is eight days or greater prior to the RTP, it will not be included in the report. "First in" represents the first reported point inside the landmark. "Last in" represents the last reported point inside the landmark.
The device must ping (report) while within the landmark to be recognized as within the landmark.
Landmark Log
Show first and last points recorded in landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and duration (in hours). Optionally include columns for attribute(s), show visits from vehicles passing through (selected by default), and/or limit the stop duration to the selected report timeframe.
Landmark Group
Show stop/idle time spent in a landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and landmark (multiple). Exclude or include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary].
Landmark Begin/End of Day
Show printable landmark report with Begin and End of Day. Start/End landmarks are required.
Unmarked Stops
Show stops at unmarked locations. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and minimum stop. ptionally include columns for attribute(s).
Late Start
Show late starts or early returns at a certain landmark. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, depart time, and return time.
Speeding Reports
Report Name
Description
Speed Violations
Show speeding instances with location data for each violation. Filter by vehicle/group/driver, date, speed threshold (max or average). Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speed"]sustained speeds [/glossary] (custom threshold values range between 2-7 minutes) and columns for attribute(s).
Show speeding trends over time. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Speeding in Landmark
Show speeding within a landmark or landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and speed threshold (instantaneous or average).
Posted Speed Violations
Show speeding violations of local posted speed. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/group, date, and speed threshold. Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speed"]sustained speeding [/glossary] and columns for attribute(s). Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as [glossary slug="speed-limit-disclaimer"]construction or school zones.[/glossary] If you see a Posted Limit value in the report that you believe to be inaccurate, you can correct a posted speed limit. This report is limited to 3,000 rows.
Show stop detail and idle time. Filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], efficiency, and columns for attribute(s). Click the Browser Map button on this report to visualize your fleet’s stops and idle times by displaying color specific circles on a map (red for stopped, purple for idle).
Stop Notes
Show stop details with driver-authored notes. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include stops with notes only, [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], and attributes.
Stop/Idle Graph
Show graphed vehicle movement and stop times. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time.
State Mileage
Show mileage by state and vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Odometer data by vehicle is now limited to cumulative totals for that vehicle if the vehicle has traveled in more than one state for the range of time specified for the report. If the vehicle has remained within one state, the Start/End Odometer data will be available.
Dwell Time
Show the duration that assets have remained at a specified business location. This report is similar to a Performance Report with a threshold for days, and it helps determine which assets are billable at a customer landmark. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Choose landmark groups for Garage and Customer with a minimum dwell threshold and timezone preference. Optionally add attributes.
Custom Reports
Report Name
Description
Idle Research
Show graphed idle time trends over time. Filter by vehicle/group and date range. Optionally include weekly output and idle totals or average.
Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud. (Fuel card customers only.) Displays all fuel card transactions in the order they occurred with no grouping of Filter by vehicle/group, date, and attribute (multiple). Optionally include exceptions and nearby vehicles.
Fuel Card Usage
Show fuel card usage and MPG (using last-fuel date). (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Show vehicle rankings on speeding, braking, and idling. Filter by vehicle group, date, minimum idle time, and score tolerance percentage. Scores correspond to incremental rankings from 1 (worst) to near 0 (best). Score tolerance determines the percent of report lines to be separated by dotted lines near the top and bottom of the Total Score column. This shows the designated percent of vehicles, half high and half low, with the highest and lowest overall scores in the vehicle group. The vehicle at the top of the report has the highest combined score, which typically indicates bad activity reported, so this vehicle needs the most overall improvement. The vehicle at the bottom of the list has the lowest overall score, so it is considered to have the best overall driving activity for that time period. If the Scorecard is utilized, we recommend that it be used as a tool to improve driver behavior and not as a disciplinary tool.
Garmin Custom Forms
Show Garmin Custom Forms that have been sent by compatible devices and received by the system.
Admin Reports
Report Name
Description
Alert History
Show history of all triggered alerts that have been sent from your account. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, and alert.
Drivers List
Show a list of all drivers in the fleet and their vehicle assignment.
User Activity
Show a summary of user activity (login, reporting, account alerts).
Vehicles List
List all registered vehicles in a specific group.
Vehicle Registrations
List all vehicle registrations for a specific time period.
Hours of Service Reports
Report Name
Description
HOS Driving Availability
Show hours of service driving availability per driver, as pulled from your Hours of Service solution via eFleetSuite.
Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR)
Show DVIRs that have been submitted by driver, including the DVIR ID, Vehicle/Asset, Safety Status, Report Notes, Date Created, Repair Certified, Approved, Defects, and Priority, as pulled from your Hours of Service solution via eFleetSuite and/or via the GPS Insight Driver App (iOS and Android).
HOS Hours and Miles
Show hours and miles for each HOS driver and pulls data directly from your Hours of Service solution via the eFleetSuite portal.
Time to Complete DVIR
Show start time, finish time (inspection complete), total inspection time, notes, and average inspection time per driver. The data for this report is pulled directly from your Hours of Service solution via the eFleetSuite portal and/or via the GPS Insight Driver App (iOS and Android).
*Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature. Diagnostic data varies by vehicle make/model. Data may include engine speed, fuel level, fuel level remaining, fuel rate, odometer, seat belt, and more.
Scheduled Report Types
The following reports are available for you to schedule.
Not all reports are available for your account. Some reports that are custom to an account are not listed.
Report Name
Description
Accel/Decel Detail
Fast acceleration and harsh-braking. (Supported devices only.) Filter by vehicle/vehicle group and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Accel/Decel Summary
Compare acceleration/braking over time. (Supported devices only.) Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date. Optionally include a column for attribute(s).
Activity Detail
Show reported locations for each vehicle. Filter by vehicle, date, and time. Optionally include columns for closest landmark, all points (individual idle and non-ignition points), attribute(s), and diagnostics (if applicable).
Alert History
Show history of all triggered alerts that have been sent from your account. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, and alert.
Begin/End of Day
Show first start and last stop for any or all vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date and minimum stop duration. Optionally include all activities, exclude first/last stops (e.g., eliminate the driver's commute to/from work), exclude base landmark (e.g., eliminate visits within a landmark such as a service center or yard), or show % drive time.
DTC Alerts
Show alert data reported by the engine via Diagnostic Trouble Codes (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Diagnostic
Show diagnostic data collected for supported devices*. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Drive Time Summary
Show fleet driving statistics. Filter by vehicle/group, date, start time, and end time. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], apply to each day, PTO data.
Driver History
Show vehicle driver assignments. Filter by vehicle/group, and date.
Driving Violations Detail
Detail of the driving violations.
Driving Violations Summary
Report to Driving Violations Summary.
Dwell Time
Show how many days assets have been at your garage locations or billable landmarks.
Fleet Hierarchy Rollup
Utilization details on hierarchy nodes. Filter by group and date. Optionally include a column for unutilized vehicles, Trip Data (sum, average, min., max.), Custom Vehicle Metrics (sum, average, min., max.), Vehicle Attributes (sum, average, min., max.), and Landmark Attributes (sum, average, min., max.).
Fleet Utilization
Show utilization details on all fleet vehicles. Filter by vehicle/group, date, miles daily, and miles total. Optionally include unutilized vehicles, idle time, daily utilization, miles daily (custom threshold), miles total (custom threshold), current location, and columns for attribute(s).
Fuel Card Transactions
Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud. (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group, date, and attribute (multiple). Optionally include exceptions and nearby vehicles.
Fuel Card Usage
Show fuel card usage and MPG. (Fuel card customers only.) Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Fuel Usage Detail
Show gallons used and miles per gallon reported by the vehicle (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally show MPG (miles per gallon), show GPH (gallons per hour), show estimated fuel usage, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Fuel Usage Summary
Show gallons consumed by month (supported devices). Filter by vehicle/group/driver and date period. Optionally include miles, split data weekly, and attribute(s). Fuel Usage from Diagnostics* is available for vehicles that track diagnostic data. Estimated fuel usage is available for vehicles that do not track diagnostic data, in which case usage is based on run time, speed, idle time, and engine size. Because estimated usage readings are not reported from the vehicle, they should not be considered 100% reliable.
Garmin Custom Forms
Show Garmin Custom Forms that have been sent by compatible devices and received by the system.
HOS Driving Availability
Report of available driving time by registered HOS driver.
Hours and Miles
HOS Hours and Miles Report.
Idle Detail
Report on individual idle stops for vehicles in your fleet.
Idle Research
Show graphed idle time trends over time. Filter by vehicle/group and date range. Optionally include weekly output and idle totals or average.
Idle Time
Show idle durations for your fleet. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time. Optionally include vehicles with no activity, current location, and columns for attribute(s) and/or custom metrics. Optionally hide driver information.
Landmark Group Stop
Show stop/idle time spent in a landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and landmark (multiple).
Landmark History
Show visits to known landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark, and duration. Optionally include vehicles that passed through a landmark without stopping and columns for attribute(s). If Duration filter is used, the Passing Through filter is overridden. A lookback period of seven days is applied when selecting landmark visits that are within the Report Time Period (RTP), but began prior to the first day of the RTP. If the beginning of a landmark visit is eight days or greater prior to the RTP, it will not be included in the report. 'First in' represents the first reported point inside the landmark. 'Last in' represents the last reported point inside the landmark.
The device must ping (report) while within the landmark to be recognized as within the landmark.
Landmark Log
Show first and last points recorded in landmarks. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and duration. Optionally include columns for attribute(s), show visits from vehicles passing through (selected by default), and/or limit the stop duration to the selected report timeframe.
Late Start
Show late starts or early returns at a certain landmark. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, depart time, and return time.
Show driving-time violations. Filter by vehicle/group, driver/group, date, start time, end time, landmark/group, and violation type (in landmark, out of landmark). Optionally treat date selection as a weekend (time restrictions apply to first day and last day).
Performance
Show most recently reported data from each vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
Posted Speed
Show speeding violations of local posted speed. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/group, date, and speed threshold. Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speeding"]sustained speeding [/glossary] and columns for attribute(s). Posted speeds are based on available speed limit information. This data does not include temporary speed reductions such as construction or school zones. If you see a Posted Limit value in the report that you believe to be inaccurate, you can correct a posted speed limit by clicking the speed value from the report. Then in the Speed History dialog, click Report Bad Speed.
Pre/Post Inspection
Report for Inspection times.
Run Time
Show odometer and run time totals. Filter by vehicle/group, and date. Optionally include service reminders and columns for attribute(s). Selecting the Basic Report option removes all columns except Vehicle, Driver, Days, Last Reported, Run Time, and Run Time (lifetime).
Scorecard
Show vehicle rankings on speeding, braking, and idling. Filter by vehicle group, date, minimum idle time, and score tolerance percentage. Scores correspond to incremental rankings from 1 (worst) to near 0 (best). Score tolerance determines the percent of report lines to be separated by dotted lines near the top and bottom of the Total Score column. This shows the designated percent of vehicles, half high and half low, with the highest and lowest overall scores in the vehicle group. The vehicle at the top of the report has the highest combined score, which typically indicates bad activity reported, so this vehicle needs the most overall improvement. The vehicle at the bottom of the list has the lowest overall score, so it is considered to have the best overall driving activity for that time period. If the Scorecard is utilized, we recommend that it be used as a tool to improve driver behavior and not as a disciplinary tool."
Service Reminders,"Show pending and overdue service reminders. Filter by group.
Service Reminders
Pending service reminders for your fleet.
Speed Summary
Show speeding trends over time. Filter by driver/driver group, vehicle/vehicle group, and date.
Speed Violations
Show speeding instances with location data for each violation. Filter by vehicle/group/driver, date, speed threshold (max or average). Optionally include [glossary slug="sustained-speeding"]sustained speeds [/glossary] (custom threshold values range between 2-7 minutes) and columns for attribute(s).
Speeding in Landmark
Show speeding within a landmark or landmark group. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and speed threshold (instantaneous or average).
State Mileage Report
Show mileage by state and vehicle. Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Odometer data by vehicle is now limited to cumulative totals for that vehicle if the vehicle has traveled in more than one state for the range of time specified for the report. If the vehicle has remained within one state, the Start/End Odometer data will be available.
Stop/Idle Graph
Show graphed vehicle movement and stop times. Filter by vehicle/group, date, and minimum idle time.
Stop Detail and Idle Time
Show stop detail and idle time. Filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally include [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], efficiency, and columns for attribute(s).
Stop Notes
Show stop details with driver-authored note. Filter by vehicle/group and date. Optionally include stops with notes only, [glossary slug="overlapping-trip"]overlapping trips[/glossary], and attributes.
Switch Alerts
Show switch-based alerts (e.g., Battery Voltage, External Power Lost, Panic Switch, Power Cycle, or Temperature). Filter by vehicle/group and date.
Trip Detail
Printable report with trip details.
Unmarked Landmarks
Show stops at unmarked locations. Filter by vehicle/group, date, landmark/group, and minimum stop. Optionally include columns for attribute(s).
User Activity
Show a summary of user activity (login, reporting, account alerts).
Vehicle List
List all registered vehicles in a specific group.
Vehicle Registrations
List all vehicle registrations for a specific time period.
[/solution]
More reference materials:
Having trouble with reports not returning relevant data? Check out Reviewing Reports.
[post_title] => About Reports
[post_excerpt] => Reports allow you to quantify activity, idling, stop times, speeding, and other aspects of fleet efficiency. All reports include links to export data for further manipulation and sorting.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-reports
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 13:27:21
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 20:27:21
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=446
[menu_order] => 8
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 10
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => a6d603e5f6f56ba47e5f670d5affda38
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:9680d6584dbff6c44c545fbf1255a8c5
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 15
[name] => Reports
[slug] => reports
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 15
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Reports allow you to view and interact with quantifiable vehicle data, such as daily activity, idling, stop times, speeding, landmark visits, and other aspects of driving efficiency. You can run reports to view the data immediately, or you can schedule reports to be automatically delivered via email on a regular schedule.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 46
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 10
[cat_ID] => 15
[category_count] => 46
[category_description] => Reports allow you to view and interact with quantifiable vehicle data, such as daily activity, idling, stop times, speeding, landmark visits, and other aspects of driving efficiency. You can run reports to view the data immediately, or you can schedule reports to be automatically delivered via email on a regular schedule.
[cat_name] => Reports
[category_nicename] => reports
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 10
)
[49] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 49
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 49
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 49
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 49
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 49
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (49)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 966
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:15:41
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:15:41
[post_content] => Routing features allow you to create pre-defined stop routes for your fleet that are optimized for highway, speed, and distance preferences. Routing features are typically most useful for organizations with pre-determined or static routes, such as delivery and service fleets.
Using the Route dashlet on the dashboard, you can create and save an ad hoc route, view the route map, and send a route to a smartphone device for navigation within the native mapping applications.
In order to manage routes, you must have the Routes permission enabled in the User Access List and the Route item enabled in the Menu Access List (Dashlet Category).
[post_title] => About Routing
[post_excerpt] => Routing features allow you to create pre-defined stop routes for your fleet that are optimized for highway, speed, and distance preferences. Routing features are typically most useful for organizations with pre-determined or static routes, such as delivery and service fleets.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-routing
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2021-04-28 14:41:41
[post_modified_gmt] => 2021-04-28 21:41:41
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=966
[menu_order] => 12
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 967
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:16:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:16:07
[post_content] => The portal provides routing and dispatching options from the Routing dashlet on the dashboard. Stops in a route can be made up of addresses (physical or lat/lon) and/or landmarks. You can load an existing route or a group of landmarks. No more than 30 landmarks at a time can be used for the optimization feature.
Example
Company XYZ's new fleet manager just arrived at Headquarters. He needs to visit each dispatch center in Arizona today (Centers A-C), but he is not familiar with the area and doesn't know the most efficient order in which to make his stops.
To create/save an ad hoc route
From the dashboard, locate the Dispatch dashlets. Double-click OR drag-and-drop the Route dashlet onto the dashboard.
The dashlet appears on the selected dashboard. You can use start/end locations, all landmarks, a custom route, or free-form text (street addresses or lat/lon). Each location must be on its own line. There is a maximum of 30 locations when using the optimization feature.
In the Start drop-down choose the location for the first point (either landmark name, type in an address or lat/lon, or add from a dropped pin on the Map dashlet). In the Company XYZ example, we chose "Headquarters."
In the End drop-down choose the location for the last point. In the Company XYZ example, we want to end back at "Headquarters," so we could choose it from the list or select the "same" check box.
In the Add drop-down choose a location to include in the route. In the Company XYZ example, we want Dispatch Centers A-C so we need to add them one-by-one. (As you type, matching landmark names appear in the drop-down. You can also type addresses and/or lat/lon combinations into the box on their own lines.)
Each point that you want to include in the route appears in the box.
If the order in which the stops are made are important to the route, clear theOptimize check box. If left selected, the destinations will be re-ordered according to the most efficient path. In the Company XYZ example, we left the check box selected.
Click Get Route.
The estimated driving distance, time, and directions appear.
If you want to save this route for repeated use or to send via dispatch, enter a Route Name, and click Save.
If you want to view the route on in Google Maps, click Map This.
The suggested route loads with turn-by-turn directions and options for Satellite, Traffic, and Street View.
If you want to send this route to Garmin OR to a driver's smart phone via email, locate the Garmin-equipped vehicle or driver from the list. You can also type an email address in the box.
Click Send.
Example of route sent via email. For each stop in the route, the recipient should click one of the links (Google, iPhone, or iOS-Google) to open the location and obtain turn-by-turn directions from the chosen mapping application on the smart device.
[post_title] => Adding a Route
[post_excerpt] => The portal provides routing and dispatching options from the Routing dashlet on the dashboard.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-route
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-03-12 14:12:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-03-12 21:12:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 966
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=967
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 2
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 966
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:15:41
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:15:41
[post_content] => Routing features allow you to create pre-defined stop routes for your fleet that are optimized for highway, speed, and distance preferences. Routing features are typically most useful for organizations with pre-determined or static routes, such as delivery and service fleets.
Using the Route dashlet on the dashboard, you can create and save an ad hoc route, view the route map, and send a route to a smartphone device for navigation within the native mapping applications.
In order to manage routes, you must have the Routes permission enabled in the User Access List and the Route item enabled in the Menu Access List (Dashlet Category).
[post_title] => About Routing
[post_excerpt] => Routing features allow you to create pre-defined stop routes for your fleet that are optimized for highway, speed, and distance preferences. Routing features are typically most useful for organizations with pre-determined or static routes, such as delivery and service fleets.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-routing
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2021-04-28 14:41:41
[post_modified_gmt] => 2021-04-28 21:41:41
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=966
[menu_order] => 12
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 2
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 067295734709239159f5abaf4b22ec0a
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:69e7f3185c71fe3bea8f51b011fee26d
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 49
[name] => Routing
[slug] => routing
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 49
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Routing features allow you to create pre-defined stop routes for your fleet that are optimized for highway, speed, and distance preferences. You can create and save an ad hoc route, view the route map, and send a route to a Garmin device (if enabled), or send the route to a smart-phone device for navigation within the native mapping applications.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 3
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 19
[cat_ID] => 49
[category_count] => 3
[category_description] => Routing features allow you to create pre-defined stop routes for your fleet that are optimized for highway, speed, and distance preferences. You can create and save an ad hoc route, view the route map, and send a route to a Garmin device (if enabled), or send the route to a smart-phone device for navigation within the native mapping applications.
[cat_name] => Routing
[category_nicename] => routing
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 2
)
[44] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 44
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 44
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 44
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 44
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 44
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (44)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 365
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 21:07:02
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 21:07:02
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]
The data in your portal account is only accessible to users with a valid login (username and password combination). Your login is part of your user profile, including your contact information and timezone.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
The data in your portal account is only accessible to users with a valid login (username and password combination). Your login is part of your total user profile, which determines your basic contact information, the vehicles and groups you see in reports and maps, and the various menu features you can access -- including administrative pages. Additionally, individual users can personalize their dashboard and adjust user preferences.
In order to manage users, you must have the User Admin permission enabled in the User Access List and access to the All Users hierarchy tree (or another hierarchy tree with users added to it). Hierarchies are available in the Enterprise product.
If you're not sure which roles in your organization will need to access the system, you may find it beneficial to start with user planning.
[/solution]
[post_title] => About Users
[post_excerpt] => Your login is part of your total user profile, which determines your basic contact information and more.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => user-setup
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 12:36:09
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 19:36:09
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=365
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 367
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 21:07:19
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 21:07:19
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]
You can create or update users by entering contact information into the User Manager feature on the map.
Enter User Information
Entering user information manually is often used when you have a small number of users (1-5) to register at a time.
[row]
[column lg="6" md="6" sm="6" xs="6" ]
To enter information for a new user:
From the menu, click More.
Click User Manager.
All current users will appear in the User Manager list.
Click +Add User at the top of the list.
The new User Profile window will open.
In the User Profile window, enter all applicable fields.
Username Tips:
We recommend that you create unique usernames for each user that is consistent with a format that can be easily remembered such as tom.jones, tjones, tomj, t.jones, tomjones@companyemail.com, etc,.
If there is a standard username format for your company that may be the easiest format to use.
Acceptable characters include: @ - _ . /
Click Save.
[/column]
[column lg="6" md="6" sm="6" xs="6" ]
[/column]
[/row]
[/solution]
[solution term="pro,enterprise"]You can create or update users by entering information into the web portal one at a time, or you can manage users in a batch process by importing data from a spreadsheet.
Enter User Information
Entering user information manually is often used when you have a small number of users (1-5) to register at a time.
To enter information for a new portal user:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Open.
The Manage Users and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the User List grid, click User next to Create New.
In the Create New Username window, enter a new username and password for the user.
Username Tips:
We recommend that you create unique usernames for each user that is consistent with a format that can be easily remembered such as tom.jones, tjones, tomj, t.jones, tomjones@companyemail.com, etc,.
If there is a standard username format for your company that may be the easiest format to use.
Acceptable characters include: @ - _ . /
If you want this new user to inherit dashboards, preferences, vehicle group membership and vehicle permissions from an existing user profile, choose the username from which to clone in the Clone This User drop-down.
Cloning does not include reports or alerts.
If you want this new user to inherit menu permissions, choose an available Access Template.
You can clone a user AND copy access permissions, but access permissions override any overlapping permissions cloned from the user. We recommend updating Hierarchy group membership after this process via spreadsheet upload.
Click Create User.
The Edit User screen appears.
Enter the remaining details for the new user: First Name, Last Name, Email Address, Phone Number, Address, City, State/Zip, Country, and Timezone.
Send Welcome Email: The Welcome email that contains a link to the portal and the user's username, password, and security PIN required for login. Each time you send a Welcome email from the portal, a copy is sent to the primary email address for your account. The message "From Address" is support@[provider].com. Be sure that users at your company add this address as an exception to their email SPAM filter to ensure receipt of the email.
Force Password Reset: Forcing a Password rest forces the user to change their own password immediately upon their first login.
If your user access is limited by hierarchy, assign this new user to one of the hierarchy branches within your access level, or else you will lose access to the user and will need to ask your account administrator to adjust the assignment.
The portal provides several options for importing and exporting data to and from a spreadsheet. You can use the import option for registering a large batch of users. Typically this process is done after you've already set up user access options. The maximum number of rows spreadsheet upload accepts is 1,500. If your spreadsheet has more than this number it is recommended to break it up and perform multiple uploads for each group of 1,500 until it is complete.
If you already have data in the portal, it's a good practice to first export the data for safe-keeping so that you can restore if you later make a mistake in your import.
To import users:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and then click Update/Export items using a spreadsheet.
Download one of the CSV Example templates (1, 2, or 3) next to the Create New users spreadsheet action.
Within the spreadsheet, column names appear in Row 1 and an example record appears in Row 2. Replace Row 2+ with your own data.
Fields in the Reference column on the Update/Export page are required. If your spreadsheet has duplicate data rows for a reference column, such as two rows with the same username or VIN, the spreadsheet upload will only import one record using the last row of data.
Available columns for user import include: Username, Password, First Name, Last Name, Full Name, Email Address, Address, City, State, Zip, Country, Timezone, Vehicle Group Permissions, Hierarchy Permissions, Hierarchy Permission Types, and Menu Access Template. You must include data for the following cells: Username and Password (reference columns). All other cells are optional.
If you have multiple items within a cell, use the following delineator(s):
~ - full path for hierarchy (e.g., Company Name~East~Northeast)
: - multiple assignments (e.g., Vehicles:Drivers)
; - multiple items (e.g., red;gray)
Save the spreadsheet with your changes.
From the portal in the Spreadsheet Actions grid, click the Create New Users option.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names (shown in the drop-downs) will be applied to the appropriate fields in the portal (shown in bold). Set any fields marked "IGNORE" to the appropriate column name.
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Valid values for reference fields will be marked with a green check box.
Click Proceed with Import.
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
From the menu at the top of the page, click Users to view the new users that were imported.
Certain Spreadsheet Upload Actions can update only one column at a time. For example, the Attribute Update process would need to be performed twice to update the Car Color then the Car Type attribute. You would choose "–Ignore--" for one of the attributes during each upload so only one was chosen. (That the column header on that particular spreadsheet is the actual Attribute Name as entered in the system. This name must be listed in the first row to designate the Attribute Name for Attribute update.) The Hierarchy Update the spreadsheet process is similar in that you would perform it twice to assign a vehicle to two different Hierarchy Trees.
The import process does not send the Welcome Email to new users. After the import, click the Send Welcome Email button next to any user. Then add the email addresses, separated by a comma.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Adding a User
[post_excerpt] => You can create or update users by entering information into the web portal one at a time, or you can manage users in a batch process by importing data from a spreadsheet.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adding-a-user
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 13:22:10
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 20:22:10
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 365
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=367
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 945
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:59:28
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:59:28
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]
The User Manager feature provides a comprehensive view of information for users and allows you to edit details.
Edit User Details
Editing user details allows you to modify the details in a user's profile, such as timezone or email address.
To edit user details:
From the Menu, click More.
Click User Manager.
All current users will appear in the User Manager list.
Locate the user you want to modify, and click on their username.
The User Card associated with the user will appear to the left of the list.
From the User Card, click Edit User to add or edit information.
When finished modifying user details, click Save.
Delete User Details
If a User needs to be removed from the user list, the account Admin can delete the user's profile.
To delete a user:
From the Menu, click More.
Click User Manager.
All current users will appear in the User Manager list.
Locate the user you want to delete and click on their username.
The User Card associated with the user will appear to the left of the list.
From the User Card, click Delete.
The Delete User card will appear, click OK.
[/solution]
[solution term="pro,enterprise"]The Manage Users and Groups page provides a comprehensive view of the information for users and allows you to edit details. You can also update user settings by way of spreadsheet import.
Filter the User List
If your user list is long, you can use filter options to isolate a subset of users.
To filter the user list:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Open.
The Manage Users and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
Choose from the following filter options:
Nodes: Show only users who belong to a particular hierarchy node (if applicable).
Show Deleted: Show only users whose profiles have been deleted from the account.
Search: Users that match a description. Use * as a wild card before or after a string of characters.
Show All Select the check box to show all records on a single page (may take more time to load).
Click Filter.
The user list shows only the users that match your filter criteria.
Edit User Details
Editing user details allows you to modify details about the user's profile, such as timezone or email address. The Manage Users and Groups page also allows you to modify user access.
To edit user details:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Open.
The Manage Users and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
You can also export user information from the bottom of this page or update user details in a batch process using spreadsheet import.
Locate the user you want to modify, and click Edit ()
When finished modifying user details, click Save Changes.
Delete Password Reset Requests
Within the User List, one of the following indicators may exist on a username:
- The user requested a password reset via the Forgot Password link on the login page and is awaiting a confirmation code via email or SMS. (If the reset instructions aren't followed within a week, this status automatically expires.)
- An administrator requested a forced password reset via the Edit User Details window. Reset instructions are automatically sent to the user's email address.
The status is removed if the user follows the reset instructions, if the status expires (applies only to user-invoked requests), or if an administrator manually deletes the reset request. In the case where an administrator forced a password reset and you see a "lock" icon, a user is unable to log into the portal with his or her old password. In the case of a user-requested password reset, the user can still use the old password until the reset is complete.
To delete a password reset request:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Open.
The Manage Users and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
Locate the user with a password reset request (either notated with the red key or lock icon), and click the username.
In the Password Reset Token verification window, click Yes, Delete it.
The reset request is removed from the user's profile, and the user can log into the portal again with his or her old password without setting up a new one.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Editing a User
[post_excerpt] => The Manage Users and Groups page provides a comprehensive view of the information for users and allows you to edit details. You can also update user settings by way of spreadsheet import.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-a-user
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 13:23:07
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 20:23:07
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 365
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=945
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 14430
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-02-01 10:22:33
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-02-01 17:22:33
[post_content] => Your company administrator on your account has access to all data and all features. The administrator can also give admin access to other users on the account via the Driver Admin, Vehicle Admin, and User Admin.
Assigning Admin Access
With Admin access, a user has the ability to control and manage all data and features. An Admin user can assist Fleet Managers by carrying out administrative functions, such as organizing fleets by department, region, etc., adding/editing/deleting vehicles, and running administrative reports.
Associated Risks
Users can potentially duplicate, edit and delete features that other users need. Any changes an admin user makes in the Portal will be seen by all account users in real-time. We recommend admin access is given only to one master user (ideally) or limited administrator level users, due to potential high-level impact.
Keep in mind, even if a user has access to these admin features, the data the user can see within these interfaces is limited the groups the user has been assigned.
To give a user admin access to vehicles:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Users.
In the Additional User Options menu, click Permissions for individual users.
From the User Permission List grid, locate the user you want to modify.
Select the check box for Vehicle Admin.
Open the User Admin page by clicking the Account menu, click Manage Users, click the Open button..
In the Vehicle Group List menu, set user access to vehicle groups to determine which groups of vehicles the user can access.
To give a user admin access to drivers:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Users.
In the Additional User Options menu, click Permissions for individual users.
From the User Permission List grid, locate the user you want to modify.
Select the check box for Driver Admin.
Open the User Admin page by clicking the Account menu, click Manage Users, click the Open button.
In the Driver Group List menu, set user access to driver groups to determine which groups of drivers the user can access.
To give a user admin access to other users:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Users.
In the Additional User Options menu, click Permissions for individual users.
From the User Permission List grid, locate the user you want to modify.
The user will have access to all users listed on this page. If you want to limit the users that this user can access, your account must have the hierarchy feature.
[post_title] => Giving Admin Access to Users
[post_excerpt] => Your company administrator on your account has access to all data and all features.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => giving-admin-access-to-users
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-07-24 10:08:55
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-07-24 17:08:55
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 365
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14430
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 946
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:00:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:00:09
[post_content] => [solution term="pro,enterprise"]User access is a broad term that refers to data that users can see (i.e., only certain vehicles, drivers, other users, etc.) AND the features that they can use (e.g., reports, alerts, maps, etc.). The data a user can see is determined the user's group and/or hierarchy membership. The features a user can access is determined by User Permissions and Menu Access.
If a user does not have access/permissions to a view a driver/driver group and there is a driver assigned to a vehicle/asset, the driver appears as "Assigned" in reports (see below) and on Account Management pages with a Driver data column (e.g., Manage Vehicles and Groups, etc.).
If a user does not have access/permissions to view a driver/driver group, the driver associated with a vehicle/asset is not shown and only the vehicle label is displayed in applicable dashlets.
Manage Access to Data
This section includes examples for managing user membership to groups. If using a hierarchy, see About Hierarchies.
User Access to Vehicle Groups
Assigning each user to one or more vehicle groups determines whether the user can view information for certain vehicles on maps, reports, and dashlets. Additionally, if the user has access to the Vehicle Admin (see User Permissions below), the user can edit vehicle properties.
Example
Company XYZ uses trucks to transport large heating/cooling equipment and uses vans for conducting on-site repairs. The trucks are assigned to a "Delivery" group and the vans to a "Service" group. XYZ's owner wants his Service Manager, Tom Jones, to only see vehicles that belong to the "Service" group when Tom accesses the portal.
To set user access to one or more vehicle groups:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Open.
The Manage Users and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
Locate the user you want to modify, and click Edit Vehicle Group Access.
In the Edit Vehicle Group Access window, from the right pane (Groups NOT AVAILABLE to user), click to select the groups you want to add to the user. (CTRL+click or SHIFT+click to select more than one group at a time.)
Click Add.
Click Save Changes and then Close to return to the Manage Users and Groups page.
Tom can now see vehicles that belong to the Service group on maps, dashlets, and reports. Additionally, if Tom is ever given access to the Vehicle Admin feature (see User Permissions below), Tom can also administer/edit only vehicles that belong to the Service group. If your organization uses hierarchy and groups, the data available to a user will reflect both group and hierarchy node access.
User Access to Driver Groups
Assigning each user to one or more driver groups determines whether the user can view information for certain drivers on maps, reports, and dashlets. Additionally, if the user has access to the Driver Admin (see User Permissions below), the user can edit driver properties.
Example
Company XYZ uses trucks to transport large heating/cooling equipment and uses vans for conducting on-site repairs. Drivers that operate the trucks are assigned to a "Delivery" group; drivers that operate the vans are assigned to a "Service" group. Some drivers are assigned to both groups. The Service Manager, Tom Jones, should only see drivers that belong to the "Service" group.
To set user access to one or more driver groups:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Open.
On the Manage Users and Groups page, locate the user you want to modify, and click Edit Driver Group Access.
In the Edit Driver Group Access window, from the right pane (Groups NOT AVAILABLE to user), click to select the groups you want to add to the user. (CTRL+click or SHIFT+click to select more than one group at a time.)
Click Add.
Click Save Changes and then Close to return to the Manage Users and Groups page.
Tom can now see drivers that belong to the Service group on maps, dashlets, and reports. Additionally, if Tom is ever given access to the Driver Admin feature (see User Permissions below), Tom can also administer/edit only drivers that belong to the Service group. If your organization uses hierarchy and groups, the data available to a user will reflect both group and hierarchy node access.
User Access to Landmark Groups
Assigning each user to one or more landmark groups determines which landmarks the user can see. In addition to read access to the landmarks in an assigned group, you can also set individual permissions for the user's ability to rename, add/remove landmarks, or share the groups of which he or she is a member. (The user must have the Landmark permission enabled in User Permissions.) See Using Landmark Groups to manage user access to landmarks.
If you want to allow a user to see all user landmarks, you can enable the All Users Landmarks permission; however, enabling this option provides the user with all editing/sharing rights for all landmarks created by all users.
User Access to Hierarchy nodes
Assigning each user to one or more hierarchy nodes determines whether the user can view information for certain hierarchy nodes on maps, reports, and dashlets and for how many levels deep their access applies. Additionally, if the user has access to the Hierarchy Admin (see User Permissions below), the user can edit hierarchy properties.
Example
Company XYZ has several dispatch facilities in Arizona and Minnesota and has created a hierarchy tree to reflect all of the relevant cities. XYZ's owner wants to limit the vehicles, users, and drivers that his Arizona facility manager, Bryan, can access when filtering reports, maps, and landmarks.
To set user access to one or more hierarchy nodes:
From the portal, click the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Access permissions for individual users.
On the Manage Users and Groups page, locate the user you want to modify, and click Edit Hierarchy-Based Access (hierarchy icon ).
In the Edit Hierarchy-Based Vehicle Access window, choose the hierarchy tree and the depth level to which you want to give access. Additionally, choose the type of branch in the selected node that the user can see (e.g., vehicles, drivers, users, and landmarks). Keep in mind, this assignment alone does not allow the user to administer vehicle, driver, or user data.
Click Add Node.
The child nodes that were selected appear.
Continue adding nodes that you want to allow for the selected user, and click Close.
In the Company XYZ example, Bryan will see only the Arizona hierarchy node and child nodes when filtering maps, reports, and dashlets:
Manage Access to Features
Generally speaking, "features" refers to User Permissions and Menu Access. Think of it this way: If "Reports" is a User Permission that allows a user to run and schedule reports, then the Menu Access determines which reports a user can run when accessing that feature.
User Permissions
Limiting user permissions allows you to prevent users from making unauthorized changes to certain settings. It also makes a user's portal experience more efficient because the user can focus on only the features that apply to his or her needs. Available user permissions that you can turn on/off per user include: Mapping, Landmarks, Reports, Alerts, Maintenance, Messaging, Routes, Fuel Usage, Edit Speed Limits, Garmin Forms, Driver Admin, Vehicle Admin, User Admin, Hierarchy Admin, Show Deleted, All Users Landmarks, All Hierarchies, and Custom Metrics.
Refer to the Settings Descriptions in the portal for details about each of these features.
Example
Mary is an administrative assistant at Company XYZ. Mary's permissions within the portal should be limited to ad-hoc Reports, which the owner occasionally asks her to run for him.
To set user permissions:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Access permissions for individual users.
From the User Access List grid, locate the user you want to modify.
Select or clear the appropriate check boxes in the corresponding column that you want to turn on or off. Selections are automatically saved as you make them, indicated by a green check box. In the Company XYZ example, we cleared all check boxes for Mary except Reports.
The next time Mary logs on, she will only see the feature(s) based on these selections. She has no access to the Mapping or More menus, but she does have access to the Reports menu, which shows all reports.
The Admin menu is also still available to her, but it includes only one option (Password). This feature is not limited by user permissions; it's included as part of Menu Access under the Account category. See next section below.
User Menu Access
Menu access refer to the individual items for the following features in the portal: Reports, Dashlets, Mapping, Custom, Account, and Alerts.
You can manage menu access by turning on/off features for each user. If you have several users who should have similar settings, rather than edit individual settings one-by-one, you can optionally create a template that applies the same menu access settings to multiple users. If you want to apply the same settings to all users for your account, use the Account* line item in the grid. Individual user settings (if changed) override the settings applied by the account.
Example
Mary is an administrative assistant at Company XYZ. (See example above.) Currently, she sees all reports in the Reports menu. The owner wants to limit the number of reports she can access to only a few Activity reports and the Speed Summary report.
To set menu access for a user:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Menu-Access permissions for individual users.
The Manage Menu Access page opens in a new browser tab. By default, the items in the Reports category appear. (If you want to change a different category, choose one from the Category drop-down, and click filter.)
From the User Access List grid, locate the user you want to modify.
Select or clear the appropriate check boxes in the corresponding column that you want to turn on or off for the selected category (e.g., Reports). Selections are automatically saved as you make them, indicated by a green check box.
In the Company XYZ example, we cleared all check boxes for Mary except Drive Time Summary, Fleet Utilization, Idle Time Summary, Odd Hours, and Speed Summary). (Not all reports are shown in the following screen shot.)
The next time Mary logs on to the portal, she will only see the items based on these selections.
Example
The owner just hired five more assistants in different divisions. Rather than repeat the same menu access steps from earlier (see above scenarios), he wants to create an access template that he can apply to all five users.
To create and apply an access template:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Users, and click Menu permissions for individual users.
The Manage Menu Access page opens in a new browser tab.
From the User Access List grid, select the Templates check box, and click Filter.
The filters for the selected category (e.g., Reports) appear.
At the bottom of the grid, click Access Template next to Create new.
In the New Access Template window, enter a name for the template, and click Save.
By default, the new template has access to all of the items in each category. Use the Category drop-down and Filter button to go through each category and restrict menus from this template.
Contact support for assistance with template settings. They may be locked if your account does not have template access permissions.
When you're satisfied, clear the Templates check box, and click Filter.
Drag-and-drop the template over the appropriate user(s) that should inherit the template's access.
All settings that were part of the template (e.g., Admin Assistant) apply to the user in every category.
[/solution]
[post_title] => Managing User Access
[post_excerpt] => User access is a broad term that refers to data that users can see (i.e., only certain vehicles, drivers, other users, etc.) AND the features that they can use (e.g., reports, alerts, maps, etc.). The data a user can see is determined the user's group and/or hierarchy membership. The features a user can access is determined by User Permissions and Menu Access.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-user-access
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 13:24:26
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 20:24:26
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 365
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=946
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 5
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 365
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 21:07:02
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 21:07:02
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]
The data in your portal account is only accessible to users with a valid login (username and password combination). Your login is part of your user profile, including your contact information and timezone.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
The data in your portal account is only accessible to users with a valid login (username and password combination). Your login is part of your total user profile, which determines your basic contact information, the vehicles and groups you see in reports and maps, and the various menu features you can access -- including administrative pages. Additionally, individual users can personalize their dashboard and adjust user preferences.
In order to manage users, you must have the User Admin permission enabled in the User Access List and access to the All Users hierarchy tree (or another hierarchy tree with users added to it). Hierarchies are available in the Enterprise product.
If you're not sure which roles in your organization will need to access the system, you may find it beneficial to start with user planning.
[/solution]
[post_title] => About Users
[post_excerpt] => Your login is part of your total user profile, which determines your basic contact information and more.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => user-setup
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 12:36:09
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 19:36:09
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=365
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 5
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 75453f7d46b61c1ade61c062e970daef
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:300af2e08ff89017a43fe752114a93ce
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 44
[name] => Users
[slug] => users
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 44
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => The data in your Portal account is only accessible to users with a valid login. Users can adjust contact information and add and/or edit other users directly from the Portal.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 11
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 5
[cat_ID] => 44
[category_count] => 11
[category_description] => The data in your Portal account is only accessible to users with a valid login. Users can adjust contact information and add and/or edit other users directly from the Portal.
[cat_name] => Users
[category_nicename] => users
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 5
)
[17] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 17
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 17
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 511
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 17
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 17
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 17
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 511
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (17)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (511)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 14553
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-02-22 15:54:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-02-22 22:54:40
[post_content] => Need to see a newly installed device on the map? Car or truck not showing up? Check out the information below.
[solution term="basic"]Click the Vehicles menu item to open the Vehicles tab. All of your vehicles and their color-coded statuses are listed on this tab.
When you click on a vehicle from the list or when you click on a vehicle from the map, the Vehicle Card appears, which shows you the duration of vehicle status, last reported time of ignition status, address and geocode of last reported location, and current odometer reading (GPS odometer). Additional menu items are also available for the selected vehicle.
"Help! Why can't I see my vehicles on the map?" Ensure the map filters are turned off (i.e., show ALL VEHICLES).
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]All of your registered vehicles and/or assets are visible on maps and dashlets. Vehicles are color-coded according to their current status (i.e., moving, idling, stopped).
[row]
[column lg="3" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/column]
[column lg="9" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
The thresholds shown in the legend are customizable. Click the User Preferences icon () on the dashboard to set thresholds for Speed (mph), Idle Time (minutes) Stop Time (minutes), and Out of Range (minutes).
Icon shapes are also customizalbe. Instead of using a circle (), you can assign different icon shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type.
[/column]
[/row]
In dashlets and drop-downs, vehicles are listed alphabetically (by vehicle label). When you click on a vehicle from a list or from a map, the Vehicle Card appears, which shows you the duration of vehicle status, last reported time of ignition status, address and geocode of last reported location, and more.
[row]
[column lg="7" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/column]
[column lg="5" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
The information on the Vehicle Card varies depending on the map type and the features available to your account.
[/column]
[/row]
The Vehicle Management page also allows you to register new devices, edit vehicle properties, assign vehicle groups, and more.
In order to manage vehicles, you must have the Vehicle Admin permission enabled in the User Access List.
[/solution]
[post_title] => About Vehicles
[post_excerpt] => Get to know the basics about how vehicle data is displayed in the map.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-vehicles
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-09 14:38:45
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-09 21:38:45
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14553
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 362
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 20:47:44
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 20:47:44
[post_content] => [solution term="basic,standard"]
Adding a vehicle allows you to register a new vehicle in your account.
Register a New Vehicle
The device must be installed in the vehicle before you can see the vehicle in the portal.
To add a vehicle:
From the menu, click Vehicles.
Click Add Vehicle.
Enter the following information in the Vehicle Editor:
[et colwidth="20%|80%" class="table-zebra"]
Field Name,Description
Serial Number*,"The unique serial number of each GPS device that is associated with a specific vehicle. The device serial number(s) are pre-populated into your account at the time of installation. Each device can be registered to only one vehicle."
Odometer*,"The mileage on the vehicle at the time of installation."
Vehicle Label*,"The user-friendly identifier for the vehicle used in maps, reports, and so on. You can decide how to label each vehicle in your fleet."~~~~Please do not use special characters as this may affect reports/exported data.
VIN*,"The Vehicle Identification Number. Enter the VIN that is associated with the specific serial number of the installed device. Refer to your vehicle/device registration card (if available) to ensure you associate the right vehicle with the right device."
Icon*,"The default icon appears as a pin with a circle. Instead of using a circle, you can assign different shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type. For example, all trucks can be denoted with a truck-shaped icon, whereas vans can be denoted with a van-shaped icon. (Color is dynamically set based on vehicle status.)"
Year*,"The year of the vehicle model."
Make*,"The make of the vehicle (e.g., Ford). Automatically populated when VIN is entered."
Model*,"The model of the vehicle (e.g., F150). Automatically populated when VIN is entered."
Color,"The Vehicle Identification Number. Enter the VIN that is associated with the specific serial number of the installed device. Refer to your vehicle/device registration card (if available) to ensure you associate the right vehicle with the right device."
License Plate,"The license plate number of the vehicle."
License State,"The state in which the vehicle is licensed."
Country,"The country where the vehicle operates."
Fuel Type,"The type of fuel the vehicle consumes (used to calculate GHG emissions on reports)."
Fuel Capacity,"The fuel capacity in gallons (used to calculate the Idle GPH)."
Engine Size (L),"The size of the engine (used to calculate the Idle GPH)."
Idle GPH,"The number of gallons per hour the vehicle consumes when idling. Automatically calculates based on fuel capacity and engine size."
[/et]
Click Save.
A copy of the registration information will be sent to the email address on file with your account.
Additional settings are available after initial save. See Editing a Vehicle.
[/solution][solution term="pro"]After your device has been installed in your vehicle, you must add the vehicle's information to the [whitelabel_name] portal (register). You can add vehicles by entering information into the portal one at a time or by importing data from a spreadsheet.
You must have the Vehicle Admin permission in order to manage vehicles.
For most device models, you need to have the following to add the vehicle to the portal (required fields are indicated by an asterisk *):
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%"]
Field Name,Description
Serial Number*,"The unique serial number of each GPS device that is associated with a specific vehicle. The device serial number(s) are pre-populated into your account at the time of installation. Each device can be registered to only one vehicle."
Vehicle Label*,The user-friendly identifier for the vehicle used in maps\, reports\, and so on. You can decide how to label each vehicle in your fleet. Examples for vehicle labels may include using numbers for the vehicles (e.g.\, 22\, 23\, 24)\, both numbers and descriptions (e.g.\, 194 - Component Semi)\, the serial number of the device (e.g.\, 433208XXXX)\, or any abbreviated notation that is already in place at your company (e.g.\, TRK-91 for truck or C-42 for crane). You can also override the vehicle label from user preferences.~~~~Please do not use special characters as this may affect reports/exported data.
VIN*,"The Vehicle Identification Number. Enter the VIN that is associated with the specific serial number of the installed device. Refer to your vehicle/device registration card (if available) to ensure you associate the right vehicle with the right device."
Initial Odometer*,"The mileage on the vehicle at the time of installation. This value may not be required for registration of certain device models."
Initial Run Time,"The number of running hours the engine has accumulated. Only relevant for assets, service reminders, or frequent idling."
Country*,"The country where the vehicle operates."
License State*,"The state in which the vehicle is licensed."
License Plate,The license plate number of the vehicle."
Color,"The color of the vehicle."
Make,"The make of the vehicle. Automatically populated when VIN is entered."
Model,"The model of the vehicle. Automatically populated when VIN is entered."
Model Year,"The model year of the vehicle. Automatically populated when VIN is entered."
Engine Size (L),"The size of the engine (used to calculate the Idle GPH on emissions reports). If unknown, leave blank."
[/et]
Entering vehicle information manually is often used when you have a small number of vehicles (1-5) to register at a time.
To add a vehicle:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Vehicle List grid, click Vehicle next to Register New.
In the Register New Vehicle window, enter the required information for the vehicle/device. (Required fields are denoted with an asterisk *. See above for descriptions.)
Click Register Vehicle.
The Save New Vehicle Registration pop-up window appears with a message stating the vehicle was registered successfully.
You may use the hyperlinks to assign the newly registered vehicle to a vehicle group (Assign [vehicle label] to vehicle groups] or add the vehicle to hierarchies (Add [vehicle label] to hierarchies). Alternatively, you may skip these options by clicking skip.
If there are current recalls, the Current Vehicle Recalls pop-up appears providing a hyperlink (View Recalls/Edit Vehicle) to view the current recalls associated with the entered VIN. If there are no recalls, the pop-up reads "Changes Saved and you may exit by clicking the Exit button."
Click Close to complete the registration process.
Continue the registration process for each vehicle/device in your fleet.
Go back to the browser tab that contains the dashboard.
From the Vehicle Selector dashlet, you should now see the vehicles you added; however, the vehicle will not appear until it has been driven after the device installation.
Import Vehicle Information
The portal provides several options for importing and exporting data to and from a spreadsheet. You can use the import option for registering a large batch of vehicles as long as the serial numbers for your devices are already loaded into the portal. The maximum number of rows spreadsheet upload accepts is 1,500. If your spreadsheet has more than this number it is recommended to break it up and perform multiple uploads for each group of 1,500 until it is complete.
If you already have data in the portal, it's a good practice to first export the data for safe-keeping so that you can restore if you later make a mistake in your import.
To import vehicles:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and then click Update/Export items using a spreadsheet.
Download a CSV Example template next to the Register New Vehicles spreadsheet action.
Within the spreadsheet, column names appear in Row 1 and an example record appears in Row 2. Replace Row 2+ with your own data.
Fields in the Reference column on the Update/Export page are required. If your spreadsheet has duplicate data rows for a reference column, such as two rows with the same username or VIN, the spreadsheet upload will only import one record using the last row of data.
Available columns for vehicle import include: VIN, Vehicle Label, Serial Number, Color, License Plate, License Country, License State, Odometer, Make, Model, Model Year, Fuel Type, Fuel Capacity, Idle GPH, Engine Size, Run Time, Run Time Timestamp, and Vehicle Icon. You must include data for the following cells: VIN, Vehicle Label, Serial Number (reference columns), License Country, License State, and Odometer (required fields). All other cells are optional and can be left blank. (See above for descriptions.)
For VIN, Serial Number, and Odometer values, format the cells as either number (with no decimal places) or text (if the cell value starts with a 0). If you have multiple items within a cell, use the following delineator(s):
: - multiple assignments (e.g., Vehicles:Drivers)
; - multiple items (e.g., red;gray)
Save the spreadsheet with your changes.
From the portal in the Spreadsheet Actions grid, click the Register New Vehicles option.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names (shown in the drop-downs) will be applied to the appropriate fields in the portal (shown in bold). Set any fields marked "IGNORE" to the appropriate column name.
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Valid values for reference fields will be marked with a green check box.
Click Proceed with Import.
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
From the menu at the top of the page, click Vehicles to view the new vehicles that were imported.
Certain Spreadsheet Upload Actions can update only one column at a time. For example, the Attribute Update process would need to be performed twice to update the Car Color then the Car Type attribute. You would choose "–Ignore--" for one of the attributes during each upload so only one was chosen. (That the column header on that particular spreadsheet is the actual Attribute Name as entered in the system. This name must be listed in the first row to designate the Attribute Name for Attribute update.)
[/solution][solution term="enterprise"]
After your device has been installed in your vehicle, you must add the vehicle's information to the Portal (register). You can add vehicles by entering information into the portal one at a time or by importing data from a spreadsheet.
You must have the Vehicle Admin permission in order to manage vehicles.
For most device models, you need to have the following to add the vehicle to the portal (required fields are indicated by an asterisk *):
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%"]
Field Name,Description
Serial Number*,"The unique serial number of each GPS device that is associated with a specific vehicle. The device serial number(s) are pre-populated into your account at the time of installation. Each device can be registered to only one vehicle."
Vehicle Label*,The user-friendly identifier for the vehicle used in maps\, reports\, and so on. You can decide how to label each vehicle in your fleet. Examples for vehicle labels may include using numbers for the vehicles (e.g.\, 22\, 23\, 24)\, both numbers and descriptions (e.g.\, 194 - Component Semi)\, the serial number of the device (e.g.\, 433208XXXX)\, or any abbreviated notation that is already in place at your company (e.g.\, TRK-91 for truck or C-42 for crane). You can also override the vehicle label from user preferences.~~~~Please do not use special characters as this may affect reports/exported data.
VIN*,"The Vehicle Identification Number. Enter the VIN that is associated with the specific serial number of the installed device. Refer to your vehicle/device registration card (if available) to ensure you associate the right vehicle with the right device."
Initial Odometer*,"The mileage on the vehicle at the time of installation. This value may not be required for registration of certain device models."
Initial Run Time,"The number of running hours the engine has accumulated. Only relevant for assets, service reminders, or frequent idling."
Country*,"The country where the vehicle operates."
License State*,"The state in which the vehicle is licensed."
License Plate,"The license plate number of the vehicle."
Color,"The color of the vehicle."
Model Year,"The model year of the vehicle. Automatically populated when VIN is entered."
Make,"The make of the vehicle. Automatically populated when VIN is entered."
Model,"The model of the vehicle. Automatically populated when VIN is entered."
Engine Size (L),"The size of the engine (used to calculate the Idle GPH on emissions reports). If unknown, leave blank."
[/et]
Entering vehicle information manually is often used when you have a small number of vehicles (1-5) to register at a time.
To add a vehicle:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Vehicle List grid, click Vehicle next to Register New.
In the Register New Vehicle window, enter the required information for the vehicle/device. (Required fields are denoted with an asterisk *. See above for descriptions.)
Click Register Vehicle.
The Save New Vehicle Registration pop-up window appears with a message stating the vehicle was registered successfully.
You may use the hyperlinks to assign the newly registered vehicle to a vehicle group (Assign [vehicle label] to vehicle groups] or add the vehicle to hierarchies (Add [vehicle label] to hierarchies). Alternatively, you may skip these options by clicking skip.
If there are current recalls, the Current Vehicle Recalls pop-up appears providing a hyperlink (View Recalls/Edit Vehicle) to view the current recalls associated with the entered VIN. If there are no recalls, the pop-up reads "Changes Saved and you may exit by clicking the Exit button."
Click Close to complete the registration process.
Continue the registration process for each vehicle/device in your fleet.
Go back to the browser tab that contains the dashboard.
From the Vehicle Selector dashlet, you should now see the vehicles you added; however, the vehicle will not appear until it has been driven after the device installation.
Import Vehicle Information
The portal provides several options for importing and exporting data to and from a spreadsheet. You can use the import option for registering a large batch of vehicles as long as the serial numbers for your devices are already loaded into the portal. The maximum number of rows spreadsheet upload accepts is 1,500. If your spreadsheet has more than this number it is recommended to break it up and perform multiple uploads for each group of 1,500 until it is complete.
If you already have data in the portal, it's a good practice to first export the data for safe-keeping so that you can restore if you later make a mistake in your import.
To import vehicles:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and then click Update/Export items using a spreadsheet.
Download a CSV Example template next to the Register New Vehicles spreadsheet action.
Within the spreadsheet, column names appear in Row 1 and an example record appears in Row 2. Replace Row 2+ with your own data.
Fields in the Reference column on the Update/Export page are required. If your spreadsheet has duplicate data rows for a reference column, such as two rows with the same username or VIN, the spreadsheet upload will only import one record using the last row of data.
Available columns for vehicle import include: VIN, Vehicle Label, Serial Number, Color, License Plate, License Country, License State, Odometer, Make, Model, Model Year, Fuel Type, Fuel Capacity, Idle GPH, Engine Size, Run Time, Run Time Timestamp, and Vehicle Icon. You must include data for the following cells: VIN, Vehicle Label, Serial Number (reference columns), License Country, License State, and Odometer (required fields). All other cells are optional and can be left blank. (See above for descriptions.)
For VIN, Serial Number, and Odometer values, format the cells as either number (with no decimal places) or text (if the cell value starts with a 0). If you have multiple items within a cell, use the following delineator(s):
~ - full path for hierarchy (e.g., Company Name~East~Northeast)
: - multiple assignments (e.g., Vehicles:Drivers)
; - multiple items (e.g., red;gray)
Save the spreadsheet with your changes.
From the portal in the Spreadsheet Actions grid, click the Register New Vehicles option.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names (shown in the drop-downs) will be applied to the appropriate fields in the portal (shown in bold). Set any fields marked "IGNORE" to the appropriate column name.
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Valid values for reference fields will be marked with a green check box.
Click Proceed with Import.
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
From the menu at the top of the page, click Vehicles to view the new vehicles that were imported.
Certain Spreadsheet Upload Actions can update only one column at a time. For example, the Attribute Update process would need to be performed twice to update the Car Color, then the Car Type attribute. You would choose "–Ignore--" for one of the attributes during each upload so only one was chosen. (That the column header on that particular spreadsheet is the actual Attribute Name as entered in the system. This name must be listed in the first row to designate the Attribute Name for Attribute update.) The Hierarchy Update the spreadsheet process is similar in that you would perform it twice to assign a vehicle to two different Hierarchy Trees.
The instructions below are provided for users managing waypoints from the Classic Portal view. If you would like to manage waypoints from the current Portal, please refer to Vehicle Card - Odometer for instructions.
Odometer readings are automatically recorded for each vehicle with an installed device. Although there is often very little difference between reported (GPS Odometer) and actual mileage (Diagnostic Odometer), you may want to take quarterly readings and record them as odometer waypoints in the portal--especially if your company bills for mileage. Should there be any difference between reported and actual (due to a variety of operational variables), the portal will re-factor the difference among all of the trips taken since the last entry and continue to recalibrate for future entries.
You can update odometer waypoints by entering values into the web portal one at a time, or you can register in a batch process by importing data from a spreadsheet.
Example
It has been about six months since a known odometer waypoint has been entered for Vehicle 31, and actual odometer in the vehicle is significantly different from what is shown in the portal.
In the Known Odometer Waypoints grid, enter the Odometer value and the date/time at which the reading was taken.
Click Save Waypoint.
The grid updates with a new line item for the waypoint. If the vehicle is turned off, the current odometer value may not update until the vehicle reports again.
The Odometer History chart also updates to reflect the new waypoint.
If the Odometer History chart reflects erratic behavior after adjusting a waypoint, it may be an indication that your device requires a firmware update. Contact Support to resolve the issue with an over-the-air update.
Import Waypoints
The portal provides several options for importing and exporting data to and from a spreadsheet. This option is particularly useful if you want to update information for more than one vehicle at a time.
To update waypoints by importing from a spreadsheet
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and then click Update/Export items using a spreadsheet.
Download one of the example spreadsheets next to the Update Odometer Waypoints option, and open the spreadsheet in Excel.
Row 1 contains the column headers (varies by example): VIN (or Serial Number or Vehicle Label), Odometer, and Timestamp.
In Row 2, enter the details for your first vehicle that correspond to each column (all required).
Continue adding rows of data into the spreadsheet for each vehicle that you want to update.
Save the file as CSV.
From the portal, click the Update Odometer Waypoints option.
From the Import Step 1: Upload CSV or Excel File grid, click Choose File.
In the Open window, browse to the location where you saved the file for import, and double-click it.
Click Upload Now.
The Import Step 2: Define Columns grid appears. This grid allows you to see how your spreadsheet column names (shown in the drop-downs) will be applied to the appropriate fields in the GPS Insight portal (shown in bold). Set any fields marked "IGNORE" to the appropriate column name.
Click Preview the Import.
The Import Step 3: Preview Import Data grid appears. This grid allows you to verify the data that will be imported. Valid values for reference fields will be marked with a green check box.
Click Proceed with Import.
The Import Step 4: Import All Data grid appears. This grid provides a summary of the import results. If any rows were skipped, they will be listed here with the reason they were not imported.
From the menu at the top of the page, click Vehicles to view the Vehicles page, and then edit one of the vehicles that you updated to see the waypoints that were imported.
[post_title] => Adjusting Odometer Waypoints
[post_excerpt] => Odometer readings are automatically recorded for each vehicle with an installed device.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adjusting-odometer-waypoints
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-07-01 12:03:30
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-07-01 19:03:30
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=504
[menu_order] => 9
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 505
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-24 18:09:43
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-24 18:09:43
[post_content] => Devices track their own run time by powering on and off with the vehicles. After installation, the run time of the device will accumulate at the same rate as the run time of the vehicle; however, the start values of each will most likely be different. (The run time for a new device will be 0 hours, whereas the run time for the vehicle is likely more than 0 hours.) Because of this variance, we have two different numbers to consider:
Total GPS Device Hours - The run time for the device.
Total Engine Hours - The run time for the vehicle as reported by diagnostics OR the run time for the device + an adjustment baseline.
The run time for the device will continue to increment after swaps or transfers. It cannot be reset.
Adjustment Baseline
If you know the run time of the vehicle at the time of device installation, you can calibrate the difference by entering the “Run Time (lifetime)” on the Edit Vehicle Details page in the “Run Time Adjustment” section. After this calibration, everywhere the run time value appears in the portal (i.e., reports, dashlets, etc.), the value will include the adjustment baseline and be labeled “Total Engine Hours" instead of "Total GPS Device Hours."
Example
Company XYZ installed new tracking devices for their forklift equipment at their dispatch center and needs to reset the device runtime for one of the machines.
To adjust run time baseline
Open the Edit Vehicle Details page for the vehicle you want to modify.
If your unit gets run time from the vehicle's diagnostics, the Diagnostic Run Time is shown on the first line. If your vehicle does not get run time from diagnostics, the Device Run Time is shown.
Enter the Run Time (lifetime) value in hours.
If a run time adjustment is required to set the Run Time to 0, then 0.0 must be entered in the Run Time (lifetime) field. of the Run Time Adjustment window.
Click Submit Change.
The new run time value is saved and will be used in relevant reports (e.g., Run Time Report).
[post_title] => Adjusting Run Time Baseline
[post_excerpt] => Devices track their own run time by powering on and off with the vehicles.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => adjusting-run-time-baseline
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:53:49
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:53:49
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=505
[menu_order] => 10
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27060
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-04-05 06:26:43
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-04-05 13:26:43
[post_content] => For devices that support inputs, you can select inputs and define new switch inputs directly from the Portal.
The applicable input add-on must be installed for your supported device prior to selecting inputs in the Portal to collect and transmit the relevant input data.
Selecting an Input
You can select switch inputs for existing vehicles equipped with supported devices directly from the Classic Portal.
How to select an input:
From the top navigation bar in the Classic Portal, click Account.
The drop-down menu expands.
Click Manage Vehicles, then Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page appears.
In the Vehicle List section, locate the vehicle for which you would like to set up inputs and click the corresponding Edit icon ().
The Edit Vehicle Details page appears.
In the Switch Inputs section next to Assign:, click Input.
The Assign Input pop-up appears.
Use the drop-down next to the applicable input number (1-4) to select the switch for the input(s).
Click Assign.
Defining a Switch
You can define switch inputs for existing vehicles equipped with supported devices directly from the Classic Portal.
How to define a switch:
From the top navigation bar in the Classic Portal, click Account.
The drop-down menu expands.
Click Manage Vehicles, then Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page appears.
In the Vehicle List section, locate the vehicle for which you would like to define a switch and click the corresponding Edit icon ().
The Edit Vehicle Details page appears.
In the Switch Inputs section next to Define New:, click Switch.
The Enter Switch Information pop-up appears.
Enter the following information:
Label
On State
Off State
Click Create Input.
You may then select the newly defined switch for the vehicle by following the steps listed under Selecting an Input.
Deleting an Input
You can delete switch inputs for existing vehicles equipped with supported devices directly from the Classic Portal.
Inputs cannot be edited and instead must be deleted and then subsequently added. This is to avoid accidental changes that may affect input tracking across the fleet.
How to delete an input:
From the top navigation bar in the Classic Portal, click Account.
The drop-down menu expands.
Click Manage Vehicles, then Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page appears.
In the Vehicle List section, locate the vehicle for which you would like to delete an input and click the corresponding Edit icon ().
The Edit Vehicle Details page appears.
In the Switch Inputs section, click the delete icon () corresponding to the input you would like to delete.
Selecting Inputs for New Vehicle Registration
You can select inputs while registering a new vehicle with a supported device in the Classic Portal.
How to select inputs for a vehicle during registration:
From the top navigation bar in the Classic Portal, click Account.
The drop-down menu expands.
Click Manage Vehicles, then Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page appears.
In the Vehicle List section, next to Register New:, click Vehicle.
The Register New Vehicle pop-up appears.
Enter the relevant information and click the checkbox next to This vehicle uses inputs.
The Switch Inputs menu appears providing options for Inputs 1-4.
Select the applicable inputs using the drop-down menus or create a new switch by clicking New Switch.
Click Register Vehicle when you have completed the registration form.
[post_title] => Defining and Managing Switch Inputs
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => defining-and-managing-switch-inputs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-04-05 06:26:43
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-04-05 13:26:43
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27060
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 14557
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-02-22 16:01:37
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-02-22 23:01:37
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]
You can edit vehicle details or transfer a device to a different vehicle.
Edit Vehicle Details
When you register a new vehicle, basic vehicle information is required. After registration, you can edit any of the basic vehicle information, as well as additional settings. You cannot, however, edit the serial number. See transferring a device (below) to move a device to another vehicle.
To edit a vehicle:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle that you want to edit.
From the Vehicle Card, click Edit.
The following additional fields are available to modify:
[et colwidth="20%|80%" class="table-zebra"]
Field Name,Description
Runtime,"The number of engine hours."
Phone Number,"The phone number used to contact the vehicle / driver. (Used with alerts and messaging.)"
Email,"The email address used to contact the vehicle / driver. (Used with alerts and messaging.)"
Alert Preference,"Select the preferred method(s) of communication for the vehicle."
[/et]
Click Save.
Transfer a Device
If you need to transfer a device from one vehicle to another, the existing registration (associated with the old VIN) will be deleted.
To transfer a device:
From the menu, click More.
Click Transfer Device.
In the Serial Number drop-down, choose the device you want to transfer.
Enter the remaining fields for the new vehicle to which you are transferring the device.
Click Save.
[/solution][solution term="standard"]You can edit vehicle details, transfer a device to a different vehicle, or request deactivation.
Edit Vehicle Details
When you register a new vehicle, basic vehicle information is required. After registration, you can edit any of the basic vehicle information, as well as additional settings. You cannot, however, edit the serial number. See transferring a device (below) to move a device to another vehicle.
To edit a vehicle:
From the map, Search Results tab, or Vehicles tab, click the vehicle that you want to edit.
From the Vehicle Card, click Edit.
The following additional fields are available to modify:
[et colwidth="20%|80%" class="table-zebra"]
Field Name,Description
Runtime,"The number of engine hours."
Phone Number,"The phone number used to contact the vehicle / driver. (Used with alerts and messaging.)"
Email,"The email address used to contact the vehicle / driver. (Used with alerts and messaging.)"
Alert Preference,"Select the preferred method(s) of communication for the vehicle."
[/et]
Click Save.
Transfer a Device
If you need to transfer a device from one vehicle to another, the existing registration (associated with the old VIN) will be deleted.
To transfer a device:
From the menu, click More.
Click Transfer Device.
In the Serial Number drop-down, choose the device you want to transfer.
Enter the remaining fields for the new vehicle to which you are transferring the device.
Click Save.
Request Deactivation for a Device
Technical Support can deactivate a device remotely. Deactivation requests are processed at the end of the month.
To deactivate a device:
From the menu, click More.
Click Request Deactivation.
Select the vehicle(s) to include in the request, and click Next.
Enter a reason for the deactivation, and click Save.
A copy of the deactivation request will be sent to the email address on file for your account. You cannot modify the deactivation request in the web interface once the request has been made. If you need to make changes, please contact Support.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
The Manage Vehicles page provides a comprehensive view of the information for a specific vehicle and allows you to add and edit additional vehicle information beyond what you entered during the vehicle registration process. You can also update vehicle settings by way of spreadsheet import.
Filter the Vehicle List
If your vehicle list is long, you can use filter options to isolate a subset of vehicles.
To filter the vehicle list:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
Choose from the following filter options:
Deactivated: Vehicles that have been marked as inactive.
Fuel Card: Vehicles that have a fuel card assigned.
Garmin: Vehicles that are equipped with a Garmin device.
Polygon: Paste the KML from Google Earth to isolate vehicles with locations inside of a particular geographic region.
Vehicle Group: Vehicles that belong to a particular vehicle group.
Search: Vehicles that match a description. Use * as a wild card before or after a string of characters.
Show All Select the check box to show all vehicle records on a single page (may take more time to load).
Click Filter.
The vehicle list shows only the vehicles that match your filter criteria.
Edit Vehicle Details
The vehicle information reflects the values you entered during registration. Additional fields that were not available on the registration form include: Fuel Type, Fuel Capacity, and Hide Location.
To edit vehicle details:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
You can also export vehicle information from the bottom of this page or update vehicle details in a batch process using spreadsheet import.
Locate the vehicle you want to modify, and click Edit ()
OR
If you are making a change to the VIN or Vehicle Label, you can click on the vehicle label or VIN you would like to change from the Vehicle List then enter your change and click ok(You are not required to complete the following steps if you are changing the VIN or Vehicle Label this way).
The Edit Vehicle Details page appears.
If you want to quickly switch to another vehicle from this page, use the Vehicle drop-down.
From the Edit Vehicle Details grid, add or edit information.
When finished modifying vehicle details, click Submit Changes.
Editing Vehicle Recall Data
The Vehicle Recall Data section shows issued recalls for the selected vehicle. You may filter this list by Dismissed or Repaired status by using the corresponding checkboxes. You may also collapse the filter function by clicking on filter.
How to edit the Vehicle Recall Data list:
Under the Actions column, click on the ellipses button corresponding to the recall component you would like to edit.
A pop-up appears with the available edits (Dismiss and Mark as Repaired).
Click on the applicable edit option.
The edit is made and the component is automatically removed from the visible list of issued recalls.
To see edited issued recalls, click the checkboxes next to filter and click filter.
Edited recalls for the vehicle appear.
Any edits made to recalls issued for the selected vehicle on the Edit Vehicle Details page are reflected in subsequent reports.
Editing a Vehicle Label with an Attached Logging Device
If you have provisioned a tablet in a vehicle and you make a change to the vehicle label by following the instructions provided above, you are required to reprovision the tablet. A warning icon (Vehicle List) or message (Edit Vehicle Details) as described below appears to notify you that the tablet must be reprovisioned.
Vehicle List Warning:
From the Vehicle List, a red warning icon () appears in the Vehicle List window (next to the newly edited vehicle label) indicating that the tablet must be reprovisioned.
If the icon is grey, the tablet has been successfully provisioned.
Edit Vehicle Details Warning:
From the Edit Vehicle Details page, a warning message () appears in the Edit Vehicle Details window (next to ELD) once you have clicked Submit Changes and saved the edited vehicle label.
[post_title] => Editing a Vehicle
[post_excerpt] => Check out instructions on editing vehicle details and/or transferring a device.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-a-vehicle
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-06 12:28:51
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-06 19:28:51
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14557
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 507
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-24 18:11:35
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-24 18:11:35
[post_content] => The Fuel and Emissions Info page allows you to set Fuel Type and Idle GPH (gallons per hour) for each vehicle in your fleet. When fuel type is set, Idle Fuel Consumption totals are [tooltip type="link" link="#" target="_self" tooltip="Idle GPH is defaulted to .400 for all vehicles. Co2 Emission rate defaults to .008809 (same as unleaded) for all vehicles. Setting a specific value (Idle GPH and fuel type) per vehicle increases accuracy of calculations." style="top" ]more accurate[/tooltip] on Idle Time Summary and Detail reports (shown below).
Idle GPH that is available from diagnostic data (if configured for the device) overrides calculated Idle GPH values.
Additionally, if your organization uses fuel card integration, the vehicle's capacity helps identify potential slippage on related fuel card reports. In the example below, FLATBED-31 has a fuel capacity set, so it's easy to tell when a fuel card was used to pump MORE than the vehicle's capacity. The other vehicle in the report does not have a fuel capacity set, so the report is unable to indicate whether or not the 23.309 gallons pumped was for a 21-gallon tank or a 26-gallon tank--the difference of which can easily shift from normal to suspicious activity.
Example
Company XYZ's owner wants to measure his fleet's monthly fuel consumption and Co2 emissions for idle time.
To set vehicle Fuel Type and Idle GPH:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Update fuel and emissions info.
The Fuel and Emissions page opens in a new browser tab.
The Edit Vehicle Details page (Account > Manage Vehicles > Open > Edit icon) also allows you to edit Idle GPH, Fuel Type, and Fuel Capacity for the vehicles in your fleet. Although you can use either page to set the values, the Fuel and Emissions Info page provides an Idle GPH calculator and allows you to edit directly within the grid (with the exception of setting a new Fuel Type value).
For each vehicle in the list, click inside the cell you want to modify (Idle GPH and Capacity). Use the Idle GPH calculator to determine Idle GPH based on engine capacity.
GHG Reporting
Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Reporting is only found on the Idle Summary and Idle Detail reports. As it is limited to those reports, it is also limited to Greenhouse Gas emissions at idle.
The basic equation that you can find onlined for vehicles is to calculate Tons of co2 based on gallons of fuel consumed. The full equation is:
[tons of c02] = [idle time] * [co2 rate by fuel type] * [idle gallons per hour]
There are three (3) main factors to GHG Reporting:
Idle Time - Idle time is measured with our tracking devices.
co2 Rate - We allow each vehicle to specify fuel type, and we use these constants for tons of co2 generated per gallon of fuel consumed. This has been validated with sources including conservation.org.
Diesel: 0.01015
Propane: 0.00601
CNG: 0.005914
LNG: 0.005914
Electric: 0
N/A: 0
Gasoline: 0.008809
Idle GPH - Another constant that can be set individually for each vehicle, along with fuel type. Both are editable on the Manage Vehicles page. If the customer doesn't know the Idle GPH, it can be estimated by using the engine size. We usually get engine size from our VIN decoder, so engine size is usually put in an idle GPH estimated from that at the time of registration. The customer can override the estimate if they have the correct values. If there are no settings, the default value for our calculations is 0.4 idle gallons per hour.
In the Idle Summary Report, the co2 rate we use for each line item is available in a tooltip on each line. As shown on the screenshot attached, if you hover over a value in the GHG column, a tooltip will show you something along the lines of: "C02 Emissions Rate of 0.008809 TPG Unleaded".
[post_title] => Managing Fuel and Emissions Information
[post_excerpt] => The Fuel and Emissions Info page allows you to set Fuel Type and Idle GPH (gallons per hour) for each vehicle in your fleet.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-fuel-and-emissions-information
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2020-06-26 12:31:11
[post_modified_gmt] => 2020-06-26 19:31:11
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=507
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 508
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-24 18:12:41
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-24 18:12:41
[post_content] => Values on the Diagnostic Report indicate "0.00" if the related diagnostic is not measured. (This is often the case for light duty vehicles.) To remove those unused diagnostic line items, modify the Diagnostic Access List.
Example
Company XYZ's, Service vans are tracked for diagnostics, but those particular models do not report diagnostics for seat belt and odometer. The owner wants to remove those line items from the Diagnostic Report since it will always appear blank.
To modify vehicle diagnostic access
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Manage visibility of diagnostic data.
The Manage Diagnostic Access page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Diagnostic Access List grid, locate the vehicle(s) that you want to modify.
Locate the diagnostic column that you want to show/hide, and select/clear the check box as needed.
In the Company XYZ example, we filtered the vehicle list by "Light Duty," and then we cleared the Odometer and Seatbelt check boxes.
Now whenever a user runs the Diagnostics Report in the Company XYZ account, the Odometer and Seatbelt line items are omitted from the results.
[post_title] => Managing Vehicle Diagnostic Visibility
[post_excerpt] => Values on the Diagnostic Report indicate "0.00" if the related diagnostic is not measured.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-vehicle-diagnostic-visibility
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:52:36
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:52:36
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=508
[menu_order] => 7
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[8] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 23046
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-06-17 17:47:51
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-06-18 00:47:51
[post_content] => If you have a vehicle that has inputs set up, you can track them on your map, alerts, and reports!
Inputs on Map
To show Vehicle Inputs on your current map, make sure you have your map preferences set up to show Input Status.
To check if your preferences are set to show inputs:
Navigate to the new map.
In the upper right-hand corner, click the Map Preferences icon.
Under the Map Markers section, make sure the Show Input status is checked.
Anytime an input is currently engaged, you will see a star icon on the vehicle’s label.
If you click the vehicle label, the vehicle card will appear and show you the vehicle’s inputs and which inputs are engaged.
Inputs on Trip History
Capturing inputs in trip history will help you understand what actually occurred during a vehicle’s trip, which can help with safety initiatives.
To see input details on your trip history:
Navigate to your map and click History.
Select a vehicle to add to your map and time scrubber.
Click Map Options in the right corner of your map view.
Check the Inputs box.
You can expand your inputs and filter out inputs you don’t want to see.
When you are looking at a historic trip for a vehicle, you will see an orange line on your map and in your scrubber to show an input was engaged.
Inputs on Reports and Alerts
You can add PTO and Input data to certain reports and alerts to provide more insight into vehicle activity.
Reports with input data:
Drive Time Summary Report
Switch Alerts Report
Alerts with input data:
Asset Inputs Alert
Idle Time Alert: option to exclude PTO time from idle time
Speeding Alert: option to only alert when input has a status
Switch Alert
Frequently Asked Questions
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Question,Answer
Which devices are compatible with Inputs?,The following devices can be set up with inputs:~~GO9s~~GPSI-5000s~~GPSI-4100s~~GPSI-4000s~~GPSI-3900s~~AT-3000s
How many input connections can you have on one device/vehicle?,The number of input switches varies based on the device type:~~GO9s = 4 inputs~~GPSI-5000s = 4 inputs~~GPSI-4100s = 4 inputs~~GPSI-4000s = 4 inputs ~~GPSI-3900s = 4 inputs~~AT-3000s = 2 inputs
[/et]
[post_title] => Managing Vehicle Input History
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-vehicle-input-history
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-03-30 08:18:52
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-03-30 15:18:52
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=23046
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 980
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 18:15:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 18:15:50
[post_content] => The portal integrates with several fuel card vendors. If you are a card account holder and want fuel card integration, email your account number to Support. (WEX account numbers are in the format: XXXX-00-XXXXXX-X.) Available fuel card sites and fuel card profiles will be available from within the portal after integration is complete (varies by fleet size). For Fleetcor or Comdata accounts, you may also have to manually match each fuel card profile with the corresponding vehicle (by VIN).
Example
Company XYZ provides fuel cards to drivers to be used at designated fuel sites. At the end of each month, XYZ's owner generates Fuel Card Reports to see flagged activity where a specified vehicle was not present for the associated purchase transaction and to catch any unauthorized (non-fuel) purchases.
To match WEX fuel card profiles with vehicles in your fleet:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Update fuel card vehicles and sites.
The Manage Fuel Card Sites page opens in a new browser tab.
In the Fuel Card Vehicles grid, clear the Show Matched check box to display all vehicle profiles that are not yet matched.
For each unmatched vehicle in the grid, click Match to vehicle in your fleet (fuel card icon ).
In the Match Fuel Card window, click the Vehicle drop-down, and choose the vehicle that corresponds to the selected Fuel Card Vehicle data.
The vehicle you choose MUST have a VIN that matches the VIN shown in the Fuel Card Vehicle data. If you are unsure which vehicle to choose based on the vehicle name, open the Manage Vehicles and Groups page (Account > Manage Vehicles > Open), and view all vehicles (including VIN).
Click Match.
After you've matched each fuel card profile with a vehicle in your fleet, it should take 24-48 hours for the data to be linked. A fuel card icon to the left of the vehicle (in the Fuel Card Vehicles grid or the Vehicle List grid) indicates that the link has been made: . The next time a linked fuel card is used, the data will be available in applicable reports.
In the Company XYZ example, the owner ran the Fuel Card Transactions report. Because of the fuel card-to-vehicle matching, he can now easily identify which transactions associate to each vehicle. (This example shows an over capacity and non-fuel purchases.)
[/well]
[post_title] => Matching Fuel Cards with Vehicles
[post_excerpt] => The portal integrates with several fuel card vendors.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => matching-fuel-cards-with-vehicles
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:53:24
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:53:24
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=980
[menu_order] => 8
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[10] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1569
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-02-25 17:03:06
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-02-25 17:03:06
[post_content] => If you need to retire a vehicle and replace it with another one, you can transfer the device to the new vehicle. Alternatively, if you're not replacing the vehicle or no longer need the vehicle in the fleet, you can deactivate the device or submit for a return authorization.
Historical data moves with a device. If you install a device in another vehicle under a different department, the new department users could see the old historical data on the new vehicle.
Transfer a Device
Transferring a device to another vehicle requires you to register the device to another vehicle immediately after making the selection to transfer.
To transfer the device to another vehicle:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
Locate the vehicle you want to modify, and click Delete ().
In the Deactivate Vehicle window, choose the Transfer option, and click Continue.
Enter the information for the new vehicle, and click Register Vehicle.
Deactivate a Device
Deactivating a device requires action from the Support team. The deactivation form in the portal automatically notifies Support of the request. Support will notify you when your deactivation request is complete. Please note that devices remain on the account until the end of the month. Request by the 26th of each month to avoid an additional month of billing.
If you need to uninstall a device and install it in a new vehicle during the SAME month, rather than deactivate, simply hide the vehicle's visibility until you're ready to transfer it to the new vehicle.
To deactivate a device:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
Locate the vehicle you want to modify, and click Delete ().
In the Deactivate Vehicle window, choose the Deactivate option, and click Continue.
Choose a Reason for Deactivation.
Choose whether you own or rent the device.
Click Deactivate Vehicle.
Your request is put in progress (as indicated by the grayed out trash icon on the vehicle). You'll receive a confirmation email within a few business days when the deactivation has been complete. The device will no longer appear on maps or in reports.
To view historical data for a deactivated device:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Filter area, select the Deactivated check box, and click Filter.
From the list of deactivated vehicles, locate the vehicle you want to modify, and click Include in reports for 4 hours ().
The vehicle now appears in the Vehicle list when the "Deactivated" filter is removed. It will appear in reports for the next four hours or until you click the green icon () to expire the status.
More reference materials:
Swap allows users to quickly swap a new device serial number into an existing vehicle/asset registration. This feature is valuable for instances where devices are upgraded or replaced through RA.
By selecting Swap, the user will have the option to copy the full vehicle profile (vehicle info, associated groups and hierarchy, attributes, inputs, current driver assignment, and scheduled alerts and reports).
To swap a device:
In the Vehicle List, navigate to the vehicle you would like to swap.
Click on the trash icon.
Select Swap then click Continue.
Choose whether you want the vehicle profile copied or not. Choosing to copy the profile is generally not recommended if you want to reset all settings and associations for registration from scratch.
Click on Swap Device.
[post_title] => Transferring, Deactivating or Swapping a Device
[post_excerpt] => If you need to retire a vehicle and replace it with another one, you can transfer the device to the new vehicle or swap new devices with existing vehicle/asset registration.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => transferring-or-deactivating-a-device
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2021-03-04 14:50:10
[post_modified_gmt] => 2021-03-04 21:50:10
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1569
[menu_order] => 11
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[11] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 506
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-24 18:11:03
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-24 18:11:03
[post_content] => Alerts and SMS Messaging features allow you to send notifications (automatic or manual) to drivers. If no driver is assigned to a vehicle, you can instead use the contact information assigned to the vehicle. If contact information is entered for a driver AND a vehicle, the info of an assigned driver overrides vehicle contact info.
SMS recipients who reply "STOP" will be denoted in the grid as having a Blocked Phone Number ( icon). In order to remove a stop request, contact Support.
Example
Company XYZ does user driver assignment for vehicles. Add contact information for the vehicle so that any alerts configured to be sent to the "driver" will be delivered to the assumed vehicle operator, despite not having an official driver assigned.
To edit vehicle contact info:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Update contact info for vehicle alerts.
The Manage Vehicles Contact Info page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Vehicle List grid, locate a vehicle you want to modify. In the Phone /SMS or Email Address column for the vehicle, click the value (e.g., "not set").
Enter a value in the editable cell, and click OK.
In lieu of using this web interface to register a phone number to a vehicle, see Query Services to use SMS messaging for phone number registration.
In the Preference column for the vehicle, select the Email and/or the SMS check box(es) to indicate how the vehicle owner prefers to receive notifications.
[post_title] => Updating Vehicle Contact Info
[post_excerpt] => Alerts and SMS Messaging features allow you to send notifications (automatic or manual) to drivers.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => updating-vehicle-contact-info
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:51:18
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:51:18
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=506
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[12] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 502
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-24 17:56:22
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-24 17:56:22
[post_content] => [solution term="standard"]
Vehicle groups are used to organize your vehicles using classifications that make sense to your business. Groups allow you to easily filter the map, as well as reports and alerts, by isolating a subset of vehicles in your fleet.
Create a Vehicle Group
You can create any number of vehicle groups, and a vehicle can belong to more than one group.
To create a vehicle group:
From the menu, click Vehicles.
Click Groups.
Click Create Group.
Enter the group name, and click OK.
Select the vehicles (i.e., group members) that belong to the group.
Click Save.
You can edit and delete vehicle groups from the Group Card (click a group name to view options). The ALL VEHICLES is a system group that shows all vehicles in your account. You cannot edit or delete this group.
Filter/ Un-filter the Map by Vehicle Group
Filtering the map allows you to show only the members of a particular vehicle group, while temporarily hiding any vehicles that are not in group. You can filter by one group at a time.
To filter by group:
From the Search Results tab or Groups tab, click the group you want to view.
Click Filter.
The map adjusts to show only the members in the selected group. The hidden vehicles are still available to view and select from the Vehicles tab, but they will not appear on the map.
When you're ready to show all vehicles again, click the ALL VEHICLES group from the Groups tab, and click Filter.
Click Filter.
Sharing / Un-sharing a Vehicle Group
Sharing a vehicle group gives you a public link to a map of vehicles that you can email or share (i.e., display on your company's website for your customers to see). Groups that have been shared have a share indicator ().
To share a group:
From the Search Results tab or Groups tab, click the group you want to view.
Click Share.
From the Share Group pop-out window, click OK.
A new browser tab opens, which shows the selected vehicles as they appear on a publicly available map. Use the URL in the Address Bar of your browser window to copy or share the link. You can access the URL at anytime by clicking the share indicator () next to the group name.
When you're ready to disable the link, click group name.
Click Unshare
From the Unshare Group pop-out window, click OK.
Follow / Un-follow a Group
Following a vehicle group automatically centers the map around the selected vehicles as their locations update.
To follow a group:
From the Search Results tab or Groups tab, click the group you want to view.
Click Follow.
The map automatically centers around the selected vehicles to ensure they are all in view. The map continues to dynamically center as the vehicles update their locations.
Use the Following box in the upper, left of the map to remove (x) any of the group members from being followed. Also optionally hide other vehicles on the map as long as the Following feature is enabled.
When you're ready to stop following the group, click the X in the upper, right corner of the Following box.
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
Vehicle groups are used to organize the vehicles based on logical separations that make sense to your business. Groups allow you to easily filter reports, maps, and dashlets. Groups also determine which users of your [whitelabel_name] portal account can view information for certain vehicles.
Add Vehicle Groups
You can create any number of vehicle groups. For each group you create, you can assign vehicles and users to that group. Vehicles and users can belong to more than one vehicle group.
Example
Company XYZ uses trucks to transport large heating/cooling equipment and uses vans for conducting on-site repairs. The trucks are assigned to a "Delivery" group and the vans to a "Service" group. When viewing maps and reports, XYZ's owner filters by the "Delivery" group when he only wants to see tracking data related to deliveries for the day. Additionally, XYZ's owner ensures that his Service Manager (Tom Jones) can only see vehicles that belong to the "Service" group when Tom accesses the portal.
To create a new vehicle group:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
At the bottom of the Vehicle Group List grid, click Vehicle Group next to Create New.
In the Create New Vehicle Group window, enter a name for the group.
Click Create Group.
The window refreshes with a list of all vehicles. By default none of your registered vehicles are included in the new group.
From the right pane (Vehicles NOT in the group), click to select the vehicle(s) to add to the new group. (CTRL+click or SHIFT+click to select more than one vehicle at a time.)
Click Add.
Click Save Changes.
The window refreshes with a list of all users. By default your username is included in the group.
Depending on your stage in the setup process, you may only have one user (yourself) listed here. You can also manage user access to vehicle groups from the Users administration page.
From the right pane (Users with NO ACCESS to the group), click to select the users to add to the new group. (CTRL+click or SHIFT+click to select more than one user at a time.)
Click Add.
Click Save Changes and then Close to return to the Manage Vehicles and Groups page.
Set Vehicle Group Membership
Each time you create a new group, you can assign vehicle(s) and user(s) to that group. If you skipped a vehicle by mistake during that process, or if you want to quickly update group membership for a specific vehicle after initial group creation, you can use this process.
To assign or remove a vehicle to/from one or more groups:
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Open.
The Manage Vehicles and Groups page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Vehicle List grid, locate the vehicle you want to assign to one or more vehicle group, and click Assign to Vehicle Groups (group icon ).
The window refreshes with a list of all vehicle groups including those groups that are already assigned to the current vehicle.
From the right pane (Groups vehicle is NOT in), CTRL+click to select the vehicle groups you want to assign to the current vehicle.
Click Add. (Or select groups from the left pane and click Remove to un-assign the current vehicle from groups.)
Click Save Changes to return to the Manage Vehicles and Groups page.
[/solution]
More reference materials:
Car or truck not showing up on the map? Check out About Vehicles.
Having trouble with reports not returning relevant data? Check out Reviewing Reports.
[post_title] => Using Vehicle Groups
[post_excerpt] => Vehicle groups are used to organize your vehicles using classifications that make sense to your business.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-vehicle-groups
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-01 10:56:48
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-01 17:56:48
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=502
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[13] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 469
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-23 15:54:14
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-23 15:54:14
[post_content] => When viewing a vehicle's location on a map, the default icon appears as a pin with a circle: . Instead of using a circle, you can assign different shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type.
Example
Company XYZ uses trucks to transport large heating/cooling equipment and uses vans for conducting on-site repairs. When viewing maps, XYZ's owner wants to identify delivery trucks with a special icon so that they are easily distinguished from the vans.
To define and apply a vehicle icon
From the portal, hover over the Account menu, click Manage Vehicles, and click Manage different icons for vehicle mapping.
The Manage Vehicle Icons page opens in a new browser tab.
From the Icon Set List grid, locate the icon that you want to define.
Hover over a vehicle icon in the list to see a larger image.
Click the label next to the icon you want to define. (If no designation exists for an icon, the default label is "not set.") Enter a label for the new icon, and click OK.
From the Vehicle List grid, locate the vehicle(s) to which you want to apply the icon, and then click the vehicle's current icon to select the row. CTRL+click or SHIFT+click vehicle icon to select more than one vehicle.
In the Company XYZ example, we filtered the vehicle list by vehicle group "Delivery" to see only our delivery trucks at once, and then we selected all rows.
From the Icon Set List grid, drag-and-drop the new icon to the selection in the Vehicle List grid.
Now whenever the selected vehicles appear on a map, the new icon you designated will be used to represent the vehicle's location. In the example below, the delivery truck is represented by the truck icon, whereas the van uses the default icon.
[post_title] => Using Vehicle Icons
[post_excerpt] => When viewing a vehicle's location on a map, the default icon appears as a pin with a circle.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-vehicle-icons
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:52:10
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:52:10
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14553
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=469
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 14
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 14553
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-02-22 15:54:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-02-22 22:54:40
[post_content] => Need to see a newly installed device on the map? Car or truck not showing up? Check out the information below.
[solution term="basic"]Click the Vehicles menu item to open the Vehicles tab. All of your vehicles and their color-coded statuses are listed on this tab.
When you click on a vehicle from the list or when you click on a vehicle from the map, the Vehicle Card appears, which shows you the duration of vehicle status, last reported time of ignition status, address and geocode of last reported location, and current odometer reading (GPS odometer). Additional menu items are also available for the selected vehicle.
"Help! Why can't I see my vehicles on the map?" Ensure the map filters are turned off (i.e., show ALL VEHICLES).
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]All of your registered vehicles and/or assets are visible on maps and dashlets. Vehicles are color-coded according to their current status (i.e., moving, idling, stopped).
[row]
[column lg="3" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/column]
[column lg="9" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
The thresholds shown in the legend are customizable. Click the User Preferences icon () on the dashboard to set thresholds for Speed (mph), Idle Time (minutes) Stop Time (minutes), and Out of Range (minutes).
Icon shapes are also customizalbe. Instead of using a circle (), you can assign different icon shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type.
[/column]
[/row]
In dashlets and drop-downs, vehicles are listed alphabetically (by vehicle label). When you click on a vehicle from a list or from a map, the Vehicle Card appears, which shows you the duration of vehicle status, last reported time of ignition status, address and geocode of last reported location, and more.
[row]
[column lg="7" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/column]
[column lg="5" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
The information on the Vehicle Card varies depending on the map type and the features available to your account.
[/column]
[/row]
The Vehicle Management page also allows you to register new devices, edit vehicle properties, assign vehicle groups, and more.
In order to manage vehicles, you must have the Vehicle Admin permission enabled in the User Access List.
[/solution]
[post_title] => About Vehicles
[post_excerpt] => Get to know the basics about how vehicle data is displayed in the map.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-vehicles
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-09 14:38:45
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-09 21:38:45
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14553
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 14
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 1bdc9c279b81c515daaaba3eb2777590
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:383388f170c50af05f50a620fd9faad9
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 17
[name] => Vehicles
[slug] => vehicles
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 17
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => Vehicle features allow you to manage all vehicle activity. You can register new vehicles in your account, edit vehicle information, view vehicle locations on the map, view current status, view historical activity, find the closest vehicles, get directions, center the map around a vehicle, follow a vehicle on the map, send an SMS message, create a landmark from a vehicle's location, and more. You can also create and share vehicle groups and manage access permissions.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 43
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 8
[cat_ID] => 17
[category_count] => 43
[category_description] => Vehicle features allow you to manage all vehicle activity. You can register new vehicles in your account, edit vehicle information, view vehicle locations on the map, view current status, view historical activity, find the closest vehicles, get directions, center the map around a vehicle, follow a vehicle on the map, send an SMS message, create a landmark from a vehicle's location, and more. You can also create and share vehicle groups and manage access permissions.
[cat_name] => Vehicles
[category_nicename] => vehicles
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 14
)
)
)
[GPS Insight DVIR] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
[606] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 606
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 605
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 606
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 605
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 606
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 606
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 605
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 606
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 605
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (606)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (605)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27389
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-09-05 05:45:39
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-09-05 12:45:39
[post_content] => The GPS Insight DVIR product (iOS and Android compatible) offers an FMCSA/NSC compliant (US/Canada) DVIR solution designed to electronically record DVIRs and DVIR-related processes completed by admins/managers, drivers, and mechanics.
This product is for fleets that do not fall under HOS requirements but must meet DVIR compliance in US and/or in Canada.
Available features are listed below. We have categorized available features by which feature would be most useful based on role.
Admins/Managers
Create custom vehicle inspection templates
Access to pre-made vehicle inspection templates
Export DVIRS into PDF or Excel in bulk
Receive defect notifications
Set default vehicle inspection templates by asset type
Drivers
Perform pre-/post-trip or ad-hoc inspections
Identify and record defects
Prompted to confirm past defects are resolved/repaired
Sign/Certify
Email and/or present inspections to DOT
Mechanics
Attach worker orders and/or vehicle repair information to a DVIR (From Mobile App or Portal)
Sign off on repaired defects
Logging In
Logging in to the DVIR product is as easy as opening the GPS Insight DVIR login page, entering your login credentials and tapping Login. If you are accessing the Portal on your computer, navigate to the GPS Insight DVIR Portal at the URL provided above, enter your login credentials, and click Login.
Forgotten Your Password?
If you have forgotten or misplaced your password, please select the Forgot Password? link. You are prompted to enter your username or email address, then select Request Password Reset. Instructions for resetting your password are sent via email.
[post_title] => About GPS Insight DVIR
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-gps-insight-dvir
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-09-05 06:15:15
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-09-05 13:15:15
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27389
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27518
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-09-05 06:21:05
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-09-05 13:21:05
[post_content] => Do you have questions about DVIR regulations (US and Canada)? If you do, please review the answers to frequently asked questions below.
DVIR Regulations - US
Check out the following table for FAQS around United States (US) Regulations for Vehicle Inspection and Equipment Inspections.
US DVIR FAQs
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Question,Answer
What does DVIR stand for?,DVIR stands for Driver Vehicle Inspection Report.
Is there a required vehicle inspection form?,No. There is not a required form\, but each report must cover the 11 key points of inspection.
Do motor carriers need to have their drivers complete Driver Vehicle Inspection Reports each day?,Yes. Every motor carrier is required to have its drivers prepare a report in writing at the completion of each day's work. If a defect or deficiency is not found then a report is not necessary.
Do drivers have to do a separate inspection report for each vehicle they drive?,Yes. If a driver operates more than one vehicle during the day\, they must complete a report for each vehicle they use.
Is there anything else drivers need to do before departing?,Drivers must make sure the vehicle is in a safe operation state\, review the last inspection (if applicable)\, acknowledge and sign off that repairs have been done.
How long do Driver Vehicle Inspection Reports need to be kept?,Previous driver vehicle inspection reports must be retained for three months.
Do intermodal equipment providers need to receive driver inspection reports as well?,Yes. Drivers or motor carriers transporting intermodal equipment must report any known damage\, defects\, or deficiencies to the provider or its designated agent.
Do intermodal inspection reports have a required form?,No required form\, however the report must cover 9 key points of inspection.
How long do intermodal inspection reports need to be kept?,Previous intermodal inspection reports also have to be retained for three months.~~~~https://www.ecfr.gov/current/title-49/subtitle-B/chapter-III/subchapter-B/part-396/section-396.11
[/et]
US Equipment Inspection DVIR FAQs
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Question,Answer
What are the rules for equipment inspections?,Equipment inspections have essentially the same requirements as vehicle inspections under OSHA standards.
Do certain types of equipment require unique inspection forms?,Yes. Each type of powered industrial truck is unique and checklists should be pertinent to each type of vehicle.
Do industrial trucks need to be examined after each shift?,Yes\, industrial trucks that are used on a round-the-clock basis must be examined after each shift.
When would equipment be deemed unusable?,Equipment shall not be placed in service if the examination shows any condition adversely affecting the safety of the vehicle.
[/et]
DVIR Regulations - Canada
Check out the following table for FAQS around Canadian Regulations for vehicle inspection.
Canadian Vehicle Inspection Regulation FAQs
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Question,Answer
What is Standard 13 of the NSC standards?,A minimum set of inspection items to enhance the safety of truck and bus carriers. All daily trip inspections must have these items\, unless the item is not present in that vehicle.~~~~For example\, A Ford F350 registered for a combination weight of 12\,000kg will not require air brakes to be completed on the Schedule 2 inspection.
Does a provincially-regulated commercial motor vehicle require a daily trip inspection?,Yes. Even provincially-regulated CMVs require a documented daily trip inspection in their registered jurisdictions. All Canadian jurisdictions have adopted the standard 13\, schedule 1\, 2\, 3\, and 4. Even drivers not required to maintain a log book are required to document a pre-trip inspection.
Does a driver require a copy of the schedule in their vehicle?,Yes. A driver must always have a copy of the applicable schedule in their vehicle as reference (Schedule 4 need not be carried). This can be in a written or electronic format. This must be kept with the vehicle during the 24 hour validation period.
If I am operating an ELD am I still required to have a copy of Schedule 13\, Standard 1\, 2\, or 3?,Yes. As of now it is still required to have a copy of the Standard that is relevant to the CMV you are operating. This can be in paper or electronic format.
To travel to the United States\, can I use a Schedule 1\, 2\, or 3 inspection?,Yes. This is a recognized inspection.
Can inspection reports be on paper or electronic?,Yes\, either way the requirements are met.
Which vehicles require a Schedule 1 inspection?,Trucks\, tractors\, and trailers shall be inspected in accordance with Schedule 1 every 24 hours. These are vehicles that weigh more than 4500kg.
Which vehicles require a Schedule 2 inspection?,Buses or any vehicle designed for 10 or more passengers must be inspected in accordance with Schedule 2 once every 24 hours.
Which vehicles require a Schedule 3 inspection?,Schedule 3 inspections pertain to motor coaches with air brakes and air ride suspension. They shall be inspected at least every 30 days or 12\,000km\, whichever comes first in accordance with schedule 4.
Are drivers responsible for carrying out Schedule 4 inspections?,Schedule 4 inspections are not required to be done by the driver since this schedule is an inspection that must be conducted while the vehicle is positioned over a pit or raised in a manner that provides adequate access to all applicable components. This must be done by a person who holds the appropriate technician certification or qualification.
How long do DVIR inspection forms need to be kept?,Previous inspections have to be retained for six months.
How long do maintenance records need to be kept?,Maintenance records that report a defect or deficiency must be retained for at least four years.
Are company vehicles lighter than 4500kg regulated by Canadian commercial vehicle regulations?,No. Company vehicles with a registered weight below 4500kg are not regulated by the commercial vehicle regulations. This responsibility falls under company policy within the company SMS (safety management).
[/et]
Canadian Equipment Inspection Requirements FAQs
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Question,Answer
What are the rules for equipment inspections?,Equipment inspections have the same requirements as vehicle inspections. One difference is that operators should carry out visual checks as well.
What are visual checks?,A visual check (or circle check) is a physical and visual inspection of the vehicle before you use it.
Do daily pre-trip inspections need to be documented for equipment?,Yes. Daily pre-trip inspections need to be documented for equipment.
What are the guidelines for daily walkarounds?,The best practice is to conduct a daily vehicle walk around of all company vehicles to ensure vehicles are in safe operation. Most daily walkarounds are just a visual inspection\, depending on company requirements.
[/et]
[post_title] => DVIR Regulations FAQ
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => dvir-regulations-faq
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-09-05 07:25:04
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-09-05 14:25:04
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27518
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27413
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-09-05 05:56:27
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-09-05 12:56:27
[post_content] => With GPS Insight DVIR, you can perform pre-trip, post-trip and ad-hoc inspections quickly and efficiently right from your mobile device (iOS and Android compatible).
Performing an Inspection
https://vimeo.com/833764368
How to perform an inspection:
From the GPS Insight DVIR app, tap Inspections (bottom navigation bar).
The Vehicle Inspection page appears.
Tap New Inspection.
For Equipment Setup, under Type, tap the drop-down to select the inspection type: Pre-Trip, Post-Trip, or Ad-Hoc.
Under Equipment, tap the drop-down to select equipment type: Vehicle or Trailer.
Depending on the equipment type selected, the field prompts following dynamically update. For the purposes of this documentation, we are providing the following instructions after selecting Vehicle for our Equipment Type.
Under Vehicle, tap the drop-down to select an asset.
The Select an Asset page appears.
Tap the asset you would like to select for the inspection.
The Form field is automatically updated per your asset selection if an Administrator has linked a specific form to the asset from the DVIR Dashboard.
If the Form is not automatically updated after selecting your asset, use the drop-down to select the form type.
Optional: Under Odometer, enter the odometer value of the asset.
Optional: Under Hour Meter, enter the hour meter value of the asset.
Tap Next.
The Trailer Setup page appears.
If applicable, in the Trailer field, tap + to add a trailer.
Under Trailer, tap the drop-down to select a trailer or you may add a new trailer by tapping + Add Trailer.
If you are adding a new trailer, enter the name and license plate information in the Name and License Plate fields, respectively.
Under Form, tap the drop-down to select a form.
Tap Next.
The Inspection Page appears.
As you are inspecting the vehicle, use the checklist from the Inspection Page to check each item.
Tap the checkbox once to pass the item (a green thumbs-up appears).
Tap the checkbox twice to fail the item (a red thumbs-down appears) and tap Major or Minor to declare the severity of the defect. Then tap > to enter any notes and/or take a photo or add a photo from your mobile device's photo gallery. To return to the checklist, tap Done.
Tap the checkbox three times to declare the item as Not Applicable (a NA appears).
You may have the option, depending on your organization's settings, to tap Pass All to pass all items on the checklist.
Tap Next.
If applicable, the Inspection Page for the selected trailer appears.
Use the instructions above to complete the trailer inspection, then tap Next.
The Result & Sign page appears.
Depending on your inspection, the Inspection Result may be auto-filled. If not, under Inspection Results, tap the drop-down to select the inspection result.
Enter any comments in the Comments field, then use the Signature box to sign your inspection form.
Tap Submit.
A Confirmation pop-up appears asking you to confirm that your inspection has been performed in accordance with applicable requirements.
To confirm, tap Submit.
A pop-up appears asking you to allow the app to use your location.
Tap your selection in response to the request.
The Vehicle Inspection page appears displaying your completed inspection.
[post_title] => Performing Inspections
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => performing-inspections
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-09-05 06:15:55
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-09-05 13:15:55
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 27389
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27413
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27444
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-09-05 06:08:29
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-09-05 13:08:29
[post_content] => With GPS Insight DVIR, you can view submitted inspections for your organization and document repairs for any items declared defective on a previous inspection (requires enabled Repair Vehicle Inspection permission).
Viewing Submitted Inspections
From the Inspections page of GPS Insight DVIR, you can view submitted inspections from the current date and previous dates/date ranges. Inspections submitted on the current date are listed by default on the Inspection page.You may use the search field to search submitted inspections for the date/date range selected by driver or unit number.
Depending on your permissions, you may be able to see submitted inspections completed by others in your organization.
How to view submitted inspections for a previous date:
In the GPS Insight DVIR app, tap Inspections.
The Vehicle Inspection page appears.
Tap the calendar in the top-right corner of the screen.
Select your desired date or date range from the following options:
Custom
Today
Yesterday
This Week
Last Week
This Month
Last Month
Submitted inspections for the selected date/date range are shown.
Tap Repair Needed to view submitted inspections documenting items requiring repairs only or tap All to view all submitted inspections for the selected time period.
Documenting Repairs
You can document completed repairs for items marked as defective during a submitted inspection from the Inspections page.
Requires the Repair Vehicle Inspection permission enabled for your account.
How to document a completed repair:
In the GPS Insight DVIR app, tap Inspections.
The Vehicle Inspection page appears.
Tap the calendar icon to select your time range (please see above directions for step-by-step instructions.
Tap Repair Needed.
Tap the applicable submitted inspection.
Tap Next.
Tap Repair.
The Repair page appears.
Tap the drop-down under Repair Status for the applicable item and select the applicable status from the following options:
Defects Corrected
Repair Not Needed
Not Repaired
If applicable, add the work order number under Work Order.
If applicable, attach a photo of the work order by tapping the camera icon and selecting your image option: Camera (to take a photo) or Gallery (choose an image from your photo library).
If applicable, add any notes from the mechanic under Mechanic Notes.
Under Mechanic Signature, have the mechanic sign electronically to attest to the completion of the repair.
Tap Submit.
A Confirmation pop-up appears asking you to confirm all the information is correct and complete.
Tap Submit to confirm or Cancel to return to the Repair page.
The Vehicle Inspection page appears showing the completed repair status(es) and corresponding repair form.
[post_title] => Reviewing Inspections and Documenting Repairs
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => reviewing-inspections-and-documenting-repairs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-09-05 06:16:59
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-09-05 13:16:59
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 27389
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27444
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27473
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-09-05 06:12:36
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-09-05 13:12:36
[post_content] => Using the GPS Insight DVIR Portal from your desktop's web browser, you can manage inspection form templates and review your drivers' submitted pre-trip, post-trip, and ad-hoc DVIRs.
https://vimeo.com/833758576/7faf9ff238
Creating and Managing Inspection Form Templates
You can create and manage custom inspection form templates specific to asset types in your fleet. This increases inspection efficiency as your drivers are inspecting asset items specific to the asset they are operating.
The Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page appears. By default, the Inspection History section is displayed.
Click Inspection Forms to view the Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page.
The Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page appears. A list of current inspection form templates for your organization are displayed showing template name, who the form was created by, who the form was released by, date of release, release version number, and draft revision number.
All columns can be sorted by ascending or descending order.
Click +Add Form.
The Create New Inspection Form page appears.
Enter a name for the form in the Form Name field.
Click +Add Area.
Enter a name for the area in the Area Name field.
Click +Add New Inspection Point.
In the Description field, enter an item inspection point.
Continue adding areas and inspection points as needed (click Save periodically to save your progress while you are creating the form template). When finished, click Save & Close.
Managing Inspection Form Templates
You can manage created inspection form templates using the available actions in the Action column of the Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page.
The Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page appears. By default, the Inspection History section is displayed.
Click Inspection Forms to view the Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page.
The Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page appears.
Locate the inspection form template you would like to manage.
In the Actions column, use the available actions to manage the inspection form template.
Edit: Click Edit () to edit the form template. The Edit Inspection Form appears, make your edits and then click Save & Close.
Copy: Click Copy () to make a copy of the inspection form template. The Vehicle Inspection Duplicate pop-up appears prompting you to enter a name for the copy. Click OK when you are ready.
If the inspection form template has not yet been released, you will not be able to make a copy.
Delete: Click Delete () to delete the inspection form template.
Settings: Click Settings () to change the inspection number prefix associated with the template. The Inspection Number Prefix pop-up appears prompting you to enter a prefix, then click Save.
Submit: If the inspection template form has not yet been released, you can click Submit () to make the form available. The Confirmation pop-up appears prompting you to confirm that you would like to make the form revision available, click OK.
Reviewing & Managing Submitted Inspections
From the Inspection History section of the Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page, you can quickly see submitted inspections for the date range selected as each inspection is displayed listing the vehicle, inspection number, number/severity of defects, result, inspection type, who the inspection was created by, time of creation, status, and attachments (if applicable). You can easily filter the inspections on this page by vehicle, trailer, date range, and/or defect status. Additionally, the columns can be sorted in ascending or descending order.
The Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page appears. By default, the Inspection History section is displayed. Submitted inspections are displayed for the date range selected.
To expand the submitted inspection and view details such as repairs or other documents, tap > corresponding to the inspection row.
The submitted inspection information row expands to show details.
To view repairs, click the wrench icon () if available in the Actions column.
The Repair pop-up opens listing the defect and repair status.
Use the drop-down to change the repair status, if applicable.
Click Next to see work order details (if available).
The Work Order Details section expands showing available associated work order information.
If applicable, complete the fields and click Submit.
Any changes submitted are saved to the submitted inspection.
Managing Submitted Inspections
In addition to reviewing submitted inspections for a selected time period, you can manage submitted inspections using available actions such as uploading, downloading to an Excel or PDF document, or emailing.
The Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page appears. By default, the Inspection History section is displayed. Submitted inspections are displayed for the date range selected.
Locate the inspection that you would like to manage (you may need to use the date range filter).
In the Actions column, use the available action icons in the row corresponding to the applicable inspection.
Upload Document: Click Upload () to upload a document. You are prompted to choose a file and enter notes (if applicable), then click Save.
Download Excel: Click Download Excel () to download the inspection as an Excel file.
Download PDF: Click Download PDF () to download the inspection as a PDF file.
Email: Click Email () to email the inspection. In the Send Vehicle Inspection Form pop-up, you are prompted to enter email addresses via comma-separated list then click Send.
Bulk Export
You can export submitted inspections in bulk to an Excel or PDF zipped file or email.
The Vehicle Inspection Form Manager page appears. By default, the Inspection History section is displayed. Submitted inspections are displayed for the date range selected.
Locate the inspections that you would like to export (you may need to use the date range filter).
Use the checkboxes under the Vehicle column next to the applicable inspections to select each inspection you would like to export or you may use the checkbox next to Vehicle to select all of the inspections listed on the page.
Click the applicable action icon for your desired export: Excel, PDF, or Email.
If you select Email, in the Send Vehicle Inspection Form pop-up, you are prompted to enter email addresses via comma-separated list then click Send.
Available features are listed below. We have categorized available features by which feature would be most useful based on role.
Admins/Managers
Create custom vehicle inspection templates
Access to pre-made vehicle inspection templates
Export DVIRS into PDF or Excel in bulk
Receive defect notifications
Set default vehicle inspection templates by asset type
Drivers
Perform pre-/post-trip or ad-hoc inspections
Identify and record defects
Prompted to confirm past defects are resolved/repaired
Sign/Certify
Email and/or present inspections to DOT
Mechanics
Attach worker orders and/or vehicle repair information to a DVIR (From Mobile App or Portal)
Sign off on repaired defects
Logging In
Logging in to the DVIR product is as easy as opening the GPS Insight DVIR login page, entering your login credentials and tapping Login. If you are accessing the Portal on your computer, navigate to the GPS Insight DVIR Portal at the URL provided above, enter your login credentials, and click Login.
The AIR II camera captures driving behavior, GPS tracking data, and video footage to help improve safety and visibility. Features vary depending on your Fleet All-in-One (FAIO) plan.
When the AIR II camera is triggered, the driver receives an in-cab audio alert, and video footage is recorded automatically.
Video Access
Event videos can be viewed from the following areas in the Portal:
Note: Thresholds can be adjusted by contacting your Account Manager.
GPS tracking data - Captured at a 1-minute update rate
Optional vehicle diagnostics (if installed with diagnostic cable)
On-demand video retrieval (manual request required)
Feature Included
Details
Driving Events (G-Force Based)
Hard Acceleration – Default 0.27g Hard Brake – Default 0.35g Hard Turn – Default 0.31g Driver Initiated – Triggered via manual event button Power Lost – Triggered when device disconnects from power (Note:This is not to be confused with the camera being in Rest mode when ignition is off.)
GPS Tracking Data
Ignition Status Camera Events Power Events Trip Info Speeding Events (user-defined in portal)
Vehicle Diagnostics
If supported by the vehicle (varies by year/make/model):
DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) Odometer Fuel Level Voltage Coolant Temperature
❗ Important
Videos must be requested manually before viewing
Once requested, clips appear with a Play icon when ready
Clip Quota
Your account gets a quota of 25 clips per camera, pooled across the account, which resets on the 1st of each month.
30 sec clip = 1 quota unit
1 min clip = 2 quota units
Viewing Clip Quota
You can view your camera clip quota from the Vehicle Card on the Portal Map page or the Camera Media Page.
Vehicle Card Clip Quota
You can view your camera clip quota from a Vehicle Card by hovering your mouse over the info icon next to “Camera Clips.” The pop-over displays the number of clips remaining and the number of days until the quota resets.
Clip Quota from the Camera Media Page
To view your quota from the Camera Media page, hover over the “AIR II” label. A pop-over will display the number of clips remaining and the number of days until your quota resets.
Fleet All-in-One Pro Plus Plan
Includes everything in Standard, plus:
AI-powered safety events (ADAS + DMS)
Automatic video uploads (no requests needed)
Live View (near real-time photo-like access)
AI Events
Road-Facing (ADAS)
Driver-Facing (DMS)
Forward Collision Warning* Close Following Lane Departure Stop Sign Violation Pedestrian Collision Warning*
Drowsiness / Fatigue Cell Phone Use Distracted Driving Seatbelt
* Features disabled by default; can be enabled in Admin → Cameras
Flagging False Triggers
Since AI continuously learns and improves, some events may occasionally be triggered in error. If you encounter a video clip that appears to be a false trigger, you can easily flag and report it directly from the video player.
When you are playing a video from the Camera Media Library, click the down arrow next to the event type and then click Report clip as false trigger.
A pop-up will appear in the top-right corner of the screen, confirming that the clip was reported successfully.
Live View
Locate the vehicle for which you would like to see live view from the Vehicles list or use the filters or search features and click on the vehicle entry.
The Vehicle Card for the applicable vehicle opens on the right-hand side of the screen.
From the Vehicle Card on the Map Page, scroll to the Camera Live View section of the Overview tab.
Click + Start Live View.
The Live View pop-up appears.
Note: The view provides a photo-like frame stream that updates every 3-5 seconds, so you may see a “Waiting for image…” message immediately after the pop-up opens until a frame is available.
The view updates every 3-5 seconds until the timer runs out (30 seconds). The timer is displayed at the top-right side of the pop-up.
After 30 seconds, you can click Refresh Feed to start the timer again and continue the Live View, or you can close the window by clicking X at the top-right corner of the pop-up.
Viewing a Camera Event
Triggered events are automatically recorded. You can view a camera event from the following locations in the Portal:
Note: If you have Fleet All-in-One (FAIO) Pro Plus, all recorded events are automatically uploaded to the Portal and are ready for viewing without needing to request the video from the device first.
For the purposes of this article, step-by-step instructions for viewing a camera event from the Vehicle Card on the Map page are provided below. You can also use the links above to access step-by-step instructions for viewing camera events from other locations.
From the Vehicle Card on the Map Page, scroll to the Camera Clips section of the Overview tab.
(Skip this step if you have FAIO Pro Plus) Click Request Clip next to the camera event you would like to request.
A request is sent to the camera to transmit the video. Once the video is available, the icon is updated to a Play icon.
Click the Play icon for the clip you would like to view. A pop-up window opens, and the event playback automatically starts.
Click the Full Screen icon to view the video in Full View. The following actions are also available:
Unmute: Unmute the video (muted by default) to hear audio.
Playback Rate: Change the playback speed (1x, available).
Pause: Stop the video during playback.
Note: Within Full View mode (not Split View), you can click and drag in the video to see different angles.
Using Adaptive Overlay During Event Review
When reviewing an event (e.g., Severe Turn, Lane Departure, Forward Collision), the video player toolbar in the bottom lets you control playback and customize overlays.
Video Player Toolbar
Icon
Function
Time remaining
Shows time left in the clip
Fullscreen
Expands the player to fill the screen
Playback speed
Cycles through available speeds
Snapshot
Captures a still image of the current frame
Settings (gear)
Opens Overlay Configuration
Split view
Shows Road/Incabin/Driver views together
Single view
Shows one camera feed at a time
💡 Tip: Hover over any icon to see its label.
Configuring Overlays
Click the gear icon to open Overlay Configuration.
Overlay Opacity — slider from 0% (invisible) to 100% (fully solid); default is 100%
Object Types — toggle overlays independently for Vehicles, Lane Line, Pedestrians, and Stop Signs
Lane Line Options — toggle LDW Margins (distance markers) when Lane Line is on
Video Stream Info — toggle burned-in device ID, firmware version, date/time, GPS coordinates, and speed
Display Mode — toggle an alternate overlay layout based on preference
⚠️ Note: Overlay Configuration only changes how footage displays for your review — it doesn't affect what the camera records or alter the underlying event data.
Managing Camera Clips
You can rename and/or download clips from the Vehicle Card and Camera Media page. Additionally, you can request more media from a clip to initiate a Manual Clip Request.
From the Vehicle Card, click Manual request next to Camera clips.
The Request Media pop-up appears. In the bottom-left corner, the pop-up displays your current clip quota, allowing you to quickly view your available clips at a glance.
Note: Requested manual clips count toward your account quota.
Use the drop-down under “Vehicle” to select the applicable vehicle.
(Optional) Enter a name for the clip under “Clip Name.”
Under “Start Date”, select a date using the calendar picker.
Under “Start Time”, use the time picker to select a time or click Now.
Use the drop-down under Duration to select the clip duration (30 seconds or 1 minute).
Note: A 30-second clip counts as 1 clip toward your quota; whereas a 1-minute clip counts as 2 clips toward your quota.
Click Request Media.
A message is shown toward the top-right of the screen to confirm the clip was requested successfully.
After a clip request is submitted, it may take some time for the video to appear in the Manual Requests section of the Vehicle Card while the Portal updates and the camera responds.
Requested clips remain available in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal for 90 days from the original requestdate. Media is stored based on available capacity, and older files may be overwritten when the SD card becomes full.
The AIR II camera captures driving behavior, GPS tracking data, and video footage to help improve safety and visibility. Features vary depending on your Fleet All-in-One (FAIO) plan.
When the AIR II camera is triggered, the driver receives an in-cab audio alert, and video footage is recorded automatically.
Video Access
Event videos can be viewed from the following areas in the Portal:
Note: Thresholds can be adjusted by contacting your Account Manager.
GPS tracking data - Captured at a 1-minute update rate
Optional vehicle diagnostics (if installed with diagnostic cable)
On-demand video retrieval (manual request required)
Feature Included
Details
Driving Events (G-Force Based)
Hard Acceleration – Default 0.27g Hard Brake – Default 0.35g Hard Turn – Default 0.31g Driver Initiated – Triggered via manual event button Power Lost – Triggered when device disconnects from power (Note:This is not to be confused with the camera being in Rest mode when ignition is off.)
GPS Tracking Data
Ignition Status Camera Events Power Events Trip Info Speeding Events (user-defined in portal)
Vehicle Diagnostics
If supported by the vehicle (varies by year/make/model):
DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) Odometer Fuel Level Voltage Coolant Temperature
❗ Important
Videos must be requested manually before viewing
Once requested, clips appear with a Play icon when ready
Clip Quota
Your account gets a quota of 25 clips per camera, pooled across the account, which resets on the 1st of each month.
30 sec clip = 1 quota unit
1 min clip = 2 quota units
Viewing Clip Quota
You can view your camera clip quota from the Vehicle Card on the Portal Map page or the Camera Media Page.
Vehicle Card Clip Quota
You can view your camera clip quota from a Vehicle Card by hovering your mouse over the info icon next to “Camera Clips.” The pop-over displays the number of clips remaining and the number of days until the quota resets.
Clip Quota from the Camera Media Page
To view your quota from the Camera Media page, hover over the “AIR II” label. A pop-over will display the number of clips remaining and the number of days until your quota resets.
Fleet All-in-One Pro Plus Plan
Includes everything in Standard, plus:
AI-powered safety events (ADAS + DMS)
Automatic video uploads (no requests needed)
Live View (near real-time photo-like access)
AI Events
Road-Facing (ADAS)
Driver-Facing (DMS)
Forward Collision Warning* Close Following Lane Departure Stop Sign Violation Pedestrian Collision Warning*
Drowsiness / Fatigue Cell Phone Use Distracted Driving Seatbelt
* Features disabled by default; can be enabled in Admin → Cameras
Flagging False Triggers
Since AI continuously learns and improves, some events may occasionally be triggered in error. If you encounter a video clip that appears to be a false trigger, you can easily flag and report it directly from the video player.
When you are playing a video from the Camera Media Library, click the down arrow next to the event type and then click Report clip as false trigger.
A pop-up will appear in the top-right corner of the screen, confirming that the clip was reported successfully.
Live View
Locate the vehicle for which you would like to see live view from the Vehicles list or use the filters or search features and click on the vehicle entry.
The Vehicle Card for the applicable vehicle opens on the right-hand side of the screen.
From the Vehicle Card on the Map Page, scroll to the Camera Live View section of the Overview tab.
Click + Start Live View.
The Live View pop-up appears.
Note: The view provides a photo-like frame stream that updates every 3-5 seconds, so you may see a “Waiting for image…” message immediately after the pop-up opens until a frame is available.
The view updates every 3-5 seconds until the timer runs out (30 seconds). The timer is displayed at the top-right side of the pop-up.
After 30 seconds, you can click Refresh Feed to start the timer again and continue the Live View, or you can close the window by clicking X at the top-right corner of the pop-up.
Viewing a Camera Event
Triggered events are automatically recorded. You can view a camera event from the following locations in the Portal:
Note: If you have Fleet All-in-One (FAIO) Pro Plus, all recorded events are automatically uploaded to the Portal and are ready for viewing without needing to request the video from the device first.
For the purposes of this article, step-by-step instructions for viewing a camera event from the Vehicle Card on the Map page are provided below. You can also use the links above to access step-by-step instructions for viewing camera events from other locations.
From the Vehicle Card on the Map Page, scroll to the Camera Clips section of the Overview tab.
(Skip this step if you have FAIO Pro Plus) Click Request Clip next to the camera event you would like to request.
A request is sent to the camera to transmit the video. Once the video is available, the icon is updated to a Play icon.
Click the Play icon for the clip you would like to view. A pop-up window opens, and the event playback automatically starts.
Click the Full Screen icon to view the video in Full View. The following actions are also available:
Unmute: Unmute the video (muted by default) to hear audio.
Playback Rate: Change the playback speed (1x, available).
Pause: Stop the video during playback.
Note: Within Full View mode (not Split View), you can click and drag in the video to see different angles.
Using Adaptive Overlay During Event Review
When reviewing an event (e.g., Severe Turn, Lane Departure, Forward Collision), the video player toolbar in the bottom lets you control playback and customize overlays.
Video Player Toolbar
Icon
Function
Time remaining
Shows time left in the clip
Fullscreen
Expands the player to fill the screen
Playback speed
Cycles through available speeds
Snapshot
Captures a still image of the current frame
Settings (gear)
Opens Overlay Configuration
Split view
Shows Road/Incabin/Driver views together
Single view
Shows one camera feed at a time
💡 Tip: Hover over any icon to see its label.
Configuring Overlays
Click the gear icon to open Overlay Configuration.
Overlay Opacity — slider from 0% (invisible) to 100% (fully solid); default is 100%
Object Types — toggle overlays independently for Vehicles, Lane Line, Pedestrians, and Stop Signs
Lane Line Options — toggle LDW Margins (distance markers) when Lane Line is on
Video Stream Info — toggle burned-in device ID, firmware version, date/time, GPS coordinates, and speed
Display Mode — toggle an alternate overlay layout based on preference
⚠️ Note: Overlay Configuration only changes how footage displays for your review — it doesn't affect what the camera records or alter the underlying event data.
Managing Camera Clips
You can rename and/or download clips from the Vehicle Card and Camera Media page. Additionally, you can request more media from a clip to initiate a Manual Clip Request.
From the Vehicle Card, click Manual request next to Camera clips.
The Request Media pop-up appears. In the bottom-left corner, the pop-up displays your current clip quota, allowing you to quickly view your available clips at a glance.
Note: Requested manual clips count toward your account quota.
Use the drop-down under “Vehicle” to select the applicable vehicle.
(Optional) Enter a name for the clip under “Clip Name.”
Under “Start Date”, select a date using the calendar picker.
Under “Start Time”, use the time picker to select a time or click Now.
Use the drop-down under Duration to select the clip duration (30 seconds or 1 minute).
Note: A 30-second clip counts as 1 clip toward your quota; whereas a 1-minute clip counts as 2 clips toward your quota.
Click Request Media.
A message is shown toward the top-right of the screen to confirm the clip was requested successfully.
After a clip request is submitted, it may take some time for the video to appear in the Manual Requests section of the Vehicle Card while the Portal updates and the camera responds.
Requested clips remain available in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal for 90 days from the original requestdate. Media is stored based on available capacity, and older files may be overwritten when the SD card becomes full.
For auxiliary cameras, the Hub-X offers four selections:
Left-side camera, facing rear of vehicle
Right-side camera, facing rear of vehicle
Rear-facing camera, placed at the back of the vehicle/trailer
Internal dome camera, placed on the roof/dome of the interior
Camera Location Benefits
Depending on a fleet’s requirements, deployments will include:
Left and Right-side cameras: This orientation is great for fleets with long trailers, where wide turns can introduce potential safety or material damage concerns.
Rear-facing camera: This camera orientation can be a benefit for fleets where drivers have minimal (or completely hindered) views of the rear of the vehicle for if/when they are reversing.
Internal camera: This type of camera can be used in various situations, though generally we’ve seen this in the patient compartment of an ambulance or the storage cab of a delivery truck, to gain additional visibility into the actions taking place inside the vehicle.
Sample Videos
Sample Camera Orientations
Viewing Videos
Once the Driveri Hub-X is deployed, user with appropriate permissions can see video feeds within every Driveri event-generated video, along with manual clips/requests, allowing fleets to capture the full 360° view of their vehicle/asset enabling them to take action if and when needed.
[post_title] => About Driveri Hub-X
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-driveri-hub-x
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-02-14 08:25:06
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-02-14 15:25:06
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=30444
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25851
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-14 13:02:57
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-14 20:02:57
[post_content] => Live Streaming is an add-on feature available at an additional cost with Driveri. This feature allows a user with the appropriate permissions to request Live Streaming sessions (available in 1-minute increments) to a vehicle's inward-facing or outward-facing camera (depending on selection). When enabled, this feature is accessible via the Live Tracking page of the Driveri Portal.
Available Quota
The quota is pooled minutes among the vehicles in your fleet and is the sum of 15 minutes per device per month. You can view consecutive 1-minute Live Stream sessions until you reach your quota.
You can view the amount of minutes you have used and your quota total by hovering your mouse over a vehicle listing in the Live Tracking page of the Driveri Portal.
Using Live Streaming
How to Live Stream:
In the Driveri Portal, click the Live Tracking icon () in the left-hand navigation to open the Live Tracking page.
The Live Tracking page is shown.
Locate the vehicle for which you would like to live stream using the vehicle listing on the left or the Search for Vehicle field.
Hover your mouse over the Live Stream button for the vehicle.
A pop-up displays showing the Live Streaming Quota and camera view options.
Select the camera view you would like for the Live Stream: Inward or Outward.
The request is sent to the camera and an audible notification alerts the driver that a Live Stream session is in progress. The 1-minute Live Stream session begins.
If the camera cannot be reached (e.g., the vehicle ignition is off, etc.,), the 1-minute session will not count against your quota.
At the 48-second mark, a prompt appears asking if you would like to request an additional minute of live streaming. If you would like to continue, click Request Another Minute. If you do not click the button, your live-streaming session ends at the 1-minute mark automatically.
You may close the live stream at any time by clicking the “X” in the top right corner or closing the player at the end of the streaming minute; however, the full 1-minute session counts against your quota.
[post_title] => About Driveri Live Stream
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-driveri-live-stream
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-09-15 06:49:25
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-09-15 13:49:25
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24363
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25851
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24377
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-02-23 13:26:31
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-02-23 20:26:31
[post_content] => The Reports Central page in the Driveri Portal is a centralized location for reports that can be run ad-hoc and/or subscribed (scheduled on a daily, weekly, or monthly delivery basis unless otherwise indicated in the below table).
The following actions can be performed on this page:
Search for reports
Create report requests
Download reports
Subscribe to reports
Manage report subscriptions
Searching for a Report
Reports can be searched based on the parameters specified in the Search field. To search for reports, start typing the Request ID or Frequency in the Search field located on the top of the right pane.
Available Reports
The following reports are available on this page:
[et colwidth="25%|75%" class="table-zebra"]
Report Type,Description
Active Devices Report,Displays details of all devices that are currently active. This Report can be requested on-demand or subscribed on weekly basis. View the list of active devices for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access.
Active Vehicle Device Association Report,Displays the list of vehicles that are active at the time of generating the report along with the device association information. View the list of active vehicles for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. Report Request can be filtered on Placeholder Vehicles.
Alert Conversion Report,Displays details of Alerts that have been converted to DriverStars or Neutral Events. View the list of converted alerts for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. Report Request can also be filtered on Placeholder Vehicles.
All Alerts Report,Displays the fleet’s complete list of alerts for the selected duration and report configuration. View the alerts for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. Vehicle VIN is displayed. Report Request can be filtered on Severity like SEVERE\, MODERATE\, NEUTRAL for Base and Compound Alerts\, on DriverStar Events\, and on Placeholder Vehicles.
Device Health Report,Displays details about devices that did not respond for more than 24 hours\, devices that have issues reported\, and devices to be returned (RMA devices). This Report can be requested on-demand or subscribed on a daily or weekly basis. View the device health information for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. Report Request can also be filtered on the entity on which action is pending (GPS Insight/Fleet/Both).
Driver Insight Report,Displays details about drivers active at the time of generating the report and drivers who were deactivated during the previous week. View the driver status information for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. This report can be requested on-demand or subscribed to on weekly basis. Report Request can be filtered on Driver Status (Activated/Deactivated).
Driver Status Report,Displays details about drivers active at the time of generating the report and drivers who were deactivated during the previous week. View the driver status information for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. This Report can be requested on-demand or subscribed to on a weekly basis. Report Request can be filtered on Driver Status (Activated/Deactivated).
Driver Statistics Report,Displays a summarized view of the Driver Performance\, Minutes Analyzed\, Alert Risk Profile\, and Green Minutes. The report can be requested for one fleet at a time.
Executive Summary Report,Displays a summarized view of the Fleet performance\, Driver Performance Ranking\, Alert Risk Profile\, and Coaching recommendations.
Rejected Alerts Report,Displays the list of alerts rejected by the fleet for the selected duration. View the list of rejected alerts for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. Report Request can be filtered on Placeholder Vehicles.
Restricted Hours Driving Report,Displays details about vehicle movement during restricted hours\, as configured by the Fleet. Weekly Reports are delivered at 9 AM on Tuesdays\, and Monthly Reports are delivered at 9 AM on the third day of the month. This Report can be requested on-demand or subscribed on a weekly or monthly basis. View the vehicle movement information for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. Report Request can also be filtered on business working days and working hours.
Managed Coaching Sessions Report,Displays details about Managed Coaching Sessions for the selected duration. View information pertaining to pending and completed coaching sessions created for the drivers of all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access. Report Request can also be filtered on Coaching Session Type (Pending/Completed).
Unassigned Drive Time Report,Displays details about the unassigned drive time for all the vehicles in the Fleet. Weekly Reports are delivered at 9 AM on Tuesdays\, and Monthly Reports are delivered at 9 AM on the third day of the month. View the information about the unassigned drive time of a vehicle alert for all Groups or specific Groups based on the user’s access.
Severe Camera Obstruction Duration Report,Displays details about a Severe Camera Obstruction event\, such as Driver Name/ID\, Group Name\, Event Detection Time\, Duration\, Collated Alert IDs\, and Status.
[/et]
[post_title] => About Driveri Reports Central Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-driveri-reports-central-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:09:10
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:09:10
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24377
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 34276
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2026-07-02 06:18:15
[post_date_gmt] => 2026-07-02 13:18:15
[post_content] =>
The Driver•i Coaching Page surfaces the Driver•i Coaching Sessions module, showing driver safety scores, alerts, and coaching information directly within the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal. Review safety events or take coaching action without switching between portals — everything you need is available inside your existing GPS Fleet Tracking workflows.
After navigating to the Driver•i Coaching Page, the Pending tab shows drivers linked to Netradyne (Driver•i platform) with Driver Name, Session ID, Session Created (sortable), Total Events, Most Frequent Events, and Why Recommended columns (filters available).
Required Permissions
To access the Driver•i Coaching page, you need the following user permissions:
Driveri
Drivers
Driver Admin
From the Pending tab, you can:
Click a driver to view score trends (last 6 weeks), alert recordings, high-level driving summary/statistics, frequent/repeated events, bookmarked events, session discussion, and session conclusion, with the ability to mark the session complete
Click Completed to view the Completed tab
Click Coaching Configurations to create or adjust recommended coaching session configurations
Use the Driver Name/Session ID drop-down and Search to locate a specific driver or session
Where Can I See Driver•i Data in the Portal
Discover where to find Driver•i data and how to start a coaching session for a driver.
Step 1 — Confirm You Have the Right Access
Before getting started, make sure you have:
An active Driver•i integration on your GPS Fleet Tracking account
User permissions to view drivers, alerts, and coaching data
If you're unsure, contact your GPS Fleet Tracking administrator.
Step 2 — Open the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal
Log in to your GPS Fleet Tracking Portal as you normally would. No additional login or app switcher is needed to access Driver•i data.
Note: The first time you access the Driver•i Coaching Page, you'll need to log in with your Driver•i username and password. After that, you won't be prompted to log in again on future visits—since this is managed via a browser cookie, clearing your cookies will prompt you to log in with your Driver•i credentials again the next time you visit.
Step 3 — Find a Driver with a Safety Flag
Driver•i data is visible in the following areas of the portal:
Driver list — Review GreenZone scores and coaching flags alongside your driver roster
Driver/Vehicle panels — Open a driver or vehicle panel to see alerts and safety scores
Driver Admin areas — Access coaching and safety data from the admin section
Look for drivers tagged with "Needs Coaching" — this indicates drivers who have safety events or score thresholds that require follow-up.
Step 4 — Review Safety Alerts and GreenZone Score
Within a driver's panel or record, you can view:
GreenZone score — The driver's overall Driver•i safety rating (Based on a rolling 30-day period)
Safety alerts — Events flagged by the Driver•i system
Alert videos — Video footage associated with safety events
Review this information to understand the context before beginning a coaching session.
Step 5 — Start a Coaching Session
Locate the "Needs Coaching" tag on a driver's record.
Click View coaching opportunities to open the coaching experience.
The Driver•i Coaching page will load within the Portal — review the available coaching prompts and complete the session.
[post_title] => About the Driver•i Coaching Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-driveri-coaching-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-07 10:11:59
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-07 17:11:59
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=34276
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24363
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-02-18 08:04:12
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-02-18 15:04:12
[post_content] => The Dashboard is the main landing page of the Driveri Portal and consists of two tabs: Fleet Performance and Fleet Admin. The Fleet Performance page is displayed by default and offers safety-related information about the fleet and drivers. The Fleet Admin page displays operational and/or administrative items.
Fleet Performance
This page provides you with an overview of high-level performance data collected from your fleet.
You can select to view this data for a day, week, or month timeframe. Displayed data includes the following:
Total number of Alerts - Displays the total number of severe and moderate alerts.
Total DriverStars - Displays the total number of DriverStars.
Most Frequent Alerts - Displays the top three most frequent alerts in descending order.
Average GreenZone Score - Displays the Average GreenZone Score for the fleet.
Notification and Recognition Percentages - Notification denotes the total percentage of drivers who have received notifications for a drop in score due to risky driving in the selected period. Recognition percentage denotes the total percentage of drivers who have been awarded recognition for safe driving in the selected period on the Dashboard Fleet Performance Tab. Drivers receive recognition when their daily score exceeds 900 for one entire day.
Top and Bottom three drivers with highest and lowest GreenZone Score respectively - Top three displays the three drivers with highest GreenZone Score for quick identification of drivers who are performing well. Bottom three displays the three drivers with the lowest GreenZone Score for quick identification of those drivers who may need additional attention to improve their score.
Chart displaying Events vs Time - This section displays a graph plotting the number of events (Alerts, Recognitions and Notifications). Toggle the hyperlink at the bottom of the graph to see individual or collective graphs.
Clicking on most information mentioned above opens a corresponding page which provides drill-down details.
Fleet Admin
The Fleet Admin Dashboard displays a summarized view of Device, Provisioning & Configurations, Vehicles, and Driver Group-related information. You can click on each card to navigate to the relevant page where additional information can be found.
[post_title] => About the Driveri Dashboard
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-driveri-dashboard
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:09:18
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:09:18
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24363
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24348
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-02-17 16:48:59
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-02-17 23:48:59
[post_content] => The process to identify issues with your Driveri safety camera hardware and initiate returning the item for a replacement is automated for your convenience. If an issue is detected requiring the hardware to be replaced, a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) request is sent via Portal notification and email. The user can select one or more affected devices and submit an RMA form to respond to the RMA request and complete the process of return and replacement.
Please use the below instructions on submitting a request for a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA).
Warrantied devices are eligible for RMA.
How to complete the RMA process:
From the Portal, click Provisioning & Configurations (wrench icon) from the navigation bar on the left-side of the screen.
A pop-up menu appears.
Click Device Summary.
The Device Summary page appears.
Click on the Devices To Be Returned tab.
Locate the device using the Search field or looking through the list of eligible devices and click on the checkbox next to the device for which you would like to complete an RMA.
Click Submit RMA button.
The “Submitting RMA for Devices Selected” form displays.
Use the drop-down under "Select from saved address:" to select a saved address or enter in the required Address information: Name, Phone Number, Email ID, Address.
Optionally, save the address information you've entered by checking the box next to "Save this address for later."
Click Submit.
The SIM card for the affected device(s) will be deactivated in 30 days once the RMA form is submitted in the Portal. A prepaid return label will be sent via email to return the RMA device to GPS Insight.
Uninstall the non-functional device from the vehicle.
Return the device to GPS Insight using the pre-paid return label.
[post_title] => Completing a Driveri Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA)
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => completing-a-return-merchandise-authorization-rma
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-04-02 07:19:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-04-02 14:19:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26907
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24348
[menu_order] => 500
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24440
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-03-02 09:48:31
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-03-02 16:48:31
[post_content] => You can create and edit custom roles from the Roles page in the Portal (available under Provisioning & Configurations from the Navigation bar). Custom Roles are useful when fleets require users to manage certain operations that are different from the standard user role permissions.
A custom roles is created by disabling one or more privileges from any of the pre-defined standard User Roles. When a custom role is created, it becomes available as a Role option when creating or editing users.
How to create a custom role:
From the Navigation Bar, click Provisioning & Configurations (wrench icon).
A pop-up menu appears.
Click Roles.
The Roles page appears.
Click Create Custom Role.
The Create Role dialog box is displayed.
In the Name field, enter the name of the role. optional description for the role.
(Optional) In the Description field, enter a description for the role.
Use the drop-down menu under Select the Base Role to select the role that the custom role should be modeled after.
Select the privileges to be provided to this role and click Review Changes.
The Review Summary page of the custom role displays changes made to the access settings.
Review the changes and click Save Changes.
Editing a Custom Role
Only the custom roles can be edited. All the predefined user roles and custom roles can be viewed in detail.
How to edit a custom role:
From the Navigation Bar, click Provisioning & Configurations (wrench icon).
A pop-up menu appears.
Click Roles.
The Roles page appears.
Click Edit next to the custom role that you want to update.
The Edit Role dialog box is displayed.
Make the required changes to the access settings.
You cannot change the base role from which this custom role was created. The drop-down list to select the Base Role is disabled.
Click Review Changes.
Review the changes and click Save Changes.
[post_title] => Creating & Editing Custom Roles
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => creating-editing-custom-roles
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:11:06
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:11:06
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24412
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24440
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 18590
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-11-11 14:55:06
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-11-11 21:55:06
[post_content] => Use the instructions below to set up a mobile hotspot for iOS and Android devices if you need to download videos after events in which the vehicle is no longer reliably functional (i.e., vehicle accidents, in the shop, etc.) or if you are in low to no cell coverage zones.
If the below steps are performed by a driver, please remind them to disable and rename their mobile hotspot in order to avoid accidental overages on the device’s data plan.
Setting up an iOS Hotspot
On your iOS device, go to Settings > General > About.
Tap the first line, which shows the name of your device.
Rename your device to the desired SSID Name, then tap Done.
Changing Your Personal Hotspot Password
Assuming you do want to change your iPhone’s Personal Hotspot password, follow these steps:
Tap the Settings app to open it.
Tap Personal Hotspot.
Tap the Wi-Fi Password menu.
Tap the X on the right side of the Password field to delete the current password.
Type in the new password that you want to use.
Tap Done in the top right corner.
Setting up an Android Hotspot
Select Settings from the menu.
Select Connections.
Select Mobile Hotspot and Tethering.
Select Mobile Hotspot.
Toggle ON.
Select the current name of the mobile hotspot and rename.
Change the password.
Downloading Videos via Hotspot
After turning the hotspot on and changing the details to the above to allow the device to connect and begin to download the updated software, wait approximately 30 minutes.
Keep the smartphone and device powered on and near each other.
If you’re unsure of whether or not the device has taken the update, please feel free to reach out to Support at (866) 477-4321, Option 1 or support@gpsinsight.com.
IMPORTANT: After 30 minutes, turn the mobile hotspot OFF on the phone being used.
Cycle the key off and allow the device to power down (approx. 3-6 min).
Turn the ignition on, and the downloaded package will be applied.
It’s best to leave the ignition ON for the next 15 minutes, if possible, after making sure the Hotspot is OFF.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|50%"]
Question,Answer
What is Driver•i™?,The Driver•i camera provides fleet managers with a comprehensive view of drivers’ activity through a blend of real-time positive driving notifications and best practice identification. By being able to capture the driver’s full-day\, managers have more visibility into the challenges they face. The system notifies managers of driving behaviors that may need to be changed\, but more importantly identifies when to reward drivers on all the hours\, days\, weeks of great driving.
What is the purpose of the program?,Driving is one of the riskiest things you do on a daily basis. The main goal of the Driver•i™ program is to prevent collisions by identifying and correcting unsafe behaviors before they lead to a collision. The program gives you a holistic view of your driving experience in identifying and correct any bad habits\, while focusing on the amount of time you spend driving safely. Many times\, collisions are based on inaccurate eye-witness accounts\, often pointing the finger at the vehicle associated with a company. Video provides an unbiased view that can exonerate you if you were in an incident that was not your fault.
What are the benefits for me?,It is capturing every aspect of the driving experience\, rather than a sample of time\, delivering a full picture of your route. Driver•i’s GreenZone™ monitors daily driving and sends a notification when you have reached a milestone. This allows your manager to recognize great driving with confidence or gives them the ability to intervene if at-risk conditions are present. Without video\, drivers involved in a traffic incident are subject to false claims and often assigned the blame for the incident. With the Driver•i device you have an unbiased video showing what happened from both sides and outside the vehicle – many times exonerating the driver. Since outside video is always being captured\, this allows you to request video that may be helpful to identify some of the following:~~~~ - You showed up at a site and could not gain access.~~ - Provide feedback about routes or timing of deliveries.~~ - Road-rage by another driver.~~ - Exonerate you if there is a false claim that you had done something wrong or reverse an inaccurate traffic violation.~~ - Capturing low-force collisions\, such as mirrors being clipped by passing motorists.
Are there state or federal concerns with placing a Driver•i camera on the windshield of the vehicle?,No. In 2022\, a federal rule was changed that increased the area on the interior of a commercial motor vehicle windshield where certain vehicle safety technology devices may be mounted. See the link for details: https://www.federalregister.gov/documents/2022/03/07/2022-03996/parts-and-accessories-necessary-for-safe-operation-authorized-windshield-area-for-the-installation.
If an alert event is rejected will that influence the driver's GreenZone score?,Yes\, rejecting an event will negatively or positively impact the driver's score based on the event type that's rejected. Scores are generally updated within 3 hours of the rejection.
How does the device work?,The device contains a QuadHD video system. The device is always recording while the vehicle is on; however\, only one-minute videos are uploaded if a violation or unsafe driving maneuver is identified and two-minutes videos if a high g-force event is triggered. The device uses artificial intelligence (AI) and accelerometer-based forces to capture erratic movement to the vehicle\, other vehicle maneuvers\, markers on the road\, signs\, speed\, and other driving situations. If the device identifies an unsafe maneuver or if you avoided a collision\, a video will be created\, immediately uploaded\, and depending upon your organization's settings\, a real-time alert may notify your manager. The device can store up to 50 hours of videos from both inward and outward cameras and can be requested by an authorized user in your organization. Once the memory is full\, the oldest data will start to be overwritten.
Is it on all the time?,The outward and camera is recording and saving data when the vehicle is turned on and for ~ 3 minutes after the vehicle has been shut off. The inside view is on when the vehicle is in motion\, but is disabled and enters “privacy mode” when the vehicle stops moving for 3 minutes.
How does the camera report its device health when the vehicle is inactive?,The Driver•i Device wakes up every 3 hours for 6 minutes and uploads basic device health information. Heavy operations do not work during this period. Only minimum light functions can run and thus use a minimum amount of current to conserve the battery in the vehicle. If the vehicle isn't driven for 7 consecutive days then the device stops reporting at the periodic wake-up interval\, ensuring that the vehicle battery is not affected when the vehicle is stationary for long periods.
When a driver initiates an event by pressing the button on the camera\, what amount of time is captured/sent (e.g.\, how many seconds are capture prior to the button press\, and how many seconds after)?,About 30 seconds on each side for a minute. There are factors that may impact the triggering point\, such as other triggers within close proximity to the button press.
What cellular connectivity is supported by Driver•i?,LTE Connectivity – Driver•i offers Cat4 LTE connectivity and GPS tracking through the bundled connectivity module which connects to the T-Mobile network on LTE bands B25\, B26\, and B17. The Cat4 LTE technology offers unparalleled upload/download speeds and provides real time statistics to fleet managers.~~~~Devices traveling in Canada will primarily report on the Telus network.~~~~When the Driveri camera is deployed in the United States\, the default carrier is T-Mobile.
Does the use of the Driver•i™ program create a new set of driving policies?,No. The Driver•i™ program does not create any new policies. It is intended to improve driving safety\, compliance with company policies\, and recognize safe driving behaviors. Most unsafe driving behaviors and violations are usually included in already existing company policies.
Why do I not have access to all Driver•i features referenced in the Help Center?,Driver•i features are separated by plans. To learn more or upgrade\, contact your Account Manager.
How do I “tag” a video alert to my manager?,On the bottom of the device there are two buttons. If you want to immediately ‘TAG’ a video\, press either button. Upon pressing either button\, a 1-minute video alert will be ‘TAGGED’ to be preserved. After two minutes\, a notification will be automatically populated on the Customer Portal. The video will also appear in your profile on the Driver•i dashboard.
Who can view the video?,Only authorized personnel have access to the secure Driver•i™ portal.
Is there a limit to the number of video events automatically sent to the portal without having to create a manual request?,Yes. Users can expect up to 30 video events per vehicle per month. All other video events must be manually requested and will count against the event requests total (10/veh/mo.).
Is this used to spy on or embarrass me?,No. The Driver•i™ device cannot be triggered remotely. The purpose is to identify any poor driving habits that need to be changed\, to be able to see what happened in a critical situation\, and in most cases\, Driver•i™ creates notifications alerting your manager of good driving.
Is this going to be used to fire me?,The program is not intended to be used to terminate drivers. It is a tool to identify unsafe driving habits as well as identifying the amount of good driving that occurs during your route.
Can I use the system to communicate with dispatch or my supervisor?,No. The system only captures and sends data.
How does the system determine 'minutes analyzed'?,The logic behind the minutes analyzed for a driver is if a vehicle speed is > 2mph at least for one second\, then we consider that minute as a driving minute.
How does the Driver•i camera help mitigate power draw on a vehicle's battery?,The camera is always monitoring for external voltage and will automatically shut down when the external voltage drops below 10V.
How long does the voltage have to be at 10V for the camera to shut down\, and at what voltage does the camera turn back on?,The camera needs to see 10V or lower for at least 30 seconds for it to trigger shut down\, and will not power back on until voltage returns to +10V and either the next regular wake up or next Ignition On is triggered.
What are the Power Draw guidelines and electrical characteristics for Driver•i?,See: Driver•i Power Draw Guidelines
Is there a voltage limitation to the Driver•i installation?,Yes\, there is a 17v voltage threshold built into the camera that forces it to shut down and protect itself in instances where there may be a bad voltage regulator or some other external cause for the voltage to be higher than the typical 12v operating system.
How does the Smoking Alert work?,The Driver•i system looks for the holding of a smoking device near the mouth and smoke coming out of the mouth. Potential challenges that could be faced in recognizing smoking:~~~~ - If the driver doesn’t blow smoke that is clearly visible~~ - The driver holds the vape to their mouth in such a way which might be similar to eating something\, as the smoking feature is trained to not be confused with detecting eating\, so as not to provide false positives
What is the resolution for playback on the D-210 and D-215 - I can't read the plates on vehicles when watching playback video.,Resolution for video playback varies based on the type of playback\, Full Video vs. Primary (ref: Request Full Video from Primary Video). That said\, other factors can impact resolution such as glare\, fast/sudden movement\, etc. Please contact Support to submit an example video so that we may appropriately assist you.
How long are video events stored online?,Depending on your Driver•i plan\, included Cloud storage can range from 30 to 90 days. Coordinate with your account rep to learn more.
Why is my account missing certain AI features such as Traffic light violation\, Advanced Speeding\, and Forward Collision Warning\, or missing some coaching features like Green Zone Scoring and Driver Stars?,Depending on your Driver•i plan\, some features are removed or limited for use. Coordinate with your account rep to learn more.
For devices configured with “Wake on Motion” reporting\, how long does it take for the device to register Ignition Off when the vehicle is not moving/idle?,Once the vehicle stops moving\, the device requires 6 minutes of continuous inactivity before it assumes an Ignition Off status.
How do I connect the Driveri camera directly to the vehicle's diagnostic port?,For the D-215 and D-450\, for 9 Pin heavy-duty vehicles\, we recommend using the Cable: Driveri 9 Pin Y-Adapter. Please refer to our Quick Connect installation guides (D-215/D-450) for more information.
[/et]
Driver•i D-400 Series Frequently Asked Questions
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Question,Answer
What network does the device use?,T-Mobile
Does the device record while the vehicle is off?,The device can record for up to 10 hours after the ignition is turned off. Please note that extended recording while the vehicle is off will draw power from the vehicle’s battery. You should be aware that requesting long recording times after ignition off may increase the risk of a dead battery.
When do devices activate?,All devices begin reporting at shipment\, with no buffer time. Invoicing starts at activation regardless of when it’s installed.
How do I access the Driver•i Portal?,Driver•i links can be found within the GPS Tracking Portal web app once your account has been synced through the account setup process.
Can brackets/mounts be cleaned and re-used in the event of a broken windshield?,No. Due to the strength of the adhesive used\, we highly recommend that you purchase a new bracket/mount.
My truck has a “headliner box\,” can the camera be mounted to this instead of the windshield?,Mounting to the windshield is always recommended to ensure a clear view. Any further back and the view could be distorted/obscured.
For “split windshield” trucks\, which side of the windshield is the camera mounted?,The camera is mounted on the passenger side.
Does the camera have an internal battery?,No\, though it does maintain just enough residual charge when power is lost to ensure proper shutdown.
How are camera firmware updates handled?,Cameras are updated in the field via over-the-air (OTA) updates and do not impact its ability to continue capturing video.
What types of data security and encryption are guaranteed with this device?,The Driver•i device uploads a video to the cloud over HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) secure channel. HTTPs will encrypt all the data while transferring to the cloud. Videos are stored encrypted in cloud storage (Amazon S3) using the strongest block ciphers available\, 256-bit Advanced Encryption Standard (AES-256). Currently\, there are no security compliance certifications available.
Is there a timeframe from when a vehicle starts up of how long the camera takes to cycle before it starts recording?,The device boots up in less than a minute and starts recording from Outward and Side Camera. If Privacy Mode is enabled\, the inward camera will begin recording from the next minute when the vehicle starts moving.
[/et]
Driver•i D-430 Frequently Asked Questions
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Question,Answer
What is the Fleet manager experience with D-430\, is it any different from D-410?,Alert Cards – Capturing videos/alerts from outward\, inward and side cameras will be identical. Alert previews will also be similar to what is available on D-410. The D-430 inward camera has a better sensor\, and the inward camera images are better than the D-410.
Is there anything different for the Driver using D-430 over D-410?,Between the D-410 and D-430\, the driver has the same functionalities: LED lights\, driver alert buttons\, privacy mode\, and quad-camera function. The in-cab audio alerts are identical to the offerings on D-410 and D-210. However\, the audio quality is better since better speaker components are used in the newer D-430.
Is the installation of D-430 different?,The installation of D-430 should be no different than that of D-410- instead of using just a GPS antenna on D-410\, you are using a separate GPS/Wireless Module with its cable (similar to the D-210). Having a separate module will provide installer flexibility to ensure no obstruction for GPS/Wireless module. In case of GPS or SIM issues (not able to connect) then RMA would be just for the GPS/Wireless module (and not the entire D-430 unit) so this should simplify RMA due to connectivity issues.
Can I leverage a D-410 install and replace D-410 with D-430?,Yes\, since the mount and power/adaptor cables are the same\, you can leverage that. However\, the D-430 uses a different connector cable (since GPS/Wireless module was added) compared to D-410 and we plan to build an adaptor soon to make this seamless.
Is Wake on Motion (WoM) available for D-430 for an easy install option?,As of now WoM feature is available only on the D-210.
[/et]
Driver•i D-450 Frequently Asked Questions
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Question,Answer
Does the D-450 kit come with the Loose Lead Harness to tie into the power cable?,No
Will the kits always come with a paired Lumia device?,Yes
Is the D-450 mounting bracket fully interchangeable with the D-210 or D-215?,Yes
Is the Lumia box on the D-450 interchangeable with the Lumia from the D-410 or D-430?,The D-410 did not use a Lumia; it is never recommended and ill-advised to swap Lumia devices.
Will the D-450 be compatible with the Quick Connect cables?,Yes
Will the D-450 be configured for ‘Wake On Motion’ by default?,Yes
What is the storage of the D-450?,The D-450 can store up to 100 hours of activity.
[/et]
Driver•i Live Streaming Frequently Asked Questions
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Question,Answer
Is there a limit to how long I can watch the live stream?,You can view consecutive 1-minute Live Stream sessions until you reach your quota. The quota can range from 5 to 15 minutes per device per month depending on the device plan/subscription. Coordinate with your account rep to learn more.
Does Live Stream automatically stop after 1 minute or do I need to initiate the request again to continue seeing the live stream?,You can continue the live stream by clicking the button that appears at the top of the player at the 48-second mark. Doing so places the next session in the queue so it can start another 1-minute session when the current session ends.
Will my quota change when Event Access can be pulled for 5 minutes (vs. 5 one-minute increments) alongside this? In other words\, if I request a 1-minute Live Stream session\, is that video offloaded like an event access request?,The Live Stream quota is separate from the Event Access Quota\, so requesting live streaming sessions will not reduce the number of videos you may request via Event Access.
Which devices support Live Stream,Live Stream is available now on the D-200 Series and D-400 Series devices.
Can I request more than 5-15 minutes of 1-minute Live Stream sessions for one vehicle if I have more than one device in my fleet?,Yes\, with pooled minutes you can live track for longer than 5-15 minutes per month with one vehicle as long as the total Live Stream minutes do not exceed your threshold multiplied by the number of vehicles in the fleet.
Can I request Live Stream sessions in times less than a 1-minute interval such as 15 seconds\, 30-seconds\, etc.\,?,Not at this time. One minute is a standard period of time and is long enough to provide context to what is happening during the Live Stream session. If you request to live stream and the request is accepted 1 minute will be counted toward your quota even if you exit out of the live stream in less than 1 minute.
Can I purchase more time for my quota or a higher quota?,Not at this time. However\, if this is possible in the future\, we will let you know.
Can I convert a Live Stream to a stored alert?,No\, Live Stream sessions are not recorded. However\, you could request the video from Event Access for the same day and time.
[/et]
Driver•i DMS Sensor Frequently Asked Questions
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Question,Answer
What is the DMS Sensor?,The DMS (Driver Monitoring System) Sensor is an advanced auxiliary sensor designed to help identify early signs of driver drowsiness. It works alongside Driver•i to provide an additional layer of safety by monitoring drivers in real time.~~~~Using sophisticated algorithms\, the sensor detects key drowsiness indicators such as microsleep events\, blink rate\, and eye closure percentage — giving fleet managers a heads-up before fatigue becomes a serious risk on the road.
How is the DMS Sensor installed?,Step-by-step installation instructions can be found in our Driver•i DMS Sensor install guide.
What does the in-cab alert sound like?,When a driver triggers a drowsiness detection event\, they'll hear a verbal alert inside the cab. You can preview exactly what that sounds like here: [insert audio link].
What is the minimum speed needed to trigger a drowsy incident?,The vehicle must be traveling at a minimum of 10 mph for a drowsy incident to be triggered. Events detected below this threshold will not be recorded.
What is the Live Drowsy Management Dashboard?,The Live Drowsy Management Dashboard is a real-time tool built to help Fleet Managers quickly identify and respond to drowsy driving risks as they happen. Unlike a standard alert list — which logs every alert ever generated — this dashboard focuses specifically on drivers who are actively driving and need attention right now. Because of this action-first design\, not every alert will appear here; only those that are immediately relevant.~~~~For a full walkthrough on how to use the dashboard\, check out this detailed help article (click here).
[/et]
Driver•i Integration Frequently Asked Questions
Question
Answer
What is the Driver•i integration in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal?
The GPS Fleet Tracking Portal now includes Driver•i safety and coaching data directly in your portal — so you can manage drivers, review safety events, and take coaching action all in one place.
Do I need a separate login or app to access Driver•i data?
No. If your fleet uses Driver•i, your safety scores, alerts, and coaching information are now accessible directly within your GPS Insight portal.
Is there an additional cost for this feature?
No. The integration is included with your existing Driver•i plan at no additional charge.
Where will I find Driver•i information in the portal?
Driver•i data is surfaced across the Map page, driver list, driver and vehicle panels, and driver admin areas.
What information is available?
You can view GreenZone driver safety scores, safety alerts, alert videos, and coaching flags that indicate which drivers need attention.
How do I start coaching a driver?
Look for the "Needs Coaching" tag on a driver profile and click it to open the coaching experience.
Do I need any special permissions?
Yes — you'll need the appropriate user permissions in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal to view drivers, alerts, and coaching data. Required permissions include the following for the user: Driveri, Drivers, and Driver Admin. Contact your administrator if you don't have access.
Does this work with my existing Driver•i hardware?
Yes. The integration works with your current Driver•i setup — no new hardware is required.
What's coming next for this feature?
Future updates will include deeper reporting, expanded alert filtering, automated coaching recommendations, and driver-facing mobile tools.
Who do I contact if I have questions or need help?
Please contact Support; we'd love to hear from you.
Camera Hardware and Software Quick Specs:
Frames per Sec: 30fps
Camera & Field of View:
- Outward Camera 74° (Horizontal), 57° (Vertical), 90° (Diagonal)
- Inward Camera 148° (Horizontal), 80° (Vertical), 168° (Diagonal)
Network Provider: T-Mobile
Understanding the Lights on the Device
[post_title] => Driver•i – FAQ
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-faq
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-07 10:16:33
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-07 17:16:33
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26907
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21765
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 30818
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-05-23 08:31:44
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-05-23 15:31:44
[post_content] => The Driver Sync toggle automates a sync of driver information from the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal to the Driveri Portal. This automation ensures the creation, update, and deletion of driver profiles match across both platforms, enhancing efficiency and ensuring data consistency.
How It Works
Automatic Synchronization: Whenever a driver profile is created or updated in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal, the changes are automatically reflected in the Driveri platform. Similarly, if a driver profile is deleted from the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal, it will also be removed from Driveri.
Real-Time Updates: Changes in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal are immediately synchronized with Driveri, thanks to real-time update mechanisms. This ensures that all data across platforms is current and accurate.
Opt-In Control: You control this synchronization via an "Opt-In" toggle located in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal Classic Portal from the “Vehicle and Driver Integration” page.
If you are a Standard tier customer, please contact your Account Manager if you are interested in enabling this automated sync.
Toggling On Driver Sync
Only the Master User of the account has the ability to enable Driver Sync.
How to turn on Driver Sync:
From the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal Explore page, click Classic icon in the upper left corner.
The Classic Portal page appears.
Hover your mouse over More, then under Cameras, click Driveri Cameras.
Click Vehicle and Driveri Integration.
The Driveri Integration page opens in a separate tab.
In the Configuration Options section, check the box next to Sync Drivers.
The automated Driveri Sync option is now enabled. Any changes made to drivers in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal will automatically sync to the Driveri Portal without requiring any manual intervention.
Driver information in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal is "the source of truth;" any changes made to drivers in the Driveri Portal will not be reflected in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal and may be overridden by driver information from the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal when the automation event occurs (daily occurrence).
Driveri DriverID Field
When creating a new driver from the Admin: Drivers page in the GPS Tracking Portal, the Driveri DriverID field is the primary identifier between the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal and Driveri platforms. If the Driveri DriverID field is changed to a value that doesn't exist in Driveri, the system sync will update the linked Driveri driver's DriverID. If the DriverId already existed in Driveri, the Portal driver is linked to the Driveri driver with the corresponding existing DriveriID profile.
The RefID is no longer the primary identifier for Driver Sync.
Effective October 21, 2025, Driveri Standard tier users will have access to:
Video data for one month plus the current month
Non-video data for twelve months plus the current month
For example:
A video captured on August 15 will remain available until the end of September.
Non-video data from August 15 will remain available until the end of August of the following year.
We have recently formalized our data retention policy for our Driveri cameras.
As of August 1, 2020 we will limit access to Driveri video data for three months plus the current month, and access to non-video data to twelve months plus the current month. So, for example, videos taken on August 15 will be available until the end of November. Non-video data gathered on August 15 will be available until the end of August next year.
For increased privacy, personally identifiable information will be disassociated from videos as per the data retention policy described above. For example, videos taken on August 15 will have their personally identifiable information disassociated at the end of November. Note that as of August 1, for any historical videos that still retain any associations with personally identifiable information, we will work to disassociate such personally identifiable information over time, a process that we anticipate will take until the end of 2020.
[post_title] => Driveri Data Retention Policy
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-data-retention-policy
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-11-21 10:53:33
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-11-21 17:53:33
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26907
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=20605
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[11] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24799
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-05-06 13:09:33
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-05-06 20:09:33
[post_content] => Drive time can be associated with a driver by using information from multiple sources. Different customers may use one or more of these depending upon their use case.
The different sources of driver assignment information are prioritized as follows (Listed in order of Lowest to Highest Priority):
Vehicle Association Based Assignment
Visual Login Based Assignment
Beacon Based Assignment
Driveri App-Based Assignment
API Based Assignment
Manual Assignment
Thus, the system assigns a drive time to a driver based on any of the sources above. However, the data can be updated if a higher priority source sends new information.
Vehicle Association Based Assignment
When a vehicle is associated with a specific driver, it is known as Vehicle Association Based Assignment. In this case, all drive time from the vehicle is assigned to the specified driver.
Visual Login System Based Assignment
VLS (Visual Login System) recognizes the driver by scanning the face of the person driving, when the inward camera is enabled, and then verifying this information against a database in Driveri Cloud in order to identify the driver.
Visual Login Training and Feedback
VLS system improves over time, as it sees more faces. To reduce initial errors, some training must be done before enabling FACE as a driver-login source. This is done by auto-mapping persons to drivers in GPS Insight, and by sending auto feedback to VLS.
VLS is a continuous auto-learning process. When the user assigns the Unassigned Drive time to a Driver, the images are automatically mapped by VLS to that Driver. This results in VLS becoming adept at identifying the same driver in the future.
Auto feedback is generated by using another driver-login source (Manual, API, App, Beacon, etc.) of higher or lower priority. A driver-login entry is relevant to a face-image if they are from the same vehicle, and the time span of the driver-login includes the timestamp of the face-image.
Beacon Based Assignment
We issue a Bluetooth beacon to customers who are interested in this mechanism of driver assignment. Each beacon can be assigned to one driver who then carries the beacon while driving. It's important to ensure that the process is adhered to by the drivers, to make sure drive times are assigned correctly.
Driveri App Based Assignment
The Driveri Device will automatically detect the driver details based on the login credentials used in the Driveri App.
How it works and Expectations from Driver:
Remain logged in to the app, at all times. This should work where the drivers use a dedicated phone. In case, they use a shared phone, they should login at the beginning of the trip and remain logged in as long as they are driving.
Mobile device Bluetooth and Location must be on before starting the trip and must remain on throughout the drive time.
An application programming interface (API) is a connection between computers or between computer programs.
In API-based login the driver is mapped with the specific API database. The driver updates his Hours of service in the API and the data is uploaded to its servers. Driveri Cloud has integrated with the customer’s API provider to access the driving data. The data is mapped for the Drive Time using Driver Id and Vehicle Id.
Manual Assignment
The Safety Manager can assign unknown drive time to a driver. Based on these driver assignments the driver login details are identified. The details of the driver login can be changed by uploading a CSV file with details or by performing inline edits for any known or unknown drive time. The unknown drive time is manually assigned to a driver.
Every time an assignment is done or modified also affects the GreenZone Score, Coaching Session, Alerts, etc. of the selected driver.
[post_title] => Driveri Drive Time Assignment
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-drive-time-assignment
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:10:38
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:10:38
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24363
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24799
[menu_order] => 10
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[12] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 22834
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-05-24 14:56:11
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-05-24 21:56:11
[post_content] => The GreenZone Score summarizes safe driver behavior down to a single number. The GreenZone Score is computed based on the Driver’s General Events, Alerts (risk factors), and DriverStars. The GreenZone Score is computed for three different periods, i.e., daily, weekly, and monthly.
What is GreenZone Scoring Used For?
The GreenZone Score is designed to improve the safety of the driver and vehicle. It tracks the change in driving behavior over time. It also compares the drivers within the same fleet to determine the various needs related to coaching, feedback, and incentives.
Drivers need to achieve minimum analyzed minutes threshold over a period, i.e., Daily up to 30 mins, Weekly up to 100 mins, Monthly up to 400 mins to compute their GreenZone Score as well as alerts and DriverStars on the dashboard.
How are Scores Calculated?
The GreenZone Score is calculated once the driver accumulates a sufficient number of minutes. More specifically, the GreenZone Score is not computed until sufficient criteria are met; and after that score is updated continuously to track the driver's performance.
The GreenZone Score is made up of several factors:
Each factor is determined by the positive and negative events corresponding to that factor and a driver can cause the score to go back up by accumulating more positive events.
For every factor to have an impact on GreenZone Score, a minimum number of events related to that factor should be accumulated.
For example, making complete stops at stop signs causes the stop sign factor of GreenZone Score to go up, provided the driver has encountered a minimum number of stop signs as required. Similarly, driving in traffic while maintaining a safe following distance would cause the following distance factor of the GreenZone Score to go up. And so on.
Every violation is of two types Moderate and Severe. The ratio of Moderate and Severe violations with respect to the total violations caused also impacts how the GreenZone Score is calculated.
[post_title] => Driveri GreenZone Score
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-greenzone-score
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:10:14
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:10:14
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24363
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22834
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[13] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24412
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-02-28 12:31:42
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-02-28 19:31:42
[post_content] => There are seven available types of standard roles for Driveri users in the portal. The seven roles include:
Tenant Safety Manager
Tenant Super User
Safety Coordinator 1
Safety Coordinator 2
Auditor
Operations Coordinator
Installer
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Role,Description
Tenant Safety Manager,A Tenant Safety manager can manage drivers\, coach drivers\, and generally have access to all safety-related data relating to the Driveri® system. Below are the activities that a Safety Manager User can perform:~~~~ - Add\, update or delete Drivers\, Vehicles\, etc.~~ - Associate Devices to Vehicles when a device is installed~~ - View GreenZone® score of the fleet\, most frequent alerts\, drivers with highest and lowest GreenZone score~~ - View alerts and alert videos generated by drivers~~ - Share or un-share an alert with the driver~~ - Request an alert video~~ - Reject an alert~~ - Convert alerts to DriverStar or Neutral event~~ - Request non-alert videos available on vehicle~~ - Add comments against an alert to be viewed by the driver~~ - View driving statistics and frequent alerts of individual drivers~~ - Manage Coaching Sessions~~ - Add or view notes in the Device Summary page for any device~~ - Add\, modify\, and manage the Driver Groups
Tenant Super User,The Tenant Super User is likely the owner of the user account. This user can perform all actions that allowed for a customer in the Portal. The user can do everything that a Tenant Safety Manager performs. In addition\, Tenant Super User can also perform the following actions:~~~~ - Create or edit all seven types of users~~ - Modify configurations for Alerts\, App Settings\, and Camera Settings~~ - Create/edit custom roles
Safety Coordinator 1,Users with this role can perform all functions that a Tenant Safety Manager can perform\, except for the following:~~~~ - Reject an alert or convert an alert~~ - Create/edit Driver Groups~~ - Download and share any video with third parties
Safety Coordinator 2,Users with this role can perform all functions that a Safety Coordinator 1 can perform\, in addition to the following:~~~~ - Create and edit other users with the roles of Safety Coordinator 2\, Safety Coordinator 1\, and Operations Coordinator~~ - Create Driver Groups and manage Driver memberships in these groups ~~ - Request and share full or trimmed Alert and Event Access videos~~ - View Fleet configurations
Auditor,Users with this role can view\, request\, and share alerts/videos as well as view alert-related statistics. Only Tenant Super User and Tenant Safety Manager roles can add users to the Auditor role. The Auditor role can perform the following tasks:~~~~ - Request/Download Trimmed Videos~~ - Share Videos with Third Parties~~ - Request Event Access Videos~~ - Request and View Alerts and Alert Videos~~ - View Driving Statistics
Operations Coordinator,Users with this role can manage the following operational aspects of the Fleet:~~~~ - Fleet Admin tab in Dashboard~~ - Driver Assignments~~ - The accessible features of Provisioning and Configurations are the following: Device Summary\, Create new Drivers and edit Driver Information\, Create new Vehicles and edit Vehicle Information\, Associate or disassociate Vehicles/Drivers/Devices\, Read-only access to Manage Groups and add or remove driver from Manage Drivers~~ - Vehicle Locator~~ - Login and access Driveri Installer App (cannot login to Driveri App)
Installer,An Installer is the field engineer responsible for device installation in the vehicles. Users with this role can associate devices to vehicles when a device is installed.
[/et]
[post_title] => Driveri Portal User Roles
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-portal-user-roles
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:10:48
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:10:48
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24412
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[14] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26907
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-03-08 12:29:45
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-03-08 19:29:45
[post_content] => This Help Center contains Driveri articles designated as essential; however, the Driveri resources available here are not exhaustive. If you require additional instructional/informational resources, please navigate to the Driveri Help Center using the following link: Driveri Help Center
Valid credentials are required to access the Driveri Help Center. These credentials are separate from your GPS Fleet Tracking Portal credentials.
[post_title] => Driveri Resources
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-resources
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:11:18
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:11:18
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26907
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[15] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21938
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-02-03 11:46:36
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-02-03 18:46:36
[post_content] => The Driveri Visual Login System (VLS) recognizes drivers by scanning the face of the person driving when the inward camera is enabled, then verifying this information against a database in Driveri Cloud in order to identify the driver.
The VLS improves over time as it sees more faces. To reduce initial errors, training is done before enabling your face as a driver-login source. This is done by auto-mapping persons to drivers in the Driveri portal, and by sending auto-feedback to the VLS.
If you do not have the VLS feature, reach out to your Account Manager or Customer Support to upgrade your Driveri Protection Plan
Enabling VLS provides several benefits for the fleet, including:
Driver Assignment speed and precision are improved since specific driver assignment data is available much sooner. This results in fewer unknown driver alerts and unknown drive minutes analyzed.
The VLS can be trained using any Driver Assignment method and the VLS Training Dashboard if required. Once this is done, the system makes driver assignment more efficient for the fleet.
To enable the VLS:
Navigate to the Configurations page in the Driveri Portal then click Driver Assignment > Visual Login System.
From here, click Use Visual Login for Driver Assignment.
Enabling VLS Driver Assignment to the Fleet Tracking Portal
For customers who would like to push driver assignments from Driveri VLS to the Fleet Tracking Portal, Admin users with Driveri permissions can enable the feature from the Driveri Integration page in the Fleet Tracking Portal with the directions below.
How to enable the Driveri VLS Driver Assingment Integration:
After logging in to the Fleet Tracking Portal with valid credentials, navigate to the Classic Portal.
The Classic Portal displays.
Hover your mouse over or click More.
From the drop-down menu, click Driveri Cameras then click Vehicle and Driver Integration.
The Driveri Integration page appears.
In the Configuration Options section, check the checkbox next to "Sync Driver Assignments".
The VLS Integration is enabled.
Auto-Learning and Feedback
VLS is a continuous auto-learning process. When the user assigns the Unassigned Drive time to a Driver, the images are automatically mapped by VLS to that Driver. This results in VLS becoming adept at identifying the same driver in the future.
Auto-feedback is generated by using another driver-login source (Manual, ELD, App, Beacon, etc.) of higher or lower priority. A driver-login entry is relevant to a face-image if they are from the same vehicle, and the time span of the driver-login includes the timestamp of the face-image.
VLS Dashboard
The Dashboard provides a way to easily assign drivers detected by the Visual Login System. This allows the VLS to complete the required training in order to enable the auto-assignment of drivers to their respective drive time.
The Visual Login Training Dashboard will enable the customer to view the fleet’s Registered Drivers, as well as the number of Trained Drivers, Untrained Drivers, Unmapped Drivers, and New Faces as defined below. To view this page, click Driver Assignment > Visual Login System Training.
The various tabs display the following information:
Registered Drivers: The total number of drivers registered in the portal for the Fleet.
Trained Drivers: The number of registered drivers for whom Visual Login System training is complete. These drivers are mapped to a Face image that is available in the VLS. These driver images are displayed in the “Mapped Faces” section of the dashboard.
Untrained Drivers: The number of registered drivers for whom the VLS has not completed the training process. This means that the Driver is mapped to a Face Image in the VLS, but the system requires additional training time in order to accurately assign the drive time to the driver. The untrained driver's name appears in yellow.
Unmapped Drivers: The number of registered drivers for whom VLS training is not complete. These drivers have not been mapped to a Face Image in the VLS. Once this is completed, the system will be able to recognize the driver and complete the VLS training.
New Faces: The number of registered and unregistered drivers for whom Face Images were captured. The unregistered drivers cannot be mapped in the VLS because the driver’s names have not been added to the portal.
Customers can only view their own assigned drivers. For customers with multiple fleets, an individual fleet must be selected.
VLS Training
Complete the following steps to train the VLS to recognize new drivers and the drivers who have not been previously identified by the system:
[steps]
[step pdf_inc="1" title="Identify."]
Confirm that all new drivers in the fleet have been added to the portal.
Refer to the “Drivers" section of the portal for details on how to add drivers individually or in bulk.
[/step]
[step pdf_inc="2" title="Review."]
Go to the “New Faces” section of the VLS Training Dashboard.
Select a Face Image to view all associated images for the driver in the right pane of the Dashboard.
Select the appropriate Driver Name from the “Select Driver Name” dropdown menu.
Search for the driver by scrolling down or typing the driver name in the “Select Driver Name” box.
Driver names highlighted in Green indicate that VLS training is complete for that driver.
If the driver’s name is not found, then add a driver in the driveri portal – see section Identify above.
[/step]
[step pdf_inc="3" title="Assign."]
Once the correct driver has been associated with the proper image, click Save.
The drivers can be found in the “Mapped Faces” section of the dashboard.
The drivers will be added to the Untrained Driver total.
The drivers will be added to the Trained Driver total once the VLS training is complete.
Repeat steps in section Identify and Review until no more Face Images show under the New Faces.
[/step]
[/steps]
[post_title] => Driveri Visual Login System
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-visual-login-system
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-06-02 06:32:42
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-06-02 13:32:42
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21938
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[16] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26891
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-03-03 12:50:23
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-03-03 19:50:23
[post_content] => The Driveri camera notifies drivers of the below violation types with in-cab notifications. Below is an explanation of each notification.
Speeding Violation
Following Distance Violation
Driver Distraction
Sign Violation - No Stop (Beta)
Sign Violation - Rolling Stop (Beta)
Violation types that are denoted as Beta (depicted with a Beta sign) are available for customers to test. The Beta Alert can be added for coaching but will not impact the GreenZone Score.
Speeding Violation
When the device determines that the driver is speeding (traveling above a fleet-specified speed limit) for more than 20 seconds, it will say “Please slow down.”
The safety manager will not receive any notice of real-time Speeding feedback. However, the Speeding Violation alert is transmitted to the dashboard if the driver’s speed remains above the fleet-specified speed limit for at least 30 seconds. Accordingly, if the driver responds to the real-time feedback within 10 seconds (so that the speed decreases below the fleet-specified limit), the driver can avoid a dashboard alert.
If the driver’s speed remains above the fleet-specified speed limit for 60 seconds, the real-time message will play again. Because speeding will have a negative impact on a driver’s GreenZone® score, a driver can improve his GreenZone score by reducing his speed to below the fleet-specified limit after hearing the real-time feedback.
Following Distance
A driver should leave enough distance between his/her vehicle and the next vehicle ahead. Driveri categorizes the following distance to the vehicle ahead into three zones: Green, Yellow, and Red.
The categorization is done based on the time it takes for the driver to cover the distance to the vehicle ahead at the current speed.
Some potential causes for following distance audio alerts include:
The distance to the vehicle ahead falls within the yellow zone.
Driver makes a lane change with a vehicle in the yellow zone.
A third-party vehicle cuts into the driver’s lane in the yellow zone.
When the device detects an unsafe following distance between the driver and the next vehicle ahead, it will emit a short beep. Driveri provides Following Distance audio alerts as a heads-up to the driver when the vehicle ahead enters the Red and Yellow Zones.
Following Distance audio alerts are categorized as Moderate and Severe:
Moderate
The intent of this audio alert is to provide a “heads-up” to the driver when a vehicle in front enters the yellow zone for the first time.
This audio alert will beep when the following distance is in the yellow zone.
Audio alert is played once per vehicle (i.e., audio alert does not repeat if the driver chooses to maintain the following distance in the yellow zone)
Severe
The intent of this audio alert is for the driver to create better separation from the vehicle in front of them.
This audio alert will [beep] when the following distance is in the red zone.
If a driver creates greater separation and avoids the red zone within 10 seconds, a dashboard alert will not be generated.
The audio alert will repeat every 20 seconds until the driver creates greater separation from the vehicle in front of them.
Driver Distraction
It is important to identify distracted driving, as well as remind drivers when it occurs because the consequences can be tragic and deadly. This includes behaviors such as texting, dialing a phone, talking on a handheld phone, and other forms of distraction that result in a driver's eyes being off the road.
Driving distracted for 5 seconds while driving 55 mph is like driving the length of an entire football field with your eyes closed. If a driver has a habit of this behavior, then the risk of being involved in an accident is compounded. Addressing distracted driving through the use of in-cab audible alerts and coaching will reduce this unsafe behavior and the risk of its drivers being involved in serious accidents. Due to the dangerous nature of this violation type, the only category assigned to this type of violation is Severe.
This Alert type will apply only to the fleets that have the inward camera enabled.
Severe
The intent of this audio alert is to notify when the driver is looking down, looking at their phone, or talking on the phone while driving.
The Alert is transmitted for Looking Down if the vehicle is traveling at greater than 15 mph and the driver has been distracted for a few seconds.
For Looking at Phone and Talking on Phone, the Alert is transmitted if the vehicle is traveling greater than 5 mph and the driver has been distracted for a few seconds.
The Audio Alert [Distracted Driving] is played if the Driver is distracted while driving.
The Audio Alert will be played again if the Driver continues to be distracted for more than 10 seconds.
Sign Violation - No Stop & Rolling Stops (Beta)
The audio alert will sound when the driver has made a Stop sign violation that includes rolling-stops (moderate) and no-stops (severe). The alert will sound a few seconds after the violation to avoid distracting the driver. The Dashboard Alert will be raised for this infraction.
The Audio Alert [Rolling Stop Detected] is played if the driver did a rolling stop at a Stop Sign.
The Audio Alert [No Stop Detected] is played if the driver did not stop at a Stop Sign.
[post_title] => In-Cab Alerts
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => in-cab-alerts
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:12:31
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:12:31
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26891
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[17] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27040
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-03-30 07:15:47
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-03-30 14:15:47
[post_content] => If you are new to the Driver•i solution or just need help logging in to the Driver•i Portal, please use the instructions below.
Credentials to access the Driver•i Portal are separate from GPS Fleet Tracking Portal credentials.
Accessing the Driver•i Portal
You can access the Driver•i Portal from the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal Driver•i Coaching Page, GPS Fleet Tracking Advanced Administration (Classic) Portal, or by navigating to the Driveri Portal Login Page directly at https://driveri.gpsinsight.com/console/#/login.
To access this page, you need an active Driver•i integration on your GPS Fleet Tracking account and User permissions to view drivers, alerts, and coaching data.
Access via GPS Fleet Tracking Portal Driver•i Coaching Page
You can access the Driveri Coaching Sessions page from the Driver•i Coaching Page of the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal. The page surfaces Driver•i GreenZone scores, safety alerts, alert videos, and coaching needs. The coaching experience itself is accessible within the Portal.
How to access the Driver•i Coaching Sessions Page via Driver•i Coaching Page:
After logging in to the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal, click Driver•i Coaching from the left-hand navigation.
The Driver•i Coaching Page shows the Netradyne login page. You'll need to log in with your Driver•i username and password. After that, you won't be prompted to log in again on future visits—since this is managed via a browser cookie, clearing your cookies will prompt you to log in with your Driver•i credentials again the next time you visit.
Enter your username and click Next.
The text field to enter your password appears.
Enter your password, then click Login.
If you have forgotten your password, click Forgot Password? under the password text field and follow the prompts to reset your Driveri Portal password.
After your initial log in, unless you clear browser cookies, you will not be prompted to log in again. You will be shown the Driver•i Coaching Sessions Summary Page when navigating to the Driver•i Coaching Page.
Access via Classic Portal (Enterprise Only)
You can access the Driveri Portal login page from the GPS Fleet Tracking Classic Portal.
How to access the Driveri Portal via Classic Portal:
From the GPS Fleet Tracking Classic Portal, click More from the top-navigation.
The drop-down menu appears.
Under Cameras, click Driveri Cameras.
The Driveri Cameras sub-menu appears.
Click Open.
The Driveri Portal Login page opens in a separate browser tab.
Enter your username and click Next.
The text field to enter your password appears.
Enter your password, then click Login.
If you have forgotten your password, click Forgot Password? under the password text field and follow the prompts to reset your Driveri Portal password.
[post_title] => Logging in to the Driveri Portal
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => logging-in-to-the-driveri-portal
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-07-21 09:21:47
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-07-21 16:21:47
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27040
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[18] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 20911
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-09-11 13:54:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-09-11 20:54:07
[post_content] => If you are unable to locate an event within the Driveri dashboard, you can request a Driver Event following the instructions below.
Video events can be requested at no charge, but there are reasonable limits for data management purposes.
Request a Driving Event
Complete the steps to request a Driving Event in the Driveri Dashboard.
Navigate to the left side menu, and click on the Event Access icon.
Once the Event Access screen opens, click on the Create New Request button.
Enter the applicable information into the Create a New Request fields.
Once complete, you will see the vehicle's active events on the map.
Click on a number to expand the events.
Click on the event you were searching for, then click on Add to Cart.
Once you click Add to Cart, the icon will turn Red and you will see a shopping cart in the upper right-hand corner showing the number of videos you have selected.
You can also request videos based on time. Select the “list” view option to see video clips sorted by time:
Click on the shopping cart.
All selected videos will show here.
Click Next.
Select or write your reason for the request and click on Submit Request.
Once complete, you will be taken back to the Event Access Screen where the video is being processed:
After the vide fully processes, you (the customer) will receive an email stating that the video event is ready to be viewed.
[post_title] => Requesting an Event
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => requesting-an-event
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:10:26
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:10:26
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24363
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=20911
[menu_order] => 7
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[19] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 22044
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-02-19 11:35:36
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-02-19 18:35:36
[post_content] => Users can now access the Driveri portal through the iOS and Android Driveri App. Setting up the Driveri App is a quick and easy process. Before completing the steps, drivers should know about the App, how it can benefit them, and why the company wants their drivers to use it.
Key Benefits for Drivers
Visibility to Performance: The “mystery of the camera” is removed. Drivers see Greenzone score, most impactful alerts, and driverstars, as shown to fleet management
Real-time Access: Allows for real-time decisions to improve overall driver score and driver ranking
Weekly Review Sessions: Gain awareness to impactful driving behaviors affecting their score
Know Where You Stand: Understand how performance compares to fellow drivers
Key Benefits for Fleet
Virtual Coaching: When enabled, drivers receive updates on their previous week’s performance.
Remote Coaching: Alerts, and comments shared as part of the coaching program
Driver Assignment in Minutes: Assign driving minutes quickly using the beacon feature
Driver Assignment, Multiple Drivers (coming soon): Person driving may identify driving session when multiple drivers in the vehicle
Providing Access to the Driveri App
Users with the SuperUser or Safety Manager roles can set up the Username and password credentials necessary for drivers to log into the Driveri App.
Adding Credentials for Existing Drivers
If drivers have already been set up in the Driveri portal, complete the following steps. Contact your Customer Success Manager if assistance is needed with setting up App credentials for a large group of drivers.
To find individual drivers in the list, type the driver's first and/or last name in the search box.
Click on the Provisioning icon and select the Drivers tab to view the list of current drivers.
Click the “Edit” icon for each driver.
Scroll down and click ‘Yes’ under “Does this driver plan to use the Driveri TM Mobile App?".
Enter a Username for the driver (directly above this question). The Username must be unique, so it’s best to use the driver’s email address, if also used below, or to make a ‘unique’ email such as [DRIVERID]@anycompany.com.
Determine how the password is going to be provided to the driver.
Allow the driver to create a password: The driver’s email is required for this selection. The system will send an email to the driver so a password can be set.
Create a password for this driver: The user can set up a password for a driver. This is useful if the driver does not want to share an email address.
Click the “Edit Driver” button to save the information.
Adding Credentials when also Adding New Drivers
Click on the Provisioning icon and select the Drivers option. Click the “Add Driver” button and choose one of the following:
Add Individual Driver.
Allow the driver to create a password: The driver’s email is required for this selection. The system will send an email to the driver so a password can be set.
Create a password for this driver: The user can set up a password for a driver. This is useful if the driver does not want to share an email address.
Enter the required information - Driver ID (must match driver ID used for ELD, if applicable) first and last name. License and phone numbers are optional.
Enter a username for the driver. The username must be unique, so it’s best to use the driver’s email address if also used below or to make a ‘unique’ email such as [DRIVER ID]@anycompany.com.
Click ‘Yes’ under “Does this driver plan to use the Driveri TM Mobile App?”
Click the “Edit Driver” button to save the information.
Add Drivers in Bulk
Follow the four steps listed under “Add Drivers in Bulk” on the Drivers screen. The system will guide the user through the process of adding multiple drivers.
As above, the required information includes the driver's ID number, first and last name.
If enabling the app for the drivers, then a username is required, as is a password if an email address is not set up for the drivers.
[post_title] => Setting Up the Driveri App
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-app-set-up
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:11:57
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:11:57
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26907
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22044
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 20
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 30444
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-02-05 13:24:56
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-02-05 20:24:56
[post_content] => Driveri Hub-X is an accessory to the Driveri safety camera(s), enabling fleets of any size to expand their visibility inside and outside any type of vehicle. Supporting up to four cameras, Driveri Hub-X drastically reduces your fleet’s blind spots and takes the effectiveness of your safety camera program to a whole new level.
Typical deployments include buses, tractor/trailers, box trucks, garbage trucks, and other “larger” vehicles where added visibility can provide greater context for safety and exoneration purposes.
Camera Options and Locations
Auxillary Camera Options
For auxiliary cameras, the Hub-X offers four selections:
Left-side camera, facing rear of vehicle
Right-side camera, facing rear of vehicle
Rear-facing camera, placed at the back of the vehicle/trailer
Internal dome camera, placed on the roof/dome of the interior
Camera Location Benefits
Depending on a fleet’s requirements, deployments will include:
Left and Right-side cameras: This orientation is great for fleets with long trailers, where wide turns can introduce potential safety or material damage concerns.
Rear-facing camera: This camera orientation can be a benefit for fleets where drivers have minimal (or completely hindered) views of the rear of the vehicle for if/when they are reversing.
Internal camera: This type of camera can be used in various situations, though generally we’ve seen this in the patient compartment of an ambulance or the storage cab of a delivery truck, to gain additional visibility into the actions taking place inside the vehicle.
Sample Videos
Sample Camera Orientations
Viewing Videos
Once the Driveri Hub-X is deployed, user with appropriate permissions can see video feeds within every Driveri event-generated video, along with manual clips/requests, allowing fleets to capture the full 360° view of their vehicle/asset enabling them to take action if and when needed.
[post_title] => About Driveri Hub-X
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-driveri-hub-x
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-02-14 08:25:06
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-02-14 15:25:06
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=30444
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 20
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => c1916df53b02f475f84296e1d74c0339
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:052093e2b81a07c3601510d104265681
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 620
[name] => Driveri
[slug] => driveri
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 620
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => With the Driveri AI Fleet Camera you have an additional layer of monitoring driver behavior and ensuring a safer fleet.
Additional Driveri instructional/informational resources are available on the Driveri Help Center: Driveri Help Center.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 37
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 0
[cat_ID] => 620
[category_count] => 37
[category_description] => With the Driveri AI Fleet Camera you have an additional layer of monitoring driver behavior and ensuring a safer fleet.
Additional Driveri instructional/informational resources are available on the Driveri Help Center: Driveri Help Center.
[cat_name] => Driveri
[category_nicename] => driveri
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 21
)
)
)
[Drive360] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
)
)
[Driveri] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
)
)
[GPS Insight Mobile] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
[509] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 509
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 512
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 509
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 512
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 509
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 509
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 512
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 509
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 512
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (509)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (513,514,602,512)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 14730
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-03-13 11:36:49
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-03-13 18:36:49
[post_content] => With the GPS Insight Driver App, drivers can assign and unassign themselves to/from a vehicle, send and/or receive messages from dispatch, and access our Help Center/Support right from their mobile devices.
Get the app (it's free!) from the Google Play Store and Apple App Store:
[row]
[column lg="7" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
Primary features include:1) Driver Messaging - Send and receive messages to/from dispatch.
2) Driver Assign - Assign/un-assign to/from a vehicle and view assign/unassign history.
3) Help/Support - Access our Help Center to search/view instructional documentation or contact Support to ask a question. Additionally, you can see the current System Status (displays last update timestamp).
[et]
[/column]
[column lg="5" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/column]
[/row]
Logging In to the App
The Driver App is only accessible to drivers with a valid phone number whose information has been previously entered in to the Portal.
If a number is entered that is not associated with previously entered driver information, the driver will receive a message reading: "Bad Phone Number." Drivers may be added to the Portal account at any time. See Adding Groups, Landmark, Assets, Users, & Vehicles for step-by-step instructions.
How to log in to the App:
From the Login screen, enter your phone number and tap Continue.
An authorization code is sent to the phone number entered via SMS message from 477-477(GPS-GPS).
Open the SMS message and retrieve the assigned authorization code.
Enter the authorization code in the text field and tap Authorize & log in.
The authorization code must be entered within 120 seconds from your authorization code request.
You are now logged in to the Driver App.
Logging Out of the App
If you are using the same mobile device, you are automatically logged in each time you open the App.
How to log out of the App:
Tap on the Profile button at the top right corner of the screen.
A pop-up appears displaying your profile and listing the vehicle to which you are currently assigned, if any.
Tap Logout.
The Logout pop-up asks: "Are you sure you want to log out of the Driver app?"
Tap Yes, log out.
You are now logged out of the App.
Accessing Help/Support
You can access our Help Center to search/read instructional articles, contact Support to ask a question/submit a case, or view recent messages from Support from the Help tab of the app.
How to access Help/Support:
Tap on Help.
The Help screen appears.
Tap Help.
Use the Search field to search for relevant content or tap a collection to view available articles.
If your question is not answered by reviewing relevant documentation, tap the < button to return to the Help main screen.
Tap Ask a question.
Tap the options to interact with the bot.
If the results returned by the bot do not answer your question, please send a message in the text field (camera and photo upload options are available) to create a ticket with Support.
A Support Representative will contact you via email to resolve your case.
[post_title] => About GPS Insight Driver App
[post_excerpt] => With the GPS Insight Driver App, drivers can assign and unassign themselves to/from a vehicle, record pre- and post-trip Driver Vehicle Inspection Reports, and send and/or receive messages from dispatch from their mobile iOS devices.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-gps-insight-driver-app
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-09-12 11:57:12
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-09-12 18:57:12
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14730
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 14770
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-03-13 10:56:34
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-03-13 17:56:34
[post_content] => The Driver Assign feature allows drivers to assign/unassign themselves to/from a vehicle and view assign/unassign history from their mobile devices.
Assigning to a Vehicle
Upon login to the App, the My vehicles screen displays. This tab displays the vehicle you are currently assigned to, if applicable, and assignment history.
How to assign yourself to a vehicle:
Assignment history will not appear if this is the first time you have logged in to the App or you have not yet assigned any vehicles previously.
Tap Get started.
The Assign vehicle screen appears.
Assign a vehicle using one of the following options:
[row]
[column lg="5" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
1- Enter the vehicle ID (associated ID in the Portal) in the text field
2- Tap on a vehicle ID from a list of vehicles that you have assigned yourself to previously using the Driver App
3- Tap on the QR code* icon to scan with your mobile device
If you are using the QR code: The first time you tap on the QR code icon, a prompt appears stating: "'Driver Would Like to Access the Camera." Tap OK to use the QR code to assign a vehicle. If you select Don't Allow, you will not be able to scan the QR code and you are returned to the Vehicle Assignment screen. If you would like to enable camera access to the Driver App at a later time, you can make this change in your phone settings.
*If you would like your drivers to use the QR code scan method, you must have QR stickers created that are unique to each vehicle (associated with VIN or Vehicle ID) and affixed to the vehicle.
If you have entered a vehicle ID in the text field (Option 1), tap the vehicle ID.
The Assign pop-up appears asking you to confirm that the displayed vehicle is the vehicle to which you would like to be assigned.
Tap Yes, assign.
You are now assigned to the vehicle. The Driver App displays:
[row]
[column lg="5" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
Currently Assigned
Vehicle ID
Vehicle information
Date and time of vehicle assignment
Assignment History
Lists the following for Assigned and Unassigned actions:
You may unassign yourself from a vehicle from the My vehicles tab.
From the My vehicles tab:
Tap Unassign.
You are now unassigned from the vehicle.
[post_title] => Using Driver App Driver Assign
[post_excerpt] => The Driver Assign feature allows drivers to assign/unassign themselves to/from a vehicle and view assign/unassign history from their iOS mobile devices.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-driver-app-driver-assign
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-09-04 17:11:26
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-09-05 00:11:26
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14730
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14770
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 14792
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-03-13 11:28:58
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-03-13 18:28:58
[post_content] => The Driver Messaging feature allows drivers to send and receive messages to/from dispatch right from their mobile devices.
Sending/Receiving Messages - Drivers
Sending a Message
How to send a message:
Tap Messages.
Your message thread (between you and Dispatch) appears.
If a current message thread does not exist, you will not be able to send a message until a message is sent to you.
Tap in the text field.
The keyboard expands and your cursor blinks in red in the text field.
Type your message, and tap Send.
The message thread automatically refreshes, displaying your sent message. A checkmark will appear under your sent message to confirm delivery.
Receiving a Message
If you have enabled the Push Notification feature for the Driver App, notifications of any messages received from Dispatch will display on your device's lock screen. Otherwise, you will need to open the Driver App, to check if you have received any messages from Dispatch.
How to check received messages:
If you have received any new messages since the last time you opened the Driver App, the count of new messages is displayed on the Messaging tab icon.
From the Driver App, tap on the Messaging icon.
Your message thread (between you and Dispatch) appears and new messages from Dispatch are displayed.
Dispatch can send you dispatches as well. To open a dispatch, tap on the dispatched address. Google Maps will open, providing you with directions from your location to the dispatched address.
Sending/Receiving Messages in the Portal - Dispatchers
You may send and receive messages to/from Drivers using the Driver App in the Portal, and you may send dispatches as well.
Sending a Message to a Driver
You may send a message to a driver by selecting the driver from the Driver window or you may respond to a received message from an existing message thread from the Messages window.
How to send a message to a driver:
From the Portal, hover your mouse over More.
The More menu expands.
Click Driver Messaging under Messaging Integration.
If your sub-menus under the More menu are collapsed, click Messaging Integration to expand this sub-menu, so that you may click on Driver Messaging.
Click Open.
The Driver Messaging page appears.
From the Drivers window, click the Message icon () next to the name of the driver you would like to message.
You may also use the filter and/or search options to easily locate the driver you would like to message.
The message pop-up window appears.
Type your message, and click Send.
“Message sent!” displays in the pop-up window in green text to confirm your message was sent then the pop-up window automatically closes. Your sent message is automatically listed in the Messages window.
You may check whether the driver has read your message by looking at the Status column in the Messages window. Unread messages will be marked as “Unread,” while read messages are marked as “Read” accompanied by the corresponding date (if applicable) and time stamp indicating when the driver read the message.
Sending a Dispatch to a Driver
How to send a dispatch:
From the Driver Messaging page (see Steps 1-3 under "Sending a Message to a Driver" to open this page), click on the Dispatch icon () next to the driver to whom you would like to send a dispatch.
You may also use the filter and/or search options to easily locate the driver you would like to message.
The Send Dispatch pop-up window appears.
By default, the Address tab is displayed in the Send Dispatch pop-up window. You may click Landmark, if you would like to send a Landmark dispatch instead. Use the drop-down windows to select the desired landmark.
Enter the dispatch address in the text field, and click Go To.
The map centers on the addressed you entered.
Enter a note (optional, not required) in the text field next to Enter a note (optional):.
Click Send Dispatch.
“Dispatch sent!” displays in the pop-up window in green text to confirm your message was sent then the pop-up window automatically closes. Your sent dispatch is automatically listed in the Messages window.
Checking Messages Received from Drivers
How to check a received message from a driver:
From the Driver Messaging page (see Steps 1-3 under "Sending a Message to a Driver" to open this page), look in the Messages window under the calendar display.
Received messages are displayed in list format in the Messages window. By default, the most recent messages are displayed at the top of the list. (You may change this by clicking on the sort icon next to Sent, ).
[post_title] => Using Driver App Driver Messaging
[post_excerpt] => The Driver Messaging feature allows drivers to send and receive messages to/from dispatch right from their iOS mobile devices.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-driver-app-driver-messaging
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-09-05 11:42:52
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-09-05 18:42:52
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 14730
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14792
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 3
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 14730
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-03-13 11:36:49
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-03-13 18:36:49
[post_content] => With the GPS Insight Driver App, drivers can assign and unassign themselves to/from a vehicle, send and/or receive messages from dispatch, and access our Help Center/Support right from their mobile devices.
Get the app (it's free!) from the Google Play Store and Apple App Store:
[row]
[column lg="7" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
Primary features include:1) Driver Messaging - Send and receive messages to/from dispatch.
2) Driver Assign - Assign/un-assign to/from a vehicle and view assign/unassign history.
3) Help/Support - Access our Help Center to search/view instructional documentation or contact Support to ask a question. Additionally, you can see the current System Status (displays last update timestamp).
[et]
[/column]
[column lg="5" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/column]
[/row]
Logging In to the App
The Driver App is only accessible to drivers with a valid phone number whose information has been previously entered in to the Portal.
If a number is entered that is not associated with previously entered driver information, the driver will receive a message reading: "Bad Phone Number." Drivers may be added to the Portal account at any time. See Adding Groups, Landmark, Assets, Users, & Vehicles for step-by-step instructions.
How to log in to the App:
From the Login screen, enter your phone number and tap Continue.
An authorization code is sent to the phone number entered via SMS message from 477-477(GPS-GPS).
Open the SMS message and retrieve the assigned authorization code.
Enter the authorization code in the text field and tap Authorize & log in.
The authorization code must be entered within 120 seconds from your authorization code request.
You are now logged in to the Driver App.
Logging Out of the App
If you are using the same mobile device, you are automatically logged in each time you open the App.
How to log out of the App:
Tap on the Profile button at the top right corner of the screen.
A pop-up appears displaying your profile and listing the vehicle to which you are currently assigned, if any.
Tap Logout.
The Logout pop-up asks: "Are you sure you want to log out of the Driver app?"
Tap Yes, log out.
You are now logged out of the App.
Accessing Help/Support
You can access our Help Center to search/read instructional articles, contact Support to ask a question/submit a case, or view recent messages from Support from the Help tab of the app.
How to access Help/Support:
Tap on Help.
The Help screen appears.
Tap Help.
Use the Search field to search for relevant content or tap a collection to view available articles.
If your question is not answered by reviewing relevant documentation, tap the < button to return to the Help main screen.
Tap Ask a question.
Tap the options to interact with the bot.
If the results returned by the bot do not answer your question, please send a message in the text field (camera and photo upload options are available) to create a ticket with Support.
Primary features include:
1) Map Preferences & Controls - Set mapping preferences such as map type, overlays, etc.,
2) Search bar - Search for vehicles, assets, landmarks, or drivers on the map.
3) Map - View vehicle/asset/landmark/driver details on the map.
4) Messaging - Call or message a driver/vehicle.
5) Profile - Force a data refresh, provide feedback, or log out of the app from this screen.
6) Filter - Set filters for vehicles and assets (hierarchy, group, status), landmarks (group), drivers (hierarchy, group).
Logging Into the App
The data in your GPS Insight Manager app is only accessible to users with a valid login (username and password combination). Your user profile determines your basic contact information, the vehicles, and groups you see. You can use the same user credentials that you use to log into the web version of the GPS Portal. Additionally, Fleet Managers or Administrators can require app users to reset their password upon login from the Portal.
To Reset Your Password or Obtain Your Username:
If you do not know your username and/or password, contact your GPS administrator, or request a password reset during the login process.
Enter your username and tap Next.
Tap Forgot my password.
Confirm and/or enter your username or email, enter the characters or words in the audio displayed on your device, then tap Next.
Choose a method for verification (text/call mobile or a code from an authenticator app). If you have selected text/call from mobile, enter your phone number.
If you selected text/call from mobile, a verification code is sent to your phone number. If you selected authenticator app, a verification code is supplied from your authenticator app.
Once you have received the code, enter the verification code and tap Next.
Enter your new password in the Enter new password field and again in the Confirm new password field, then tap Finish.
A page appears confirming your password was successfully reset.
Tap Click here to return to the login screen.
To Require User Password Reset from the Portal (for Managers and/or Administrators):
If you are an Administrator and/or a Manager with Admin/Manage permissions, you may use the Reset Password functionality in the Portal to require one or more GPS Insight Manager App users to reset their passwords upon login to the GPS Insight Manager App.
Adding the Manager App Widget
You can add the Manager App widget to your Today screen of your mobile device. The widget provides you with a list of moving fleet vehicles and the closest address to each moving vehicle. Tap a vehicle from the list to open its location within the GPS Insight Manager app. This list updates each time you open your Today screen.
Large fleet accounts may only see a partial list of moving vehicles. Tap All Vehicles to see all vehicles within the Manager app.
To add the Today widget:
Tap the Edit button.
Tap the Add button for the Manager App.
[post_title] => About GPS Insight Manager App
[post_excerpt] => The GPS Insight Manager (iOS app) allows you to interact with your fleet from your mobile iOS device.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-gps-insight-manager
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-04-24 14:23:35
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-04-24 21:23:35
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=3629
[menu_order] => 18
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26699
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-02-15 11:49:54
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-02-15 18:49:54
[post_content] => You can easily adjust the vehicles, assets, landmarks, and drivers shown on the map page of the Manager App by using the Filters feature.
Driver and Hierarchy features referenced in this article are available to customers with Driver Management (Driver feature) and Advanced Administration (Hierarchy feature). If you would like to learn more, please contact your Account Manager.
Opening the Filter Feature
From the Map page, tap the Filter icon.
The Filters page opens.
Filtering Vehicles & Assets
You can filter vehicles and assets shown on the map by Hierarchy, Group, and Status.
Additionally, you can hide vehicles and assets that are unavailable, out-of-range, or select to show only vehicles and assets within a landmark by tapping the applicable checkbox(es) and then tap Apply. To clear these filter options, tap the applicable checkbox(es) again and then tap Apply.
Filtering by Hierarchy or Group
You can filter vehicles and assets on your map by hierarchy or group using the Filter feature.
For the purposes of this section, we have provided screenshots of the process to select and apply a hierarchy filter; however, the process to select and apply a group is identical.
How to filter by hierarchy or group:
From the Filters - Vehicles & Assets page, tap the box under Hierarchy or Group.
The Hierarchy or Group Filter page appears.
Tap Cancel if you would like to exit the filter page at any time.
Locate the hierarchy/hierarchies or group/groups you would like to see on the map by using the Search field or scrolling down through the hierarchy list (if applicable).
Depending on the number of branches (nodes) within a hierarchy or groups within a group, you may need to tap the > button to see nested branches or groups.
Tap the checkbox next to the hierarchy/hierarchies or group/groups you would like shown on the map.
Tap Done.
Tap Clear to remove checked filters.
The Filter page appears displaying your selected hierarchy/hierarchies or group/groups.
Tap Apply.
The number of filters selected for each category (vehicles, landmarks, or drivers) is shown at the top of the Filter page.
Filtering by Status
You can filter vehicles and assets shown on the map by vehicle/asset status.
How to filter by vehicle/assets status:
Tap Cancel if you would like to exit the filter page at any time.
From the Filters - Vehicles & Assets page, scroll down to see all available Status filter options.
Tap the box next to the status or statuses of vehicles/assets to check the box.
Tap Apply.
The number of filters selected for each category (vehicles, landmarks, or drivers) is shown at the top of the Filter page.
Filtering Landmarks
You can filter landmarks shown on the map by group from the Filters page.
How to filter landmarks on the map:
From the Filters page, tap Landmarks.
Tap Cancel if you would like to exit the filter page at any time.
The Filters - Landmarks page appears.
Tap the box under Group.
The Group filter page appears.
Locate the group you would like to see on the map by using the Search field or scrolling down through the landmark group list (if applicable).
Tap Done.
The Filter page appears displaying your selected group/groups.
Tap Apply.
The number of filters selected for each category (vehicles, landmarks, or drivers) is shown at the top of the Filter page.
Filtering Drivers
You can filter landmarks shown on the map by hierarchy and/or group from the Filters page.
For the purposes of this section, we have provided screenshots of the process to select and apply a hierarchy filter; however, the process to select and apply a group is identical.
How to filter by hierarchy or group:
From the Filters page, tap Drivers.
The Hierarchy and Group Filter page appears.
Tap Cancel if you would like to exit the filter page at any time.
Locate the hierarchy/hierarchies or group/groups you would like to see on the map by using the Search field or scrolling down through the hierarchy list (if applicable).
Depending on the number of branches (nodes) within a hierarchy or groups within a group, you may need to tap the > button to see nested branches or groups.
Tap the checkbox next to the hierarchy/hierarchies or group/groups you would like shown on the map.
Tap Done.
Tap Clear to remove checked filters.
The Filter page appears displaying your selected hierarchy/hierarchies or group/groups.
Tap Apply.
The number of filters selected for each category (vehicles, landmarks, or drivers) is shown at the top of the Filter page.
Removing Filters
You can remove filters on the map to see your entire fleet. To remove selected filters, open the applicable filters again, tap Clear, then tap Apply to again see all your vehicles on the Map.
[post_title] => Manager App: Filters
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => manager-app-filters
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-03-27 07:52:13
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-03-27 14:52:13
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 3629
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26699
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 4517
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-12-05 18:26:11
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-12-06 01:26:11
[post_content] => From the GPS Insight Manager (iOS and Android app), the Map Preferences and Controls are located in the top-right of the screen.
For the purposes of this instructional document, we are providing screenshots/gifs from an iOS device as the features/functionality are identical between device types.
The following map preferences and controls are available and can be tapped on/off:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="10%|15%|75%"]
Number,Feature,Description
1,Update Timer,Shows a countdown to the next map refresh (occurs every 30 seconds).~~~~
The map refresh rate does not necessarily coincide with the device update rate. Therefore\, a vehicle's location/status does not update with the map refresh but will update according to the device update rate.
2,Map Options,Set preferences for the Map Type (Standard\, Satellite\, or Hybrid) and/or Map Overlays:~~~~ - Vehicles: Display vehicles on the map.~~ - Assets: Display assets on the map.~~ - Landmarks: Display landmarks on the map.~~ - Drivers: Display drivers on the map.~~ - Clusters: Represent more than one vehicle in a similar location with a clustered circle. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart\, clusters update accordingly. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included\, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles.~~ - POI: Display Points of Interest.~~ - Traffic: Identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways\, green indicates a normal speed of traffic. Traffic condition color codes range from green (normal speed of traffic) to dark red (slowest speed of traffic).~~ - Trails: Display history trails on the map for all vehicles for the past hour.
3,Current Location,Show your current location on the map. Tap twice to adjust the map to your current location's directional heading. Tap the compass that appears to adjust the map to point North.~~~~
This data originates from your Location Services on your device; please enable Location Services for this app if you would like to use this feature.
4,Focus All,Center the map to display all vehicles and assets.
[/et]
[post_title] => Manager App: Map Preferences & Controls
[post_excerpt] => From the GPS Insight Manager (iOS app), tap the Menu icon to expand/collapse the menu.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-manager-map-preferences-and-controls
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-03-27 06:51:55
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-03-27 13:51:55
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 3629
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=4517
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26844
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-02-20 08:10:26
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-02-20 15:10:26
[post_content] => The Messaging Page allows you to send SMS messages from the App to your fleet vehicles. Messages can be sent to any vehicle with a valid phone/SMS number. You can also review received messages from the Messaging Page.
Sending Messages
You can send a new message from an existing messaging thread listed on the Messaging Page.
If you need to send a message to a vehicle/driver and there is no current thread listed on the Messaging Page, please follow the directions listed under Contacting a Driver, selecting the Send Message option.
How to send a message:
From the Messaging page, tap the vehicle label of the vehicle you would like to message.
The message thread appears.
Type in your message in the text field and tap Send.
The message is sent.
[post_title] => Manager App: Messaging
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => manager-app-messaging
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:24:06
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:24:06
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 3629
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26844
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26700
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-02-10 09:04:49
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-02-10 16:04:49
[post_content] => The Profile page of the Manager app allows you to manually force a refresh of map data, provide feedback, and log out of the app.
Forcing a Refresh
You can manually refresh the map data from the Profile page.
This refresh of data is specific to the map and does not force a device to report. Data from the device is sent based on the selected device update rate.
How to Force a Refresh of Map Data:
From the Profile page, tap Refresh Data.
A thin blue line goes across the screen to indicate the map data has been refreshed.
Providing Feedback
We would love to hear from you! Please let us know how we are doing with this app, what works for you and what doesn't. Simply complete the form available to provide your feedback.
How to provide feedback:
From the Profile page, tap Feedback.
The Feedback form appears.
Enter your feedback and tap Send.
A green "Thank You" message appears toward the bottom of the screen confirming your feedback was submitted successfully.
Logging Out
You can log out from the app from the Profile page.
How to log out:
From the Profile page, tap Log Out.
Upon successfully logging out, you are navigated to the Log In screen.
[post_title] => Manager App: Profile
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => manager-app-profile
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:24:18
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:24:18
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 3629
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26700
[menu_order] => 10
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26778
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-02-17 11:54:44
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-02-17 18:54:44
[post_content] => From the Map page of the Manager App, you can view your vehicles, assets, landmarks, and drivers on a map. By default, the map focuses on all vehicles in your fleet when you first open the app. You are also given the option to search and/or expand your Map Lists (Vehicles, Assets, Landmarks, and Drivers).
The Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Driver Management add-on only. Please contact your Account Manager if you would like to learn more.
Adjusting the Map
You can use the Map Overlay options (Vehicle, Assets, Landmark, and Driver) to see vehicles, landmarks, and drivers on the map or you can de-select one or all of these options to adjust what is shown on the map.
How to show vehicles, assets, landmarks, and drivers:
From the Map page, tap Map Options.
The Map options page appears.
Tap Vehicles, Assets, Landmarks, and/or Drivers overlays if you would like to view them on the map.
The icon turns blue to indicate the selected item will be shown on the map. The icon turns gray to indicate it will not appear on the map.
To toggle off a selected item, tap the icon again.
Viewing a Map List
You can view Map Lists from the Map page to view a list of your vehicles, assets, landmarks, or drivers and select a vehicle, asset, landmark, or driver to see the associated card and perform available actions (dependent on card type).
How to view a map list:
From the Map Page, expand the Map List section by tapping and dragging up the expand button.
The Map List section should now appear full screen.
Tap the list type (Vehicle, Asset, Landmark, or Driver) you would like to view.
The selected list appears.
To exit the selected map list, simply tap the < button.
Viewing the Vehicle List
The Vehicle List displays all vehicles, or filtered vehicles if you’ve filtered the map by vehicle. Vehicles are displayed by Vehicle ID. The assigned driver (if applicable), current status, and vehicle location display under the Vehicle ID. Click on the Vehicle ID to see the selected vehicle’s Vehicle Card.
Click the vehicle location to open the device's native map. Use the pinned location to easily obtain directions.
Vehicle Status Legend
Please use the legend below to understand displayed vehicle statuses.
For a vehicle to be assigned an "out-of-range" status, the vehicle must meet two technical requirements: 1) Last known ignition Event is ON, AND 2) Last device ping received 60 minutes ago or more.
Working with a Vehicle/Asset
You can perform actions such as assigning/unassigning a driver, centering the map over the selected vehicle, isolating the vehicle on the map temporarily, and/or viewing trip history from a selected vehicle’s Vehicle Card.
You can select a vehicle to work with by using the steps included under Viewing a Map List (from the Vehicle List), you can tap on a vehicle displayed on the map, or you can use the Search field available in the Map List section by typing in the vehicle/asset label.
The Driver feature is only available to Enterprise customers or customers with the Advanced Administration add-on. If you are interested in this feature, please contact your Account Manager.
Vehicle/Asset Card - Tabs
The Vehicle/Asset Card contains two tabs: Overview and Maintenance.
Overview Tab
The Overview tab provides detailed information about the vehicle/asset. The following information is available from the Overview tab:
To access some of these details, tap the expand icon ) for the section. To close the section from view, please tap the Down Arrow icon ().
Location
Street view (if available)
Driver assignment
Vehicle/Asset details: VIN, Device Serial Number, Vehicle/Asset Type, Status, Odometer, Runtime (if available), Ignition Status (On/Off)
Odometer Details: Odometer, Last Mileage Adjustment (type), Prior to Waypoint (odometer value in miles or kilometers before the last change to the odometer), At Waypoint (odometer value at last change to the odometer), Last Change Made By (user who made the waypoint change), Waypoint Change Made On (Date & Time)
Attributes (if applicable)
Today's Trips Details (if applicable): Total Trips, Total Miles, Day Duration, Drive Time, Idle Time
Ignition On/Off Alerts (if applicable)
Memberships (Hierarchy or Group)
The Hierarchy feature is only available to Enterprise customers or customers with the Advanced Administration add-on. If you are interested in this feature, please contact your Account Manager.
Nearby: Vehicles & Assets, Landmarks
Please see Vehicle Card - Odometer for Last Mileage Adjustment Type definitions and expected outcomes, along with answers to frequently asked questions about odometer details.
Maintenance Tab
The Maintenance tab provides the following information and available actions:
Create a new service
Next service due: service name, service type, service due interval
Complete next service due
List of all services due: service name and service due interval
List of service history
Please see Manager App: Maintenance for additional information on using the Maintenance Tab of the Vehicle/Asset Card.
Assigning a Driver
You can assign a driver or un-assign an assigned driver directly from the Vehicle Card.
How to assign a driver:
From the Vehicle Card, tap the Assign Driver icon.
You can also assign a driver by tapping Assign Driver under Assignments in the detailed information section of the card.
The Assign Driver page appears with a list of drivers and the search tool.
Use the search tool or tap the driver you would like to assign from the list.
Tap Assign.
The screen navigates to the Vehicle Card and a green message appears confirming the driver was successfully assigned. The assigned driver is shown at the top of the Vehicle Card and under Assignments.
To un-assign, tap Unassign Driver and then tap Unassign. Additionally, you can tap on the x under Assignments and then tap Unassign.
Contacting a Vehicle
If you have assigned a driver to a vehicle and the assigned driver has associated contact information (entered in the Portal previously), you may contact the vehicle from the Vehicle Card.
If contact information has not been entered in the Portal for the assigned driver, the Contact option is not shown on the Vehicle Card.
How to contact a vehicle:
From the Vehicle Card of a vehicle with an assigned driver, tap the Contact icon.
The Contact pop-up appears with the option to call or message the vehicle.
Tap your preferred contact method to contact the vehicle.
Centering the Map Over the Vehicle
You can center the map over the vehicle to get a better understanding of your vehicle's location and inform your decisions.
How to center the map over the vehicle:
From the Vehicle Card, tap the Center Map icon.
The map centers over the vehicle selected.
Isolating a Vehicle/Asset
You can temporarily select to view a single vehicle/asset on the map using the Isolate toggle.
How to isolate a vehicle/asset:
From the Vehicle Card, tap the More Options icon.
Available options are shown.
Tap Isolate vehicle or Isolate asset (depending on your use case).
The map centers and zooms in over the isolated vehicle/asset. A green pop-up message displays temporarily confirming the isolate feature is active on the applicable vehicle/asset and if you wish to stop isolating the vehicle/asset, tap Undo.
The green pop-up disappears. If you would like to turn the Isolate feature toggle off, tap the left arrow on the left-hand side of the screen.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to leave isolation view.
Tap Confirm to turn off the isolate toggle and view all vehicles/assets in the fleet on the map or tap Cancel to keep the isolate feature on.
Viewing Trip History
You can see recent trip activity for a vehicle from the Vehicle Card.
How to view trip history:
From the Vehicle Card, tap the More Options icon.
Available options are shown.
Tap Trip History.
Trip History is shown for the current day.
Use the Calendar icon to choose a different date, or use the < or > buttons to the right and left of the date to change the selected date, to see activity for the corresponding day.
Trip summaries are shown for each trip on the selected date providing trip totals (miles, time) and a breakdown of activity with time between vehicle status changes and location.
Tap a trip summary to view the trip full screen.
To exit the full screen visual of the trip, swipe right.
To exit the Trip History page, tap the X next to the vehicle label.
Viewing Vehicle Information
The Vehicle Card Details section provides at-a-glance information about the selected vehicle including:
Location
Street View
Tap the > button next to Street View to expand the section and show the street view of the vehicle's location.
Assignments (Driver if assigned)
Tap on the driver name to view the corresponding Driver Card.
Vehicle Details: VIN, Device Serial Number, Status, Odometer, Runtime (if available), Ignition status
Today's Trips (if applicable): Total Trips, Total Miles, Day Duration, Drive Time, Idle Time
Alerts (if applicable)
Vehicle Memberships: Hierarchies/Vehicle Groups
Nearby (Assets/Landmarks)
Tap the > button next to Nearby to expand the section to see a list of nearby assets or landmarks. Use the Strawberry icon () to view a full list of nearby assets/landmarks and adjust the radius applied and/or only show applicable filtered assets/landmarks. You can tap the vehicle labels or landmark names to show corresponding Vehicle Cards/Landmark Cards.
Viewing a Landmark
You can view detailed information about a landmark from a selected landmark's Landmark Card such as its location (street view may be available), landmark details, and number of assets inside.
Selecting a Landmark
You can select a landmark using the steps included under Viewing a Map List (from the Landmark List), you can tap on a landmark displayed on the map, or you can use the Search field available in the Map List section by typing in the landmark name. Once you have selected a landmark, the corresponding Landmark Card is shown.
Working with a Driver
You can assign a vehicle, center the map over the driver's assigned vehicle (if applicable), and/or view driver details (reference ID, phone number, email address, and timezone).
Selecting a Driver
You can select a driver using the steps included under Viewing a Map List (from the Driver List), you can tap on a driver displayed on the map, or you can use the Search field available in the Map List section by typing in the driver name. Once you have selected a driver, the corresponding Driver Card is shown.
Assigning to a Vehicle
You can assign a driver to a vehicle from the Driver Card.
How to assign a driver:
From the Driver Card, tap the Assign Driver icon or tap Assign to Vehicle under Assignments.
The Assign to Vehicle page appears.
Use the search tool or locate the vehicle to which you would like to assign the driver in the list of vehicles.
Tap Assign.
The screen navigates to the Driver Card and a green message appears confirming the driver was successfully assigned.
Centering the Map
If the driver is assigned to a vehicle, the Center Map option is shown on the Driver Card.
How to center the map over the vehicle:
From the Driver Card, tap the Center Map icon.
The map centers over the vehicle assigned to the selected driver.
[post_title] => Manager App: Working with the Map
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => manager-app-working-with-the-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-07-01 11:48:52
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-07-01 18:48:52
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 3629
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26778
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 6
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 3629
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-12-05 17:58:52
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-12-06 00:58:52
[post_content] => The GPS Insight Manager app allows you to interact with your fleet from your mobile device. You can download the app from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store
Primary Features
Primary features include:
1) Map Preferences & Controls - Set mapping preferences such as map type, overlays, etc.,
2) Search bar - Search for vehicles, assets, landmarks, or drivers on the map.
3) Map - View vehicle/asset/landmark/driver details on the map.
4) Messaging - Call or message a driver/vehicle.
5) Profile - Force a data refresh, provide feedback, or log out of the app from this screen.
6) Filter - Set filters for vehicles and assets (hierarchy, group, status), landmarks (group), drivers (hierarchy, group).
Logging Into the App
The data in your GPS Insight Manager app is only accessible to users with a valid login (username and password combination). Your user profile determines your basic contact information, the vehicles, and groups you see. You can use the same user credentials that you use to log into the web version of the GPS Portal. Additionally, Fleet Managers or Administrators can require app users to reset their password upon login from the Portal.
To Reset Your Password or Obtain Your Username:
If you do not know your username and/or password, contact your GPS administrator, or request a password reset during the login process.
Enter your username and tap Next.
Tap Forgot my password.
Confirm and/or enter your username or email, enter the characters or words in the audio displayed on your device, then tap Next.
Choose a method for verification (text/call mobile or a code from an authenticator app). If you have selected text/call from mobile, enter your phone number.
If you selected text/call from mobile, a verification code is sent to your phone number. If you selected authenticator app, a verification code is supplied from your authenticator app.
Once you have received the code, enter the verification code and tap Next.
Enter your new password in the Enter new password field and again in the Confirm new password field, then tap Finish.
A page appears confirming your password was successfully reset.
Tap Click here to return to the login screen.
To Require User Password Reset from the Portal (for Managers and/or Administrators):
If you are an Administrator and/or a Manager with Admin/Manage permissions, you may use the Reset Password functionality in the Portal to require one or more GPS Insight Manager App users to reset their passwords upon login to the GPS Insight Manager App.
Adding the Manager App Widget
You can add the Manager App widget to your Today screen of your mobile device. The widget provides you with a list of moving fleet vehicles and the closest address to each moving vehicle. Tap a vehicle from the list to open its location within the GPS Insight Manager app. This list updates each time you open your Today screen.
Large fleet accounts may only see a partial list of moving vehicles. Tap All Vehicles to see all vehicles within the Manager app.
As of November 2025, the Magellan Mapping Navigation App and License product has been discontinued.
The following apps are available on the tablet for your convenience.
This is not an exhaustive list and there may be more apps available for use on the tablet.
Available Tablet Apps
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="10%|15%|75%"]
App Icon,App,Description
,Ditat Mobile Dispatch,Subscription-only application (additional cost applies) for the trucking industry allowing dispatchers to send trip information to drivers and receive updates on trip status (loaded\, completed\, etc.)
,eFleetSuite,Commercial-grade compliance application used to identify and manage hours-of-service and maintenance violations associated with FMCSA's ELD regulations.
,ELD Complete,ELD Complete hours of service application is a powerful but easy-to-use tablet-based service certified with FMCSA regulations for electronic logs and vehicle inspections.
,ELD Complete Driver Guide,The ELD Complete guide acts as a companion guide to the ELD Complete application\, allowing users quick and easy process and question guidance.
,Magellan SmartFleet,Fleet navigation application that provides navigation specifically created for vehicle fleets with truck-protocols in mind\, ensuring your team navigates the road ahead safely.
,Messaging,Messaging app allows users to communicate with in-office managers\, also supporting multi-point dispatch and routing (Magellan software required).
,Updater,Application update manager helps manage the process for updating apps on the GPSI Android MDT.
[/et]
[post_title] => Available Tablet Apps
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => available-tablet-apps
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-11-12 06:32:39
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-11-12 13:32:39
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22326
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 22674
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-06-10 08:47:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-06-10 15:47:09
[post_content] =>
The GPSI Connect Tablet has been discontinued.
Questions about the GPSI Connect Tablet? Check out the below.
GPSI Connect Tablet Frequently Asked Questions
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Question,Answer
What version operating system does this tablet support?, - Connect Tablet = Android 6~~ - Connect Tablet 2 = Android 9
How does the tablet connect to the network?,Through serial connection to the GPS device\, the tablet is capable of accessing basic internet messaging and supporting low data apps such as ELD and Messaging. Additionally\, the tablet is fully capable of connecting to the internet through wifi connectivity.
What is the standard warranty period on the tablet?,1 year from the date of shipment.
Is the tablet equipped with a camera?,Yes\, there is a rear-facing camera built into the tablet. Specs: 8 megapixels\, autofocus with flash LED
What is the typical battery life?,A fully charged tablet should see battery life upwards of ~10 hours depending on usage.
What apps are supported on this tablet?,Reference this link for a full list of supported apps [insert link].
What is the weight and dimensions of this new tablet?, - 3.7 oz (105g); 4.62 x 4.21 x 0.77” (117.3 x 107 x 19.5mm)~~ - Display: 7” 1024 x 600 IPS (600nits\, 85° view angle)
What are the recommended environmental operating conditions?, - Temperature: -4° to +140° F (-20° to +60° C) operating\, - 22° to +158° F (-30° to +70° C) storage~~ - Humidity: 0 – 95%\, non-condensing
GPSI Android MDTs have had a history of docked/undocked issues. Is that addressed with this new tablet?,Yes\, the new Connect Tablet has been developed with a new secure power dock with a revamped locking mechanism and magnet seal\, improving the pin connections and drastically reducing the potential for docking issues.
How has the harness connection been addressed\, knowing the connection for the MDT saw the harness connectivity become loose through standard wear and tear?,Understanding the impact of the harness connectivity issues for the MDT\, we’ve adjusted the harness connection on the new Connect Tablet to have it extend straight and back from the tablet vs. the side\, which should significantly improve long-term harness connectivity.
[/et]
[post_title] => GPSI Connect Tablet FAQ
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => gpsi-connect-tablet-faq
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-12-10 08:20:36
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-12-10 15:20:36
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22674
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 23720
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-08-13 13:55:34
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-08-13 20:55:34
[post_content] =>
The GPSI Connect Tablet has been discontinued.
Connect Tablet app updates begin automatically when the tablet is connected to Wi-Fi. If there are any updates available, they are installed silently in the background. Once updated, you can manually verify the updates by completing the steps below.
You can identify a Connect Tablet by the serial number, which always begins with 089.
Please make sure the driver has gone Off Duty and has logged completely out of the ELD Complete app before starting the update process. This is done to ensure no log data is lost.
Verifying Connect Tablet Updates
To update a tablet and confirm ELD Complete is up to date:
Connect the tablet to Wi-Fi by tapping Settings from the home screen.
From here, tap WLAN.
Make sure the Wi-Fi switch is turned on and connect to Wi-Fi network.
Wait about 5-10 minutes for the updates to complete.
To confirm whether the application has automatically updated in the background, open the ELD Complete app and check the bottom right corner of the screen. If 'Version 4.06.007' is displayed, the update was successful.
The most current app version of the ELD Complete App is 4.06.007
If the updates have not completed after 10 minutes on Wi-Fi, please contact Support and Support will manually trigger updates, if necessary.
As of November 2025, the Magellan Mapping Navigation App and License product has been discontinued.
The following apps are available on the tablet for your convenience.
This is not an exhaustive list and there may be more apps available for use on the tablet.
Available Tablet Apps
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="10%|15%|75%"]
App Icon,App,Description
,Ditat Mobile Dispatch,Subscription-only application (additional cost applies) for the trucking industry allowing dispatchers to send trip information to drivers and receive updates on trip status (loaded\, completed\, etc.)
,eFleetSuite,Commercial-grade compliance application used to identify and manage hours-of-service and maintenance violations associated with FMCSA's ELD regulations.
,ELD Complete,ELD Complete hours of service application is a powerful but easy-to-use tablet-based service certified with FMCSA regulations for electronic logs and vehicle inspections.
,ELD Complete Driver Guide,The ELD Complete guide acts as a companion guide to the ELD Complete application\, allowing users quick and easy process and question guidance.
,Magellan SmartFleet,Fleet navigation application that provides navigation specifically created for vehicle fleets with truck-protocols in mind\, ensuring your team navigates the road ahead safely.
,Messaging,Messaging app allows users to communicate with in-office managers\, also supporting multi-point dispatch and routing (Magellan software required).
,Updater,Application update manager helps manage the process for updating apps on the GPSI Android MDT.
[/et]
[post_title] => Available Tablet Apps
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => available-tablet-apps
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-11-12 06:32:39
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-11-12 13:32:39
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22326
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 3
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 97b70d4d532bd9be4f2ea2315f0f794d
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:04770f59768b8e4ab2f226430a85cdbe
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 580
[name] => GPSI Connect Tablet
[slug] => gpsi_connect_tablet
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 580
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => The GPSI Connect Tablet offers ELD Connect with Focus (HOS solution), Magellan Mapping, and more app capabilities providing you with a tablet that works for your unique needs.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 4
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 32
[cat_ID] => 580
[category_count] => 4
[category_description] => The GPSI Connect Tablet offers ELD Connect with Focus (HOS solution), Magellan Mapping, and more app capabilities providing you with a tablet that works for your unique needs.
[cat_name] => GPSI Connect Tablet
[category_nicename] => gpsi_connect_tablet
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 3
)
)
)
[Manager App] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
)
)
[Driver App] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
)
)
[GPSI Connect] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
)
)
[GPS Insight Hours of Service] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
[591] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 591
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 515
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 591
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 515
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 591
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 591
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 515
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 591
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 515
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (591)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (588,516,563,517,515)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27543
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-06-29 12:05:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-06-29 19:05:07
[post_content] => You are billed for all Tractors (not Trailers) marked "Active" in your ELD Complete account. To help you avoid being charged twice for the same asset, we are providing the following instructions to deactivate duplicate Tractors. As long as duplicate Tractors are deactivated by midnight the day before the last day of the month, you will not be billed for the duplicate Tractors.
You are not charged for duplicate active Trailers.
How does this occur?
Your account may have duplicate Tractors as a result of the following scenarios:
The same Tractor was listed more than once on an uploaded spreadsheet.*
Admins added the same Tractor to the account more than once.*
Drivers added the same Tractor via tablet.*
A Tractor is added with the same Number or VIN but the selected Home Base is different.
These scenarios were possible prior to an update to the system which now displays an error message if the same VIN or Number is used to add a Tractor.
Removing Duplicate Tractors
Now that we have an idea of how a duplicate Tractor entry could have occurred, let's remedy the situation by removing those duplicates. Please use the following instructions to remove duplicate Tractors by deactivation.
How to deactivate a duplicate tractor:
Login to your ELD Complete account and click Manage.
The Manage page appears displaying your Carriers.
Use the drop-down under Name to select the applicable Carrier by name, then click Assets () under Actions.
The Assets section appears displaying a list of your Tractors and Trailers.
Use the sort function in the Number column to sort your assets by number.
The list is sorted by number.
Review your asset list and look for any duplicate numbers. For any duplicates that you find, click the corresponding Details icon ().
The Assets pop-up appears.
Uncheck the Active checkbox by clicking the checkbox.
You may need to scroll down to locate the checkbox.
The checkbox appears empty.
Click Save.
The Assets list is displayed and the checkbox under the Active column for the entry row is empty.
To ensure that you have deactivated all Tractor duplicates for your account, please use the sort function for the VIN column and follow Steps #4-#6.
This process does not need to be performed for Trailers as you are not charged for active Trailers on your account.
[post_title] => Avoiding Duplicate Assets
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => avoiding-duplicate-assets
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-06-29 12:19:26
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-06-29 19:19:26
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27543
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27320
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-06-01 08:38:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-06-01 15:38:50
[post_content] => The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle.
We recommend keeping a sticker, or card, in the vehicle with the serial number of the installed GPS device for easy reference during future driver assignments.
Using the Fuel Receipts feature, drivers to take a picture of a fuel receipt and share it with admin personnel by uploading it from the ELD Complete App. Captured data includes fuel type, reference no., gallons, total cost, vehicle name (from vehicle profile), odometer value (from ECM), date, time, address, and notes. This information is available in the ELD Complete Admin Portal from the Fuel Receipts tab. Reports can be downloaded in Excel format.
You can search fuel receipts by:
Units
Driver
Carrier (Multiple carrier accounts)
Fuel type
Terminal
Region
Editing Fuel Receipts
Fuel receipts uploaded to the Portal can be edited and/or deleted.
How to edit a fuel receipt:
From the Fuel Receipts tab, use the filter/search options to locate the fuel receipt you would like to edit.
Under the Actions column corresponding to the row of the applicable receipt, click the Edit icon ().
The Edit Fuel Receipts pop-up appears. Available edits include:
Fuel Type
Reference ID
Fuel Purchased
Fuel Expenses
State
Date and Time
Notes
Applicable files can be uploaded from the pop-up.
Make your edits and click Save.
A green pop-up appears in the top-right corner confirming the edit was successfully saved.
Deleting Fuel Receipts
How to delete a fuel receipt:
From the Fuel Receipts tab, use the filter/search options to locate the fuel receipt you would like to edit.
Under the Actions column corresponding to the row of the applicable receipt, click the Delete icon ().
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the receipt.
Click OK to delete the receipt or click Cancel to exit without deleting.
A green pop-up appears in the top-right corner confirming the receipt was successfully deleted.
Driver Documents
Drivers can upload documents and photos via the BYOD solution. The uploaded docs/photos are accessible on the ELD Complete Admin Portal via the Drivers page.
How to access driver documents:
From the ELD Complete Admin Portal, click Manage.
Use the drop-down under name to select the Carrier.
Under ACTIONS, select Drivers.
The list of drivers associated to the selected carrier is displayed.
Click Driver Documents ().
The Driver Documents pop-up appears.
Click the applicable button under actions (Download, Edit, Delete) for the applicable document to perform your task.
You can also add a document to the driver's documents by clicking +New.
[post_title] => Bring Your Own Device (BYOD)
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => bring-your-own-device-byod
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-09-26 06:17:17
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-09-26 13:17:17
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27320
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26444
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-11 14:38:52
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-11 21:38:52
[post_content] => When reviewing the Driver Records report in ELD Complete, certain columns contain specific codes directly relating to the FMCSA’s Final Rule.
To make it easier to decipher these events, please refer to the charts below for what each code value represents.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Code,Description
1,Automatically recorded by ELD
2,Edited or entered by the driver
3,Edit requested by an authenticated user other than the driver
4,Assumed from unidentified driver profile
[/et]
Event Type Parameter Codes
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="10%|10%|80%"]
Type,Code,Description
1,1,Driver's duty status changed to "off-duty"
1,2,Driver's duty status changed to "sleeper-berth"
1,3,Driver's duty status changed to "driving"
1,4,Driver's duty status changed to "on-duty not driving"
2,1,Intermediate log with conventional location precision
2,2,Intermediate log with reduced location precision
3,1,Driver indicates "authorized personal use of CMV"
3,2,Driver indicates "yard moves"
3,0,Driver indication for PC\, YM\, and WT cleared
4,1,Driver's first certification of a daily record
4,n,Driver's n'th certifcation of a daily record (when recertification is necessary)~~~~
"n" is an integer between 1 and 9. If more than 9 certifications is needed\, use 9 for each new re-certification record.
5,1,Authenticated driver's ELD login activity
5,2,Authenticated driver's ELD logout activity
6,1,Engine power-up with conventional location precision
6,2,Engine power-up with reduced location precision
6,3,Engine shut-down with conventional location precision
6,4,Engine shut-down with reduced location precision
7,1,An ELD malfunction logged
7,2,An ELD malfunction cleared
7,3,A data diagnostic event logged
7,4,A data diagnostic event cleared
[/et]
Malfunction/Diagnostic Codes
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Code,Description
P,Power Compliance malfunction
E,Engine synchronization compliance malfunction
T,Timing compliance malfunction
L,Positioning compliance malfunction
R,Data recording compliance malfunction
S,Data transfer compliance malfunction
O,Other ELD detected malfunction
1,Power data diagnostic event
2,Engine synchronization data diagnostic event
3,Missing required data elements data diagnostic event
4,Data transfer data diagnostic event
5,unidentified driving records data diagnostic event
6,Other ELD identified diagnostic event
[/et]
[post_title] => Driver Record Event Codes
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driver-record-event-codes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-02-08 11:50:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-02-08 18:50:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26444
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26469
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 08:21:16
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 15:21:16
[post_content] => The Driver Records Portal tab allows you to run a report on all driver-duty changes made on a driver log. This report can be run for all drivers or a specific driver at a time.
When reviewing the Driver Records report in ELD Complete, certain columns contain specific codes directly relating to the FMCSA’s Final Rule. Please see Driver Record Event Codes for a list of values and corresponding descriptions.
To run the Driver Report:
In eDash, click the Driver Records tab.
Select the appropriate company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the appropriate Driver from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date range you would like to view from the calendar.
Select the Event Status, Event Origin, Event Type, and Event Code from the appropriate dropdown lists.
Once complete, click Execute.
The report will appear with the following information:
ELD
App Version
Timestamp
Driver
Engine Hours
Odometer
New Status
City
State
Latitude
Longitude
Status
Origin
Type
Code
D/M Code
After reviewing the report, you can export the report to an Excel spreadsheet by click the Excel icon in the top right corner of the report.
[post_title] => Driver Records
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driver-records
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 08:21:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 15:21:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26469
[menu_order] => 9
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24510
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-04 11:19:10
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-04 18:19:10
[post_content] => The ELD Complete portal provides the ability to administer drivers (add, delete, and monitor), review and edit logs, and run reports. The portal and device stay synchronized to provide a nearly real-time view of your fleet.
Once you are logged in to ELD Complete, you are brought to the home screen of the portal with setup options, administrator tabs, and eDash links. All portal and reporting features are found in eDash.
To access eDash:
Hover over the eDash tab and click HOS + DVIR.
On the HOS + DVIR page, you'll see the following tabs:
Manage: The Manage tab allows you to view and edit carrier details, including profile settings, drivers, home bases, assets, and notifications.
Log Books: The Log Books tab gives you the ability to view all of your driver’s daily driving log details. This tab also allows you to download, view and print records as needed, along with exporting ELD data files for troubleshooting purposes or FMCSA regulations.
Unidentified Logs: The Unidentified Logs tab provides logs of drive times that are not associated with or captured by a specific driver. This tab allows you to assign these drive times and trips to the correct driver.
Log Edits: The Log Edits tab allows you to view edited logs and can be filtered by carrier, status (active, inactive, or all), drivers, date (up to a month), and log status (All, Assumed, Requested, and Rejected).
Dashboard: The Dashboard tab provides an overview of compliance and HOS details and can be filtered by carrier.
Violations: The Violations tab provides a list of violations your drivers have received through ELD Complete.
DVIR: The Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR) tab allows you to view all DVIRs completed by your drivers.
IFTA Tab: The IFTA tab allows you to run IFTA reports for each vehicle in your organization. This report helps you keep track of miles traveled and fuel purchased in each state. This is helpful for companies that file quarterly IFTA or fuel tax reports. These reports are run by year, quarter and month.
Driver Records: The Driver Records tab allows you to run a report on all driver-duty changes made on a driver log. This report can be run for all drivers or a specific driver at a time.
FMCSA Records Report: The FMCSA Records report provides a list of all records that have been sent to the FMCSA upon request. The records that can be requested include driver rides and ECM data. ELD Complete keeps a record of the report types and dates sent to FMCSA.
Shipments: The Shipments feature allows dispatch or other internal or administrative users to schedule estimated delivery or pickups for their drivers.
Driver Duty Report: The Driver Duty report tab allows you to run a report that lists how long a driver was in each duty status within a specific date range.
The Engine Diagnostics tab is unavailable by default. This is an add-on feature available at an additional cost. Please contact your Account Manager for additional information if you are interested in learning more.
The Multi Operating Authority is a hierarchy structure offering the ability to manage multiple Carriers, Drivers, Home Bases and Assets. For example, a driver account assigned to an MOA account, can operate under any Carrier belonging to that MOA account and choose any assets as well under that MOA account.
Once you have selected an Multi Operating Authority by clicking Multi Operating Authority and selecting the applicable carrier, available actions include:
View Details
Drivers
Home Bases
Assets
Notifications
Managing Carrier Details
To manage carrier details:
In eDash, click the Manage tab.
Select the appropriate company name from the dropdown list/
Under actions, select one of the following options:
Details ()
Drivers ()
Home Bases ()
Assets ()
Notifications ()
Editing Carrier Details
To edit carrier details:
Click the Details () icon.
The carrier window will appear, displaying the following editable options:
Carrier Name
Carrier Address
Carrier Country
Time Zone
Units
Support Username
Support Password (this field is not editable)
Confirm Password (this field is not editable)
API Key
Addtional checkboxes
Once you've made your edits, click Save, then Close
Editing Drivers
To edit drivers:
Click the Drivers () icon.
A list of drivers will appear.
In the Drivers - Active column, click the checkbox to activate and deactivate drivers.
In the Drivers - Actions column, click Driver Details to edit driver information, including:
(First) Name
Last Name
Username (this field is not editable)
Password (this field is not editable)
Confirmation (this field is not editable)
Home Base: Select a headquarters for your driver in the dropdown menu
Ruleset*
24-Period Starting Time
Driver specific checkboxes, including Active, Personal Use, Yard Move, and Exemption.
Units
Registration State
License Number
DVIR and Exemption checkboxes, including DVIR Wifi Only, Allow to use Exemption, Allow to take DVIR photo
Available exemptions:
No logs for Agricultural Operations - 395.1(k)
Driver-salesperson whose total driving time does not exceed 40 hours in any period of 7 consecutive days - 395.1(c)
Relief from All Driving Rules for Emergency Conditions - 395.1(b)(2)
No Logs for Construction Equipment operating within 50-mile radius - 221.025 (8)
No Logs for Non-Commercial Motor Vehicle
No Logs for CDL short-haul Drivers operating within 150 air miles (14 hour shift) - 395.1(e)(1)
No Logs for short-haul Asphalt or Ready-Mixed Concrete Drivers operating within 100 air miles
395(e)(1) or Non-CDL drivers operating within 150 air miles 395(e)(2)
Relief from Driving rules for State of Emergency - 390.23
Relief from All Driving Rules for Utility Service Vehicles - 395.1(n)
Custom reason
Once you've made your edits, click Save, then Close
Managing Home Bases
To manage home bases:
Click the Home Bases () icon.
To create a new base, click New in the right corner of the Home Bases tab.
The Home Base window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the following fields:
Location Name
Address
Latitude
Longitude
Time Zone
Once entered, click Save, then Close.
In the Home Bases - Actions column, click the Details icon to edit home base information.
In the same column, click the Driver Assignment icon to assign specific drivers to the home base location.
Managing Assets
To manage assets:
Click the Assets () icon.
To add a new asset, click New in the right corner of the Assets tab.
The Asset window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the following fields:
Asset Type
Fuel Type Primary
Number
Make
VIN (Optional for trailers only)
Model
Plate (Optional for tractors and trailers only)
Year
Registration State
Type
Body Class
GVWR
Description (Optional)
ECM Identifier (Only required if Force Asset or ECM-Device are selected)
Addtional ECM Identifier (Optional)
Once complete, click Save, then Close
In the Assets - Actions column, click the details icon to edit asset information.
Managing Notification Settings
To manage notifications:
Click the Notifications () icon.
To set a new notification, click New in the top right corner of the Notification tab.
The Notification window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the following fields:
Home Base: Select a place of business in the dropdown menu.
Name: Enter a name/description for the notification.
Type: Select the notification type from the drop down menu.
Emails: Enter the emails of the recipients you would like to send the notification to. (Separate emails by comma)
Drivers: Select the drivers who will receive the notification.
Once complete, click Save, then Close
[post_title] => Managing Carrier Details & Settings
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-carrier-details-settings
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-07-28 16:23:50
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-07-28 23:23:50
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26486
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26501
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:35:01
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:35:01
[post_content] => The Shipments feature allows dispatch or other internal or administrative users to schedule estimated delivery or pickups for their drivers. When shipments are scheduled and assigned to a driver, the driver is notified and can view all details of the trip, including scheduled deliveries and pickups. A Shipments report is also available to list previously scheduled shipments and their details.
Viewing Scheduled Shipments
To view scheduled shipments:
In eDash, click the Shipments tab.
Select the appropriate company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the appropriate driver from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date range you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
Creating New Shipments
To create a new shipment:
In the Shipments tab, click New.
The Shipment Details window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the following required fields:
Estimated Pickup (Date)
Estimated Delivery (Date)
Driver
From here, all additional fields are optional.
Once complete, click Save.
[post_title] => Managing Shipments
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-shipments
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:35:01
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:35:01
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26501
[menu_order] => 11
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26477
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 08:42:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 15:42:40
[post_content] => The Unidentified Logs tab provides logs of drive times that are not associated with or captured by a specific driver. This tab allows you to assign these drive times and trips to the correct driver.
To view unidentified logs:
In eDash, click the Unidentified Logs tab.
Select your company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the status (Active, Inactive or All) from the Status dropdown list.
Select the appropriate vehicles, or select All, from the Vehicle dropdown list.
Select the date you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
The unidentifed log results will display the following information:
Timestamps
Event Status
Odometer
Miles
Status
Remarks
If the unidentified log was captured by the driver, the status will say Assumed.
If the unidentified log was not captured by a driver, the status will say Active and will need to be accepted by the responsible driver.
Be sure to notify the appropriate driver associated with the vehicle and time of the unidentified log.
Once the driver assumes responsibility for the unidentified log, the log will be added to their log book, and the status will be updated to Assumed.
[post_title] => Managing Unidentified Logs
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-unidentified-logs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-05-10 12:19:59
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-05-10 19:19:59
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26477
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[8] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27289
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-08-18 08:20:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-08-18 15:20:50
[post_content] => You can add, edit, and delete roles, users, and Multi Operating Authorities via the Administration menu in the Admin Portal.
Managing Roles
From the Roles tab of the ELD Complete Admin Portal, you can view, search, add, edit and delete roles.
Adding Roles
You can add a role with selected permissions.
How to add a role:
From the Roles tab, click +New.
The Add Role form appears.
Use the Carrier dropdown to select a carrier.
In the Name field, enter a name for the role.
In the Permission List section, use the checkboxes to select the permissions for the role.
Click Save.
The new role is added to the list of roles.
Editing a Role
You can make changes to a role using the Edit button.
How to edit a role:
From the Roles tab, locate the role you would like to edit and click Edit Role ().
Make your edits to either the role name or the selected permissions.
You cannot edit the selected carrier for the role.
Click Save.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm your changes have been saved successfully.
Deleting a Role
You can delete a role using the Delete Role button.
From the Roles tab, locate the role you would like to edit and click Delete Role ().
The Please Confirm pop-up appears asking: "Are you sure you want to delete the role?"
Click OK.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the role has been deleted successfully.
Managing Users
From the Users tab of the ELD Complete Admin Portal, you can view, search, filter (by carrier and/or MOA), add, edit and delete users.
You can easily search or filter the users listed on this tab by using the search field and/or the Carrier and/or MOA drop-down filters.
Adding a User
How to add a user:
From the Users tab, click +New.
The Add User form appears.
Click appropriate radio button for user option: Reseller User, Carrier User, App Support.
The App Support user can only work in the App to configure the ELD. This user can be created by any user who has access to the web administration. User type available for App Support are MOA or Carrier, and in both cases, the user can be limited by home bases or given access to all home bases.
Complete the form (* denotes required field).
The available/required fields vary depending on which user option is selected.
Click Save.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the user has been added successfully.The newly created user appears in the list of users.
Editing a User
How to edit a user:
From the Users tab, locate the user you would like to edit and click Edit User ().
The Edit User pop-up appears.
Make your edits to the available fields as needed and click Save.
You cannot edit the username at this time.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the user has been edited successfully.
Deleting a User
How to delete a user:
From the Users tab, locate the user you would like to delete and click Delete Role ().
The Please Confirm pop-up appears asking: "Are you sure you want to delete the user?"
Click OK.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the user has been deleted successfully.
Managing Multi Operating Authorities
From the MOA (Multi Operating Authority) tab of the ELD Complete Admin Portal, you can view, search, add, edit and delete an MOA.
MOAs are listed by name and number of carriers. Use the search field to easily locate an MOA from the list.
Adding an MOA
How to add an MOA:
From the MOA tab, click +New.
The Add MOA form appears.
Enter a name.
You can add carriers to the MOA from the Manage tab.
Click Save.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the MOA has been added successfully.
Editing an MOA
How to edit an MOA:
From the MOA tab, locate the user you would like to edit and click Edit MOA ().
The Edit Multi Operating Authority form appears.
Edit the name.
You can only edit the name of the MOA here. To make other changes, use the Manage tab.
Click Save.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the MOA has been edited successfully.
Deleting an MOA
How to delete an MOA:
From the MOA tab, locate the user you would like to delete and click Delete MOA ().
You cannot delete an MOA that is in use.
[post_title] => Role & User Administration
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => role-user-administration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-08-18 08:20:50
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-08-18 15:20:50
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27289
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26507
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:44:48
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:44:48
[post_content] => Each of the available tabs in the Portal offers the ability to run and print reports.
Running Reports
To run reports in ELD Complete:
Select the tab or feature you want to work with.
Select the driver or vehicle depending on the feature you're working with
Enter all details - company, driver name, activity, and/or date.
Click the Execute link to run the report.
The report results will appear on the same screen.
Available Report
Odometer Jump Report
This report allows carriers to obtain a list of events in which odometer value has jumped. The report shows driver, status, location, odometer value, and date/time stamp data before the odometer jump and after the odometer jump. You can sort the report using the sort feature for each column to sort in ascending or descending order.
By default, the “Include Missing Values” option is unchecked. Once that option is selected, the scenario with zero Odometer value will be added to the report.
[post_title] => Running Reports
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-reports
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-07-26 08:12:27
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-07-26 15:12:27
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26507
[menu_order] => 13
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[10] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26504
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:37:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:37:40
[post_content] => The Driver Duty report tab allows you to run a report that lists how long a driver was in each duty status within a specific date range.
To view a driver duty report:
In eDash, click the Driver Duty Report tab.
Select the appropriate company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the appropriate driver from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date range you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
The Driver Duty Report displays the following information:
Driver
Home Base
Off Duty (Total in hh/mm)
Sleeper Berth (Total in hh/mm)
Driving (Total in hh/mm)
On Duty (Total in hh/mm)
Personal Use (Total in hh/mm)
If you would like to export the report to .xls format, click the .xsl icon.
The exported report is downloaded as a .xls file.
[post_title] => Running the Driver Duty Report
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-the-driver-duty-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:37:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:37:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26504
[menu_order] => 12
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[11] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26498
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:32:30
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:32:30
[post_content] => The FMCSA Records report provides a list of all records that have been sent to the FMCSA upon request. The records that can be requested include driver rides and ECM data. ELD Complete keeps a record of the report types and dates sent to FMCSA.
To run the FMCSA Records report:
In eDash, click the FMCSA Records tab
Select the appropriate company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the appropriate driver or all drivers from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date range you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
[post_title] => Running the FMCSA Records Report
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-the-fmcsa-records-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:32:30
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:32:30
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26498
[menu_order] => 10
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[12] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27538
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-06-23 08:59:12
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-06-23 15:59:12
[post_content] => If you are a customer who requires an HOS/ELD solution and you are interested in our ELD Complete offering, please use the steps below to begin your enrollment.
Beginning the Process
Let's get you on your way to receiving the benefits of ELD Complete with the below initial steps.
How to sign up for ELD Complete:
Contact your Customer Success Representative to sign up for the ELD Complete Product.
Sign the estimate to begin your ELD Complete service.
Once your estimate has been signed, you will receive an email detailing how to complete your ELD account setup and your credentials to log in to ELD Complete.
[post_title] => Signing Up for ELD Complete
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => signing-up-for-eld-complete
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-01-24 12:46:33
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-01-24 19:46:33
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27538
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[13] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 32977
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2025-08-08 11:23:06
[post_date_gmt] => 2025-08-08 18:23:06
[post_content] =>
Use the following instructions to switch a tablet from a wired (serial) connection to a Bluetooth connection for a Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) option.
Note: The tablet or mobile device must have access to the Google Play Store or Apple App Store to download the application. If you have already accessed the stores and installed the ELD Complete app, you may proceed to Step 3.
Confirm the tablet or mobile device is compatible with Google Play or App Store (IOS/Apple).
On the device, navigate to Settings > General > About.
Locate the device's Model Name and Software Version.
Cross-reference the Model Name and Software Version against the list of supported devices provided on the Official Apple Support site.
If the device appears in the list, it is compatible with the App Store (iOS).
Download the ELD Complete app from the Google Play or Apple Store (depending on your device's compatibility).
Obtain your GPS tracking device's serial number and be ready to provide it while contacting GPS Insight Support in the next step.
Contact GPS Insight Support and provide your GPS tracking device's serial number to confirm that the correct device(s) is/are switched to Bluetooth mode. Note: The Messaging app on a serial tablet can provide the device's serial number.
Start the vehicle, ignition ON status, to ensure the GPS device is awake and broadcasting a Bluetooth signal.
Connect the BYOD device to the ELD Complete solution using the reference materials listed below:
[post_title] => Switching from Serial to Bluetooth (BYOD)
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => switching-from-serial-to-bluetooth-byod
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-08-21 12:43:07
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-08-21 19:43:07
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=32977
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[14] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26483
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:09:42
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:09:42
[post_content] => The Dashboard tab provides an overview of compliance and HOS details and can be filtered by carrier.
Viewing Compliance Details
To view Compliance details:
In eDash, click the Dashboard tab then Compliance.
Select the carrier from the dropdown menu, then click Execute.
In-transit Shipment
ELD Compliance
Unassigned Driving
Violations
Hours of Service Compliance
Roadside Vehicle Inspections (DVIR)
Driver Certified Records
Viewing HOS Options
Hours of Service options:
In eDash, click the Dashboard tab then Hours of Service.
Select the appropriate company in the Carrier field.
Select a specific driver or All (to view all drivers) in the Drivers field.
Once complete, click Execute.
The results will display the following information:
Driver
Home Base
Ruleset
Driving Hours
OnDuty Hours
Cycle OnDuty
Next 30 Minutes Break
Current Status
Last Position
Last Update
If all entries are green, the driver is in good standing and in their appropriate worktime window.
If an entry is yellow, the driver is within one hour of going over their allotted time.
If an entry is red, the driver is in compliance error and needs to pull over as soon as possible.
[post_title] => Using the Dashboard
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-dashboard
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:09:42
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:09:42
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26483
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[15] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26495
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:30:28
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:30:28
[post_content] => The IFTA tab allows you to run IFTA reports for each vehicle in your organization. This report helps you keep track of miles traveled and fuel purchased in each state. This is helpful for companies that file quarterly IFTA or fuel tax reports. These reports are run by year, quarter and month.
To view IFTA reports:
In eDash, click the IFTA tab.
Select the appropriate year, quarter or month from the appropriate dropdown lists.
Select the region from the dropdown list.
Select the carrier from the dropdown list.
Select the appropriate vehicle from the dropdown list.
Once complete, click Execute.
The report will appear with the following information:
Jurisdiction
Total Miles
Taxable Miles
MPG
Taxable Gallons
Tax Paid Gallons
Net Taxable Gallons
Tax Rate
Tax (Credit) Due
You can make edits and recalculate the report where necessary.
Click the Download link at the bottom of the report to download and save for later use.
When a fuel receipt is added, it automatically becomes an adjustment in IFTA.
Select your company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the status (Active, Inactive or All) from the Status dropdown list.
Select the appropriate drivers from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
The HOS Violation Report will appear showing violations from all selected drivers.
Each violation includes the driver's name, user name, date of violation, and the violation type.
This report can be exported via Excel, PDF, or Word. Simply click the save button at the top of the report and choose your export option.
[post_title] => Viewing Violations
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => viewing-violations
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:20:19
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:20:19
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26489
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 20
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27543
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-06-29 12:05:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-06-29 19:05:07
[post_content] => You are billed for all Tractors (not Trailers) marked "Active" in your ELD Complete account. To help you avoid being charged twice for the same asset, we are providing the following instructions to deactivate duplicate Tractors. As long as duplicate Tractors are deactivated by midnight the day before the last day of the month, you will not be billed for the duplicate Tractors.
You are not charged for duplicate active Trailers.
How does this occur?
Your account may have duplicate Tractors as a result of the following scenarios:
The same Tractor was listed more than once on an uploaded spreadsheet.*
Admins added the same Tractor to the account more than once.*
Drivers added the same Tractor via tablet.*
A Tractor is added with the same Number or VIN but the selected Home Base is different.
These scenarios were possible prior to an update to the system which now displays an error message if the same VIN or Number is used to add a Tractor.
Removing Duplicate Tractors
Now that we have an idea of how a duplicate Tractor entry could have occurred, let's remedy the situation by removing those duplicates. Please use the following instructions to remove duplicate Tractors by deactivation.
How to deactivate a duplicate tractor:
Login to your ELD Complete account and click Manage.
The Manage page appears displaying your Carriers.
Use the drop-down under Name to select the applicable Carrier by name, then click Assets () under Actions.
The Assets section appears displaying a list of your Tractors and Trailers.
Use the sort function in the Number column to sort your assets by number.
The list is sorted by number.
Review your asset list and look for any duplicate numbers. For any duplicates that you find, click the corresponding Details icon ().
The Assets pop-up appears.
Uncheck the Active checkbox by clicking the checkbox.
You may need to scroll down to locate the checkbox.
The checkbox appears empty.
Click Save.
The Assets list is displayed and the checkbox under the Active column for the entry row is empty.
To ensure that you have deactivated all Tractor duplicates for your account, please use the sort function for the VIN column and follow Steps #4-#6.
This process does not need to be performed for Trailers as you are not charged for active Trailers on your account.
The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle.
We recommend keeping a sticker, or card, in the vehicle with the serial number of the installed GPS device for easy reference during future driver assignments.
Log in to the ELD Complete application using valid credentials.
Select Tractor and tap Save.
Enter dash odometer values and tap Save.
Tap the device, then tap Continue.
Serial numbers are unique to each truck, please contact your Administrator to confirm your truck's serial number.
Ensure all diagnostics pass with values shown in green (see example below), then tap Continue.
You are ready to drive.
Additional Resources
[toggles]
[toggle title="Disconnecting Bluetooth Vehicle Connection" class="in"]
Tap on the hamburger menu from the top-left corner of the application, then tap Scan Devices.
From the ECM-Linked Devices screen, tap Scan Devices.
The Connected status (in green) is no longer shown, tap Continue.
The screen navigates to the Diagnostic page. All values from this page will be shown in red, which confirms the Bluetooth connection has been disabled.
You can now log out and leave the Bluetooth connection available to the vehicle for the next driver.
[/toggle]
[toggle title="Connecting to Bluetooth While Logged In"]
Tap on the hamburger menu from the top-left corner of the application, then tap Scan Devices.
Tap on the applicable device, then tap Continue.
Ensure all diagnostics pass (values are shown in green), then tap Continue.
The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle.
Login Notes
The login name and password are for the specific driver’s use only and must not be shared with any other person, and cannot be duplicated.
A driver can only be logged in to one ELD at a time. In order for the driver to log in on a different mobile device, the driver must change to off-duty status and log out from the previous device.
If a driver is still logged into an ELD, but the device ceased to function or gets lost, the driver must call the home base carrier and ask for his login name to be unlocked. The unlock process will change the driver’s status to off-duty at the time the driver solicited the login unlock.
Selecting a Vehicle Profile (Assets)
To select an asset:
Log in using your username and password.
Tap Select Tractor.
Search Tractor in asset listing or enter the Trailer name in the Search bar, tap the asset to select it, then tap the checkmark icon (top-right corner).
Once you select a tractor from the downloaded list, the ELD will display the VIN number, license plate, and registration state on the list.
Enter the asset's odometer in the "Odometer information" field and tap Save.
Tap Scan.
Select the device and tap Continue.
Note: If the driver scans for a device and doesn’t find one, there are a couple of possible reasons:
Another Driver is Still Connected: Another nearby driver may still have the device connected in their app. If that’s the case, the device won’t appear in the scan results for others. Incorrect ELD Script Installed: The device may have the wrong ELD script loaded. In this case, the driver should contact Support for assistance. Another driver is nearby and still has this device connected in their app, as you won't be able to see the device.
The Diagnostic screen appears.
Note: If the Diagnostics Screen looks like the example below, please contact Support immediately.
If all data points are green in the diagnostic, tap Continue.
You are ready to drive.
To disconnect from the device, rescan for devices by performing Step #5 above, and instead of selecting a device from the list, tap Continue.
Rescanning Bluetooth Connection
A Bluetooth icon and a truck icon in red on the ELD main screen indicate the application has lost Bluetooth connection.
Tap the Hamburger Menu (top-left).
Tap Scan Devices.
Tap Scan.
Select the device and tap Continue. Note: Serial numbers are unique to each truck, please contact your Administrator to confirm your truck’s serial number.
Note: If the driver scans for a device and doesn’t find one, there are a couple of possible reasons:
Another Driver is Still Connected: Another nearby driver may still have the device connected in their app. If that’s the case, the device won’t appear in the scan results for others. Incorrect ELD Script Installed: The device may have the wrong ELD script loaded. In this case, the driver should contact Support for assistance. Another driver is nearby and still has this device connected in their app, as you won't be able to see the device.
If all data points are green in the diagnostic, tap Continue.
Switching Vehicles
To connect to the new unit, follow the instructions below.
Tap the Hamburger menu.
Tap Vehicle Profile.
Tap Select Tractor.
Search Tractor in asset listing or enter the Trailer name in the Search bar, tap the asset to select it, then tap the checkmark icon (top-right corner).
Enter the asset's odometer in the "Odometer information" field and tap Save.
Tap OK on the pop-up stating the vehicle profile was saved.
Tap the Hamburger menu (top-left).
Tap Scan Devices.
Tap Scan.
Select the device and tap Continue. Note: Serial numbers are unique to each truck, please contact your Administrator to confirm your truck’s serial number.
Note: If the driver scans for a device and doesn’t find one, there are a couple of possible reasons:
Another Driver is Still Connected: Another nearby driver may still have the device connected in their app. If that’s the case, the device won’t appear in the scan results for others. Incorrect ELD Script Installed: The device may have the wrong ELD script loaded. In this case, the driver should contact Support for assistance. Another driver is nearby and still has this device connected in their app, as you won't be able to see the device.
If all data points are green in the diagnostic, tap Continue.
From the Home Screen, tap the Inspections Report button.
Tap on the + button (bottom of the screen).
Tap the vehicle inspection regulation region from the options shown, then tap OK.
Additional options are available for Quebec compliance: heavy vehicle, bus, and motor coach.
A New Inspection Form appears.
Inspect the tractor/trailer, tap the checkbox next to any defective item you may have found, and enter remarks for the checked items then tap OK.
Tap NEXT.
We have separated items under the C-TPAT 17 agreement in order to help you reduce border delays (if applicable) and minimize risks.
Enter a remark and indicate if defects were corrected or not.
Sign the inspection report. If you have not added a signature, tap the pencil icon at the bottom right corner of the screen.
Sign on the line above "Put your signature here" and tap Save & Finish.
If defects were found and corrected, you can ask the mechanic for a signature. There is a third, optional signature that some carriers require before a vehicle leaves the yard.
Tap Upload, then OK.
The DVIR is submitted.
[post_title] => Driver Vehicle Inspection Reports (DVIR)
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driver-vehicle-inspection-reports-dvir
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2022-11-18 13:07:01
[post_modified_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:07:01
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25906
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24409
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-18 13:03:26
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:03:26
[post_content] => ELD Complete is an Hours of Services solution that is fully FMCSA-certified and provides both Hours of Service (HOS) and DVIR capabilities, in addition to data for IFTA reporting.
The following guide consists of the below articles and provides a high-level overview of the features provided in the GPS Insight ELD Complete app.
The following accounts are available in ELD Complete:
Driver: Unique, per-driver account used by drivers' Hours of Service and ELD regulations. This account records duty status changes (RODS) and allows the export of driver’s records for printout, display, and agent output file generation.
Support: Account used by the carrier and ELD manufacturer to set up, configure, update and troubleshoot the ELD. No duty status changes are recorded with this account and no access to the driver’s record of duty status changes is permitted under the support account.
Non-authenticated: All operation of a commercial motor vehicle (CMV) is recorded under this account (a.k.a Unidentified Driver) if no driver has logged into the ELD. Non-authenticated records (vehicle movement and on-duty time) are stored on the ELD as well as the carrier and should be assumed by a driver account.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Diagnostic,Resolution
Power Data/Compliance Diagnostic,ECM parameters must be available within 1 minute of powering the vehicle’s engine on. Make sure you are connected to the ECM device. On the menu\, go to Scan Devices and select your ECM device. Make sure all engine parameters pass the diagnostics (all green).
Engine Synchronization Data Diagnostic,Not all ECM parameters are available when the ELD records an event (e.g.\, duty status change). Make sure you are connected to the ECM device. On the menu\, go to Scan Devices and select your ECM device. Make sure the diagnostic passes all engine parameters (all green).
Missing Required Data Elements Data Diagnostic (e.g.\, other required data such as location\, coordinates unavailable when recording an event),Make sure the GPS module is enabled on your ELD
Data Transfer Data Diagnostic,ELD must verify this functionality at least once every 7 days. Verify that you have an active cellular or wifi connection all the time. Confirm that your logs are always updated on the ELD portal.
Unidentified Driving Records Data Diagnostic (more than 30 minutes of driving without a driver logged on the ELD),You are not logged on the ELD and the vehicle moves for an extended period. Please log in and select your Driving time.
[/et]
Malfunctions
Most malfunctions relate to a Diagnostic; a malfunction is generated when the same diagnostic occurs for at least 30 minutes in the last 24 hours.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Malfunction,Description
P- Power Compliance,Related to diagnostic 1
E- Engine Synchronization Compliance,Related to diagnostic 2. For instance\, multiple periods of no ECM data that when added together are more than 30 minutes in the last 24 hours.
T- Timing Compliance,The time on the ELD compared to an external time source are different.~~~~Resolution: Make sure the date and time on your mobile device is properly set. DO NOT (manually) change the date or the time on your ELD.
L- Positioning Compliance,No location available. Related to diagnostic 1.
R- Data Recording Compliance,Monitor storage capability to store records.~~~~Resolution: Make sure you have sufficient internal storage on your ELD. Delete files if necessary.
S- Data Transfer Compliance, ELD records cannot be uploaded.~~~~Resolution: Most likely there is no connection to internet access. Restart the ELD (if needed) and confirm you can reconnect to the network.
[/et]
[post_title] => ELD Diagnostics & Malfunctions
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => eld-diagnostics-malfunctions
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2022-11-18 13:11:23
[post_modified_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:11:23
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25896
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26007
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-18 13:04:56
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:04:56
[post_content] => Drivers will log into ELD Complete using their driver credentials at the beginning of their shift.
BYOD users must connect to the correct device before logging in.
Logging In
Each driver using the system will have a unique login ID, which is linked to the driver's personal information (e.g. driver’s license, etc.).
How to log in:
On the Login screen, enter your username and password and tap Login.
Login Notes
The login name and password are for the specific driver’s use only and must not be shared with any other person and cannot be duplicated.
If the driver changes carriers and is now driving for a different carrier, the login name, under certain circumstances, will remain the same and it is the driver’s obligation to ask the home base carrier to update the carrier name and DOT number on the system.
The driver is restricted to being logged on to only one ELD at any time. In order for the driver to log in on to a different mobile device, the driver must change to off-duty status and log out from the previous device.
In the event, that a driver is still logged on an ELD, but the device ceased to function or gets lost, the driver must call the home base carrier and ask for his login name to be unlocked. The unlock process will change the driver’s status to off-duty at the time the driver solicited the login unlock.
Selecting a Vehicle Profile (Assets)
To select an asset:
Tap Select Tractor or Select Trailer.
Select or search for an existing asset from the asset list.
Once you select a tractor or trailer from the downloaded list, the ELD will display the VIN number, license plate, and registration state on the list.
Tap Save.
Enter your vehicle’s dashboard odometer value (twice) in order for the ELD to adjust discrepancies between the dashboard and engine odometer.
The Diagnostic Screen appears.
If the Diagnostics Screen looks like the below example, please contact Support immediately.
Scroll down on the Diagnostics screen and tap Run Diagnostic then tap Continue.
Tap OK to the Driver Configuration Change pop-up.
Select an option from the Warning pop-up.
The Home Screen appears.
Before driver logs can be exported and shared with an authorized agent, the driver must update their vehicle information with the correct asset(s).
Assumption of Unidentified Logs
During the login process, you will be prompted to review the existing unidentified logs, if applicable.
From the prompt, if the unidentified logs do not belong to you, tap SKIP.
If some, or all, unidentified logs belong to you select REVIEW LOGS.
Select the checkbox associated to the logs that belong to you and assume the logs by tapping ASSUME UNIDENTIFIED LOGS.
Motor Carrier Suggestions
For time to time, the carrier may suggest some changes to driver logs. Drivers are responsible for assuming or rejecting those suggestions.
Carrier-proposed edits will show on your tablet at different times. They will show during login and logout process and they will also be shown as a new ELD message on the main screen
Please make sure:
You are not driving while attending to carrier-proposed log edits.
You re-certify your ELD records if a carrier-proposed log edit is assumed.
To accept or reject carrier-proposed log changes:
Open the carrier-proposed edit message and select the logs you want to accept OR reject.
Select REJECT or ACCEPT to perform the desired action.
The action selected will be applied to the selected logs.
ELD General Messages and Notifications
Some notifications are shown while logging in to the tablet. Some of them are errors, warnings, or specific information regarding an operational change. These are the most common notifications:
During Log In
You are logged on a different device: A driver can only use credentials to log in to one ELD. The same driver account cannot be used on multiple ELDs. If you lost your ELD while authenticated, contact your company and ask them to Unlock your account. You will be able to log in after your account is unlocked.
Wrong authentication: Make sure your Username and Password are correct. Also, make sure you have internet access and a good upload/download speed.
Downloading error: Issue download shipments, events, violations, etc.,. Make sure you have internet access and good upload/download speed.
[post_title] => Logging in to the Tablet
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => logging-in-to-the-tablet
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-09-06 13:17:00
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-09-06 20:17:00
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26007
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25944
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-18 13:08:25
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:08:25
[post_content] => From the tablet, you can add, edit, delete, certify, and view driver logs from the Logbook.
Adding, Deleting and Editing Logs
Getting to the Logbook
Navigating to the Logbook:
From the Home Screen, tap the Menu List icon.
The Menu List expands.
Tap Logbook.
The Logbook opens to the log from the current date.
Use the back and forward arrows around the date to navigate to the logbook for the day you would like to view and/or edit.
Tap the + icon (bottom right corner of screen) to expand the action buttons.
Use applicable action buttons to make necessary changes then tap Save & Finish.
Driving time can only be increased on automatically recorded records and deleted, reduced or increased on manually recorded records.
Getting to Logs
Navigating to Logs:
From the Home Screen, tap the Menu List icon.
The Menu List expands.
Tap Logbook.
The Logbook opens to the log from the current date.
Tap Logs to view a list of log records.
Use the editing icons for the date you would like to edit or to add a new log tap +.
Make the necessary changes, tap on the log status, start/end dates, start/end times, and location to make your changes.
When adjusting times, please select the hour/minute and ensure that you indicate AM or PM.
Enter a remark explaining the reason of the change (mandatory) and then tap Confirm Changes.
If you have accidentally recorded driving time, add the following remark: "System or User Error" to the status to avoid having the driving time counted against the Driving windows for the day.
Daily ON-DUTY, cycle ON-DUTY and possible violations will be calculated according to the new record change.
Certifying Records
You can certify logs from the tablet.
Certifying Logs
You can certify your logs at any time. At the end of each 24-hour period, the tablet automatically prompts the driver to certify logs for the last 24 hours period. Additionally, during login and logout, the driver is prompted to certify logs.
How to certify logs:
From the Home Screen, tap the Menu List icon.
The Menu List expands.
Tap Certify Records.
Select the day or days you would like to certify.
Select the 24-hour period you want to certify then tap CERTIFY.
Agree to the statement prompt.
The log is certified.
[post_title] => Managing Driver Logs
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-driver-logs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-05-11 07:08:25
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-05-11 14:08:25
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25944
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25966
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-18 13:05:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:05:50
[post_content] => During your shift, you will need to perform certain actions on the tablet during the operation of your asset.
Changing Duty Status
How to change status:
From the Home Screen, tap on the desired duty status button.
The Remark pop-up appears, check a box (if applicable) and/or enter your own remark.
If checking the box corresponding to "Fueling," enter the number of gallons fueled into the vehicle. This is required for accurate IFTA reporting.
Tap OK to continue.
Your status is changed.
Viewing Time Remaining
The three donuts constantly show the actual time spent on each status (driving, ON- Duty and cycle ON-Duty). The corresponding donut will turn yellow or red to indicate proximity to the time limit.
Recap
Tap the ON-Cycle (see recap) donut to see how much ON-Duty time will be removed once the 7th or 14th day is reached. The recap summary message also tells you the day and time when the next available recap will take place.
This information is valuable as you can use it to plan your weekly cycle and be aware of how much time you will get back each day, after the 7th or 14th day (according to the currently selected ruleset).
Possible Violations
You can view possible violations from the tablet.
How to view violations:
From the Home Screen, tap the Menu List icon.
The Menu List options appear.
Tap Violations.
A list of violations (if applicable) is shown.
A notification message displays on the Home Screen, if triggered, one hour before the possible violation and another one thirty minutes before the next possible violation. Only new violations triggered by a new status change send a notification and the notification is only sent once.
Co-Driver Operation (Authentication & Remarks)
You can add a co-driver during your shift from the tablet.
How to add a co-driver:
From the Home Screen, tap the current driver's name or you can use the Menu List to select the Co-Driver Login option.
The Co-driver login screen appears.
The co-driver enters their username and password credentials, then taps Login.
If applicable, Unidentified Logs are displayed.
Tap Review Logs to manage the unidentified logs.
Select Unidentified Log events that you want to accept and then tap Assume (at the top of the screen).
Roadside Inspection Mode
If you are stopped on the road by an officer, enter Roadside Inspection Mode to show the officer the required data and export the Printout/Display document and ELD data file.
Completing a Roadside Inspection:
From the Home Screen, tap the Roadside Inspection Mode button.
The DOT Inspection screen appears.
Tap either Print-Display Logs or Export ELD Output File per the officer's direction.
If you have selected Print-Display Logs, tap PDF view or Email Share.
If PDF view is selected, the PDF displays directly on the tablet.
If you have selected Export ELD Output File, select the Data Transfer Mechanism from the options shown, enter a file comment, and then tap Export.
If working with sourced tablet, Local or USB is not supported.
FMCSA web service: This option securely communicates to FMCSA's end-point ad obtains submission ID.
Enter your password then tap OK.
The file is sent.
ELD General Messages and Notifications
Some notifications are shown while operating the ELD. Some of them are errors, warnings, or specific information regarding an operational change. These are the most common notifications:
During Operation
Unidentified Driving: Once the asset begins moving, a Driving event is created. The tablet provides a visual and audible notification instructing the driver to stop and authenticate on the tablet.
The driver could continue to the destination, authenticate later on and review/accept unidentified events.
Logs Certification: At the beginning of every 24-hour period, the ELD shows a notification to the driver asking to certify the logs for the previous day or past days. You can select not to certify your logs (yet), certify the previous 24-hour period, or all pending logs.
Automatic Driving status with multiple drivers authenticated: If the vehicle moves, there is more than one driver authenticated on the ELD and no driver is on Driving duty status; the ELD shows an audible and visual notification prompting drivers to select the driver currently operating the vehicle.
Carrier-proposed log edits: If the carrier’s back-office personnel propose a change to the driver’s logs, a notification is shown on the ELD. The driver can assume or reject the carrier-proposed edits during login, logout, or by taping on the new message icon.
Per Federal Hours of Service §395, you are allowed to drive to the nearest rest area, drive home, and more. The ELD will prompt you to add a pre-defined remark or type a different reason when changing to Personal Use (PU) during vehicle operation.
Selecting Personal Use (PU) Status:
From the Home Screen, tap Personal.
DUTY status must be in OFF-DUTY.
A warning pop-up appears to confirm you would like to change your status to Personal Use.
Tap OK.
The Remark for Personal Use pop-up appears, check a box (if applicable) or add a customized remark (this duty status must have a remark).
Tap OK to continue.
Your status is changed to Personal Use.
If there is an ignition-off event, you will be prompted to either exit or continue the Personal Use status upon ignition on.
The Log event for Personal Use will show up as a blue dashed line in the off duty portion of the graph.
Yard Move (YM)
The ELD also allows you to drive the vehicle inside a yard. To do so, switch to Yard Move (YM) before putting the vehicle in motion.
Selecting Yard Move (YM) Status:
From the Home Screen, tap Yard Moves.
Duty status must be in ON-DUTY status.
A warning pop-up appears to confirm you would like to change your status to Yard Move.
Tap OK.
The Remark for ON-DUTY pop-up appears, check a box (if applicable) and/or tap OK to continue.
The Remark for YM pop-up appears, check the applicable box or enter a remark on the Other line, then tap OK.
Your status is changed to Yard Moves.
If the vehicle’s speed exceeds 32 km/h you will be automatically switched to Driving duty status.
PU and YM in the Logbook
Personal Use or Yard Move events are shown as a dashed blue line in the logbook graph.
The distance traveled while in PU and/or YM status is included in the daily odometer shown in the Logbook and the Print/Display option of the Portal.
[post_title] => Personal Use and Yard Moves
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => personal-use-and-yard-moves
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-02 09:27:12
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-02 16:27:12
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25928
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 9
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 31514
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-09-23 08:28:13
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-09-23 15:28:13
[post_content] =>
Connecting the Android BYOD to ELD Complete
The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle.
We recommend keeping a sticker, or card, in the vehicle with the serial number of the installed GPS device for easy reference during future driver assignments.
Log in to the ELD Complete application using valid credentials.
Select Tractor and tap Save.
Enter dash odometer values and tap Save.
Tap the device, then tap Continue.
Serial numbers are unique to each truck, please contact your Administrator to confirm your truck's serial number.
Ensure all diagnostics pass with values shown in green (see example below), then tap Continue.
You are ready to drive.
Additional Resources
[toggles]
[toggle title="Disconnecting Bluetooth Vehicle Connection" class="in"]
Tap on the hamburger menu from the top-left corner of the application, then tap Scan Devices.
From the ECM-Linked Devices screen, tap Scan Devices.
The Connected status (in green) is no longer shown, tap Continue.
The screen navigates to the Diagnostic page. All values from this page will be shown in red, which confirms the Bluetooth connection has been disabled.
You can now log out and leave the Bluetooth connection available to the vehicle for the next driver.
[/toggle]
[toggle title="Connecting to Bluetooth While Logged In"]
Tap on the hamburger menu from the top-left corner of the application, then tap Scan Devices.
Tap on the applicable device, then tap Continue.
Ensure all diagnostics pass (values are shown in green), then tap Continue.
The Driver Logs screen shows all information that the USDOT and Transport Canada require for your driver record of duty status. This screen also allows you to view, edit, annotate, print and certify your logs without signing into the ELD tablet.
Viewing Your Driver Logs
To view your Driver Logs:
Hover your mouse over HOS, and click Driver Logs.
You can also click on HOS, then choose Driver Logs from the Driver Logs screen that appears.
Click on the date field, then click a date from the Date menu (or use the Previous and Next Day options to navigate through your available logs).
Under Log Format, click on the radio button next to the log format in which you would like have your log display. Log format options are as follows:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Format Type,Description
Driver Default,Displays your logs in the format chosen for your Driver ID.~~~~ This format is selected by default.US Format,Displays your logs according to the US format.
Canada Format,Displays your logs according to the Canadian format.
[/et]
Click View Logs to load the log for the selected day.
The log is displayed.
Your log report contains the following information:
Date Information
The record date and time zone.
Time zone offset from UTC.
The starting time for the 24-hour period.
Certification Information
If the log is certified: Your name and the date (MM|DD|YY) and time (hh:mm|AM/PM|Time Zone) of certification.
Driver Information
Your name (Last, First).
Your Driver ID.
The multiday basis or cycle you follow.
Multiday basis is shown when logs are viewed in US format; the cycle is shown when logs are viewed in Canada format.
Your driver's license number and issuing state or province.
Your full driver's license number is only visible to you; all other users see only the last 4 digits (e.g., "*******YY27").
Carrier and Home Terminal
The name of your motor carrier.
The USDOT Number of your motor carrier.
Your carrier's main office address.
The name of the home terminal to which you have been assigned on the date of the log.
The address of your home terminal.
Graph Grid
Graph of all active duty status changes for the 24-hour period beginning at 12:00 AM.
Total hours and minutes (hh:mm) in each duty status, shown immediately to the right of the graph.
Vehicles and other Resources
The Commercial motor vehicle (CMV) you used during the 24-hours period beginning at 12:00 AM.
If the log is displayed in Canada format and you have at least one Driving (D) status in a vehicle for the log date shown, the first odometer reading and last odometer reading recorded while you were on duty and driving will be shown.
Total distance driven today (while on duty).
This total does not include any distance traveled while Off Duty, Personal Conveyance (OFF-PC) status or any distance traveled in an inactive duty status.
Co-drivers.
Trailers.
Shipments.
Log Events
Chronological listing of all log events occurring on (or extending into) the date of the log.
Events may be listed that are not part of the current log of record. Use the Record Status column to understand the current status of each event.
Active - This event is part of the current log of record.
Inactive - Changed - This event is no longer part of the current log of record.
Inactive - Requested - This event is a change that has been requested by someone other than you; it will not become part of your log of record unless you accept or reject the change.
Inactive - Rejected - This event is a change that was requested by someone other than you, that you have rejected; it is not part of your log of record.
Managing Log Events
In compliance with USDOT regulations, the HOS application keeps a record of changes made to your log events, including what information was changed, who made the change (you or your fleet administrator), and when the change was made.
In some cases, edits can be avoided. Before you make any change, be sure of the following:
- You have entered any missing data indicated by the electronic logging device (e.g., recording the locations of status changes for which GPS was not available).
- Your most recent records have been sent from the ELD (electronic logging device) to the Portal.
If you have verified the need to modify the active log events, keep these points in mind:
You are required to enter a Reason For Change for every change to a log event. Briefly explain why it is necessary to edit the information currently recorded (e.g., Forgot to sign out). The reason you enter will be shown as an annotation to the event.
You cannot undo a log event once it is Active. If you have entered the wrong information, you may edit the log event in order to correct the error; however, each successive change will be reflected in the log history.
If the change that you are attempting would cause a conflict or loss of data, you may be prompted to confirm the change.
Your Log Changes
When you make a change to your log, the change become effective immediately. For example, when you delete an event, the event is marked as Inactive - Changed.
Log Changes from Other Users
When a user, like your fleet administrator, makes a change to your log, the change is marked as Inactive - Requested until you accept or reject the proposed change.
[notification type="alert-warning"]For AOBRD users: Requested changes that are submitted to a log within 6 days of the current date will be applied automatically the next time you sign into your device. Any changes submitted to a log that is 7 days or older will not be automatically applied and will require you to log in to the Driver Portal to accept or reject any proposed changes.[/notification]
Adding a Log Event
To add a log event:
View the log for the date for which you wish to add the event.
Click New Status Change, or New Exception.
Enter the details for the event. Review all details carefully before saving.
Click Save to add the event and return to the Driver Logs screen.
Annotating a Log Event
To annotate a log event:
In the Log Events table, locate the row containing the event you wish to annotate.
Click the Annotate icon (plus sign) for the event.
Enter the text of the annotation (up to 60 characters).
Click Submit to save the annotation.
Editing a Log Event
Remember the following when editing an event:
If the event you are editing spans multiple days, you must view the first log for which the event is listed in order to select the event.
You can change the start time of an event but not the start date of an event, unless the driver's time zone has changed.
You cannot specify the end date or time of an event. The HOS application calculates the end date and time automatically.
To edit a log event:
In the Log Events table, click the pencil icon or click the link in the Type/Status column for the Status Change, Remark, or Exception that you wish to edit.
A separate page for the corresponding event is displayed.
Change the details for the event and review carefully.
Click Save to save changes and return to the Driver Logs screen.
Accepting/Rejecting a Proposed Edit
To accept or reject a proposed edit:
Locate the proposed edit (shown in red) in your list of Log Edits.
To accept, click the green thumbs-up icon.
The proposed edit is applied to your log and your remaining hours are recalculated accordingly. The original event displays a status of Inactive - Changed. Use the annotation icon (plus sign) to add annotations to the log event, if needed.
To reject, click the red thumbs-down icon.
The proposed edit is updated and displays Inactive-Rejected on your log. Use the annotation icon (plus sign) to add annotations to the log event, if needed.
Deleting a Log Event
To delete a log event:
In the Log Events table, locate the row containing the event you wish to delete.
Click the Delete icon (trash can) for the event.
Enter the reason for deletion. This reason will be recorded as an annotation to the event.
Click Submit to delete the selected event.
To delete multiple log events:
Check the Allow multi-select checkbox.
In the Log Events table, locate the row(s) containing the event(s) you wish to delete.
Check the checkbox to the left of each row.
Click the Delete icon (trash can).
Enter the reason for deletion. This reason will be recorded as an annotation to each selected event.
Click the Submit button to delete the selected events.
If you delete a status change that falls between two other status changes, the prior status will be extended to fill the time. If the prior status was Automatically-recorded Driving (D) time, an On-duty Not Driving (ON) status will be added to fill the gap.
Certifying Logs
You are the only one who can certify your logs. This action can be performed from your ELD (electronic logging device), or from your Driver Portal using the following process.
To certify a log:
Review the uncertified log and click Certify... when you are ready to certify the accuracy and validity of the log's contents.
If there are proposed changes that you have not accepted or rejected, the Certify... button is not shown, and instead you will be prompted to review and accept or reject all changes.
A window prompt appears requesting that you confirm you would like to certify the log for the displayed date.
To confirm, click Agree or click Not Ready to go back to the Driver log.
If you clicked Agree, you are returned to the Driver Log and the Certify button is now replaced with a Certified label.
To certify multiple logs:
If you have been off duty two or more full days in a row, you may certify the Off Duty logs all at one time.
Review the uncertified log for the last date on which you were Off Duty and click Certify... when you are ready to certify the accuracy and validity of the log's contents.
If there are proposed changes that you have not accepted or rejected, the Certify... button is not shown, and instead you will be prompted to review and accept or reject all changes.
A window prompt appears requesting that you confirm you would like to certify the log for the displayed date range.
To confirm, click Agree or click Not Ready to go back to the Driver log.
If you clicked Agree, you are returned to the Driver Log and the Certify button is now replaced with a Certified label.
If edits are made to a driver log after you have certified it, you must review the changes and certify the log again.
[post_title] => Editing, Approving, and Certifying Logs
[post_excerpt] => From the Driver Portal, you can access and perform various actions with your Driver Logs. Use the following information and instructional steps to perform advanced actions with Driver Logs from the Driver Portal.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-approving-and-certifying-logs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-07 14:24:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-07 21:24:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 11429
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=11234
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 1
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 11234
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2018-02-09 15:55:15
[post_date_gmt] => 2018-02-09 22:55:15
[post_content] => From the Driver Portal, you can access and perform various actions with your Driver Logs. Use the following information and instructional steps to perform advanced actions with Driver Logs from the Driver Portal.
Driver Logs
The Driver Logs screen shows all information that the USDOT and Transport Canada require for your driver record of duty status. This screen also allows you to view, edit, annotate, print and certify your logs without signing into the ELD tablet.
Viewing Your Driver Logs
To view your Driver Logs:
Hover your mouse over HOS, and click Driver Logs.
You can also click on HOS, then choose Driver Logs from the Driver Logs screen that appears.
Click on the date field, then click a date from the Date menu (or use the Previous and Next Day options to navigate through your available logs).
Under Log Format, click on the radio button next to the log format in which you would like have your log display. Log format options are as follows:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Format Type,Description
Driver Default,Displays your logs in the format chosen for your Driver ID.~~~~ This format is selected by default.US Format,Displays your logs according to the US format.
Canada Format,Displays your logs according to the Canadian format.
[/et]
Click View Logs to load the log for the selected day.
The log is displayed.
Your log report contains the following information:
Date Information
The record date and time zone.
Time zone offset from UTC.
The starting time for the 24-hour period.
Certification Information
If the log is certified: Your name and the date (MM|DD|YY) and time (hh:mm|AM/PM|Time Zone) of certification.
Driver Information
Your name (Last, First).
Your Driver ID.
The multiday basis or cycle you follow.
Multiday basis is shown when logs are viewed in US format; the cycle is shown when logs are viewed in Canada format.
Your driver's license number and issuing state or province.
Your full driver's license number is only visible to you; all other users see only the last 4 digits (e.g., "*******YY27").
Carrier and Home Terminal
The name of your motor carrier.
The USDOT Number of your motor carrier.
Your carrier's main office address.
The name of the home terminal to which you have been assigned on the date of the log.
The address of your home terminal.
Graph Grid
Graph of all active duty status changes for the 24-hour period beginning at 12:00 AM.
Total hours and minutes (hh:mm) in each duty status, shown immediately to the right of the graph.
Vehicles and other Resources
The Commercial motor vehicle (CMV) you used during the 24-hours period beginning at 12:00 AM.
If the log is displayed in Canada format and you have at least one Driving (D) status in a vehicle for the log date shown, the first odometer reading and last odometer reading recorded while you were on duty and driving will be shown.
Total distance driven today (while on duty).
This total does not include any distance traveled while Off Duty, Personal Conveyance (OFF-PC) status or any distance traveled in an inactive duty status.
Co-drivers.
Trailers.
Shipments.
Log Events
Chronological listing of all log events occurring on (or extending into) the date of the log.
Events may be listed that are not part of the current log of record. Use the Record Status column to understand the current status of each event.
Active - This event is part of the current log of record.
Inactive - Changed - This event is no longer part of the current log of record.
Inactive - Requested - This event is a change that has been requested by someone other than you; it will not become part of your log of record unless you accept or reject the change.
Inactive - Rejected - This event is a change that was requested by someone other than you, that you have rejected; it is not part of your log of record.
Managing Log Events
In compliance with USDOT regulations, the HOS application keeps a record of changes made to your log events, including what information was changed, who made the change (you or your fleet administrator), and when the change was made.
In some cases, edits can be avoided. Before you make any change, be sure of the following:
- You have entered any missing data indicated by the electronic logging device (e.g., recording the locations of status changes for which GPS was not available).
- Your most recent records have been sent from the ELD (electronic logging device) to the Portal.
If you have verified the need to modify the active log events, keep these points in mind:
You are required to enter a Reason For Change for every change to a log event. Briefly explain why it is necessary to edit the information currently recorded (e.g., Forgot to sign out). The reason you enter will be shown as an annotation to the event.
You cannot undo a log event once it is Active. If you have entered the wrong information, you may edit the log event in order to correct the error; however, each successive change will be reflected in the log history.
If the change that you are attempting would cause a conflict or loss of data, you may be prompted to confirm the change.
Your Log Changes
When you make a change to your log, the change become effective immediately. For example, when you delete an event, the event is marked as Inactive - Changed.
Log Changes from Other Users
When a user, like your fleet administrator, makes a change to your log, the change is marked as Inactive - Requested until you accept or reject the proposed change.
[notification type="alert-warning"]For AOBRD users: Requested changes that are submitted to a log within 6 days of the current date will be applied automatically the next time you sign into your device. Any changes submitted to a log that is 7 days or older will not be automatically applied and will require you to log in to the Driver Portal to accept or reject any proposed changes.[/notification]
Adding a Log Event
To add a log event:
View the log for the date for which you wish to add the event.
Click New Status Change, or New Exception.
Enter the details for the event. Review all details carefully before saving.
Click Save to add the event and return to the Driver Logs screen.
Annotating a Log Event
To annotate a log event:
In the Log Events table, locate the row containing the event you wish to annotate.
Click the Annotate icon (plus sign) for the event.
Enter the text of the annotation (up to 60 characters).
Click Submit to save the annotation.
Editing a Log Event
Remember the following when editing an event:
If the event you are editing spans multiple days, you must view the first log for which the event is listed in order to select the event.
You can change the start time of an event but not the start date of an event, unless the driver's time zone has changed.
You cannot specify the end date or time of an event. The HOS application calculates the end date and time automatically.
To edit a log event:
In the Log Events table, click the pencil icon or click the link in the Type/Status column for the Status Change, Remark, or Exception that you wish to edit.
A separate page for the corresponding event is displayed.
Change the details for the event and review carefully.
Click Save to save changes and return to the Driver Logs screen.
Accepting/Rejecting a Proposed Edit
To accept or reject a proposed edit:
Locate the proposed edit (shown in red) in your list of Log Edits.
To accept, click the green thumbs-up icon.
The proposed edit is applied to your log and your remaining hours are recalculated accordingly. The original event displays a status of Inactive - Changed. Use the annotation icon (plus sign) to add annotations to the log event, if needed.
To reject, click the red thumbs-down icon.
The proposed edit is updated and displays Inactive-Rejected on your log. Use the annotation icon (plus sign) to add annotations to the log event, if needed.
Deleting a Log Event
To delete a log event:
In the Log Events table, locate the row containing the event you wish to delete.
Click the Delete icon (trash can) for the event.
Enter the reason for deletion. This reason will be recorded as an annotation to the event.
Click Submit to delete the selected event.
To delete multiple log events:
Check the Allow multi-select checkbox.
In the Log Events table, locate the row(s) containing the event(s) you wish to delete.
Check the checkbox to the left of each row.
Click the Delete icon (trash can).
Enter the reason for deletion. This reason will be recorded as an annotation to each selected event.
Click the Submit button to delete the selected events.
If you delete a status change that falls between two other status changes, the prior status will be extended to fill the time. If the prior status was Automatically-recorded Driving (D) time, an On-duty Not Driving (ON) status will be added to fill the gap.
Certifying Logs
You are the only one who can certify your logs. This action can be performed from your ELD (electronic logging device), or from your Driver Portal using the following process.
To certify a log:
Review the uncertified log and click Certify... when you are ready to certify the accuracy and validity of the log's contents.
If there are proposed changes that you have not accepted or rejected, the Certify... button is not shown, and instead you will be prompted to review and accept or reject all changes.
A window prompt appears requesting that you confirm you would like to certify the log for the displayed date.
To confirm, click Agree or click Not Ready to go back to the Driver log.
If you clicked Agree, you are returned to the Driver Log and the Certify button is now replaced with a Certified label.
To certify multiple logs:
If you have been off duty two or more full days in a row, you may certify the Off Duty logs all at one time.
Review the uncertified log for the last date on which you were Off Duty and click Certify... when you are ready to certify the accuracy and validity of the log's contents.
If there are proposed changes that you have not accepted or rejected, the Certify... button is not shown, and instead you will be prompted to review and accept or reject all changes.
A window prompt appears requesting that you confirm you would like to certify the log for the displayed date range.
To confirm, click Agree or click Not Ready to go back to the Driver log.
If you clicked Agree, you are returned to the Driver Log and the Certify button is now replaced with a Certified label.
If edits are made to a driver log after you have certified it, you must review the changes and certify the log again.
[post_title] => Editing, Approving, and Certifying Logs
[post_excerpt] => From the Driver Portal, you can access and perform various actions with your Driver Logs. Use the following information and instructional steps to perform advanced actions with Driver Logs from the Driver Portal.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-approving-and-certifying-logs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-07 14:24:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-07 21:24:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 11429
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=11234
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 1
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => 5ccf17357b2ae67338f1aa3938789a75
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:686b76472e3890ab6927fc18ca082292
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 518
[name] => HOS Driver Reference
[slug] => hos-driver-reference
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 518
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => The reference materials in this section are designed for HOS Drivers using in-cab tablets running ELD software for electronic logging and hours of service compliance.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 1
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 29
[cat_ID] => 518
[category_count] => 1
[category_description] => The reference materials in this section are designed for HOS Drivers using in-cab tablets running ELD software for electronic logging and hours of service compliance.
[cat_name] => HOS Driver Reference
[category_nicename] => hos-driver-reference
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 1
)
)
)
[ELD Complete] => Array
(
[Enterprise] => Array
(
[591] => Array
(
[posts] => WP_Query Object
(
[query] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 591
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 588
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
)
[query_vars] => Array
(
[orderby] => title
[order] => ASC
[post_type] => documentation
[posts_per_page] => 999
[tax_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 591
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 12
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[field] => term_id
[terms] => 588
)
)
[meta_query] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
)
[error] =>
[m] =>
[p] => 0
[post_parent] =>
[subpost] =>
[subpost_id] =>
[attachment] =>
[attachment_id] => 0
[name] =>
[pagename] =>
[page_id] => 0
[second] =>
[minute] =>
[hour] =>
[day] => 0
[monthnum] => 0
[year] => 0
[w] => 0
[category_name] =>
[tag] =>
[cat] =>
[tag_id] =>
[author] =>
[author_name] =>
[feed] =>
[tb] =>
[paged] => 0
[meta_key] =>
[meta_value] =>
[preview] =>
[s] =>
[sentence] =>
[title] =>
[fields] => all
[menu_order] =>
[embed] =>
[category__in] => Array
(
)
[category__not_in] => Array
(
)
[category__and] => Array
(
)
[post__in] => Array
(
)
[post__not_in] => Array
(
[0] => 14750
[1] => 23436
[2] => 27424
[3] => 27817
[4] => 30225
[5] => 31065
[6] => 31175
[7] => 32017
[8] => 32296
[9] => 32565
[10] => 32605
[11] => 32636
[12] => 33723
[13] => 33737
[14] => 33761
[15] => 34344
[16] => 34459
[17] => 34553
[18] => 34586
[19] => 34590
[20] => 34637
)
[post_name__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__in] => Array
(
)
[tag__not_in] => Array
(
)
[tag__and] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__in] => Array
(
)
[tag_slug__and] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__in] => Array
(
)
[post_parent__not_in] => Array
(
)
[author__in] => Array
(
)
[author__not_in] => Array
(
)
[search_columns] => Array
(
)
[ignore_sticky_posts] =>
[suppress_filters] =>
[cache_results] => 1
[update_post_term_cache] => 1
[update_menu_item_cache] =>
[lazy_load_term_meta] => 1
[update_post_meta_cache] => 1
[nopaging] =>
[comments_per_page] => 50
[no_found_rows] =>
[taxonomy] => feature
[term_id] => 591
)
[tax_query] => WP_Tax_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => feature
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 591
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[1] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => solution
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
[relation] => AND
[2] => Array
(
[taxonomy] => product
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 588
)
[field] => term_id
[operator] => IN
[include_children] => 1
)
)
[relation] => AND
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_term_relationships
[1] => tt1
[2] => tt2
)
[queried_terms] => Array
(
[feature] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 591
)
[field] => term_id
)
[solution] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 12
)
[field] => term_id
)
[product] => Array
(
[terms] => Array
(
[0] => 588
)
[field] => term_id
)
)
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
)
[meta_query] => WP_Meta_Query Object
(
[queries] => Array
(
[0] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
)
[relation] => OR
)
[relation] => AND
[meta_table] => wp_postmeta
[meta_id_column] => post_id
[primary_table] => wp_posts
[primary_id_column] => ID
[table_aliases:protected] => Array
(
[0] => wp_postmeta
)
[clauses:protected] => Array
(
[wp_postmeta] => Array
(
[key] => _exclude_whitelabel_full
[compare] => NOT EXISTS
[compare_key] => =
[alias] => wp_postmeta
[cast] => CHAR
)
)
[has_or_relation:protected] =>
)
[date_query] =>
[request] => SELECT SQL_CALC_FOUND_ROWS wp_posts.ID
FROM wp_posts LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships ON (wp_posts.ID = wp_term_relationships.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt1 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt1.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_term_relationships AS tt2 ON (wp_posts.ID = tt2.object_id) LEFT JOIN wp_postmeta ON ( wp_posts.ID = wp_postmeta.post_id AND wp_postmeta.meta_key = '_exclude_whitelabel_full' )
WHERE 1=1 AND wp_posts.ID NOT IN (14750,23436,27424,27817,30225,31065,31175,32017,32296,32565,32605,32636,33723,33737,33761,34344,34459,34553,34586,34590,34637) AND (
wp_term_relationships.term_taxonomy_id IN (591)
AND
tt1.term_taxonomy_id IN (12)
AND
tt2.term_taxonomy_id IN (588)
) AND (
wp_postmeta.post_id IS NULL
) AND ((wp_posts.post_type = 'documentation' AND (wp_posts.post_status = 'publish' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'graded' OR wp_posts.post_status = 'not_graded')))
GROUP BY wp_posts.ID
ORDER BY wp_posts.post_title ASC
LIMIT 0, 999
[posts] => Array
(
[0] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27543
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-06-29 12:05:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-06-29 19:05:07
[post_content] => You are billed for all Tractors (not Trailers) marked "Active" in your ELD Complete account. To help you avoid being charged twice for the same asset, we are providing the following instructions to deactivate duplicate Tractors. As long as duplicate Tractors are deactivated by midnight the day before the last day of the month, you will not be billed for the duplicate Tractors.
You are not charged for duplicate active Trailers.
How does this occur?
Your account may have duplicate Tractors as a result of the following scenarios:
The same Tractor was listed more than once on an uploaded spreadsheet.*
Admins added the same Tractor to the account more than once.*
Drivers added the same Tractor via tablet.*
A Tractor is added with the same Number or VIN but the selected Home Base is different.
These scenarios were possible prior to an update to the system which now displays an error message if the same VIN or Number is used to add a Tractor.
Removing Duplicate Tractors
Now that we have an idea of how a duplicate Tractor entry could have occurred, let's remedy the situation by removing those duplicates. Please use the following instructions to remove duplicate Tractors by deactivation.
How to deactivate a duplicate tractor:
Login to your ELD Complete account and click Manage.
The Manage page appears displaying your Carriers.
Use the drop-down under Name to select the applicable Carrier by name, then click Assets () under Actions.
The Assets section appears displaying a list of your Tractors and Trailers.
Use the sort function in the Number column to sort your assets by number.
The list is sorted by number.
Review your asset list and look for any duplicate numbers. For any duplicates that you find, click the corresponding Details icon ().
The Assets pop-up appears.
Uncheck the Active checkbox by clicking the checkbox.
You may need to scroll down to locate the checkbox.
The checkbox appears empty.
Click Save.
The Assets list is displayed and the checkbox under the Active column for the entry row is empty.
To ensure that you have deactivated all Tractor duplicates for your account, please use the sort function for the VIN column and follow Steps #4-#6.
This process does not need to be performed for Trailers as you are not charged for active Trailers on your account.
[post_title] => Avoiding Duplicate Assets
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => avoiding-duplicate-assets
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-06-29 12:19:26
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-06-29 19:19:26
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27543
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27320
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-06-01 08:38:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-06-01 15:38:50
[post_content] => The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle.
We recommend keeping a sticker, or card, in the vehicle with the serial number of the installed GPS device for easy reference during future driver assignments.
Using the Fuel Receipts feature, drivers to take a picture of a fuel receipt and share it with admin personnel by uploading it from the ELD Complete App. Captured data includes fuel type, reference no., gallons, total cost, vehicle name (from vehicle profile), odometer value (from ECM), date, time, address, and notes. This information is available in the ELD Complete Admin Portal from the Fuel Receipts tab. Reports can be downloaded in Excel format.
You can search fuel receipts by:
Units
Driver
Carrier (Multiple carrier accounts)
Fuel type
Terminal
Region
Editing Fuel Receipts
Fuel receipts uploaded to the Portal can be edited and/or deleted.
How to edit a fuel receipt:
From the Fuel Receipts tab, use the filter/search options to locate the fuel receipt you would like to edit.
Under the Actions column corresponding to the row of the applicable receipt, click the Edit icon ().
The Edit Fuel Receipts pop-up appears. Available edits include:
Fuel Type
Reference ID
Fuel Purchased
Fuel Expenses
State
Date and Time
Notes
Applicable files can be uploaded from the pop-up.
Make your edits and click Save.
A green pop-up appears in the top-right corner confirming the edit was successfully saved.
Deleting Fuel Receipts
How to delete a fuel receipt:
From the Fuel Receipts tab, use the filter/search options to locate the fuel receipt you would like to edit.
Under the Actions column corresponding to the row of the applicable receipt, click the Delete icon ().
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the receipt.
Click OK to delete the receipt or click Cancel to exit without deleting.
A green pop-up appears in the top-right corner confirming the receipt was successfully deleted.
Driver Documents
Drivers can upload documents and photos via the BYOD solution. The uploaded docs/photos are accessible on the ELD Complete Admin Portal via the Drivers page.
How to access driver documents:
From the ELD Complete Admin Portal, click Manage.
Use the drop-down under name to select the Carrier.
Under ACTIONS, select Drivers.
The list of drivers associated to the selected carrier is displayed.
Click Driver Documents ().
The Driver Documents pop-up appears.
Click the applicable button under actions (Download, Edit, Delete) for the applicable document to perform your task.
You can also add a document to the driver's documents by clicking +New.
[post_title] => Bring Your Own Device (BYOD)
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => bring-your-own-device-byod
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-09-26 06:17:17
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-09-26 13:17:17
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27320
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26444
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-11 14:38:52
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-11 21:38:52
[post_content] => When reviewing the Driver Records report in ELD Complete, certain columns contain specific codes directly relating to the FMCSA’s Final Rule.
To make it easier to decipher these events, please refer to the charts below for what each code value represents.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Code,Description
1,Automatically recorded by ELD
2,Edited or entered by the driver
3,Edit requested by an authenticated user other than the driver
4,Assumed from unidentified driver profile
[/et]
Event Type Parameter Codes
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="10%|10%|80%"]
Type,Code,Description
1,1,Driver's duty status changed to "off-duty"
1,2,Driver's duty status changed to "sleeper-berth"
1,3,Driver's duty status changed to "driving"
1,4,Driver's duty status changed to "on-duty not driving"
2,1,Intermediate log with conventional location precision
2,2,Intermediate log with reduced location precision
3,1,Driver indicates "authorized personal use of CMV"
3,2,Driver indicates "yard moves"
3,0,Driver indication for PC\, YM\, and WT cleared
4,1,Driver's first certification of a daily record
4,n,Driver's n'th certifcation of a daily record (when recertification is necessary)~~~~
"n" is an integer between 1 and 9. If more than 9 certifications is needed\, use 9 for each new re-certification record.
5,1,Authenticated driver's ELD login activity
5,2,Authenticated driver's ELD logout activity
6,1,Engine power-up with conventional location precision
6,2,Engine power-up with reduced location precision
6,3,Engine shut-down with conventional location precision
6,4,Engine shut-down with reduced location precision
7,1,An ELD malfunction logged
7,2,An ELD malfunction cleared
7,3,A data diagnostic event logged
7,4,A data diagnostic event cleared
[/et]
Malfunction/Diagnostic Codes
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="25%|75%"]
Code,Description
P,Power Compliance malfunction
E,Engine synchronization compliance malfunction
T,Timing compliance malfunction
L,Positioning compliance malfunction
R,Data recording compliance malfunction
S,Data transfer compliance malfunction
O,Other ELD detected malfunction
1,Power data diagnostic event
2,Engine synchronization data diagnostic event
3,Missing required data elements data diagnostic event
4,Data transfer data diagnostic event
5,unidentified driving records data diagnostic event
6,Other ELD identified diagnostic event
[/et]
[post_title] => Driver Record Event Codes
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driver-record-event-codes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-02-08 11:50:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-02-08 18:50:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26444
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26469
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 08:21:16
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 15:21:16
[post_content] => The Driver Records Portal tab allows you to run a report on all driver-duty changes made on a driver log. This report can be run for all drivers or a specific driver at a time.
When reviewing the Driver Records report in ELD Complete, certain columns contain specific codes directly relating to the FMCSA’s Final Rule. Please see Driver Record Event Codes for a list of values and corresponding descriptions.
To run the Driver Report:
In eDash, click the Driver Records tab.
Select the appropriate company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the appropriate Driver from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date range you would like to view from the calendar.
Select the Event Status, Event Origin, Event Type, and Event Code from the appropriate dropdown lists.
Once complete, click Execute.
The report will appear with the following information:
ELD
App Version
Timestamp
Driver
Engine Hours
Odometer
New Status
City
State
Latitude
Longitude
Status
Origin
Type
Code
D/M Code
After reviewing the report, you can export the report to an Excel spreadsheet by click the Excel icon in the top right corner of the report.
[post_title] => Driver Records
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driver-records
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 08:21:16
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 15:21:16
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26469
[menu_order] => 9
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24510
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-04 11:19:10
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-04 18:19:10
[post_content] => The ELD Complete portal provides the ability to administer drivers (add, delete, and monitor), review and edit logs, and run reports. The portal and device stay synchronized to provide a nearly real-time view of your fleet.
Once you are logged in to ELD Complete, you are brought to the home screen of the portal with setup options, administrator tabs, and eDash links. All portal and reporting features are found in eDash.
To access eDash:
Hover over the eDash tab and click HOS + DVIR.
On the HOS + DVIR page, you'll see the following tabs:
Manage: The Manage tab allows you to view and edit carrier details, including profile settings, drivers, home bases, assets, and notifications.
Log Books: The Log Books tab gives you the ability to view all of your driver’s daily driving log details. This tab also allows you to download, view and print records as needed, along with exporting ELD data files for troubleshooting purposes or FMCSA regulations.
Unidentified Logs: The Unidentified Logs tab provides logs of drive times that are not associated with or captured by a specific driver. This tab allows you to assign these drive times and trips to the correct driver.
Log Edits: The Log Edits tab allows you to view edited logs and can be filtered by carrier, status (active, inactive, or all), drivers, date (up to a month), and log status (All, Assumed, Requested, and Rejected).
Dashboard: The Dashboard tab provides an overview of compliance and HOS details and can be filtered by carrier.
Violations: The Violations tab provides a list of violations your drivers have received through ELD Complete.
DVIR: The Driver-Vehicle Inspection Report (DVIR) tab allows you to view all DVIRs completed by your drivers.
IFTA Tab: The IFTA tab allows you to run IFTA reports for each vehicle in your organization. This report helps you keep track of miles traveled and fuel purchased in each state. This is helpful for companies that file quarterly IFTA or fuel tax reports. These reports are run by year, quarter and month.
Driver Records: The Driver Records tab allows you to run a report on all driver-duty changes made on a driver log. This report can be run for all drivers or a specific driver at a time.
FMCSA Records Report: The FMCSA Records report provides a list of all records that have been sent to the FMCSA upon request. The records that can be requested include driver rides and ECM data. ELD Complete keeps a record of the report types and dates sent to FMCSA.
Shipments: The Shipments feature allows dispatch or other internal or administrative users to schedule estimated delivery or pickups for their drivers.
Driver Duty Report: The Driver Duty report tab allows you to run a report that lists how long a driver was in each duty status within a specific date range.
The Engine Diagnostics tab is unavailable by default. This is an add-on feature available at an additional cost. Please contact your Account Manager for additional information if you are interested in learning more.
The Multi Operating Authority is a hierarchy structure offering the ability to manage multiple Carriers, Drivers, Home Bases and Assets. For example, a driver account assigned to an MOA account, can operate under any Carrier belonging to that MOA account and choose any assets as well under that MOA account.
Once you have selected an Multi Operating Authority by clicking Multi Operating Authority and selecting the applicable carrier, available actions include:
View Details
Drivers
Home Bases
Assets
Notifications
Managing Carrier Details
To manage carrier details:
In eDash, click the Manage tab.
Select the appropriate company name from the dropdown list/
Under actions, select one of the following options:
Details ()
Drivers ()
Home Bases ()
Assets ()
Notifications ()
Editing Carrier Details
To edit carrier details:
Click the Details () icon.
The carrier window will appear, displaying the following editable options:
Carrier Name
Carrier Address
Carrier Country
Time Zone
Units
Support Username
Support Password (this field is not editable)
Confirm Password (this field is not editable)
API Key
Addtional checkboxes
Once you've made your edits, click Save, then Close
Editing Drivers
To edit drivers:
Click the Drivers () icon.
A list of drivers will appear.
In the Drivers - Active column, click the checkbox to activate and deactivate drivers.
In the Drivers - Actions column, click Driver Details to edit driver information, including:
(First) Name
Last Name
Username (this field is not editable)
Password (this field is not editable)
Confirmation (this field is not editable)
Home Base: Select a headquarters for your driver in the dropdown menu
Ruleset*
24-Period Starting Time
Driver specific checkboxes, including Active, Personal Use, Yard Move, and Exemption.
Units
Registration State
License Number
DVIR and Exemption checkboxes, including DVIR Wifi Only, Allow to use Exemption, Allow to take DVIR photo
Available exemptions:
No logs for Agricultural Operations - 395.1(k)
Driver-salesperson whose total driving time does not exceed 40 hours in any period of 7 consecutive days - 395.1(c)
Relief from All Driving Rules for Emergency Conditions - 395.1(b)(2)
No Logs for Construction Equipment operating within 50-mile radius - 221.025 (8)
No Logs for Non-Commercial Motor Vehicle
No Logs for CDL short-haul Drivers operating within 150 air miles (14 hour shift) - 395.1(e)(1)
No Logs for short-haul Asphalt or Ready-Mixed Concrete Drivers operating within 100 air miles
395(e)(1) or Non-CDL drivers operating within 150 air miles 395(e)(2)
Relief from Driving rules for State of Emergency - 390.23
Relief from All Driving Rules for Utility Service Vehicles - 395.1(n)
Custom reason
Once you've made your edits, click Save, then Close
Managing Home Bases
To manage home bases:
Click the Home Bases () icon.
To create a new base, click New in the right corner of the Home Bases tab.
The Home Base window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the following fields:
Location Name
Address
Latitude
Longitude
Time Zone
Once entered, click Save, then Close.
In the Home Bases - Actions column, click the Details icon to edit home base information.
In the same column, click the Driver Assignment icon to assign specific drivers to the home base location.
Managing Assets
To manage assets:
Click the Assets () icon.
To add a new asset, click New in the right corner of the Assets tab.
The Asset window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the following fields:
Asset Type
Fuel Type Primary
Number
Make
VIN (Optional for trailers only)
Model
Plate (Optional for tractors and trailers only)
Year
Registration State
Type
Body Class
GVWR
Description (Optional)
ECM Identifier (Only required if Force Asset or ECM-Device are selected)
Addtional ECM Identifier (Optional)
Once complete, click Save, then Close
In the Assets - Actions column, click the details icon to edit asset information.
Managing Notification Settings
To manage notifications:
Click the Notifications () icon.
To set a new notification, click New in the top right corner of the Notification tab.
The Notification window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the following fields:
Home Base: Select a place of business in the dropdown menu.
Name: Enter a name/description for the notification.
Type: Select the notification type from the drop down menu.
Emails: Enter the emails of the recipients you would like to send the notification to. (Separate emails by comma)
Drivers: Select the drivers who will receive the notification.
Once complete, click Save, then Close
[post_title] => Managing Carrier Details & Settings
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-carrier-details-settings
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-07-28 16:23:50
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-07-28 23:23:50
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26486
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26501
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:35:01
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:35:01
[post_content] => The Shipments feature allows dispatch or other internal or administrative users to schedule estimated delivery or pickups for their drivers. When shipments are scheduled and assigned to a driver, the driver is notified and can view all details of the trip, including scheduled deliveries and pickups. A Shipments report is also available to list previously scheduled shipments and their details.
Viewing Scheduled Shipments
To view scheduled shipments:
In eDash, click the Shipments tab.
Select the appropriate company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the appropriate driver from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date range you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
Creating New Shipments
To create a new shipment:
In the Shipments tab, click New.
The Shipment Details window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the following required fields:
Estimated Pickup (Date)
Estimated Delivery (Date)
Driver
From here, all additional fields are optional.
Once complete, click Save.
[post_title] => Managing Shipments
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-shipments
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:35:01
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:35:01
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26501
[menu_order] => 11
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26477
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 08:42:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 15:42:40
[post_content] => The Unidentified Logs tab provides logs of drive times that are not associated with or captured by a specific driver. This tab allows you to assign these drive times and trips to the correct driver.
To view unidentified logs:
In eDash, click the Unidentified Logs tab.
Select your company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the status (Active, Inactive or All) from the Status dropdown list.
Select the appropriate vehicles, or select All, from the Vehicle dropdown list.
Select the date you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
The unidentifed log results will display the following information:
Timestamps
Event Status
Odometer
Miles
Status
Remarks
If the unidentified log was captured by the driver, the status will say Assumed.
If the unidentified log was not captured by a driver, the status will say Active and will need to be accepted by the responsible driver.
Be sure to notify the appropriate driver associated with the vehicle and time of the unidentified log.
Once the driver assumes responsibility for the unidentified log, the log will be added to their log book, and the status will be updated to Assumed.
[post_title] => Managing Unidentified Logs
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-unidentified-logs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-05-10 12:19:59
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-05-10 19:19:59
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26477
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[8] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27289
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-08-18 08:20:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-08-18 15:20:50
[post_content] => You can add, edit, and delete roles, users, and Multi Operating Authorities via the Administration menu in the Admin Portal.
Managing Roles
From the Roles tab of the ELD Complete Admin Portal, you can view, search, add, edit and delete roles.
Adding Roles
You can add a role with selected permissions.
How to add a role:
From the Roles tab, click +New.
The Add Role form appears.
Use the Carrier dropdown to select a carrier.
In the Name field, enter a name for the role.
In the Permission List section, use the checkboxes to select the permissions for the role.
Click Save.
The new role is added to the list of roles.
Editing a Role
You can make changes to a role using the Edit button.
How to edit a role:
From the Roles tab, locate the role you would like to edit and click Edit Role ().
Make your edits to either the role name or the selected permissions.
You cannot edit the selected carrier for the role.
Click Save.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm your changes have been saved successfully.
Deleting a Role
You can delete a role using the Delete Role button.
From the Roles tab, locate the role you would like to edit and click Delete Role ().
The Please Confirm pop-up appears asking: "Are you sure you want to delete the role?"
Click OK.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the role has been deleted successfully.
Managing Users
From the Users tab of the ELD Complete Admin Portal, you can view, search, filter (by carrier and/or MOA), add, edit and delete users.
You can easily search or filter the users listed on this tab by using the search field and/or the Carrier and/or MOA drop-down filters.
Adding a User
How to add a user:
From the Users tab, click +New.
The Add User form appears.
Click appropriate radio button for user option: Reseller User, Carrier User, App Support.
The App Support user can only work in the App to configure the ELD. This user can be created by any user who has access to the web administration. User type available for App Support are MOA or Carrier, and in both cases, the user can be limited by home bases or given access to all home bases.
Complete the form (* denotes required field).
The available/required fields vary depending on which user option is selected.
Click Save.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the user has been added successfully.The newly created user appears in the list of users.
Editing a User
How to edit a user:
From the Users tab, locate the user you would like to edit and click Edit User ().
The Edit User pop-up appears.
Make your edits to the available fields as needed and click Save.
You cannot edit the username at this time.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the user has been edited successfully.
Deleting a User
How to delete a user:
From the Users tab, locate the user you would like to delete and click Delete Role ().
The Please Confirm pop-up appears asking: "Are you sure you want to delete the user?"
Click OK.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the user has been deleted successfully.
Managing Multi Operating Authorities
From the MOA (Multi Operating Authority) tab of the ELD Complete Admin Portal, you can view, search, add, edit and delete an MOA.
MOAs are listed by name and number of carriers. Use the search field to easily locate an MOA from the list.
Adding an MOA
How to add an MOA:
From the MOA tab, click +New.
The Add MOA form appears.
Enter a name.
You can add carriers to the MOA from the Manage tab.
Click Save.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the MOA has been added successfully.
Editing an MOA
How to edit an MOA:
From the MOA tab, locate the user you would like to edit and click Edit MOA ().
The Edit Multi Operating Authority form appears.
Edit the name.
You can only edit the name of the MOA here. To make other changes, use the Manage tab.
Click Save.
A pop-up with green text appears at the top-right corner of the browser tab to confirm the MOA has been edited successfully.
Deleting an MOA
How to delete an MOA:
From the MOA tab, locate the user you would like to delete and click Delete MOA ().
You cannot delete an MOA that is in use.
[post_title] => Role & User Administration
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => role-user-administration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-08-18 08:20:50
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-08-18 15:20:50
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27289
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26507
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:44:48
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:44:48
[post_content] => Each of the available tabs in the Portal offers the ability to run and print reports.
Running Reports
To run reports in ELD Complete:
Select the tab or feature you want to work with.
Select the driver or vehicle depending on the feature you're working with
Enter all details - company, driver name, activity, and/or date.
Click the Execute link to run the report.
The report results will appear on the same screen.
Available Report
Odometer Jump Report
This report allows carriers to obtain a list of events in which odometer value has jumped. The report shows driver, status, location, odometer value, and date/time stamp data before the odometer jump and after the odometer jump. You can sort the report using the sort feature for each column to sort in ascending or descending order.
By default, the “Include Missing Values” option is unchecked. Once that option is selected, the scenario with zero Odometer value will be added to the report.
[post_title] => Running Reports
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-reports
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-07-26 08:12:27
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-07-26 15:12:27
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26507
[menu_order] => 13
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[10] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26504
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:37:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:37:40
[post_content] => The Driver Duty report tab allows you to run a report that lists how long a driver was in each duty status within a specific date range.
To view a driver duty report:
In eDash, click the Driver Duty Report tab.
Select the appropriate company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the appropriate driver from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date range you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
The Driver Duty Report displays the following information:
Driver
Home Base
Off Duty (Total in hh/mm)
Sleeper Berth (Total in hh/mm)
Driving (Total in hh/mm)
On Duty (Total in hh/mm)
Personal Use (Total in hh/mm)
If you would like to export the report to .xls format, click the .xsl icon.
The exported report is downloaded as a .xls file.
[post_title] => Running the Driver Duty Report
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-the-driver-duty-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:37:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:37:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26504
[menu_order] => 12
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[11] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26498
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:32:30
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:32:30
[post_content] => The FMCSA Records report provides a list of all records that have been sent to the FMCSA upon request. The records that can be requested include driver rides and ECM data. ELD Complete keeps a record of the report types and dates sent to FMCSA.
To run the FMCSA Records report:
In eDash, click the FMCSA Records tab
Select the appropriate company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the appropriate driver or all drivers from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date range you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
[post_title] => Running the FMCSA Records Report
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-the-fmcsa-records-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:32:30
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:32:30
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26498
[menu_order] => 10
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[12] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27538
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-06-23 08:59:12
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-06-23 15:59:12
[post_content] => If you are a customer who requires an HOS/ELD solution and you are interested in our ELD Complete offering, please use the steps below to begin your enrollment.
Beginning the Process
Let's get you on your way to receiving the benefits of ELD Complete with the below initial steps.
How to sign up for ELD Complete:
Contact your Customer Success Representative to sign up for the ELD Complete Product.
Sign the estimate to begin your ELD Complete service.
Once your estimate has been signed, you will receive an email detailing how to complete your ELD account setup and your credentials to log in to ELD Complete.
[post_title] => Signing Up for ELD Complete
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => signing-up-for-eld-complete
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-01-24 12:46:33
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-01-24 19:46:33
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27538
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[13] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 32977
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2025-08-08 11:23:06
[post_date_gmt] => 2025-08-08 18:23:06
[post_content] =>
Use the following instructions to switch a tablet from a wired (serial) connection to a Bluetooth connection for a Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) option.
Note: The tablet or mobile device must have access to the Google Play Store or Apple App Store to download the application. If you have already accessed the stores and installed the ELD Complete app, you may proceed to Step 3.
Confirm the tablet or mobile device is compatible with Google Play or App Store (IOS/Apple).
On the device, navigate to Settings > General > About.
Locate the device's Model Name and Software Version.
Cross-reference the Model Name and Software Version against the list of supported devices provided on the Official Apple Support site.
If the device appears in the list, it is compatible with the App Store (iOS).
Download the ELD Complete app from the Google Play or Apple Store (depending on your device's compatibility).
Obtain your GPS tracking device's serial number and be ready to provide it while contacting GPS Insight Support in the next step.
Contact GPS Insight Support and provide your GPS tracking device's serial number to confirm that the correct device(s) is/are switched to Bluetooth mode. Note: The Messaging app on a serial tablet can provide the device's serial number.
Start the vehicle, ignition ON status, to ensure the GPS device is awake and broadcasting a Bluetooth signal.
Connect the BYOD device to the ELD Complete solution using the reference materials listed below:
[post_title] => Switching from Serial to Bluetooth (BYOD)
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => switching-from-serial-to-bluetooth-byod
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-08-21 12:43:07
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-08-21 19:43:07
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=32977
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[14] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26483
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:09:42
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:09:42
[post_content] => The Dashboard tab provides an overview of compliance and HOS details and can be filtered by carrier.
Viewing Compliance Details
To view Compliance details:
In eDash, click the Dashboard tab then Compliance.
Select the carrier from the dropdown menu, then click Execute.
In-transit Shipment
ELD Compliance
Unassigned Driving
Violations
Hours of Service Compliance
Roadside Vehicle Inspections (DVIR)
Driver Certified Records
Viewing HOS Options
Hours of Service options:
In eDash, click the Dashboard tab then Hours of Service.
Select the appropriate company in the Carrier field.
Select a specific driver or All (to view all drivers) in the Drivers field.
Once complete, click Execute.
The results will display the following information:
Driver
Home Base
Ruleset
Driving Hours
OnDuty Hours
Cycle OnDuty
Next 30 Minutes Break
Current Status
Last Position
Last Update
If all entries are green, the driver is in good standing and in their appropriate worktime window.
If an entry is yellow, the driver is within one hour of going over their allotted time.
If an entry is red, the driver is in compliance error and needs to pull over as soon as possible.
[post_title] => Using the Dashboard
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-dashboard
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:09:42
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:09:42
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26483
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[15] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26495
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:30:28
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:30:28
[post_content] => The IFTA tab allows you to run IFTA reports for each vehicle in your organization. This report helps you keep track of miles traveled and fuel purchased in each state. This is helpful for companies that file quarterly IFTA or fuel tax reports. These reports are run by year, quarter and month.
To view IFTA reports:
In eDash, click the IFTA tab.
Select the appropriate year, quarter or month from the appropriate dropdown lists.
Select the region from the dropdown list.
Select the carrier from the dropdown list.
Select the appropriate vehicle from the dropdown list.
Once complete, click Execute.
The report will appear with the following information:
Jurisdiction
Total Miles
Taxable Miles
MPG
Taxable Gallons
Tax Paid Gallons
Net Taxable Gallons
Tax Rate
Tax (Credit) Due
You can make edits and recalculate the report where necessary.
Click the Download link at the bottom of the report to download and save for later use.
When a fuel receipt is added, it automatically becomes an adjustment in IFTA.
Select your company from the Carrier dropdown list.
Select the status (Active, Inactive or All) from the Status dropdown list.
Select the appropriate drivers from the Drivers dropdown list.
Select the date you would like to view from the calendar.
Once complete, click Execute.
The HOS Violation Report will appear showing violations from all selected drivers.
Each violation includes the driver's name, user name, date of violation, and the violation type.
This report can be exported via Excel, PDF, or Word. Simply click the save button at the top of the report and choose your export option.
[post_title] => Viewing Violations
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => viewing-violations
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-24 09:20:19
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:20:19
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26489
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 20
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27543
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-06-29 12:05:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-06-29 19:05:07
[post_content] => You are billed for all Tractors (not Trailers) marked "Active" in your ELD Complete account. To help you avoid being charged twice for the same asset, we are providing the following instructions to deactivate duplicate Tractors. As long as duplicate Tractors are deactivated by midnight the day before the last day of the month, you will not be billed for the duplicate Tractors.
You are not charged for duplicate active Trailers.
How does this occur?
Your account may have duplicate Tractors as a result of the following scenarios:
The same Tractor was listed more than once on an uploaded spreadsheet.*
Admins added the same Tractor to the account more than once.*
Drivers added the same Tractor via tablet.*
A Tractor is added with the same Number or VIN but the selected Home Base is different.
These scenarios were possible prior to an update to the system which now displays an error message if the same VIN or Number is used to add a Tractor.
Removing Duplicate Tractors
Now that we have an idea of how a duplicate Tractor entry could have occurred, let's remedy the situation by removing those duplicates. Please use the following instructions to remove duplicate Tractors by deactivation.
How to deactivate a duplicate tractor:
Login to your ELD Complete account and click Manage.
The Manage page appears displaying your Carriers.
Use the drop-down under Name to select the applicable Carrier by name, then click Assets () under Actions.
The Assets section appears displaying a list of your Tractors and Trailers.
Use the sort function in the Number column to sort your assets by number.
The list is sorted by number.
Review your asset list and look for any duplicate numbers. For any duplicates that you find, click the corresponding Details icon ().
The Assets pop-up appears.
Uncheck the Active checkbox by clicking the checkbox.
You may need to scroll down to locate the checkbox.
The checkbox appears empty.
Click Save.
The Assets list is displayed and the checkbox under the Active column for the entry row is empty.
To ensure that you have deactivated all Tractor duplicates for your account, please use the sort function for the VIN column and follow Steps #4-#6.
This process does not need to be performed for Trailers as you are not charged for active Trailers on your account.
The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle.
We recommend keeping a sticker, or card, in the vehicle with the serial number of the installed GPS device for easy reference during future driver assignments.
Log in to the ELD Complete application using valid credentials.
Select Tractor and tap Save.
Enter dash odometer values and tap Save.
Tap the device, then tap Continue.
Serial numbers are unique to each truck, please contact your Administrator to confirm your truck's serial number.
Ensure all diagnostics pass with values shown in green (see example below), then tap Continue.
You are ready to drive.
Additional Resources
[toggles]
[toggle title="Disconnecting Bluetooth Vehicle Connection" class="in"]
Tap on the hamburger menu from the top-left corner of the application, then tap Scan Devices.
From the ECM-Linked Devices screen, tap Scan Devices.
The Connected status (in green) is no longer shown, tap Continue.
The screen navigates to the Diagnostic page. All values from this page will be shown in red, which confirms the Bluetooth connection has been disabled.
You can now log out and leave the Bluetooth connection available to the vehicle for the next driver.
[/toggle]
[toggle title="Connecting to Bluetooth While Logged In"]
Tap on the hamburger menu from the top-left corner of the application, then tap Scan Devices.
Tap on the applicable device, then tap Continue.
Ensure all diagnostics pass (values are shown in green), then tap Continue.
The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle.
Login Notes
The login name and password are for the specific driver’s use only and must not be shared with any other person, and cannot be duplicated.
A driver can only be logged in to one ELD at a time. In order for the driver to log in on a different mobile device, the driver must change to off-duty status and log out from the previous device.
If a driver is still logged into an ELD, but the device ceased to function or gets lost, the driver must call the home base carrier and ask for his login name to be unlocked. The unlock process will change the driver’s status to off-duty at the time the driver solicited the login unlock.
Selecting a Vehicle Profile (Assets)
To select an asset:
Log in using your username and password.
Tap Select Tractor.
Search Tractor in asset listing or enter the Trailer name in the Search bar, tap the asset to select it, then tap the checkmark icon (top-right corner).
Once you select a tractor from the downloaded list, the ELD will display the VIN number, license plate, and registration state on the list.
Enter the asset's odometer in the "Odometer information" field and tap Save.
Tap Scan.
Select the device and tap Continue.
Note: If the driver scans for a device and doesn’t find one, there are a couple of possible reasons:
Another Driver is Still Connected: Another nearby driver may still have the device connected in their app. If that’s the case, the device won’t appear in the scan results for others. Incorrect ELD Script Installed: The device may have the wrong ELD script loaded. In this case, the driver should contact Support for assistance. Another driver is nearby and still has this device connected in their app, as you won't be able to see the device.
The Diagnostic screen appears.
Note: If the Diagnostics Screen looks like the example below, please contact Support immediately.
If all data points are green in the diagnostic, tap Continue.
You are ready to drive.
To disconnect from the device, rescan for devices by performing Step #5 above, and instead of selecting a device from the list, tap Continue.
Rescanning Bluetooth Connection
A Bluetooth icon and a truck icon in red on the ELD main screen indicate the application has lost Bluetooth connection.
Tap the Hamburger Menu (top-left).
Tap Scan Devices.
Tap Scan.
Select the device and tap Continue. Note: Serial numbers are unique to each truck, please contact your Administrator to confirm your truck’s serial number.
Note: If the driver scans for a device and doesn’t find one, there are a couple of possible reasons:
Another Driver is Still Connected: Another nearby driver may still have the device connected in their app. If that’s the case, the device won’t appear in the scan results for others. Incorrect ELD Script Installed: The device may have the wrong ELD script loaded. In this case, the driver should contact Support for assistance. Another driver is nearby and still has this device connected in their app, as you won't be able to see the device.
If all data points are green in the diagnostic, tap Continue.
Switching Vehicles
To connect to the new unit, follow the instructions below.
Tap the Hamburger menu.
Tap Vehicle Profile.
Tap Select Tractor.
Search Tractor in asset listing or enter the Trailer name in the Search bar, tap the asset to select it, then tap the checkmark icon (top-right corner).
Enter the asset's odometer in the "Odometer information" field and tap Save.
Tap OK on the pop-up stating the vehicle profile was saved.
Tap the Hamburger menu (top-left).
Tap Scan Devices.
Tap Scan.
Select the device and tap Continue. Note: Serial numbers are unique to each truck, please contact your Administrator to confirm your truck’s serial number.
Note: If the driver scans for a device and doesn’t find one, there are a couple of possible reasons:
Another Driver is Still Connected: Another nearby driver may still have the device connected in their app. If that’s the case, the device won’t appear in the scan results for others. Incorrect ELD Script Installed: The device may have the wrong ELD script loaded. In this case, the driver should contact Support for assistance. Another driver is nearby and still has this device connected in their app, as you won't be able to see the device.
If all data points are green in the diagnostic, tap Continue.
From the Home Screen, tap the Inspections Report button.
Tap on the + button (bottom of the screen).
Tap the vehicle inspection regulation region from the options shown, then tap OK.
Additional options are available for Quebec compliance: heavy vehicle, bus, and motor coach.
A New Inspection Form appears.
Inspect the tractor/trailer, tap the checkbox next to any defective item you may have found, and enter remarks for the checked items then tap OK.
Tap NEXT.
We have separated items under the C-TPAT 17 agreement in order to help you reduce border delays (if applicable) and minimize risks.
Enter a remark and indicate if defects were corrected or not.
Sign the inspection report. If you have not added a signature, tap the pencil icon at the bottom right corner of the screen.
Sign on the line above "Put your signature here" and tap Save & Finish.
If defects were found and corrected, you can ask the mechanic for a signature. There is a third, optional signature that some carriers require before a vehicle leaves the yard.
Tap Upload, then OK.
The DVIR is submitted.
[post_title] => Driver Vehicle Inspection Reports (DVIR)
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driver-vehicle-inspection-reports-dvir
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2022-11-18 13:07:01
[post_modified_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:07:01
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25906
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24409
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-18 13:03:26
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:03:26
[post_content] => ELD Complete is an Hours of Services solution that is fully FMCSA-certified and provides both Hours of Service (HOS) and DVIR capabilities, in addition to data for IFTA reporting.
The following guide consists of the below articles and provides a high-level overview of the features provided in the GPS Insight ELD Complete app.
The following accounts are available in ELD Complete:
Driver: Unique, per-driver account used by drivers' Hours of Service and ELD regulations. This account records duty status changes (RODS) and allows the export of driver’s records for printout, display, and agent output file generation.
Support: Account used by the carrier and ELD manufacturer to set up, configure, update and troubleshoot the ELD. No duty status changes are recorded with this account and no access to the driver’s record of duty status changes is permitted under the support account.
Non-authenticated: All operation of a commercial motor vehicle (CMV) is recorded under this account (a.k.a Unidentified Driver) if no driver has logged into the ELD. Non-authenticated records (vehicle movement and on-duty time) are stored on the ELD as well as the carrier and should be assumed by a driver account.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Diagnostic,Resolution
Power Data/Compliance Diagnostic,ECM parameters must be available within 1 minute of powering the vehicle’s engine on. Make sure you are connected to the ECM device. On the menu\, go to Scan Devices and select your ECM device. Make sure all engine parameters pass the diagnostics (all green).
Engine Synchronization Data Diagnostic,Not all ECM parameters are available when the ELD records an event (e.g.\, duty status change). Make sure you are connected to the ECM device. On the menu\, go to Scan Devices and select your ECM device. Make sure the diagnostic passes all engine parameters (all green).
Missing Required Data Elements Data Diagnostic (e.g.\, other required data such as location\, coordinates unavailable when recording an event),Make sure the GPS module is enabled on your ELD
Data Transfer Data Diagnostic,ELD must verify this functionality at least once every 7 days. Verify that you have an active cellular or wifi connection all the time. Confirm that your logs are always updated on the ELD portal.
Unidentified Driving Records Data Diagnostic (more than 30 minutes of driving without a driver logged on the ELD),You are not logged on the ELD and the vehicle moves for an extended period. Please log in and select your Driving time.
[/et]
Malfunctions
Most malfunctions relate to a Diagnostic; a malfunction is generated when the same diagnostic occurs for at least 30 minutes in the last 24 hours.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="40%|60%"]
Malfunction,Description
P- Power Compliance,Related to diagnostic 1
E- Engine Synchronization Compliance,Related to diagnostic 2. For instance\, multiple periods of no ECM data that when added together are more than 30 minutes in the last 24 hours.
T- Timing Compliance,The time on the ELD compared to an external time source are different.~~~~Resolution: Make sure the date and time on your mobile device is properly set. DO NOT (manually) change the date or the time on your ELD.
L- Positioning Compliance,No location available. Related to diagnostic 1.
R- Data Recording Compliance,Monitor storage capability to store records.~~~~Resolution: Make sure you have sufficient internal storage on your ELD. Delete files if necessary.
S- Data Transfer Compliance, ELD records cannot be uploaded.~~~~Resolution: Most likely there is no connection to internet access. Restart the ELD (if needed) and confirm you can reconnect to the network.
[/et]
[post_title] => ELD Diagnostics & Malfunctions
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => eld-diagnostics-malfunctions
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2022-11-18 13:11:23
[post_modified_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:11:23
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25896
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26007
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-18 13:04:56
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:04:56
[post_content] => Drivers will log into ELD Complete using their driver credentials at the beginning of their shift.
BYOD users must connect to the correct device before logging in.
Logging In
Each driver using the system will have a unique login ID, which is linked to the driver's personal information (e.g. driver’s license, etc.).
How to log in:
On the Login screen, enter your username and password and tap Login.
Login Notes
The login name and password are for the specific driver’s use only and must not be shared with any other person and cannot be duplicated.
If the driver changes carriers and is now driving for a different carrier, the login name, under certain circumstances, will remain the same and it is the driver’s obligation to ask the home base carrier to update the carrier name and DOT number on the system.
The driver is restricted to being logged on to only one ELD at any time. In order for the driver to log in on to a different mobile device, the driver must change to off-duty status and log out from the previous device.
In the event, that a driver is still logged on an ELD, but the device ceased to function or gets lost, the driver must call the home base carrier and ask for his login name to be unlocked. The unlock process will change the driver’s status to off-duty at the time the driver solicited the login unlock.
Selecting a Vehicle Profile (Assets)
To select an asset:
Tap Select Tractor or Select Trailer.
Select or search for an existing asset from the asset list.
Once you select a tractor or trailer from the downloaded list, the ELD will display the VIN number, license plate, and registration state on the list.
Tap Save.
Enter your vehicle’s dashboard odometer value (twice) in order for the ELD to adjust discrepancies between the dashboard and engine odometer.
The Diagnostic Screen appears.
If the Diagnostics Screen looks like the below example, please contact Support immediately.
Scroll down on the Diagnostics screen and tap Run Diagnostic then tap Continue.
Tap OK to the Driver Configuration Change pop-up.
Select an option from the Warning pop-up.
The Home Screen appears.
Before driver logs can be exported and shared with an authorized agent, the driver must update their vehicle information with the correct asset(s).
Assumption of Unidentified Logs
During the login process, you will be prompted to review the existing unidentified logs, if applicable.
From the prompt, if the unidentified logs do not belong to you, tap SKIP.
If some, or all, unidentified logs belong to you select REVIEW LOGS.
Select the checkbox associated to the logs that belong to you and assume the logs by tapping ASSUME UNIDENTIFIED LOGS.
Motor Carrier Suggestions
For time to time, the carrier may suggest some changes to driver logs. Drivers are responsible for assuming or rejecting those suggestions.
Carrier-proposed edits will show on your tablet at different times. They will show during login and logout process and they will also be shown as a new ELD message on the main screen
Please make sure:
You are not driving while attending to carrier-proposed log edits.
You re-certify your ELD records if a carrier-proposed log edit is assumed.
To accept or reject carrier-proposed log changes:
Open the carrier-proposed edit message and select the logs you want to accept OR reject.
Select REJECT or ACCEPT to perform the desired action.
The action selected will be applied to the selected logs.
ELD General Messages and Notifications
Some notifications are shown while logging in to the tablet. Some of them are errors, warnings, or specific information regarding an operational change. These are the most common notifications:
During Log In
You are logged on a different device: A driver can only use credentials to log in to one ELD. The same driver account cannot be used on multiple ELDs. If you lost your ELD while authenticated, contact your company and ask them to Unlock your account. You will be able to log in after your account is unlocked.
Wrong authentication: Make sure your Username and Password are correct. Also, make sure you have internet access and a good upload/download speed.
Downloading error: Issue download shipments, events, violations, etc.,. Make sure you have internet access and good upload/download speed.
[post_title] => Logging in to the Tablet
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => logging-in-to-the-tablet
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-09-06 13:17:00
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-09-06 20:17:00
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26007
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25944
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-18 13:08:25
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:08:25
[post_content] => From the tablet, you can add, edit, delete, certify, and view driver logs from the Logbook.
Adding, Deleting and Editing Logs
Getting to the Logbook
Navigating to the Logbook:
From the Home Screen, tap the Menu List icon.
The Menu List expands.
Tap Logbook.
The Logbook opens to the log from the current date.
Use the back and forward arrows around the date to navigate to the logbook for the day you would like to view and/or edit.
Tap the + icon (bottom right corner of screen) to expand the action buttons.
Use applicable action buttons to make necessary changes then tap Save & Finish.
Driving time can only be increased on automatically recorded records and deleted, reduced or increased on manually recorded records.
Getting to Logs
Navigating to Logs:
From the Home Screen, tap the Menu List icon.
The Menu List expands.
Tap Logbook.
The Logbook opens to the log from the current date.
Tap Logs to view a list of log records.
Use the editing icons for the date you would like to edit or to add a new log tap +.
Make the necessary changes, tap on the log status, start/end dates, start/end times, and location to make your changes.
When adjusting times, please select the hour/minute and ensure that you indicate AM or PM.
Enter a remark explaining the reason of the change (mandatory) and then tap Confirm Changes.
If you have accidentally recorded driving time, add the following remark: "System or User Error" to the status to avoid having the driving time counted against the Driving windows for the day.
Daily ON-DUTY, cycle ON-DUTY and possible violations will be calculated according to the new record change.
Certifying Records
You can certify logs from the tablet.
Certifying Logs
You can certify your logs at any time. At the end of each 24-hour period, the tablet automatically prompts the driver to certify logs for the last 24 hours period. Additionally, during login and logout, the driver is prompted to certify logs.
How to certify logs:
From the Home Screen, tap the Menu List icon.
The Menu List expands.
Tap Certify Records.
Select the day or days you would like to certify.
Select the 24-hour period you want to certify then tap CERTIFY.
Agree to the statement prompt.
The log is certified.
[post_title] => Managing Driver Logs
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => managing-driver-logs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-05-11 07:08:25
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-05-11 14:08:25
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25944
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[7] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25966
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-18 13:05:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-18 20:05:50
[post_content] => During your shift, you will need to perform certain actions on the tablet during the operation of your asset.
Changing Duty Status
How to change status:
From the Home Screen, tap on the desired duty status button.
The Remark pop-up appears, check a box (if applicable) and/or enter your own remark.
If checking the box corresponding to "Fueling," enter the number of gallons fueled into the vehicle. This is required for accurate IFTA reporting.
Tap OK to continue.
Your status is changed.
Viewing Time Remaining
The three donuts constantly show the actual time spent on each status (driving, ON- Duty and cycle ON-Duty). The corresponding donut will turn yellow or red to indicate proximity to the time limit.
Recap
Tap the ON-Cycle (see recap) donut to see how much ON-Duty time will be removed once the 7th or 14th day is reached. The recap summary message also tells you the day and time when the next available recap will take place.
This information is valuable as you can use it to plan your weekly cycle and be aware of how much time you will get back each day, after the 7th or 14th day (according to the currently selected ruleset).
Possible Violations
You can view possible violations from the tablet.
How to view violations:
From the Home Screen, tap the Menu List icon.
The Menu List options appear.
Tap Violations.
A list of violations (if applicable) is shown.
A notification message displays on the Home Screen, if triggered, one hour before the possible violation and another one thirty minutes before the next possible violation. Only new violations triggered by a new status change send a notification and the notification is only sent once.
Co-Driver Operation (Authentication & Remarks)
You can add a co-driver during your shift from the tablet.
How to add a co-driver:
From the Home Screen, tap the current driver's name or you can use the Menu List to select the Co-Driver Login option.
The Co-driver login screen appears.
The co-driver enters their username and password credentials, then taps Login.
If applicable, Unidentified Logs are displayed.
Tap Review Logs to manage the unidentified logs.
Select Unidentified Log events that you want to accept and then tap Assume (at the top of the screen).
Roadside Inspection Mode
If you are stopped on the road by an officer, enter Roadside Inspection Mode to show the officer the required data and export the Printout/Display document and ELD data file.
Completing a Roadside Inspection:
From the Home Screen, tap the Roadside Inspection Mode button.
The DOT Inspection screen appears.
Tap either Print-Display Logs or Export ELD Output File per the officer's direction.
If you have selected Print-Display Logs, tap PDF view or Email Share.
If PDF view is selected, the PDF displays directly on the tablet.
If you have selected Export ELD Output File, select the Data Transfer Mechanism from the options shown, enter a file comment, and then tap Export.
If working with sourced tablet, Local or USB is not supported.
FMCSA web service: This option securely communicates to FMCSA's end-point ad obtains submission ID.
Enter your password then tap OK.
The file is sent.
ELD General Messages and Notifications
Some notifications are shown while operating the ELD. Some of them are errors, warnings, or specific information regarding an operational change. These are the most common notifications:
During Operation
Unidentified Driving: Once the asset begins moving, a Driving event is created. The tablet provides a visual and audible notification instructing the driver to stop and authenticate on the tablet.
The driver could continue to the destination, authenticate later on and review/accept unidentified events.
Logs Certification: At the beginning of every 24-hour period, the ELD shows a notification to the driver asking to certify the logs for the previous day or past days. You can select not to certify your logs (yet), certify the previous 24-hour period, or all pending logs.
Automatic Driving status with multiple drivers authenticated: If the vehicle moves, there is more than one driver authenticated on the ELD and no driver is on Driving duty status; the ELD shows an audible and visual notification prompting drivers to select the driver currently operating the vehicle.
Carrier-proposed log edits: If the carrier’s back-office personnel propose a change to the driver’s logs, a notification is shown on the ELD. The driver can assume or reject the carrier-proposed edits during login, logout, or by taping on the new message icon.
Per Federal Hours of Service §395, you are allowed to drive to the nearest rest area, drive home, and more. The ELD will prompt you to add a pre-defined remark or type a different reason when changing to Personal Use (PU) during vehicle operation.
Selecting Personal Use (PU) Status:
From the Home Screen, tap Personal.
DUTY status must be in OFF-DUTY.
A warning pop-up appears to confirm you would like to change your status to Personal Use.
Tap OK.
The Remark for Personal Use pop-up appears, check a box (if applicable) or add a customized remark (this duty status must have a remark).
Tap OK to continue.
Your status is changed to Personal Use.
If there is an ignition-off event, you will be prompted to either exit or continue the Personal Use status upon ignition on.
The Log event for Personal Use will show up as a blue dashed line in the off duty portion of the graph.
Yard Move (YM)
The ELD also allows you to drive the vehicle inside a yard. To do so, switch to Yard Move (YM) before putting the vehicle in motion.
Selecting Yard Move (YM) Status:
From the Home Screen, tap Yard Moves.
Duty status must be in ON-DUTY status.
A warning pop-up appears to confirm you would like to change your status to Yard Move.
Tap OK.
The Remark for ON-DUTY pop-up appears, check a box (if applicable) and/or tap OK to continue.
The Remark for YM pop-up appears, check the applicable box or enter a remark on the Other line, then tap OK.
Your status is changed to Yard Moves.
If the vehicle’s speed exceeds 32 km/h you will be automatically switched to Driving duty status.
PU and YM in the Logbook
Personal Use or Yard Move events are shown as a dashed blue line in the logbook graph.
The distance traveled while in PU and/or YM status is included in the daily odometer shown in the Logbook and the Print/Display option of the Portal.
[post_title] => Personal Use and Yard Moves
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => personal-use-and-yard-moves
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-02 09:27:12
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-02 16:27:12
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25928
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 9
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 31514
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-09-23 08:28:13
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-09-23 15:28:13
[post_content] =>
Connecting the Android BYOD to ELD Complete
The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle.
We recommend keeping a sticker, or card, in the vehicle with the serial number of the installed GPS device for easy reference during future driver assignments.
Log in to the ELD Complete application using valid credentials.
Select Tractor and tap Save.
Enter dash odometer values and tap Save.
Tap the device, then tap Continue.
Serial numbers are unique to each truck, please contact your Administrator to confirm your truck's serial number.
Ensure all diagnostics pass with values shown in green (see example below), then tap Continue.
You are ready to drive.
Additional Resources
[toggles]
[toggle title="Disconnecting Bluetooth Vehicle Connection" class="in"]
Tap on the hamburger menu from the top-left corner of the application, then tap Scan Devices.
From the ECM-Linked Devices screen, tap Scan Devices.
The Connected status (in green) is no longer shown, tap Continue.
The screen navigates to the Diagnostic page. All values from this page will be shown in red, which confirms the Bluetooth connection has been disabled.
You can now log out and leave the Bluetooth connection available to the vehicle for the next driver.
[/toggle]
[toggle title="Connecting to Bluetooth While Logged In"]
Tap on the hamburger menu from the top-left corner of the application, then tap Scan Devices.
Tap on the applicable device, then tap Continue.
Ensure all diagnostics pass (values are shown in green), then tap Continue.
The Driver Logs screen shows all information that the USDOT and Transport Canada require for your driver record of duty status. This screen also allows you to view, edit, annotate, print and certify your logs without signing into the ELD tablet.
Viewing Your Driver Logs
To view your Driver Logs:
Hover your mouse over HOS, and click Driver Logs.
You can also click on HOS, then choose Driver Logs from the Driver Logs screen that appears.
Click on the date field, then click a date from the Date menu (or use the Previous and Next Day options to navigate through your available logs).
Under Log Format, click on the radio button next to the log format in which you would like have your log display. Log format options are as follows:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Format Type,Description
Driver Default,Displays your logs in the format chosen for your Driver ID.~~~~ This format is selected by default.US Format,Displays your logs according to the US format.
Canada Format,Displays your logs according to the Canadian format.
[/et]
Click View Logs to load the log for the selected day.
The log is displayed.
Your log report contains the following information:
Date Information
The record date and time zone.
Time zone offset from UTC.
The starting time for the 24-hour period.
Certification Information
If the log is certified: Your name and the date (MM|DD|YY) and time (hh:mm|AM/PM|Time Zone) of certification.
Driver Information
Your name (Last, First).
Your Driver ID.
The multiday basis or cycle you follow.
Multiday basis is shown when logs are viewed in US format; the cycle is shown when logs are viewed in Canada format.
Your driver's license number and issuing state or province.
Your full driver's license number is only visible to you; all other users see only the last 4 digits (e.g., "*******YY27").
Carrier and Home Terminal
The name of your motor carrier.
The USDOT Number of your motor carrier.
Your carrier's main office address.
The name of the home terminal to which you have been assigned on the date of the log.
The address of your home terminal.
Graph Grid
Graph of all active duty status changes for the 24-hour period beginning at 12:00 AM.
Total hours and minutes (hh:mm) in each duty status, shown immediately to the right of the graph.
Vehicles and other Resources
The Commercial motor vehicle (CMV) you used during the 24-hours period beginning at 12:00 AM.
If the log is displayed in Canada format and you have at least one Driving (D) status in a vehicle for the log date shown, the first odometer reading and last odometer reading recorded while you were on duty and driving will be shown.
Total distance driven today (while on duty).
This total does not include any distance traveled while Off Duty, Personal Conveyance (OFF-PC) status or any distance traveled in an inactive duty status.
Co-drivers.
Trailers.
Shipments.
Log Events
Chronological listing of all log events occurring on (or extending into) the date of the log.
Events may be listed that are not part of the current log of record. Use the Record Status column to understand the current status of each event.
Active - This event is part of the current log of record.
Inactive - Changed - This event is no longer part of the current log of record.
Inactive - Requested - This event is a change that has been requested by someone other than you; it will not become part of your log of record unless you accept or reject the change.
Inactive - Rejected - This event is a change that was requested by someone other than you, that you have rejected; it is not part of your log of record.
Managing Log Events
In compliance with USDOT regulations, the HOS application keeps a record of changes made to your log events, including what information was changed, who made the change (you or your fleet administrator), and when the change was made.
In some cases, edits can be avoided. Before you make any change, be sure of the following:
- You have entered any missing data indicated by the electronic logging device (e.g., recording the locations of status changes for which GPS was not available).
- Your most recent records have been sent from the ELD (electronic logging device) to the Portal.
If you have verified the need to modify the active log events, keep these points in mind:
You are required to enter a Reason For Change for every change to a log event. Briefly explain why it is necessary to edit the information currently recorded (e.g., Forgot to sign out). The reason you enter will be shown as an annotation to the event.
You cannot undo a log event once it is Active. If you have entered the wrong information, you may edit the log event in order to correct the error; however, each successive change will be reflected in the log history.
If the change that you are attempting would cause a conflict or loss of data, you may be prompted to confirm the change.
Your Log Changes
When you make a change to your log, the change become effective immediately. For example, when you delete an event, the event is marked as Inactive - Changed.
Log Changes from Other Users
When a user, like your fleet administrator, makes a change to your log, the change is marked as Inactive - Requested until you accept or reject the proposed change.
[notification type="alert-warning"]For AOBRD users: Requested changes that are submitted to a log within 6 days of the current date will be applied automatically the next time you sign into your device. Any changes submitted to a log that is 7 days or older will not be automatically applied and will require you to log in to the Driver Portal to accept or reject any proposed changes.[/notification]
Adding a Log Event
To add a log event:
View the log for the date for which you wish to add the event.
Click New Status Change, or New Exception.
Enter the details for the event. Review all details carefully before saving.
Click Save to add the event and return to the Driver Logs screen.
Annotating a Log Event
To annotate a log event:
In the Log Events table, locate the row containing the event you wish to annotate.
Click the Annotate icon (plus sign) for the event.
Enter the text of the annotation (up to 60 characters).
Click Submit to save the annotation.
Editing a Log Event
Remember the following when editing an event:
If the event you are editing spans multiple days, you must view the first log for which the event is listed in order to select the event.
You can change the start time of an event but not the start date of an event, unless the driver's time zone has changed.
You cannot specify the end date or time of an event. The HOS application calculates the end date and time automatically.
To edit a log event:
In the Log Events table, click the pencil icon or click the link in the Type/Status column for the Status Change, Remark, or Exception that you wish to edit.
A separate page for the corresponding event is displayed.
Change the details for the event and review carefully.
Click Save to save changes and return to the Driver Logs screen.
Accepting/Rejecting a Proposed Edit
To accept or reject a proposed edit:
Locate the proposed edit (shown in red) in your list of Log Edits.
To accept, click the green thumbs-up icon.
The proposed edit is applied to your log and your remaining hours are recalculated accordingly. The original event displays a status of Inactive - Changed. Use the annotation icon (plus sign) to add annotations to the log event, if needed.
To reject, click the red thumbs-down icon.
The proposed edit is updated and displays Inactive-Rejected on your log. Use the annotation icon (plus sign) to add annotations to the log event, if needed.
Deleting a Log Event
To delete a log event:
In the Log Events table, locate the row containing the event you wish to delete.
Click the Delete icon (trash can) for the event.
Enter the reason for deletion. This reason will be recorded as an annotation to the event.
Click Submit to delete the selected event.
To delete multiple log events:
Check the Allow multi-select checkbox.
In the Log Events table, locate the row(s) containing the event(s) you wish to delete.
Check the checkbox to the left of each row.
Click the Delete icon (trash can).
Enter the reason for deletion. This reason will be recorded as an annotation to each selected event.
Click the Submit button to delete the selected events.
If you delete a status change that falls between two other status changes, the prior status will be extended to fill the time. If the prior status was Automatically-recorded Driving (D) time, an On-duty Not Driving (ON) status will be added to fill the gap.
Certifying Logs
You are the only one who can certify your logs. This action can be performed from your ELD (electronic logging device), or from your Driver Portal using the following process.
To certify a log:
Review the uncertified log and click Certify... when you are ready to certify the accuracy and validity of the log's contents.
If there are proposed changes that you have not accepted or rejected, the Certify... button is not shown, and instead you will be prompted to review and accept or reject all changes.
A window prompt appears requesting that you confirm you would like to certify the log for the displayed date.
To confirm, click Agree or click Not Ready to go back to the Driver log.
If you clicked Agree, you are returned to the Driver Log and the Certify button is now replaced with a Certified label.
To certify multiple logs:
If you have been off duty two or more full days in a row, you may certify the Off Duty logs all at one time.
Review the uncertified log for the last date on which you were Off Duty and click Certify... when you are ready to certify the accuracy and validity of the log's contents.
If there are proposed changes that you have not accepted or rejected, the Certify... button is not shown, and instead you will be prompted to review and accept or reject all changes.
A window prompt appears requesting that you confirm you would like to certify the log for the displayed date range.
To confirm, click Agree or click Not Ready to go back to the Driver log.
If you clicked Agree, you are returned to the Driver Log and the Certify button is now replaced with a Certified label.
If edits are made to a driver log after you have certified it, you must review the changes and certify the log again.
[post_title] => Editing, Approving, and Certifying Logs
[post_excerpt] => From the Driver Portal, you can access and perform various actions with your Driver Logs. Use the following information and instructional steps to perform advanced actions with Driver Logs from the Driver Portal.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-approving-and-certifying-logs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-07 14:24:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-07 21:24:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 11429
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=11234
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 1
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 11234
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2018-02-09 15:55:15
[post_date_gmt] => 2018-02-09 22:55:15
[post_content] => From the Driver Portal, you can access and perform various actions with your Driver Logs. Use the following information and instructional steps to perform advanced actions with Driver Logs from the Driver Portal.
Driver Logs
The Driver Logs screen shows all information that the USDOT and Transport Canada require for your driver record of duty status. This screen also allows you to view, edit, annotate, print and certify your logs without signing into the ELD tablet.
Viewing Your Driver Logs
To view your Driver Logs:
Hover your mouse over HOS, and click Driver Logs.
You can also click on HOS, then choose Driver Logs from the Driver Logs screen that appears.
Click on the date field, then click a date from the Date menu (or use the Previous and Next Day options to navigate through your available logs).
Under Log Format, click on the radio button next to the log format in which you would like have your log display. Log format options are as follows:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="30%|70%"]
Format Type,Description
Driver Default,Displays your logs in the format chosen for your Driver ID.~~~~ This format is selected by default.US Format,Displays your logs according to the US format.
Canada Format,Displays your logs according to the Canadian format.
[/et]
Click View Logs to load the log for the selected day.
The log is displayed.
Your log report contains the following information:
Date Information
The record date and time zone.
Time zone offset from UTC.
The starting time for the 24-hour period.
Certification Information
If the log is certified: Your name and the date (MM|DD|YY) and time (hh:mm|AM/PM|Time Zone) of certification.
Driver Information
Your name (Last, First).
Your Driver ID.
The multiday basis or cycle you follow.
Multiday basis is shown when logs are viewed in US format; the cycle is shown when logs are viewed in Canada format.
Your driver's license number and issuing state or province.
Your full driver's license number is only visible to you; all other users see only the last 4 digits (e.g., "*******YY27").
Carrier and Home Terminal
The name of your motor carrier.
The USDOT Number of your motor carrier.
Your carrier's main office address.
The name of the home terminal to which you have been assigned on the date of the log.
The address of your home terminal.
Graph Grid
Graph of all active duty status changes for the 24-hour period beginning at 12:00 AM.
Total hours and minutes (hh:mm) in each duty status, shown immediately to the right of the graph.
Vehicles and other Resources
The Commercial motor vehicle (CMV) you used during the 24-hours period beginning at 12:00 AM.
If the log is displayed in Canada format and you have at least one Driving (D) status in a vehicle for the log date shown, the first odometer reading and last odometer reading recorded while you were on duty and driving will be shown.
Total distance driven today (while on duty).
This total does not include any distance traveled while Off Duty, Personal Conveyance (OFF-PC) status or any distance traveled in an inactive duty status.
Co-drivers.
Trailers.
Shipments.
Log Events
Chronological listing of all log events occurring on (or extending into) the date of the log.
Events may be listed that are not part of the current log of record. Use the Record Status column to understand the current status of each event.
Active - This event is part of the current log of record.
Inactive - Changed - This event is no longer part of the current log of record.
Inactive - Requested - This event is a change that has been requested by someone other than you; it will not become part of your log of record unless you accept or reject the change.
Inactive - Rejected - This event is a change that was requested by someone other than you, that you have rejected; it is not part of your log of record.
Managing Log Events
In compliance with USDOT regulations, the HOS application keeps a record of changes made to your log events, including what information was changed, who made the change (you or your fleet administrator), and when the change was made.
In some cases, edits can be avoided. Before you make any change, be sure of the following:
- You have entered any missing data indicated by the electronic logging device (e.g., recording the locations of status changes for which GPS was not available).
- Your most recent records have been sent from the ELD (electronic logging device) to the Portal.
If you have verified the need to modify the active log events, keep these points in mind:
You are required to enter a Reason For Change for every change to a log event. Briefly explain why it is necessary to edit the information currently recorded (e.g., Forgot to sign out). The reason you enter will be shown as an annotation to the event.
You cannot undo a log event once it is Active. If you have entered the wrong information, you may edit the log event in order to correct the error; however, each successive change will be reflected in the log history.
If the change that you are attempting would cause a conflict or loss of data, you may be prompted to confirm the change.
Your Log Changes
When you make a change to your log, the change become effective immediately. For example, when you delete an event, the event is marked as Inactive - Changed.
Log Changes from Other Users
When a user, like your fleet administrator, makes a change to your log, the change is marked as Inactive - Requested until you accept or reject the proposed change.
[notification type="alert-warning"]For AOBRD users: Requested changes that are submitted to a log within 6 days of the current date will be applied automatically the next time you sign into your device. Any changes submitted to a log that is 7 days or older will not be automatically applied and will require you to log in to the Driver Portal to accept or reject any proposed changes.[/notification]
Adding a Log Event
To add a log event:
View the log for the date for which you wish to add the event.
Click New Status Change, or New Exception.
Enter the details for the event. Review all details carefully before saving.
Click Save to add the event and return to the Driver Logs screen.
Annotating a Log Event
To annotate a log event:
In the Log Events table, locate the row containing the event you wish to annotate.
Click the Annotate icon (plus sign) for the event.
Enter the text of the annotation (up to 60 characters).
Click Submit to save the annotation.
Editing a Log Event
Remember the following when editing an event:
If the event you are editing spans multiple days, you must view the first log for which the event is listed in order to select the event.
You can change the start time of an event but not the start date of an event, unless the driver's time zone has changed.
You cannot specify the end date or time of an event. The HOS application calculates the end date and time automatically.
To edit a log event:
In the Log Events table, click the pencil icon or click the link in the Type/Status column for the Status Change, Remark, or Exception that you wish to edit.
A separate page for the corresponding event is displayed.
Change the details for the event and review carefully.
Click Save to save changes and return to the Driver Logs screen.
Accepting/Rejecting a Proposed Edit
To accept or reject a proposed edit:
Locate the proposed edit (shown in red) in your list of Log Edits.
To accept, click the green thumbs-up icon.
The proposed edit is applied to your log and your remaining hours are recalculated accordingly. The original event displays a status of Inactive - Changed. Use the annotation icon (plus sign) to add annotations to the log event, if needed.
To reject, click the red thumbs-down icon.
The proposed edit is updated and displays Inactive-Rejected on your log. Use the annotation icon (plus sign) to add annotations to the log event, if needed.
Deleting a Log Event
To delete a log event:
In the Log Events table, locate the row containing the event you wish to delete.
Click the Delete icon (trash can) for the event.
Enter the reason for deletion. This reason will be recorded as an annotation to the event.
Click Submit to delete the selected event.
To delete multiple log events:
Check the Allow multi-select checkbox.
In the Log Events table, locate the row(s) containing the event(s) you wish to delete.
Check the checkbox to the left of each row.
Click the Delete icon (trash can).
Enter the reason for deletion. This reason will be recorded as an annotation to each selected event.
Click the Submit button to delete the selected events.
If you delete a status change that falls between two other status changes, the prior status will be extended to fill the time. If the prior status was Automatically-recorded Driving (D) time, an On-duty Not Driving (ON) status will be added to fill the gap.
Certifying Logs
You are the only one who can certify your logs. This action can be performed from your ELD (electronic logging device), or from your Driver Portal using the following process.
To certify a log:
Review the uncertified log and click Certify... when you are ready to certify the accuracy and validity of the log's contents.
If there are proposed changes that you have not accepted or rejected, the Certify... button is not shown, and instead you will be prompted to review and accept or reject all changes.
A window prompt appears requesting that you confirm you would like to certify the log for the displayed date.
To confirm, click Agree or click Not Ready to go back to the Driver log.
If you clicked Agree, you are returned to the Driver Log and the Certify button is now replaced with a Certified label.
To certify multiple logs:
If you have been off duty two or more full days in a row, you may certify the Off Duty logs all at one time.
Review the uncertified log for the last date on which you were Off Duty and click Certify... when you are ready to certify the accuracy and validity of the log's contents.
If there are proposed changes that you have not accepted or rejected, the Certify... button is not shown, and instead you will be prompted to review and accept or reject all changes.
A window prompt appears requesting that you confirm you would like to certify the log for the displayed date range.
To confirm, click Agree or click Not Ready to go back to the Driver log.
If you clicked Agree, you are returned to the Driver Log and the Certify button is now replaced with a Certified label.
If edits are made to a driver log after you have certified it, you must review the changes and certify the log again.
[post_title] => Editing, Approving, and Certifying Logs
[post_excerpt] => From the Driver Portal, you can access and perform various actions with your Driver Logs. Use the following information and instructional steps to perform advanced actions with Driver Logs from the Driver Portal.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-approving-and-certifying-logs
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-07 14:24:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-07 21:24:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 11429
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=11234
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[comment_count] => 0
[current_comment] => -1
[found_posts] => 1
[max_num_pages] => 1
[max_num_comment_pages] => 0
[is_single] =>
[is_preview] =>
[is_page] =>
[is_archive] => 1
[is_date] =>
[is_year] =>
[is_month] =>
[is_day] =>
[is_time] =>
[is_author] =>
[is_category] =>
[is_tag] =>
[is_tax] => 1
[is_search] =>
[is_feed] =>
[is_comment_feed] =>
[is_trackback] =>
[is_home] =>
[is_privacy_policy] =>
[is_404] =>
[is_embed] =>
[is_paged] =>
[is_admin] =>
[is_attachment] =>
[is_singular] =>
[is_robots] =>
[is_favicon] =>
[is_sitemap] =>
[is_posts_page] =>
[is_post_type_archive] => 1
[query_vars_hash:WP_Query:private] => aec1b9bc8a19fe2e09f367dfb29277eb
[query_vars_changed:WP_Query:private] => 1
[thumbnails_cached] =>
[allow_query_attachment_by_filename:protected] =>
[stopwords:WP_Query:private] =>
[compat_fields:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => query_vars_hash
[1] => query_vars_changed
)
[compat_methods:WP_Query:private] => Array
(
[0] => init_query_flags
[1] => parse_tax_query
)
[query_cache_key:WP_Query:private] => wp_query:e72753e2989457a79fe214d2852a3c8f
)
[children] => Array
(
)
[term] => WP_Term Object
(
[term_id] => 518
[name] => HOS Driver Reference
[slug] => hos-driver-reference
[term_group] => 0
[term_taxonomy_id] => 518
[taxonomy] => feature
[description] => The reference materials in this section are designed for HOS Drivers using in-cab tablets running ELD software for electronic logging and hours of service compliance.
[parent] => 0
[count] => 1
[filter] => raw
[term_order] => 29
[cat_ID] => 518
[category_count] => 1
[category_description] => The reference materials in this section are designed for HOS Drivers using in-cab tablets running ELD software for electronic logging and hours of service compliance.
[cat_name] => HOS Driver Reference
[category_nicename] => hos-driver-reference
[category_parent] => 0
)
[post_count] => 1
)
)
)
)
The Admin page is a centralized hub for administrative tasks and allows you to view and manage your account users, vehicle groups, drivers/driver groups, landmark groups, and cameras (if applicable) quickly and easily. To view this page, you must have Full User Admin permissions. From the Admin page, you can access the following tabs: Admin:…
Configurable devices use recommended (default) thresholds to alert drivers when certain driving behaviors are detected. These alerts are based on the selected Vehicle Class and include: Vehicle Class Options Note: Vehicle Class only applies to devices that track movement (e.g., XT-25, XT45, etc.). Any vehicles equipped with devices that do not track movement cannot have…
The Public Map Links feature allows you to create a URL link to view vehicle locations on a map for a specific vehicle group. This enables external visibility of limited vehicle location data, allowing your customers to view real-time positions without requiring a login to the portal. Additionally, you can include a Landmark Group to…
The Landmark Admin tab gives you a centralized view of all your landmarks in one easy-to-use table. From here, you can search, sort, and filter your landmark list, select any landmark to view its details, and create or edit landmarks directly — including their name, address, area, color, and group. You can also export the…
You can create and manage alerts from the Alerts page of the Portal. In addition, you can view alert details (e.g., data source, selected options, active or inactive status, etc.) at a glance, filter displayed alerts, download a .csv file, and search for a previously created alert by title. If you are a Basic, Standard,…
With the Dashboard page, you can view and interact with your customized dashboard(s) created in the Classic Portal without leaving the New Portal. To configure or edit a dashboard, you must return to the Classic Portal by clicking on the Edit icon () at the top right-hand corner of the browser window. Viewing a Dashboard…
The Camera Media page in the Fleet Tracking Portal is designed to provide a centralized and focused repository of camera video clips from Driveri, Drive360, and AIR II cameras. Camera event clips are plotted on the map and you can access metadata about the vehicle’s behavior reported during the media clip’s timeframe. Note: You must have…
The Portal interface is quick, simple, and highly configurable. With just a few clicks, you can run any report or view the map for a single vehicle, a group of vehicles, or your entire fleet. Schedule reports, set up alerts, or administer your vehicle, driver, and user groups easily from our efficient web-based interface. Enterprise…
Welcome to Fleet Tracking! An account has been created for you and it’s time to log in to your Fleet Tracking Portal to check out your new software tool. Welcome Email After an account has been created for you, you will receive an email from Support with the subject line “Welcome! Let’s get started.” This…
The Camera Media page in the Fleet Tracking Portal is designed to provide a centralized and focused repository of camera video clips from Driveri, Drive360, and AIR II cameras. Camera event clips are plotted on the map and you can access metadata about the vehicle’s behavior reported during the media clip’s timeframe. Note: You must have…
The Fleetio integration pushes your DTC, odometer/runtime, secondary meter, and vehicle location data from to Fleetio. This integration automatically captures telematics data, making it easier to keep up with preventive maintenance and respond quickly to vehicle issues from Fleetio. Data sync occurs once a day in the following manner: – Odometer & Engine Hours: Nightly…
Customers with Epicor have an on-premises BisTrack server implementation. With our integration, their server’s address is configured as a destination for location alerts from our Portal. This custom setup needs to be done once before they start pushing alerts to their BisTrack server. How to Set Up EPICOR Integration The integration is complete. As alerts…
and Whip Around have partnered to simplify fleet management by enabling seamless integration between the two platforms. This integration allows Whip Around to pull critical fleet data from , including vehicle location, history, and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) data. To initiate the integration, you will need to generate an App Token from within the Portal.…
All scheduled and completed maintenance service tasks are available in a single view from the Maintenance Page in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal. From this page, you can also: Filter/search/sort table to view sub-sets of upcoming and completed service tasks Categorize tasks into Service Type Create and log new service tasks for one or more…
Messaging allows you to send SMS messages from within the portal to your fleet vehicles. You can send messages to vehicles directly from the Vehicle Card in the Portal. Messages can be sent to any vehicle with a valid phone/SMS number. You can also review received messages from the Vehicle Card. You must have the…
If you are interested in using VersaPay, please follow the instructions within this article to create an account. GPS Insight now offers VersaPay for our customers. VersaPay is an online portal that will allow you to access your account invoices, enter payment information directly without requiring interaction, and pay invoices directly from a link embedded…
The Driver Scorecard Report offers interactive graphs, summary totals, and detailed data providing insight into driver behavior from safety events in the form of a weighted score (A-F grade). Driver feature is available to Enterprise customers and customers with the Driver Management add-on. Please contact your Account Manager to learn more. You may filter your…
We partner with CerebrumX to bring OEM data directly to the Fleet Tracking Portal. At this time, we can collect data from GM, Ford, Stellantis, Toyota, Hino, Tesla, and Volvo. The table below provides information on the specific models and years. 🗒️ Note: This list is not exhaustive and may not include all eligible brands,…
Did you know your GO9+ device can double as a Wi-Fi hotspot? If your fleet is equipped with GO9+ GPS devices, you have the ability to create a local Wi-Fi connection directly from the device — no separate hotspot hardware needed. Here’s everything you need to know to get it set up and start using…
Advanced Admin
The Advanced Admin provides you with end-to-end visibility of location, reporting, and more for your fleet.
Alerts provide real-time notification for driver and vehicle activity. You can set up alerts to be sent to one or more email addresses or SMS numbers, and you can optionally notify the driver with a custom message each time an alert is triggered.
Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles, drivers, and landmarks beyond the basic information. For example, you could assign categories such as “Equipment Type” to vehicles and then assign pre-defined values such as “winch,” “generator,” and “compressor.” Or, you could create an attribute such as “Towing Bed” with free-form values for a range. You can then...
The dashboard interface allows you to arrange, customize, and share several configurations of workspaces. Moveable windows called dashlets provide at-a-glance insight into the fleet management areas that interest you most and allow you to interact with vehicle data.
After you've registered vehicles within the portal, you can you can optionally set up drivers and link them to certain vehicles within your fleet to enhance your reporting and messaging options. It's also a good practice to create driver groups if you plan to limit which users can see data for certain drivers.
Hierarchies are designed for organizations with 100+ vehicles (Enterprise feature). Hierarchies allow you to organize your fleet using multiple branches based on function, organizational structure, geographic region, or other customer-defined methodology.
The GPS portal is capable of sending and receiving integration data using a variety of secure methods, such as Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) and webhooks (event-based push). This data exchange saves considerable time by automating time-consuming, manual tasks.
Customers with Epicor have an on-premises BisTrack server implementation. With our integration, their server’s address is configured as a destination for location alerts from our Portal. This custom setup needs to be done once before they start pushing alerts to their BisTrack server. How to Set Up EPICOR Integration The integration is complete. As alerts…
Use the instructions provided below to update your ServiceTitan integration (if applicable) as Service Titan is shutting down its v1 API. This update must be completed by the end of July 2022. The update to this integration is done in two parts: Setting up the GPS Provider Enabling the API Access If you are an…
Landmarks (also known as geofences) determine virtual boundaries. Within the portal, you can use landmarks to trigger alerts, refine reports, filter maps, and more.
Reports allow you to quantify activity, idling, stop times, speeding, and other aspects of fleet efficiency. All reports include links to export data for further manipulation and sorting.
Routing features allow you to create pre-defined stop routes for your fleet that are optimized for highway, speed, and distance preferences. Routing features are typically most useful for organizations with pre-determined or static routes, such as delivery and service fleets.
The GPS Insight DVIR product offers DVIR capabilities and reporting designed to eliminate DVIR paperwork, provide instant notification of submitted reports/defects, and truly work for your unique fleet supporting custom forms/checklists.
The GPS Insight DVIR product (iOS and Android compatible) offers an FMCSA/NSC compliant (US/Canada) DVIR solution designed to electronically record DVIRs and DVIR-related processes completed by admins/managers, drivers, and mechanics. This product is for fleets that do not fall under HOS requirements but must meet DVIR compliance in US and/or in Canada. Download the iOS…
Do you have questions about DVIR regulations (US and Canada)? If you do, please review the answers to frequently asked questions below. DVIR Regulations – US Check out the following table for FAQS around United States (US) Regulations for Vehicle Inspection and Equipment Inspections. US DVIR FAQs US Equipment Inspection DVIR FAQs DVIR Regulations –…
Safety Cameras
Safety cameras add an additional layer of security for your fleet and drivers.
The AIR II camera captures driving behavior, GPS tracking data, and video footage to help improve safety and visibility. Features vary depending on your Fleet All-in-One (FAIO) plan. When the AIR II camera is triggered, the driver receives an in-cab audio alert, and video footage is recorded automatically. Video Access Event videos can be viewed…
Please use the below instructional guide to connect the Drive360 camera to a Wi-Fi hotspot, locate clips, and then export clips to the native photo library from the Waylens Fleet App (iOS and Android). To download a PDF copy of the instructional guide, please use this link: Using the Waylens Fleet App to Export Clips.
Driveri Hub-X is an accessory to the Driveri safety camera(s), enabling fleets of any size to expand their visibility inside and outside any type of vehicle. Supporting up to four cameras, Driveri Hub-X drastically reduces your fleet’s blind spots and takes the effectiveness of your safety camera program to a whole new level. Typical deployments…
The Reports Central page in the Driveri Portal is a centralized location for reports that can be run ad-hoc and/or subscribed (scheduled on a daily, weekly, or monthly delivery basis unless otherwise indicated in the below table). The following actions can be performed on this page: Search for reports Create report requests Download reports Subscribe…
The Driver•i Coaching Page surfaces the Driver•i Coaching Sessions module, showing driver safety scores, alerts, and coaching information directly within the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal. Review safety events or take coaching action without switching between portals — everything you need is available inside your existing GPS Fleet Tracking workflows. After navigating to the Driver•i Coaching…
The Dashboard is the main landing page of the Driveri Portal and consists of two tabs: Fleet Performance and Fleet Admin. The Fleet Performance page is displayed by default and offers safety-related information about the fleet and drivers. The Fleet Admin page displays operational and/or administrative items. Fleet Performance This page provides you with an…
The Driver Sync toggle automates a sync of driver information from the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal to the Driveri Portal. This automation ensures the creation, update, and deletion of driver profiles match across both platforms, enhancing efficiency and ensuring data consistency. How It Works Automatic Synchronization: Whenever a driver profile is created or updated in…
There are seven available types of standard roles for Driveri users in the portal. The seven roles include: Tenant Safety Manager Tenant Super User Safety Coordinator 1 Safety Coordinator 2 Auditor Operations Coordinator Installer
This Help Center contains Driveri articles designated as essential; however, the Driveri resources available here are not exhaustive. If you require additional instructional/informational resources, please navigate to the Driveri Help Center using the following link: Driveri Help Center Valid credentials are required to access the Driveri Help Center. These credentials are separate from your GPS…
The Driveri Visual Login System (VLS) recognizes drivers by scanning the face of the person driving when the inward camera is enabled, then verifying this information against a database in Driveri Cloud in order to identify the driver. We understand that data and privacy are of the utmost importance. Please refer to the Biometric Data…
The Driveri camera notifies drivers of the below violation types with in-cab notifications. Below is an explanation of each notification. Speeding Violation Following Distance Violation Driver Distraction Sign Violation – No Stop (Beta) Sign Violation – Rolling Stop (Beta) Violation types that are denoted as Beta (depicted with a Beta sign) are available for customers…
If you are new to the Driver•i solution or just need help logging in to the Driver•i Portal, please use the instructions below. Credentials to access the Driver•i Portal are separate from GPS Fleet Tracking Portal credentials. Accessing the Driver•i Portal You can access the Driver•i Portal from the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal Driver•i Coaching…
GPS Insight Mobile
Access your GPS Insight data in the palm of your hands on your mobile or tablet running iOS or Android.
With the GPS Insight Driver App, drivers can assign and unassign themselves to/from a vehicle, record pre- and post-trip Driver Vehicle Inspection Reports, and send and/or receive messages from dispatch from their mobile iOS devices.
As of November 2025, the Magellan Mapping Navigation App and License product has been discontinued. The following apps are available on the tablet for your convenience. This is not an exhaustive list and there may be more apps available for use on the tablet. Available Tablet Apps
The GPSI Connect Tablet has been discontinued. Questions about the GPSI Connect Tablet? Check out the below. GPSI Connect Tablet Frequently Asked Questions
The GPSI Connect Tablet has been discontinued. Connect Tablet app updates begin automatically when the tablet is connected to Wi-Fi. If there are any updates available, they are installed silently in the background. Once updated, you can manually verify the updates by completing the steps below. More Information: ELD Complete Release Notes You can identify…
ELD Complete
The ELD Complete solution provides a detailed and simplified approach to implementing an ELD solution with DVIR, IFTA Reporting, and DOT capabilities.
You are billed for all Tractors (not Trailers) marked “Active” in your ELD Complete account. To help you avoid being charged twice for the same asset, we are providing the following instructions to deactivate duplicate Tractors. As long as duplicate Tractors are deactivated by midnight the day before the last day of the month, you…
The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in the vehicle. We recommend keeping a sticker,…
When reviewing the Driver Records report in ELD Complete, certain columns contain specific codes directly relating to the FMCSA’s Final Rule. To make it easier to decipher these events, please refer to the charts below for what each code value represents. Event Record Status Codes Event Record Origin Codes Event Type Parameter Codes Malfunction/Diagnostic Codes
The ELD Complete portal provides the ability to administer drivers (add, delete, and monitor), review and edit logs, and run reports. The portal and device stay synchronized to provide a nearly real-time view of your fleet. Once you are logged in to ELD Complete, you are brought to the home screen of the portal with…
If you are a customer who requires an HOS/ELD solution and you are interested in our ELD Complete offering, please use the steps below to begin your enrollment. Beginning the Process Let’s get you on your way to receiving the benefits of ELD Complete with the below initial steps. How to sign up for ELD…
Use the following instructions to switch a tablet from a wired (serial) connection to a Bluetooth connection for a Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) option. Note: The tablet or mobile device must have access to the Google Play Store or Apple App Store to download the application. If you have already accessed the stores and…
Connecting the Android BYOD to ELD Complete The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in…
Connecting the iOS BYOD to ELD Complete The ELD Complete solution supports Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) via Bluetooth. Drivers can download the GPS Insight ELD Complete app (Android and iOS compatible) to their mobile device from the Apple App Store or the Google Play Store. The BYOD solution requires a GPSI-5000 device installed in…
ELD Complete is an Hours of Services solution that is fully FMCSA-certified and provides both Hours of Service (HOS) and DVIR capabilities, in addition to data for IFTA reporting. The following guide consists of the below articles and provides a high-level overview of the features provided in the GPS Insight ELD Complete app. Driver Reference…
to quickly locate a specific device.
and Sort Descending icon 
available in each column to adjust the display of your camera devices.
under the Actions column in the row of the applicable vehicle. 
in the row of the applicable vehicle.
from the Actions column.
from the Actions column.
from the Actions column.
The Driver Groups pop-up appears on the right-hand side of the browser window.
).
).
) to automatically check the box for all vehicles.
).
).
to copy the URL to your clipboard or click the Edit icon 
).
The Delete Landmark Group pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to delete the selected landmark group.
) provided in the Actions column.
The new alert will be listed in the Manage Alerts grid, which includes the details of the alert.
The next time any vehicle(s) in the Delivery group trigger this alert according to the odd hours set (using the account's timezone), the specified recipient will receive the following notifications (email and SMS):
) in the right-hand corner.
).
[post_title] => Editing or Deleting an Alert
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => editing-or-deleting-an-alert
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-03 09:32:09
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-03 16:32:09
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21339
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21369
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 3
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21339
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-11-03 14:48:32
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-11-03 21:48:32
[post_content] => You can create and manage alerts from the Alerts page of the Portal. In addition, you can view alert details (e.g., data source, selected options, active or inactive status, etc.) at a glance, filter displayed alerts, download a .csv file, and search for a previously created alert by title.
) at the top right-hand corner of the browser window.
[post_title] => About the Dashboard Page
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-dashboard-page
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-06 11:32:40
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-06 18:32:40
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21345
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 1
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21345
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-11-03 14:58:21
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-11-03 21:58:21
[post_content] => With the Dashboard page, you can view and interact with your customized dashboard(s) created in the Classic Portal without leaving the New Portal.
).
The Passwordless login form appears.
A browser tab opens and a pop-up message asks if you'd like to stay signed in.
The Webhook Manager opens in a new browser tab.
) next to Fleetio.
The third party integration(s) are assigned an ID and appears in the 3rd Party Integrations grid. There will be a separate ID for each integration type (e.g., Fleetio Odometer, Fleetio DTC, etc.). Additional information is provided for Status and Queue Depth. An option to delete the integration(s) is also available.
[post_title] => About the Fleetio Integration
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-fleetio-integration
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-07-16 12:49:48
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-07-16 19:49:48
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27097
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24732
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-04-20 09:27:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-04-20 16:27:50
[post_content] =>
or enter applicable notes in the Notes field (1,000 character max.)
The Complete Service pop-up appears.
On each tab, you can sort table columns using the ascending 
Filter options are available for the following data:
All elements within the tabs of this report can be filtered, minimized/maximized, exported, and refreshed.
The Service Reminders tab can be filtered by the following within the report:
The Service History tab can be filtered by the following within the report:
) in the top right corner of the screen.
The Time Range window will appear.
) in the right corner of the playback bar.
You can adjust the speed at: .5x, Normal, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x and 32x.
) to view location playback.
You may also further filter returned results by:
) and use the drop-down windows to select your filter for the applicable category and click View Results. To clear all selected filters, click Clear Filters or to clear individual filters, click the X for the corresponding filter.
). If you would like to expand the Map List, click on the icon again.
Click on the Vehicle ID to see the selected vehicle's Vehicle Card.
Click on an asset to open the corresponding Asset Card to edit, dispatch, view detiails, and more.
[post_title] => Using Map Lists
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-map-list
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-03-04 09:18:08
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-03-04 16:18:08
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 13640
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16673
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 23142
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-07-02 11:10:57
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-07-02 18:10:57
[post_content] => Use the Map Preferences, Options, and Controls to interact with and view the map the way you prefer.
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%"]
Preference,Description
Cluster Level,Set cluster level from 1-15.~~~~
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="20%|80%"]
Option,Description
Map Style,Select your preferred/required style of map. Options include: Default\, Grayscale\, Satellite\, Terrain.
Overlays,Check the applicable box(es) to select your overlay display selection. Options include: Camera Events (must have Driveri or AIR II/Drive360 cameras)\, EV Charging: Level 1\, Level 2\, DC Fast (must have an electric vehicle registered in the account)\, POI (Points of Interest)\, Traffic\, Trails\, Vehicle Clusters (set cluster level from Map Preferences)\, Weather\, and Jobs (Requires ServiceBridge License).~~~~
, Create Landmark: Create a landmark anywhere on the map.
,Drop Pin: Place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. The Dropped Pin Card appears (right-hand side of screen) and you can then quickly dispatch to/from this location\, find the closest vehicle\, obtain location address\, or create a landmark for repeated use.
,Focus All: Focus the map over all fleet assets as selected in the Vehicle List by an automatic zoom in/zoom out.
,Send Dispatch: Quickly send a dispatch to a landmark\, vehicle\, or address to selected recipient(s).
,Following a Vehicle: After you have clicked on a vehicle from the Map or a List\, the option to follow a vehicle appears in Map Controls. After this option is selected\, it will focus the map over the vehicle until it is unselected.~~~~
[/toggle]
[/toggles]
[post_title] => Using Map Preferences and Controls
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-map-preferences-and-controls
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-10 09:03:07
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-10 16:03:07
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 13640
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=23142
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 18019
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2019-08-30 10:35:32
[post_date_gmt] => 2019-08-30 17:35:32
[post_content] => After you have entered an address into the Search Field, an Address Card is created. From the Address Card, you can copy the address location and/or open the address location in Google Maps in a separate browser, create a landmark, Send a dispatch, view the Street View of the address location, and see a list of nearby assets and landmarks to the entered address location.
).
).
).
).
). To exit Full Screen view, press the Esc button on your keyboard or click the Exit full screen view (
).
[post_title] => Using the Address Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-address-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-05 12:58:28
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-05 19:58:28
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=18019
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26085
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-12-06 12:46:06
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-12-06 19:46:06
[post_content] => 
).
.)
[post_title] => Using the Landmark Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-landmark-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-09-08 10:34:55
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-09-08 17:34:55
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16761
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 21661
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2020-12-11 12:59:55
[post_date_gmt] => 2020-12-11 19:59:55
[post_content] => If you have toggled on Points of Interest (POI) to display on your Map from the Using Map Preferences and Controls and click on a POI, the POI Card displays.
With the POI Card, you can:
).
). Once collapsed, the Expand button appears and can be clicked on to expand the section.
[/whitelabel][whitelabel tier="limited,full"]
[/whitelabel]
Using the Vehicle Card Header and Vehicle Card Status Bar, you can quickly manage and monitor individual vehicles in your fleet.
See Vehicle Card Header for step-by-step instructions on using the features available from the header.
See Vehicle Card Status Bar for step-by-step instructions on using the features available from the status bar.
[post_title] => Using the Vehicle Card
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-vehicle-card
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-01-02 14:53:58
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-01-02 21:53:58
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 21308
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=16313
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[11] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24766
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-05-04 12:58:45
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-05-04 19:58:45
[post_content] => 
) or date arrows to choose a specific date to view trip history.
,Camera Event
,Hard Braking
,Speeding
,General Violation
,Rapid Acceleration
[/et]
Stopped >= 60 min
Trails Enabled
Trails Disabled
The Dispatch window appears.
The Messaging page appears. You can view all messages sent to/received from this vehicle contact from this page. All messages display time and date stamps.
[/whitelabel][whitelabel tier="limited,full"]
[/whitelabel][/column]
[/row]
The Add an Odometer Waypoint pop-up appears.
A success message appears toward the top-right of the screen to confirm the waypoint was added successfully.
).
To manage services due and completed services, please see Vehicle Card – Vehicle Maintenance.
The Messaging page appears. You can view all messages sent to/received from this vehicle contact from this page. All messages display time and date stamps.
[/column]
[/row]
[/column]
[/row]
[/whitelabel]
[post_title] => Running Reports
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-reports
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-04-21 12:23:21
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-04-21 19:23:21
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 22242
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22256
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[2] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 28016
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-09-21 13:27:37
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-09-21 20:27:37
[post_content] => The Driver Scorecard Report offers interactive graphs, summary totals, and detailed data providing insight into driver behavior from safety events in the form of a weighted score (A-F grade).
You may filter your selected report parameters after running the report directly from the report itself in the Portal. This includes selecting the date range, driver, and setting daily drive time in minutes (min and max), daily distance in miles or KM (min and max), and distance display (miles or KM). Furthermore, each section of the report offers additional filters.
This report also offers the ability to export sections of the report individually. Each section can be exported in CSV, Excel, PDF or PNG formats.
[post_title] => Using the Driver Scorecard Report
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-driver-scorecard-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-06-28 22:54:10
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-06-29 05:54:10
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=28016
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 3
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 22242
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-03-26 07:23:24
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-03-26 14:23:24
[post_content] => 
), you can assign different icon shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type, category, etc.
[post_title] => About Vehicles on the Map
[post_excerpt] => Use this article to learn about how vehicles display on the Map.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-vehicles-on-the-map
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-06-14 11:59:58
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-06-14 18:59:58
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25076
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 34117
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2026-05-21 07:44:39
[post_date_gmt] => 2026-05-21 14:44:39
[post_content] =>
[/column]
[column lg="6" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/column]
[/row]
Attributes can also apply to hierarchies in order to manage distribution of information across all of the divisions, branches, and separate business units operating under an umbrella. Hierarchies allow you to easily schedule reports/alerts to automatically run for the appropriate vehicles and be delivered to the appropriate individuals, including automatic escalation of violation alerts.
[post_title] => About Attributes
[post_excerpt] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles, drivers, and landmarks beyond the basic information. For example, you could assign categories such as “Equipment Type” to vehicles and then assign pre-defined values such as “winch,” “generator,” and “compressor.” Or, you could create an attribute such as “Towing Bed” with free-form values for a range. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets, such as only vehicles with a tow bed 25-30 ft, or only drivers who speak Spanish.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-attributes
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:07:15
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:07:15
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=399
[menu_order] => 16
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 941
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:55:58
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 23:55:58
[post_content] => Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your drivers. You can then use attributes as labels on reports and filters on maps and dashlets.
VS
VS
[et th="0" colwidth="25%|" class="table-condensed"]
"1 - Menu Bar","Access maps, reports, other account features, menu options, user preferences, tab settings, and Help."
"2 - Dashboard Control","Modify and save dashboard layouts."
"3 - Dashlets Control","Drag-and-drop dashlets onto the dashboard layout."
"4 - Dashboard","View and interact with individual dashlets."
[/et]
When you first log into the portal, the default dashboard appears ([System] 2 wide L). You can toggle to different dashboards using the Dashboard Control (circled below). For example, the dashboard in the following figure uses a three column layout (equal widths) and six dashlets: Alerts, Vehicle Selector, Map, Quick Links, and Closest. (See Dashlets for more examples.)
).
You can also minimize, configure, add, or remove dashlets using the Move 
, Show/Hide 
, Edit 
, Add 
, Copy 
or Close 
icons.
Drag a vehicle from a dashlet onto an area of the dashboard to automatically add a map dashlet that follows the selected vehicle.
Result:
).
) to choose a different icon for the tab. In Tom's example, we chose "D" for Dispatch.
,Alerts,Shows Speeding\, Out of Range\, and/or Idle alerts for a selected vehicle group. Shows alerts that are actively triggered (no time range).,
,Diagnostic Alerts,Shows diagnostic alerts and DTCs for a selected vehicle group. Click on one of the codes to run the related report to get the DTC description. Diagnostic data is an additional paid feature and varies by vehicle make/model.,
,Recent Alerts,Shows alerts (up to 100) for a selected vehicle group. Filter by active alerts. Time span choices range from 10 minutes to 5 days.,
,Service Reminders,Shows service reminders (up to 200) for a selected vehicle group.,
[/et]
,Closest To,Shows vehicles that are closest to a vehicle\, landmark\, address\, or lat/lon. Proximity choices range from 500 feet to 500 miles. Filter by vehicle group or attribute (multiple). Includes Garmin dispatch option. The Drop Pin feature (
) is most often used with this dashlet. Dropping a pin allows you to place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. You can then quickly dispatch to/from this location\ obtain lat/lon coordinates and physical address\, or create a landmark for repeated use.,
,Directions,Shows driving directions from a vehicle\, landmark\, address\, or lat/lon to another vehicle\, landmark\, address\, or lat/lon. Turn-by-turn directions open within Google Maps.,
,DVIR,Shows recent Driver Vehicle Inspection Reports that have been completed for Hours of Service functionality.,
,Landmark Stops,Shows vehicle visits (up to 500) to a landmark. Filter by vehicle and/or landmark group. History choices range from 1 to 3 days. Click the landmark name to view related report. Visits are only counted for landmarks that existed at the time of the visit. Old visits to newly created landmarks will not show retroactively.,
,HOS Availability,Shows all vehicles and drivers (if assigned) that are configured for Hours of Service. The Reference ID of the driver's profile must match the driver’s HOS ID. Timezone is used to accurately timestamp alerts received by the driver. The dashlet shows current duty status and driving time left. Sort by Now\, Day\, or Week. Clicking the location brings up the location on a related map dashlet (if available). Columns are sortable. Warning times are highlighted in yellow. Critical times are highlighted in red.,
,In-Cab Notifications,Shows vehicles that are configured for in-cab notification. You can manually trigger an in-cab notification from this dashlet to invoke the notification inside a particular vehicle (typically done for testing purposes).,
,Landmarks,Shows vehicles (10 to all) that are currently in a landmark. Filter by vehicle and/or landmark group. Optionally\, include attribute column. Click a landmark name to see it on a related map dashlet.,
,Last Stops,Show the last stops (up to 25) for a selected vehicle. (Click a vehicle from the Vehicle Selector dashlet.),
,Map,Shows a 2D map with current locations of a selected vehicle group. Edit options allow you to filter by vehicle status (running\, stopped\, stopped for a set time period). You can also adjust or hide vehicle/driver labels\, add landmarks to the map (up to 500 by default)\, adjust map height and zoom options\, and more. On the map control\, toggle between Clusters\, Traffic\ Service Reminders\, Points of Interest\, Map View\, Satellite View\, or Street View. Click and drag a vehicle icon to an open space on the dashboard to follow a vehicle.,
Learn more about the Map dashlet.
,Route,Shows estimated driving distance\, time\, and directions for a selected route OR for a list of ad hoc addresses\, landmarks\, or points. Includes a dispatch option for Garmin or driver email address\, which allow drivers to leverage audible turn-by-turn directions (via Garmin device or via mapping apps within a smart device such as iPhone or Android). If no email address is listed for a driver\, type an address from the dashlet. Includes options to optimize (re-order according to the most efficient path). Includes a map option via Google Maps.,
Learn more about the Route dashlet.
,Stop Location,Shows locations of stopped vehicles (up to 10 hours). Filter by vehicle group.,
,Vehicle Selector,Shows status and location for vehicles in your fleet. Filter by vehicle group\, vehicle status (running\, stopped\, stopped for a set time period)\, attribute\, speed\, device\, label\, location\, color\, or update interval. Add columns for Device Type\, Year/Make/Model\, Run Time\, Location\, and Attributes. Use the check boxes to temporarily hide certain vehicles from appearing on related dashlets/graphs\, or use the Filter box to temporarily hide all vehicles that match the closest string (wildcard * allowed). Click and drag a vehicle icon to an open space on the dashboard to follow a vehicle.,
[/et]
,Comparison Graphs,Shows comparisons (horizontal bar chart) against two vehicle groups for Idle Hours\, Miles Driven\, Speeding\, and/or MPG (avg). History choices range from Yesterday to the last 30 days. Show totals or averages per vehicle.,
,Group Graphs,Shows comparisons (horizontal bar chart) against vehicles in a selected vehicle group (up to 500) for Miles Driven\, Idle Hours\, Hours of Operation\, and/or Speed Violations. History choices range from Yesterday to the last 30 days to a specific date range (entered as YYYYMMDD). Click an item in the graph to launch a related report. For Miles Driven and Speed Violations graphs\, you can also click the legend items to launch a related report for the selected range of vehicles.,
,Vehicle Graphs,Shows graphed data (bar chart) for a selected vehicle for MPG\, Miles Driven\, and/or Idle Time. Frequency choices range from Daily to Monthly. History choices range from the last 3 to 7 days.,
[/et]
,Garmin Custom Forms,Show custom form receipts by type and vehicle group (14 day history).,
,SMS/Email Messaging,Send SMS messages\, send Email\, and show SMS/Email Messaging history (up to 30 days\, up to 500 messages) for sent and received messages. Filter by update interval\, queries\, and messages. Optionally display a "new message alert" in your browser as new messages are received.~~~~Messages are grouped by conversation thread. Click a thread to view all messages in the conversation.,
[/et]
,Clock,Shows the current date and time for the selected timezone. Includes options for daylight savings and 12-hour format.,
,News,Shows the latest product updates.,
,Legend,Shows the values assigned to legend colors and shapes as they appear on reports\, maps\, and dashlets. Threshold values are configurable in User Preferences. Click Edit Icon Shapes to open the Manage Vehicle Icons tab to adjust icon shapes.,
,Quick Links,Shows quick links to common functions in the portal.,
,Scheduled Reports,Shows scheduled reports for your account (for the users you can access). Click on a saved/scheduled report and run it in the browser with a selected date.,
,Suggestion Box,Allows you to submit a suggestion/comment about the product.,
,Whiteboard,When you add a whiteboard dashlet to the dashboard\, the whiteboard loaded first is called "default whiteboard." You can create or load other whiteboards from the drop-down on the dashlet(s). Public whiteboards can be loaded by any user in the same account. You can also load private whiteboards created by other users in the same account if you specify the name of the board within the prompt. Authorship colors are shown by default.,
[/et]
More reference materials:
).
or from the Landmark Card: 
.
).
) or center (
) the map around a subset of landmarks.
), and trails will be thicker when PTO is engaged. You can find out more about the Map Legend, including Icon Shapes, from the User Preferences menu.
Stopped >= 60 min
Stopped < 60 min
Idling >= 3 min
).
). For more options based on travel modes and departure times, click to open the directions in Google Maps.
The Map (1) provides the following options. Click to turn on / turn off these features:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|85%"]
Feature, Description
Search~~
,(Located above the Map Toolbar.) Enter a search term for a vehicle\, alert\, report\, landmark\, [glossary slug="Google Places"]place[/glossary]\, address\, or latitude and/or longitude coordinate (separated by a comma).
Drop Pin~~
Landmarks~~
,Display landmarks on the map.~~~~
Clusters~~
,Represent more than one vehicle in a similar location with a clustered circle. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart\, clusters update accordingly. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included\, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. Colors correspond to the map legend.~~~~
~~~~
Use the Plus / Minus options 
to adjust the aggressiveness (sizing of the clusters).~~~~
Traffic~~
,Identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways\, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes\, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.~~~~
Center~~
,Automatically re-size and re-adjust the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles in the view.
Points of Interest~~
,Shows restaurants\, businesses\, parks\, parking\, and other points of interest.
Full Screen~~
,Expand the map full screen.
Map View,Show the street map overlay (default).~~~~
Satellite View,Show the satellite image overlay.~~~~
[/et]
Use your mouse to drag-and-drop the map to move it around. Refer to the following additional options for interacting with the map:
[et class="table-zebra" colwidth="15%|85%"]
Feature,Description
Zoom In~~
,Click to zoom toward the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
Zoom Out~~
,Click to zoom outward from the center of the map. You can also use the mouse wheel.
Street View~~
,Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper-right corner to exit.) You can also invoke Street View from the Vehicle Card.~~~~
[/et]
[post_title] => Using the Map Dashboard
[post_excerpt] => The Map Dashboard is a special type of dashboard that transforms your workspace to a single 2D map with quick access to management of vehicles, landmarks, and messaging.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-map-dashboard
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:48:42
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:48:42
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 202
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=299
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 9
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 202
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-01 18:04:20
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-01 18:04:20
[post_content] => The dashboard interface allows you to arrange, customize, and share several configurations of workspaces. Moveable windows called dashlets provide at-a-glance insight into the fleet management areas that interest you most and allow you to interact with vehicle data.
[post_title] => About Drivers
[post_excerpt] => After you've registered vehicles within the portal, you can you can optionally set up drivers and link them to certain vehicles within your fleet to enhance your reporting and messaging options. It's also a good practice to create driver groups if you plan to limit which users can see data for certain drivers.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-drivers
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 12:48:19
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 19:48:19
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=937
[menu_order] => 3
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 938
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 16:54:52
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 16:54:52
[post_content] => You can create or update drivers by entering information into the web portal one at a time, or you can manage drivers in a batch process by importing data from a spreadsheet.
A list of available drivers appears.
A list of available drivers appears.
[/column]
[/row]
[/column]
[/row]
The Classic Portal displays.
The Driveri Integration page appears.
The VLS Integration is enabled.
)
) in the top-right for Dashboard Options
).
Use the following link to learn how to install your device:
We recommend you check out the following links to increase your knowledge:
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"][video width="1280" height="720" mp4="https://help.gpsinsight.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/01/pro-ent_getting-started_final.mp4"][/video]
We recommend you check out the following links to increase your knowledge:
[/column]
[column lg="4" md="4" sm="4" xs="4" ]
Once one or more hierarchy trees are in place, users with permissions to see the branches can use them on reports, alerts, and more:
[post_title] => About Hierarchies
[post_excerpt] => Hierarchies are designed for organizations with 100+ vehicles (Enterprise feature). Hierarchies allow you to organize your fleet using multiple branches based on function, organizational structure, geographic region, or other customer-defined methodology.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-hierarchies
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 14:06:32
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 21:06:32
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=466
[menu_order] => 15
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 969
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:24:20
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-27 00:24:20
[post_content] => You can create any number of new hierarchy trees with as many branches (or nodes) as needed. Within each hierarchy, you can add members (vehicles, drivers, landmarks, users) to the branches.
Keep in mind, even if a user has access to these admin features, the data the user can see within these interfaces is limited the hierarchy nodes the user has been assigned. You may have already done that all at once (above steps), or you may decide to manage that access for each feature as you get to it (see below).
Gives access to the interfaces within the portal that allow a user to add/edit/remove those vehicles, drivers, and users:
Notes:
next to the site.
[post_title] => Customer Sites
[post_excerpt] => Customer sites provides an API functionality that allows you to embed the HTML for a map with specific vehicle groups and/or landmarks on your own web server for visibility outside of the portal.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-customer-sites
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-07-30 09:27:00
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-07-30 16:27:00
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 545
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1338
[menu_order] => 2
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[3] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24732
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-04-20 09:27:50
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-04-20 16:27:50
[post_content] =>
Refer to Maps to learn more about using landmarks on maps.
Refer to Reports to learn more about using landmarks in reports.
Refer to Alerts to learn more about using landmark-based alerts.[/solution]
[post_title] => About Landmarks
[post_excerpt] => Landmarks (also known as geofences) determine virtual boundaries. Within the portal, you can use landmarks to trigger alerts, refine reports, filter maps, and more.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-landmarks
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 11:16:03
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 18:16:03
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=398
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1557
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-02-24 20:05:33
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-02-24 20:05:33
[post_content] => Geographic Information System (GIS) mapping data, such as ESRI overlays, require assistance from the portal provider's IT Staff. Please contact your account manager or Customer Support for more information.
).
) to the location you want to isolate.
Satellite view or Street view (
).
).
"Less than 20% of service interval remaining",
"Less than 10% of service interval remaining",
"At recommended service",
"Overdue more than 10% of service interval",
[/et]
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]In addition to service reminders, you may also track service history.
"Less than 20% of service interval remaining",
"Less than 10% of service interval remaining",
"At recommended service",
"Overdue more than 10% of service interval",
[/et][/solution]
[post_title] => About Maintenance
[post_excerpt] => The portal allows you to track vehicle maintenance.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-maintenance
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-01-27 10:37:11
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-01-27 17:37:11
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=135
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 950
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:04:23
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:04:23
[post_content] => Create new service reminders by entering them into the web portal or importing a spreadsheet for batch entries. After creating a reminder, you can receive notification whenever scheduled service is approaching or is past due.
The current odometer is 33,900 mi, with a target for the next service at 36,888 mi. With an interval of 3000 miles and a difference between the current mileage of exactly 2998 miles, the remaining is 99.6%. The current date is 11/8/2019 with a target date of 5/7/2020.
The dates are similar, but with an interval of 182 days and a difference of 181 days, the remaining is 99.4%. Because the days are closer (by a hair, 99.4% vs 99.6%), the dates are being shown.
Service Reminders Report (ad hoc),
Service Reminders Report (scheduled),
Service Reminders Dashlet,
[/solution][solution term="pro,enterprise"]
on the Dashboard to set mapping threshold options for Speed, Idle Time, Stop Time, and Out of Range.
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters represent more than one vehicle in a similar location. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. (Colors correspond to the map legend.) As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart, clusters update accordingly.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Traffic[/row_column]
[row_column]The Traffic toggle helps you identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]3[/row_column]
[row_column]Center[/row_column]
[row_column]The Center button automatically re-sizes and re-adjusts the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]4[/row_column]
[row_column]Map View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the street map overlay (below left). Includes an option to add terrain (below right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]5[/row_column]
[row_column]Satellite View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the satellite image overaly (left). Includes an option to turn off labels (right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]6[/row_column]
[row_column]Landmark Options[/row_column]
[row_column]Click the Landmarks button to toggle landmarks on/off. Use the drop-down to filter the landmarks that appear on the map by group.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]7[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Options[/row_column]
[row_column]Modify or turn on/off vehicle labels (default primary is Vehicle, default alternate is Driver). Alternate vehicle labels appear in parentheses if both the primary and alternate label are available. Use the filter box to filter the vehicles on the map by vehicle name using keyword strings. Results filter as you type. Use a wildcard * to search for closest string matches.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]8[/row_column]
[row_column]Attribute Options[/row_column]
[row_column](This option is not available to every account.) Attributes allow you to add custom, descriptive properties to your vehicles beyond the basic vehicle information. You can then use attributes to filter the map (e.g., show only vehicles with a boom height less than 20 ft and a lift capacity between 00-1000lbs).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]9[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle List[/row_column]
[row_column]View the list of vehicles currently on the map (alphabetical order). Clear the check box next to a vehicle to remove it from the map. Click a vehicle from the list or from the map to load the vehicle information box (see 10).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]10[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Information Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Also known as the Vehicle Card. Shows the selected vehicle's information, including vehicle label, movement status, ignition status, odometer, lat/lon, runtime, temperature (if available), stop time, current capture date, messaging options (SMS, Email, and Garmin if available), landmark options, and directions options. Select a vehicle from the Vehicles List Control or by clicking an icon on the map. Advance to tabs within the information box by using the links or by consecutive clicks on the vehicle name/icon.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]11[/row_column]
[row_column]Legend[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows colors that represent vehicle status and shapes. You can customize the threshold values from the dashboard (User Preferences icon).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]12[/row_column]
[row_column]Navigation Controls[/row_column]
[row_column]A) Directional Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons to move the view north, south, east, or west.
B) Street View: Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper, right corner to exit.)
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Center[/row_column]
[row_column]Centers the map around the points in the currently loaded animation.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Map View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the street map overlay (below left). Includes an option to add terrain (below right).
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Map Options[/row_column]
[row_column]Map options allow you to toggle labels on markers, adjust zoom level, label size, icon labels, vehicle sorting, show speed on map, and more. You can also clear/save the settings as your account's default live map options (requires refresh).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Trails[/row_column]
[row_column]Display trails on the map. Options are available for the following intervals: None, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour, All Day, and [glossary slug="Snap to roads"]Snap to Roads[/glossary].[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]3[/row_column]
[row_column]Star[/row_column]
[row_column]Adds the "Starred" filter to the current filters. Star an individual vehicle using the "Star" tab on the Vehicle Card or by hovering over a vehicle name in the Vehicles/Landmarks List.
Star all vehicles in a particular group or groups using the "star" icon in the title bar of the Vehicles/Landmarks List control.
Star only vehicles that are visible in the current map view by typing "isolate" in the Search and Filter box.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]4[/row_column]
[row_column]Drop Pin[/row_column]
[row_column]Dropping a pin allows you to place a pin on a map and move it as needed by dragging-and-dropping it to any location. You can then quickly dispatch to/from this location, route a Garmin to/from this location, obtain lat/lon coordinates and physical address, or create a landmark for repeated use.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]5[/row_column]
[row_column]Landmarks [/row_column]
[row_column]Adds landmarks to the map. Filter by Landmark Group and click to add it to the map (single landmarks are gold; landmark groups are orange).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]6[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters[/row_column]
[row_column]Clusters represent more than one vehicle in a similar location. Clusters provide enhanced clarity when viewing a bird's eye view of a map with a large number of vehicles. The number in a cluster's center indicates the vehicles included, and the ring around the cluster indicates the statuses of the clustered vehicles. (Colors correspond to the map legend.) As you zoom in and vehicles appear farther apart, clusters update accordingly.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]7[/row_column]
[row_column]Traffic[/row_column]
[row_column]The Traffic toggle helps you identify the speed of traffic on the road compared to free-flowing conditions. For highways, green means there is a normal speed of traffic. The more red the road becomes, the slower the speed of traffic on the road. Gray indicates there is no data available.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]8[/row_column]
[row_column]Center[/row_column]
[row_column]The Center button automatically re-sizes and re-adjusts the current zoom level of the map to include all vehicles on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]9[/row_column]
[row_column]Points of Interest[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows restaurants, businesses, parks, parking, and other points of interest.
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]10[/row_column]
[row_column]Map View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the street map overlay (below left). Includes an option to add terrain (below right).
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]11[/row_column]
[row_column]Satellite View[/row_column]
[row_column]Shows the satellite image overaly (left). Includes an option to turn off labels (right).
[/row_column]
[table_row]
[row_column]12[/row_column]
[row_column]Search and Filter[/row_column]
[row_column]Type a search term in the box for to filter a landmark group, landmark name, hierarchy node, vehicle group, icon label (shape), vehicle name, vehicle status, or unmarked location. Filters are also available to choose from in the Vehicle List Control (drop-down): 
[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]13[/row_column]
[row_column]Vehicle Information Box[/row_column]
[row_column]Also known as the "Vehicle Card." View information about the currently selected vehicle. Advance to tabs within the information box by using the links (Vehicle, Location, Street, Custom, Close, Center, Star) or by consecutive clicks on the vehicle name/icon.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]14[/row_column]
[row_column]List Control[/row_column]
[row_column]View the list of vehicles and/or landmarks currently on the map (alphabetical order). Use the Search and Filter box or click the Filter icon to choose filters from a drop-down list. You can combine multiple filters such as vehicle name, group, movement, and other keywords. You must have a group chosen in order to see results (e.g., All Vehicles or All Landmarks). Click a vehicle from the list or from the map to load the Vehicle Card (also known as the vehicle information box).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]15[/row_column]
[row_column]Navigation Controls[/row_column]
[row_column]A) Directional Control Arrows: Click the appropriate arrow buttons to move the view north, south, east, or west.
B) Street View: Drag the yellow pegman to a location on the map for street-level imagery. (Click the X in the upper, right corner to exit.)
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Toolbar Buttons[/row_column]
[row_column]Refer to the Google Earth Help for using toolbar buttons.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Places Panel[/row_column]
[row_column]Locate, save, organize, and revisit places. When you run a 3D map from the portal, a new .kml file is downloaded to your computer and automatically loaded within Google Earth (represented by its own node in your "Temporary Places"). This node structure allows you to toggle on/off different places (.kml or .kmz files), layered within the same Google Earth window. The following example shows two separate places (3D mapping kml exports) for current "Phoenix" and "Mesa" vehicle groups:
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]#[/th_column]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]1[/row_column]
[row_column]Time Slider[/row_column]
[row_column]The time slider allows you to view an entire set of vehicle history at once (like a movie), or you can view data during a small time window. Click Play (
) to toggle time slider animation, manually drag the sliders, or click Step Forward (
) to advance the animation one point at a time. Adjust the number of points shown in the view by moving the begin/end markers. Click Options (
) to adjust auto animation speed and time zone. The figure above shows the path for a selected trip. Within the selected time period, several data points are shown--one of them is movement at 11:14 AM. Refer to the Google Earth Help for using other toolbar buttons.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]2[/row_column]
[row_column]Places Panel[/row_column]
[row_column]Locate, save, organize, and revisit places. When you run a 3D map from the portal, a new .kml file is downloaded to your computer and automatically loaded within Google Earth (represented by its own node in your "Temporary Places"). This node structure allows you to toggle on/off different places (.kml or .kmz files), layered within the same Google Earth window. The following example shows two separate places (3D mapping kml exports) for current "Phoenix" and "Mesa" vehicle groups:
):
[table class="table-zebra" responsive ="false"]
[table_head]
[th_column]Option [/th_column]
[th_column]Description[/th_column]
[/table_head]
[table_body]
[table_row]
[row_column]Custom Title[/row_column]
[row_column]Enter a custom title to appear in the title bar of the dashlet.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Vehicle Group[/row_column]
[row_column]Filter the map to show only vehicles that belong to a certain group or hierarchy tree (if available).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Show Vehicles[/row_column]
[row_column]Filter the map to show only vehicles that are running, are stopped, or have been stopped for a particular time.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Vehicle Label[/row_column]
[row_column]Set the primary vehicle label (default is Vehicle).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Alternate Label[/row_column]
[row_column]Set the secondary vehicle label (default is Driver).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Landmark Group[/row_column]
[row_column]Show landmarks on the map.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Map Options[/row_column]
[row_column]Add/remove the zoom controller, the map type controller, and/or the auto center & zoom controller. Adjust the default zoom target and zoom level when the zoom control is invoked. Adjust the vehicle icon size (1 is largest) and landmark label size (1 is largest).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Dashlet Height[/row_column]
[row_column]Adjust the dashlet height as it appears on the dashboard (Half, Normal, Twice, 3x).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Dashlet Group[/row_column]
[row_column]Dashlet groups allow you to link two or more dashlets (where applicable). When linked, clicking on a vehicle from one dashlet updates the data in another dashlet. See more examples.[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[table_row]
[row_column]Update Interval[/row_column]
[row_column] Choose how frequently the entire map should refresh (not dependent upon individual vehicle update rate).[/row_column]
[/table_row]
[/table_body]
[/table]
[post_title] => Using the Map Dashlet
[post_excerpt] => The Map Dashlet shows a 2D map with current locations of a selected vehicle group.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-map-dashlet
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:46:11
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:46:11
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 293
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=303
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 10
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 293
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-10 16:02:00
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-10 16:02:00
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]Map options are provided at the top-right corner of the map. Click the applicable button to turn map options on or off.
. Messages sent from the portal are indicated by this icon: 
.
[/column]
[/row]
You can also view individual metrics from several places on the dashboard and the traditional reporting interface, such as the Vehicle Selector dashlet, Utilization Rollup dashlet, and the Fleet Hierarchy Rollup report.
) next to the metric you want to create. In the Company XYZ example, we chose Hours Vehicle Idled.
.
Backfilling data might apply if you want to use the metric on a report for a particular date range. If you apply a metric to a report, you may receive a notification to backfill the metric if you select a date range that extends prior to the metric's creation or earliest backfill.
), and add the new metric as a column on the dashlet. Specify whether to display the metric using Sum, Average, Minimum, or Maximum. (We chose Average and set the Display to Weekly.)
Vehicle Selector Dashlet
).
) icon to hide individual columns. Click the Export icon to export data to a CSV file (Hide/show selections apply to exported reports). Click the red arrow to sort in ascending/descending order.
To toggle a violation type on/off from the chart, click the label in the legend:
[post_title] => Using the Driving Violations Summary Report
[post_excerpt] => The Driving Violations Summary Report provides four interactive graphs, a violation count breakdown, and violation totals for each vehicle selected in the report parameters.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-driving-violations-summary-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2022-12-08 07:35:42
[post_modified_gmt] => 2022-12-08 14:35:42
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=5649
[menu_order] => 8
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[6] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1592
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-03-01 19:55:41
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-03-01 19:55:41
[post_content] => Show fuel card purchases for your fleet to help identify fuel card fraud. (Fuel card customers only.) Displays all fuel card transactions in the order they occurred with no grouping of Filter by vehicle/group, date, and attribute (multiple). Optionally include exceptions and nearby vehicles.
).
The closer the spike is to the middle (posted speed limit), the closer all of the vehicles in the report adhere to the posted speed limit. As the line moves farther from the middle, instances of traveling over or under the speed limit typically decrease. Use this graph to see the average number of speeding violations the group commits during the report period. When comparing specific vehicles speeding habits, you can compare the amount of instances recorded for that vehicle to the average of the vehicles listed in the report.
By comparing the vehicle's instances of speeding (the yellow line) to the group's instances of speeding (the red line), the vehicle in the above example has more instances of speeding over the posted limit than the rest of the report group. This is represented by the height of the yellow line outside of the red line (A). Another comparison to make is that this vehicle has fewer extreme instances of speeding than the rest of the group. This is represented by how the red line goes farther to the right of the yellow line, all the way out to 30 MPH over the posted speed limit (B).
In this graph above, Vehicle #12 is ranked 6th for speeding and 9th for lagging in the report details.
This ranking means that this vehicle had the highest average MPH under the posted limit in 24 instances (51% of the top laggard) and the lowest average MPH over the posted limit in 54 instances (65% of the top speeder). An ideal speeder line should stay parallel to the bottom of the graph below a target threshold, such as 20%, as indicated by the red line (not part of the graph). Use this graph to measure improvement in this area over time.
[post_title] => Using the Speed Summary Report
[post_excerpt] => The Speed Summary Report shows speeding trends over time.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-speed-summary-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:52:57
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:52:57
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=510
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 1468
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-02-12 22:20:27
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-02-12 22:20:27
[post_content] => This report shows stop detail and idle time. You can filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration. Optionally include overlapping trips, efficiency, and columns for attribute(s).
Click the Export icon next to a line item to download the vehicle's history in 3D Google maps for a visual comparison. The shortest proposed route appears in red, the fastest proposed route appears in green, and the vehicle's actual route appears in orange. In this example, the vehicle's actual route most closely matched the system's calculated fastest route.
[post_title] => Using the Stop Detail and Idle Time Report
[post_excerpt] => This report shows stop detail and idle time. You can filter by vehicle/group, date, minimum idle time, and minimum stop duration.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => using-the-stop-detail-and-idle-time-report
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-06-05 13:53:34
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-06-05 20:53:34
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 446
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=1468
[menu_order] => 6
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 10
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 446
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-22 18:18:28
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-22 18:18:28
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]Reports allow you to quantify activity, idling, stop times, speeding, and other aspects of fleet efficiency.
Click the Reports menu item to open the Reports tab. All report types that are available to run or schedule are listed on this tab. (If you want to see reports that you've scheduled, click the My Reports tab.)
Please see Available Reports for a list of available reports and corresponding descriptions of each report.
[post_title] => About Routing
[post_excerpt] => Routing features allow you to create pre-defined stop routes for your fleet that are optimized for highway, speed, and distance preferences. Routing features are typically most useful for organizations with pre-determined or static routes, such as delivery and service fleets.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-routing
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2021-04-28 14:41:41
[post_modified_gmt] => 2021-04-28 21:41:41
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=966
[menu_order] => 12
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 967
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:16:07
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:16:07
[post_content] => The portal provides routing and dispatching options from the Routing dashlet on the dashboard. Stops in a route can be made up of addresses (physical or lat/lon) and/or landmarks. You can load an existing route or a group of landmarks. No more than 30 landmarks at a time can be used for the optimization feature.
[/solution]
[post_title] => About Users
[post_excerpt] => Your login is part of your total user profile, which determines your basic contact information and more.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => user-setup
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-10 12:36:09
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-10 19:36:09
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => http://gpsihelp.wpengine.com/?post_type=documentation&p=365
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 367
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 21:07:19
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 21:07:19
[post_content] => [solution term="basic"]
[/column]
[/row]
[/solution]
[solution term="pro,enterprise"]You can create or update users by entering information into the web portal one at a time, or you can manage users in a batch process by importing data from a spreadsheet.
- The user requested a password reset via the Forgot Password link on the login page and is awaiting a confirmation code via email or SMS. (If the reset instructions aren't followed within a week, this status automatically expires.)
- An administrator requested a forced password reset via the Edit User Details window. Reset instructions are automatically sent to the user's email address.
Keep in mind, even if a user has access to these admin features, the data the user can see within these interfaces is limited the groups the user has been assigned.
[post_title] => Giving Admin Access to Users
[post_excerpt] => Your company administrator on your account has access to all data and all features.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => giving-admin-access-to-users
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2019-07-24 10:08:55
[post_modified_gmt] => 2019-07-24 17:08:55
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 365
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14430
[menu_order] => 4
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[4] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 946
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2016-01-26 17:00:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2016-01-26 17:00:09
[post_content] => [solution term="pro,enterprise"]User access is a broad term that refers to data that users can see (i.e., only certain vehicles, drivers, other users, etc.) AND the features that they can use (e.g., reports, alerts, maps, etc.). The data a user can see is determined the user's group and/or hierarchy membership. The features a user can access is determined by User Permissions and Menu Access.
If a user does not have access/permissions to view a driver/driver group, the driver associated with a vehicle/asset is not shown and only the vehicle label is displayed in applicable dashlets.
).
When you click on a vehicle from the list or when you click on a vehicle from the map, the Vehicle Card appears, which shows you the duration of vehicle status, last reported time of ignition status, address and geocode of last reported location, and current odometer reading (GPS odometer). Additional menu items are also available for the selected vehicle.
[/column]
[column lg="9" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
), you can assign different icon shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type.
[/column]
[column lg="5" md="12" sm="12" xs="12" ]
[/solution]
[post_title] => About Vehicles
[post_excerpt] => Get to know the basics about how vehicle data is displayed in the map.
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-vehicles
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-01-09 14:38:45
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-01-09 21:38:45
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=14553
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 362
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2015-12-15 20:47:44
[post_date_gmt] => 2015-12-15 20:47:44
[post_content] => [solution term="basic,standard"]
Adding a vehicle allows you to register a new vehicle in your account.
OR
If you are making a change to the VIN or Vehicle Label, you can click on the vehicle label or VIN you would like to change from the Vehicle List then enter your change and click ok (You are not required to complete the following steps if you are changing the VIN or Vehicle Label this way).
) appears in the Vehicle List window (next to the newly edited vehicle label) indicating that the tablet must be reprovisioned.
Edit Vehicle Details Warning:
) appears in the Edit Vehicle Details window (next to ELD) once you have clicked Submit Changes and saved the edited vehicle label.
Additionally, if your organization uses fuel card integration, the vehicle's capacity helps identify potential slippage on related fuel card reports. In the example below, FLATBED-31 has a fuel capacity set, so it's easy to tell when a fuel card was used to pump MORE than the vehicle's capacity. The other vehicle in the report does not have a fuel capacity set, so the report is unable to indicate whether or not the 23.309 gallons pumped was for a 21-gallon tank or a 26-gallon tank--the difference of which can easily shift from normal to suspicious activity.
. The next time a linked fuel card is used, the data will be available in applicable reports.
).
).
) to expire the status.
More reference materials:
icon). In order to remove a stop request, contact Support.
).
. Instead of using a circle, you can assign different shapes to different vehicles to get an immediate visual indicator for the vehicle type.
[post_title] => About GPS Insight DVIR
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-gps-insight-dvir
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-09-05 06:15:15
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-09-05 13:15:15
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=27389
[menu_order] => 1
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 27518
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-09-05 06:21:05
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-09-05 13:21:05
[post_content] => Do you have questions about DVIR regulations (US and Canada)? If you do, please review the answers to frequently asked questions below.
Submitted inspections for the selected date/date range are shown.
The Repair page appears.
A Confirmation pop-up appears asking you to confirm all the information is correct and complete.
The Vehicle Inspection page appears showing the completed repair status(es) and corresponding repair form.
) to edit the form template. The Edit Inspection Form appears, make your edits and then click Save & Close.
) to make a copy of the inspection form template. The Vehicle Inspection Duplicate pop-up appears prompting you to enter a name for the copy. Click OK when you are ready.
) to delete the inspection form template.
) to change the inspection number prefix associated with the template. The Inspection Number Prefix pop-up appears prompting you to enter a prefix, then click Save.
) to make the form available. The Confirmation pop-up appears prompting you to confirm that you would like to make the form revision available, click OK.
) if available in the Actions column.
) to upload a document. You are prompted to choose a file and enter notes (if applicable), then click Save.
) to download the inspection as an Excel file.
) to download the inspection as a PDF file.
) to email the inspection. In the Send Vehicle Inspection Form pop-up, you are prompted to enter email addresses via comma-separated list then click Send.
[post_title] => About Driveri Hub-X
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-driveri-hub-x
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2024-02-14 08:25:06
[post_modified_gmt] => 2024-02-14 15:25:06
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=30444
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 25851
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-11-14 13:02:57
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-11-14 20:02:57
[post_content] => Live Streaming is an add-on feature available at an additional cost with Driveri. This feature allows a user with the appropriate permissions to request Live Streaming sessions (available in 1-minute increments) to a vehicle's inward-facing or outward-facing camera (depending on selection). When enabled, this feature is accessible via the Live Tracking page of the Driveri Portal.
) in the left-hand navigation to open the Live Tracking page.
You can select to view this data for a day, week, or month timeframe. Displayed data includes the following:
[post_title] => About the Driveri Dashboard
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => about-the-driveri-dashboard
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-16 08:09:18
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-16 15:09:18
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=24363
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[5] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 24348
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2022-02-17 16:48:59
[post_date_gmt] => 2022-02-17 23:48:59
[post_content] => The process to identify issues with your Driveri safety camera hardware and initiate returning the item for a replacement is automated for your convenience. If an issue is detected requiring the hardware to be replaced, a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) request is sent via Portal notification and email. The user can select one or more affected devices and submit an RMA form to respond to the RMA request and complete the process of return and replacement.
Please use the below instructions on submitting a request for a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA).
[post_title] => Driver•i – FAQ
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => driveri-faq
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2026-08-07 10:16:33
[post_modified_gmt] => 2026-08-07 17:16:33
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 26907
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=21765
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[9] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 30818
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-05-23 08:31:44
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-05-23 15:31:44
[post_content] => The Driver Sync toggle automates a sync of driver information from the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal to the Driveri Portal. This automation ensures the creation, update, and deletion of driver profiles match across both platforms, enhancing efficiency and ensuring data consistency.
The Driveri Integration page opens in a separate tab.
The automated Driveri Sync option is now enabled. Any changes made to drivers in the GPS Fleet Tracking Portal will automatically sync to the Driveri Portal without requiring any manual intervention. 
[/column]
[column lg="3" md="3" sm="3" xs="3" ]
iOS
[/column]
[/row]
The Driver•i Coaching Page shows the Netradyne login page. You'll need to log in with your Driver•i username and password. After that, you won't be prompted to log in again on future visits—since this is managed via a browser cookie, clearing your cookies will prompt you to log in with your Driver•i credentials again the next time you visit.
The text field to enter your password appears.
The Driveri Portal Login page opens in a separate browser tab.
[/column]
[/row]
An authorization code is sent to the phone number entered via SMS message from 477-477(GPS-GPS).
A pop-up appears displaying your profile and listing the vehicle to which you are currently assigned, if any.
[/column]
[/row]
You are now unassigned from the vehicle.
Your message thread (between you and Dispatch) appears.
Your message thread (between you and Dispatch) appears and new messages from Dispatch are displayed.
) next to the name of the driver you would like to message.
) next to the driver to whom you would like to send a dispatch.
).
1) Map Preferences & Controls - Set mapping preferences such as map type, overlays, etc.,
2) Search bar - Search for vehicles, assets, landmarks, or drivers on the map.
3) Map - View vehicle/asset/landmark/driver details on the map.
4) Messaging - Call or message a driver/vehicle.
5) Profile - Force a data refresh, provide feedback, or log out of the app from this screen.
6) Filter - Set filters for vehicles and assets (hierarchy, group, status), landmarks (group), drivers (hierarchy, group).
If you selected text/call from mobile, a verification code is sent to your phone number. If you selected authenticator app, a verification code is supplied from your authenticator app.
A page appears confirming your password was successfully reset.
The Filters page opens.
Additionally, you can hide vehicles and assets that are unavailable, out-of-range, or select to show only vehicles and assets within a landmark by tapping the applicable checkbox(es) and then tap Apply. To clear these filter options, tap the applicable checkbox(es) again and then tap Apply.
The Hierarchy or Group Filter page appears.
The Hierarchy and Group Filter page appears.
The Map options page appears.
The icon turns blue to indicate the selected item will be shown on the map. The icon turns gray to indicate it will not appear on the map.
The Map List section should now appear full screen.
The selected list appears.
You can select a vehicle to work with by using the steps included under Viewing a Map List (from the Vehicle List), you can tap on a vehicle displayed on the map, or you can use the Search field available in the Map List section by typing in the vehicle/asset label.
).
The Contact pop-up appears with the option to call or message the vehicle.
The map centers over the vehicle selected.
Available options are shown.
The map centers and zooms in over the isolated vehicle/asset. A green pop-up message displays temporarily confirming the isolate feature is active on the applicable vehicle/asset and if you wish to stop isolating the vehicle/asset, tap Undo.
The green pop-up disappears. If you would like to turn the Isolate feature toggle off, tap the left arrow on the left-hand side of the screen.
A pop-up appears asking you to confirm you would like to leave isolation view.
Trip History is shown for the current day.
) to view a full list of nearby assets/landmarks and adjust the radius applied and/or only show applicable filtered assets/landmarks. You can tap the vehicle labels or landmark names to show corresponding Vehicle Cards/Landmark Cards.
The Assign to Vehicle page appears.
The screen navigates to the Driver Card and a green message appears confirming the driver was successfully assigned.
The map centers over the vehicle assigned to the selected driver.
,Ditat Mobile Dispatch,Subscription-only application (additional cost applies) for the trucking industry allowing dispatchers to send trip information to drivers and receive updates on trip status (loaded\, completed\, etc.)
,eFleetSuite,Commercial-grade compliance application used to identify and manage hours-of-service and maintenance violations associated with FMCSA's ELD regulations.
,ELD Complete,ELD Complete hours of service application is a powerful but easy-to-use tablet-based service certified with FMCSA regulations for electronic logs and vehicle inspections.
,ELD Complete Driver Guide,The ELD Complete guide acts as a companion guide to the ELD Complete application\, allowing users quick and easy process and question guidance.
,Magellan SmartFleet,Fleet navigation application that provides navigation specifically created for vehicle fleets with truck-protocols in mind\, ensuring your team navigates the road ahead safely.
,Messaging,Messaging app allows users to communicate with in-office managers\, also supporting multi-point dispatch and routing (Magellan software required).
,Updater,Application update manager helps manage the process for updating apps on the GPSI Android MDT.
[/et]
[post_title] => Available Tablet Apps
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => available-tablet-apps
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2025-11-12 06:32:39
[post_modified_gmt] => 2025-11-12 13:32:39
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 0
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=22326
[menu_order] => 0
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[1] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 22674
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2021-06-10 08:47:09
[post_date_gmt] => 2021-06-10 15:47:09
[post_content] => 
The most current app version of the ELD Complete App is 4.06.007
) under Actions.
).
).
).
The list of drivers associated to the selected carrier is displayed.
).
To make it easier to decipher these events, please refer to the charts below for what each code value represents.
Once you have selected an Multi Operating Authority by clicking Multi Operating Authority and selecting the applicable carrier, available actions include:
)
)
)
)
).
).
You can easily search or filter the users listed on this tab by using the search field and/or the Carrier and/or MOA drop-down filters.
MOAs are listed by name and number of carriers. Use the search field to easily locate an MOA from the list.
[post_title] => Running Reports
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => running-reports
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-07-26 08:12:27
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-07-26 15:12:27
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24510
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=26507
[menu_order] => 13
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
[10] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 26504
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2023-01-24 09:37:40
[post_date_gmt] => 2023-01-24 16:37:40
[post_content] => The Driver Duty report tab allows you to run a report that lists how long a driver was in each duty status within a specific date range.
) next to the driver duty status at the bottom of the driver's log.
The Edit Log window will appear.
The Export Print-Display Logs window will open.
The Export ELD Data File window will open.
You are ready to drive.
The screen navigates to the Diagnostic page. All values from this page will be shown in red, which confirms the Bluetooth connection has been disabled.
You can now log out and leave the Bluetooth connection available to the vehicle for the next driver.
The DVIR is submitted.
The following guide consists of the below articles and provides a high-level overview of the features provided in the GPS Insight ELD Complete app.
Once you select a tractor or trailer from the downloaded list, the ELD will display the VIN number, license plate, and registration state on the list.
The Diagnostic Screen appears.
The Home Screen appears.
The Menu List expands.
The Logbook opens to the log from the current date.
Your status is changed.
This information is valuable as you can use it to plan your weekly cycle and be aware of how much time you will get back each day, after the 7th or 14th day (according to the currently selected ruleset).
A list of violations (if applicable) is shown.
The Co-driver login screen appears.
If applicable, Unidentified Logs are displayed.
The DOT Inspection screen appears.
If PDF view is selected, the PDF displays directly on the tablet.
The file is sent.
A warning pop-up appears to confirm you would like to change your status to Personal Use.
Your status is changed to Personal Use.
The Log event for Personal Use will show up as a blue dashed line in the off duty portion of the graph.
A warning pop-up appears to confirm you would like to change your status to Yard Move.
Your status is changed to Yard Moves.
The distance traveled while in PU and/or YM status is included in the daily odometer shown in the Logbook and the Print/Display option of the Portal.
[post_title] => Personal Use and Yard Moves
[post_excerpt] =>
[post_status] => publish
[comment_status] => closed
[ping_status] => closed
[post_password] =>
[post_name] => personal-use-and-yard-moves
[to_ping] =>
[pinged] =>
[post_modified] => 2023-11-02 09:27:12
[post_modified_gmt] => 2023-11-02 16:27:12
[post_content_filtered] =>
[post_parent] => 24409
[guid] => https://help.gpsinsight.com/?post_type=documentation&p=25928
[menu_order] => 5
[post_type] => documentation
[post_mime_type] =>
[comment_count] => 0
[filter] => raw
)
)
[post_count] => 9
[current_post] => -1
[before_loop] => 1
[in_the_loop] =>
[post] => WP_Post Object
(
[ID] => 31514
[post_author] => 12
[post_date] => 2024-09-23 08:28:13
[post_date_gmt] => 2024-09-23 15:28:13
[post_content] => 
Stopped < 60 min
Idling >= 3 min
Moving
) to view an automated animation of the historical playback, or advance or replay one stop at a time.
